JP2021115342A - Reel type game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can achieve a highly entertaining game.SOLUTION: A game progress display that displays the progress of a game, a continuous performance that is executed over a plurality of games, and a continuous image that is displayed during the execution of the continuous performance and suggests that the continuous performance can be executed in the next game as well can be displayed on a performance display unit. When the game progress display and the continuous image are displayed on the performance display unit at the same timing, the game progress display is displayed with priority over the continuous image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 405

Description

Regarding the revolving pachinko machine.

In the rotating body type game machine (slot machine), one game is started when the game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of rotating the rotating cylinders (reel) in a plurality of rows and stopping the rotating cylinders by making full use of the rotating cylinder stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotating operation, a predetermined symbol is displayed on the effective line. When combinations of ) Is generally the type that shifts to). Here, in the rotating body type gaming machine, when an image or the like for directing to enhance the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotation operation and the stop operation of the reel. When operating the reel stop device, etc., it is configured to predict and enjoy the result of the game while comparing the design displayed on the reel with the image for production displayed on the display. There are many things that are done. In addition, many of them are configured so that if some abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, an error may occur in which the progress of the gaming is stopped.

JP 2016-02997

It is desired to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
With the start switch
A production display unit that can display the production,
With
In the production display section
Game progress display that displays the progress of the game, and
Continuous production, which is a production that is executed over multiple games,
It is possible to display an image that is displayed during the execution of the continuous effect and a continuous image that suggests that the continuous effect can be executed in the next game.
When the game progress display and the continuous image are displayed at the same timing on the effect display unit, the game progress display is displayed with priority over the continuous image.

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment in a state where the door is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal insertion slot in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list of symbol combinations 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus appearance rate in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting changing device control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of an execution process for adding the number of games on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram relating to the rotation operation of the reel in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a power supply cutoff process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of a push order display in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a sub-main loop process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the processing when the power is cut off on the sub-side on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of an effect-related determination process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution enablement / non-execution determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the effect determination process during AT on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the revival possibility / non-recovery effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of special precursor processing at the time of starting lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of an addition specialization process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of BB internal processing, which is advantageous when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first cylinder stop reception processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop effect-related determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of receiving the third cylinder stop on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an action diagram in a winning game of a replay game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 61 is an action diagram in a winning game of a replay game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an action diagram in the winning game of the re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 63 is an action diagram in the winning game of the re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a side sectional view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the arrangement of the medal auxiliary tank HS and the fullness detection electrode DE. It is the schematic which shows the size and position of a fullness detection electrode and a screw BS. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of a freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a stop freeze execution determination process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an image diagram of an AT start effect execution in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 79 is an example of a payout configuration applicable to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 80 is an example 1 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 82 is an example 3 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 83 is an example 4 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 84 is an example 1 of an action at the time of operating the settlement button, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 85 is an example 2 of the action at the time of operating the settlement button, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 86 is an example 3 of an action at the time of operating the settlement button, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 87 is an example 4 of an action at the time of operating the settlement button, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing the first aspect of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power, and FIG. 88 (b) shows the second timing of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. It is a timing chart which shows the aspect of. FIG. 89A is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch in the first aspect, the power supply state, and the situation, and FIG. 89B is a state of the setting key switch in the second aspect. It is a table showing the relationship between the power supply state and the situation. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process of adding credits, a process of paying out game medals, and a process of outputting a game medium granting sound. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation in the case where there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 95 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation in the case where there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 96 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 97 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the start timing of the third push order navigation when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 100 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is no weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is a weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the voice when there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the voice when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation at the time of winning the push order bell combination in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 105 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation at the time of winning the push order bell combination in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 106 is an image diagram of the end timing of the third push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 107 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation at the time of winning the push order re-game combination in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 108 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation at the time of winning the push order re-game combination in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 109 is an image diagram of a change in the display mode of the reel stop control and the push order navigation in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode of the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a game progress control process on the main control board side, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of medal insertion error processing on the main control board side, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between the detection of the game medals of the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor on the main control board side and the credit addition processing, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. be. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of error detection by a shoot sensor on the main control board side, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode of the first throwing sensor, the second throwing sensor, and the shoot sensor, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal return member applicable to the spinning machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal return member applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of a game medal flowing down a medal return member, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a locus diagram of a game medal paid out to a medal receiving entrance, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode between the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is an image diagram of a disk rotation mode from the start of driving the hopper motor to the stop of driving the hopper motor, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 shows a main control board applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board becomes impossible during the settlement process. It is the first pattern diagram which showed the audio output processing of the sub-control board side based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 123 shows a main control board applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board becomes impossible during the settlement process. It is a second pattern figure which showed the audio output processing of the sub-control board side based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 124 shows a main control board applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during the weight period. It is a pattern diagram which showed the audio output processing of the sub-control board side based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 125 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is the first pattern diagram which showed the audio output processing of the sub control board side based on the control command transmitted from the main control board side of. FIG. 126 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a second pattern diagram which showed the audio output processing of the sub control board side based on the control command transmitted from the main control board side of. FIG. 127 is a table relating to the numbering numbers applicable to this example. FIG. 128 is a front view of a main board case applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 129 is a front view of the main control board housed in the main board case applicable to the spinning machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 130 is a perspective view and a side view of a main board case applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 131 is a structural pattern diagram of a gate portion of a main board case applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an image diagram of the inside of the medal selector at the time of inserting a game medal, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 133 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is an example of an operation diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is an image diagram of the inside of the shoot main body at the time of inserting a game medal, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 136 is an example of an operation diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 137 is an example of an operation diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 138 is an example of an operation diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 139 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the game medal payout number counting processing applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an operation diagram relating to the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power interruption) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a flowchart of a payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an image diagram relating to the prize ball payout command and the payout-related information on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a flowchart of a payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 152 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 153 is a flowchart of a ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 154 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a flowchart of the main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a flowchart of the first (second) winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a flowchart of the out-port / in-ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a flowchart of a prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart of an electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 170 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a flowchart of a firing control signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 174 is an example of an external terminal transmission content determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 175 is a flowchart of the payout control board side main process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 177 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 178 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 179 is a flowchart of an error control process when a ball path abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 180 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 181 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 182 is a flowchart of prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception processing (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 184 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 185 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 186 is a flowchart of a motor error processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 187 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the instruction image display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 190 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 191 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 192 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 193 is a flowchart of a special gaming effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 194 is an example of a right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 195 is a front view and a perspective view of the structure of the grand prize opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 196 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 197 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 198 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 199 is a flowchart of a distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 200 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 201 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 202 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 203 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 204 is a flowchart of a limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 205 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 206 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 207 is a flowchart of the end demonstration time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 208 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 209 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 210 is a flowchart of a distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating an opening pattern of a large winning opening on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 212 is a flowchart of the start demonstration time control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 213 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 214 is a flowchart of a start demonstration effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 215 is an operation diagram in the power-off processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment and the counting processing of the total discharge game balls in the total discharge confirmation sensor of the game balls. FIG. 216 is an operation diagram in the power-off processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment and the counting processing of the total discharge game balls in the total discharge confirmation sensor of the game balls. FIG. 217 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between the stop button operation and the reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process is completed after the stop button sensor off, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the twelfth embodiment. be. FIG. 218 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between the stop button operation and the reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process is completed before the stop button sensor off, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the twelfth embodiment. Is. FIG. 219 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between the stop button operation and the reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process is completed before the stop button sensor off, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the twelfth embodiment. Is. FIG. 220 is a display example of a performance display device applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 221 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 222 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 223 is a flowchart of the ratio calculation process in the second ROM / RAM area applicable to the spinning machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the ratio display process in the second ROM / RAM area applicable to the spinning machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) (variant 1) on the main control board side, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 226 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (variation 2) on the main control board side, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 227 is a test display example of a performance display device applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 228 is a test display example of a performance display device applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 229 is a configuration related to stop / automatic settlement in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment. FIG. 230 is an image diagram of each mode transition in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment. FIG. 231 is an in-mode item selection image diagram of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment. FIG. 232 is an image diagram when there is a notification in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment. FIG. 233 is a display image diagram of a stop suggestion image applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 234 is a display image diagram of a stop suggestion image applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 235 is a display image diagram of a stop suggestion image applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 236 is a display image diagram of a stop suggestion image applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 237 is a configuration relating to a setting / reset button applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 238 is a perspective view of the locking device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 239 is a front view of the locking device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment as viewed from the back surface side of the front door. FIG. 240 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the attachment of the lock portion in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 241 is a rear view of the back box of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 242 is for explaining the arrangement relationship of the locking device, the auxiliary tank, the medal payout device, and the power supply unit when the inside of the housing is viewed from the back side, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a rear view. FIG. 243 is a perspective view for explaining a state in which the locking device is operated from the first opening of the back surface of the back box of the rotating machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 244 is a side surface for explaining the height relationship of the reel unit, the auxiliary tank, the medal payout device, and the power supply unit when the inside of the housing of the spinning machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is viewed from the side surface side. It is a figure. FIG. 245 is a perspective view schematically showing a housing in a state where the front door of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is in an open state. FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB under the condition that the front door DU of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is closed. FIG. 247 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB under the condition that the front door DU of the spinning machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is slightly open. FIG. 248 is a side view schematically shown for explaining the open / closed state of the front door and the flow path of medals associated therewith according to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 249 is an image diagram for explaining a state in which the stop operation related to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is invalidated. FIG. 250 is a diagram showing a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 251 is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 252 is a transition diagram of the game in the sub-game state of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing performed by the main control board M according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 254 is a flowchart of all stop processing for each main game state according to the subroutine of step S5006 in FIG. 253. FIG. 255 is a flowchart of the advantageous section transition total stop processing according to the subroutine of step S5104 in FIG. 254. FIG. 256 is a flowchart of the initial set processing according to the subroutine of step S5205 in FIG. 255. FIG. 257 is a flowchart of the pullback process according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 258 is a flowchart of the base counter update process according to the subroutine of step S5113 in FIG. 254. FIG. 259 is a flowchart of the base counter update process according to the subroutine of step S5113 in FIG. 254. FIG. 260 is a flowchart of the base counter update process according to the subroutine of step S5113 in FIG. 254. FIG. 261 is a diagram for explaining a ball ejection state according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 262 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 263 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 264 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 265 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining the point-specific 1-state-related specification according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 267 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the point-specific 1-state preparation process by the sub-control board S according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing processing by the sub-control board (point specialization-related lever processing) when the lever is pressed in the point specialization 1 state according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing processing by the sub-control board at the final stop in the point specialization 1 state (point specialization-related all stop processing). FIG. 271 is a diagram for explaining a specification regarding a point in a sub-normal state according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing a process related to point acquisition when the lever is pressed according to the subroutine of step S6108 of FIG. 269. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing a process related to point acquisition at the time of total stop according to the subroutine of step S6131 of FIG. 270. FIG. 274 is a diagram for explaining the point acquisition specialized specification according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the point-specific 2 state-related processing according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 276 is a flowchart of the point-specific two-state processing (at the time of lever) according to the subroutine of step S6305 of FIG. 275. FIG. 277 is a flowchart of the point-specific 2 state processing (when all are stopped) according to the subroutine of step S6305 of FIG. 275. FIG. 278 is a diagram for explaining the process of transition from the sub-normal state to the point-specific 2 state according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing a specialization precursor set process according to the subroutine of step S6307 of FIG. 275. FIG. 280 is a diagram for explaining specifications relating to the icon according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing an icon acquisition process by the sub-control board S according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the additional parameter set processing by the sub-control board S according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing an additional parameter determination process according to the subroutine of step S6706 in FIG. 282. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the additional parameter clearing process by the sub-control board S according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing an additional notification processing for notifying the player of the icon acquired by the sub-control board according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing an icon management process related to a subroutine such as step S6713 in FIG. 285. FIG. 287 is a timing chart showing various gaming states according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 288 is an image diagram for explaining the cumulative state of points according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 289 is a timing chart for explaining various situations of the main gaming state with respect to the sub-gaming state according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 290 is a timing chart for explaining various situations of the main gaming state with respect to the sub-gaming state according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 291 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 292 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 293 is an image diagram for explaining the difference between the normal screen and the demo screen performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 294 is an image diagram for explaining the difference between the normal screen and the demo screen performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 295 is an image diagram for explaining the difference between the normal screen and the demo screen performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 296 is an image diagram for explaining the difference between the normal screen and the demo screen performed by the effect display device according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a list of each state of various bonuses according to the modified example of the 16th embodiment and the presence / absence of counting of various counters. FIG. 298 is a diagram for explaining a ball ejection state according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 299 is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification of the 16th embodiment. FIG. 300 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first modification of the 16th embodiment. FIG. 301 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first modification of the 16th embodiment. FIG. 302 is a diagram showing a main gaming state controlled by a main control board in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment. FIG. 303 is a list of reel arrangements in the spinning machine according to the 17th embodiment. FIG. 304 is a diagram showing an excerpt of a part of the condition device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment. FIG. 305 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment. FIG. 306 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment. FIG. 307 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment. FIG. 308 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 309 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 310 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 311 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 312 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 313 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 314 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 315 is a list of bonus specifications in the spinning machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 316 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 317 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 318 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 319 is a list of ball ejection rates in the spinning machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 320 is a list of ball ejection rates in the spinning machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 321 is a list of ball ejection rates in the spinning machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 322 is a list of ball ejection rates in the spinning machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 323 is a list of ball ejection rates in the spinning machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 324 is a list of ball ejection rates in the spinning machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the dispersion of the ball ejection rate in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 326 is a diagram showing the dispersion of the ball ejection rate in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 327 is a diagram showing the dispersion of the ball ejection rate in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing the dispersion of the ball ejection rate in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 329 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 330 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 331 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 332 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 333 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 334 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 335 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 336 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 337 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 338 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 339 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 340 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 341 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 342 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 343 is a list of bonus specifications in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 344 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 345 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 346 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 347 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 348 is a diagram for explaining the push-push slash combination 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 349 is an image diagram illustrating an instruction mode of the push order display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 350 is an image diagram for explaining an effect mode of the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 351 is a diagram for explaining a list of reel arrangements and a push-push slash combination 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification of the 19th embodiment. FIG. 352 is an image diagram for explaining an effect mode of the effect display device S40 in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first modification of the 19th embodiment. FIG. 353 is a diagram for explaining the push-push slash combination 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification of the 19th embodiment. FIG. 354 is a diagram for explaining a push slash role as a rare role in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the second modification of the 19th embodiment. FIG. 355 is an image diagram illustrating an effect mode of the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third modification of the 19th embodiment. FIG. 356 is a diagram showing the number of positions for each set value of the slash combination in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third modification of the 19th embodiment. FIG. 357 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 358 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 359 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 360 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 361 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 362 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 363 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 364 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 365 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 366 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 367 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 368 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 369 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 370 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 371 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 372 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 373 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 374 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 375 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 376 is a list of bonus specifications in the spinning machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 377 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 378 is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 379 is a diagram illustrating a navigation mode of the push order display device and the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 380 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 381 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 382 is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 21st embodiment. FIG. 383 is an image diagram showing a mode at the time of addition in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 21st embodiment. FIG. 384 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 385 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 386 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first modification of the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 387 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the second modification of the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 388 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the third modification of the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 389 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the modified example 4 of the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 390 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fifth modification of the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 391 is an image diagram showing a light emitting mode of a button image and a light emitting mode of a sub-input button SB in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 392 is an image showing a display mode of a button image and a light emission mode of a sub-input button SB in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 393 is an image diagram showing the visibility of the image displayed on the effect display device S40 when the button operation promotion effect is performed in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 394 is an image diagram showing the effect display device S40 when the game progress status is displayed and the button operation promotion effect is performed in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 395 (A) is an image diagram showing an image erasing time when the sub-input button SB is operated in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 395 (B) is an image diagram showing the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 395 (C) is an image diagram showing an image erasing time when the start lever D50 is operated in the spinning machine according to the embodiment, and FIG. 395 (C) is a push in the spinning machine according to the 23rd embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the erasing time of a forward navigation. FIG. 396 (A) is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB is operated during one game in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 396 (B) is an image diagram showing the case where the sub-input button SB is operated, and FIG. 396 (B) is the 23rd embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the case where the sub-input button SB is operated when 1 game is not in the game of the rotating body type gaming machine. FIG. 397 (A) is an image diagram showing a case where the bet button D220 is operated during one game in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 396 (B) shows the 23rd embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the case where the bet button D220 is operated when it is not in 1 game in the rotating body type gaming machine. FIG. 398 (A) is an image diagram showing an LED light emitting mode of the sub-input button SB when the sub-input button SB can be operated during one game in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 398 (B) shows the LED light emission of the sub-input button SB when the sub-input button SB can be operated when not in one game in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows an aspect. FIG. 399 (A) is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB can be operated during one game in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 399 (B) is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB can be operated. 23 is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB3 can be operated during one game in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 400A is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB can be operated during one game in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 400B is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB can be operated. 23 is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB3 can be operated during one game in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 401 is an image diagram showing an effect mode of the first continuous effect and a display mode of a continuous image in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment. FIG. 402 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the continuous effect BGM in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment. FIG. 403 is an image diagram showing another end timing of the continuous effect BGM in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment. FIG. 404 is an image diagram showing an effect mode of the second continuous effect in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment. FIG. 405 is an image diagram showing the display priority of the continuous image and the game progress display in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment. FIG. 406 is an image diagram showing the display priority of the continuous image and the game progress display in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment. FIG. 407 is an image diagram showing a display mode of a continuous image after the third stop operation in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment. FIG. 408 is an image diagram showing the display timing of the telop display and the continuous image displayed at the time of the third stop operation in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment. FIG. 409 (A) is an image diagram of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment when a continuous image is displayed after displaying a moving image, and FIG. 409 (B) is an image diagram of the 24th embodiment. It is an image diagram in the case where the continuous image is displayed after displaying the pre-change image in the spinning machine according to the above, and FIG. 409 (C) shows the pushing order in the spinning machine according to the 24th embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the display area of a navigation system and the display area of an image before change.

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, which may also be called a lottery) for determining some game content in a rotating game machine, and in addition to a random number in a narrow sense. Pseudo-random numbers are also included (for example, hard random numbers as random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, re-game roles) for transitioning to special games, etc. Can be mentioned. The term "CPU" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) and processing performance used. "Power outage" means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine is below a certain level regardless of whether or not the power switch provided in the gaming machine is operated. For example, power supply It also includes the interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power outage. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and physically holds information (for example, "1" if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied, and conducts. If the element configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and holds information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, it is "1" if it is stored, and if it is not stored, it is not. It is set to "0". It should be noted that it is generally configured so that backup power is supplied to a part or all of the data held in the RAM at the time of power failure). The "game state" corresponds to, for example, a special game state in which a game medal is easily obtained and is advantageous to the player (a so-called big hit game, which is called a bonus game, a first-class BB, a second-class BB, or the like. ), The winning rate of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value. Examples include the stop order of the reels for winning a prize, an AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, and an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined. Further, even in the normal game state, the lottery probability of transition to the RT state, the AT state, and the ART state is different, the high probability normal game state, the low probability normal game state, etc. (in this example, it is referred to as the lottery state. ). In addition, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {Furthermore, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery for shifting to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side}. Further, in this example, the state related to AT and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the state related to AT is referred to as "normal gaming state". Collectively, the state related to ART may be referred to as a "normal game state" or the like as a state related to ART. The "winning combination" is a type (or condition device number) of a conditional device that has been won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal note lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to an AT capable of executing push order navigation, which will be described later, and even if the game is won by a conditional device in which push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order. , If the state related to AT is a state in which push order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be a "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as the "number of games that can be executed for notification games", and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "number of playable notification games" is 1 or more (the game in which "0" is set may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the "number of playable notification games", the difference number of game media (the number of payouts minus the number of inputs) obtained based on the winning of small wins (mainly the push order bell role) and the number of pushes The number of times the winning bell role is won may be adopted. Further, the "special notification state" is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to AT, and in this example, it is referred to as an "additional specialization state". The "predetermined gaming state" may be any one or a combination of a plurality of states such as the gaming state and the notification state described in this example. Further, the "specific condition" is a condition in which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and the specific condition is, for example, that one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, and the like. "Type 1 special bonus" is a bonus that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate, and is determined in advance. It operates when it is played, and the operation can be continued until the result of the game is obtained not more than 12 times, and it is sometimes called RB (regular bonus). The "type 1 special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the type 1 special accessory, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated in the above, and it may be called BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. The "Type 2 special accessory" is an accessory that operates the condition device related to the winning regardless of the result of the combination lottery, and it operates when it is determined in advance, and the result of one game can be obtained. If this happens, the operation will be terminated, and it may be called CB (Challenge Bonus). The "type 2 special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the type 2 special accessory, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated in the above, and it is sometimes called MB (middle bonus) or type 2 BB. The "ordinary accessory" is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number operates, and is a specific symbol. It operates when the combination is displayed and ends when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when a first-class BB combination wins a prize, it is regarded as JACIN, and the first-class BB is always in RB during execution. Further, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which the non-RB and the RB are repeatedly executed when the first type BB is executed. The "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in which the pull-in control that can be executed after the stop operation is not executed is not executed, and the reel is stopped at the closest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel of. The "all CB type" is a configuration that is always in the CB when the second type BB is executed. The "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described.

(The present embodiment)
Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the rotating body type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure on the front side of the rotating drum type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The revolving gaming machine P mainly consists of a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet and a substrate), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPU MC is mounted) and a sub control board S (a board on which a sub control chip SC including a CPU SC is mounted). Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for enabling input of the game medium, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visible, the reel window D160, the input number indicator lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-game lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game status display device D250, and the number of credits. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of the game medium and the input of the number of bets (number of bets), the medal insertion slot D170, the bet button D220, and the mechanism for enabling the payout of the inserted game medium are settled. Button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as a mechanism for operating the reel. The rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a player to which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal insertion slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. are attached. It is equipped with an operation console that protrudes to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism for making the game state visible>
Next, a main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. Further, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting the game medals necessary for starting one game) are lit. It is configured as. Specifically, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In the case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: turns off, and the 3-bet lamp D213: turns off. : Lights up, 3-bet lamp D213: turns off, and when there are 3 bet game medals, 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, 2-bet lamp D212: lights up, and 3-bet lamp D213: lights up (re-game). This is not the case in the next game in which is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is composed of LEDs and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (accepting the operation), and the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (the operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off in some cases. Further, the re-game lamp D290 is composed of LEDs, and is configured to be turned on when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and turned off when the next game when the re-game is stopped and displayed is completed. Further, the insertable lamp D300 lights up (may be blinking) when the insertion of the game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective, or when the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of the game medal is performed. It is configured to turn off when it is invalid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game status display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. In addition, the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the total number of payouts may be made by the effect display device S40 (also referred to as the second information display unit) described later. By configuring to display, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (the number of credits) stored in the game machine as the player's medals. Further, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is composed of a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button). The winning combination may differ depending on the stop order of D43) {so-called push order combination (sometimes referred to as a combination with push order), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination displayed as stopped is different Is a reel that is most advantageous to the player in a game in which the profit margin (the number of payouts, the RT state after that, etc.) given to the player can be different. It is configured so that the stop order can be notified (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays, that is, the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that is most profitable to the player. Therefore, the display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays a game according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as the first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state related to AT that is advantageous for the player, which is guaranteed when the game progresses (in this example, it may be referred to as a push order navigation state or a notification game, and details will be described later). It is configured as. The AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a configuration, the player can display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games for which the state related to the advantageous AT is guaranteed, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a payout number display device and a push order display device.

Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of LEDs, and is configured to turn on when it is in the "advantageous section" and turn off when it is not in the "advantageous section" (for lighting and extinguishing timing). Will be described later). Here, in the revolving gaming machine according to this example, as in the conventional revolving gaming machine, it is easy to obtain a game medal and a special gaming state (so-called big hit game, which is a bonus game) that is advantageous for the player. , 1st class BB, 2nd class BB, etc.), the winning rate of the replaying combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the replaying combination is a predetermined value. The re-game probability fluctuation game state (RT state), the stop order of the reels for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, and the RT state and the AT state are A combined ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "game states", any one of the three "game sections" of "normal section", "standby section" and "advantageous section". Can be set. In this example, the "waiting section" is not set, and either the "normal section" or the "advantageous section" is set. Of these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "game sections". For example, the "game state" is the AT state or the ART state. It is associated with an "advantageous section". That is, when the "game state" is in the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, but as will be described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also the setting control of the "game state". Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the game progress, whether or not the game progress status is relatively advantageous to the player depends on the lighting / extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. It is possible to convey to the player without telling a lie. As will be described later, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, but in that case, it remains. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (the information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set "game section" also affects the transition of the "game state". It can be given, and as a result, it is possible to automatically suppress a significant increase in gambling due to a "game state" such as an AT state or an ART state, which has a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As described above, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the end condition of the "advantageous section" is not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the revolving pachinko machine according to this example is the push that can acquire the small win with the largest number of payouts among the small wins that make up the "push order combination (combination with push order)". Sequential navigation One execution (for example, if there are seven, three, or one small winning combination as the small winning combination, the seven small winning combination with the largest number of payouts can be obtained. If there is a push order combination in which 7 or 1 cards can be obtained depending on the push order and a push order combination in which 3 cards can be obtained depending on the push order, the push order navigation in which 3 cards can be obtained is referred to here. "Not applicable to push order navigation)" or "Winning any of BB, RB, MB" and "Arbitrary end condition (40G 1 set loop lottery non-winning (AT), fixed 32G" The end condition is to satisfy "Progress (precursor), etc.)" or "Advantageous section 1500G". In the case of a specification in which there is no push order bell combination (example: there is a push order for replay to shift the RT state, but there is no small combination in which the number of payouts differs depending on the push order). The condition for ending the advantageous section of "one push order navigation that can acquire the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts" is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination corresponding to the 11-card winning combination and the small winning combination corresponding to the 1-card winning combination are configured as the small winning combination, so that "the number of payouts is the largest". "One execution of push order navigation that can win small wins" refers to notifying the push order in which 11 medals can be won (11 wins can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling the input of the game medium will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for inserting medals, and the game medals inserted into the slot are guided to the inside of the gaming machine in a situation where medals can be accepted. Further, as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the gaming machine, and are guided to the inside of the gaming machine. When it is determined that the game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet medal. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by a player, and is configured so that a stored medal (credit medal) can be bet by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medals (credit medals) and / or the bet medals can be refunded to the player by the operation. There is. The game medals refunded by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reel by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the reel operations can be sequentially stopped by operating the respective stop buttons. Has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating body type gaming machine P by opening the front door DU of FIG. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be lit in various lighting modes as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game. (Fig.), Door substrate D for signal relay, medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, middle panel (intermediate decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. , Upper panel D130, lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the front door DU so that the display unit for displaying the effect or the like can be visually recognized through the perspective region formed on the upper panel. Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the rotating cylinder type game machine P, and the decorative lamps are on the right side and the left side of the lower panel D140. A unit D150 is provided, and an LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right side and the left side of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 are collectively referred to as a lamp unit). ). Further, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and input signals such as the above-mentioned stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60 are attached to the door board D. Is input, and has the function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M described later. Further, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided in the vicinity of the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU to detect medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and to simplify the detection. It has a function of performing proper authenticity, guiding the appropriate medal to the hopper H40 described later, and returning the inappropriate medal to the medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right below the door substrate D. The middle panel is an upper part of the operation console and a lower part of the upper panel D130, and is a panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB2 attached to the operation console D190 described above are an operation on the menu screen described later and a button continuous striking effect on the sub-control board S side (repeating operation of the sub-input button SB). It is a member used for the progress of a mini-game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the "AT in progress state") or the like (for example, an effect relating to whether or not a bonus has been won). The front door DU of the revolving pachinko machine P can detect the open / closed state of the medal tray D230 for receiving the game medal (or simply called a medal) released from the discharge port D240, and the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and a key (door key) matching the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Further, in the present embodiment, the error state (door opening error, etc.) can be canceled by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. There is. Further, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 lights up (or blinks). ), It is possible to make the player perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided on each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60. Is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player indicates that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective depending on the presence / absence (or blinking) of the stop button lamp S60 and / or the lighting color. Can be perceived by. It should be noted that, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid because it is configured so that only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the effective stop button D40 is lit in the lighting color corresponding to the effective stop button D40. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is turned on, and the right stop is stopped. As the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43 is lit, the lighting modes of the three stop button lamps S60 can be different from each other. Further, by differentizing the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (they may be different such as lighting / blinking or low-speed blinking / high-speed blinking), the push order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button that should be stopped at present. For example, all the reels are rotating, and the pressing order of "left → middle → right" is correct ( When the push order bell that is the maximum number of payouts is won, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button blinks in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button are stopped. When the button lamp is turned on in blue and then the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the middle stop button is supported. The stop button lamp may be blinked in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be lit in blue.

Next, the back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a substrate) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to the substantially center of the back box so that a part thereof can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer circumference of the reel portion (on the reel band MO). Then, based on the operation of each stop button on the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is configured to enable the rotation operation and the stop operation of the respective reel portions. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are lit, the outer circumference of the reel portion is provided. It is configured so that the outer circumference of the reel portion can be visually recognized as if it were lit by the light transmitted through the reel. Further, above the reel M50, a rotating cylinder K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

A main control board M, which will be described later, controls the entire game is stored above the reel M50, and the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. 1 are on the left side of the reel M50. The sub-control board S, which will be described later, controls the control of various effects performed by using the above and the like. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process described later (for changing the setting), and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error. Button M30 is connected. Although the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown in FIG. 2, they may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M such as the board (that is, the front door DU is opened). If not, it may be installed in a position where artificial access is difficult).

Below the reel M50, a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals are provided, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire spinning machine P. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H are paid out from the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating body type gaming machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (sometimes also referred to as a power supply unit E). The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the rotating body type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s that serves as a passage for game medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 near the door substrate D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s, a game medal discharge port D240. A coin shooter D90 or the like is provided to guide the driver. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and accepting only game medals conforming to the standard dimensions, and it is determined that the insertion reception sensor D10s does not conform to this function. The medal (or other foreign matter) is configured to be refunded to the outlet D240 by the blocker D100. If a game medal is inserted before the player operates the start lever D50 (when the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medals are selected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only those that satisfy the standard are satisfied. The medals that have been inserted into the hopper H40 and do not meet the standards are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, if a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (when the insertion of the game medal is not valid), the inserted game medal is inserted regardless of whether or not the standard is satisfied. Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, inside the insertion reception sensor D10s (in the back of the flow path), a sensor related to medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided, and when a game medal that satisfies the dimensional standard and is accepted passes, the first insertion sensor D20s And, it is detected by the second input sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. The game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The insertion reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it is turned on by pressing the two protruding mechanisms, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. .. Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign substance that is not a game medal (a foreign substance that does not satisfy the standard and has a diameter smaller than that of the game medal, for example) is inserted, two protruding mechanisms are pressed. Not done. Since the medal cannot maintain the standing state, such a medal cannot pass through the passage (the medal collapses), and is refunded to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured so that it can determine an error even when the ON time is continuous for a predetermined time or longer (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off). ..

When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s immediately after passing. This throw-in sensor (first throw-in sensor D20s and second throw-in sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (they are arranged adjacent to each other at intervals smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition order of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured in.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to the front view and the top view of the medal payout device H of FIG. The medal payout device H is operated by the settlement button in a state where credits (game medals electronically stored inside the game machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start the game) are present. It will be activated when the game medal is paid out by winning or winning. When operating, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disc H50 around the disc rotation shaft H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. The payout sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on / off status of each sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s on / off). Various errors can be detected by monitoring the transition order of the off combination, etc.) and the on / off time. More specifically, for example, when the game medal outlet H60 is normally passed, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the release urging means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on, second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout Since the sensor state transition is sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off, if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , It can be exemplified that it is configured to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a specified number (maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20. , The effective line for which the winning is determined is one line of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is one (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)-> bonus". For example, when the replaying role and the bonus are established at the same time, , The symbol combination that will be the replay role is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. In addition, when the bell and watermelon are established, if the stop button is pressed at the position where both can be pulled in (the position within 4 frames to the winning stop position), priority is given to the small winning combination with a large number of payouts. It is configured to retract. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 5 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if the line is changed to one line of the left reel M51 lower, the middle reel M52 middle, and the right reel M53 upper). In addition, as the pull-in control when the push order small winning combination, which gives different benefits to the player depending on the pushing order, is won, the small winning combination with a large number of payouts when operated in the predetermined correct push order. Is controlled to be pulled in with priority (number of sheets priority control), and if the operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order, the stop display is possible (at a position within 4 frames from the stop operation). Control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning among the (arranged) symbols (the most likely to win among the combinations of multiple symbols that can be won).

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (Nos. 0 to 19), and the symbols are "Black Seven", "White Seven", and " There are 10 types: "sheep", "blank", "bell", "replay A", "replay B", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", and "cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol not constituting the winning combination, but a symbol constituting the winning combination including "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B / Replay A / Blank" is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the type of symbol is increased / decreased or changed.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are a list of symbol combinations 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, any of them will be used. It is configured so that one of the symbol combinations is stopped and displayed on the effective line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is easy for the player to align the same symbols in a row on the line other than the effective line (in the case of watermelon, in the middle row). Three watermelon symbols are aligned in a straight line on any of the reels, such as in a straight line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols serving as a first-class BB combination (a so-called first-class special accessory-related accessory continuous operation device, which may be simply referred to as a BB combination) is used. Type 1 BB-A (RB-A is operated continuously and ends with a payout of more than 264 sheets) "Sheep / Sheep / Sheep" and Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is operated continuously to end 132 sheets) "Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven" that ends with a payout that exceeds, and "White Seven / White Seven / that ends with a payout of more than 132 sheets by continuously operating RB-B). It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In the present embodiment, when the first-class BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), one in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. It is configured to draw a winning combination (small combination, replaying combination) other than the winning combination by referring to the lottery table (a method in which the table referred to during the combination lottery is not switched during the execution of one BB). (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). The format of the first-class BB combination is not limited to this, and the table to be referred to at the time of the combination lottery may be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination that becomes the replay 04 corresponding to the 14th to 16th is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to the RT0 (for details of the RT state, refer to the details of the RT state. Will be described later). Since "RT0" is in an RT state that is more disadvantageous to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" may be referred to as a fall. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes the replay 05 corresponding to No. 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and is displayed at No. 18. When the symbol combination that becomes the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, "white seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). Further, when the push order bell, which is the condition device of "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" described later, is won, when the reels are stopped in the pushing order most advantageous to the player, the numbers 21 to 27 are used. The symbol combinations corresponding to "Prize 01" to "Prize 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order that is most advantageous for the player. , The symbol combinations of "Prize 08" to "Prize 11" corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell-Bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices according to this embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the present embodiment, the re-game combinations are provided from re-game-A to re-game-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and are set to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Depending on the situation, the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus" in the rightmost column, a plurality of left reels M51, middle reels M52, and right reels M53 are used according to the stop order and stop position. It is configured so that different types of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of condition devices, the condition devices with the same winning number are grouped together and are in the third column from the right, "condition device (name)". It is illustrated in the item of. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, "replay" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three types of condition devices, "01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03", are configured to be stopped and displayed. The "conditional device (name)" may be simply referred to as a conditional device. In addition, a condition device related to a re-game such as "re-game 01" may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device in which a game medal is paid out by winning a prize such as "winning 01" may be referred to as a small role. A condition device in which the BB starts when a stop display such as "Type 1 BB-A" is displayed may be referred to as a BB combination. In addition, if the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB combination and the small combination will be won in duplicate, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small combination will be stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, while the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination does not stop and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not displayed. Is configured to stop and display. Specifically, for example, when the condition device of the winning number 21 is "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-C", the cherry that is "Winning 12" or "Winning 13" and "Type 1 BB" Any of the black sevens that are "-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 are placed on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which (see the reel arrangement of) is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. And regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol numbers 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to the above are stopped, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Species BB-B" stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. In that case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Type BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the "role" item, what kind of role the "condition device (name)" plays is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order in which the stop button is pressed. Regardless, it is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the "reverse push white 7-matched replay" corresponding to the winning number 2 is RT regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. It is a condition device related to the re-game in which the state does not change and the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. However, when the reel is pushed backward (the reels are stopped in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51), the right reel M53 The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are stopped at the operation timing located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "White Seven" is stopped and displayed on the lower row of the right reel M53, middle reel M52, and left reel M51, and it is configured so that the white sevens appear to be aligned on the lower row from the player's point of view. There is. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-B and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at "White Seven" by pushing backward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect. The "forward push black 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device related to the replay in which the replay combination in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. Stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel. By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" is placed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. Is stopped and displayed, and it is configured so that the black sevens appear to be aligned in the lower row when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-C and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim for "Black Seven" by pushing forward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect.

In addition, the "RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on (), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not shift to re-game 01, re-game 02, or re-game 03. Is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52, the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the first When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on whether or not the reel is stopped. Then, when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

Further, the "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", stop in the push order of "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), stopping in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correctly answering in the order of pressing) is the maximum number of winnings. The symbol combination that becomes "winning 01" that can acquire 11 game medals will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "123" and the like of "push order bell 123" indicate the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of winning sheets in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of winning sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, one reel is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress", the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players are different so that the push order is not navigated to the AT-related states such as. The state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can obtain 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of the winning 04 to the winning 07 is stopped, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a conditional device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a bell regardless of the push order. Further, the "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. 9 is won. In No. 14, three watermelons A are arranged in the middle of each reel. Further, the "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the diagonal line. For example, the prize number 66 in FIG. 9 is won. In No. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium and weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device in which three bells can be aligned on the effective line, and details will be described later, but the winning is done during the BB. It is a condition device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by doing so. Further, the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the left reel M51 upper stage, the middle reel M52 middle stage, and the right reel M53 upper stage. Although the details will be described later, it is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) is the winning number (19) that includes one type BB-A. Bonus winning information of 1, 1 type BB-B included winning number (20-23) bonus winning information 2, 1 type BB-C included winning number (24-27) bonus winning information 3 It is supposed to be. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19/20/24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination are set to 0 for the winning / re-game winning information. , 1-18 winning / re-gaming winning information is distributed to each condition device for the winning number including the re-gaming combination or the small winning combination. By storing the winning / re-game winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store the information relating to which re-game combination or small combination is won. The details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "directing group number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the production group number will be described later.

Next, in the item of "ball output group number", numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and the stored payout group number is used when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT addition lottery) to execute a lottery process related to AT. It is possible to reduce the program and data capacity for this. Even if the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if the condition device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. Further, even when the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery may be executed, and in such a configuration, the payout group number is set. When the condition device to be 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, it is preferable to configure the lottery result so that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning combinations) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the present embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing (also called a winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1" and "RT2" when the BB is not operating will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (particularly, the re-game combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the "re-game combination" (the total appearance of all the re-game combinations) appears. The rate) is higher in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "re-game 04" (a so-called fall re-game combination, "RT1", and a symbol corresponding to the re-game combination in a situation where the bonus is not won, which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6. When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" thereafter) is mainly won in "RT1", and almost never appears in "RT0". In "RT2", "re-game 04" that can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. When "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it shifts to "RT0", that is, it is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40). (Displayed as "Sorry") is executed, and when "Re-game 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed even though the "re-game 04" was stopped and displayed. You can improve your sex. In addition, in such a configuration, the sound effect output by the stop display of "re-game 04" and the re-game combination other than "re-game 04" (for example, "re-game" in which the RT state does not shift). The sound effect output when "01") is stopped and displayed may be different from the sound effect, and the player recognizes that "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed by such a configuration. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state" and may be referred to as non-AT gaming state) and states related to AT in which push order navigation can occur (for example, "". It may stay in "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress" and sometimes referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when the winning number that may shift (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in the non-AT game state is played. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. As a result, it is possible to shift the gaming state without letting the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). As a result, the player can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, being careful not to let the RT state fall. In addition, "re-game 05" that can be stopped and displayed at winning number 2 or 3 (re-game role that can notify that the lottery has been won by adding AT when stopped and displayed in the AT state) is mainly "RT1". It appears in, and almost never appears in other RT states. It should be noted that the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that serves as the replaying combination will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the player of the reel stop order, which is most advantageous to the player, can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. .. There is no problem even if the lottery probability is changed as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured so that it can overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which the bonus and the small winning combination overlap.

Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the BB roles of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (single roles that do not overlap with the small role). If a BB role is won, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB), the new winning of the BB role is invalid, and only the winning of the small role is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carrying over) the 1st class BB-A, the winning number 24 "1st class BB-C" is won. , Class 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 0 "missing" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is inactive, the small winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are If the overlapping conditional devices are won, the new winning of the BB winning combination is invalid, and only the winning of the small winning combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the situation where the player is "RT2" and has won (carried over) the 1st class BB-A, he / she won the "1st class BB-B + winning-C" winning number 21. In that case, the type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 becomes invalid, and only the winning-C becomes valid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 14 "winning-C" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. It should be noted that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small role, and may overlap with a part of the replay role. For example, a part of the re-game combination of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying role in which the RT state can be transitioned), the bonus is also won when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so it is possible to give the player expectations. In this configuration, the RT state is controlled so that the RT state does not shift even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have shifted the RT state (shifted to the RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), but the replay probability is not low (frequently won the replay), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning the bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" at the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, while the BB is operating, the "common bell" of the winning number 13 and the "BB medium-weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" of the winning number 17 and the "BB medium-strong rare small role" of the winning number 18 It is configured so that three small roles with "(V-shaped bell alignment)" can be won, and while the BB won in "AT in progress" is operating, "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" Alternatively, if the player wins the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)", the AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

Further, in the upper part of the figure, the appearance rate of small wins when the set value is 1 is illustrated, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (6 steps in this example). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. With this configuration, for example, when a player advances a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning times) of a common bell, the common bell is frequently won, thereby relating to the gaming machine being played. The game can be advanced with the expectation that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery, and the high-probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as the lottery related to AT).

In addition, the middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when there is push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as "AT in progress state", the reel is stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small wins, also called the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game ( It is the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of medals to be inserted when playing with a 3-card bet. The value will be negative and the number of medals will decrease). The average number of payouts per game is "total number of replays (total number of replays 1 to 6) x number of replays (3) + small wins (11). Sum of the number of placements (small combination appearance rate) of the combination (total number of placements for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts (11 sheets) in the small combination (11-card combination) / total number of all placements (65536) ) ”Can be calculated. Further, the expected value of increase / decrease in medals per game can be calculated as "average number of medals paid out per game / number of medals inserted per game (3 cards)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted when playing one game) is three, and if the average number of medals paid out per game is greater than 3, the number of medals inserted per game is expected to increase or decrease. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game of "RT1" is relatively large. The figures in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game is advanced in the situation where the push order navigation occurs (it is also referred to as the case where the operation is performed in the optimum operation mode or the case where the operation is performed in the advantageous operation mode), the number of medals increases in "RT1". Although not shown in "RT0" and "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is less than 1 under the condition that the push order navigation does not occur, and the medal. Will decrease. In this embodiment, even in "RT0" or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is larger than 1 when there is push order navigation, but the expected value is not limited to 1, and "RT0" is not limited to this. Or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game when there is push order navigation may be smaller than 1. In addition, when the symbol combination to be the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but in calculating the expected value of medal increase / decrease in this embodiment, medals are used. The calculation is based on the assumption that three medals will be paid out. In addition, one game may be referred to as one game.

Further, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0" and 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. In the case of "RT2", it is 3.67137146. Further, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0" and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. Is 1.223790487 when is "RT2", and when there is push order navigation, the RT state is "RT1", which is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small wins and replays are just examples. For example, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in "RT2" where BB is being established internally (when there is push order navigation). The expected value of increase / decrease in medals) may be configured to be less than 1. With such a configuration, when push order navigation occurs and when it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), when the bonus is not aligned in the game where the bonus can be aligned. However, the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and in the situation where push order navigation occurs and when it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), it is intentional in a game where bonuses can be arranged. It is possible to prevent a strategy that increases the number of medals held by not arranging bonuses. Specifically, it is preferable to design so that the probability of losing in "RT2" is higher than the winning probability of all the small wins (winning-A1 to winning-I) won in "RT2". It is preferable to determine the winning probability of the re-game combination so that it is designed so that the winning probability of the re-game combination is high. It is preferable to design it so that it does not become too much). In "RT2" of this example, the winning probability of all the small wins is 18784/65536, the total winning probability of all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is It is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the winning probability of all the small wins combined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the first type BB-A is assigned to 40, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. Further, the appearance rate of the first type BB-C is assigned to 160, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is 160 for setting 1, 180 for setting 2, 200 for setting 3, and 200 for setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the appearance rate of the first type BB-B differs depending on the set value. In this way, the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C are BBs with no setting difference (the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C may be referred to as a setting difference BB and a setting difference bonus). The type 1 BB-B functions as a BB with a setting difference (the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference and a bonus with a setting difference). Moreover, the appearance rate of all of the 1st class BB-A, the 1st class BB-B and the 1st class BB-C is uniform regardless of the RT state (in "RT0" and "RT1"). The appearance rate of type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C (total) is the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B (total) differs depending on the set value. The total appearance rate of the first type BB-B is the same even if the set value is different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to be different depending on the set value. Even when configured, type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BB with a setting difference.

Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, the electrical schematic configuration of the rotating drum type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the revolving gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is centered, and the sub-control board S, the door board D, the revolving board K, the power supply board E, the relay board IN, The setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected so as to be able to exchange data. The solid line in the figure shows the movement related to data exchange, and the broken line in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game unit) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed by the spinning machine P. The main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the CPUC100 (sometimes also referred to as CPUMC), the built-in ROMC110, the built-in RAMC120, and the like are connected to the main control chip C so that data can be exchanged with each other by a bus. It is installed. Then, the main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub control board S, the door board D, and the rotating cylinder board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K or the like {for example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) is output toward the sub-control board S. By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S can execute push-order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board SC (sometimes referred to as a sub-control means, a sub-board, a sub-control means, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S also has a sub-control chip SC mounted on the sub-control board M as well as the above-mentioned main control board M. The sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured to be connected by a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. Further, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating cylinder backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the rotating cylinder backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotating cylinder backlight S30, and the like. Is being produced. In the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example, the player covers nine ranges of the left reel upper stage, middle stage, lower stage, middle reel upper stage, middle stage, lower stage, and right reel upper stage, middle stage, and lower stage. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the rotating cylinder backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel is lit, and all the other LEDs are turned off, so that the player can identify that the upper stage of the left reel is lit. Further, in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the player indicates that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by changing the lighting mode of the rotating cylinder backlight S30. It is configured so that the backlight effect (sometimes referred to as the backlight effect) suggested in is feasible.

On the door substrate D, the above-mentioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and the start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. Lever D50, settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game {not shown, but described above. The input number indicator light D210, start lamp D180, re-game lamp D290, insertable lamp D300, special game status display device D250, payout number display device (push order display device) D270 are credit number display device D200, advantageous section. A collection of display devices such as the display YH}, a door switch D80 for determining the opening / closing of the front door, canceling an error, and changing a set value, a game medal (or a game medal) judged to be incompatible after being inserted. , Other foreign matter) is connected to a blocker D100 or the like for refunding to the discharge port D240. Further, the door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so as to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, the signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, the signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, a rotating cylinder motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating cylinder sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating cylinder substrate K. The reel M50 can be stopped at a determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotation position of the reel M50 by the reel sensor K20. There is. Further, in the rotating drum type gaming machine of the present embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used for the rotating cylinder motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps for the reel M50 to rotate once. Further, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is set with a predetermined number (for example, 20) symbols having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel lap are changed.

Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on the control signal from the main control board M. Perform the operation to put out. The medal payout device H is provided with a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s, and a disk H50, which determine whether or not the medals have been paid out normally and measure the number of game medals paid out. A hopper motor H80 for rotating is connected to the hopper motor H80.

These various control boards and the electric power consumed by the boards are supplied from the power supply board E (the board that controls the presence / absence of power supply by the power supply switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a broken line arrow. As shown in the drawing, electric power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotating cylinder board K, relay board IN) are supplied with electric power. Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and after converting this power into a DC voltage of a specified voltage, the power supply board E is supplied to each of the control boards and boards.

Further, on the main control board M, a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process described later (for changing the setting), a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value, canceling an error, and the like can be executed. Button M30, is connected. Further, the main control board M is a state related to a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) and AT which is advantageous for the player. AT lottery means to execute AT transition lottery to shift to, and AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT in progress state". It has an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown in rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown in rectangles), judgments (shown in diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. ing. Further, when the details of the processing steps are illustrated by another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is illustrated as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the development stage of a gaming machine, a gaming machine having different specifications is also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (which is executed by a gaming machine having different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed is prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing that is executed for the first time on the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the rotating drum type gaming machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). .. First, in step 1000, the power of the rotating drum type game machine P is turned on, and then in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started). Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method setting) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, the power is turned off and the power is turned off and restored based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area. (Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off / recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all the RAMs (in step 1006). (Check result of) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process when the power is turned off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the power-off processing according to the returned stack pointer.

If No in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the backup error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the non-recoverable error processing described later.

If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, it will be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). Set to). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the non-recoverable error processing described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step 1904). (Check result in 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM ( For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range not included in the RAM initialization range is not limited to the storage area that stores the set value (set value data), but the total number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section +). As a result of calculating the number of games (normal section) and the stay ratio of the "advantageous section", etc. are also within the range not included in the RAM initialization range. With this configuration, the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio) can be calculated and displayed. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. In addition, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at 5 second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio-> continuous character ratio per 6000 games-> character ratio per 6000 games-> cumulative continuous character ratio-> cumulative character ratio". Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is "the number of payouts when the RB is operating / the total number of payouts", and the bonus ratio is the "number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating". / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to a specific range including the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. It is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which the special game is executed. (To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed immediately after the start of the program processing due to noise or cheating). Further, although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to memorize only the information related to the random number (do not memorize other information such as various timer values) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise or the like. To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed in 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return it to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, the set value (set value data) is corrected after the RAM is initialized (step 1106 and). The processing of step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the most disadvantageous value for the player) in the set value (set value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M indicates to the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112. Move to. As described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure has occurred in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be turned on) and the push order is notified, incorrect information can be notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout number display device D270 fully illuminate "88" of the 7-segment while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7-segment is out of order, which is not suitable for the player. It is possible to prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value (set value data), the storage of the RAM for displaying the set value for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value. It may be configured to have an area and display a set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, in step 1112, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (when the added result set value (set value data) exceeds 5). The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Even if No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processes of steps 1112 to 1116 are looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays an error display LED (not shown) indicating that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and displays the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is terminated is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in another flowchart) in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUC100 of the main control board M disables interrupts (after that, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt time processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to the various LEDs and the drive output to the various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process is concerned. Is repeated, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, it goes into an infinite loop, so it does not accept any operation that prompts it to return). If No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes of steps 1306 to 1310 are processes for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, the hall computer side provides information on the error and the game progress status when the error occurs. It is possible to output to).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, valid lines for winning, etc.). In step 1203, the data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, the condition device number (winning number), the effect group number, the instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address) The process of setting the data) in the RAM is also included. It should be noted that the condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, and the like may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. Further, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set in step 1704. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (step 1420 in FIG. 21, step 1429, step 1435 in FIG. 22). Set the state related to AT determined in step 1439, step 1443, step 1444-3 in FIG. 23, and step 1444-4). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state related to AT may be executed in step 1416 and step 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 in FIG. 23. Further, when transmitting the state related to AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit, and the state related to AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, an “advantageous section”) in the game (the game section determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is judged by the continuity / non-conduction of the current due to (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is judged to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on. ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the display of the error number corresponding to the medal full error with the 7-segment LED (for example, the storage display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been cleared (for example, the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting and is set / set. Whether or not the reset button M30 is pressed) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and then steps. Move to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replaying role), and the next process (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process for forming the medal flow path). Specifically, when the re-game combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current number of stored cards (credits) is less than the predetermined value (50 cards in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if the re-game combination is established, if the number of stored cards (credits) does not reach the predetermined value, the game medal can be inserted, such as "RT1". When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the winning probability of the re-game role is higher than that of the RT state, or when the re-game role is difficult to understand by appearance (re-game pretending to be a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped on the invalid line, the player can play the game with good rhythm (without discomfort).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game medal has not been bet or saved (credit does not exist). In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPUC100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, and the input number indicator light D210). The value is displayed (the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode), and the step 1221 proceeds on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the process for sending a command indicating to start the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode Is executing a process to send a command indicating that it will end. If No in step 1220 or 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, the insertion of medals). It has two throw-in sensors for detection, and when the first throw-in sensor D20s or the second throw-in sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been accepted). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s are off (the first closing sensor D20s or the second closing sensor D20s or the second closing sensor D30s). When the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, it is determined that the CPUC100 of the main control board M has accepted the insertion of one normal game medal. Although not shown, after step 1231, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a maximum number of credits (50 in this example) and a maximum number of bets (3 in this example). Is determined, and if Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which the medal flow path is not formed). If No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when driving the hopper motor H80), and the game is played. Pay out one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the present embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is paid out). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a re-game, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). .. Specifically, did the situation of determining that the medal was not paid out continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal was transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been cleared (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If No in step 1241 or 1247, the process proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if No in step 1232 or step 1233, the start lever D50 is effective for the CPUC100 of the main control board M in step 1251 (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted, etc.). ), And it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process of acquiring a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. If No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state in which the AT can be added to the lottery. Here, in this example, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery are "AT in progress state", "additional specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous for the player if the player does not dare to align the symbol combinations of the BB in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". In addition, it may be configured so that the AT addition lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal middle game", and in such a configuration, the AT addition lottery is won in the "advantageous BB internal middle game". However, it may be configured to notify the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added.

In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the execution process for adding the number of games, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, even if No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1400. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). Execute a lottery) is preferable. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the conditional device number management process described later.

Here, the states related to AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired) and the bonus combination has not been won. Since the "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state", it may also be referred to as a "normal state". (2) The "normal BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", the BB combination is not won, and the AT lottery is not won. (3) The "normal BB state" is when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the situation where the BB combination is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won. Alternatively, it is a state of being executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal medium game". (4) The "high probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired) and the bonus role has not been won. , It is a state in which it is easier to win an AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". As will be described later, when the game newly shifts to the "high probability state", it is configured not to shift to the "low probability state" until the number of high-securing obstacle games has elapsed. (5) "AT in progress state" "" Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the continuous lottery described later is won, the predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the "AT in progress state" continues (6) "Specialization precursor state". Is a state in which the right to shift to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state", has been acquired. (7) The "additional specialization state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state". (8) "Advantageous BB internal medium game" means that the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state of not winning a prize. (9) "Standby BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. .. (10) The "advantageous BB state" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB role by winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state". The BB combination is won and is executed when the stop display is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", or in the "low probability state". , The AT lottery was won by the BB combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal medium game". It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) The "state for producing the resurrection possibility" is a state related to the AT that shifts when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuous lottery described later is not won. In the "resurrection possibility production state", the revival lottery described later is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the revival lottery is not performed. If it is won, it will shift to the "low probability state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is requested to create a pull-in point creation request (rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and the stop order is determined. It is determined whether or not there is (as required as appropriate depending on the stop position of other reels). In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, even if No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal reel game", in the game in which the push order bell was won, the stop buttons were not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing incorrect answers), 11 symbol combinations will be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win a prize. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance / rejection check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). .. On the other hand, even if No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes all reel stop check processing. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoptable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined to be). The determination of whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols in step 1269 is normal determines whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, and the winning combination is won. In the game being played, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can win a prize, the reel position actually stopped is not normal (the winning is possible as determined by the internal lottery). Even if the winning combination is not displayed as a stop from the appearance of the player), if the reel stop control is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning combination of the winning combination will be awarded. The payout is configured to be performed. If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area) in step 1270. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning a prize. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there has been a prize for paying out the game medal {the game medal obtained by the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, the game medal will be paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (the flag that is turned on when driving the hopper motor H80), and executes the payout of one game medal. .. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). .. In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been cleared (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps 1282. Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the prize (the prize that became Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, transition process of the game state, etc.), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing the internal lottery in which the winning number and the number of places to be compared with the acquired random numbers are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. In addition, winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small winning combination are won in duplicate, or if the bonus and the replaying combination are won in duplicate, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are obtained from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same set number for comparison with the acquired random number, and is stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number is the same for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6, which are push order replaying roles. Since the number of consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which is the push order bell role, is the same, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay combination is 3, and the push order bell is used. The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. It should be noted that the lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 which are the push order replaying roles are acquired and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the pushing order bell roles are acquired are as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259) without executing the determination (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processes of steps 361 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number) in step 3620, and proceeds to step 3604 to move to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number related to the game as an additional AT game (winning number capable of adding the remaining number of AT games in the "AT in progress state"). In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the re-game-B, the re-game-C, and the winning-D). If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game added to the BB. In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether or not it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). To judge. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can add the number of remaining AT games to the specializing middle addition group number for the game. In the "AT in progress state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, replay-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6). (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 2, 13). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning additional game number lottery table, and determines the number of AT additional games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random number value falls within the range). It should be noted that determining the number of AT-added games is also referred to as executing an AT-added lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined number of AT-added games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S receives the command. It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games the number of added games is), and the process proceeds to step 1518. In addition, the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be executed even in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are the payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus. ..

Here, the lottery table shown in the margin of the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games at the time of winning, and in the present embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, " If the additional winning combination is won at the time of winning in "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB state"), based on the payout group number related to the game, The number of AT additional games is determined by lottery from "0" to "300", and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. If "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as non-winning in the AT additional lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when the additional combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure, and as a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In the case, {number of games (600) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of games (100) x number of AT additional games (10) + number of games (300) x number of AT additional games (30) + number of games ( 24) × number of AT additional games (100)} / total number of placements (1024) = 12.1 (games).

Next, when the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {number of placements (500) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (200) x number of AT additional games (50) + Calculated as number of units (300) x number of AT additional games (100) + number of units (24) x number of AT additional games (300)} / total number of units (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, {number of games (300) x number of AT additional games (10) + number of games (600) x It can be calculated as the number of AT additional games (30) + the number of placements (124) × the number of AT additional games (50)} / the total number of placements (1024) = 26.61 (games). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is "addition specialized state". It has become.

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare role, {number of placements (800) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (100) ) × Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (100)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-strong rare role, {number of placements (300) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements (400) ) × Number of AT additional games (50) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (300)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 35.4 (Games).

In the present embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the AT addition games may differ depending on the type of winning combination, but the AT addition games number may differ depending on the set value. The average values are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 execute the same processing as the AT addition lottery, the winning number is 7. It is necessary to execute the process of determining whether or not the number is 8, but the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured to execute the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number as in the present embodiment. When the same process is executed as the AT additional lottery, the process related to the AT additional lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 should be executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. Will be possible.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine by the winning number (or winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Is a winning number for re-game-B (reverse-push white 7 replay, which is a re-game in which White Seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by replay-B, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the regame-B. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and reverse push (“right → middle → left”). Will be executed to instruct the white sevens to be aligned), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command for avoiding the reverse push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the white sevens on the invalid line) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. Even if No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game as the replay-C (or the payout group number, etc.). It is determined whether or not it is a replay (forward push black 7 replay) in which the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by the forward push. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by replay-C, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the regame-C. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and forward push (“left → middle → right”). (The effect of instructing the black sevens to be aligned) is set in, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the forward push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the forward push (“left → middle → right”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the black sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). In the present embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands to subordinate. It is configured so that the control board S side can execute the effect related to the push order navigation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the AT additional lottery is won, the fact that the AT additional lottery is won and the number of AT additional games are related. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT-added games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the push order navigation is performed on the sub-control board S side. It may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to. As an example, in a game in which the re-game-B is won and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), a production mode in which a reverse push is instructed is selected. It may be configured to be executed, or in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined condition (for example, a specific replay combination (for example, replay)) is executed. In a game in which (game-B or C) has been won), an effect of instructing a push order in which seven lines can be aligned on the invalid line may be executed. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous production may be executed at the same time, in that case, the final game of the continuous production) is satisfied, the number of AT games is added to the production (displayed by the production display device S40). It is an effect that the display related to the number of remaining AT games is increased. For example, (displayed as "+ 30G") may be executed. In this example, the effect display device S40 also increases the number of remaining AT games. The display is configured to be able to be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In a game in which B is a winning game and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. As an example of executing the effect of adding the number of AT games in the game that has been played, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that encourages the winning of the bonus is being executed on the sub-control board S side (inside the bonus). Then, since the winning probability of re-game-B is low (including 0%), if the push order in which 7 matches are possible is notified, the player will recognize that the bonus has not been won), etc. There is a case where the board S side is executing a special effect. In addition, the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the number of remaining AT games has been added. The information includes (1) the number of AT remaining games transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side after the lottery with the AT added. After that, the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time on the sub control board S side. Calculate the difference between the information about the game and the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasp the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery. (2) Obtained as a result of the AT additional game on the main control board M side. A command related to the number of AT additional games is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. If the AT additional lottery is not won, a command relating to the fact that the AT additional lottery is not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. When the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the production mode of the effect related to the push order navigation. As an example, the replay-B may be used. It ’s a winning game Then, in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games is not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order avoids 7 sets). It may be configured to select and execute the effect mode for instructing. The lottery for adding AT was executed on the main control board M side, but the information on the sub control board S side determining that the number of remaining AT games was not added is as follows: (1) Information on the number of remaining AT games. After the AT addition lottery, transmission is performed from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, on the sub-control board S side, the difference between the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time and the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery is grasped. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time from the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is 1, it is judged that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command regarding the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the state related to the AT capable of executing the AT lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the state related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery is only the "high probability state", and by winning the BB in the "high probability state", the "advantageous BB internal medium game". After that, when the BB combination wins a prize, it shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the "AT in progress state", and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. The value of 50 times will be set. Even if the BB is won in the "low probability state", the game shifts to the "normal BB internal medium game" and does not shift to the "AT in progress state" thereafter. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and if the BB is won in the "normal game state", the AT lottery may be won with the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the BB is changed. By aligning them, it will shift to the "advantageous BB state". In the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the BBs are not aligned, the game section may be set as the "advantageous section" or the "standby section". In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, a first-class BB-A or a first type BB combination in which there is no setting difference BB combination). Species BB-C) is determined. In this embodiment, the winning numbers of the BB without setting difference (winning numbers 19 and 24) and the winning numbers of the BB without setting difference and the small winning combination (winning numbers 25, 26, 27) are used. Both are AT lottery roles. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "advantageous BB internal middle game", and proceeds to step 1410. Further, even if No in step 1402 or 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In this embodiment, when the AT-related states are different, the AT winning rate (whether or not the AT can be won) related to the AT lottery is different, but when the AT-related states are the same. The AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same even if the set value is different (if the BB is won in the "high probability state", the AT is always won regardless of the set value = then " Transition to "AT in progress").

Next, in step 1410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a small condition device related to the game that can shift from a “low probability state” to a “high probability state” by winning a state promotion combination. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a cherry). In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is elected with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem even if it is changed). Execute a high-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high-probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT in the next game and thereafter to the “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

Further, if No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 1 (highly secured failure final game, 10th game since the "high probability state" is reached. ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is the "high probability state", the game section is the "advantageous section", and when the game section is the "advantageous section", the push order It is configured so that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the navigation is executed once or more, or the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) "advantageous section" continues. Even if you win the low-probability state transition lottery, if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been executed more than once, the "high-probability state" will not end. ). If the BB combination is won during the "advantageous section" and the BB is executed, the "advantageous section" can be performed at any timing even if the push order navigation is not executed even once in the "advantageous section". It may be configured to be terminated. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT in the next game and thereafter to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied by executing the push order navigation once. In addition, as a push order combination (a winning number in which the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the profit margin of the player differs), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a combination with a maximum payout number of 11 are provided. In this case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation of the winning combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 is executed once. In addition, even if No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426 or step 1428, the process proceeds to step 1430. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new transition to the "high probability state" is made, 10 games, which are high-securing obstacle games, are set in the high-securing obstacle counter KHc, and until the counter value becomes 0. Is configured not to transition to a "low probability state". It should be noted that such a lottery method is just an example. For example, the low-probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the "high-probability state" (the stay in the "high-probability state" is guaranteed. ), After the lapse of the 10 games, a lottery for shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game. The AT lottery combination (low probability AT lottery combination, high probability AT lottery combination) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all the set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, watermelon B With a 1/2 chance of winning the game, you can get the right to move to the "additional specialization state" and move to the "specialization precursor state", while the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". , AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less, a lottery (specialization) to acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" even if the watermelon B is won. It is configured so that it does not execute the state transition lottery) and does not shift to the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state". The lottery is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" (also known as the specialized state transition lottery). It may be configured to be able to execute (sometimes referred to as), and in the situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" is given. If the lottery to be won is won, it may be configured so that the next game that wins the lottery can be (shifted to) a "specialized precursor state" or an "additional specialized state", or the AT counter value. May be configured to be (or transition to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" when becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or the game won in the lottery. After executing a predetermined number of games, it may be configured so that it can become (or shift to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state". In addition, when shifting to the "additional specialization state", it is not always necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state". For example, the configuration is such that the transition from the "AT in progress state" to the "additional specialization state" can be performed directly. You may. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can execute a lottery in which the conditional device related to the game can execute a lottery to acquire the transition right to the specialization transition combination (“additional specialization state””. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “specialization precursor state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is reached). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery to win with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and shifts to step 1444-1 (AT state shiftable condition). The number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the requirements. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. In addition, even if No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434 or step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1444-1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the final AT game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the AT counter M60 is set to 50 games, which is the initial value, again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the AT of 50 games per set has a playability of continuing to loop at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the final AT game. For example, after the initial value is set in the first game of AT (the first game newly in the "AT in progress" state or the AT counter M60). The first game) may be configured to perform a continuous lottery. With such a configuration, it has already been determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue) in the "AT in progress state". , The effect during AT can be different depending on whether the continuous lottery is won or not. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 It is possible to change the BGM (song is played, etc.) in a situation where the number is 1 or more (during the execution of AT), or to execute an effect in which it is definite that the player has won the continuous lottery.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state for effecting whether or not it can be restored. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the resurrection role (in the next game by winning the condition device related to the game in the "resurrection possibility production state"). It is determined whether or not it is a role that can shift to the "AT in progress state", in other words, a role that can pull back the AT). Here, in the present embodiment, the resurrection combination includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and a bonus combination (only the BB combination without setting difference, and does not include the BB combination with setting difference). When the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection role, it is said that the resurrection lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state transitionable condition. On the other hand, if No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to the "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1445. Even if No in step 1441-1, the process proceeds to step 1445. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game is the final AT game and the continuous lottery is not won, the game shifts to the "recoverable / non-recoverable production state" and is revived in the "recoverable / non-recoverable production state". If the lottery can be won, it is configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" from the next game. In addition, although the "state for revival possibility production" is "advantageous section", the lottery related to AT (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) in the "AT in progress state" is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. It is configured, and the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the "AT in-progress state" and the "revival possibility production state".

Next, in step 1445, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the transition condition of the state related to the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, “specialization precursor”. Satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursor games, are exhausted in "State"). In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT in the next game and thereafter, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, "specialization". If the number of precursor games is exhausted in "precursor state", it will be decided as "additional specialization state"). In addition, even if No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC100 of the main control board M guarantees a high secured fault counter value command (in this example, it is a command to the sub side, and the current high secured fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed. The command related to the remaining number of games that has been played) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game is determined to be "advantageous BB internal medium game". In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1450). Even if No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1450).

In this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if the BB combination (BB combination with no setting difference) is won in the "low probability state", the AT transition lottery is won. No (after that, it does not shift to the "AT in progress state") On the other hand, if the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in the "high probability state", the AT transition lottery is won (then the "AT in progress state" is set. However, it is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as the AT lottery, and the states related to the AT, which is the "advantageous section", are "high probability state A" and "high probability". When configured to have a "state B", if the condition device A is won in the "high probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device is won in the "high probability state B". If A is won, the AT transition lottery may be won by 1/2. If the AT transition lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT preparation state", which is the preparation state until the transition to the "AT in progress state" as the state related to AT, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation"). It may be configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" when 10 games have passed since the shift to the "state".

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replay winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, winning / replay winning related to the game). Set the command related to information). Next, in step 1454, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is a combination with a push order (a condition device in which the winning combination differs depending on the push order, for example, winning-A1 or the like). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a push order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and gives an instruction. It is stored in the RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. It should be noted that the instruction number is determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes the initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When executing the push order guessing game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). See FIG. 34 for an image). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the reel stop order, which is the most profitable for the player, on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as a push order navigation, a push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed by the push order display device D270 as "= 1". In both the push order bell and the push order replay, it is configured to be displayed as "= 1". In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of displaying the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" on the push order display device D270 in the game related to the push order bell, and in the game related to the push order replay game, " The display mode may be different from the case where the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the push order navigation display mode displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

If No in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes mask processing on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and the masked information is used as the predetermined address of the RAM. Remember in. Here, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information is recognized by an illegal act, it is considered as a high profit related to the game. The push order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing mask processing {processing for keeping the winning / replay winning information (particularly information related to the push order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game. By configuring it to send to, it is configured so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As the mask processing method in the present embodiment, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (winning / replay winning information having a similar role is preferable, and for example, the RT state shifts depending on the pushing order. A plurality of winning / re-gaming winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a symbol combination that serves as a re-gaming role is used as one production group number (for example, winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 are designated as production group 4). The group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the provided winning / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replay after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. Also, even in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information among the existing winning / replay winning information such as the production group number is used as one winning / replay winning information for winning / replaying after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the game winning information to be provided (for example, the winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 is the winning / re-gaming winning information 19 (newly provided winning) which is the winning / re-gaming winning information after mask processing.・ Re-game winning information), etc.). If it is determined that the game is to notify the operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to AT on the main control board M, the winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In this configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets it in the register area), and then steps. Move to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus is won can be recognized by the sub side) (for example, the command to the sub side). It is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In the present embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, and the derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as a display example of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT in progress", (1) when the fall replay combination is included → the fall replay combination is not stopped and displayed. The order is navigating, (2) in the case of bells (1 piece combination, 11 piece combination) → the push order with the largest number of payouts is navigating, and so on. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game section is the "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) is displayed on the sub-control board S side. (A number that can specify) and an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous push order for the player), while the sub-control board S It is configured so that the production group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game, including the winning / replay winning information in which the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order, is used as it is on the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order. In the case of winning information, the effect group number in which the information related to the pressing order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

When the game section is not an "advantageous section", mask processing is executed when the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub-control board S to determine the effect group number. Then, the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the production group number is the winning / replay winning information, and the winning / replay winning information related to the winning combination (for example, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and numbers are assigned. It is configured to execute mask processing {processing to keep the winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and then transmit it to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which the information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order) that is highly profitable related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer to measure. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts by newly setting the minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the pushing order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an output request during reel rotation start standby related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, by the processing of step 1562 and step 1564, a command for indicating that the reel starts rotating can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the game sections, and the game situation which is advantageous for the player such as when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". It is a game section that is easy to set in. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is initially set to 1500, which is the subtraction counter and the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section". The counter value of (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game during the "advantageous interval") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). In addition, even if No in step 3402, step 3408 or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the "AT in progress state", the AT counter value for each game is subtracted, but the "advantageous BB state" and "advantageous BB state" In the case of "advantageous BB internal medium game", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. That is, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the state shifts from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is maintained while maintaining the AT counter value. It is configured so that it can transition (transition) from "state"-> "specialization precursor state"-> "additional specialization state". Even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible not to subtract 1 from the AT counter value when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. You may control it. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". Is stored, or "30 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, is stored, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α" which is the sum of the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery is , Without notifying in the game, "α" is set in a specific game after the game (a game that satisfies a predetermined condition at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game). You may notify). Then, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and an effect suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It can be configured so that the number of remaining AT games is subtracted for each game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning when the bonus is won in a state where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed. That is, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games that encourages whether or not the bonus is won can be executed by using the effect display device S40 or the like to enhance the interest of the game. The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is "30", or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of winning and adding as a result of the AT addition lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, continuous production over multiple games is executed to incite whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is "1". , The winning number (or winning / re-game winning information, or ball output group number) in which the game can be executed and the AT addition lottery can be executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". If is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "0". Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing continuous production may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transitionable conditions are the execution of RAM clear (RAM initialization), the stop display of the re-game (in this example, the stop display of the re-game 04), and the winning / starting of the BB. -It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state can be shifted and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transitionable condition (RT state transition in FIG. 28). (Refer to the figure), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1750). Even if No in step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1750). In the present embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped, but when shifting to "RT1", the shift timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for shifting the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and the RT states are satisfied by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. Will be migrated. As a specific example of transition to the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the transition to "RT0" is performed. The stop display of the re-game 04 is specifically when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1". , Re-games 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. , The RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

In addition, when the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the winning game (the condition device related to the first type BB-A, B, C operates. ) And the RT state shifts to "RT2". In addition, when the BB role is won in "RT2" (type 1 BB-A, B, C operates), it shifts to "type 1 BB-A, B, C". Further, when BB ends at "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (operation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C ends), the process shifts to "RT1". If the state related to AT is "low probability state", the BB is won, and if the BB ends, the RT state shifts to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player. Since the push order navigation does not occur in the state, when the "re-game-D1 to D3" is won, the wrong push order (the first stop is the left button, the middle button, and the right button). One of the three choices is the correct push order and the re-games other than the re-game 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are the incorrect push order and the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping the game 04, the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed, and the game shifts from "RT1" to "RT0". In addition, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the BB is won, and if the BB ends, the RT state is reached. Will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to AT is a state in which push-order navigation occurs, and even when "Re-game-D1 to D3" is won, re-game 04 Will navigate the correct push order that does not stop and display, so "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. The conditions for shifting to the AT state are, for example, (1) when the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state" is completed, (2) when the continuous lottery is won, and (3) the revival lottery is won. Satisfy if you do. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly shifts to the "AT precursor state", and the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, and "AT in progress" The number of games in which the subtraction is started after the transition to the “state”) is set in the AT counter M60, and the transition to step 1756 is performed. Even if No in step 1752, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a high-probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT in the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the number of high-securing obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high-securing obstacle counter, and performs the next processing (processing of step 3500). Transition. Even if No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", by winning the BB, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB state" and the AT game in the "advantageous BB state". When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and the "advantageous BB state" shifts to the "AT in progress state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, when the player is informed that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 at the start of the "AT in progress state". It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, instead of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is set at the start of the "AT in progress state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT in progress state" or in a state where the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for performing a notification effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional production that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the number of AT initial games is not limited to that of this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process in step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of AT initial games) is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game (the state related to AT is "AT in progress") after the end of BB. (The subtraction does not start during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state" , "Advantageous BB internal game", "Advantageous BB state", and "Resurrection possibility production state", and there are 10 AT-related states. The state will shift. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the "AT in progress state" and the special state transition lottery in which the watermelon B is won in 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". In addition, when 10 games have passed (digested) after shifting to the "specialized precursor state", the game is configured to shift to the "additional specialized state". As the game section, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "normal BB internal game", and "normal BB state" are set to "normal section", and "high probability state" and "during AT". The seven AT-related states of "state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", "advantageous BB state", and "recoverable / non-recoverable production state" are now "advantageous sections". Set. That is, even if the states related to the seven ATs that are the "advantageous section" are transitioned (shifted), if 1500 games have passed without setting the "normal section", the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated. Set to "normal section". In addition, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed when the notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed is the "AT in progress state", the "specialization precursor state", or the "additional specialization state". However, the game state is maintained.

As described above, when the AT counter M60 is in the "AT in progress state" and the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery is not won, the "Resurrection possibility / non-recovery effect state" is set. If the revival lottery is won in the "resurrection possibility production state", it is possible to return to the "AT in progress state" again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the "revival possibility production state", the process shifts to the "low probability state" and the "advantageous section" is changed to the "normal section".

When the BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the setting difference BB operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" To move to. Also, when the "AT in progress state" is won with no setting difference BB (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C), the setting difference BB operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, " It shifts to "AT in progress". In addition, when the BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "Resurrection possibility production state", the setting difference BB operates, and the "Advantageous BB state" ends. Also shifts to "AT in progress" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the "state for effect of resurrection", the BB with a setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the BB with a setting difference becomes independent. If the winning number is related to the BB role (winning number 20), it will be in a "low probability state" after the end of the BB (because the BB role with a setting difference will not win the revival lottery), and the BB with a setting difference will be rare. If the winning number is the same as the winning number (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB (because the rare role will be the trigger to win the revival lottery).

In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the case of the "advantageous section" and the "high probability state", the BB with the setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends. Move to "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to AT that shifts after the end of the "advantageous BB state" is after the end of the BB that was won during AT ("AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state") (setting difference). (Both with BB and BB without setting difference) shifts to the state related to AT at the time of BB winning among "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and during non-AT ( After the end of the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT in progress state". In addition, there is a setting difference in winning during non-AT (“high probability state”), and after the end of BB, the state shifts to “high probability state”.

The state related to AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or a "high probability state", and the AT lottery is performed. It may be configured to shift to the "precursor state" by winning the game, and to shift to the "AT in progress state" after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. By winning, the AT lottery is executed, and if the AT lottery is not won, it shifts to the "precursor state" and shifts to the "low probability state" or "high probability state" after 16 to 32 games have passed. It may be configured to do so. Further, a "waiting section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as the game section. For example, when the game property is such that the AT lottery is executed by winning the "cherry", BB If you win the "BB + Cherry" where the cherry and the cherry overlap, and you win the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of the "BB + Cherry" wins is configured as the "waiting section". You may. In this way, by providing the "waiting section", the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and the BB is won and the AT is won in the "low probability state". Since the advantageous section indicator YH is off during the period until the BB symbol combinations are complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up) in the case of winning the lottery, the AT lottery is won. It is possible to incite the player whether or not it is. Further, when the BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB. Execute an AT additional lottery different from the BB won in the "AT in progress state" as the BB won in the "additional specialization state" (for example, win the AT additional lottery than the BB won in the "AT in progress state") It may be configured so that the number of AT games is added and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, if the BB is elected in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB. The AT additional lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "additional specialization state".

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section is a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player and relatively high for the player. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section" which is a profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game to the state related to the current AT and the game section corresponding to the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an "advantageous section", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 0 in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. Whether or not, in other words, whether or not the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to AT (thus, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of staying games in the “specialized precursor state” is described. Things will also be 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the "advantageous section" other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. This is the case when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "advantageous section" is completed and the "normal section" is set after the next game, the information related to AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) Since all the information related to) is cleared, the conditions for becoming the "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. Information related to the AT to be cleared by the process of step 3515 (process at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the game remaining number counter YKc-1 in the advantageous section, a flag indicating the game state, and the like. In addition, this information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed, but depending on the RAM clear when the setting is changed, "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , "The number of stored sheets" and the like are also cleared, but depending on the process of step 3515 (process at the end of the advantageous section), "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , Information related to "number of stored sheets" etc. is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range when the setting is changed and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, when the process of step 3515 is executed) are different. It should be noted that the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, so that the "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state" may be held. In addition, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. By making the addresses of the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the range of the start address to be cleared and the range of the addresses to be cleared at the time of the clearing process. Further, when the "advantageous section" is completed, a command relating to the end of the "advantageous section" is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and the information related to how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed is not deleted. ing. However, when the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" on the sub-control board S side and information on how many games were executed in the "AT in progress state". Will also be erased.

When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0, (1) when the current AT-related state is the "high probability state". In the next game, the state related to AT becomes "low probability state". (2) If the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the state related to AT becomes "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game. "Normal BB internal game", (3) If the current state related to AT is "Advantageous BB state", the state related to AT will be "Normal BB state" in the next game, (4) Currently If the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", or "recoverable / non-recoverable production state", the state related to AT is "low probability" in the next game. It is configured to be "state" (because the information related to AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” is completed, and proceeds to step 3528. It is configured to turn off the advantageous section indicator YH when the "advantageous section" ends and is set to the "normal section", but the detailed turn-off timing is not limited to the timing of the present embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal is inserted for a game in which the “advantageous section” ends and becomes the “normal section”. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off before the start lever D50, which enables the start of the next game, is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is newly set to the "advantageous section" in the next game (it is decided to be set from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) common to all the set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights up the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1293). Even if No in step 3528, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). In the present embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. The timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous section" (the game in the "normal section") to the timing when the game medal can be inserted in the game in the new "advantageous section" (newly "" If the game before the "advantageous section" is a game related to replay, set appropriately during the period (until the timing when the start lever operation becomes effective in the new "advantageous section" game). May be good.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (T is set in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example). It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking the input port of a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power cutoff process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes a settlement button D60, a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a door switch D80, a setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, a power failure detection signal, an on reception sensor D10s, and a first on sensor. Information related to detection of the D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of operation and the sensor detection state of these operating members are sampled at the interrupt interval T. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a rotation cylinder drive control process (process related to control of the drive of the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53). Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. In addition, even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, all the error flags are turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number number error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, and the door switch flag are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (an error currently occurring) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes as in the second error (for example, payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (send the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), command related to stop timing of stop display symbol (sent immediately after operating the stop button as display symbol stop), winning / re-winning Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), commands related to RT status (all reels Commands related to AT status (sent between the time all reels are stopped and the next game is started), Highly secured failure counter value command (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (between all reels stopped until the next game starts, or immediately after starting lever operation (Sent), commands related to the game section (sent between the time all reels are stopped and the next game is started), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error error, a payout error error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and 7 Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. In this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it should be added that the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, in step 6102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after the execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, even if No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration process starts to be executed. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the reel acceleration process, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this process. On the other hand, even if No in step 6106, the process proceeds to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPU MC of the main control board M executed all interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the “number of interrupt executions” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). It is determined whether or not the timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel constant speed maintenance process, and proceeds to step 6120. Even if No in step 6112 or 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the reel constant speed state (after executing the process of step 6116), and then the reel sensor is reeled (corresponding to the process of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not the index provided on the reel) is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether or not the reel has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if No in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M has elapsed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state in step 6124. Determine if it has been done. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally constant by detecting the index by the reel sensor within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing 400 interrupt processes (configured so that 400 steps can be rotated with 400 interrupt processes), and the reel rotation speed is constant. It is longer than the time for one rotation (one revolution) of the reel (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, which is the time value for executing the interrupt process 336 times). With this configuration, how far is the distance between the index and the reel sensor (the distance until the reel rotates and the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel drive state becomes the constant speed state? However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured to be able to.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, in step 6126, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel reacceleration process, and shifts to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. , The reel driving state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as that of the reel acceleration process) is executed. Even if No in step 6120, the process proceeds to step 6130. The reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same process as the reel acceleration process described above, and the reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process are interrupt processes for each combination of exciting phases of the stepping motor and each combination of exciting phases. The number of times of execution may be different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop process according to the subroutine of step 6200 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M becomes the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, and for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is set by operating the stop button. It is determined whether or not the reel has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration standby state, and shifts to step 6134. On the other hand, even if No in step 6130, the process proceeds to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start executing the reel deceleration process) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and shifts to the process of step 6142. Even if No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process proceeds to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel deceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing at which the reel deceleration process is executed ends) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1612). Even if No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotational operation of the reel M50 of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (reel). When the drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed). Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor), the phase to be excited is switched, and the stepping motor is changed to 1-2. Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the positive direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the figure, of Φ0 to Φ3, the one indicating which phase is specified to be excited is shown in the column of “Phase to be excited” (details will be described later).

Further, as shown in the "reel rotation speed image" in the upper part of the figure, the drive state from the start of rotation to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is set according to the drive pattern according to each drive state. The drive is controlled. Here, the drive state includes a "reel stop state", a "reel rotation start standby state", a "reel acceleration state", a "reel constant speed state", a "reel deceleration standby state", and a "reel deceleration state". In the "reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed and the speed increases upward, and the horizontal axis is time and the time elapses to the right. There is. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, and this is limited to the case where the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as pressing the reel by hand or causing step-out. It is not (the case where the reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

The "reel stopped state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped, and when the "reel stopped state" is in the "reel stopped state", the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are in a stationary state. Is in an unexcited state.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. .. Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from the operation of the start lever D50 until the acceleration processing (reel acceleration processing) of the stepping motor is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state". For example, the time from the time when the reel driving state becomes the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is timed, and the start lever D50 related to this game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If this is done, the "reel rotation start standby state" is set.

Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from the state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left of the figure), the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is “reel constant speed”. It is configured to update to "state"). Next, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends by executing one more timer interrupt process. At this timing, the reel drive state remains the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state", and then the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times to drive the reel. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process, in other words, the final in the "reel acceleration state". The combination of exciting phases "φ3, φ0" is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, which is the same as the "reel constant speed state" in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of exciting phases. (When the reel rotation abnormality does not occur). With this configuration, the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed can be stably executed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” are illustrated. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of the figure. The "exciting phase" is a combination of the exciting phases, and the "interrupt execution count" indicates the number of times the interrupt processing to be excited by the combination of the exciting phases is executed. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to excite 220 times of the timer interrupt process, and the interrupt process is performed 100 times at (KA) "φ0" → ( KB) Interrupt processing 60 times at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing 30 times at "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing 15 times at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" Interrupt processing 8 times at (KF) "φ2, φ3" → Interrupt processing 2 times at (KG) "φ3" → Interrupt at (KH) "φ3, φ0" The interrupt processing is executed once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of times the interrupt processing is executed is just an example, and there is no problem even if it is changed). As described above, in this example, when the reel acceleration processing is executed, the number of times the interrupt processing is executed is gradually reduced by the combination of the exciting phases of 1.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when executing the reel constant speed maintenance process), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) "φ0" → (TB) at "φ0, φ1". Interrupt processing once → (TC) “φ1” interrupt processing once → (TD) “φ1, φ2” interrupt processing once → (TE) “φ2” interrupt processing once → (TF) Interrupt processing once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) Interrupt processing once at "φ3" → (TH) Interrupt processing once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " Interrupt processing is executed once at "φ0" → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" → ..., (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once for each interrupt processing. It is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). As described above, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the interrupt process is executed once with the combination of the exciting phases of 1.

Next, in a situation where the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to any of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is the "reel deceleration standby state". Is updated to. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the reel rotation speed is constant (a state in which the combination of exciting phases is switched for each interrupt process), and is a "reel deceleration standby state". "" Indicates a state from the operation of the stop button by the player to the start of the stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, the reel slides corresponding to the number of slip frames). .. The period of this drive state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at the timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reel deceleration is started. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time in order to stop the rotation of the reel. Performs 4-phase excitation to excite everything. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

As described above, in the reeling game machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing. Further, whether the reel has been accelerated normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is the process of step 6124 (the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state). Judgment is made after a predetermined time has passed since the update), but the reel is not at a constant speed because the reel sensor did not detect the index in the process of step 6124 (reel rotation failure). When it is determined that the reel acceleration process has occurred), the reel acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel rotation failure is subsequently performed. If the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can be reached to a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. By detecting the index by the reel sensor until a predetermined time elapses after being updated to, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the reacceleration process, and the player is executed by executing the reel reacceleration process. Can make it difficult for the game to proceed (the stop button cannot be operated). Further, by configuring so that the process of determining whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed is not executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. Since it is configured in this way, if a reel rotation failure occurs during the reel acceleration process of the spinning machine according to this example, it acts as follows. It becomes.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process is finished execution → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel constant Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of speed maintenance processing → Reel rotation failure is detected → Reel reacceleration processing is executed It is configured to be able to operate as described above.
In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the reel rotation is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), step-out occurs, and the reel accelerates. Refers to the case where is not executed normally. As described above, by configuring the reel reacceleration process to be executed even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can proceed smoothly.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel acceleration processing is continuously executed → Reel acceleration processing execution ends → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel reacceleration process It is configured to be able to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the game can proceed smoothly by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when the reel rotation failure is subsequently detected. Will be possible. Further, as described above, even if a reel acceleration process occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed and an interrupt similar to the case where the reel acceleration process does not occur is interrupted. When the reel acceleration processing is executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration processing is terminated. With this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel rotation speed can easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel reacceleration process. can.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Power off processing is executed during execution of reel acceleration processing → Recovery from power off → Reel acceleration processing is continuously executed (not yet) Execute reel acceleration processing of processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel drive The state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel reacceleration process is executed. In this way, even if the power off processing is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel driving state is updated to the reel constant speed state for a predetermined time. If the reel sensor does not detect the index within the time, the reel reacceleration process is executed, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Further, when the power supply cutoff process is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. It is configured so that the reel reacceleration process is not executed when the sensor detects the index, and by such a configuration, the player cannot proceed with the game (the stop button cannot be operated) due to the reel reacceleration process. Can be made less likely to occur. The power off processing may be referred to as a power off processing.

<< Action after final stop button operation >>
In the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example, the final reel (a reel that rotates to the end and is also referred to as a third reel) is stopped after the operation of the final stop button (third stop button), and a winning combination is obtained. Although it is configured so that the payout of the game medal can be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the action related to the payout of the game medal may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power off occurs → The third reel moves to the stop display position (rotation) → Detects power off → Executes power off processing → Power restore → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be configured to stop display → execute the process related to the payout of the game medal so as to act as described above. With this configuration, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in the game such as the common bell mentioned above, in which a small winning combination that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button when won is won. Even if a power outage occurs immediately after a power outage in the amusement park, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of slip frames is the maximum), the power outage is detected before the power outage is detected. It can be configured to complete the movement (rotation) to the planned stop position. In addition, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Winning role in the reel from the player's point of view Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally). For example, in a game in which the bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning combination, is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by the internal processing) → The processing related to the payout of the game medal is executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and even when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. , Accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal can be paid out and the player is less likely to be disadvantaged. can do. The timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the process related to the payout of the game medal, and as a result, the first reel rotation failure occurs. 3 It is applicable when the reel corresponding to the stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position (it can also be applied to the action related to the reel rotation failure illustrated below). In the above action 2, the action in the game in which the winning combination is won is illustrated. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (if the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions, the same action is obtained. May be good).
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view In the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. → The process related to the payout of the game medal is executed. The winning combination may be a winning combination (for example, a common bell) regardless of the winning combination, and the winning combination may or may not be won depending on the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, etc.). It may be a cherry). In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect) in which the back lamp (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) blinks, the game state is set to the predetermined game state. Even if the reel rotation failure occurs in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to perform a lamp effect. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to poor reel rotation. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the position, or when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to poor reel rotation (the same applies to other actions). Applicable).

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Power off occurs and the stable supply of power to the game machine stops → No. Operate the 3rd stop button as the 3 reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is a game Cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position from the perspective of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal. (This is the case when it is determined that the stop control of the reel based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. The symbol combination to be played was not stopped and displayed, but when the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role was normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → Execution of processing related to payout of game medals It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of detecting the power outage, the timing of stopping the power supply to the gaming machine due to the power outage, the timing of determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269, and the timing of returning the power supply are , Not limited to the above timing, the timing to detect the power outage and the power to the gaming machine due to the power outage occur during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the processing related to the payout of the game medal. It suffices if there is a timing at which the supply of the above is stopped, a timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and a timing at which the power is restored. Is applicable to all cases where the machine cannot stop at the planned stop position (the same applies to the action including the power off, which is illustrated below). With this configuration, the power was cut off immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button was received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination could not be stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. Even in this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal is paid out after the power is restored (the hopper is driven to pay out the game medal). It is possible to execute not only the payout from the reeling port but also the display (the number of credits) of the credit number display device), and it is configured so that the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be done. The timing at which the power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped may be referred to as the timing at which the power supply is cut off. In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect) in which the back lamp (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) blinks, the game state is set to the predetermined game state. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won, even if the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to perform the effect. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is at the scheduled stop position due to the power failure. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the second stop, or when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position due to the power failure (the same can be applied to other actions). Is). In this example, "the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped" and "the stable supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped" do not mean that the electric power supplied to the gaming machine is 0, but the power supply. The power supplied to the gaming machine may be less than the power supplied when the gaming machine is in operation due to a disconnection or the like, or the power supply to the gaming machine may be cut off.

<Action 4>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Reel wins from the player's point of view Although the corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, for example. , In the lost game, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss was not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the symbol corresponding to the loss is processed by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for displaying the combination is stopped normally) → The game medal is not paid out. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to execute the payout, and it can be a fair gaming machine and can be a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the playing field. Note that the above-mentioned action 4 is not limited to loss, and for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), a reel rotation failure occurs. It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's point of view is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (non-recoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 5>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as 2nd reel stop operation → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player It is not possible to move (rotate) to the planned stop position by looking at it → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (stop). This is the case when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the button operation has been completed normally. , When the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → Power recovery → The game medal is not paid out It may be configured to act as follows. With this configuration, in a game that has been lost as a result of the winning combination lottery, the power off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to execute the payout, and it can be a fair gaming machine and can be a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the playing field. The above action 5 is not limited to loss, and for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), a reel rotation failure occurs. It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's point of view is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (non-recoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 6>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Bonus role to the reel from the player's point of view For example, the symbol combination corresponding to (BB combination) is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally). For example, in a game in which the bonus combination has not been won and the game has been lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the player's stop button is displayed. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of) → The bonus does not start and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to act as follows. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to a bonus combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the bonus will be given even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to start, it can be a fair game machine, and it can be a game machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the game field. The above action 6 is not limited to loss. For example, a game in which the bonus role has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus role has not been won (the replay role has been won). It should be added that it can be applied even when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In the above action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and step 1269 In the judgment process, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → The bonus is not executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the bonus combination is won or inside the bonus, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the judgment process of step 1269 It can be illustrated that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed. , Whether or not the freeze is executed may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 7>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the symbol combination is normal in the judgment process of step 1269. (When it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bonus combination has not been won and the game has been lost, the player Looking at the reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination was stopped and displayed, but the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player was normally performed. (When executed)-> Power recovery-> The bonus does not start, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a bonus role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game is played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured so that the bonus of the medal is not started, and it can be a fair gaming machine and can be a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the playing field. The above action 6 is not limited to loss. For example, a game in which the bonus role has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus role has not been won (the replay role has been won). It should be added that it can be applied even when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In the above action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, when the power supply is not cut off, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and step 1269 In the judgment process, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → The bonus is not executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power is not cut off in the game in which the bonus combination is won or inside the bonus, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the judgment process of step 1269 It can be illustrated that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed. , Whether or not the freeze is executed may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 8>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that won the bonus role → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) Cannot → From the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus starts, In addition, the freeze at the start of the bonus may be executed so as to act as described above. With this configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed as a stop. Also, it can be configured to start the bonus and perform a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which is significant for players who would not start the bonus due to poor reel rotation in situations where the bonus should start. It can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage, and the player can proceed with the game without discomfort by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur. Become.

<Action 9>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that won the bonus role → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view However, in the determination process of step 1269, it may be configured so that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the power is restored → the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed as described above. With this configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus combination is won, the power off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. , Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the stop button operation corresponding to the bonus combination is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Even so, it can be configured to start the bonus and perform a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which is significant for players who would not start the bonus due to a power outage in situations where the bonus should start. It can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage, and the player can proceed with the game without discomfort by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur. Become.

<Action 10>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Replay on the reel from the player's point of view The symbol combination corresponding to is displayed as stopped, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally). For example, in a game that has been lost, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the loss is dealt with by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. (When the stop control for displaying the symbol combination is stopped normally) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 does not light up newly. It may be configured. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a replaying role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the game machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. No automatic betting is performed, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly lit. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, the gaming machine It becomes a loss in the internal processing, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for displaying the stop display is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the combination in which the RT state other than the re-game combination shifts is stopped and displayed. The same applies to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the gaming field. The above action 10 is not limited to the loss, and is applied to, for example, in a game in which the re-game combination is not won, when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Supplement what you can do. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as stopped from the player's point of view, and the symbol is displayed in the judgment process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal → automatic betting is not performed, and the reel game lamp D290 does not light up anew.
In addition, the automatic bet is a bet button (max bet button) because the specified number of game medals (for example, 3 medals) bet in the game in which the re-game combination is won is displayed as stopped by the re-game combination. It is supposed to bet automatically even if there is no operation of or the game medal is inserted from the medal slot.
On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the re-game combination is won, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 Judges that the symbol combination is normal → Automatic betting is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 lights up anew (if the re-game combination was won in the previous game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up. To continue)
Such an action can be exemplified.

<Action 11>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player It is not possible to move (rotate) to the planned stop position by looking at it → The symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 ( This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a lost game, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. However, when the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → power recovery → stop display of the re-game combination The corresponding automatic betting is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel is replayed by the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be lost due to the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the stop button corresponding to is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. However, automatic betting is not performed, and the reel game lamp D290 is not newly lit. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, the gaming machine It becomes a loss in the internal processing, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for displaying the stop display is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the combination in which the RT state other than the re-game combination shifts is stopped and displayed. The same applies to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the gaming field. The above action 11 is not limited to the loss, and is applied to, for example, in a game in which the re-game combination is not won, when the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. I will add that you can do it. That is, when the power supply is not cut off, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as stopped from the player's point of view, and the symbol is displayed in the judgment process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal → automatic betting is not performed, and the reel game lamp D290 does not light up anew. On the other hand, if the power is not cut off in the game in which the replay role is won, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 Judges that the symbol combination is normal → Automatic betting is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 lights up anew (if the re-game combination was won in the previous game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up. To continue)
Such an action can be exemplified.

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Replay on the reel from the player's point of view Although the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed, the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal. → An automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination is performed, and the re-game lamp D290 is set. It may be configured to act as described above for newly lighting. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the combination lottery is a replay, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel is replayed from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel) is at the timing when the re-game is won by the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination can be stopped and displayed. , Middle reel, right reel), and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is normally executed, the re-game combination is supported. Even if the symbol combination to be played is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, the re-gaming is performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the game situation by visually recognizing whether or not the automatic betting is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. Further, in the action 12, if the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to the power failure → 3rd Operate the 3rd stop button as the reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from → Power recovery → Automatic betting corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination may be performed, and the re-game lamp D290 may be newly lit to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a replay, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the replay is played on the reel from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left) is at the timing when the re-game is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to (reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is normally executed, the re-game combination is used. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, the re-gaming is performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the game situation by visually recognizing whether or not the automatic betting is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. Further, in the action 13, if the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 14>
Reel rotation starts as a game that wins the role of shifting the RT state (sometimes called the RT transition role) → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes the constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts the stop button Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → The RT state shifts as described above. It may be configured to work. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing when the RT transition combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. , Right reel), and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. The RT state will shift even if is not displayed as stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. In addition, the RT transition combination is a combination of shifting to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state by stopping and displaying the symbol combination in the predetermined RT state, and the RT transition combination depending on the staying RT state. It can be different whether or not. That is, in the RT state A, the predetermined combination A is the RT transition combination, but in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be the RT transition combination, and in the RT state A, the predetermined combination A is the RT transition combination. However, in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be won.

<Action 15>
Reel rotation starts as a game that wins the role of shifting the RT state (sometimes called the RT transition role) → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes the constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts the stop button Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Power off occurs Then, the supply of power to the game machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the power failure is detected. → Execute power off processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role from the player's point of view is not displayed as stopped, but step 1269 In the judgment process of, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored, or the RT state may shift before the power is restored).
It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle) is at the timing when the RT transition combination is won by the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to (reel, right reel) is accepted, and when the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. Even if the combination is not displayed as stopped, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 16>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not won the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → 3rd Operate the 3rd stop button as the reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel is the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) to → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → The RT state does not shift. It may be configured to act like this. With this configuration, in a game that has not won the RT transition combination, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player during AT, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Despite this, even if the RT state shifts (falls) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is unintended by the player. It can be a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming field can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 17>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not won the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Power off Power supply to the game machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power off Detects → Executes power off processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role from the player's point of view is stopped and displayed. In the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state does not shift. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game that has not won the RT transition role, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes the RT transition role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player during AT, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Despite this, even if the RT state shifts (falls) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is unintended by the player. It can be a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming field can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game From the perspective of the person, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel. → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel from the viewpoint of the person (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the 1st reel and the 2nd reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line) → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is stopped first. And stopped at the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the planned stop position of this example, the tempai sound is not output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second. It did not stop at the stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker.

<Action 19>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel Operation → 1st reel stop display → Power supply cutoff occurs and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → Power cutoff is detected → Power cutoff processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → Power supply Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel Operation → 1st reel stop display → Power supply cutoff occurs and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cutoff is detected → Power cutoff processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels when viewed from the player ( When the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels) → Power recovery → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of outputting the tempai sound from the speaker may be before the end of the execution of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the planned stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second. It did not stop as a stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the operation).

<Action 20>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 2nd reel reaches the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 2nd reel reaches the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the first The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel.) → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel when viewed from the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The bonus confirmation tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the effective line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbols constituting the bonus symbol. If the combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it is stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Bonus confirmation Tempai sound will not be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. can do.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the combination lottery is a bonus combination or a game executed during the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and a bonus symbol is configured. The combination of symbols did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the bonus symbol will be tempted. If this is the case, a bonus confirmation tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player will experience reel rotation failure due to the output from the speaker. You can quickly detect what you are doing. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the operation).

<Action 21>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel Operation → 1st reel stop display → Power supply cutoff occurs and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → Power cutoff is detected → Power cutoff processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → Power supply Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel Operation → 1st reel stop display → Power supply cutoff occurs and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cutoff is detected → Power cutoff processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels when viewed from the player ( When the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels) → Power recovery → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of outputting the tempai sound from the speaker may be before the end of the execution of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the planned stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel has an abnormality due to the power failure due to the output from the speaker. Can be done. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power is cut off immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second stop. Even if the bonus symbol did not stop, if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the tempai sound would be output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power failure, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the occurrence of power interruption due to the output from the speaker. can. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the power off processing is executed immediately after the operation is performed.

<Action 22>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to a power off → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Turn off the power Detect → Execute power off processing → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view Symbol combination is stopped display → Bonus confirmation Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to a power off → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Turn off the power Detect → Execute power off processing → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view The symbol combination does not stop and display (when the 2nd reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels) → Bonus confirmed from the speaker The tempai sound may be output so as to act as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel when viewed from the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The bonus confirmation tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the effective line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, the power off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is configured. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it is stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Will not output the bonus confirmation tempai sound, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power outage, the player will have an abnormality in the reel due to the power outage due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during the bonus, the power off processing occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is displayed. The constituent symbol combinations did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, the bonus symbol tempais when stopped at the planned stop position in this example. If it was planned, a bonus confirmation tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power outage, the player will have an abnormality on the reel due to the power outage due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected as soon as possible. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the power off processing is executed immediately after the operation is performed.

<Action 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined replay role → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) Cannot → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination does not stop and display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) No → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination may be configured to stop display → the max bet lamp lights up as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined replay role → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in the game in which the re-game is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. However, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the max-bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max-bet button is not effective. In addition, in a game in which the re-game has not been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed again. By turning on the max bet lamp, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is effective, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped and displayed.

<Action 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined replay role → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to do so. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined replay role → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in the game in which the re-game is won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. In addition, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the max-bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max-bet button is not effective. In addition, in a game in which the re-game has not been won, the power off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed. By turning on the max bet lamp, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is effective, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed.

<Action 25>
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends, Freeze at end of bonus may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, and the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the 3rd stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. In such a case, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, so that the player can promptly indicate that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

<Action 26>
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to the power failure → 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power off → Executes power off processing → Moves the 3rd reel to the planned stop position as seen by the player ( (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, the power off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it does not exist, the player will be notified that the bonus has ended normally by executing the freeze at the end of the bonus as well as the end of the bonus, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected quickly and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration related to the reel acceleration processing in the spinning machine according to this example described above,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when no rotation failure occurs during reel acceleration processing = A
Execution period of reel acceleration processing until the rotation failure occurs when the rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process = B
Execution period of reel acceleration processing after the occurrence of rotation failure when the rotation failure occurs during the execution of reel acceleration processing = C
If
A = B + C
It is configured to be.
also,
Number of interrupt processing executions for reel acceleration processing when no rotation failure occurs during reel acceleration processing = D
When a spinning reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation failure occurs = E
When a rotation failure occurs during the reel acceleration process, the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration process after the rotation failure occurs = F
If
D = E + F
It is configured to be.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power cutoff process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 35. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processed flag (for example, updates the inside of the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and error detection information (for example, the calculation) based on the calculated checksum. The lower 1 byte of the checksum, or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits the writing of the RAM, and the process proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for a reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of a push order display of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. The table on the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information related to the push order, which is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub control board S in this example). It is a table showing the correspondence with. For example, the instruction number for notifying "middle-> right-> left" as the pressing order indicates that it is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “left → middle → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A1”). The image displayed in is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display system and also serves as a payout number display device. When the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, the display on the push order display device D270 is whether the number of medals paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 should display "=" in the left digit like "= 1". By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the left side is "=" and the right side is a number as the display of the push order display device D270. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that it is a push order navigation display, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is an “advantageous section” is lit. At the same time, the display of "remaining 40 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT in progress") is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, the right side in the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). There is. In addition, since the current game section is an "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, and the display of "remaining 25 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that, among the conditional devices in which the combination displayed as stopped depending on the reel stop order differs depending on the push order combination (the conditional device accompanied by the payout of medals, for example, the bell) and the push order replay combination (depending on the reel stop order). Among the conditional devices having different combinations to be stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the condition device related to the replay combination) may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an LED display may be used to light a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number to give an instruction. The credit number display device D200 may be provided with an advantageous section display YH at the lower right. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he / she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to check if there are any medals left. Then, if there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, by turning on the settlement button D60 before it becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the game from being accidentally stopped even though it is an "advantageous section" from the next game. be able to.

Further, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this example, and a section indicator similar to the advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the interval indicator is provided). It may be configured (providing two), and in such a configuration, when the section indicator on the left side lights up, it notifies that the current game section is a "normal section", and on the other hand, it is on the right side. When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Furthermore, the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" are distinguished according to the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, "green" in the "normal section" and "red" in the "advantageous section". Alternatively, it may be configured to be lit in the "normal section" and "blinking" in the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is changed depending on the "internal BB game during AT", "BB state during AT", "AT precursor state", "AT in progress state", etc. in the "advantageous section". You may. Further, it may be configured so that the current gaming section can be recognized as a "standby section" by distinguishing it from a "normal section" and an "advantageous section". However, the distinction between "normal section" and "advantageous section" is made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether or not the current game section is "advantageous section". It is preferable to make it easy to do.

Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparing", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. It may be configured (notifying the disadvantage to the player that the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is subtracted in a state where the profit is relatively low for the player). However, even in such a configuration, it is preferable to turn on the section indicator to notify the player that the "advantageous section" is in progress. At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and the section indicator is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.

<Sub-program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of the checksum, and the like.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off match. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later in step 2010. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power was cut off, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the command is completely restored, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows interrupts and executes the command when a power failure occurs in step 2012. 1 Return the process to command processing.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, when it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that the checksum values of both do not match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the RAM in step 2014. To execute. After executing the process of step 2014, or when No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows the interrupt. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command reception process. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later. This one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is returned to step 2102. The predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to the process.

<Sub-side power off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing a sub-side power cutoff process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power off processing is a process started when the sub control board S detects a power off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates the checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has passed, the power off processing is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of momentary interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer and returns to the process executed when the power is turned off. If it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that the power supply has not been restored, the process is returned to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one command process that is called and executed in the process of step 2250 of FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect-related determination process at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start lever operation time process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, in the case of the first reel stop reception reception timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the first cylinder stop reception reception processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2258 whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, in the case of the second reel stop reception reception timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the second cylinder stop reception reception processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2262 whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls the subroutine of the third reel stop production related determination process described later. And execute. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the third body stop acceptance processing described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2266 whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. .. In the case of Yes in step 2266, in other words, when it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stop display symbol time processing (not shown) in step 2268, and step 7100. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately shifts to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the menu screen display control process described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the standby screen display control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the effect-related determination process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 of FIG. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is based on the high-secured failure counter value command received from the main control board M side, and the number of high-secured failure games remaining at the present time (high probability state). Check how many more games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the battle effect execution feasibility determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is determined that the battle effect is executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of high-securing obstacle games. Based on this, the stay stage transition lottery (lottery for whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed with reference to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). Even if No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. Refer to), the stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT of the game is "AT in progress". In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect determination process during AT, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the “recoverable / non-recoverable effect state”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the resurrection possibility effect determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advance notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). The stay stage is mainly a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured so that one of the stay stages is always set. If the stay stage is different, the tendency of various effects such as background effect and notice effect will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution feasibility determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of high-securing obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Lottery) is executed. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the battle effect executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, if No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). Here, the battle production is a continuous production that is executed over a plurality of games, and the battle production is won, that is, the battle production (winning) is executed, and the BB role is won and the AT lottery is performed. It is structured so that the winning is definite. The configuration related to the battle production is not limited to this, and even if the AT lottery is not won, if the BB role is won (after the end of the BB, the state shifts to the "low probability state" or the "high probability state". ) May be configured to perform a battle effect (victory).

If No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are prize-C (cherry), prize-D (watermelon A), and prize-E (watermelon B), and the roles that can be won in duplicate with the BB role. It has become. That is, in the case of Yes in step 3064, where the player has the expectation that the rare combination is stopped and displayed at the same time as the BB combination, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set in step 3066. , In this example, it is 1/3, which is lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056. ) Is executed. Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the Gase Battle effect executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (defeat), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). If No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and the next process (process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured so that it can be executed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high-securing obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, 4 or more, continuous production such as a battle production can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of high-securing obstacle games is predetermined. If it is less than the number, for example, if it is less than 4, the continuous effect such as the battle effect is not executed. Therefore, even though the continuous effect is being executed, the "low probability state" is entered. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from turning off due to the transition of ("normal section" is set), and the battle effect is performed only when the advantageous section indicator YH can be lit until the battle effect is completed. By executing this, it is possible to make the game machine user-friendly without impairing the player's expectation for winning the BB.

In addition, when the role of rare is won, it is configured so that continuous production such as battle production (defeat) can be executed, so the execution frequency of battle production can be guaranteed and the game always proceeds with a sense of expectation. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is an excerpt of only a part. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the "low probability state" and when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. It consists of three types: a table and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "low probability state", the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the corresponding number is It is stipulated. In the case of "low probability state", the current stay stage consists of two types of production stages, the desert stage and the city stage, and the transition stages are the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal medium game", and a "high probability state".

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 999 is assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 0. 19 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

Further, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the stage shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of highly secured obstacle games is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the number of placements is defined. Has been done. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage.

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 is assigned as the number. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 960 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the city stage, and 0 to 879 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the city stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of units. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 930 to 959 is assigned as the number of units when the game shifts from the city stage to the conference room stage. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 960 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as the number of units. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the conference room stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 0 to 49 is assigned as the number of positions when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the cave stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 are assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 are assigned as the number of units.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the stay stage of the skeleton game are displayed. , The relationship with the number is specified. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "low probability state".

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. If the current stay stage is the desert stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, 980-999 is the number of places to move from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is the city stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, 0 to 19 is the number of places to move from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 0 29 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of units when the conference room stage is maintained in the game is 60 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a cave stage and you want to move to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, 0 to 29 is the number of places to move from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 100 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a low probability state, 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game.

Thus, in the "low probability state", two stages, a desert stage or a city stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, in the "high probability state", four stages, a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage, can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous section", while two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section", and can be selected in the "normal section". The stay stage of 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". With this configuration, even in the "normal section" where you cannot expect to win the AT lottery, by selecting the stay stage that can be the stay stage in the "advantageous section", you will not get bored even in the "normal section". You can advance the game machine. In addition, when shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state", that is, when the "advantageous section" changes to the "normal section", the "normal section" is selected at the stage of the "advantageous section". By selecting the production stage, it is difficult for the player to determine the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", and the game can be continued while maintaining a sense of expectation.

A part of the production stage selected in the "normal section" overlaps with the production stage selected in the "advantageous section" (a production stage that can be selected in the "normal section" but is not selected in the "advantageous section". You may have).

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-secured obstacle games is 4 or more and the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-secured obstacle games is 3 or less are different, and the number of high-secured obstacle games is increased. When the number of games decreases (3 games or less), do not shift to a stay stage with a higher expectation (for example, desert stage → conference room stage), which is an “advantageous section” than the current stay stage. By configuring it, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the "normal section" is reached with a small number of games even though the stage has shifted to a stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" from those with low expectations (difficult to select in "advantageous section"), which are "advantageous sections".

The composition of the stay stage is not limited to that of this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is selected as the "advantageous section", the expectation, and the expectation of winning the AT lottery, and the BB. It may be configured to suggest a certain degree of expectation. As an example, the stay stage can be changed in the game in which the BB role or the rare role is won (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role and when the single rare role is won and the AT lottery is not executed). (Including and), the expectations of winning the AT lottery will differ depending on the stage of stay that has been transferred, and the expectations will be lower in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage". It is also possible to configure so that the expectation of winning the BB role differs depending on the transitioned stay stage, and configure in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in ascending order of expectation. Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an effect determination process during AT that is called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S continuously incites the effect related to the game (success) (AT continues to set the initial value in the AT counter M60, in other words. Then, it is definite that the AT continues to set the initial value to the AT counter M60. Instead, the state related to the AT of the next game is determined to be the "AT in progress state" or the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect effect state"), and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (success) and the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) are determined at a ratio of 4: 1. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game to be played, the revival effect (success) will be executed, and the player feels as if he / she has won the revival lottery (actually, he / she has won the continuous lottery, and the main control board M. As the control on the side, it is the same as when the AT continuous fanning effect (success) is executed). With this configuration, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "state for revival possibility production", but {win the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game}, but win the continuous production. By configuring so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even if the resurrection effect is executed, the rate at which the resurrection effect (success) is executed when the resurrection effect is executed can be increased, and the player expects the resurrection effect. You can enhance the feeling.

Further, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT continuous fanning effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. If No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be the AT final stage effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Further, if No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) is executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (similar to the resurrection effect (success) executed in the "state for effect of resurrection"). In this process, it is determined that the “AT in progress” state has continued), and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, even if No in step 3114, the process proceeds to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an effect related to the game (an effect of notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, "+50 GET" or the like. ), And the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect during AT (an effect executed during AT such as "AT in progress"), and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a resurrection possibility effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3150 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (the effect is the same as the effect executed in step 3116 described above. It is a production that notifies that the revival lottery has been won in the "state for revival possibility production", and in the next game, it shifts to the "AT in progress state" and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S did not win the revival lottery in the revival effect (failure) of the effect related to the game. It is an effect of notifying the fact, and it is decided to shift to the "low probability state" in the next game), and the next process (process of step 2300) is started.

As mentioned above, the "recoverable / non-revivalable state" is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game in the "AT in progress") which is the "advantageous section". Even if it does not exist, the player confirms whether or not the advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is configured to extend the "advantageous section" even in the next game "recoverable or not production state". It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the revival production is successful just by doing so, and the result of the revival production will be paid attention to. Further, as described above, the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the "AT in-progress state" and the "revival possibility / non-recovery effect state". That is, the execution mode of the lottery related to AT is different between the next game that wins the continuous lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed and the game that wins the resurrection lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. ..

In addition, in this embodiment, in the next game in which the AT state is completed, the game shifts to the "resurrection possibility production state" of one game, and the revival lottery is executed in the "revival possibility production state". By doing so, both the execution game of the resurrection effect (success) and the execution game of the resurrection effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to be turned on, the effect of the effect is produced. Although it was prevented that it could be determined whether or not the AT was terminated without confirming the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) The state related to AT is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the resurrection flag is turned on in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, and the resurrection is made in the game before the game in which the resurrection lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode for AT is obtained.
(2) It is configured not to execute the revival lottery, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether or not the "AT in progress state" ends depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game of the running set, etc.). With such a configuration, a resurrection effect (success) and a resurrection effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the final AT game. As an example of the production, "Pre-game of AT final game: AT continuation fanning (success)-> AT final game: Directing that the next set of AT will start", "Pre-game of AT final game: AT continuation fanning" Directing (continue to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuous fanning production (success) "," Game before AT final game: AT continuous fanning production (failure) → AT final game: resurrection production (success) "," AT The game before the final game: AT continuation fanning effect (failure) → AT final game: resurrection effect (failure) "etc. may be executed. That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT in progress state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won, and the effect on the sub control board S side is determined. It may be configured to execute the AT continuous fanning effect or the revival effect.
(3) In a game in which a resurrection effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the effect is that the resurrection effect (success) is performed from the predetermined timing. That is, it may be configured to notify the player that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is
(1) This is the bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and can be executed when the continuous lottery is won.
(2) It is the start lever operation timing related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect having the same effect mode as the revival effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) Timing when the stop button, which is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the first stop is turned on),
(4) Timing when the stop button, which is the first stop for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed and then the stop button is released (timing when the first stop is turned on → off),
(5) Timing at which the stop button, which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the second stop is turned on),
(6) Timing when the stop button is pressed and then the stop button is released (the timing when the second stop is turned on → off), which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed.
(7) Timing at which the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the third stop is turned on),
(8) Timing when the stop button is pressed and then the stop button is released (the timing when the third stop is turned on → off), which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed.
Etc.
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
(10) Start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
And so on. In addition, when it is configured to determine which of the various timings (1) to (10) above is to be set by lottery, after the timing when the stop button, which is the first stop, is pressed. , Even if neither the continuous lottery nor the resurrection lottery is won, the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit, so that the player presses the stop button which is the third stop and then the stop button. It is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the AT is released or the start lever operation timing related to the next game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a process at the time of starting lever operation that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is the AT-during state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to AT is the AT-in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-AT process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to AT is not in the AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a special precursor state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is the special precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the special precursor process at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. It is executed and moved to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the state related to AT "additional specialization state". It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is the "additional specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the addition specialization processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "additional specialized state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the state related to AT to "advantageous BB inside". It is determined whether or not it is a "game". In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, when the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal intermediate game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a subroutine of advantageous BB internal intermediate processing when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is whether or not the RT state is "RT1". To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, when the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has no push order navigation in the state related to AT (push order navigation is). It is a state related to AT that does not occur, and it is determined whether or not it is a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal game", a "normal BB state", or the like). In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, when the state related to AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. As described above, the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command, so that the effect related to the push order navigation cannot be executed. When the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M side sends a command related to the AT addition lottery winning and the number of AT addition games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command. In addition, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT counter value becomes 0 as the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress state", so that the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". In that case (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay is won, the number of AT games will not be added, so white seven or black seven will be selected. It is configured to navigate the push order that is not in a straight line. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, and the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", it is still an "advantageous section". In the game in which the push order bell is won, the push order navigation can be generated, but in the game in which the push order replay is won, the push order navigation may not be generated.

When the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2308, No in step 2310, and No in step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image based on the state related to AT in step 2316, and then displays the effect image and the background image in step 2316. (Processing in step 2110).

<Processing during AT when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing the process during AT at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and the instruction number in step 2356. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display of the push order replay game are displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number and the display color related to the number is the same. ) Can be applied when it is configured to be displayed. Further, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, and the push order bell is used. It may be configured to display different production images when the push order navigation is executed and when the push order navigation is executed related to the push order replay game.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A1 which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → middle → right" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is circled. Display in the display mode.

Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. Is determined. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order has three choices, it is information that corresponds the first stop button to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push-order navigation display.

If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, if No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of step 2360, 2364 or 2368, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

If No in step 2376, or if the process in step 2378 is executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2380 or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 4 or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode A (the above-mentioned display mode). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is more conspicuous than B). Here, if there are four or more games, the display mode A is displayed, and if there are three games or less, the display mode B is displayed.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2388. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

If No in step 2386, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display in step 2392. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2390 or when the process of step 2392 is executed. In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a more conspicuous display mode than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" Along with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the white seven and black seven do not stop and display on the invalid line. It is configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to have a small number of AT remaining games. Can be configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B by displaying an arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (for example, a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed) is encouraged to continue. , Battle effect) is also configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" Are not displayed during the execution of the battle effect so as not to interfere with the visibility of the battle effect. be able to. Further, with this configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and it is displayed that the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" ends, the battle effect is in progress. If a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command has been received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message that the "AT in progress state" is terminated is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on winning of forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added to the game that won the AT additional lottery. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a subsequent timing, which enhances the fun of the game.

<Specialized precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a special precursor process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2402, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2404, and the instruction number in step 2406. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A2, which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. Display in the display mode. In the first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in step 2412, and the condition device of the game is the push order replay. Is determined. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. Here, since the push order has three choices, it is information that corresponds the first stop button to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

Next, if No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the forward push instruction command. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2418. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2422. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command has not been received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2424 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as the avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2424, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or when No in step 2424, the background image during AT is produced and displayed in step 2428. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step S2430, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Special processing for adding when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2452, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2454, and the instruction number in step 2456. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4 push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the same display mode. In the first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since the push order has three choices, the information corresponds to the first stop button corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the forward push instruction command. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2468. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the push order is forward push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, from left to right. The push order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the reverse push instruction command in step 2470. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2472. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the push order is reverse push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, from right to left. The push order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the avoidance command is a general term for both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward push avoidance command is received, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40 in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right". Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processes of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476, or when No in 2474, the background image during AT is produced and displayed in step 2480. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing an advantageous BB internal processing during start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2702, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2704, and in step 2706, the instruction number. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the game. Condition device determines whether or not it is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4 push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the same display mode. In the first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since the push order has three choices, the information corresponds to the first stop button corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received the command related to 7 replays. Judge whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display as the first number. The display mode group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or when No in step 2718, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. The display is displayed, and in step S2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed after shifting to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the effect display device S40. In, it is notified that the BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

<Processing at the time of the first torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the first processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has an operation of the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Judge whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displayed in the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is forward-pressed navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replays are a general term for forward-push black 7-match replays and reverse-push white 7-match replays. In step 2508, in the case of Yes, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (continues to be darkened in the game), and moves to the next process (process of step 2110). Migrate.

If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays in step 2512, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the second torso stop>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing the second processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2550 of FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the second stop in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display related to the stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. It is erased, the push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is not displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

<3rd production-related decision processing when the body is stopped>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the third effect-related determination process at the time of body stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won a prize. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination wins, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins during non-AT (“low probability state” or “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not it is a BB role. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of the winning BB combination during non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during non-AT, and AT of the game. Based on the state and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, in the BB role that was won during AT (“AT in progress”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization preparation state”, or “recoverable / non-recoverable production state”). If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the state related to AT and the BB combination of the game, and then executes the next The process shifts to the process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the effect based on the effect executed in the game. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown on the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There are two types of states related to AT: "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are three types of BB start production: normal production, high-expectation production, and premier production. It should be noted that, depending on the type of BB start effect in the BB won during non-AT, the degree of expectation to shift to the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB is configured to differ. → High expectation production → Premier production ”.

When the BB combination is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB internal game, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. .. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. Is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming is 77/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect becomes the premier effect. The probability is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming 157/256 is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect becomes the premier effect. The probability is 32/256.

In the "normal section", even if you win the BB without setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C) or the BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), the premiere production Is not selected, and it is stipulated that the normal effect is more likely to be selected than the high-expectation effect.

Even in an advantageous section, if a BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference is won, the premier production is not selected, and there is a possibility that the normal production is selected rather than the high expectation production. It is set to be high.

If it is an "advantageous section" and the BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is won, the premier production may be selected. With this configuration, by selecting the premier production, it is confirmed that by winning the setting difference BB, it will shift to the "AT in progress state" after the setting difference BB ends. Can be shown to the player. In addition, if it is an "advantageous section" and a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is won, there is a high possibility that a high-expectation effect will be selected rather than a normal effect. (It is less likely that a normal production will be selected). By doing so, the player can infer whether or not the AT will be started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start production related to the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference that won in the "normal BB internal medium game" and the setting differenceless BB that won in the "normal BB internal medium game" ( The distribution is the same as the distribution of the BB start effect related to Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). In addition, it is not limited to this, and there is a setting difference in the "normal BB internal medium game". The distribution of the BB start effect related to the winning BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) may be different, and by configuring in that way, the BB start related to the BB with setting difference It can be configured so that the distribution differs depending on whether it is an effect or a BB start effect related to a BB with no setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). The state related to AT is one type of "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are two types of BB start effects, one that can be added and the other that cannot be added. The additional effect is an effect that suggests that the AT additional lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the non-addable effect is an effect that suggests that the AT additional lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. For the BB won during AT, there is no element of whether or not to win the AT lottery, and whether or not the AT addition lottery is executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, during AT, there is a setting difference in which the AT addition lottery is not executed. Even in the BB, the game medal can be obtained and the BB to be executed is in the AT which is advantageous to the player after the end of the BB, so that the BB to be executed is the AT addition lottery. Is configured to clearly inform whether or not is executed. Specific examples will be described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect can be added is 0 /. It is 256, and the addable effect is not executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect cannot be added is 256 /. It is 256, and the effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect can be added. The probability of becoming is 256/256, and the effect that can be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect cannot be added. The probability of becoming is 0/256, and the non-additional effect is not executed.

<Processing at the time of the 3rd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the third processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 of FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces a successful pressing order effect. "GET!" Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the "GET" of the pressing order success effect. ! ”Is not displayed.

If No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, if No in step 2604, in other words, the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610. In step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates the difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of AT games added, and to display the number of AT games added.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the AT addition game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is added to the AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2616. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. Further, as a method of notifying the number of AT additional games, (1) all of the additional games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the additional games is notified by the game, and the remaining games are notified after the game. (3) The number of additional games is not notified in the game, and the games after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when the common bell is won (when the role that is not originally added), or a plurality of games are notified. After executing the game (continuous production), the operation of the bet button D220 and the operation of the start lever D50 of the game in which the number of remaining games of the production display device S40 is "0" or the next game of the game in which the number of remaining games is "0". ) Can be notified.

In addition, when the common bell is won in the "addition specialization state", the number of AT addition games is not displayed even if the game is stopped according to the push order navigation (the AT addition lottery is performed in the common bell). do not have).

According to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the period that is advantageous for the player in the gaming machine configured so that the advantageous section indicator YH lights up in the "advantageous section". Can be appropriately notified. In addition, if the continuation effect is won by providing the "state for effect of resurrection" and the resurrection effect (success) is executed thereafter, the state related to the AT of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in the "AT in progress state", while the revival effect (failure) is executed even when the revival effect (failure) is executed after the continuous effect is not won. By setting the state related to the AT of the game to be played as the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state" and the state related to the AT as the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. With this configuration, by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in the game that executes the revival effect, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult to recognize whether the revival effect succeeds or fails. It is possible to secure a highly entertaining gaming machine in a gaming machine configured so that a period that is advantageous to the player can be appropriately notified.

In this example, if the BB combination is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, the game can be changed to the "AT in progress state". The configuration related to is not limited to the one in this example. It may be configured to shift to the "AT precursor state" as the state related to AT, and to shift to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7100 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is hidden on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device S40 by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items to check various settings and information on the gaming machine. It is a screen that can be used. As an example of the method of selecting and determining an item, operate the cross key SB2 (which has four buttons of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button) to move the cursor to a desired item. By operating the sub-input button SB, the currently selected item (where the cursor is) is determined, and the screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. Further, the menu screen may have a plurality of display modes. For example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. In other words, they may be different. Even if there are differences, they are all referred to as menu screens.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
An example of the items that can be selected on the menu screen is listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: The volume output from the gaming machine may be adjusted so that the player can adjust the volume. For example, after displaying the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment, the right button of the cross key SB2 is operated to output. The volume may be increased, and the output volume may be decreased when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated.
(2) Light intensity adjustment: The light intensity (luminance) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50) may be adjusted so that the player can adjust the light intensity. For example, if the screen corresponding to the light amount adjustment is displayed and then the upper button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) becomes stronger (brighter), and if the lower button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) becomes weaker. It may be configured to be (dark).
(3) Character customization: Characters that appear during the game (hero character, push order navigation voice, battle character, character that supports the game progress that is always displayed on the production display device S40, etc.) can be selected and changed. It may be configured, and after displaying the screen corresponding to the character customization, it is determined by moving the cursor to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2 and operating the sub input button SB.
(4) Reel arrangement table: The reel arrangement may be configured so that the reel arrangement can be displayed on the screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table.
(5) Dividend table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations constituting a replay or a winning combination by displaying a stop) may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided into a plurality of screens and displayed, for example, the screen of the payout table may be switched between the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen (may be configured to be displayed over time) such as an operation of the sub input button SB is executed. As a specific example, it may be configured as follows.
(1) Game end timing (timing when the third stop button is turned on → off, display judgment timing, payout completion timing based on winning, game end processing, a command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The game does not proceed from the timing, the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the command related to the end of the game, etc. (no new bet operation, no new automatic bet operation based on the stop display of the re-game, new start) The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses while the lever is not operated, the reel does not start rotating newly, etc. (until then, the sub input button SB is operated. But the menu screen is not displayed). The betting operation includes both the case where the bet button D220 is operated and the case where the game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and the bet is made (automatic betting based on the stop display of the re-game). May be included in the betting operation).
(2-1) It may be configured so that the menu screen cannot be displayed during the execution of the game (the game medal is bet, the weight period until the start of reel rotation, and the reel is rotating).
(2-2) The menu screen may be displayed in a state in which the menu screen can be displayed during the execution of the game (such as when a game medal is bet).
(3) During the execution of a predetermined effect (during the execution of the effect of notifying whether or not the bonus has been won, during the execution of the continuous effect executed over a plurality of games, the effect of notifying whether or not the lottery has been won by adding the number of AT games. , Etc.) may be configured so that the menu screen can be displayed.
(4) It may be configured so that the menu screen cannot be displayed while the re-game combination is stopped and displayed.
In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is displayed when the menu screen can be displayed. It may be configured to blink.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation of displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub-input button SB, but the operation of displaying the menu screen may be changed, or the operation of displaying the menu screen may be configured to have a plurality of operations. .. In the case of Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (the timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to the standby screen described later) to clear the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time for transitioning from the menu screen to the standby screen described later, and is an initial value at the timing when the menu screen is started to be displayed. Is set) to a predetermined time B (in this example, it is 300 seconds, which is longer than the predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (the flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is timing), and the next process (process in step 7200). Move to.

Further, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and is a specific example to be satisfied. May be configured as follows.
(1) It may be configured to be satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new reel rotation start.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen is continuously displayed, it may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time (300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B in this example) has elapsed from the start of displaying the menu screen.
(3) It may be configured to be satisfied by selecting and deciding a predetermined item on the menu screen and executing a predetermined operation on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item. For example, the cursor is placed on the volume adjustment item. By operating the sub input button SB, the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed. After adjusting the volume to the desired level by operating the cross key SB2, select by operating the sub input button SB again. The volume is set to the medium size, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes called a normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the menu screen is displayed. As an example, when the screen where the main character is walking in the forest is displayed and the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB, when the menu screen display ends, it will be displayed again. The screen where the hero is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200).

If No in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 7122 whether or not the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) to the menu standby timer, and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200). do. In addition, even if No in step 7104, step 7106 or step 7122, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 7200). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set to the predetermined time B (300 in this example). Seconds) are reset, in other words, the time until the standby screen is displayed is measured again from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers related to the display of the standby screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one timer related to the display of the standby screen is used. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as the timer related to the display of the standby screen, and the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the above-mentioned standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are waited for. It may be configured to be set in a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned on and off, the standby timer is set to the predetermined time A (180 seconds), and then the sub input button SB is operated under the condition that the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds. When the menu screen is started to be displayed, the standby timer may be configured to set a predetermined time B (300 seconds).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7200 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby screen is hidden. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device S40 when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game has not progressed). The moving image related to the story is repeatedly played back, the message "Power saving" is displayed, and the logo mark related to the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, the condition for displaying the menu screen described above requires the operation by the player, while the condition for displaying the standby screen does not require the operation by the player.

In the case of Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing flag (the flag that is turned on when the standby timer, which will be described later, is timing) is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button is turned from on to off is set as the game end timing. In the case of Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. The timer is started by setting a predetermined time A (in this example, 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above). Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer timing flag and proceeds to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processes of steps 7208 and 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached, but in addition to this, the sub-input button SB is operated on the menu screen. Therefore, it may be a condition that the image displayed before the display of the menu screen is displayed (the display of the menu screen is finished).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has become 0. In the case of Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag and proceeds to step 7224. In addition, even if No in step 7206, the process proceeds to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu standby timer timing flag is on. If Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0. In the case of Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110). Even if No in step 7224 or 7226, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

Further, in the case of No in step 7204, in other words, when the standby timer timekeeping flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timekeeping end condition is satisfied. do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition for ending the standby timer timing and clearing the timer value of the standby timer to zero, and there is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, the standby timer timing end condition is such that the rotation of the reel is newly started. If Yes in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7212, while if No in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7216.

If No in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 7240 whether or not the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen. In this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation. Start, etc. are the conditions for ending the standby screen. It should be noted that the standby screen may be configured to be able to shift to the menu screen (display the menu screen). For example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the situation where the standby screen is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As an example, in a situation where the screen where the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, when the standby screen is displayed because the A game has not progressed for a predetermined time, the hero is executed again by executing the betting operation. Will be displayed on the screen walking in the forest.

Next, FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed because the sub-input button SB is operated while the menu screen can be displayed. After that, under the situation where the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, 300 seconds) elapses without the operation of the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and all the reels are stopped by the stop operation of the third stop button, and the player presses the third stop button. Since 3 minutes (a predetermined time A and 180 seconds) have elapsed from the release timing and the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time, the standby screen is displayed. As described above, in this example, a predetermined time B elapses after the menu screen is displayed, and a predetermined time A elapses after the game is finished (after the third stop button is turned on → off). It is configured so that the standby screen can be displayed in, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<< Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example >>
Here, the configurations related to the menu screen and the standby screen applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, and there is no problem in appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations.

<Timekeeping start timing of standby timer>
As the timing to start timing by setting the initial value in the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed, (1) the third stop button as the final stop operation (stop corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) The timekeeping starts from the timing when the button) is turned on and then turned off, (2) the timekeeping starts from the execution timing of the display judgment, (3) the timekeeping starts from the payout completion timing based on the winning, and (4) the game. As the end process, the time is started from the timing when the command related to the end of the game is set or transmitted to the sub control board S side. (5) The time is started from the timing when the command related to the end of the game is received by the sub control board S side. You may. Further, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Timekeeping start timing of menu standby timer>
As the timing to start timing by setting the initial value in the menu standby timer that measures the time until the menu screen is displayed, the timing is configured to start from the timing when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB. You may. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A (timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) set in the standby timer described above.

<Configuration related to sub-input buttons>
It may be configured so that the initial value can be reset to the menu standby timer when the menu standby timer is timing. For example, operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. Therefore, the menu standby timer may be configured to set a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds), which is an initial value. As an example, when the menu screen is started to be displayed, 300 seconds is set in the menu standby timer to start timing, and 100 seconds later, the cross key SB2 is pressed under the condition that the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds. The menu standby timer may be configured to reset 300 seconds by the operation. In addition, the menu screen can be started to be displayed by operating the sub input button SB, and the menu screen is being displayed (the screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after starting the menu screen display. By operating the cross key SB2 on the transition destination screen to which is transitioned to (the screen of the transition destination may also be the menu screen), the initial value may be reset to the menu standby timer, or the menu screen is being displayed (menu). By operating the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the screen is started to be displayed, the screen of the transition destination to which the screen has transitioned may also be the menu screen) by operating the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2. The menu standby timer may be configured so that the initial value can be reset.

<Configuration related to stop button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is not executed. The stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) may be operated depending on the situation, or the standby timer may be configured not to reset the initial value. As an example, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, 180 seconds is set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting. After that, when the bet operation is not executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, even if the stop button is operated, the timer value of the standby timer is not newly reset and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured to remain as is.

<Structure related to betting operation>
When the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation in the situation where the standby timer is timing, and then the bet operation is executed ( When betting is made by operating the bet button D220, or when a game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and bet is made), the time counting of the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is executed. , If the other operations are not executed, the standby screen may not be displayed over time. In addition, in such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the passage of time from the betting operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has passed from the betting operation. May be configured to be 0 or smaller. With this configuration, the number of remaining game medals is less than the specified number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, the bet button is operated). When the game is finished, or when the player finishes the game with less than the specified number of game medals left in the credit (no bet is placed), the bet button is used when the clerk of the game hall cleans the game machine. Even if you operate and bet, the sound will not be output at an unintended volume. Further, even if the third stop button is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation and the betting operation is not executed thereafter, the timing of turning off the third stop button (may be the timing when the reel is stopped) is started. When the specific time (100 seconds) or the predetermined time A (180 seconds) has elapsed, the volume of the sound being output may be set to 0 or reduced.

<Display conditions for standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer and the menu standby timer) related to the display of the standby screen has changed from "1 to 0". With this configuration, when a bet operation is executed or some abnormality occurs in the timer measurement, the timer value reaches "0" without going through "1" like "20 → 0". Even if this is done (when zero is cleared), the standby screen is not displayed, and it is possible to prevent the unintended display of the standby screen (then the timer value is reset and the value changes from 1 to 0). It may be configured to display a standby screen in case of a timer). A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided so that the standby screen is displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure related to payment button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then one or more credits exist. In the situation, when the settlement of credits is executed by operating the settlement button, a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the operation timing of the settlement button, or the timing when the settlement of credits is completed (the last game medal is The standby screen may be displayed at the timing of returning to the discharge port D240).

<Configuration related to setting key switch>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) was turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch was turned off → on while the power was on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing. In addition, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened when the power is turned on. The setting key switch may be turned off → on, and then the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the front door is closed.

Also, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off and then on when the power is on. In this case, the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the setting key switch is turned on → off. In addition, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened when the power is turned on. When the setting key switch is turned off → on, the standby screen is displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the front door is closed after the setting key switch is turned on → off. It may be configured as follows. Note that "turning on the stop button" in this example means accepting the operation of the stop button in a situation where the operation of the stop button is valid.

<Configuration when a predetermined error occurs>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then a predetermined error regarding the main control board M side (for example, the game medal is the medal selector DS). The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the predetermined error is cleared.

<Structure related to front door>
As the final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end), and then the front door is opened and the open state. It may be configured to continue the clocking of the standby timer even when the above is maintained. In addition, as the final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end), and then the front door is opened. After that, even if the front door is closed, the standby timer may be configured to continue timing.

<Structure 1 during AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is "normal game state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation. While the standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the set timing, the final stop operation is performed in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress state"). The standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off. You may. Similarly, the standby screen may not be displayed even when a predetermined time A has elapsed from the end of the final stop operation even during the execution of the continuous effect, the execution of the bonus, and the ART. Also, in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), the third stop button (corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is supported as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the button is turned on and then turned off, the standby screen is not displayed, while AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"). In this situation, as the final stop operation in the game in which the push-order navigation was not executed, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) was turned on and then turned off for a predetermined time. The standby screen may be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Structure 2 during AT>
When the menu screen is displayed by operating a sub-input button or the like in a situation during AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) elapses. The standby screen can be displayed by You may.

<Structure 3 during AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is "normal game state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation. A standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the set timing, and in a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is a "normal game state"). The menu screen is displayed, and the standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display. During AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"". ), The menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the start of the menu screen display, the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) ) May be configured. That is, when the time values are compared, it may be configured so that "predetermined time A = predetermined time B <predetermined time C". The time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same, and the predetermined time C may be the longest.

<Other configurations 1>
The menu screen may be displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is being displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (2). ) A screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation (selecting and determining a predetermined item) from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (3) By operating the sub input button It may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. Further, even if a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen is displayed by inserting the game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen continues to be displayed, while the sub If a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the input button is displayed, the screen may be returned to the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed. Also, if you insert a game medal from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and bet, the menu screen will be displayed, and if you bet by operating the bet button while the standby screen is displayed, it will be displayed before the menu screen is displayed. A screen (a normal screen displayed during a game when a standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) may be displayed. In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and a bet is made, a menu screen is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is three, which is the specified number. In the above situation, if you operate the bet button (for example, the max bet button that allows you to bet 3 cards with one operation) and bet, the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on). If this is the case, the normal screen displayed during the game) is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the bet button is displayed when the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of three. (For example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation) may be operated to display a menu screen.

<Other configurations 2>
It has a plurality of display modes of the standby screen, and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, by inputting a password on the menu screen, it may be a predetermined condition that the game is inherited from the previous game history). If not, the moving image for introducing the story is displayed as the standby screen, but if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the moving image for introducing the character may be displayed as the standby screen. .. Further, in both the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as a standby screen, but whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not. Depending on whether or not, the frequency of displaying the story introduction or the character introduction may be different.

<Other changes>
In this example, the player has a first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning a prize, and a second BB combination in which the second BB, which is less profitable for the player than the first BB, is executed by winning the prize. It may be configured, and further, it may be configured so that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be won in duplicate (providing the combination of "first BB + second BB"). With such a configuration, when "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the highly profitable execution of the 1st BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB is completed, the first The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be stopped and displayed (the winning of the second BB is carried over even during the execution of the first BB). In addition, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, by executing the highly profitable 1st BB first, for example, in the situation where the closing time of the amusement park is approaching, the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won. In that case, the low-profit second BB is executed first, the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the high-profit first BB cannot be executed and the game must be ended. Can be prevented.

Immediately after the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be notified, or the winning of the second BB may be notified (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notification). If this is the case, the probability of winning the re-game may be increased during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Further, when it is hidden, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive villa chance time !!"). .. In such a configuration, if the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, it will be definite that the effect is generated = the second BB is won, so only the first BB is won. However, it is preferable that the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is executed even after the operation of the first BB is completed (the effect mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above. For example, "BB Renso Chance Time !!" is displayed on the production display device S40). Further, even when only the first BB is won and the first BB is won again after the operation of the first BB is completed, the execution of the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. You may. In addition, it may be configured to notify the winner of the first BB once after notifying the winner of the second BB (for example, the display of "BB consecutive villa chance time !!" → the display of "sorry" → the "first". 1BB is being won !! ”etc.). Further, when the second BB is hidden after the operation of the first BB is completed due to the duplicate winning during the AT, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared or the like (after the return, the effect is on the effect). (Reducing the number of remaining games, etc.), but the internal reduction of the number of remaining games, etc. may be continuously suspended. When the first BB and the second BB are won in duplicate, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small winning combination A are elected in duplicate, the first BB is prioritized for stop control.
(2) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are elected in duplicate, the small winning combination B is prioritized for stop control.
That is, a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control over the BB combination and a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control of the BB combination may be provided.
(3) When the first BB and the small winning combination A are won in duplicate, when the small winning combination A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination A (for example, at the time of the first stop, the first 2 When stopped), a notification corresponding to the small winning combination A (notification so that the small winning combination A can win a prize) is performed.
That is, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is to notify the first BB combination that normally gives priority to the stop control over the small combination A. Therefore, when the first BB combination cannot win a prize regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (the small combination A can win a prize), the notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. In addition, when the small winning combination A wins as a result of the game, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination A is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player according to various game situations that change in the middle of the game, and the content notified by the effect display device S40 or the like and the actual content. It is possible to prevent the winning roles from being inconsistent.
(4) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are elected in duplicate, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination B is performed during the rotation of all reels.

Further, it may be configured to have a display (7-segment or the like) for displaying the number of the stop-displayed symbol (or symbol combination) controlled by the main control board M. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradiction effect that does not correspond to the stopped displayed symbol (or symbol combination). For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the effective line, an effect that is likely to be output when the watermelon is won (for example, lighting the lamp in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided and has the following features.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by using the sub-input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when playing a game using the earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, it is output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine). ).
(3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

Further, during the AT state or the BB execution, the effect sound may be output from the game machine even when the game is played using the earphone jack. Further, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even if the earphone is pulled out, the volume for when using the earphone jack may not be cleared (initial value) immediately. For example, when there is no operation for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (to the initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the volume for when using the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided in a place that does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted in the earphone jack, the earphone cord does not get entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever. ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the re-game combination can be changed between after the end of BB when the number of acquisitions is more than a specific number at the time of BB execution and after the end of BB when the number of acquisitions is less than a specific number. It may be configured.
(2) There may be a plurality of RT states that shift when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after the end of "RT1", or may be configured to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state).
(3) The RT state is changed when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the transition of the RT state is not made to have a one-to-one correspondence with the winning, and the transition is made with a certain probability regardless of the conditional device and the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game).
(4) It is possible to install 0-card RT transition eyes, duplicate winning of 0-card combination, and duplicate winning of 0-card combination. That is, no matter which push order is stopped, no matter where the stop operation is performed, a 0-card combination is provided, which is a combination in which one or more winning combinations do not win, and the RT state shifts when the 0-card winning combination is won. It may be configured to enable the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination and the 7-card combination or the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination A and the 0-card combination B. When the 0-card combination is won in duplicate, either the 0-card combination that shifts to RT or the 0-card combination that does not shift to RT may be won depending on the pushing order. It is also possible to win the 0-card combination and the BB combination in duplicate, and give priority to the 0-card combination to win the prize.

As in this example, the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices ("left → middle → right", "left → right → middle", "middle → left → right", "middle → right → left", There are 6 choices of "right → left → middle" and "right → middle → left"), and the push order of the push order replay is 3 choices (the first stop is 3 choices of left, middle, and right). If this is the case, the push order display on the push order display device D270 differs between the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay, in other words, 6-choice push order navigation. The display and the three-choice push order navigation display may be configured to be different. As an example, as the push order display related to 6 choices, "= 1" in the case of "left → middle → right", "= 2" in the case of "left → right → middle", "middle → left →" "= 3" for "right", "= 4" for "middle → right → left", "= 5" for "right → left → middle", "right → middle → left" In the case of, it is displayed as "= 6", and as the push order display related to the three choices, "= 7" when the first stop is on the left and "= 8" when the first stop is in the middle. , When the first stop is on the right, it may be configured to be displayed as "= 9".

In this example, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the "AT in progress state", "specialized precursor state", or "additional specialized state", is configured to be displayable on the effect display device, and AT is configured. If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the game shifts from "AT in progress" to "normal game state" and then wins the AT lottery again within a specific game and shifts to "AT in progress", the previous AT While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), so that the "AT in progress state" is changed to the "normal game state" and then again within a specific game. If the AT lottery is won and the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", the number of AT digestion games is not taken over from the previous number of AT digestion games, and the number of AT digestion games is newly counted from 0 games.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts rotating, a display prompting the reel to be stopped on the effect display device S40 (for example, "reel" If you do not operate the stop button for a predetermined time after the reel starts rotating in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, (2-1) effect The display areas of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 and the display prompting to stop the reel do not overlap, and (2-2) the display prompting to stop the reel is not displayed.
(3) When the power is set to "ON → OFF → ON" in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, the rotation speed of the reel becomes a constant speed and before the operation of the stop button becomes effective. The push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing of.
(4) The state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT are the states related to the AT in which the push order navigation occurs differently in the game in which the common bell is won, or the push order navigation can occur. The frequency of push-order navigation in the game in which the common bell is won differs between the state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT, which is a state related to AT in which push-order navigation can occur.
(5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example), which has the highest probability of winning a re-game, the percentage of games in which push-order navigation occurs is higher than the percentage of games in which push-order navigation does not occur. expensive. For example, the total winning rate of the bell role and the replay role is 1/2 or more. With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting bored during AT.
It may be configured as described above.

Here, the feature points of the above-mentioned game section will be described in detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The transition lottery to the "advantageous section" can be executed except during the internal winning of the BB and the execution of the BB.

≪Waiting section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for transition to the "advantageous section" is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the "standby state", it becomes an "advantageous section" from the next game.

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) The push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) relating to a condition device in which a player's profit margin differs depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" (for example, shifting from a "high probability state" to a "AT in progress state" as a state related to AT), a lottery for adding the number of AT games, and the like can be executed.
(5) In the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) Advantageous section When the counter value of the remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the "advantageous section" is basically the "advantageous section" unless BB or push order navigation is executed once or more in the "advantageous section". However, as an exception, if the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and push order navigation will be performed once in the "advantageous section". Is configured so that the "advantageous section" can be terminated even if it is not executed.
(7) The measurement of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section YKc-1 is executed in all the games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the counter value is added for each game even during BB execution).

Here, the feature points related to the lottery set for the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) Whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery, and whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is not determined as the number of games elapses.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) When a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different.
(4) The performance of the "advantageous section" does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the "high probability state", and the setting 6 shifts to the "AT in progress state". Etc., it does not differ depending on the set value).
(5) Setting to "advantageous section" If you win the lottery, it will basically be "advantageous section" from the next game (setting to "advantageous section" by the BB role established in "normal section" If you win the lottery, you can set it as a "waiting section" in the next game).

Here, the feature points related to the change in the performance of the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" with reference to the set value is not executed (as a condition common to all set values, a predetermined number of games may have passed and a predetermined condition device may be established). ..
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(3) When the BB is internally elected, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(4) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(5) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Can be executed. A lottery for adding the number of AT games can also be executed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. Further, the following configurations may be applied individually or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1) Although it is an "advantageous section", it is configured to have a "high probability state" as a state related to an AT that is more difficult to win the AT lottery than the "high probability state".
(2) The continuous effect is composed of at least the number of consecutive games of a predetermined G number or more.
(3) It has a normal role that does not win 100% in the AT lottery and a special role that wins 100% in the AT lottery. In this case, if a special role is won during the continuous production, an effect for notifying that the AT lottery has been won is executed even during the continuous production (the continuous production is replaced).
(4) The more games remaining in the number of high-securing obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with a high degree of expectation (expectation of bonus winning, AT lottery winning), and the remaining games of high-securing obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with low expectations.
(5) Highly secured The smaller the number of remaining games, the higher the probability of selecting a one-game completion production with a higher expectation (expectation of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery winning).
(6) If the number of remaining games with a high number of obstacle games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the continuous production that is lost is not executed, but the continuous production that is a hit (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) is Can be executed. In other words, when the number of remaining games in the number of high-securing obstacle games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the production of completing one game can be executed in both cases of loss and hit, but continuous production is a hit. Can only be executed if.
(7) When the number of ceiling Gs (1500 games) in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The selection tendency of the effect differs depending on whether the number of ceiling Gs in the advantageous section is less than or equal to the predetermined value or more than the predetermined value (frequency of continuous effect, expected degree of jackpot of predetermined effect, etc.).
(9) When a new shift is made to the "advantageous section" in the middle of a continuous production of loss in the "normal section" (for example, a production to be defeated).
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production in the "advantageous section" transition game, "turning around and having a character, Stechen suggestion dialogue", etc.). The rate at which the effect is rewritten during the continuous effect (defeat) is higher than the rate at which the effect is rewritten during the continuous effect (victory).
(9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous production to the end. The ratio of notifying that the transition has been made on the sub-control board S side in the game when shifting to the "advantageous section" during the execution of the continuous production, and the sub in the game when the continuous production is not executed. The ratio of notifying the shift on the control board S side is different.

<< Point 2 >>
(1) A player can select a stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the "normal section". For example, it can be selected by operating the sub input button.
(2) The lottery result of whether or not it will be the 1: "advantageous section" of the stay stage A group will be announced in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game.
Stay stage A group 2: The lottery result of whether or not it will be an "advantageous section" will be announced later at the end of the game (or when the next game is bet (when the replay stop is displayed, when the start lever is operated)).
(3) When the "normal section" is changed from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the stay stage A group, the stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group. When the stay stage is changed from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the production group A to the "normal section", the stay stage is maintained.
(4) The AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and the stay stage A group is off is different from the AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and other than the stay stage A group. For example, from the one with the lowest AT expectation, "advantageous section indicator is off and stay stage A group → advantageous section indicator is on and stay stage A group → advantageous section indicator is on and other than stay stage A group"
(5) The transition of the stay stage (stay stage A group → stay stage B group) is triggered by the production in the game that has changed from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section" (including the production of 1G completion and the continuous production). There is a difference between the rate of occurrence and the rate of transition of the stay stage triggered by the production in the game that changed from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section".

<< Point 3 >>
(1) The higher the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games with high secured obstacle games), the higher the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of winning the AT lottery, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus). The higher the probability of selecting a stay stage, and the smaller the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games with high secured obstacle games), the higher the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation that has won the AT lottery, and the bonus). There is a high probability of choosing a stay stage with a high degree of expectation.
(2) When the remaining guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" are less than or equal to a predetermined value (4 games or less), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting the effect of shifting the stay stage.
(3) High expectations (expectations for winning the AT lottery, expectations for winning the bonus) High expectations If a production with high expectations is selected without staying at the stage, the expectations are high. Expectation (winning AT lottery) than when a production with high expectation is selected while staying in a high stay stage (expectation of winning AT lottery, expectation of winning bonus) The degree of expectation that you are doing, the degree of expectation that you are winning the bonus) is high.

<< Point 4 >>
(1) If you win the BB in the "Resurrection possibility production state",
(1-1) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed during the BB.
(1-2) After the end of BB, it may or may not shift to the "AT in progress state".
(1-3) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed during the BB.
(1-4) When the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" after the end of the BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be subtracted by one game in the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state".
(2) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed in the "state for effect of resurrection". When the AT addition lottery is executed
(3) If you win the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay in "Resurrection possibility production state", avoidance navigation will occur, and at the timing after executing the resurrection production (success) Notify the number of additional games.
(4) If a role that can shift to the "advantageous section" is won in the "recovery possibility production state", the advantage section indicator turns off at the start timing of the next game, while the "revival possibility production state" If a role that can shift to the "advantageous section" is won in the next game when the revival lottery is not won, the advantageous section indicator can be turned on at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of the specification that the AT addition lottery is not performed although it is an advantageous section in the "state for revival possibility production"
(5-1) Even if you win a role (for example, Watermelon A) that can execute an AT additional lottery in the "Resurrection possibility production state", the number of AT games will not be added, but 1G that executes the resurrection production (success) If a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) that can be added in (“AT in progress”) is won, the number of AT games can be added.
(6) Bonus when the revival production (success) is executed by winning the bonus in the revival production execution game when "battle production 3G + revival production (failure) 1G" is scheduled to be executed as the production at the end of AT. The number of AT games will not be added in the middle, but the number of AT games will be added in the bonus when the bonus is won and the resurrection production (success) is executed in the battle production execution game (any of 3G). Can be done. In addition, the production tendency during the bonus may be different.

<< Point 5 >>
(1) When there are a game state A and a game state B as states related to AT which is an "advantageous section".
(1-1) The winning expectation of the AT addition lottery is "game state A> advantageous state B" (the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added in the game state A than in the game state B, or the AT addition game. a lot).
(1-2) The number of additional additions that can be added when the winning combination X is won in the gaming state A and the number of additional additions that can be added when the winning combination Y is won in the gaming state A are different.
(1-3) The number of additional additions that can be added when the combination X is won in the game state B and the number of additional additions that can be added when the combination Y is won in the game state B are the same.

<< Point 6 >>
(1) The display modes of the fall avoidance suggestion display are as follows: when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to before the third stop (C). Make a difference.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of "A <B <C" from the one that is inconspicuous to the player.
(2) In the case where the AT has ended from the "AT in progress state" and "RT1" state to the "low probability state" and "RT1", if the push order combination is won, the push order display device is used for pushing. The order navigation is displayed, but the push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device (displayed as "???").
(3) If a prize 18 (falling combination) is won in the third stop in a game in which the fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, the display is maintained in the same display mode as the display mode after the second stop. ..
(4) When the start lever is operated in a situation where the power is restored and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is not completed, the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is completed. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed by the voice from the speaker (for example, "Left!").
(5) Even in a state related to AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as "additional specialization state", when the fall role is won, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is displayed with priority.
(6) Even if the faller wins in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is maintained.
(7) When the falling combination is configured to be a pushing order combination (whether or not to stop and display is determined by the pushing order), a pushing order combination (pushing order bell, etc.) that is not a falling combination is won and the pushing order is selected. When the navigation is executed and stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation, the display of the effect display device may be dimmed, while when the fallen role is won, the push order is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation. In that case, the display of the effect display device is not dimmed (or the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect is not dimmed).

<< Point 7 >>
(1) When configured to shift to "RT3" and "AT ready state" after the end of BB related to BB with setting difference (similar to change example 1 from this embodiment).
(1-1) By winning a role that wins with a high probability in "RT3", the player wins the AT additional lottery (100% may be won, or may be won with a predetermined probability).
(1-2) The RT state that shifts after the end of BB differs depending on the type of BB combination, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (the combination that executes the addition lottery, the addition) according to the combination that is likely to appear in any of the RT states. The lottery winning probability and the number of games added to AT) are different.
(1-3) Bonus A->RT1-> Promotion Replay A-> RT3 (high probability of replay), Bonus B->RT2-> Promotion Replay B-> RT3. The winning rate or the average number of additional games is different.
(1-4) If bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2, and have promotion replay A and promotion replay B, the winning probability of promotion replay A and promotion replay B is high for RT1 and RT2. It's different.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2 are configured so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probabilities of promotion replay and fall replay differ between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) There is a setting difference After the end of BB, the state shifts to the dedicated RT state (“RT3” and “AT preparation state”), and then shifts to the “additional specialized state” triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >>
(1) It has 1st class BB-B1 and 1st class BB-B2, and shifts to "RT3" after the completion of 1st class BB-B1 and shifts to "RT4" after the completion of 1st class BB-B2. When configured as.
(1-1) The execution mode of the AT additional lottery (the combination of executing the additional lottery, the additional lottery winning probability, the number of AT additional games) is different between "RT3" and "RT4".
(1-2) The production tendency is different between the BB start effect related to Type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start effect related to Type 1 BB-B2 (the selection rate of the highly expected BB start effect is different).
(2) When the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed before the re-game 06 in the "AT ready state" and "RT3", the process shifts to "RT4" and the treasure chest loss effect is not executed. In "RT4", the replaying role promoted to "RT3" is elected. In addition, when "RT4" is changed to "RT3", even if the player wins the replay-E1 to E3 after that, the treasure box opening addition effect is not executed.
(3) It has multiple types of BB roles, and even if the BB role is won, it is difficult for the player to visually determine which BB role has won, and after the end of BB depending on the type of BB. The RT state of the game is different, and the execution mode of the AT addition lottery when the promotion re-game combination is won differs depending on the RT state. When configured in this way, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect performed during BB differs depending on the type of BB (acquire gold treasure chest, acquire silver treasure chest, acquire copper treasure chest, etc.) The number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >>
(1) There is a setting difference won during AT. There is a setting difference between the BB start effect related to BB and the setting difference related to BB won during AT. There is a difference between the BB start effect related to BB and the start effect related to BB with no setting difference won during non-AT, which have the same effect mode.

<< Point 10 >>
(1) Suggest the set value when winning the BB without setting difference in the "normal section" rather than the probability that the effect suggesting the set value is selected when the BB with the setting difference is won in the "advantageous section". The probability that the production will be selected is higher.
(2) The BB won during non-AT selects a different BB start effect according to the setting difference, but the BB won during AT selects the same BB start effect regardless of the setting difference.
(3) The ratio that the BB start effect is the same between the BB with the setting difference won during AT and the BB without the setting difference won during AT, and the setting difference between BB and non-AT won during non-AT. The ratio of the BB start effect to the same effect mode is different between the winning BB and the BB with no setting difference.

<< Point 11 >>
(1) "No setting difference combination (a combination whose winning rate does not differ depending on the set value) + BB" When winning, select "Advantageous section indicator lighting + effect B" that can be executed when the "No setting difference combination" is won. The probability of selecting "advantageous section indicator off + effect A", which can be executed at the time of winning the "combination with setting difference (combination with different winning rate depending on the set value)", is higher than the probability of selecting {"rare". "Role + BB time" is a production that encourages the winning of BB (for example, a battle production) rather than a production that fuels the transition to a high-probability state (for example, a production that shifts to a stay stage that can stay in a high-probability state). Is easier to execute}.
(2) When a predetermined role (for example, cherry) is won, it is configured to shift to a high probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of high-securing obstacle games is "50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10%". → 50G ”, and if 3G is selected, the battle will be defeated, and in other cases, the battle will be won. In addition, the degree of expectation of the length of the number of highly accurate games (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who won the battle. Further, in the case of the above example, an effect of inciting continuation is performed at the 20th Gth with high accuracy (an effect of inciting whether the game is 20 games or 50 games, and if successful, it is confirmed that the game is 50 games). ..

<< Point 12 >>
(1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal section", and the probability of occurrence of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the "advantageous section", the predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) The predetermined freeze effect is more likely to be executed in the "normal section" than in the "advantageous section".
(1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of loss.

<<< Configuration applicable to this example >>>
The configuration applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, one configuration detailed below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. It should be added that it may be done.

<< Memory map configuration >>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, a part of the configuration of the memory map in the RAM (sometimes referred to as the first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) "setting value data": area for data related to the number that manages the setting stage, (2) "external signal system data": external signal output. Area for storing related information, (3) "RAM check sum data": Data used in the check sum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, and calculated from the data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off. Area for storing the stored data and storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, "0") in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, (4) "Control command buffer": Sub Area for storing command information to be transmitted to the control board side, (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer": Information used when power is turned off and restored, and is stored in the current stack pointer when power is turned off. Area for storing existing data and storing information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off and on, (6) "Unused area": Area for storing areas not used for the game, (7) "Saved data" 1-Saved data 8 ": Areas are used in the order of RAM in which saved data may be written to the maximum in design by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, or the like. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power failure) occurs, it is higher than "7FF8H". There is a possibility that the stack pointer will point to the address of. In that case, there is a possibility that the saved data will be stored beyond the area of "backed data 1 to saved data 8" reserved as the area of the data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, data that does not affect the progress of the game (less influence) on the address (address close to "7FF8H") that the stack pointer may indicate when the unexpected problem occurs. It is preferable to configure it to store data). Specifically, by providing an address for storing "set value data" at an address that is at least one address free from "save data 1 to save data 8" secured as an area of data to be saved in advance, the game is played. It is possible to provide a game machine that does not give a disadvantage not only to the person but also to the game hall. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that is not used in the situation where the game is in progress after the power is turned off and restored, and (4) "control command buffer". Is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if the command cannot be sent to the sub-control board S side, and (3) "RAM check sum data" is used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is turned off and restored. Since the data is not generated and (2) the "external signal system data" is the data to be transmitted to the hall computer, the data has little influence on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "set value data" is data related to the set value that affects the result of the game, so that, for example, if the set value is changed to a low set value, the player will be significantly disadvantaged. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the set value is changed to a high value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will occur in the amusement park. As described above, (1) "set value data" is important data for the normal progress of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the figure, (1) "set value data" is the highest data (data stored in the higher address). In other words, the addresses between (1) "set value data" and (7) "save data 1 to save data 8" are (2) "external signal system data" and (3) "RAM check sum data". , (4) "Control command buffer", (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer", and (6) "Unused area" are stored. With this configuration, even if a problem occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, the RAM that is not used for the game is provided. Therefore, the gaming machine can be configured so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. In addition, (2) "external signal system data", (3) "RAM check sum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "unused area" There is no problem even if the order of the addresses that store the five data of is changed. For example, even if the upper addresses are stored in the order of "(3)->(2)->(4)->(5)->(6)". Alternatively, the data may be stored in the order of "(6)->(5)->(3)->(2)->(4)" from the upper address. Further, (6) may be configured so as not to provide an "unused area". The data stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) above does not make it impossible to insert game medals even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed (game medals). The data is such that an error that makes it impossible to input the data does not occur.

The area for storing the "set value data" shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to store the following data.
(A) Total score data: An area for storing data related to the number of game medals that play the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed type rotating game machine that does not use actual game medals (total score data). When the score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, it may be configured to have 2 bytes as the area (1) in FIG. 59).
(B) Minimum game time: Data for counting the minimum game time of one time (counter value is subtracted for each interrupt process) (the minimum game time of one time is 4.1 seconds)
(C) Counter for the number of acquired cards when the BB is operated: A counter for determining whether or not the condition (number of payouts) for ending the BB is satisfied (counter corresponding to the value given to the player with the game value). Subtract the value)
(D) Counter for the number of acquired cards when the MB is activated: A counter for determining whether or not the condition (number of payouts) for ending the MB is satisfied (counter corresponding to the value given to the player with the game value). Subtract the value)
It should be noted that the above (A) to (D) and the "set value data" may be configured to be able to be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. good. In addition, when a plurality of data can be stored, all of the plurality of data are stored (provide an area for storing) at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59. It is preferable to configure it so as to do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the amusement park. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but an unexpected problem (unexpected power failure, etc.) occurred. In some cases, the stack pointer may indicate an address higher than "7FF8H", but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the amusement park.

<< Actions related to replay stop display >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action of the replay game applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example in the winning game will be described in detail. In addition, the configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the stop display of the re-game is displayed.

First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the re-game lamp D290 lights up at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp is set as an automatic betting operation related to the re-game that is stopped and displayed (when the re-game is stopped and displayed, a bet is placed without inserting a game medal or operating the bet button). D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up as the automatic betting operation related to the re-game that is stopped and displayed. At about the same time, the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on (the turnable lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

Here, the feature points of the action in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Structure 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are configured to light at substantially the same timing. When the insertable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert the game medal, he / she recognizes that the game medal cannot be inserted by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the turnable lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by lighting the insertable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 substantially at the same time as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's judgment regarding the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50, and the wrong game medal is displayed. It is possible to prevent turning on and operation of the start lever D50.

<Structure 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed to the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by winning the re-game, and it is possible to notify that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, so that the progress of the game can be promoted. It can be smoothed.

<Structure 3>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the start lamp D180. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and then the start lamp D180 is turned on so that the start lever D50 can be operated by the re-game winning. By notifying the player of the fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 4>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing prior to the lighting of the onset lamp D300. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and then, by turning on the insertable lamp D300, it is announced that the game medal can be inserted. This makes it possible to smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 5>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. , Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 6>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. , Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 7>
Regarding the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit after the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit (What are the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213? Does not light up at about the same time). With such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by winning the re-game has been performed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 8>
After the replay is stopped and displayed, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. If a plurality of lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the game state. Therefore, by turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 almost at the same time, the player You will be able to quickly grasp the game status.

<Structure 9>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the re-game stop display is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-game stop display. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. , Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 10>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the re-game stop display is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-game stop display. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. , Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 11>
The lighting timings of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<< Other Actions 1 >>
Here, an action different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the winning game of the re-game applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below as another action 1.

<Structure 12>
The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 may be configured to be always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed to the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by winning the re-game, and it is possible to notify that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, so that the progress of the game can be achieved. Can be smoothed.

<Structure 13>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially at the same time. I want to notify the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2-bet lamp D212) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game status, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is temporarily turned off. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and further, the lighting timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 related to the next game in which the re-game lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert the game medal by turning on the light earlier than that.

<Structure 14>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially at the same time. I want to notify the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3-bet lamp D213) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game state, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is temporarily turned off. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and further, the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-game lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert the game medal by turning on the light before.

<Structure 15>
If the re-game is won in a certain game and the re-game is also won in the next game of the certain game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up based on the stop display of the re-game related to the certain game. Therefore, the re-game lamp D290 may be configured to continue to light until the end of the game one after another of the certain game. By continuously lighting the re-game lamp D290 in this way, the player can be notified of the winning of the re-game as soon as possible, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 16>
Various lamps such as the re-game lamp D290, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 1-bet lamp D211, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300, triggered by the third stop operation (or the re-game symbol stop display). Control may be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the notification by the lamp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Structure 17>
The lighting timings of the re-game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to be substantially simultaneous. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is lit based on the stop display of the re-game.

<Structure 18>
Based on the display that the replay has stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost at the same time, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off. It may be configured to light up substantially at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the re-game is won is three.

<Structure 19>
Based on the display that the replay has stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost at the same time, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off again. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to light up substantially at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the re-game is won is three, and it is clear that the lamp is lit based on the stop display of the re-game. Can be notified to.

<< Other actions 2 >>
Here, further, an action different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the winning game of the replay game applicable to the revolving gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below as another action 2 using FIGS. 61 to 63. Describe.

<Action diagram 2 when the replay stop is displayed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the operation applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. At about the same time, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on, and at substantially the same time, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 are turned on. The possible lamp D300 lights up almost at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 3 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Action diagram 4 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 and The turnable lamp D300 lights up. After that, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (4) in the figure. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Action diagram 5 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are displayed. Turns off at about the same time. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the replay lamp D290 are turned on at substantially the same time. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time.

<Action diagram 6 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 lights up almost at the same time as the 2-bet lamp. The D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 7 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290 is displayed. The start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Action diagram 8 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are displayed. Turns off at about the same time. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 And lights up almost at the same time.

<Action diagram 9 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 10 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

Of the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, those having the same configuration as the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19 can produce the same effects as those of the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19.

It should be noted that, as described above, the stop display timing of the re-game symbol, the operation timing of the stop button, the on / off timing of the re-game lamp D290, the on / off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, the on / off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212, 1 It should be added that there is no problem in combining the lighting / extinguishing timing of the bet lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the turnable lamp D300.

In the above, the configuration in which the game medal can be inserted even while the re-game stop display is displayed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game medal cannot be inserted while the re-game stop display is displayed. It may be configured (applicable to all configurations described above). In such a configuration, the onset lamp D300 remains off during the period when the replay is stopped and displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned substantially simultaneous means as long as it can be recognized that they are apparently simultaneous when the player visually recognizes the interrupt processing. For example, there is no problem even if they are almost simultaneous.

<< Configuration related to bet button lamps >>
The configuration of the bet button lamp S50 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example may be as follows.

The process of enabling the bet button D220 from invalid is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M sends a command for lighting the bet button lamp S50 to the sub control board S side (main control). The board M may be configured to transmit a command to the effect that the bet button D220 is enabled on the sub-control board S side), and then the sub-control board S receives the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control board M. The process for lighting the bet button lamp S50 may be executed by receiving the command for lighting the bet button lamp S50. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 manages lighting and extinguishing on the sub control board S side, but the bet button D220 is effective depending on the game situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be lit reliably, and even if the player visually recognizes the lighting of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether the bet (bet button D220) is effective, the main control board M side It can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation.

<< Configuration related to stop button lamp >>
The configuration of the stop button lamp S60 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example may be as follows.

The process of disabling the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M is the sub control board. A command for lighting the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the process for enabling the above is executed) is transmitted to the S side {the main control board M is the stop button on the sub control board S side. It may be configured to transmit a command indicating that D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is enabled}, and then the sub control board S is the main control board. By receiving the command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M, the process for turning on the stop button lamp S60 may be executed. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 is controlled to be turned on and off on the sub control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective depending on the game situation on the main control board M side. The stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on, and the player visually recognizes the lighting of the stop button lamp S60 and the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Even if it is determined whether or not is effective, it can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<< Configuration related to reel unit RU applicable to this example >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the spinning machine according to this example is provided with each of the reels M50 (M51, M52 and M53) rotatably via the reel unit RU. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the spinning machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably stores all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and an opening RU10 is formed. The three reels M51, M52 and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52 and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. The details will be described later, but each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to the reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top RU 20 and a bottom RU 30 with an opening RU 10 interposed therebetween. By placing the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the pedestal portion BU described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal portion BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed at the front end of the bottom RU 30 of the reel unit RU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. There is. The three through holes RU40 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<< Pedestal BU >>
The pedestal portion BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate-like shape. The end of the pedestal portion BU is attached to the left side surface, the right side side surface, the back surface, etc. of the back box with screws or the like (not shown), and the pedestal portion BU is fixed to the back box. The pedestal BU is attached to the back box so as to extend horizontally. As described above, the reel unit RU is mounted on the pedestal portion BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
At the front end of the pedestal BU, a plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU 10 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the pedestal portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

The number and positions of the through holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 may be arranged in the horizontal direction so as to correspond to each other, and the reel unit RU may be stably mounted on the pedestal portion BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU, or the reel unit may be configured by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU. Both the RU and one reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53) may be configured to be attached to the pedestal BU.

<< How to fix the reel unit RU >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU, and each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the screw hole BU10 of the corresponding pedestal portion BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU 10 through the through hole RU 40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position on the pedestal portion BU. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU.

In addition to the case where the reel unit RU is attached by a screwing member such as a screw or a bolt in addition to the screw BS, the reel unit RU may be detachably attached by using a detachable rivet, for example, a member such as a push rivet. It suffices if the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

In this example, the configuration in which the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a through hole RU40 is provided in the upper part of the reel unit RU and inside the housing by a screw BS. It may be configured to be fixed (fixed so as to hang), or through holes RU40 may be provided on both side surface portions of the reel unit RU and fixed to the inside of the housing by a screw BS. Further, even in such a configuration, the configuration relating to the position of the screw BS and the drop position of the screw BS described in detail below (for example, the configuration relating to the screw BS arranged at the position closest to the position where the front door DU opens and closes). ) Is applicable.

<< Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS >>
FIG. 66 (a) is a perspective view from the right side of the back surface of the hopper H40, and FIG. 66 (b) is a perspective view from the left side of the back surface of the hopper H40. Note that FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) also show arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS, which will be described later. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 (sometimes referred to as a main tank member) is a funnel-shaped tank molded of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to go around, and the opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. NS. The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medals inserted from the above-mentioned medal insertion slot D170 are introduced into the hopper H40 via the opening H30. The hopper H40 may be composed of a plurality of members, and the plurality of members may be collectively referred to as a hopper H40, a main tank member, a main tank unit, and the like.

Further, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom portion H52, a right side inclined portion H54, and a left side inclined portion H56. The right-side inclined portion H54 is arranged on the right side of the hopper H40, and the game medal introduced on the right side of the hopper H40 is guided toward the hopper bottom portion H52, which will be described later, by its own weight. The left inclined portion H56 is arranged on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides the medal introduced on the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is arranged so as to cover the upper part of substantially the left half of the disc H50, which will be described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being connected to each other on the hopper bottom portion H52 and being unable to fall, and to smoothly guide the game medals toward the hopper bottom portion H52.

By providing the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, all the game medals introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom portion H52. The medals guided by the right-side inclined portion H54, the left-side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are stored in the hopper bottom portion H52. As described above, the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing the game medal inside the hopper H40.

A disk H50 as a rotating body is arranged on the bottom H52 of the hopper. The disc H50 is rotationally driven by the hopper motor H80 described above, and the game medal is ejected from the game medal outlet H60 by the rotational operation of the disc H50. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be ejected one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide unit H62>
Inside the front side wall H42, a discharge guide portion H62 is formed along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and has an inclined surface H64 formed so as to be inclined. When the hopper H40 is arranged in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located below the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, but is formed so as to be slightly widened downward (from the left side to the right side).

The discharge guide unit H62 guides the game medals at the upper part of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS and stores them in the hopper H40 before the game medals are stored in the hopper H40 and the game medals overflow from the hopper H40. It is a member to reduce the number of medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide unit H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging the game medal to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right-side inclined portion H54, the left-side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as storage inclined portions for storing the game medals inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide portion H62 holds the game medals. It functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

Further, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left side to the right side. That is, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have an inclined downward to the right. The final target of the left side inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of game medals can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

A protruding wall H58 projecting upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 is erected in the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. The protruding wall H58 can prevent the medal placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling onto the bottom of the hopper H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially square columnar shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the upper portion, and medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored inside the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<< Dropping of the screw BS of the reel unit RU >>
A front door DU is attached to the revolving gaming machine so as to be openable and closable with respect to the back box (the front door DU and the back box may be collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (left side when viewed from the player) as the center of rotation. Therefore, the right side of the front door DU (the right side when viewed from the player) has the largest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact or collision with the back box is generated and propagates to the back box. Since the impact is generated on the right side of the revolving pachinko machine, the impact on the right side of the revolving pachinko machine is the largest, and the impact tends to be gradually weakened on the left side of the revolving pachinko machine.

As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three locations on the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right side screw BS screwed into the screw hole BU10 on the right side receives the largest impact. Therefore, the right side screw BS screwed into the right side screw hole BU10 is most likely to loosen due to an impact, and when the screwing is released, the right side screw BS falls off and falls. Further, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subject to an impact, and may loosen and fall off due to the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the screw hole BU10 on the left side is expected to have a small impact to some extent, but it is naturally possible that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of propagation of the impact and the usage time.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1) >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged at the lower part of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right side screw BS among the three screw BSs described above.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right-side screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and by the weight of the right-side screw BS, it rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right side screw BS is dropped due to an impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS prevents the dropped screw BS from entering the hopper H40. It is possible to prevent the disk H50 from being hindered from rotating or damaging the disk H50, and to allow the hopper H40 to operate stably.

In the above-mentioned example, only the right side screw BS was targeted, but the hopper H40 is located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 so that all three left side screw BS, center screw BS, and right side screw BS are located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. And the reel unit RU may be positioned. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, a screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front door DU is prone to impact due to contact with the back box or collision. A member such as a screw attached to the right side (right side when viewed from the player) may also be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when it falls off.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2) >>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, among the three screw BSs described above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right screw BS. In FIG. 67, the same configuration as in FIG. 64 is shown with the same reference numerals.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it freely falls downward (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS as it is (without contacting the inclined surface H64).

When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and by the weight of the central screw BS, it rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

Prevents the dropped right-side screw BS and central screw BS from entering the hopper H40, and prevents the dropped screw BS from hindering the rotational operation of the disk H50 or damaging the disk H50. It can be operated stably.

In the above-mentioned example, the right side screw BS and the center screw BS are targeted, but the left side screw BS also positions the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU so as to be located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. May be good. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As described above, it is preferable to form a protruding wall H58 protruding upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has fallen off and is placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling onto the bottom of the hopper H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or higher than the height at which the screw BS rebounds when it falls on the inclined surface H64. It is possible to prevent the screw BS from falling onto the bottom H52 of the hopper and prevent the screw BS from interfering with or causing a failure of the operation of the disk H50.

In this way, even if the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration caused by opening and closing the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not invade the hopper H40 and assists the medal. By configuring the tank HS to fall into the tank HS, the manager of the amusement park can easily collect the detached screw BS.

<< Hopper H400 >>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right side screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall surface H48 when viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The dropped right side screw BS can be shared with the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64 by storing the dropped right side screw BS in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40.

On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, the hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right side (right side wall H480) may be used. The hopper H400 has a bottom opening H410 formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480, and when the right screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400 and further passes through the bottom opening H410 to enter the medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this way, through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right side screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40.

<< Extension RU50 >>
In the above-mentioned example, when the screw BS falls off, it freely falls toward the lower medal auxiliary tank HS as it is. On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 65, the extension portion EN may be provided at the lower part of the reel unit RU or the pedestal portion BU. By providing the extension portion EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it does not fall immediately, but once guided by the extension portion EN, it can be dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this way, the extension portion EN makes it possible to match the position where the screw BS is attached with the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged.

<< Configuration of medal auxiliary tank HS >>
<Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode>
As shown in FIG. 68, the medal auxiliary tank HS is formed with at least two through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes on the back surface. Further, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided in the lower part of the back surface of the back box. The two full detection electrodes DE have an elongated shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to project forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrodes DE pass through the corresponding fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 and project toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As the medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL of the stored game medals (see FIG. 69 (c)) gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. Note that FIG. 69 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost portion UL shown in FIG. 69 (c) is a line connecting the contours of the game medals located in the uppermost portion UL of the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS (for example, an envelope line). (For convenience, the top UL is illustrated with a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE conduct with each other through the plurality of medals, between the two full detection electrodes DE. An electrical circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the continuity detection board CC outputs a signal indicating that the two fullness detection electrodes DE are conducting. By doing so, when the game medals are stored up to the positions of the two full detection electrodes DE, the medal full error can be detected.

The number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, but may be three or more. For example, in the case of providing three, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, one full detection electrode is newly provided below the two full detection electrodes, and the newly provided one is provided. It can be configured so that a medal full error can be detected by conducting the fullness detection electrode and any one of the two fullness detection electrodes described above, and by making such a configuration, the medal assist Even when the game medals are not evenly stored in the tank HS (for example, when the game medals are stored unevenly to the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), the medal full error can be detected.

<< Material of bis BS and material of medal >>
The material of the screw BS is magnetically conductive and conductive. For example, it is made of steel. Further, the material of the medal cannot be magnetized and is conductive. For example, it is made of brass plated or stainless steel. With this configuration, even if the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<< Relationship between the total length BL of the screw BS and the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE >>
The left side screw BS, the center screw BS and the right side screw BS described above are used to attach the reel unit RU to the pedestal portion BU. FIG. 69B is a front view showing the entire screw BS. As this screw BS, one having a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69 (b)) shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69 (a)) is used (of the screw BS). Overall length BL <distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right side screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than between the full detection electrodes DE, so two screw BSs alone are used. It does not conduct with the full detection electrode DE (the screw BS does not get caught in the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. Further, FIG. 69A is a plan view of a back portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state in which the fullness detection electrode DE protrudes inside the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<< Relationship between the seating surface length HR of the screw BS and the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE >>
The radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69 (b)) is shorter than the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69 (a)) (in the radial direction of the seat surface of the screw BS). Length HR <Diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS will not be hooked on one of the full detection electrodes DE, and the screw will not be caught. Even when the BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be immediately detached, and the screw BS alone does not accidentally conduct.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), one of the two full detection electrodes DE, the full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the right side of FIG. 69 (c)) is already stored. When in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the left side in FIG. 69 (c)) and the screw BS temporarily come into contact with each other. Even if such a case occurs, the bis BS is not hooked on the full detection electrode DE, and the bis BS can be immediately separated from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69 (c)). , The conduction circuit is not formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

As an example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that stores all three reels has been described, but even if it is a separate unit that stores each of the three reels separately, the screw BS It is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by the reel, and the possibility that the screw BS will come off also arises. Therefore, configurations such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screw BS can be similarly adopted.

<< Reel band configuration >>
FIG. 70A is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70B is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel band MO is curved. FIG. 70 (c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the cut M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70 (d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the “white seven” symbol in an enlarged manner. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and BB is started when "white seven, white seven, white seven" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. The reel band MO has a long thin plate-like shape (strip shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO is flexible and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and the design can be illuminated from the back by the light emitted from the rotating cylinder backlight.

It has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved so as to face each other and attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of a resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged so that they are parallel to each other and their centers are located on the same axis of rotation. Further, the distance between the two frames is arranged so as to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer circumference of the two frames.

<Overlapping part M58 and cut M59>
The reel band MO is formed so that the length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion (overlapping portion M58) where a part of the reel band MO overlaps is generated near the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end portion M55.

As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end portion M57, and the cut M59 is formed by the first end portion M55. When attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when starting to attach the reel band MO, start attaching to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then attach the reel frame MW to the reel. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of the M50, the reel band MO is attached from the second end M57 toward the first end M55 along the circumference of the reel frame MW, and finally, the first The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the end portion M57 of 2, and the pasting is completed up to the first end portion M55. When the reel band MO is attached in such an order, the first end portion M55 ends to be attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end is attached on the reel band MO. The parts M55 are overlapped.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then the reel band MO is gradually rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50 while the reel band MO is attached to the first end. Along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 to the second end M57, and finally, the reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the first end M55 and pasted up to the second end M57. It's over. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the second end portion M57 ends to be pasted in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end portion M57 is pasted on the reel band MO. M57 is in an overlapping state.

Here, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end portion M55, and then the second end portion M57 is attached to the reel M50 in the same direction as the rotation direction, and the second end portion M57 is attached onto the reel band MO. In the case where the ends M57 of 2 are overlapped, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (the air resistance is large). , Air easily enters between the second end portion M57 and the reel band MO on the lower side thereof, and the reel band MO in the vicinity of the second end portion M57 is gradually peeled off.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the reel band MO is attached. In the case where the first end M55 is overlapped on top, when the game is executed and the reel M50 is rotated, the second end M57 is overlapped on the reel band MO described above. Compared with, it is difficult for air to come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is small), and it is difficult for air to enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below it. The reel band MO near the first end M55 is in a state where it is difficult to peel off.

From the above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached to the reel M50 in the opposite direction to the rotation direction. It is preferable that the sticking is completed in the direction and the first end portion M55 is overlapped on the reel band MO.

<Various errors>
As described above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, and the first end portion M55 or the second end portion M55 or the second end portion M58 is formed. A cut M59 is formed by any end of the end M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is made of a resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. In addition, when assembling the reel frame MW, it may be deformed and an error may occur. Further, since the reel band MO has flexibility, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO can be attached in a state where the reel band MO is distorted or the like, or the size of the reel frame MW ( The outer circumference) may be installed in a state slightly different from the design value. When a large symbol (for example, "white seven") is configured to be located on the lower reel band MO of the overlapping portion M58, the mounting position of the reel band MO is desired due to these various errors. It is also assumed that the upper reel band MO of the superposed portion M58 overlaps the large symbol when the position deviates from the above position, so that the large symbol is covered by the upper reel band MO.

In addition, the player may aim at the bonus symbol and press the button depending on the game state, and when the bonus symbol is placed near the cut M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol and press the button. , When the bonus symbol is stopped, the cut M59 may also be visually recognized when the bonus symbol is visually recognized. When various errors as described above occur, it is assumed that not only the symbol but also the deviation of the cut M59 and the deviation of the position of the symbol are visually recognized by the player. When the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, the player will pay attention to the bonus symbol with joy because it is a symbol combination that is highly profitable for the player. If you visually recognize the deviation of the position of, there is a possibility that the joy of stopping and displaying the symbol combination that is the bonus symbol will decrease.

<For bonus symbols>
In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at the position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (bonus symbol, etc.) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is longer than LL. A short symbol (longitudinal length SL) is placed closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the symbols having a short length in the longitudinal direction at the positions closest to the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, even if various errors occur, these The symbol can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and it is possible to prevent the symbol from being covered by the reel band MO. Further, even when the above-mentioned various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the cut M59, the deviation of the position of the symbol, and the like. In the figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell symbol (the symbol that can form the symbol combination corresponding to the bell) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the cherry symbol (the symbol that can form the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry) are defined. Although it is shown as the same SL, if it is shorter than LL, which is the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven), the longitudinal length of the bell symbol and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol are different. There is no problem. Further, the symbols arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59 are not limited to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may not be bonus symbols. For example, a re-game symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the re-game). Or watermelon symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to watermelon) may be arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59. Further, in this example, the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven) is compared with the longitudinal length of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the cut M59, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the lateral direction may be longer than the length of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the cut M59 in the lateral direction.

In the above-mentioned example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (bonus symbol, etc.) is LL, and the length in the longitudinal direction is shorter than LL. The arrangement of the symbols was decided by the comparison of, but the length in the lateral direction (direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LT, and the length in the lateral direction is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol that protrudes most upward and the portion of the symbol that protrudes most downward along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the lateral direction are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol that protrudes most upward and the portion of the symbol that protrudes most downward along the lateral direction.

<In the case of a small role pattern>
Furthermore, in addition to bonus symbols, symbols such as watermelon symbols and cherry symbols that do not stop and are not displayed on the effective line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if they are won, in other words, are arranged at a distance of more than the maximum number of slip frames. A symbol that has at least one location (sometimes referred to as a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that may be missed, etc.) is also a symbol to be pressed, and a symbol that the player wants to see. Is. In addition, in a game in which a rare role is won, the winning of the rare role may not be notified before the stop button is operated, and even in such a case, the player wants to win the rare role, so it is the rarest. In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button, which is easy to obtain a role (which is most profitable for the player). It should be noted that there are some gaming machines that have a large number of winning combinations, such as one that is paid out when a prize is won, and in such a case, the operation timing (operation) of the stop button that is most profitable for the player. The stop button is often operated in the mode). It should be noted that operating the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button, which is the most profitable for the player, may be referred to as an optimum game method.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when the game is executed by the optimum game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the effective lines are the left reel upper stage, the middle reel upper stage, the right reel upper stage (upper stage straight line), the left reel middle stage, the middle reel middle stage, and the right reel middle stage (middle stage straight line). Left reel lower, middle reel lower, right reel lower (lower straight), left reel upper, middle reel middle, right reel lower (right down straight), left reel lower, middle reel middle, right reel upper (right up straight) ) And 5 lines, and the specified number is 3 sheets. In addition, it has a watermelon role and a cherry role as rare roles, and when the watermelon role wins, "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops and displays in a straight line on the effective line, and the cherry role wins. Is configured so that "cherry, any, any" (any indicates that any symbol may be used) is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the effective line. Further, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are rare roles, the symbol has at least one location separated by the maximum number of slip frames or more.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located at positions away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. Is located in. When a rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare role and it is easy to win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be won by playing with the above-mentioned optimum game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare role, it stops between three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower row. By operating the button, you can win a prize regardless of whether you win the role of watermelon or the role of cherry. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimal game method), the range of 9 frames from the upper row of the cherry symbol to the lower row of the watermelon symbol is the range in which the stop display can be performed, which is shown in the figure. As described above, even when any range of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (in any of the nine stop display modes), the position away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. (There is no cut M59 near the symbol placed two frames above the watermelon, and there is no cut M59 near the symbol placed two frames below the cherry), and the deviation of the cut M59. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the position of the pattern or the symbol.

As shown in the figure, a symbol that can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where the rare combination is likely to be won is displayed in the vicinity of the first end M55 and the second end M57. The first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 can be configured not to be positioned at the position where the stop is frequently displayed on the reel. Even when the reels are misaligned, the misalignment of the cut M59 and the misalignment of the symbol position can be made difficult for the player to see.

In this example, the number of steps for one round of the reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336/20 = 16 remainder 16, there are 16 17-step frames (designs) and 4 16-step frames (designs) as the distribution of 20 frames (designs). The reel is configured. Further, since it is preferable that the cut M59 is configured so as not to be visually recognized by the player as much as possible, the frame (design) adjacent to the cut M59 should have 16 steps with a relatively small number of steps. Is preferable.

As the configuration of the revolving pachinko machine in this example, it is not necessary to insert and pay out the actual game medals used in the general revolving pachinko machine, and a pseudo game medium converted into data is used. It may be configured so that the game can proceed. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the revolving pachinko machine can be improved by the amount that it is not necessary to insert and pay out the actual game medal (for example, the insertion opening of the game medal). It does not have a payout opening, the front door and the back box are integrated, etc. to block the gap where foreign matter is inserted), reduce the risk of illegal game medals being used, etc. It can be configured to improve the security against such fraudulent acts (so-called goto acts) (sometimes referred to as an enclosed type rotating game machine). It should be added that the configuration of the enclosed type rotating gaming machine can be applied to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). The credit and the credit number display device D200 may not be provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) are combined into one total score, and the main control board M and the payout control are used. The total score may be increased / decreased or displayed on the substrate H (also referred to as a game value control substrate or a game value control means) or another substrate.

In addition, it corresponds to a substantive game medal used in a general pachinko / pachislot machine, and has a “score” as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game in an enclosed pachinko / pachislot machine. It may be configured. In addition, "score" may be referred to as "score information", "points", "point information", "game value", and "game value information". Physically existing and substantive game medals can be directly picked up and handled by the player. On the other hand, in the enclosed type rotating game machine, the player can proceed with the game without directly handling the actual game medal. The score is not a real game medal, but a pseudo game medium that is converted into data so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. Further, the "credit" is a score for temporarily storing the score in a bet-able state or a settlement-capable state, and is data mainly managed by the main control board M. Further, the "total score" is all the scores that can be input to the enclosed type rotating gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general rotating game machine that uses a substantive game medal. When the configuration of the enclosed type rotating gaming machine is applied to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as a "game medal" in the present specification is referred to as "score", "score information", and "score information". There is no problem in treating it as "points", "point information", "game value", "game value information", etc., and "score", "score information", "points", "point information" as appropriate. , There is no problem in calling it as "game value" or "game value information". It is not necessary to have "credit". Further, there is no problem in replacing the credit number display device with the total score display device.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is configured to have an AT in-progress state or the like as a state related to the AT that is advantageous to the player, and in the AT in-progress state (so-called AT), the push order navigation is executed, so that the player is in an advantageous state. However, the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing AT is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the rotating drum type gaming machine capable of executing an AT different from the configuration of the present embodiment will be set as the second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment in the figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second), that is, after executing the above-mentioned conditional device number management process in step 1450, step 4100 (first). In 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

Further, in step 1750, after executing the above-mentioned AT state start control process, in step 4200 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the stop freeze execution determination process described later, and in step 3500. Transition. Details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, the reel freezes when the reel starts rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reel is stopped (when the final reel is stopped and when the third reel is stopped). (The reel does not start rotating for a predetermined time, and the betting operation related to the next game cannot be executed for a predetermined time) is configured to occur.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation according to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is newly changed to the "AT in progress state" from the game. Here, "newly in AT state" is a case where the state related to AT becomes "AT in progress state" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as AT first hit). As an example, (1) Win a BB in the "high probability state" → shift to the "advantageous BB internal medium state" → the BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the transition to the "advantageous BB state" → BB After finishing, it shifts to the "AT in progress state", (2) If the cherry is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery is won by 1/2, and after winning the AT lottery, the precursor state { It is a state related to AT to give the player a sense of expectation regarding whether or not he has won the AT lottery, and even if he does not win the AT lottery related to the winning of the cherry, it is the same as the "precursor state". In the case of a configuration that shifts to the effect mode (background effect, etc.) that may be configured to have a "precursor state"}, the cherry is won in the "high probability state" and is based on the winning of the cherry. Since the AT lottery was won, the game state transitions to the "precursor state" → The game state transition such as the transition to the "AT in progress state" is newly performed because the predetermined number of games that are the end conditions of the "precursor state" have been executed. It corresponds to "AT in progress". On the other hand, as an example of the case where it does not correspond to "newly in AT state", (1) staying in "AT in progress state" → "AT continuous battle state" because the AT counter value became 0 { Shift to "AT in progress" again (state that may be in a row)} → Shift to "AT in progress" again, (2) Win BB in "AT in progress" → " Transition to "Advantageous BB internal medium state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, transition to "Advantageous BB state" → BB ends, transitions to "AT in progress" again, etc. It does not correspond to "AT in progress".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that turns on to execute the freeze at the start of reel rotation). ) Is turned on. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the sub control board S side (The AT start effect will be executed) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 4102, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550). The freeze illustrated in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if it is configured to have various types of freezes (execution conditions and execution time).

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second), that is, in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M has the AT start freeze execution flag turned on. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 1568 (second), in step 1570 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, which is a freeze execution time executed when a new “AT in progress” state is reached, and “AT”. In the timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when the "medium state" ends, the freeze execution time at the start (in this example, 5 seconds, and the "AT in progress state" is newly set. The execution time of the freeze executed in the case) is set, the timer is started, and the process proceeds to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become 0. If Yes in step 1574 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552. On the other hand, if No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the start of the "AT in progress" elapses. Even if No in step 1568 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the freeze (sometimes referred to as the freeze at the start of AT) is executed when the "AT in progress state" is newly started, and the details will be described later. However, during the freeze execution, the AT start effect is executed on the sub-control board S side. In this example, the freeze execution time at the start of AT is set to 5 seconds, but there is no problem even if the execution time is changed, and it is preferable to set it according to the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at the start of AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT. Has been done. In this way, by setting the freeze execution time at the start of AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, to be relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. It can be a high-priced gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the stop freeze execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) of FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The AT counter value has newly become 0" is a case where the AT counter value has changed from "1 to 0" in a situation where the AT counter value such as "AT in progress" is being subtracted. The case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the state related to AT is "normal game state", is not included.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4202, the process proceeds to step 4206. On the other hand, if No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is newly set to 0 in the game. "The counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is newly set to 0" means that the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is subtracted in a situation such as "AT in progress". It is not included when the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is always 0, such as the case where “1 → 0” is set and the state related to AT is the “normal game state”. If Yes in step 4204, the process proceeds to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, and the freeze execution time and the “AT in progress” that are executed when a new “AT in progress” is reached are set. The freeze execution time at the end (in this example, 3 seconds, which is 3 seconds, and the freeze executed when the "AT in progress" ends, is set to the timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed at the end. (Execution time) is set and the timer is started. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the sub control board S side The AT end effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer is 0. If Yes in step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). On the other hand, if No in step 4210, the process of step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the "AT in progress" elapses. If No in step 4204, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 76 is an image diagram of AT start effect execution in the second embodiment. In the figure, an example of a case where the power cutoff does not occur during the execution of the AT start effect and a case where the power supply cutoff occurs will be described in detail.

First, in (a) of the figure, the case where the power supply is not cut off during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the state related to AT is newly changed to the "AT in progress state" is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Will be done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, "Warp execution!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 1 second (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). .. In this example, the AT start effect and the freeze execution time are 5 seconds. After that, one second elapses from the start of the freeze, and the display "Warp execution!" Is erased on the effect display device S40. It should be noted that the state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of freeze execution, "AT50G START !!" is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 as an effect mode of the AT start effect. After that, when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the freeze execution, the freeze execution ends, the AT start effect execution ends, and the reel rotation starts. When the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of "AT50G START !!" on the effect display device S40 is deleted, and the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed in the AT state. It will be switched to a possible background production. In addition, when the push order navigation described above is executed in the first game in the AT state, (1) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reel starts rotating and is produced. The push order navigation is displayed on the display device S40, (2) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reel starts rotating → Reel drive state becomes reel constant speed state and the effect display device S40 You may configure it to display the push order navigation. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation start timing is later than before due to freeze execution, the player mistakenly operates the stop button corresponding to the push order different from the correct push order. It is possible to prevent the situation where it ends up.

Next, in (b) of the figure, the case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the state related to AT is newly changed to the "AT in progress state" is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Will be done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, "Warp execution!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 1 second (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). .. In this example, the AT start effect and freeze execution time is 5 seconds (excluding the time when the power is off). After that, one second elapses from the start of the freeze, and the display "Warp execution!" Is erased on the effect display device S40. It should be noted that the state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of freeze execution, the power is cut off (for example, the amusement park is cut off). After that, when the power is restored, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze is still executed. After that, when the total time from the start of freeze execution except when the power is off is 5 seconds, the freeze execution ends, the AT start effect execution ends, and the reel rotation starts. It will be. As described above, in this example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the freeze (during the execution of the AT start effect) and then recovered from the power off, the freeze execution time is from the state before the power off. It will be executed continuously. As an example, when the freeze execution time is 5 seconds and the power is cut off 1 second after the freeze execution starts, the freeze is executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the freeze is executed. If the power is cut off 3 seconds after the start, the freeze will be executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

Further, the execution time of the AT start effect is also the same as the execution time of the freeze. If the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect and then the power is restored, the execution time of the AT start effect is the power off. It will continue to be executed from the state before it occurred. On the other hand, the effect mode of the AT start effect differs between the case where the power cut occurs during the execution of the AT start effect and the case where the power cut does not occur. Specifically, during the execution of the AT start effect. If the power is not cut off, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 at the timing when 4 seconds have passed from the start of execution of the AT start effect, while the AT start effect is being executed. When the power is cut off, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 after the power is turned off, regardless of the timing of the power off. The display of "AT50G START !!" may be referred to as the number of games displayed at the start of AT. Further, in the figure, as the display of the number of games at the start of AT, it is shown to notify that the number of remaining AT games (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games at the start of AT, but the display mode is The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the lottery for adding the number of AT games is enabled to be executed in the "advantageous BB state" executed immediately before the transition to the AT in-progress state, the AT in the "advantageous BB state" Addition of the number of games The number of remaining AT games obtained by winning the lottery is added to the 50 games which is the initial number of AT games, and the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of games at the start of AT. May be good. As an example, when the number of remaining AT games of 30 games is acquired by the lottery for adding the number of AT games in the "advantageous BB state", "AT80G START !!" is displayed as the number of games displayed at the start of AT. You may. In the figure, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but similarly, the effect mode of the AT end effect is the case where the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect and the case where the power is cut off. It is configured to be different from the case where there is no AT end effect (for example, when the power supply is not cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET 〇〇" is displayed 2 seconds after the start of the AT end effect. On the other hand, if the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET 〇〇" is displayed after returning from the power cut, regardless of the timing of the power cut.). Further, if the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, the effect is displayed immediately after the power is turned off. If this is the case, the display is not limited to the number of games displayed at the start of AT, and there is no problem as long as the display allows the game to proceed smoothly by being visible to the player.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed in the case of newly shifting to the AT in-state state and in the case of ending the AT in-progress state. , The AT start effect is executed during the freeze execution when the state is newly shifted to the AT state, and the AT end effect is executed during the freeze execution when the AT state ends. In the case of such a configuration, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, it is scheduled to be displayed from a predetermined timing in the AT start effect or the AT end effect after the power cut is restored. By configuring the display to be displayed immediately after the power is turned off and restored, even if an unintended power off (for example, a power failure in the amusement park) occurs during the execution of the freeze, the game such as the number of remaining AT games can be played. By configuring the player to immediately display the information necessary for grasping the game situation, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the game situation.

In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed depending on the case where the AT state is newly entered and the AT state is terminated, but the freeze execution mode is not limited to this. , It may be configured so that it can be executed at the start of BB, the end of BB, etc., or it may be configured so that it can be executed based on the winning condition device and the game state in which the player is staying.

In addition, from the configuration related to the freeze in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the above-mentioned example,
Freeze execution period when the power is not cut off during freeze execution = A
If a power outage occurs during freeze execution, the freeze execution period until the power outage occurs = B
If a power outage occurs during freeze execution, the freeze execution period after the power outage occurs = C
If
A = B + C
It is configured to be.

When the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the reel acceleration process described above is executed.

<<<<<< Configuration 2 applicable to this example >>>>>
The configuration applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, one configuration detailed below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. It should be added that it may be done.

<<< Lamp unit configuration >>>
First, with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, a configuration relating to lighting of a lamp unit (collective term for the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail.

The LED of the lamp unit in this example is a full-color LED (which can be lit with a plurality of lighting colors), and is configured so that the lighting color can be set for each LED by lighting control by the sub-control board S. Further, the lamp unit is configured to light up based on a lighting pattern (details will be described later) of the gaming machine, and the lighting pattern may be set for each LED, or a plurality of LEDs may be set to 1. It may be set for the one group as one group.

Further, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication may be used for lighting control of the lamp unit (LED). I2C communication is a method in which a master IC transmits a lighting pattern corresponding to each slave IC to a plurality of slave ICs, and each slave IC returns an ACK signal (acknowledge signal) when data is received. Since each slave IC is connected to each other, data (lighting pattern) is transmitted in order starting from the master IC, and each slave IC acquires the data corresponding to each slave IC and returns an ACK signal. With this configuration, high-speed communication can be executed.

FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration. In the figure, the configuration relating to the lighting of the lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the item shown in the column of element 1 is not limited to only eight items of "red" to "no color". First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements 1 to 6 as elements related to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 is a lighting color, 8 of "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red + green", "blue + green", "blue + white", "no color" It has a kind of lighting color as element 1. The lamp unit according to this example is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lighting color is "red", it means that all the LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is "red + blue". In the case of "", out of the N LEDs, which is the total number of LEDs, M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue (N = M + L). .. In addition, the combination of the order of the LED that lights in red and the LED that lights in blue may be only one or a plurality of ways (when a plurality of ways are provided, the lighting color is ". Multiple lighting colors such as "red + blue 1" and "red + blue 2" may be provided). Further, "no color" indicates that the light is off (non-lighting), and is the lighting color that is selected when the light is always off. As described above, the number of items constituting the elements 1 to 6 in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and in the element 1, three or more colors such as "red + blue + green" are used. There is no problem even if it is configured to have a combined lighting color.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time, which is "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "no lighting". It has seven types of lighting times as element 2. Note that "always" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always on, and "no lighting" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 has a turn-off time of "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "no lights off". It has seven types of extinguishing times as element 3. Note that "always" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always off, and "no lights" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always on.

<Element 4>
The element 4 has a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is composed of a combination of the lighting time of the element 2 and the extinguishing time of the element 3, and "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second". "Off", "0.1 seconds on → 0.3 seconds off", "0.2 seconds on → 0.3 seconds off", "1 second on → 0.1 seconds off", "3 seconds on → 0. It has seven types of lighting time patterns as element 4, which are "3 seconds off", "always on", and "always on". As an example of the lighting time pattern, in the case of "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second extinguishing", the lighting time of the element 2 "0.1 second" and the extinguishing of the element 3 "0.1 second" It is composed in combination with time. In addition, "always on" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lighting is always on, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "always" which is element 2 and the extinguishing time of "no extinguishing" which is element 3. Has been done. Further, "always off" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lights are always off, and is configured by combining the lighting time of the element 2 "no lighting" and the lighting time of the element 3 "always". Has been done.

<Element 5>
The element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color which is the element 1 and the lighting time pattern which is the element 4. In other words, the lighting element is composed of a combination of the lighting color which is the element 1, the lighting time which is the element 2, and the extinguishing time which is the element 3. In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting element is shown as the lighting element content, and the identification element sorted for each lighting element content is shown as the lighting element type. As a lighting element,
Lighting element type a: "0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type b: "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off"
Lighting element type c: "0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type d: "0.1 seconds red + blue lights → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type e: "0.2 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type f: "0.2 seconds blue + green lights → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type g: "White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 second"
Lighting element type h: "1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type i: "Green lighting for 3 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type j: "3 seconds blue + green lights → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type k: "Always red lighting"
Lighting element type l: "Always blue lighting"
Lighting element type m: "Always green lighting"
Lighting element type n: "Always white lighting"
Lighting element type o: "Always red + green lighting"
Lighting element type p: "Always blue + green lighting"
Lighting element type q: "Always blue + white lighting"
Lighting element type r: "Always off (no color)"
It has 18 kinds of lighting elements as element 5. As an example of the lighting element, in the case of "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second extinguishing", element 1 "red" and element 4 "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second extinguishing" It is configured by combining a lighting time pattern (as described above, the lighting time pattern is a combination of the lighting time and the extinguishing time). Further, the "always red + green lighting" is configured by combining the element 1 "red + green" and the element 4 "always lighting". Further, the "always off (no color)" is configured by combining the "no color" which is the element 1 and the "always off" which is the element 4.

<Element 6>
The element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by one or a plurality of lighting elements which are the elements 5. In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting pattern is shown as the lighting pattern content, and the identification elements assigned to each lighting pattern content are shown as the lighting pattern type. As a lighting pattern,
Pattern 1: "a->a->a->a"
Pattern 2: "b → b → b → b"
Pattern 3: "a → b → a → b"
Pattern 4: "a->a->g->g"
Pattern 5: "g → f → j"
Pattern 6: "i → h → b"
Pattern 7: "g → f → b"
Pattern 8: "i → j → g"
Pattern 9: "g → g → g"
Pattern 10: "k"
Pattern 11: "l"
Pattern 12: "m"
Pattern 13: "n"
Pattern 14: "o"
Pattern 15: "p"
Pattern 16: "q"
Pattern 17: "r"
It has 17 kinds of lighting patterns as element 6. As an example of the lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”, the element 5 “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second extinguished” is configured to be repeated four times. Further, in the case of pattern 8 “i → j → g”, after executing the lighting element type i: “3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”, the lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0”. It is configured to execute ". Turn off for 3 seconds" and execute lighting element type g: "light on white for 1 second → turn off for 0.1 seconds". The lamp unit may be lit as in pattern 1 → pattern 4 by further combining lighting patterns, or as in pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → ... "Pattern 1-> Pattern 4" may be repeatedly lit until the lighting end condition is satisfied. The lighting end condition may be configured to be satisfied when the game situation such as cancellation of a predetermined error changes, or may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed.

As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to this example is configured to be lit by a combination of lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of the element 6 is configured by a combination of the lighting elements of the element 5. The lighting element of element 1 is composed of a combination of the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4, and the lighting time pattern of element 4 is composed of a combination of the lighting time of element 2 and the lighting time of element 3. Has been done.

It should be noted that the configuration related to the lighting of the lamp unit has been described in detail as being composed of elements 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased, or elements 1 to 6 may be increased or decreased. The contents of may be changed (for example, element 1 may be set to lighting brightness).

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode. In the figure, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit (also referred to as the lamp unit lighting pattern) and the lighting mode of the rotating cylinder backlight S30 (also referred to as the back lamp lighting mode) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. There is), and an example of the configuration for each game situation regarding the sound output from the speaker S20 (which may also be referred to as the sound of the speaker) will be described in detail. Each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt. For example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, and the type of BB (conditions related to BB). The lighting pattern may be different depending on the type of device) and the gaming state in which the BB is won, or in one BB, the lighting mode (lighting cycle) in which a plurality of lighting patterns are combined is repeatedly executed until the BB ends. It should be added that it may be configured to do so. As for the error, the medal empty error is illustrated as an example, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of error. In all of the configurations 1 to 6, the normal game is in progress (an error has not occurred, the power has not been turned on, the standby screen has not been displayed, the setting confirmation mode has not been performed, and the setting change mode has not occurred. The lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in the situation where the bonus is not being executed is any of pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, and pattern 17. It is configured to be one or a combination of two or more. Since it is configured to have various gaming states such as a low probability state and an AT in-probability state during a normal game, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected may be different depending on the gaming state. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. It should be noted that the time when the power is turned on is a state from the time when the power is turned on to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) (immediately after the power is turned on).

<< Configuration 1 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with a relatively small amount of light (light amount smaller than the normal amount of light) Speaker sound: Until the error is cleared A special sound is looped (repeated playback) while a medal empty error is occurring.
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Outputs a dedicated sound for a specified time when the power is turned on <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” is repeated 3 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above. It should be noted that the effect executed when the power is turned on may be configured to be different depending on the effect executed before the power cut occurs and the gaming state before the power cut occurs.

As in the configuration 1, only different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit during the error occurrence such as when a medal empty error occurs and during the normal game, and as the lighting colors constituting the lighting pattern. , Red is used when a medal empty error occurs, but red is not used during normal games (configured so that a predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs), so that the player or administrator can use it. , It is possible to easily distinguish between the case where an error has occurred and the case where no error has occurred, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and proceed with the game. Further, by configuring so that different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily distinguish between immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game. It is possible to smooth the sales of the amusement park and the progress of the game. In addition, the player can proceed with the game without stress without misidentifying that an error has occurred even during the normal game, and the administrator can clearly determine the game machine in which the error has occurred. It becomes. Further, by configuring so that different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit during the standby screen display and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily distinguish between the standby screen display and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and the business of the amusement park and the progress of the game can be smoothed. Further, while the standby screen is being displayed, it is possible to suppress power consumption due to the use of a flashy lighting pattern even though the player is not proceeding with the game. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns as the lighting patterns between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily switch between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and the business of the amusement park and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In addition, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, quickly determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, and detect if the setting key switch is forgotten to be turned off. can do. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select a different lighting pattern as the lighting pattern between the setting change mode and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily switch between the setting change mode and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and the business of the amusement park and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In addition, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting change mode, and can quickly determine the unintended setting change mode. Further, by configuring so that different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit during BB execution and normal game (state in which BB is not being executed), the player or administrator can perform BB execution and normal game. It is possible to easily determine the inside (the state in which the BB is not being executed), and the player or the manager can clearly determine the situation of the game.

As described above, the difference between when an error occurs related to the lamp unit and during normal game, the difference between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal game, the difference between displaying the standby screen and during normal game, and setting. The difference between the confirmation mode and the normal game, the difference between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game are the lighting colors (elements) that are not used during the normal game. It may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting time (element 3) that is not used during a normal game. It may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during the normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during the normal game. , It may be configured to have a lighting pattern (element 6) that is not used during a normal game.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights (blinks) in a dedicated pattern while the standby screen is displayed.
Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

<< Configuration 3 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off" is repeated 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off" → "1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

<< Configuration 4 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds Turn off "→" Turn on blue for 0.1 seconds → Turn off for 0.1 seconds ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds Turn off "→" Turn on blue for 0.1 seconds → Turn off for 0.1 seconds ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off" → "1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above. The warning sound output from the speaker while the medal empty error is occurring and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode are the same warning sound, and a medal empty error occurs separately from the warning sound. The sound "A medal empty error is occurring" is output from the speaker, "Setting confirmation mode is in progress" is output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode, and "Setting change mode is in progress" during the setting change mode. It may be configured to output from the speaker. Similarly, for an error different from the medal empty error, the warning sound and the voice of "○○ error is in progress" may be output from the speaker.

<< Configuration 5 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: On → off (lights when normal game is in progress)
Speaker sound: No output <Displaying standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

<< Configuration 6 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off" is repeated 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "1 second white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "1 second white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

In the figure, six types of configurations 1 to 6 are illustrated, but the configurations are merely examples, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, the back lamp lighting mode, and the sound output from the speaker for each game situation. May be combined from each configuration, or may be changed in any way. Regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, regarding the lamp unit, the difference between when an error occurs and during normal game, the difference between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal game, and between the display of the standby screen and during normal game. The above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 are described as differences, differences between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, differences between the setting change mode and the normal game, and differences between the BB execution and the normal game. It is preferable to configure any of (see FIG. 77) so that the one that is not selected during the normal game is selected.

Further, in the figure, only the medal empty error is illustrated as an error, but the error is not limited to this, and the display judgment error and the door opening error are also related to the lamp unit when an error occurs and during a normal game. Differences, differences between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal game, differences between the standby screen display and normal game, differences between setting confirmation mode and normal game, setting change mode and normal game As a difference from the inside and a difference between the execution of the BB and the normal game, any one of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) is selected so that the one that is not selected during the normal game is selected. It may be configured, or depending on the type of error occurring, such as making any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit different between the medal empty error and the display determination error. Any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different.

Further, when the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, the player may be notified that the symbol combination related to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed depending on the lighting mode of the lamp unit. In the game executed in the game state of, the lamp unit is configured to light up when the re-game combination is won and the symbol combination related to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, and any one of the elements 1 to 6 Is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed without winning the re-game combination. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that he / she has won the re-game combination.

<<< Configuration of front door opening and payout >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the configuration relating to the payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, "normal" shown in the figure means, for example, that the winning-B (common bell) is won in the "low probability state", and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. The case where 11 game medals are paid out is shown. Also, for "payment occurs before the door is opened" and "payout occurs after the door is opened", when the prize-B (common bell) is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, prize 04) is stopped and displayed. Is illustrated. In the figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example) is described in detail.

<< Configuration 1 >>
<In the case of normal payout>
The case where the normal payout in Configuration 1 is performed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is pressed when the third stop button is pressed). (Sometimes referred to as turning on), winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is not pressed (the third stop button is being pressed to not being pressed due to the player releasing the finger from the third stop button, etc.), and the third stop button is being pressed. The fact that the button is not pressed may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above). The sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is turned from on to off, the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (in the figure). Sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. After that, a predetermined time elapses from the start of the output of the payout sound, the output of the payout sound ends, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. The front door DU remains open, that is, the front door opening notification sound starts to be output when the front door DU is opened, and is then output even if the front door DU remains open. The output is configured to end when a specific time elapses from the opening. With this configuration, when the administrator opens the front door DU to check the settings or change the settings, the front door opening notification sound will continue to be output until the setting confirmation or setting change is completed. It is possible to check the settings and change the settings without stress without preventing them. In the figure, the output of the front door opening sound ends at the same time as the output of the payout sound ends, but the output is not limited to this, and the output end timing of the payout sound and the output of the front door opening sound are not limited to this. There is no problem even if the timing is different from the end timing.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. NS. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened. After that, under the condition that the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 is used. The payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. After that, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. After that, a predetermined time elapses from the start of output of the payout sound, and the output of the payout sound ends.

By configuring the game medal to be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 1, the manager of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when the game machine is replenished with the game medal. Even if the door is closed (not closed tightly), the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage. Further, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound to be output at the same time, the status of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. In the case of the above configuration 1, it is preferable to set the output mode (tone color, pitch, tempo, etc.) so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound can be easily distinguished.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<In the case of normal payout>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is pressed when the third stop button is pressed). (Sometimes referred to as turning on), winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is not pressed (the third stop button is being pressed to not being pressed due to the player releasing the finger from the third stop button, etc.), and the third stop button is being pressed. The fact that the button is not pressed may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above). The sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is turned from on to off, the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (in the figure). The output of the payout sound ends at the same time as the sound A) is output. After that, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. The predetermined time, which is the output period of the payout sound, ends during the output of the front door opening notification sound.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. NS. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened. After that, under the condition that the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. After that, under the situation where the payout of the game medal is being executed, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound ends, and the payout sound corresponding to the winning 04 is output. After that, a predetermined time elapses from the start of paying out the game medals corresponding to the winning 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

By configuring the game medal to be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 2, the manager of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when the game machine is replenished with the game medal. Even if the door is closed (not closed tightly), the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage. In addition, by configuring so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound are not output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the situation where it is difficult to judge the situation of the gaming machine due to the mixture of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound. can do. In configuration 2, the payout sound is output even during the output of the front door open notification sound, and the volume of the payout sound is relatively low compared to the volume of the front door open notification sound (volume 0 is also). It may be configured to include).

<< Other configurations >>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even while the front door DU is open, the game medal is inserted, the max bet button (in this example, the bet button D220) is operated, and the bet button lamp S50 (also the max bet lamp) is applied. It may be configured so that the lighting of the insertable lamp and the bet lamp (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp) is effective. That is, if a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on), and the insertion is valid (credit increases, or the game medal is displayed). It may be configured to be bet). In such a configuration, the bet sound (or the medal insertion sound) corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) may be output from the speaker S20 (front door DU). Even when is not open, the bet sound corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), and the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) is supported. It may be configured not to output the bet sound.

<<< Configuration related to power off and payout >>>
The operation when the power is turned off while pressing the third stop at the time of winning a small winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, is illustrated below. It should be added that any of the configurations illustrated below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below illustrates a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, the game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, the effect of blinking the rotating body backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Structure 1>
In a game in which a small winning combination (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small winning combination → The power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed. (Power failure occurs in the game hall, etc.) → Power is restored while pressing the 3rd stop button → Power is restored and the game medal corresponding to the small winning combination is paid out. You may.

In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the power is restored while pressing the third stop button as in the above configuration 1, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed. In this case, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound are suddenly executed after the power is turned off and on, so that the player is not surprised.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off when the player presses the third stop and the power is immediately restored, the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Even if any of the predetermined operation members (for example, start lever, all stop buttons, bet button (max bet button), settlement button, etc.) controlled by the main control board M side is operated, another predetermined operation member is operated. If the operating member of the above is not operated, the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be feasible. For example, when returning from a power failure, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the game medal is not paid out based on the winning prize. May be good. Further, in such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or the start lever (the operating member controlled by the main control board M side is 1). The payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed (by only one), or (2) by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (the main control board M side). (By turning off all the operating members to be controlled), the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed.

To exemplify the situation where the power supply is cut off, the power switch is turned on and off, the power supply cable is broken, a power failure occurs in the amusement park, and the power supply cable is pulled out from the insertion port. Etc., and in any case, it can be applied to the above-described configuration.

<Structure 2>
In a game in which a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, press (turn on) the 3rd stop button to win a small role → open the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. (Opening the front door DU causes a door opening error) and power failure occurs (power switch is turned off, etc.) → Power is restored while pressing the 3rd stop button (power switch is turned on) → Close the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button to cancel the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in the specified direction) → The door opening error is cleared , The game medal corresponding to the small winning combination may be paid out so as to have the above-mentioned action.

In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Moreover, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the door opening error is canceled while pressing the third stop button as in the above configuration 2, and the paying medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is paid out. When is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound are suddenly executed after the door opening error is released, so that the player is not surprised.

<Structure 3>
In a game in which a small winning combination (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small winning combination → The power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed. (A power outage occurs in the game hall, etc.) → Release the finger from the 3rd stop button (turn the 3rd stop button from on to off) → Return the power → Return the power and pay out the game medal corresponding to the small role May be configured as described above.

In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of a small winning combination can be output, the power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after the third stop button is released, as in the configuration 3 described above. Therefore, when the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination is not output. good. With this configuration, the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound are suddenly executed after the power is turned off and on, so that the player is not surprised.

In the case of the above configuration 1, configuration 2 or configuration 3, it is determined whether or not the third stop button is pressed (whether or not it is on) as a process after the power is turned off and restored. Before executing the process (process executed in the game progress control process), the game medal payout process (process executed in the game progress control process) based on the winning may be executed. In addition, as described above, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed in the situation where the symbol combination in which the small winning combination is a prize is stopped and displayed, and then the power is restored while the third stop button is pressed. After that, by releasing the third stop button, the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed. In such a configuration, the output of the payout sound corresponding to the payout and the back lamp effect May not be executed (when the payout of the game medal based on the winning is executed without power off, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed).

<<< Configuration for setting confirmation mode and payout >>>
The operation when the setting key switch is turned on while pressing the third stop at the time of winning a small winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, is illustrated below. It should be added that any of the configurations illustrated below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below illustrates a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, the game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, in the configuration described in detail below, the reel is stopped and the power is turned on, and the main control board side of the start lever, all stop buttons, bet button (max bet button), settlement button, etc. When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned from off to on when the various operating members controlled by are not operated (not on), the setting confirmation mode can be entered. The case where it is done is illustrated. In the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is in progress, or may be configured not to notify.

<Structure 1>
In a game in which a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, press (turn on) the 3rd stop button to win a small role → open the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. (Opening the front door DU causes a door open error) and turns on the setting key switch (does not shift to the setting confirmation mode) → Close the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. Canceling the door opening error (for example, inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 and twisting it in a predetermined direction) → The setting confirmation mode is not entered even if the third stop button is released. The configuration as described above may be used.

In addition, in such a configuration, betting is possible after that with the setting key switch on, and the reel can be started to rotate by operating the start lever in the betting situation, and the stop button. It may be configured so that the reel can be stopped by operating (the game can proceed). After that, if the setting key switch remains on, betting may not be possible (game medals cannot be inserted), or betting is possible but the reel does not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. You may. In other words, the game may not be executed if the setting key switch remains on. It should be added that, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 does not display a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. In addition, when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the re-game symbol is not stopped and displayed while the setting key switch remains on (after the operation as shown in the above configuration 1), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. It may be configured to obtain, or it may be configured not to shift to the setting confirmation mode when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when the front door DU is opened to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to indicate that the setting confirmation mode is in effect.

<<< Configuration related to lighting of Max Bet lamp >>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, the operation related to the lighting of the max bet lamp (sometimes also referred to as the bet button lamp S50) applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, the configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the stop display of the re-game is displayed. The max bet lamp is controlled on the sub control board S side or the main control board M side, which is provided inside or near the max bet button and notifies that the operation of the max bet button is effective. It is a lamp. In the figure, the fact that the max bet lamp is lit (or blinking) is turned on, the max bet lamp is turned off, the one bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the one bet is turned on. Turn off when the lamp D211 is off, turn on when the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, turn off when the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, and turn on when the 3-bet lamp D213 is on. It is shown that the 3-bet lamp D213 is off, the start lamp D180 is on (or blinking) is ON, and the start lamp D180 is off. Further, in the figure, when the game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 (the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 such as the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s are detected. (When the sensor detects one game medal at a time), but as a bet button, one game medal can be bet by one operation (off → on), which is different from the max bet button. A 1-bet button or a 2-bet button capable of betting two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided, and when such a configuration is provided, one medal slot D170 may be provided. Even if the same action as the game medal insertion (detection of one game medal by the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, or the second insertion sensor D30s) is applied to one pressing of the 1-bet button, there is a problem. do not have.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

As in configuration 1, the max bet lamp is configured to "turn off → turn on" each time one game medal is inserted, so that the period during which the game medal is guided to the inside of the game machine from the medal insertion slot D170 is max. Since the operation of the bet button is invalid, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the max bet button is valid by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period. In addition, by accurately notifying the period during which the max bet button is valid, the player can grasp the period during which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the insertion of the game medal is invalid. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted during the invalid period and the game medal is not inserted normally, and it is possible to realize a game progress with a good tempo.

Further, as in configuration 1, when the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit by configuring the 3-bet lamp D213 to light after the third game medal is inserted and the max-bet lamp is turned off. Since the max bet lamp is off, the player can clearly recognize that the specified number of three game medals have been bet.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 2, a third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off after the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max bet button on the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring the lamps to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on according to the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be smoothed, and the player can be extra. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted into a machine or a player feels distrust in the performance and behavior of the game machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up.

As in the configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off is turned off, the start lamp D180 is turned on at almost the same time, so that the next game can be played. It is possible to promptly notify the player that it is possible to start, the progress of the game can be smoothed, the player inserts an extra game medal, and the performance of the game machine due to the slow operation. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the behavior is distrustful.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up and the start lamp D180 lights up.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is blinking, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, when the max bet lamp blinks, the max bet lamp goes out before the timing of turning on → off (in the middle of lighting). In addition, in the figure, since the case where the third game medal is inserted in the lighting situation in the blinking in which the max bet lamp is repeatedly turned on and off is illustrated, three medals are used. The max bet lamp is lit → off at the timing when the eye game medal is inserted, but when the third game medal is inserted in the situation where the max bet lamp is blinking and is off. The max bet lamp remains off after the timing when the third game medal is inserted.

Even when the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are all lit in a non-bet situation as in the configuration 5, the number of game medals inserted (first piece, By differentiating the combination of turning on / off the start lamp D180, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 depending on the 2nd and 3rd sheets), the player can change the current game situation (how many game medals). Is bet).

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, and the start lamp D180 is turned on at the timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (the timing earlier than the lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in the configuration 2). The 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 6, a third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off after the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max bet button on the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring the lamps to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on according to the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be smoothed, and the player can be extra. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted into a machine or a player feels distrust in the performance and behavior of the game machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the start lamp D180 lights up (starts blinking). After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on.

As in configuration 6, after inserting the third game medal, the max bet lamp is turned off and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on almost at the same time. In other words, the player maxes the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring the bet button to light up as soon as possible after operating the bet button, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on according to the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be smoothed, and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a person from inserting an extra game medal or feeling distrust in the performance and behavior of the game machine due to slow operation.

In the above-described configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6 and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit, but the lighting mode is such that the player can recognize that the max bet button is valid. As in the case of the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on = the max bet lamp may be blinking. Further, also in the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on = the max bet lamp may be turned on. Similarly, with respect to the configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is turned on = the start lamp D180 is lit, but the lighting mode may be such that the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective. , The start lamp D180 may be turned on = the start lamp D180 may be blinking, as in the configuration 7. Further, also in the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on = the start lamp D180 may be turned on. Further, the max bet lamp may be configured to be controlled on the sub control board S side or may be configured to be controlled on the main control board M side.

<<< Configuration related to operation of checkout button >>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the operation at the time of operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The following configuration illustrates a case where three game medals are bet on the game machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the figure, it is ON that the Max Bet lamp is lit (or blinking), OFF that the Max Bet lamp is off, ON that the operation of the settlement button is newly detected, and the settlement button. The operation of the checkout button is not detected, the operation of the checkout button is turned off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off. Turn on that the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, turn off that the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, turn on that the 3-bet lamp D213 is on, and turn on that the 3-bet lamp D213 is off. OFF, ON that the start lamp D180 is lit (or blinking), OFF that the start lamp D180 is off, ON that the start lamp D300 is lit (or blinking), ON, the lamp that can be turned on It is shown that turning off the D300 is OFF, and that the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 is deducted by 1 from OFF → ON → OFF. Further, in the figure, a case where game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 is illustrated, but as a bet button, one is performed by one operation (off → on), which is different from the max bet button. A 1-bet button that allows betting of game medals or a 2-bet button that allows betting of two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. There is no problem even if the same action as inserting one game medal into the D170 is applied to one pressing of the 1-bet button. The configuration illustrated below may be configured so that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even while the re-game stop display is displayed, or the game medals are stored in the gaming machine while the re-game stop display is displayed. It may be configured so that the game medals that are being played cannot be settled. In addition, as a condition for operating the settlement button D60 and paying out the bet game medal from the discharge port D240 (as a condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated), the settlement button has been turned "on → off". It may be "on", it may be "on for 0.5 seconds or more", or it may be turned on.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned on. Along with turning off the lights, the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started), and then with the credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200. Four game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, at the timing when the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up. In the figure, an example is shown in which the settlement process can be executed by turning the settlement button D60 from off to on in a situation where the operation of the settlement button D60 is valid (during the valid period). The execution mode is not limited to this. For example, in a situation where the operation of the settlement button D60 is valid (during the valid period), the settlement button D60 is turned off → on, and the on is continued for a predetermined time or longer (payment button D60). (When is pressed and held for a long time), the settlement process may be executed (the same applies to FIGS. 85 to 87).

By configuring the bet game medal to be settled (paid out) before the credit as in the configuration 1, it is confirmed that the credit becomes 0 when the player finishes the game. Even if you leave your seat immediately, you can prevent forgetting to settle the bet game medal. In particular, when the game is ended in a situation where the number of credits is small, such as one or two, there is a relatively high possibility that the player will not be able to obtain sufficient game medals and the game will be ended. The person's attention may also be distracted. Even in such a case, in order not to cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, the bet game medal is settled (paid out) before the credit, and as such. Therefore, in the configuration 1, in the configuration 1, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are set before the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted. , And the turnable lamp D300 is configured to turn off.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the max bet lamp lights up at the timing when the settlement process starts, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 ( Payout will start). After that, the start lamp D180 is turned off and the turnable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 goes out. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. In configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

When it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once as in the configuration 2, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the settlement button D60 is operated. By configuring the max bet lamp to turn on before the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, the player mistakenly turns on the settlement button. If you operate, only the bet game medals will be paid out, and the player wants to operate the max bet button again to bet credits, so it is quick to know that the max bet button can be operated. By configuring to notify, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned off at the timing when the settlement process is started. Three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started), and then four credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are used. The game medal will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing when the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3-bet lamp D213 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 1-bet lamp D211. Further, at the timing when the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the start lamp D180 and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, and the three bet game medals are discharged. It is paid out from D240 (payment starts). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 goes out. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 4, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in the configuration 4, the bet game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the max bet lamp is turned on at a timing after the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. If the player wishes to change to a one-card bet after betting three, the settlement button D60 is operated once to settle the three game medals bet, and then one game medal is placed. Since the throwing or the 1-bet button is operated, in such a case, the progress of the game can be smoothed by turning on the throwable lamp D300 before the max-bet lamp.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned on. Along with turning off the lights, the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started). After that, the turnable lamp D300 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process is started, the turnable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the start lamp D180 is turned off. Three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started), and then four credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are used. The game medal will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing at which the settlement button D60 is operated, the 3-bet lamp D213 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off in this order. Further, after the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up. The max bet lamp remains off.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process starts, the max bet lamp starts blinking and the start lamp D180 goes out. After that, the insertable lamp D300 is turned off, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 goes out. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 goes out. After that, the turnable lamp D300 lights up. The max bet lamp remains off. In configuration 7, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<< Difference in operation due to power failure timing >>>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S depending on the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing the first aspect of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power, and FIG. 88 (b) shows the timing chart of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. It is a timing chart which shows 2 aspects.

The first aspect is an aspect in which a power failure occurs after the execution of the main program of the main control board M and the subprogram of the sub-control board S is started. On the other hand, the second aspect is an aspect in which the power is cut off before the execution of the main program of the main control board and the subprogram of the sub-control board is started.

In this example, a power failure is a state in which power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a state in which the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, a state in which the power cable is disconnected, a state in which the power cable is disconnected, or a power failure. It may be. This includes cases where power supply is unintentionally stopped at the amusement park. The timing when the power supply is cut off is the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the power cable is disconnected. It is the timing when the power failure occurred. Further, in this example, "occurrence of power outage" means that the power supply (power supply) to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detection of power outage" means that the gaming machine causes power outage. To detect.

In FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), ΔT1 is obtained from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (sometimes referred to as an off level) after a power failure occurs. ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the time from the timing when the power supply is cut off to the supply voltage to the main control board M. It is the time until the low level is reached, ΔT4 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub-control board S is activated, and ΔT5 is the time until the subprogram of the sub-control board S is activated. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started. Here, the relationship of ΔT5 <ΔT1, ΔT2 <ΔT3, ΔT5> ΔT3, ΔT4 <ΔT5 is established.

<<< First aspect >>>
<< Changes in power supply status >>
The power supply to the gaming machine is started at time t1, the power supply is cut off at time t3, and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. Note that the figure illustrates a case where the time from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board is not limited to this. The time from the start of power supply to the time when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to vary (randomly). Further, the case where the time from the start of power supply to the sub control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply to the sub control board is started. The time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to vary (randomly). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) of the time from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is the minimum value (minimum time) of the start of power supply to the sub control board. It is preferable to configure the voltage so that it is longer than the maximum value (maximum time) of the time required for the power supply voltage to reach the supply level.

After that, the power is cut off at time t3. Due to the occurrence of this power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and is omitted from the time t4 at the maintenance level. It becomes constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, and even if the power supply is cut off, the power supply unit E has a substantially constant power supply voltage for a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5). (Maintenance level) can be output (power cutoff processing will be executed when the maintenance level voltage is being supplied). In this example, the time to maintain the maintenance level (time from time t4 to time t5) from the start of execution of power off processing (detection of power off) is the time required to execute timer interrupt processing at least 20 times. It is configured to guarantee (time during which the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32) can be called and executed 20 times). In the figure, the time from time t4 to time t5 is defined as the time required to execute the timer interrupt process at least 20 times, but the time from time t3 to time t5, in other words, to the game machine. The time from when the power supply is cut off (power cutoff occurs) until the power cutoff process cannot be executed may be configured to be at least 20 times for the timer interrupt process to be executed.

After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5 and becomes an off level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed on the main control board is started from the time ta when the power supply voltage becomes constant from the time t2 to ΔT5. By executing this main program, the process of the main control board START (power on) shown in FIG. 13 described above is executed.

As described above, when the setting key switch is off in the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1016 to 1022, 1036 to 1046 and 1300 are executed, and the process of step 1040 causes a timer interrupt. Is started.

Further, in the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, when the setting key switch is turned on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt>
When the setting key switch is off, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and when the setting key switch is on, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1104 in FIG. .. After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined cycle T. The period T at which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of power failure>
When a power failure occurs and the voltage drops to a certain level, a power failure detection signal is output from the power supply unit E. The main control board M has an input port into which a power failure detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when the power-off has not occurred, and is a low-level signal when the power-off has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high-level signal or a low-level signal.

In this example, the main control board M detects a power failure in the determination process of step 1604 in FIG. Specifically, the main control board M determines that the power failure has occurred when the data read from the input port is a low-level signal both times in the two consecutive timer interrupt processes.

As described above, in this example, the occurrence of power failure is detected by two consecutive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when a power failure occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 of FIG. 14, the occurrence of the power failure can be detected. On the other hand, if the power failure occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, it may not be possible to detect the occurrence of the power failure.

In this way, when the power supply is cut off after the execution of the main program is started and the power supply is cut off after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. , It is possible to detect that a power failure has occurred due to interrupt processing. When it is detected that a power outage has occurred, the power outage processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<< Operation of sub-control board >>
<Starting a subprogram>
The subprogram executed on the sub-control board S is started from the time tb when ΔT4 elapses from the time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this subprogram, the sub-program start process shown in FIG. 38 described above is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 described above, and by starting the sub-control board S before the main control board M, the sub-control board S does not miss the command transmitted from the main control board M. Can be received. In the figure, the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting the power supply to the main control board M and the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting the power supply to the sub control board S. Is shown at the same time tb, but the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and the power supply voltage after the start of power supply to the sub control board S It may be configured so that the time required to reach the supply level is different, and even in such a configuration, from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the main program of the main control board M is started. It is preferable to set the time of The time from when the supply level is reached until the main program of the main control board M is started is from when the power supply voltage on the sub control board S side reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub control board S is started. It is preferable to configure it for a longer time than for an hour.

<<< Second aspect >>>
FIG. 88B is a timing chart showing a second aspect of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. The second aspect is an aspect in which the power is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. That is, the power supply is cut off before the time t2 to ΔT5 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level.

As described above, in the second aspect, the power is cut off before the execution of the main program is started (before the timer interrupt is activated), so that the power is cut off by the main program. This cannot be detected, and the gaming machine stops due to the power failure (the supply voltage reaches a low level) without executing the power off processing shown in FIG. 36.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

After that, the power is cut off at time t13. Due to the occurrence of this power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and is omitted from the time t14 at the maintenance level. It becomes constant. After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15 and becomes an off level at time t16. For convenience of explanation, the maintenance level is almost constant, but in reality, the voltage level continues to decrease gradually from the occurrence of power failure, and falls below the voltage level at which operation can be guaranteed (operation guaranteed voltage level), and then. The voltage level becomes 0. That is, in reality, it is designed so that 20 interrupts or more occur from the detection of power failure to the time when the voltage level falls below the guaranteed operation voltage level. It should be noted that it may be designed so that the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the time when the voltage level falls below the guaranteed operation voltage level is 20 interrupts or more.

As described above, in the second aspect, the execution of the main program is started after the power is cut off, but the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13 and the process of step 1104 of FIG. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is configured to be off-level before this. If the power is cut off at the timing immediately before the main program starts (for example, the timing at which the main program starts when the time for one timer interrupt process elapses), the timer interrupt process can be started and the power is turned off. The process can be executed without any problem.

In the figure, the first aspect and the second aspect are illustrated, but the configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to this example is as an example.
(1) Immediately after the power supply to the main control board M is started (for example, after the time has elapsed from the start of power supply to the main control board M to execute the timer interrupt process once), the power supply is cut off. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes the off level before the start (the execution of the main program is not started).
(2) Start supplying power to the main control board M → Immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M is the supply level). Power off occurs after the time has elapsed to execute the timer interrupt process once after reaching. → The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the execution of the main program is started. Become a level (the execution of the main program will not start)
It may be configured as described above.

<<< Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state >>>
FIG. 89A is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch in the first aspect, the power supply state, and the situation, and FIG. 89B is a state of the setting key switch in the second aspect. It is a table showing the relationship between the power supply state and the situation.

<< Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the first aspect >>
<State 1>
First, in the state 1 of FIG. 89 (a), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the game is being executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is “off”. The "power supply status" is "on".

<State 2>
In the state 2, the power is cut off while the setting key switch remains "off", and the "power supply state" becomes "off". At this time, the power off processing of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the processing to be executed next in the normal state is saved in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated to switch to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
Next, in the state 4, the "power supply state" is switched to "on" by supplying power while the setting key switch is "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. As described above, in the first aspect, the power supply is cut off after the execution of the main program is started, and the main mode of FIG. 13 is before the power supply cutoff occurs (next state 5). The control board START (power on) process can be executed.

In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13 described above, the setting key switch is determined to be on, the process of steps 1028 to 1034 is executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. , Shifts from the normal state to the setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. In this way, when the setting key switch is "on" and the "power supply state" is "on", the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and then the setting change switch and the start lever are operated. This makes it possible to change the set value. Further, by the process of step 1622 in FIG. 32, the setting change start command is transmitted to the sub-control board S, so that it is possible to notify that the sub-control board S is in the setting change mode.

<State 5>
Next, in the setting change mode, if the power is cut off while the setting change device control process is being executed, the "power supply state" changes to "off". When the power is cut off, the power off processing in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the processing to be executed next in the setting change device control processing (setting change mode) by the processing in step 1902 is the return address. Is stored in the storage area as.

<State 6>
In the state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In the state 7, the power is supplied in the state where the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be “off”, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the process of step 1022, the process returns to the return address saved in the storage area in the state 5, and the execution is started from the process of the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in the state 5 is the address of the process to be executed next in the setting change device control process, and by returning, the process of the setting change device control process is immediately executed. Will be done. As described above, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and the setting change mode is entered by turning on the setting key switch and turning on the power supply in the situation where the power supply is off. This is the basic operation when shifting to the setting change mode, but even if the power supply is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting key switch is turned off, and then the power supply is turned on. Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, it is configured to be in the setting change mode. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode (for example, the game hall is out of power), it is possible to return to the state before the power outage occurred, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It is possible to make it difficult for such an operation to occur.

<< Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the second aspect >>
<State 1>
In the state 1 of FIG. 89 (b), similarly to the first aspect, the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the game is being executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is ". It is "off" and the "power supply status" is "on".

<State 2>
In the second state as well, as in the first aspect, the power supply is cut off while the setting key switch remains “off”, and the “power supply state” becomes “off”. At this time, the power off processing of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the processing to be executed next in the normal state is saved in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated to switch to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
In the state 4, power is supplied while the setting key switch is "on", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on".

<State 5>
In the state 5, the power is cut off while the setting key switch is "on", and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second aspect, the power supply is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second aspect, the "power supply state" is once "on" (state 4), but immediately after the "power supply state" related to the state 4 is "on" (for example, timer interrupt processing is performed). After the lapse of time for one execution), the "power supply state" is switched to "off". In other words, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is off-level before the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is activated). (State 5). Therefore, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address saved in the state 2 is stored in the storage area as it is.

<State 6>
Next, in the state 6, the setting key switch is operated while the "power supply state" remains "off", and the setting key switch is switched to "off".

<State 7>
In the state 7, the power is supplied in the state where the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the process of step 1022, the process returns to the return address saved in the storage area in the state 2, and the execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in the state 2 is the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state, and the process to be executed next in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the second aspect, even when the setting key switch is "on" and the "power supply state" is "on", before the main program of the main control board M is executed. When the power supply is turned "off", even if the setting key switch is turned "off" and then the power supply is turned "on", the mode is not changed to the setting change mode. .. By configuring as in the second aspect, if the power is cut off immediately after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, if the mode is changed to the setting change mode, an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine. , Even if the setting key switch is on, it can be configured not to shift to the setting change mode, and a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems can be configured.

<<< Control of medal grant and output control of payout sound >>
As described above, when a small winning combination is won (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), the player is given the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

<< Processing of medal award >>
The process of awarding medals includes a process of adding the number of credits and awarding them, and a process of actually paying out the game medals to the outside of the gaming machine and awarding them.

<Addition processing of credits>
When the current number of credits is less than the maximum number of stored credits (for example, less than 50), the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits. The credit number addition process is executed by the arithmetic process of the CPUC100 of the main control board M.

<Game medal payout processing>
When the current number of credits exceeds the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M awards medals by driving the hopper H40 and paying out medals from the medal payout device H. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<< Mode of medal award >>
Depending on the current number of credits and the number of medals to be granted, the mode shifts from the mode of only adding the number of credits, the mode of only paying out the game medals, and the processing of adding the number of credits to the payout process of game medals ( There are three types of modes (execution of both the credit number addition process and the medal payout process).

<Aspect of credit addition processing only>
When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits. If the maximum number of stored cards is not reached even after adding the number of payouts, the process of granting medals is completed only by adding the number of credits.

<Aspects for shifting from credit number addition processing to game medal payout processing>
When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits. When the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the processing of adding the number of credits to the processing of paying out game medals. The CPUC100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals obtained by subtracting the credit addition amount from the number of payouts from the medal payout device H. The sum of the added amount of credits and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

In this way, when shifting from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspects only for paying out game medals>
When the current number of credits has already reached the maximum number of stored cards, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 and pays out the game medals for the number of medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H.

<< Specific example >>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current number of credits is 47 and a player is given a medal with 5 payouts, the CPUC100 of the main control board M first sets the number of credits to 1. Add one by one. Specifically, the CPUC100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device is 47 → 48 (first sheet (time t1)) → 49 (second sheet (time t2)) → 50 (third sheet (time t2)). It changes with t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of stored cards (50 cards) is reached, and the number of credits cannot be increased any more.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts 3 credits from the 5 payouts. 2 cards are paid out from the medal payout device H.

In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and ends the payout process. ..

<< Various times >>
<Unit processing time for credit addition processing and unit processing time for game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition processing by the CPUC100 of the main control board M, a unit processing time a is required to increase the number of credits from m to the number of credits m + 1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2-time t1 = a to increase the number of credits from 48 (first card) to 49 (second card), and the number of credits is 49 (second card). It takes time t3-time t2 = a to increase the number of credits from 50 (third card). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is substantially constant.

Further, in the process of paying out the game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the n + 1th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t6-time t4 = c from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is substantially constant.

One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference in timing between two consecutive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing of the (first sheet) addition process from 47 to 48 (time t1) and the timing of the (second sheet) addition process from 48 to 49 (time t2). Or, it is the difference between the timing (time t2) of the (second) addition process from 48 to 49 and the timing (time t3) of the (third sheet) addition process from 49 to 50.

Further, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference in the start timing of two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the start timing of the processing of the fifth sheet (time t6) and the start timing of the addition processing of the fourth sheet (time t4). In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be specified so as to have a constant cycle. In all of the following provisions and the configuration shown in FIG. 90, the game medals are sufficiently stored in the medal payout device H, and the game medals are placed in all the grooves of the disc D50. The case of paying out a game medal is illustrated.

The timing of starting the payout process such as t4 and t6 is
(1) When t4 is paid out of the fourth game medal, the first payout sensor H1 is turned on → off, and when t6 is paid out of the fifth game medal, the first payout sensor H1 is turned on → off. To be the timing
(2) When t4 is paid out of the fourth game medal, the second payout sensor H2 is turned off → on, and when t6 is paid out of the fifth game medal, the second payout sensor H2 is turned off → on. To be the timing
(3) The timing at which the second payout sensor H2 is turned on and off by paying out the fourth game medal with t4, and the second payout sensor H2 is turned on and off by paying out the fifth game medal with t6. To be the timing
(4) When t4 is paid out of the fourth game medal, the first payout sensor H1 is turned off → on, and when t6 is paid out of the fifth game medal, the first payout sensor H1 is turned off → on. To be the timing
(5) When a part of the game medal for which t4 is paid out is paid out to the outside of the disc H50, and a part of the game medal for which t5 is paid out for the fifth piece is paid out to the outside of the disc H50. It will be the timing when it was issued,
(6) When all the game medals for which t4 is paid out for the fourth piece are paid out to the outside of the disc H50, all the game medals for which t5 is paid out for the fifth piece are paid out to the outside of the disc H50. The timing
(7) In the case where the payout process is executed for each payout of one game medal, t4 is set as the start timing of the fourth payout process, and t6 is set as the start timing of the fifth payout process.
It may be configured as described above. The details of the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be described later. In addition, since the various time values and timings described above are just design values, some blurring may occur in the situation where the gaming machine is actually operating, and even in such a case, this example It should be added that the comparison of time values and the comparison of timings described in detail in the above are comparisons of design values. In addition, it should be added that regardless of which of the above configurations is adopted, the time value comparison described later can be established.

<Switching time from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing e>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits, and if all the number of payouts is not given, the process is switched to the game medal payout process. It takes a switching time e for the CPUC100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process.

<< Comparison of time >>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is the time determined by the arithmetic processing of the CPUC100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is the time required for the arithmetic processing of the CPUC100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. It consists of both. The unit processing time c can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By doing so, it is possible to accurately control the payout including the driving time of the medal payout device H.

As described above, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a by adjusting the time required to drive the medal payout device H. By doing so, the payout process can be expedited.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By lengthening the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and smoothly switch from the arithmetic process of the CPUC100 of the main control board M to the drive of the hopper H40. ..

Further, the switching time e can be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and by ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be started immediately. , The consumption of game medals can be increased, the profit of the game hall can be increased, and the operating efficiency of the game machine can be improved.

In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from a fixed cycle, and the game medal starts to be paid out to the medal tray. Expectations can be given to the game.

The switching time e can be made to match the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is made to match the unit processing time a, medals can be given to the player at a fixed cycle, and the same medals are given in both the credit number addition process and the game medal payout process. It is possible to give a sense of security by showing the player that.

<< Output of game medium addition sound >>
The CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub-control board S when the credit addition process is started (time t1). Upon receiving this payout start command, the sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20.

Further, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub-control board S when the payout of the game medals is completed (time t7). Upon receiving this payout end command, the sub-control board S ends the output of the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the CPUC100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and all of the payout number of game medals corresponding to the winning small wins are given to the player. Judge whether or not it has been granted. When the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that all of the game medals of the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small wins have been awarded, the CPUC100 of the main control board M ends the output of the payout end command to the sub-control board S and emits the payout end command from the speaker S20. The output of the game medium addition sound is finished. When the game medium-added sound is repeatedly reproduced (output) with a sound having a fixed cycle, the game medium-added sound is immediately transmitted at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. The output may be terminated, or the output of the game medium-added sound may be terminated at the timing when the cycle of the game medium-added sound that is output at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. It may be configured to do so.

The game medium-added sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit-assigned sound data at least once. The unit-assigned sound data is stored in advance in the RAM of the sub-control board S. As shown in FIG. 90, the reproduction time for one unit-assigned sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the unit-assigned sound data from the RAM and receives the payout start command to start the payout end command. The game medium-added sound is output from the speaker S20 by repeatedly playing back the unit-assigned sound data a plurality of times until the data is received.

<First aspect>
The first aspect of the game medium-assigned sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit-assigned sound data is repeatedly reproduced every playback time d from the time when the payout start command is received. By playing in this way, the game medium-added sound is output at regular intervals. As described above, even when switching from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the game medium granting sound is output at regular intervals, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the payout and the credits are paid. It is possible to give a sense of security by showing the player that both the number addition process and the game medal payout process give the same value.

<Second aspect>
Further, in the second aspect of the game medium imparting sound shown in FIG. 90, the unit granting sound data is reproduced every playback time d from the time when the payout start command is received, and only the time f is completed after the credit number addition processing is completed. This is an embodiment in which the unit-assigned sound data is reproduced, and then, at time t4, the game medal payout process is started and the unit-assigned sound data is reproduced again. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game medium addition sound is output at a timing different from a certain cycle, so that the game can be given an uplifting feeling and a feeling of expectation that the game medal starts to be paid out to the medal tray. ..

If the game medals of the hopper H40 are exhausted and a hopper error occurs while the game medals are being paid out from the medal payout device H (for example, if it is determined to be Yes in the process of step 1279), the sub The control board S stops the output of the game medium addition sound, and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medal is supplied to the hopper H40 and becomes ready for payout, the main control board M again transmits a payout start command to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound. .. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a hopper error occurs, the game medium-added sound is continuously output, but the volume of the game medium-added sound is the volume of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred. It outputs at a volume lower than the volume (volume = 0 may be set), and when the hopper error is canceled, the output of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated, and the sound added to the game medium is used. It may be configured to restore the volume.

<<< Arrangement of integrated circuits on the board >>
FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M.

The main control board M has a substantially plate-shaped and rectangular printed circuit board MP. A CPUC100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, and the like are mainly mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and a circuit pattern mainly made of conductors is formed on the back side of the printed circuit board MP. The main control board M (printed circuit board MP) is composed of two longitudinal end portions ML1 and ML2 that are parallel to each other and along the longitudinal direction, and two minor end portions MS1 and MS2 that are parallel to each other and along the lateral direction. It has a rectangular shape.

In this example, the main control board M is mounted so as to stand upright in the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is erected and attached, the longitudinal end portions ML1 and ML2 are arranged along the horizontal direction, and the short end portions MS1 and MS2 are arranged along the vertical direction. The longitudinal end ML1 is located on the upper side and the longitudinal end ML2 is located on the lower side. Further, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end portion MS1 is located on the left side of the short end portion MS2, and the short end portion MS2 is located on the right side of the short end portion MS1.

Hereinafter, the longitudinal end ML1 side is referred to as the upper side, the longitudinal end ML2 side is referred to as the lower side, the short end MS1 side is referred to as the left side, and the short end MS2 side is referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC100 has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the lateral direction is CSL. The CPUC 100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed so as to project from the main body portion. When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, a plurality of pins form an electrical connection, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, in the work of attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC100 in an appropriate orientation so that the CPUC100 can perform a desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the CPUC 100, and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the CPUC 100 is formed.

In this example, the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 coincides with (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 is arranged so as to be aligned with the direction of the IC described later. When attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is possible to reduce mistakes in attaching the CPUC100 in the wrong direction.

Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a maker name is printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized while the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 can be arranged in an direction in which the printed model number, the manufacturer name, and the like can be easily visually recognized.

When the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC100 increase in order counterclockwise starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. ..

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is ILL, and the length in the lateral direction is ISL. Like the CPUC100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed so as to project from the main body. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, a plurality of pins form an electrical connection, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, even in the work of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in an appropriate orientation so that the IC can perform the desired operation. Therefore, the first pin of the IC (1P shown in FIG. 91) is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the IC, and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the direction of the IC is formed.

In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the IC coincides with (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. By arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side in this way, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, and the work of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP At this time, it is possible to reduce mistakes such as mounting the IC in the wrong direction.

Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a maker name is printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the IC. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name of the IC can be easily visually recognized while the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC is arranged so that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily seen. You can also.

When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the IC increase in order counterclockwise starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. ..

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP to form an electrical connection with other electronic components. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the lateral direction is RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and an electrical connection is formed with other electronic components. The main control board M is connected to the sub control board S or the like via a connector, and can transmit and receive various signals.

<Interval between CPUC100 and IC>
As shown by the broken line in FIG. 91, only the resistor is arranged inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, and the IC is not arranged. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR is equal to or less than the predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL in the lateral direction of the CPUC 100. Various currents (such as a time-varying current, for example, a high-frequency signal) flow through the IC, and the IC can be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. In this way, by not arranging the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL), and the noise emitted from the IC is generated. , It is possible not to affect the operation of the CPUC100.

Further, the predetermined length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR may be at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor. Since a current flows through the resistor, the resistor can be a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. Therefore, by not arranging the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistor is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, length RLL) and emitted from the resistor. The heat generated can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC 100.

<Relationship between the height of CPUC100, the height of IC, and the height of other parts>
FIG. 92 is a side view showing the heights of the various electronic components shown in FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPUC100 is the highest, then the height IHT of the IC is the highest, and the height RHT of the resistance is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only the parts having a height CHT of the CPUC 100 or less are arranged inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR is equal to or less than the predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor.

In the work of attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, an attachment tool (not shown) is used. The mounting tool is a tool for mounting the CPUC100 by sandwiching it between the tips of the mounting tools and bringing it closer to the printed circuit board MP. Since the structure is such that the CPUC 100 is sandwiched by the tip of the mounting tool, the tip of the mounting tool is arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is sandwiched. Therefore, when mounting the CPUC100, the tip of the mounting tool must also be brought close to the printed circuit board MP, and a space for the tip of the mounting tool is provided so that the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other electronic components. It is necessary to secure it.

Therefore, only the parts having a height CHT of the CPUC 100 or less are arranged in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. By doing so, even if the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other parts. Region CSR2 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor.

Only the parts having a height of less than the height CHT of the CPUC100 are arranged only in the area around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and the area around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP in the printed circuit board MP. Outside, parts having a height of CHT or more of CPUC100 may be attached, or all parts attached to the printed circuit board MP may be configured to be parts having a height of CHT of CPUC100 or less.

In this way, by arranging only electronic components lower than the height CHT of the CPUC100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC100, it is possible to secure a space in which the tip of the mounting tool can be approached. Even if the mounting tool is used, the CPUC 100 can be mounted on the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

In the above-mentioned example, the main control board M has been described as an example, but all the boards on which electronic components such as CPU and IC are mounted, such as the sub control board S, the door board D, the rotating cylinder board K, and the power supply board E. Can be applied to.

<<< Structure related to AT lottery >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be added that the configuration illustrated in the figure is applicable to all the above-mentioned configurations when the configuration is configured to have an AT.

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a state in which AT lottery is possible. In the figure, there are no plurality of gaming states having different probabilities of winning the AT lottery such as a low probability state and a high probability state. For example, one gaming state such as the high probability state in the present embodiment is not provided. It is configured so that the AT lottery can be executed only in. Further, as a difference from the present embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed based on the winning of the BB.

In the case of Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets “2” as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type for identifying the winning probability when executing the AT lottery, which is provided to reduce the data capacity required for executing the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device having no setting difference in the lottery probability). In the modified example shown in the figure, the condition devices having no setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (may be all replays, or some replays), It is a push order bell, and in this process, it is determined whether or not the condition device with no setting difference has been won. In addition, although there is a setting difference in the lottery probability of the loss and the common bell (there is a setting difference), in this process, it is configured so as not to determine whether or not the loss or the common bell has been won. ing. It is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type is different from the RAM area for storing the winning number and the effect group number described above. With such a configuration, an area for storing the winning number and an effect group, which is an area in which the information on the condition device having a setting difference in the winning probability and the information on the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability are stored separately. An area for storing numbers and an area for storing AT lottery types, which is an area in which information about a condition device having a setting difference in winning probability and information about a condition device having no setting difference in winning probability are stored without distinction. Can be configured not to be confused.

In the case of Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, and sets the AT lottery type in the predetermined RAM area (in step 1401-2). (The same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area) is temporarily stored (overwritten), and the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Even if No in step 1401-3, the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right of the figure will be described in detail. In this modified example, when the condition device with no setting difference is won in the situation where the AT lottery can be executed, when the watermelon B is won, "0" is selected as the AT lottery type, and when the cherry is won. Is "0" as the AT lottery type, "1" as the AT lottery type when the watermelon A is won, "2" as the AT lottery type when the replay is won, and "2" when the push order bell is won. It is configured to set "2" as the AT lottery type.

Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0", and 18 / when the AT lottery type is "1". It is 256, and when the AT lottery type is "2", it is 1/256, and it is "0 → 1 → 2" in order from the one that is easy to win the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 50) as the number of AT initial games in the AT counter. In this modification, unlike the present embodiment, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and the number of AT initial games is set in the AT state start control process. It is configured not to (the number of AT games may be added if the number of AT games is added). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and shifts to the next process (process in step 1430). Even if No in step 1401-1 or 1401-6, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1430).

In a conventional gaming machine, as an AT lottery, a common lottery process that does not refer to a winning combination and a lottery process that is executed when a condition device having no setting difference is won (a lottery process that refers to a winning combination) are performed. When configured to have, it was necessary to execute the AT lottery at least twice, but by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, in the figure, The process of step 1401-2 is supported) and the lottery process executed when the condition device having no setting difference is won (in the figure, the process of step 1401-4 is supported). Can be executed in one lottery process (in the figure, the process of steps 1401-6 corresponds to).

In the above, the configuration of a rotating cylinder type gaming machine has been illustrated as a gaming machine, but the above configuration is applied to various gaming models such as pachinko gaming machines, rock-paper-scissors gaming machines, arrange balls, game machines, and casino machines. can.

Of the above configurations, the configuration related to the setting of the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch, the setting / reset button, etc. (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) is also applicable to the pachinko gaming machine having the set value. Applicable.

<<< Configuration related to push order navigation applicable to the gaming machine according to this example >>>
The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. Here, the execution mode of the push order navigation applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that the configuration described in detail below is applicable to all embodiments.

Further, regarding the push order navigation in this example, the following configuration is referred to as a push order navigation.
(1) The display of the operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "= 3", it is possible to instruct the pressing order of "middle->left->right". Further, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction and instruction display, and a game for executing the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game.
(2) Displaying the operation mode (an image suggesting) of the stop button advantageous to the player on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "123", it is possible to instruct (suggest) the pressing order of "left → middle → right".
(3) Outputting a voice suggesting an operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button by outputting "left" when the start lever is operated.
(4) When the reel window frame lamp D310 controlled by the sub-control board S lights up (blinks) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button which is advantageous to the player, it is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and the left stop button lights up, instructing (suggestion) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. It is possible.
(5) The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub control board S is a player. Lighting (blinking) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button, which is advantageous to the user, is called push-order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel lights up, so that it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.

In the following, the push order navigation is displayed for the game in which the push order combination (the combination such as the push order bell, the push order replay combination, etc., in which the number of payouts and the transition mode of the RT state may differ depending on the push order) is determined as the winning combination. The timing at which is started and the timing at which push order navigation ends will be described. By determining the push order combination as the winning combination in the AT state, it is possible to execute the push order navigation that informs the player of the most advantageous stop button operation mode (reel stop order and stop button operation timing). It is configured as.

<< Configuration related to the start of display of push order navigation >>
<Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>
First, if there is no weight, in other words, the push order when the game is executed by operating the start lever when the minimum game time has elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is 0). The execution mode of the navigation will be described below.

<Structure 1>
First, the configuration of FIG. 94 will be described. The state related to AT is the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating (executed in step 1260 of FIG. 18). In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, immediately after executing the rotating cylinder rotation process, "= 3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the push order display device D270,
"= 1": Instruct the pressing order of "Left → Middle → Right""=2": Indicate the pressing order of "Left → Right → Middle""=3": Indicate the pressing order of "Middle → Left → Right" Instruction "= 4": Instruct the pressing order of "middle → right → left""=5": Instruct the pressing order of "right → left → middle""=6": Instruct the pressing order of "right → middle → left" Is configured as instructed.

The display mode when the push order navigation is executed by the push order display device D270 is not limited to the above-mentioned display mode. For example, the right digit (lower digit) without displaying "=". A number may be displayed only on the right digit, or a display mode other than the number corresponding to the stop button (or reel) may be displayed only on the right digit (lower digit). In addition, the right digit (lower digit) is configured to correspond to the stop button (or reel) to be stopped next time, and the left digit (upper digit) is configured to indicate the push order of the entire game. May be good. In such a configuration, the display mode of the right digit (lower digit) may change for each stop operation of the stop button, while the left digit (upper digit) is the same regardless of the stop operation of the stop button. It becomes a display mode.

After "= 3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40,
"123": Instruct the pressing order of "left → middle → right""132": Instruct the pressing order of "left → right → middle""213": instruct the pressing order of "middle → left → right""312"": Instruct the pressing order of"middle->right-> left "" 231 ": Instruct the pressing order of"right->left-> middle "" 321 ": Instruct the pressing order of"right->middle-> left " Has been done.

The display mode when the push order navigation is executed by the effect display device S40 is not limited to the above-mentioned display mode, and may be a display mode other than the arithmetic number, for example, a Chinese numeral. , An image of a character that is not a number, an image of a symbol, or the like may be used. In addition to the display mode corresponding to all the stop buttons, for example, "1--" (press order navigation for notifying that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop) for instructing only the first stop). You may execute the push order navigation like this.

The "display" may mean that all the elements to be displayed have been displayed, or that the elements to be displayed have started to be displayed. For example, to display "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all the "123" are displayed on the effect display device S40, or the display of "123" is started on the effect display device S40 (. It may be that an effect at the start of display has occurred). Similarly, "end of display" may mean that all the elements whose display should be terminated are not displayed, or that a display transition for hiding the elements whose display should be terminated may be started. For example, when the display of "123" is finished on the effect display device S40, all "123" may not be displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the displays of "123" on the effect display device S40. It may be assumed that the part has begun to be erased (an effect at the end of the display has occurred, etc.). Similarly, "clearing the display" may mean that all the elements for which the display should be erased are not displayed, or may mean that a display transition for hiding the elements for which the display should be erased is started. .. For example, erasing the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" are not displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the displays of "123" on the effect display device S40. It may be assumed that the part has begun to be erased (an effect at the time of erasing the display has occurred, etc.). Similarly, to erase the display of "1" on the effect display device S40, the effect display device is operated after the left stop button is operated in a situation where all "123" are displayed on the effect display device S40. It may be that "1" is not displayed in S40, or a part of the display of "1" has begun to be erased by the effect display device S40 (an effect at the time of display erasure has occurred, etc.).

After the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, the operation of the stop button becomes effective. After the reel rotation starts, the reel driving state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state, so that the operation of the stop button becomes effective. In the instruction game, the player operates the stop button after confirming the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 or the effect display device S40, rather than enabling the stop button as shown in the figure. By making it possible to display the push order navigation in front, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the push order (a situation in which the push order is mistaken).

Further, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is displayed (display starts) before the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 will be described. When "Winning-A3" is determined as a winning combination, the CPUC100 of the main control board M issues a command related to winning / replay winning information as a control command in step 1622 as a timer interrupt processing on the sub-control board. Send to the S side. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command processing of step 2250 based on the command related to the winning / replay winning information received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M (as the command processing, push order navigation such as step 2360 is performed). Execute push order navigation display processing for display).

Here, the processing when the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side will be described in detail. First, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning / replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the command data is saved, the command analysis process is performed, and the sub-main board (in the sub-control board S). The process of transmitting the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation from the effect control board (the board in the sub control board S) is sequentially performed, and the push order navigation is displayed from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information. It takes about 16 ms to transmit the command according to the aspect. Further, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, executes a drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. As an example, the command transmitted by the main control board M to the sub control board S side is a command related to winning / replay winning information, but this is just an example and can be used as another command such as a command related to the production group number. It may be appropriately designed according to the execution timing of the desired effect.

Further, when the push order navigation is displayed by the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side, the push order display device D270 is configured to be lit by dynamic lighting, so that the timer interrupt processing is performed. Assuming that the cycle is 2 ms, since the five 7-segment LED units are sequentially lit for each timer interrupt process, it takes a maximum of about 10 ms to complete the lighting. Since it is configured in this way, the push order navigation is displayed after the trigger for displaying the push order navigation (for example, the operation of the start lever) occurs on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side. Rather than the time until completion, an opportunity to display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side (for example, reception of a command related to winning / replay winning information from the main control board M side) ) Is generated and the push order navigation display is completed for a longer period of time.

Here, the process executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M will be described in detail as the period during which the display of the push order navigation in this example can be started. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPUC100 of the main control board M controls peripheral devices and the like to advance the game. The process executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M in this example will be described only for specific steps in order to simplify the description, but it should be added that this is not the case. For example, if the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines in the determination process of step 1251 that the start lever D50 has been operated, the reel rotation start preparation process is executed in step 1550. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing in step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether or not the reel acceleration state start timing in step 6106 has been reached. Then, in steps 6108 and 6110, the reel driving state is updated to the reel acceleration state, and the reel rotation starts. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 is a period corresponding to the weight period until the start of reel rotation. For example, from the game start timing (reel rotation start timing) by the game interval minimum time timer M70 as a predetermined condition. It is a period that occurs because the time to be secured (4.1 seconds in this example) is not satisfied by the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing), and is sometimes referred to as the minimum game time. Next, in step 6114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel acceleration state end timing of step 6114 has been reached. Then, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state in steps 6116 and 6118, performs processing to maintain the reel constant speed state, and then enables the operation of the stop button. The process of making is executed. In this example, any timing within the period in which the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above processing, in other words, any time from the time when the start lever operation is executed to the time when the stop button operation becomes effective. It suffices if it is configured so that the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) at the timing of.

As described above, the period from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated to the time when the operation of the stop button becomes effective has been described according to the process executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M. However, in this example, the main control board M has been described. According to the process executed by the CPUC100, the start lever operation → the minimum game time has elapsed → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button is valid (also called the operation of the reel stop button is valid). The period will be specified separately. For example, FIG. 94 illustrates a case where the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is executed at the timing immediately after the rotation cylinder rotation start process is executed, and the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed during the reel acceleration state. There is.

In addition, in FIG. 94, the case where the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed in the reel acceleration state is illustrated, but the main control board M transmits a command to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board. It means that S executes the drawing process and the push order navigation is displayed during the reel acceleration state, and the configuration related to the display of the push order navigation on the sub control board S side is configured as follows. May be good.
(1) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → Main control board M executes rotation cylinder rotation start processing to start reel rotation → Update reel drive state to acceleration state → Main control board M pushes order display device D270 The push order navigation is displayed by dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command related to the winning / replay winning information → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process with the command, and the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state (2) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → The main control board M executes the rotating cylinder rotation start process to start the reel rotation → the reel drive state is updated to the acceleration state → the main control board M displays the push order navigation with the push order display device D270 by dynamic lighting → main control Board M sends a command related to winning / re-game winning information to the sub-control board S side → Sub-control board S side receives a command related to winning / re-game winning information → Main control board M is specified to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the predetermined command → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process with the predetermined command as an opportunity, and the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation → the reel drive state is displayed. Update to constant speed state (3) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → Main control board M executes rotation cylinder rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → Update reel drive state to acceleration state → Main control board M The push order display device D270 displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side wins / replay winning information Receive the command related to → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process with the command and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (4) Start lever operation → Minimum Game time elapses → Main control board M executes rotation cylinder rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → Updates reel drive state to acceleration state → Main control board M dynamically lights push order navigation on push order display device D270 Displayed with → Main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side → Sub control board S side receives a command related to winning / replay winning information → Main control board M receives a command related to winning / replay winning information Send a predetermined command to the board S side → Sub-control The board S side receives the predetermined command → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Sub-control triggered by the predetermined command The board S side may execute the drawing process and display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. That is, the time value from when the sub-control board S side receives a predetermined command from the main control board M side to when the drawing process is executed is designed, and the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side is determined. Alternatively, the timing at which the main control board M side transmits a predetermined command to the sub control board S side may be designed to determine the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub control board S side.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration of FIG. 95 will be described. The state related to AT is the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, a command is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S side, and "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. After "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, "= 3" is dynamically displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 95, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is at the timing after executing the rotation start processing, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is at the timing immediately before the operation of the reel stop button becomes effective. Will be executed.

<Effect 1>
By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time elapses → reel). By determining the rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective), for example, the push order navigation is started on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reliably prevent the situation where the player cannot recognize the push order navigation regardless of which display device is viewed due to a delay in the timing of the reeling, and does not cause any disadvantage to the player. Can be done.

<Effect 2>
Further, by configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can be reduced.

<Structure 3>
In the AT state, when a push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination, etc.) is determined as a winning combination, as an effect means for notifying the push order, not only the effect display device S40 but also, for example, FIG. 97. , The pressing order is notified by a lamp (hereinafter, referred to as a reel window frame lamp D310) provided on the middle panel (intermediate decoration panel) as shown in FIG. 98, or a voice output from the speaker S20. Configuration is also possible. In the configuration 3, when the instruction game is executed, the reel window frame lamp D310 can execute the push order navigation. The reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position (near the reel) corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and is composed of, for example, an LED or the like like the start lamp D180. The lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound output from the speaker S20, and the like are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S in the same manner as the effect display device S40. That is, when the push order navigation is executed by these effect means, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S steps based on the command received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, as in the case of the effect display device S40. By executing command processing (here, referred to as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and audio output processing) in 2108 and step 2250, push order navigation can be executed. Since the reel window frame lamp D310 is preferably provided at a position where the player can easily see it, for example, the upper side or the lower side of the reel window D160 (a reel on which the reel can be visually recognized from the player's point of view). It is preferable to provide a space above or below the window D160 so as to correspond to each reel.

Configuration 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 97. The state related to AT is the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle-> left-> right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, immediately after the rotation cylinder rotation start process is executed, "= 3" is dynamically lit and displayed (display start) as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. After "= 3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) lights up (starts lighting) as the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. .. After that, "213" is displayed (display starts) as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 97, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "push order display device-> reel window frame lamp-> effect display device", and the display of the push order navigation is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310. The timing is later than that of the push order display device D270 and earlier than that of the effect display device S40.

Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning / replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, the command data is saved and the command analysis process is performed in sequence, and then the push order navigation is performed from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). The process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and the process of transmitting a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub control board S) to the lamp control board (board in the sub control board S). It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and the transmission of the command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation. Further, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, executes a drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives the command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation, and immediately executes the lighting process if there is no problem in the content of the command (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, a command related to winning / replay winning information is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command as an opportunity to perform the effect display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310. When the push order navigation is executed by, the push order navigation display (lighting display) by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command related to the winning / replay winning information, and may be a command related to the effect group number.

In this way, by configuring the reel window frame lamp D310 to display the push order navigation (lighting display) before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40, a simple notification is given to the player. It can be executed faster, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the pressing order is mistaken).

The order in which the push order navigation is displayed may be "push order display device-> effect display device-> reel window frame lamp". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may transmit a command related to push-order navigation to the effect control board, and then the sub-main board may send a command related to push-order navigation to the lamp board. Then, a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310. May be a different command.

As described above, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) is "push order display device-> reel window frame lamp-> effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed (display start). The order in which the display is started) is not limited to this. For example, as a modification of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), "reel window frame lamp-> push order display device-> effect display device", "effect display device-> push order display device-> reel window frame lamp", It may be configured as "reel window frame lamp-> effect display device-> push order display device" and "effect display device-> reel window frame lamp-> push order display device". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to push order navigation to the lamp board and the effect control board, the main control board M dynamically performs push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (start displaying) when it is lit, or a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310. May be different from the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of. In this way, depending on the timing of sending commands from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying (starting display) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting.
(1) The push order navigation by the dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 is executed first (2) The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed first (3) The push order by the effect display device S40 It is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts), such as executing the navigation first.

<Effect>
In this way, in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state). → By determining the period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp ( In this example, a user-friendly gaming machine that can be executed by using the reel window frame lamp D310, etc., and is unlikely to cause the player to be unable to recognize the push order navigation (advantageous operation mode of the stop button). Can be provided.

<Structure 4>
Next, as the configuration 4, a configuration for executing the notification of the push order navigation by the voice output from the speaker S20 will be described. Configuration 4 is configured to notify the push order by voice in the instruction game. For example, dialogues such as "left", "middle", and "right" are output as voice from the speaker, and the stop is performed. Execute push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be operated (stop button to be operated).

Configuration 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 98. The state related to AT is the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle-> left-> right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, immediately after the rotation cylinder rotation start process is executed, "= 3" is dynamically lit and displayed (display start) as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. After "= 3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the push order navigation that outputs the sound by the speaker S20 is "middle" (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop operation). A voice suggesting that) is output. After that, "213" is displayed (display starts) as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "push order display device-> voice-> effect display device", and the timing at which the push order navigation notification by voice output is started is the reel window frame. Similar to the lamp D310, the timing is slower than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning / replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, the command data is saved and the command analysis process is performed in sequence, and then the push order navigation is performed from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). The process of transmitting the command related to the display mode and the process of transmitting the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub control board S) to the voice control board (board in the sub control board S). It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and the transmission of the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation. Further, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, executes a drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the voice control board receives the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation, and immediately executes the voice output process if there is no problem in the content of the command (the voice output process is executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, a command related to winning / replay winning information is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command as an opportunity to use the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20. When the push order navigation is executed, the output (audio output) of the push order navigation by the speaker S20 is executed before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command related to the winning / replay winning information, and may be a command related to the effect group number.

In this way, by configuring the push order navigation output (voice output) by the speaker S20 to be executed before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40, a simple notification can be executed to the player faster. At the same time, the player can recognize the pressing order by voice even if he / she is not looking at the effect display device S40, and operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (wrong pressing order). It is possible to prevent the situation).

As described above, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) is "push order display device-> voice-> effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed (display start). The order in which they are performed is not limited to this. For example, as a modification of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), it may be configured as "push order display device-> effect display device-> voice". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may transmit a command related to push-order navigation to the effect control board, and then the sub-main board may send a command related to push-order navigation to the voice control board. It is good, and the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation in the voice from the speaker S20 are displayed from the main control board M side. The command may be different from the command.

Furthermore, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) is "voice-> push order display device-> effect display device", "voice-> effect display device-> push order display device", "effect display device->voice->press". It is also possible to configure "sequential display device", "effect display device-> push order display device->voice", and the like. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to push order navigation to the voice control board and the effect control board, the main control board M performs push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (start display) by dynamic lighting, or the command from the main control board M side and the push order in the voice from the speaker S20, which triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. The command from the main control board M side, which triggers the navigation to be displayed, may be a different command. In this way, depending on the timing of sending commands from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying (starting display) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting.
(1) The push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 is executed first (2) The push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 is executed first (3) The push order by the effect display device S40 It is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts), such as executing the navigation first.

<Effect>
In this way, in the situation where the minimum game time has passed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button. By determining the period until the operation becomes effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is voiced (in this example, from the speaker S20). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can be executed by using (output voice) or the like, and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation.

<< Execution mode of push order navigation when there is weight >>
First, if there is a weight, in other words, the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is greater than 0), and then the game is executed. The execution mode of the push order navigation in the case of being performed will be described below.

<Structure 1>
First, configuration 1 of FIG. 99 will be described. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

First, the start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 by timer interrupt processing, so that the push order display device D270 is displayed with "=". Execute the process of displaying (starting display) the push order navigation of "3" with dynamic lighting. After that, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, "213" is displayed (display starts) as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 99, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 100 will be described. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (drawing described above). Execute the process). After that, the minimum game time elapses, the reel starts rotating by executing the rotating cylinder rotation start process, and the main control board M is in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Before (immediately before the operation of the stop button becomes effective), the push order display device D270 executes a process of displaying (starting display) dynamic lighting of "= 3" as a push order navigation. In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. Here, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40 based on the reception of the command related to the effect group number. , The command that triggers the execution of the process of displaying (starting the display) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and at the timing of displaying (starting the display) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The command to be transmitted from the main control board M, which serves as an opportunity, may be determined accordingly.

<Structure 3>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 101 will be described. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (drawing described above). Execute the process). After that, the main control board M dynamically sets "= 3" as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 at the timing when the minimum game time elapses, the rotation cylinder rotation start process is executed, and the reel starts to rotate. Executes the process of displaying (starting display) when it is lit. In FIG. 101, when the start lever is operated in a situation where it takes a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is a time value for five timer interrupt processes) or more until the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device is displayed. The push order navigation of S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. In addition, when the start lever is operated in a situation where less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is the time value for five timer interrupt processes) remains before the minimum game time elapses, or the minimum game time When the start lever is operated in the situation where The opportunity to display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side (for example, the main control board M) rather than the time from the occurrence of Since the time from the occurrence of the winning / re-game winning information command reception from the side) to the completion of the push order navigation display is configured to be longer, the push order display device D270 The push order navigation of is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

As described above, an example of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 has been described, but the push order navigation is displayed (display start). The timing is not limited to this. For example, as a modification of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) in FIG. 99, the effect display device S40 is used before the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum game time elapses. During the period before the minimum game time elapses, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts), and the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 simultaneously display (display start) the push order navigation. Alternatively, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum game time elapses, and the push order navigation is displayed (displayed) on the effect display device S40 after the minimum game time elapses. The push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the effect display device S40 during the period before the minimum game time elapses, and the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270 after the minimum game time elapses. May be configured to divide the display (display start) timing of the push order navigation before and after the elapse of the minimum game time, such as displaying (display start).

<Effect>
In this way, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration. State → Reel constant speed state → Period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective). With this configuration, it is possible to make the timing of displaying (displaying start) the push order navigation different between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. As an effect of differentiating the timing of displaying (starting display) the push order navigation between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40.
(1) When the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 The start lever is operated, and the main control board M wins the winning combination (here, the push order). The push order navigation can be displayed (display start) on the push order display device D270 by the timer interrupt process (for example, about 2 ms) immediately after the effect group number is determined based on the decision of the bell role. , It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly notifies the player of information related to push order navigation.
(2) When the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40 Since the information related to the current game state or the winning combination is often configured to be suggested on the effect display device S40, the player advances the game while visually recognizing the effect display device S40. Will go. The size (display area) is larger than that of the push order display device D270, and the effect display device S40, which is easy for the player to see, is configured to promptly notify the player of information related to the push order navigation. Even if the push order navigation is newly executed while the device S40 is visually recognized, the push order navigation can be confirmed while visually recognizing the effect display device S40, so that another push order navigation is displayed each time the push order navigation is displayed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the gaming burden on the player without paying attention to the display device.
In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the push order navigation is not recognized by the player regardless of which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. , It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player.

Further, by making the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can avoid the situation where the player does not have to play and can reduce the player's game burden by being able to visually recognize the push order navigation on individual display devices at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. ..

<Structure 4>
Next, the configuration 4 of FIG. 102 will be described. In the configuration 4, the reel window frame lamp D310 is provided. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S lights (starts lighting) the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) as a push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. Execute the process to be performed. After that, the effect display device S40 executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as a push order navigation. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is the timing before the effect display device S40. This is because, as described above, when the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting process in the reel window frame lamp D310 is a push order navigation. This is because it can be executed faster than the process of drawing on the effect display device S40. After that, the minimum game time elapses, the rotation start process is executed, the reel starts rotating, and then, before the operation of the stop button becomes effective, the push order display device D270 displays the push order navigation as " = 3 ”is displayed (display starts) with dynamic lighting. In FIG. 102, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "reel window frame lamp-> effect display device-> push order display device", and the display of the push order navigation is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310. The timing to be performed is earlier than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Even in the case of the configuration as illustrated in FIG. 102, the start lever is operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (for example, the start lever is operated (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses). When the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "push order display device-> reel window frame lamp-> effect display device" or. There is a case where "reel window frame lamp-> push order display device-> effect display device". Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 is displayed. It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it is just before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses ( For example, when the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side) when the minimum game time elapses (about 10 ms remaining), the push order display device. The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display started) after the push order navigation is displayed by the D270 or the reel window frame lamp D310.

Further, also in the reel window frame lamp D310, the start lever was operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (main control board M When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side), it takes time for the sub control board S side to receive the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp may be displayed (display starts) after the push order navigation is displayed by the order display device D270.
As described above, the timing at which the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is as follows: start lever operation → minimum game time elapses → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → As long as the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be set as appropriate.

<Effect>
In this way, by configuring the reel window frame lamp D310 to display the push order navigation (lighting display) before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40, a simple notification is given to the player. It can be executed faster, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the pressing order is mistaken).

Further, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be executed by lighting the lamp (in this example, lighting the reel window frame lamp D310). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that is unlikely to cause the player to be unable to recognize the push order navigation.

<Structure 5>
Next, the configuration 5 of FIG. 103 will be described. In the configuration 5, the push order navigation is executed by the voice output from the speaker S20 in the instruction game. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed. The sub-control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, and then outputs the sound from the speaker S20 as "middle!" (The first stop operation is the middle stop button. The process of outputting the voice with the voice suggesting the operation) is executed. After that, the effect display device S40 executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as a push order navigation. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation by the voice from the speaker S20 is started is the timing before the effect display device S40. This is a process in which when the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the audio output process from the speaker S20 draws the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. This is because it is executed faster than. After that, after the minimum game time elapses, the reel starts to rotate, and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Previously, the push order display device D270 executes a process of displaying (starting display) dynamic lighting of "= 3" as a push order navigation. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "voice-> effect display device-> push order display device", and the timing at which the push order navigation notification by voice output is started is the push order display. The timing is ahead of the device D270 and ahead of the effect display device S40.

Even in the case of the configuration as illustrated in FIG. 103, the start lever is operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (for example, the remaining game time is about 10 ms). When the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "push order display device-> voice-> effect display device" or "voice->". In some cases, the push order display device → the effect display device. Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 is displayed. It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it is just before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses ( For example, when the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side) when the minimum game time elapses (about 10 ms remaining), the push order display device. The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display started) after the push order navigation is displayed by D270 or the push order navigation is notified by voice.

Further, also in the speaker S20, the start lever was operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (the main control board M is the sub control board). When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the S side), it takes time for the sub control board S side to receive the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. The push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 may be notified after the display of the push order navigation by D270.

As described above, the timing at which the push order navigation display is started on the push order display device D270 is as follows: start lever operation → period during which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → As long as the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be set as appropriate.

<Effect>
In this way, when the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time has elapsed → reel rotation start → By determining the reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective), for example, even if the gaming machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40. The push order navigation can be executed in a simple notification mode of voice (voice output from the speaker S20 in this example), and in a situation where the reel or the stop button is focused and the effect display device S40 is not viewed. Even when the push order navigation is executed, the player can recognize the push order navigation by voice while paying attention to the reel or the stop button, so that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which things are unlikely to occur.

An example of the timing of displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the timing of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 has been described for the case where there is a weight and the case where there is no weight. The timing for displaying the push order navigation on each display device is not limited to these. If it is the period from the start of the operation of the start lever D50 described above to the start lever operation → the minimum game time elapses → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button is valid, the pressing order is appropriate. You can set the timing to display the navigation. Further, it is preferable to set the display timing of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 to be narrower than the above-mentioned period. This is because it takes a predetermined time (for example, 32 ms or more) from the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receiving a predetermined command from the CPUC100 of the main control board M to displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Is. Further, the larger the number of drawing frames displayed on the effect display device S40, the more time is required. The winning combination is determined after the start lever D50 is operated, but considering the time required from the determination of the winning combination to the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 as described above, As an example, the timing at which the push order navigation display is started on the effect display device S40 is the period during which the minimum game time has not elapsed (when there is a weight) → the reel rotation starts (when there is no weight) → the reel acceleration. State → Reel constant speed state → It is preferable to set the period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective. By defining in this way, the period until the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is started and the period until the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is started are different. Can be done. During these periods, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the display of the push order navigation is started on each display device.

For example, in the period until the start lever operation → the minimum game time elapses → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button becomes effective, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, the voice, and the reel To describe an example of the order in which the push order navigation on the window frame lamp D310 is notified,
(1) Push order display device → effect display device → voice → reel window frame lamp (2) push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice (3) push order display device → voice → effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Voice (6) Push order display device → Reel window Frame lamp → voice → effect display device (7) effect display device → push order display device → voice → reel window frame lamp (8) effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → sound (9) effect display device → Voice → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) Production display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (11) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Voice (12 ) Effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice → push order display device (13) voice → push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp (14) voice → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect Display device (15) Voice → Production display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Voice → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (17) Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order Display device → effect display device (18) voice → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device (19) reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device → voice (20) reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → voice → effect display device (21) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device → voice (22) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → voice → push order display device (23) reel Window frame lamp → voice → push order display device → effect display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → voice → effect display device → start lever operation → minimum game time elapses → reel rotation start → In the period from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state to the operation of the stop button, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start).

Further, as one of the effect means controlled by the sub-control board S, it is controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). It is also possible to add a push-order navigation that lights up (blinks) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player by the stop button lamp S60. When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S lights (or blinks) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button on which the first stop operation should be performed. Execute the process to make it. To describe an example of the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display starts) in a configuration in which the push-order navigation by the stop button D40 is added.
(25) Push-order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (blinks)) → Effect display device (26) Push-order display device → Voice → Stop button lamp (1st stop) Button only lit (blinking)) → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (27) Push order display device → voice → stop button lamp (only the first stop button lit (blinking)) and reel window frame lamp are almost simultaneous → effect It can be configured like a display device, but the order here is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, in (27) above, the reel window frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 are turned on (blinking) at the same time, but it is also possible to configure the speaker S20 to output sound at the same time. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing (push order display device D270) related to display (display start) of push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270), or sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel) The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined according to the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push order navigation of the window frame lamp D310, the sound from the speaker S20, and the stop button D40). When performing push-button navigation by the stop button lamp S60, instead of lighting (blinking) the stop button lamps corresponding to all reels, only the stop button lamps corresponding to the reels on which the stop operation should be performed are displayed. It is preferable to control the lighting (blinking). When executing the push-order navigation of, for example, "213": "middle->left->right" by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamp (lit) corresponding to the middle stop button D42 → the middle stop button D42 is operated → the middle stop. Stop button lamp corresponding to button D42 (off) → Stop button lamp corresponding to left stop button D41 (lit) → Operate left stop button D41 → Stop button lamp corresponding to left stop button D41 (off) → Right stop button Stop button lamp corresponding to D43 (lit) → Operate right stop button D43 → Stop button lamp corresponding to reel lights based on the progress of the game like stop button lamp corresponding to right stop button D43 (off) (Blinking), configured to turn off.

Further, the case where the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is executed by the sub-control board S has been described above. The control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) may be executed by the main control board M. Hereinafter, the start timing of the push-button navigation under the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) on the main control board M will be described.

When controlling the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M, the start lever is operated, and a timer interrupt is performed after the effect group number is determined based on the determination of the winning combination (here, the pressing order bell combination). The process of turning on (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60 is executed by the process (for example, in the first cycle from the determination of the effect group number, the time required for the stop button lamp S60 to turn on is about 2 ms). It becomes possible to do. To describe an example of the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display starts) in the configuration in which the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is added by the configuration in this way.
(28) Push order display device → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (blinks)) → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (29) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (blinks)) → Push order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (30) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (blinks)) and push order display device are almost simultaneous → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Production It can be configured like a display device, but the order here is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, in the above (28) to (30), the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, which is controlled on the main control board M side, is the sound from the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20, which are controlled on the sub control board S side. , It is started before the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310, but on the main control board M side, the timing to execute the timer interrupt process for lighting (blinking) the stop button lamp S60 is changed. After starting the push-order navigation on the sub-control board S side (for example, the effect display device S40, the sound from the speaker, the reel window frame lamp D310), the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 may be started. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing related to display (display start) of push-order navigation on the main control board M side (push-order display device D270, stop button lamp S60), or sub-control board S (effect display device S40, reel window frame) The order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display starts) may be determined depending on the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push-order navigation of the lamp D310 and the speaker S20.

<< Configuration related to the end of display of push order navigation >>
Next, the end timing of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 will be described. The timing at which the push order navigation ends can be freely designed to some extent according to the period during which the player ends the game, similar to the timing at which the push order navigation starts. An example of the period during which the player ends the game is the timing at which the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated and all reels are completely stopped and a prize is won, the game ends when the payout of the game medal based on the prize is completed.

The period for ending the display of the push order navigation is the period of "3rd stop button operation (pressing)-> 3rd stop button non-pressing-> winning judgment-> payout based on winning" starting from the operation timing of the 3rd stop button. It is possible to specify either timing. In this example, the end timing of the push order navigation is configured to be different for each push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination). For example, the timing at which the display of the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 ends differs depending on whether the determined winning combination is the push order bell or the push order replay combination.

In the configurations 1 to 5 described below, in order to explain the end timing of the push order navigation, the first stop button and the second stop button are already pressed and the effect display device. It should be added that the push order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button of S40 has also been completed.

<Structure 1>
First, configuration 1 of FIG. 104 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In a situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends, and the push order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start). Will be done. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

Here, the push order navigation disappearance effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display related to the end when the display of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device ends. In the figure, in the situation where "3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, the right stop button is operated, and the sensor that detects the operation of the right stop button is turned from off to on. Is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, so that the command related to the detection is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command related to the detection. Then, by executing the process of erasing the display of "3", the push-order navigation disappearance effect that is erased after the display of "3" becomes transparent is displayed.

After that, in the situation where the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is finished, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect is finished (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is finished). Here, as the end trigger of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the push order navigation of the effect display device S40, both "press the third stop button" (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off). It is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side), but in FIG. 104, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 precedes the push order navigation of the effect display device S40. The display is completely erased. This is the same as when the push order navigation starts, and even if the end timing of the push order navigation is set to "when the third stop button is pressed", the CPUSC of the sub-control board S draws a plurality of frames. It can be said that this is because the end of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is delayed by the amount of processing for displaying.

To elaborate on the end of the push order navigation, in the push order display device D270, the push order display device D270 is turned on → off start → off is completed, so that the push order navigation ends, and in the effect display device S40, the push order is pushed. The push order navigation ends when the display of the forward navigation → the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect starts → the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (erasing is completed). In this example, the timing at which the push-order display device D270 starts to turn off is referred to as the push-order display device turns off, and the display start of the push-order navigation disappearance effect is referred to as the display (display start) of the push-order navigation disappearance effect. The push order display device extinguishing may be replaced with the timing at which the push order display device D270 completes turning off, or the display of the push order navigation extinction effect may be replaced with the timing at which the display of the push order navigation extinction effect ends. The timing of turning off the push order display device and displaying the push order navigation disappearance effect (display start) may be set to the push order display device turn off → display of the push order navigation disappearance effect (display start), or display of the push order disappearance effect. (Display start) → The push order display device may be turned off, or the push order display device may be turned off and the push order navigation disappearance effect may be displayed (display start) at the same time.

Further, the configuration in which the push-button navigation display ends when the third stop button is operated has been described above, but the timing when the third stop button is pressed (the operation of the third stop button is detected) is the same as when the third stop button is operated. It is the timing when it is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side that the sensor for this is turned on from off. In the following, it may also be referred to as "when the third stop button is pressed") and the third stop. After the button is pressed, the third stop button is released (after detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side). , It is the timing when it is detected that it has changed from on to off, and in the following, it may also be referred to as "when the third stop button is not pressed"), and the push order navigation ends for each of these states. It can also be configured to specify the timing. For example, in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, the order of the timing at which the push order navigation ends is described in more detail.
(When the push order navigation ends not at the same time)
(1) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the push order display device is turned off → the sub control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push-order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(2) Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the push order display device turns off → the interrupt processing on the main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has been turned on from off → Sends a command related to the detection of the 3rd stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → sub The control board S side receives the command → Display of push order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(3) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the push order display device is turned off → the sub control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push-order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(4) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the third from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Send a command related to the detection of the stop button → The sub control board S side receives the command → Display of the push order disappearance effect (display start) → Turn off the push order display device (5) By interrupt processing on the main control board M side 3 Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button has turned from off to on → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → sub control board S The side receives the command → Display of the push order disappearance effect (display start) → Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has been turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → Push order display device goes off (6) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has been turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → Sub control board from the main control board M side Send a command related to the detection of the 3rd stop button to the S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push order disappearance effect (display start) → Turn off the push order display device (end of push order navigation at the same time) case)
(7) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the third from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Send a command related to the detection of the stop button → The sub control board S side receives the command → The push order disappearance effect is displayed (display starts) and the push order display device is turned off (8) By the interrupt processing on the main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has turned from on to off → Sends a command related to the detection of the 3rd stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → sub control board It is possible for the S side to specify that the push order display device is turned off at the same time as the reception of the command → the display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect.

Further, the display mode of the push order navigation when the first stop button is pressed and when the second stop button is pressed, not when the third stop button is pressed, will be described as a supplement. First, in the push order display device D270, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on (or from on to off) by the interrupt process on the main control board M side after the lighting is started. The lighted state continues until it is detected and the light is turned off. On the other hand, in the effect display device S40, for example, the first stop button is pressed (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on (or from on to off) by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side). (Detection) The command related to the detection of the first stop button is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → the push order corresponding to the first stop button disappears. Start changing the display mode of the effect display (display start) and the push order navigation (for example, "2" display) corresponding to the reel to be stopped next (hereinafter, "display mode of the second reel push order navigation"). It is also configured to "start change"). The order in which these are executed is
(9) Display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button (display start) → Start changing the display mode of the second reel push order navigation (10) Start changing the display mode of the second reel push order navigation → No. 1 Display of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the stop button (display start)
It may be configured as either of. Similarly, when the second stop button is operated, the same applies.
(11) Display of push order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the 2nd stop button (display start) → Start of change of display mode of 3rd reel push order navigation (12) 3rd reel push order Start changing the display mode of the navigation → Display the push order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button (display start)
It can be configured as follows.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 105 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In a situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, the push order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display start) on the effect display device S40. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, while pressing the right stop button, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, when the right stop button is released, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends.

<Structure 3>
Next, configuration 3 of FIG. 106 will be described. In FIG. 106, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is set to “3” instead of “= 3”. That is, the numerical value is displayed as the push order navigation in the right digit of the push order display device D270, and the left digit is hidden. Further, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display the push order navigation display and the acquired number of sheets display.

The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → sub-control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the effect display device S40 (display start) Will be done. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle-> left-> right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, while pressing the right stop button, the symbol combination related to the push order bell (the symbol combination for paying out 11 sheets) is stopped and displayed, and "0" is displayed on the push order display device D270. After that, when the right stop button is released, the payout related to the symbol combination displayed as stopped is started, and the push order display device D270 is displayed with "1" → "2" → "3" → ... "10" → "11". The number of acquired cards is displayed. After "11" is displayed on the push order display device D270 (after displaying the acquired number of sheets), the display of the push order display device D270 is terminated (hidden). In this way, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display both the push order navigation and the acquired number of sheets display, and the display mode of the push order navigation display is a numerical value only in the lower digit of the push order display device D270. In the mode of displaying, when the symbol combination for which the game medal is paid out is stopped and displayed in the instruction game, the push order display device D270 displays both the push order navigation and the acquired number of sheets display. There is a risk that a person may misidentify the push order navigation or the number of acquired medals. Therefore, by ending the display of the push order navigation and configuring to display "0" while starting the display of the acquired number of sheets, regardless of the number of payouts related to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed (for example, 1). Whether the number is 11 or 11), the player can recognize that the display of the acquired number is started. The numerical value of "0" may be changed, and it is preferable that the display mode is different from the display mode that can be displayed as the push order navigation.

It should be noted that the end timing of the push order navigation display of the push order display device D270 is changed from "the third stop button is not pressed (after separation)", that is, "3" is displayed (the function of the push order display device) to "0". Although it is assumed that the switch is made to (function of the payout number display device), for example, it may be the timing of "payout completion based on winning" when the display of the push order display device D270 disappears completely. By setting the end timing of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 to "when the third stop button is pressed", the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 precedes the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. You can see that it will end.

As another example, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is configured as "13", "23", "33" instead of "= 3". The displayed push order navigation will be explained in detail. The left digits "1", "2", and "3" are associated with the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, respectively, and indicate the positions of the reels on which the stop operation should be performed. (For example, "1" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the left reel M51, and "2" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the middle reel M52). The digit "3" on the right side corresponds to the pressing order "middle-> left-> right" (corresponding instruction number is "A3") displayed on the effect display device S40 as in the conventional configuration. It is a thing. With this configuration, the push order navigation is displayed in the order of "23"-> "13"-> "33", and the stop button is operated according to the push order. At the timing, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation on the next reel should be performed is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the display of the push order navigation (“33” in this example) corresponding to the final stop operation disappears, so that the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 ends.

<Effect>
In this way, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press) → third stop button not pressed → winning judgment → winning). The end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation where two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the number of problems.

Further, when the end of the push order navigation display (push order navigation display on the effect display device S40) on the push order display device D270 is triggered by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on. If it is specified to be turned off (release the stop button), it will stop even if the player holds down the final stop button (third stop button) with a sense of expectation for the result of the game. It can be configured so that the push order navigation does not end until the button is turned from on to off. Here, if the push order navigation is deleted immediately after the stop button is turned from off to on, the expectation that the result of the game may not be advantageous to the player is reduced. Since there is a possibility that the event will come off, the result of the game is not a favorable result for the player by configuring so that the push order navigation does not end until the stop button is turned from on to off. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of events that reduce the expectation of the heel.

<Structure 4>
Next, the configuration 4 of FIG. 107 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In a situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → sub-control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the effect display device S40 (display start) At the same time, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 ends. In the game, the player has won the predetermined push order re-game, and the player is most advantageous by stopping the game in the order of "middle->left->right" (RT state with high re-game winning probability). (For example, when the middle first stop is the most profitable three-choice push-order re-game, "re-game-D2" is won).

After that, while pressing the right stop button, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, when the right stop button is released (it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side), the symbol combination related to the replay is performed. Is stopped and displayed, so that automatic betting is executed and the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up (when automatic betting is executed, for example, 1-bet lamp D211 → 2-bet lamp D212 → 3-bet lamp D213). Will light up).

<Structure 5>
Next, the configuration 5 of FIG. 108 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In a situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → sub-control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the effect display device S40 (display start) ). In the game, the player has won the predetermined push order re-game, and the player is most advantageous by stopping the game in the order of "middle->left->right" (RT state with high re-game winning probability). (For example, when the middle first stop is the most profitable three-choice push-order re-game, "re-game-D2" is won).

After that, while pressing the right stop button, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, when the right stop button is released (it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side), the symbol combination related to the replay is performed. Is stopped and displayed, so that automatic betting is executed, the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, and after the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, the push-order navigation in the push-order display device D270 ends.

In this way, for example, in the case where the configuration 1 of FIG. 104 and the configuration 5 of FIG. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that enables even a player who does not have a mark to determine which small winning combination has won a prize due to the difference in the end timing of the push order navigation.

As described above, the end timing of the push order navigation in the case of the push order bell as the push order combination or the push order replay combination has been described. In the effect display device S40, as the timing at which the push order navigation ends, only the case of "when the third stop button is pressed" has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the game ends in any of the following: 3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button non-press → winning judgment → payout completion based on winning, the timing to end the push order navigation is arbitrarily determined. Is possible. Further, in the push order display device D270, as the timing at which the push order navigation ends, the period during which the push order navigation ends differs depending on whether the winning combination is the push order bell or the push order replay combination. ing. As an example of the case where the winning combination is the push order replay combination, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is set to "when the 1-bet lamp is lit", and the push order is displayed by arbitrarily setting the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211. The end timing of the push order navigation of the device D270 changes significantly. As an example, if the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211 is at the start of the next game, it is the end period of the push order navigation when the winning combination is the push order bell. The timing is later than "Stop button not pressed-> Winning judgment-> Completion of payout based on winning", "3rd stop button operation (pressing)-> No 3rd stop button pressed-> Winning judgment-> Completion of payout based on winning-> 1 bet lamp If the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211 is not pressing the 3rd stop button, then "3rd stop button operation (pressing)-> 3rd stop button not pressed-> 1-bet lamp is lit-> winning. Judgment → Completion of payout based on winning ", and the winning combination will be included within the end period of the push order navigation at the time of the push order bell.

Similar to the timing when the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the order of the timing when the push order navigation ends is also based on the third stop button operation (press) → the third stop button not pressed → winning judgment → winning. An example of the order in which the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the voice, and the reel window frame lamp D310 is completed during the payout completion period will be described.
(1) Push order display device → effect display device → voice → reel window frame lamp (2) push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice (3) push order display device → voice → effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Voice (6) Push order display device → Reel window Frame lamp → voice → effect display device (7) effect display device → push order display device → voice → reel window frame lamp (8) effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → sound (9) effect display device → Voice → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) Production display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (11) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Voice (12 ) Effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice → push order display device (13) voice → push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp (14) voice → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect Display device (15) Voice → Production display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Voice → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (17) Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order Display device → effect display device (18) voice → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device (19) reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device → voice (20) reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → voice → effect display device (21) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device → voice (22) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → voice → push order display device (23) reel Window frame lamp → voice → push order display device → effect display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → voice → effect display device → push order display device In this way, the third stop button operation (press) → the third stop button is not In the period of pressing → winning judgment → payout completion based on winning, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the pushing order navigation ends.

Further, as one of the effect means controlled by the sub-control board S, it is controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). An example of the order in which the push-order navigation with the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 to be completed is completed will be described. In addition, as a process until the end of the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned from on to off → the main control board M. Sends a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing → The sub-control board S receives the command → Stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button Turns off (starts turning off). Further, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button has been turned from on to off. → The main control board M stops the first stop on the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. Send a command related to button operation → The sub-control board S receives the command → Turn off the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button (start turning off) and provide it inside the second stop button. Turns on (starts lighting) the stop button lamp S60.
(25) Push-order display device-> effect display device->voice-> reel window frame lamp-> stop button (third stop button lamp goes off)
(26) Push-order display device-> effect display device-> reel window frame lamp->sound-> stop button (third stop button lamp goes off)
It is possible to configure such as. The timing of the end of the push order navigation by the stop button D40 is the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, voice, reel, like the reel window frame lamp D310 that executes the push order navigation by turning on or off the lamp. It may be before or after the window frame lamp D310. Further, when the third stop button is operated, the light may be turned off by pressing the third stop button, or may be turned off by not pressing the third stop button.

As described above, in this example, one game progresses based on << configuration related to the display start of the push order navigation >> and << configuration related to the display end of the push order navigation >>. .. A concrete example of the flow of one game from the display (start of display) of the push order navigation to the end of the push order navigation is described.
1. 1. Push order navigation display (display start)
Start lever operation → Display of push order navigation (display start) (push order display device D270) → Display of push order navigation (display start) (effect display device S40)
2. From the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation 2-1. Production display device S40
Display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of 1st stop button (display start) → End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of 1st stop button → Change of display mode of 2nd reel push order navigation → Display of push order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the operation of the 2nd stop button (display start) → End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the 2nd stop button → 3rd reel Change of display mode of push order navigation 2-2. Push order display device D270
The push order display device D270 is in a lit state.
3. 3. 3rd stop button operation-end of push-order navigation display 3rd stop button operation-> push-order display device off-> display of push-order navigation disappearance effect corresponding to 3rd stop button operation (display start)-> 3rd stop button End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation In this way, the flow of one game proceeds. The example described above is only one example, for example, 1. The push order navigation display (display start) may include the reel window frame lamp D310 and the sound output from the speaker S20, and the push order navigation display (display start) timing and push order may be included. The order in which the navigation is displayed (display starts) is not limited to this. In addition, 2. In the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation, the effect display device S40 displays the push-order extinction effect corresponding to each stop button (display start), and changes the display mode of the push-order navigation corresponding to the next reel. The order of doing this is not limited to this. Also, 3. In the third stop button operation to the end of the display of the push order navigation, the order of the display end of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and the timing of the end of the push order navigation is more detailed. It may be specified (it can be further classified by pressing the third stop button, not pressing the third stop button, etc.).

By configuring as in this example, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different. It is possible to avoid the situation where the display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden of the player being able to visually recognize the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. The end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press) → no third stop button pressed → winning judgment → completion of payout based on winning. By specifying the period), for example, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the push order navigation must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, which is user-friendly. A game machine can be provided.

<Display mode when the push order is incorrect>
Here, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, an example of the configuration of the display mode of the push order navigation when the game is executed in a push order (or a different operation timing) different from the push order navigation is described in detail. Describe. Here, an example is illustrated in which a game in which the push order bell is won and the correct push order is “left → middle → right” is executed.

In the situation where "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and "= 1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the middle stop button is displayed as the first stop operation. (The correct pressing order corresponds to the left stop button) is operated, and it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is turned from off to on as interrupt processing on the main control board M side → main control The command related to the detection of the first stop button is transmitted from the board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → the sub control board S side displays all “123” on the effect display device S40. Execute the process to erase.
It may be configured as described above. As described above, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, when a stop button that is not the correct push order is operated, all reels (or stop buttons) are operated on the sub-control board S side. The push order navigation corresponding to the above is deleted, while the display of the push order navigation is maintained on the main control board M side. The push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order navigation by the push order display device D270) is for detecting the operation of the third stop button as an interrupt process on the main control board M side during the third stop operation. It is configured to be erased when it detects that the sensor has turned from on to off).

<< Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >>
Next, the configuration related to the reel stop control and the display control of the push order navigation (effect display device S40) will be described. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

<Structure 1>
First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, the instruction game related to the push order bell is executed in the AT state, and "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The middle stop button is pressed at the timing when the 11th replay symbol is located in the middle of the middle reel, and the display corresponding to the push order navigation "1" of the middle reel changes to the push order navigation disappearance effect. The middle reel stop button is still being pressed. Further, the middle reel is controlled so as to stop the symbols constituting the symbol combination that is the maximum number of 11 cards to be paid out by the stop operation of the middle reel, which is the correct push order. In this example, the 15th bell is configured to stop at the middle stage (effective line) of the middle reel. That is, when the middle stop button is operated at this timing, the maximum number of frames (4 frames in this example) is slipped from the 11th replay A, and the 15th bell is stopped and displayed on the winning line. Control is performed to make it.

Here, the operation control of the stepping motor from the stop operation to the stop of the reel will be described with reference to FIG. 35. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, the state transitions from the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. 35 <reel rotation speed image> to the reel deceleration standby state (5). In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position where the stop operation is performed and the position of the symbol constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game is calculated, and a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms) is calculated. By determining that it is possible to stop and display the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the conditional device won in the game on the winning line, the symbol combination related to the conditional device won in the game is configured. Continue the rotation so that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing when the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game reach the winning line, the reel deceleration state of (6) is transitioned, and the reel stop state of (7) is controlled. do.

After that, as shown in the upper right corner of FIG. 109, in the effect display device S40, the push order navigation disappearance effect of the middle reel is erased (display ends), and the middle reel stops and displays the 15th bell on the winning line. The slip control is continued in order to make it. The middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 109, the effect display device S40 changes the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next. The display mode that changes at this time may be any mode as long as the player can recognize the stop button to be stopped (significantly changing the number, moving the number, making the number shine, etc.). ). On the other hand, the middle reel continues the sliding control in order to stop and display the 15th bell on the winning line. The middle reel stop button is being pressed. The timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed may be before the push order navigation disappearance effect is erased (display ends) or in the push order. It may be after the navigation disappearance effect is erased (display end), or at the same time as the push order navigation disappearance effect is erased (display end).

After that, after the middle stop button has been pressed for a predetermined time, the 15th bell on the middle reel is stopped and displayed on the winning line. The predetermined time here is a time (for example, during 190 ms) in which the maximum slip control of the middle reel is performed. As described above, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation, the stop operation is performed before the reel on which the stop operation is performed is displayed as a stop (before the next stop button operation becomes effective). It is configured so that the push order navigation corresponding to the reel in which the above is performed can be deleted, and the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next can be changed.

Here, as an example that can be carried out in this example, the case where the stop operation is performed at the position where the maximum number of frames slips occurs has been described. When the stop operation is performed at the position, the timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to which the stop operation should be performed is after the reel is stopped and displayed. Even if the number of frames is 0, the display mode highlights the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed before the timing when the next stop button operation becomes effective. It is configured to change. With this configuration, even if the number of frames is 0, the stop button will be operated after recognizing the reel to be stopped next, and the player will mistakenly perform the stop operation in the pressing order. Can be prevented. In addition, it is more preferable that the timing for changing the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to which the stop operation should be performed next to the display mode for highlighting is earlier, and even in the case of 0 frame slip, the timing should be as early as possible. Is preferable.

Further, in this example, the push order bell has been described as an example, but it can be applied not only to the push order bell but also to all the condition devices that generate the push order navigation. Further, as the effect means for notifying the pressing order, lighting by the reel window frame lamp D310 or the sound output from the speaker S20 may be used. For example, when the push order navigation using the sound output from the reel window frame lamp D310 or the speaker S20 is included, the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel is changed before the effect display device S40 is changed. Execute push order navigation corresponding to the next reel (in the case of reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel is turned on, and in the case of voice, the dialogue corresponding to the next reel is output as voice). It is possible to configure.

Further, as the configuration related to << Reel control and push order navigation >> in this example, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 has been described as an example of the effect means for executing the push order navigation. For example, even if the reel window frame lamp D310, the voice, and the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) are configured to include the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside. good. Push-order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed by turning on (blinking) and turning off the reel window frame lamp, and push-order navigation by voice is "left", "right", and "middle" from the speaker S20. Is executed by outputting, and the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is the left stop button corresponding to the reel. It is executed by turning on (blinking) and turning off D41.

For example, in the configuration related to << reel control and push-order navigation >> in this example, reel window frame lamp D310, voice, stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). ) Is included
(1) Reel window frame lamp D310
(1-1) Turn off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (1-2) Turn on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed (2) Voice (2-1) Next Audio output corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed (3) Stop button D40
(3-1) Turn off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed (3-2) Turn on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed (4) Effect display device S40
(4-1) Display the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (display end)
(4-2) Change in display mode for highlighting push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed Next. The configuration related to push order navigation for each effect means can be specified as described above. The order in which these configurations (1-1) to (4-2) are executed may be determined in any way. For example, the order of execution may be determined for each effect means (for example, processing is performed in the order of reel window frame lamp → sound → stop button → effect display device), or the order of execution may be determined for each reel. Alternatively, (for example, processing is performed in the order of processing related to the reel on which the stop operation is performed → processing related to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next), or a combination of these may be configured.

Further, in this example, as << configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >>, the explanation is given with reference to FIG. 109, and in FIG. 109, the case where the first stop operation is performed is described as an example. The configuration to which this example can be applied is not limited to the first stop operation. For example, when the second stop operation is performed, it is applicable even when the third stop operation is performed. At the time of the third stop operation, the process corresponding to the reel to which the stop operation should be performed next (for example, the change to the "display mode for highlighting the push order navigation" in the effect display device S40, the reel window frame lamp The process of "lighting of the lamp corresponding to the reel to which the stop operation should be performed next") in D310 is not executed.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even when the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation and the reel corresponding to the stop button executes the stop control accompanied by the sliding of the maximum number of frames, the effect display device S40. End of push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button (from start to end of display of extinction effect), and change of display mode of push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button to be stopped next (start of highlighting) Can be executed before the next stop button operation becomes effective, so that it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the stop button before recognizing the stop button to be stopped next. ..

<<<<<< Third embodiment medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >>>>>
Next, as a third embodiment, the timing of the process of adding the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 as credits will be described (see FIG. 113). The game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medals, and the predetermined passing conditions (the passing game medals satisfy the standard). If the condition (such as not being determined to be an error) is satisfied, the game medal flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without causing an error. A first input sensor D20s and a second input sensor D30s are provided further behind the input reception sensor D10s, and a game medal that satisfies the dimensional standard and is accepted receives the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. When passing, if it is determined that the inserted game medal is normally inserted, the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal, and credit addition can be performed. When the game medal passes, the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s detect the insertion of the game medal, and the signal (information on the timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, the first insertion sensor D20s is sent. Information on the time from when it is turned on to when it is turned off, information on when the second input sensor D30s is turned on, information on the time when the second input sensor D30s is turned on and when it is turned off, etc.) It is supplied to the main control board M. Here, the timing at which credit addition can be performed can be determined by the on / off status of each of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s.

<<< Timing chart for detecting game medals by the input sensor >>>
FIG. 110 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 1 in the figure. Subsequently, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 2 in the figure. The time information and the like related to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signals. Subsequently, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting the game medal (on → off) at the timing of 3 in the figure. Here, the time A from the detection of the game medal by the first input sensor D20s to the end of the detection of the game medal is calculated by the main control board M, and A is within a predetermined range (in the third embodiment, If 4 ms ≦ A <183 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. Further, the time B from the detection of the game medal by the second insertion sensor D30s to the end of the detection by the first insertion sensor D20s is calculated by the main control board M, and B is within a predetermined range (2ms ≦ B <. If it is 115 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. After that, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s finishes the detection of the game medal (on → off) at the timing of 4 in the figure. The time C from the detection of the game medal by the second insertion sensor D30s to the end of detection by the second insertion sensor D30s is calculated by the main control board M, and C is within a predetermined range (4ms ≦ C <183ms). If so, it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. In this way, it is determined whether the game medal has normally passed through the medal selector DS at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off, and further, the first insertion sensor The game medals inserted at any timing when the D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off are detected as bet medals, and credits are added.

<<< Example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>>
<< Configuration 1 >>
Next, in the third embodiment, an example of the timing at which the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and the credit addition is performed will be described in detail. 11 to 112 are flowcharts reflecting the processing at the credit addition timing in the third embodiment in the game progress control processing according to the subroutine of step 1200. FIG. 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credit addition is performed when the insertion process is normally executed for the inserted game medals. In the flowchart of FIG. 111, the description of the same content as that of FIG. 17 will be omitted (steps 1220 to 1225, and steps 1232 and later). First, in FIG. 111, in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226-1 (4th), in step 1226-2 (4th), the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the first input sensor D20s on and the second input sensor D30s off. (Image by middle and upper part of FIG. 113, the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off → on at the timing when the game medal approaches the first insertion sensor D20s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-2 (fourth), in step 1226-3 (fourth), whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the first input sensor D20s on and the second input sensor D30s on. Judgment (image diagram by the upper right corner of FIG. 113, the second insertion sensor D30s is turned off → on at the timing when the game medal approaches the second insertion sensor D30s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-3 (fourth), in step 1226-6 (fourth), whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M is the first input sensor D20s off and the second input sensor D30s on. Judgment (image diagram by the lower left of FIG. 113, the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on → off at the timing when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first insertion sensor D20s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-6 (4th), in step 1226-8 (4th), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted, and the credit addition process is performed. Will be done. Further, in step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off (image diagram game according to the middle and lower stages of FIG. 113). The second insertion sensor D30s is turned on and off when the medal exceeds the detection range of the second insertion sensor D30s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-9 (4th), it is determined that the insertion of one normal game medal is completed, and for example, when the number of bets satisfies the specified number, the operation of the start lever D50 is valid. Processing such as setting is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1232.

<Effect 1>
In the third embodiment, an example of executing the credit addition process at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on has been described. Conventionally, the credit addition process is executed at the timing when "the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off". However, by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. If this happens, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and an execution process for performing a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is performed. It is possible to prevent the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the credit addition process is not executed in time.

<Effect 2>
Further, since the credit addition process is not executed at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s remains off and only the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, the position closer to the medal insertion slot 170 than the second insertion sensor D30s. It is also possible to prevent a goto action (for example, Clemangoto) by the first input sensor D20s provided in the above, to provide an illegally strong gaming machine, and to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<< Subroutine due to input sensor error in the third embodiment >>>
If No in Step 1226-3 (4th), Step 1226-6 (4th), and Step 1226-9 (4th), Step 1226-4 (4th), Step 1226-7 (4th). In step 1226-10 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition for generating a predetermined medal insertion error is satisfied. The medal insertion error here includes, for example, an insertion medal backflow error, an insertion number error, an insertion medal retention error, and the on / off status (including time) of sensors such as the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor. Based on, it is determined whether or not any of the errors has occurred (occurrence conditions differ depending on the type of error). These errors are detected, for example, based on the on / off detection of the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s in FIG. 110. If Yes in any of Step 1226-4 (4th), Step 1226-7 (4th), and Step 1226-10 (4th), the medal insertion error processing is executed in Step 1226-5 (4th). Will be done. FIG. 112 is a flowchart relating to a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, in step 1226-12 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is on, and in step 1226-13 (fourth), an error detection command (to the sub side). (For example, a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1226-14 (fourth). In 1226-13 (fourth), information related to an error corresponding to the error flag that is turned on (an error that is currently occurring) is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process. Error processing will be executed according to the type of error that has occurred, but the error detection command may execute set processing only when any error occurs from the state where no error has occurred. , Even if the set process is executed when the type of error changes from the state in which the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred to the second error (for example, the payout medal retention error). good. In step 1226-14 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently occurring error has been cleared. When it is determined that the error has been cleared, the error flag currently occurring in step 1226-15 is turned off, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of error detection based on the detection of game medals by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s has been described. In the error detection, for example, the medal insertion slot D170 in the medal selector DS has been described. It is also possible to detect an error based on the detection of the game medal of the insertion reception sensor D10s provided in the vicinity, and an example of error detection based on the detection of the game medal of the insertion reception sensor D10s will be described below. ..

<<< Error detection based on the input monitoring counter in the third embodiment >>>
<< Configuration 2 >>
The insertion reception sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and accepting only game medals conforming to the standard dimensions, and it is determined that the insertion reception sensor D10s does not conform to this function. The medal (or other foreign matter) is configured to be refunded to the outlet D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that the matching game medal has passed, the input reception sensor D10s is changed from off to on, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M. When the main control board M receives the signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s is turned on, the main control board M performs an addition process from 0 to 1 by a counter (hereinafter, referred to as an insertion monitoring counter) that counts the passage of game medals. Then, the main control board M monitors the insertion at the timing when the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS and, for example, the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from on to off (corresponding to the timing of 4 in FIG. 110). The counter performs subtraction processing from 1 to 0. At this time, for example, if any problem occurs with respect to the insertion of game medals in the period from 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, the game medal counting process of the insertion monitoring counter will not be performed normally. .. For example, when the second insertion sensor D30s does not turn from on to off, the insertion monitoring counter is not subtracted, and the insertion monitoring counter continues to be added, the insertion medal retention error can be detected. Further, when the second closing sensor D30s is turned from on to off before the closing reception sensor D10s and the closing monitoring counter is subtracted first, the closing monitoring counter becomes negative. Inserted medal backflow error can be detected.

<Effect>
In this way, the error determination can be performed based on the detection of the game medal by the three sensors of the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the insertion reception sensor D10s, thereby relating to the insertion of the game medal. It is possible to reliably detect various errors, provide an illegally strong gaming machine, and eventually provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<< Output of medal insertion sound in the third embodiment >>>
In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after detecting the inserted game medal as a bet medal will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, an example of executing the credit addition process at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on has been described. However, the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D20s is on. An error may occur when the sensor D30s is on (for example, an insertion medal retention error due to an abnormally long turn-on time of the second insertion sensor D30s). In the third embodiment, the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on. Therefore, for example, it is assumed that an error occurs after the credit addition process is executed. NS. In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after the credit addition processing and the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s will be described.

<< Configuration 3 >>
First, as the timing A, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. More specifically, according to the timing chart of FIG. 110, subtracting 115 ms, which is the upper limit value of B, from 183 ms, which is the upper limit value of the period of C, gives 68 ms. That is, in this period, the CPUC100 of the main control board M "sets the command related to the medal insertion reception → the medal insertion reception → sends the command to the sub control board side → sets the error detection command (if there is an error)". By executing the process as described above, the medal insertion sound can be output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s.

<< Configuration 4 >>
As a modification of the timing A, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. That is, the CPUC100 of the main control board M processes "set a command related to medal insertion reception-> execute credit addition processing-> send a command to the sub-control board side-> set an error detection command (if there is an error)". May be done.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the medal insertion reception is accepted at the timing when "the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on". This process is executed, and the subsequent timer interrupt process sends a command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. .. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned "first insertion sensor D20s is off and second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an insertion medal retention error occurs, the insertion medal is inserted after the medal insertion sound has already been output. Since it is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer), the player outputs an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error. It is possible to confirm the medal insertion sound before, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is worried that the game medal may not be inserted normally due to the insertion medal retention error and the loss may have occurred.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, as the timing B, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from the time when the credit addition process is performed until the error is detected by the second input sensor D30s, but during this period, the CPUC100 of the main control board M intentionally determines. , The command related to the medal insertion reception is configured not to be transmitted to the sub-control board side. After that, an error detection command based on error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s is set, and then a command related to medal insertion reception is transmitted to the sub-control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M "executes credit addition processing-> detects an error flag-> sets an error detection command-> sends an error detection command to the sub-control board side-> sets a command related to medal insertion reception-> sub-control By configuring the process to execute the process such as "send the command related to the acceptance of medal insertion to the board side", the medal insertion sound is made after the error sound output from the speaker S20 by the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It becomes possible to output. At this time, it is preferable that the command related to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted to the sub side by a timer interrupt processing different from that when the error detection command is transmitted.

<< Configuration 6 >>
As a modification of the timing B, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. That is, the CPUC100 of the main control board M "detects an error flag-> sets an error detection command-> sends an error detection command to the sub-control board side-> sets a command related to medal insertion reception-> executes a credit addition process-> sub-control You may perform the process of "sending a command related to the acceptance of medal insertion to the board side".

<Effect>
With this configuration, the first throw-in sensor D20s is on and the second throw-in sensor D30s is on-> the first throw-in sensor D20s is off and the second throw-in sensor D30s is on. It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer), and an error detection command is issued from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Is transmitted, and an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error is output. After that, after the process related to the medal insertion reception is executed, the command related to the medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. It becomes. If the situation of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an insertion medal retention error occurs, an insertion medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. In order to determine that the medal has been inserted (because the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer), the player has an error related to the insertion medal retention error before the output of the medal insertion sound. The sound can be confirmed, and the player can immediately detect that the game medal has not been inserted normally.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, as the timing C, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 by the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, and is output after the error is cleared. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from the time when the credit addition process is performed until the error is detected by the second input sensor D30s, but during this period, the CPUC100 of the main control board M intentionally determines. , It is the same as the second timing that the command related to the medal insertion acceptance is not transmitted to the sub control board side, but after the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the insertion error flag in step 1226-15. It is configured to send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M "executes credit addition processing-> detects an error flag-> sets an error detection command-> sends an error detection command to the sub-control board side-> ... (error cancellation processing during this period).・ ・ → Set the error undetected command → Send the error undetected command to the sub control board side → Set the command related to the medal insertion reception → Send the command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board side ” By configuring to execute, it is possible to output the medal insertion sound after canceling the error.

<< Configuration 8 >>
As a modification of the timing C, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. That is, the CPUC100 of the main control board M "detects the error flag-> sets the error detection command-> sends the error detection command to the sub-control board side-> ... (error release processing during this period) ...-> error not detected. Set the command → Send the error undetected command to the sub control board side → Set the command related to the medal insertion reception → Execute the credit addition process → Send the command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board side ” May be good.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the first throw-in sensor D20s is on and the second throw-in sensor D30s is on-> the first throw-in sensor D20s is off and the second throw-in sensor D30s is on. It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer), and an error detection command is issued from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Is transmitted, and an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error is output. After the error is resolved, an error undetected command is sent to the sub side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is terminated. Then, after the process related to the medal insertion reception is executed, the command related to the medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. It becomes. If the situation of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an insertion medal retention error occurs, an insertion medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. (Because the situation where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), the error is further resolved and the output of the error sound is terminated. Since the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error can be confirmed before the output of the medal insertion sound and the medal insertion sound can be confirmed after the error is resolved, the player can normally confirm the medal insertion sound after the error is resolved. It is possible to recognize that a game medal has been inserted.

<<< Third Embodiment Medal error detection by shoot sensor >>>
Next, as a third embodiment, error detection using the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. FIG. 114 shows a medal flow path member (referred to as a chute body in the third embodiment) after passing through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in the path of the game medal in the medal selector DS. It is a figure. In FIG. 114, a shoot sensor D40s is provided below the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s is a normal medal insertion like the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. However, in particular, in the third embodiment, it is configured to be able to detect an error (for example, a inserted medal retention error, an inserted medal backflow error, etc.) after the credit addition process has already been executed. ing.

Error detection by the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. For example, consider a case where game medals are retained further downstream of the shoot sensor D40s in the shoot body communicating with the hopper H40. The width of the path of the game medals in the shoot body is approximately the width of one game medal, and when one game medal stays in the path of the game medals in the shoot body, the game medals that pass through the path after that are one after another. And it will be in the state of the inserted medal retention error. In the third embodiment, the positions of three game medals are detected by the shoot sensor D40s from the position where the game medals are retained, but the position where the shoot sensor D40s is provided is not limited to this.

The detection of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is the same as the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. Information on the timing at which is turned on, information on the time from when the shoot sensor D40s is turned on to when it is turned off, etc.) is supplied to the main control board M. On the main control board M, game medals are normally inserted based on the information related to the signal detected by the shoot sensor D40s and the information related to the signal detected by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. Is determined. Specifically, the period from the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s starts to detect the game medal to the timing when the shoot sensor D40s starts to detect the game medal on the main control board M, and in advance. Compare with the specified period (the time to be detected by the shoot sensor D40s or less, also referred to as the theoretical period). For example, in the case of detecting the fourth game medal in FIG. 114, the fourth game medal from the timing when the fourth game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s. Is compared with the theoretical period until it is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, and when the difference between the periods exceeds the range not detected as an error, an error (shoot sensor medal in the third embodiment) (Stay error) will be detected. The timing when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the game medal, the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s starts the detection of the game medal, or the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s finishes the detection of the game medal, the second insertion sensor Any of the timings at which the D30s finishes detecting the game medal may be set as the start timing of the theoretical period.

<< Third Embodiment Timing chart for detecting game medals by shoot sensor >>
FIG. 115 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 1 in the figure. Subsequently, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 2 in the figure. The time information and the like related to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signals. After that, it is assumed that the shoot sensor D40s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 3 in the figure. The period D from the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s to the start of detection by the shoot sensor D40s, and the period from the detection of the game medal by the second insertion sensor D30s to the start of detection by the shoot sensor D40s. E is calculated by the main control board M, and with these periods as theoretical periods, it is determined whether or not the game medal based on the detection of the shoot sensor D40s normally passes through the shoot body. Further, an error that may occur after it is determined that the game medal has normally passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s can be detected by including the shoot sensor D40s.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, some error related to the passage of the game medal near the shoot sensor D40s (shoot sensor medal retention error) is detected, and the player is notified that an error has occurred. Is possible. Further, since the normal passage of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is determined based on the information related to the timing at which the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s is started, the first insertion is performed. Although the passage of the game medal is not detected by the sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, when the passage of the game medal is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, that is, an error related to the backflow of the insertion medal can be reliably detected. It becomes possible to provide a game machine that is resistant to fraud, and by extension, a user-friendly game machine.

<<<<<< 4th Embodiment Medal Return Member >>>>>
Next, as a fourth embodiment, an example of the mechanism of the medal return member D340 through which the game medal passes when the game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 or returned to the medal tray D230 will be described. ..

First, FIGS. 116 to 119 for explaining the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment in detail will be described. FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 as viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving entrance D341 (described later) is provided. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of a game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passes through the medal receiving entrance D341 (described later), and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230. FIG. 119 depicts the trajectory of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117.

<<< Front view of medal return member >>>
FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, a game medal (blocker is off) in which the bet or credit addition process is not executed by the medal selector DS that detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and performs simple authentication. When returning the game medal that reached the blocker to the medal tray D230, the game medal passes through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the first flow path) and is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. The game medal is configured to pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as a second flow path) and finally pay out the game medal to the medal tray D230.

The medal return member D340 passes through the first flow path through which an inappropriate game medal detected by the medal selector DS is returned to the medal tray D230, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. It is configured to have at least a second flow path, and the game medals that pass through the two flow paths pass through the medal return member D340 and join when flowing down toward the medal tray D230. It is configured.

The second flow path in the medal return member D340 is at least a medal receiving port D341 for receiving the game medals paid out from the hopper H40 and a medal falling surface D342 on which the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. Is configured to have. Further, a medal non-drop surface D343 located opposite to the medal drop surface D342, a wall surface provided with a medal receiving port, and a medal drop surface D342 on which game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. It is configured to have a space surrounded by and, and a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 passes through this space.

The medal receiving port D341 is configured to communicate with the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. Further, since the medal receiving entrance D341 is open, the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 can surely pass through the medal receiving entrance D341. Further, in particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving port D341 is referred to as an edge portion (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer peripheral portion in the shape of the opening of the medal receiving entrance D341 is referred to as an edge portion). ). In the regulation of the length and distance related to the medal receiving entrance D341, the starting point is any position corresponding to the edge of the medal receiving entrance D341.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the shape of the medal falling surface D342 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape, and the medal non-dropping surface D343 located opposite to the medal falling surface D342 is also formed in a substantially quadrangular shape. However, the shapes of the medal falling surface D342 and the medal non-dropping surface D343 are not limited to this.

In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving entrance D341 is provided so as to be inclined in the downward-sloping direction, and the game medal that collides with the collision portion (not shown) provided in the front view direction of FIG. 116 falls. It is configured to be inclined substantially parallel to the medal falling surface D342. With this configuration, the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and dropped on the medal falling surface D342 slides down from the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and the game medal is surely guided to the medal tray D230. It becomes possible to do. The direction in which the medal receiving entrance D341 and the medal falling surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and the medal receiving entrance D341 and the medal falling surface D342 may not be inclined together. The improper medal detected by the medal selector DS is configured to fall in the direction of the medal tray D230 from above when viewed from the player in the direction perpendicular to the inclination direction of the medal receiving entrance D341. ..

<<< Side view of the medal return member according to the fourth embodiment Trajectory view (perspective view) of the flow of the game medal >>>
Next, the dimensional definition in the configuration of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 as viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving port D341 is provided. First, in the game medal, the thickness and the diameter are defined as a and b, respectively (see FIG. 116). The thickness of the game medal, a, is preferably about 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and the diameter of the game medal, b, is preferably about 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm. be.

Next, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 on which the game medal falls after being paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 to the edge of the medal receiving entrance D341 is c, which is perpendicular to the medal non-dropping surface D343. The longest distance from the medal non-falling surface D343 to the edge of the medal reception in the direction is d, and at the edge of the opening of the medal reception D341, at least one direction (for example, the first) in the bottom or height direction. 4 In the embodiment, the length (in the height direction of the opening of the medal receiving port D341), which has a substantially rectangular shape, is e, and the maximum of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341. The length is defined as f. In the fourth embodiment, predetermined conditions are provided in the dimensions defined in this way. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions.
c ≧ a ... Equation (1)
b> d ... Equation (2)
f ≧ 2b ・ ・ Equation (3)
b> e ... Equation (4)
In the fourth embodiment, the game medal can be applied to either the 25Φ size or the 30Φ size.

First, by satisfying the equations (1) and (3), it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other. The distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving entrance 341 is larger than the thickness a of the game medal, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H is transferred from the medal receiving entrance D341 to the collision portion. Since it has a sufficient distance before it collides, it falls freely under the weight of the game medal, and when the game medal that collides with the collision part falls on the medal falling surface D342 (the game medal is sleeping). In the state), the game medal to be paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 is out of the area through which the game medal passes, so that the collision can be prevented.

Next, the first game medal (whether the game medal is sleeping or standing) paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 by satisfying the formula (4), and then It is possible to configure so that the second game medal paid out to the player does not collide with the second game medal, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 does not block the medal receiving entrance D341. Is.

Next, by satisfying the equation (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the gaming medal, and one piece that collides with the collision portion. It is possible to prevent the game medal of the eye from bouncing back to the medal receiving entrance D341.

By defining the dimensions in the configuration of the medal return member D340 as in formulas (1) to (4), the smooth hopper H40 can pay out the game medals from the medal payout device H, and the smooth game medals can be paid out. It is possible to guide the saucer D230. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of a game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passes through the medal receiving entrance D341, and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, as an effect of defining the dimensions of the formulas (1) to (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game medal paid out after that. It is possible to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with medals and that the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 do not block the medal receiving entrance D341.

As shown in FIG. 117, in this example, a protruding edge is provided on the entire outer circumference of the medal receiving port D341 on the outer side of the medal return member D340, but the inner side of the medal return member D340. A protruding edge may be provided on the entire outer circumference of the medal receiving port D341. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more unlikely that the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H collides with the collision portion and then flows back to the medal receiving port D341.

<<< Fourth Embodiment: Trajectory view (side view) of game medal flow >>>
In FIG. 118, the trajectory of the game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passes through the medal receiving entrance D341, and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 depicts the trajectory of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117. First, as shown in the upper left figure, the first game medal is released from the medal receiving entrance D341. Next, as shown in the upper right figure, the second game medal is released from the medal entrance D341 in the same manner as the first game medal, and the first game medal is prepared in the front view direction of FIG. 116. It collides with a colliding part (not shown). The interval from the release of the first game medal from the medal receiving entrance D341 to the release of the second game medal can be determined by the rotation speed of the disk H50 of the medal payout device H. The rotation speed can be arbitrarily determined, but as shown in the upper right figure of the fourth embodiment, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the second game medal is a medal. It will be paid out from the payout device H, but the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is (1) substantially at the same time as the timing when the first game medal collides with the collision portion, ( 2) The timing may be before (immediately before) the first game medal collides with the collision part, and (3) the timing may be after the first game medal collides with the collision part. The distance of f (see FIG. 117) may be adjusted according to the timing at which the game medals of the eyes are paid out from the medal payout device H. Regarding (2) above, after the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H and passed through the medal receiving entrance D341, the first game medal proceeded horizontally by the diameter of the game medal (b) or more (above b). It is preferable to set the timing after (launched). Further, the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is the timing at which the time has elapsed since the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the eye game medal and the second game medal collide with each other. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is too long, the interval between the game medal payout times becomes too long, and the tempo for paying out the game medal becomes too long. It gets worse. Further, since the internal size (depth) of the housing of the gaming machine is limited, the f (the maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341) is also predetermined. It is difficult to secure more than the distance. For the above reasons, it is most preferable that the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is the timing immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal after colliding with the collision portion. It is desirable to configure the game medals to be paid out from the third and subsequent medals so that the game medals do not collide with each other. It is preferable to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with each other. In addition, although the medals do not collide with each other in the first and second payouts, even if the medals collide with each other in the second and third payouts, the medals are paid out in the return member D340. It is possible to create the effect that game medals are less likely to be clogged. This means that in a gaming machine, paying out two cards occurs more frequently than paying out three cards. Further, the collision portion may be configured to be protected by, for example, metal in order to enhance the durability of the medal return member D340 due to the collision of the game medal.

Next, as shown in the lower left row, after the first game medal collides with the collision portion, the medal falls on the medal falling surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal and heads for the collision portion in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other because the structure is as shown in the equation (1). Next, as shown in the lower right row, the first game medal that has fallen on the medal falling surface D342 is inclined in the inclined direction of the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and falls from the medal falling surface D342 to the medal tray D230. Is induced. After colliding with the collision portion, the second game medal falls on the medal falling surface D342 in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, since the first game medal is configured to be inclined by gravity in the inclination direction of the medal falling surface D342, the first game medal and the second game medal collide with each other, and further. It is possible to prevent a backflow in which a medal that collides with a collision portion and bounces off enters the opening of the medal receiving port D341.

<< Effect 1 >>
The second game medal is discharged from the medal receiving entrance D341 toward the collision portion, and the first game medal falls on the medal drop surface D342 after colliding with the collision portion. At this time, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving entrance 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the game medal, which is configured to satisfy the equations (1) and (3). In addition, since the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H has a sufficient distance from the medal receiving entrance D341 until it collides with the collision portion, the medal is freely dropped by the weight of the game medal. , When the game medal that collided with the collision part falls on the medal drop surface D342 (the game medal is sleeping), the game medal to be paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 is out of the area through which the game medal passes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a collision.

<< Effect 2 >>
For example, a gaming machine that is configured as equations (2) and (4) to prevent backflow of medals that collide with a collision portion and bounce off the medals and enter the opening of the medal receiving port D341. Can be provided.

<< Effect 3 >>
For example, by being configured as in the equation (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the gaming medal, and the medal collides with the collision portion1. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a situation in which the first gaming medal bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341.

<< Effect 4 >>
The first game medal that has fallen on the medal falling surface D342 falls from the medal falling surface D342 and flows down toward the medal tray D230, and the second game medal is in the lower left diagram of FIG. 119. As described above, the first game medal falls on the medal falling surface D342 at substantially the same position as the dropped position. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 from being paid out to the medal tray D230 due to the retention near the medal receiving entrance D341. A game machine can be provided.

<< Effect 5 >>
Provided is a game machine capable of preventing damage or deterioration of the medal return member D340 because it has a cushioning material that cushions the collision portion where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H with speed collide. can do.

<< Effect 6 >>
The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 once collide with the collision part and lose the initial momentum of payout, so that the game medals collide with each other (the game medals returned from the medal selector DS and the hopper H40. A collision with a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H, or a collision between game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, etc.) occurs, and the game medal flows down to the non-rhythmic medal tray D230. It is possible to prevent such a situation and provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

The collision portion where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide may be a part of the front door DU, a part of the medal return member D340, or only the collision portion is separated. As a body member, it may be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340.

Further, in this example, the collision portion where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide has a flat shape substantially perpendicular to the medal drop surface D342, but is paid out from the medal payout device H. It suffices if the game medals collide and the collided game medals flow down toward the medal tray D230. For example, the medal falling surface D342 has a curved shape and plays the same role as the collision portion. It may be configured to carry, or any surface or portion of the medal return member D340 may be curved to play the same role as the collision portion. Further, as described above, only the collision portion may be configured to be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a separate member, and the collision portion may be configured to have a curved shape.

<<<<< Drive control of the medal payout device in the fifth embodiment >>>>>
<<< Timing chart of drive control of medal payout device >>>
Next, as a fifth embodiment, the drive control of the medal payout device H will be described. First, the operation control of the medal payout device H will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a timing chart relating to the detection of the hopper motor H80, which is driven when the game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, and the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2. The details of the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be described later, but for convenience of explanation, the first payout sensor H10s in FIG. 4 → the second payout sensor H2, and the second payout in FIG. 4 Sensor H20s → 1st payout sensor H1. At the initial position where the game medal is not paid out (initial position when the disc is not rotating), the 1st payout sensor H1: is on and the 2nd payout sensor H2: is off. It has become. First, in the hopper motor H80, it is assumed that the hopper drive flag is on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven. When the game medals are paid out by the medal payout device H, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disc H50 around the disc rotation shaft H50a, and the game medals in the medal payout device H are released by the release urging means H70. Is displaced and flows down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240, so that the game medal is paid out. In the fifth embodiment, the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 are detected to be on or off based on, for example, the displacement of the release urging means H70. Specifically, at the timing 1 in the figure, the first payout sensor H1 is turned on in a state where the release urging means H70 is not displaced to the position where the game medal is paid out (referred to as the initial position in the fifth embodiment). A signal indicating the state of is transmitted to the main control board M. Then, the displacement starts to the position where the release urging means H70 pays out the game medal, and the release urging means H70 starts to move from the initial position to mainly control the signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the off state. It is transmitted to the substrate M (the first payout sensor H1 is turned on → off). A signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the ON state by displacing the release urging means H70 to the position where the game medal is paid out (referred to as the payout position in the fifth embodiment) at the timing of 2 in the figure. Is transmitted to the main control board M (the second payout sensor H2 is turned off → on). Then, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the payout of the game medal is completed, and the release urging means H70 starts the displacement to the initial position again, so that the signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the off state is mainly controlled. It is transmitted to the board M (the second payout sensor H2 is turned on → off). Then, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the release urging means H70 is displaced to the initial position again, so that a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the ON state is transmitted to the main control board M (first payout sensor). H1 turns off → on). In the fifth embodiment, for example, the period from the timing 1 to the timing 2 is the predetermined range A (A <26 ms), and the period from the timing 2 to the timing 3 is the predetermined range B (9 ms ≦). B <60 ms), and by detecting that the period from the timing of 3 to the timing of 4 is within the predetermined range C (9 ms ≦ C <60), the medal payout device H is functioning normally and is normal. It is judged that various game medals will be paid out.

<<< 5th Embodiment Medal payout of the medal payout device-Stop of the medal payout device >>>
<< Configuration >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a series of flow from the start of medal payout by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment to the stop of the medal payout device H will be described. First, although it is FIG. 121, in the fifth embodiment, in order to briefly explain a series of flow from the payout of the game medal to the stop of the medal payout device H, medals unnecessary for the configuration of the fifth embodiment are described. The configuration related to the payout device H is eliminated as much as possible. FIG. 121 is a front view of the disc H50 which is rotationally driven when paying out game medals.

In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disc H50 has a plurality of circular cavities that are larger in size than the game medal, and the disc H50 is configured to cover the game medal, and the game medal is formed by rotating the disc H50 under the disc H50. By moving, the game medal is paid out from the discharge port D240. First, in the upper left figure, the hopper motor H80 is in the state before being driven, and the first payout sensor H1 is in the on state. In the fifth embodiment, this state is set as the initial position in the release urging means H70, and for the sake of clarification of the explanation, the initial position (disk H50) before the rotation of the disk H50 is provided on the outer circumference of the disk H50. do. This initial position (disc H50) is displaced in the rotational direction of the disc H50 each time a game medal is paid out. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, and the description will be given from the timing of paying out the fourth game medal.

In the upper view of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven by constant speed rotation, and the release urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, it can be seen that at the initial position (disc H50), the third game medal is rotated by an angle A from the position where the third game medal is paid out. That is, when the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, the disk H50 rotates by an angle A until the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position. Further, the disk H50 does not rotate until the release urging means H70 is displaced from the discharge position to the initial position.

Next, in the lower left stage of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven by constant speed rotation, and the release urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, after the fourth game medal is paid out, the release urging means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position, but during this time, the disc H50 is not rotating, so the fourth game medal It can be seen that the player is rotated by an angle A from the position where the fourth game medal is paid out, as in the case of paying out.

Then, as shown in the lower right row, after the fifth game medal is paid out, the drive of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, and the game medal payout is completed. After turning off the drive of the hopper motor H80, the rotation of the disc H50 is stopped, but the initial position (disc H50) is a position deviated from the position where the fifth game medal is paid out by an angle B in the rotation direction. Stop. The reason for this configuration is that, in particular, when paying out the first game medal, the hopper motor H80 does not enter the constant speed state immediately after the start of driving, and it takes a predetermined time to reach the constant speed state. It takes. That is, when the first piece (the hopper motor H80 is in the acceleration state to the constant speed state) is paid out and the release urging means H70 is in the initial position, the second and subsequent pieces (the hopper motor H80 is in the constant speed state). Compared to the case where the game medal is paid out, the hopper motor H80 is delayed by the amount of the acceleration state.

Here, a detailed description will be given from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the hopper motor H80 goes from a stopped state to a constant speed state via an acceleration state. Here, the rotation speed in the constant speed state is A (m / t). The acceleration state is a state in which acceleration processing is performed from speed 0 to constant speed A, and the average rotation speed in the period from speed 0 to constant speed state (acceleration state period) is B (m / t). ), B <A. Therefore, the average rotation speed C (m / t) from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is B <C <A.

Next, the period from the payment of the first game medal to the payment of the second game medal will be described in detail. Since the hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state when the first game medal is paid out, it is in a constant speed state from the time when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. Will remain. Therefore, the average rotation speed from the time when the first game medal is paid out to the time when the second game medal is paid out is A.

As described above, the second game after the first game medal is paid out than the average rotation speed C from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out. Since the average rotation speed A until the medals are paid out is faster, the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out and the first game If the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the time the medal is paid out to the time the second game medal is paid out is the same distance, the first game from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped. The time required for the medals to be paid out is longer than the time required for the second game medal to be paid out after the first game medal is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 121, in this example, after the final game medal (fifth game medal in the figure) is paid out as the game medal payout process, the disc H50 is set at a predetermined angle ( In the fifth embodiment, the engine is stopped by shifting in the rotation direction by the angle B) (the rotation distance becomes longer). With this configuration, the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is set to two after the first game medal is paid out. The distance that the disc H50 rotates before the eye game medal is paid out (the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the time the second game medal is paid out until the third game medal is paid out is the same distance, etc. ), And the time required from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is the time required for the second game after the first game medal is paid out. The time required for the medals to be paid out can be approached (approximate), and by paying out the game medals at a good tempo, the player can proceed with the game without discomfort.

The width (angle B) of the deviation in the rotation direction when the disk H50 is stopped after the hopper motor H80 is driven depends on the period from the acceleration state to the constant speed state due to the drive of the hopper motor H80. In this period, the disc H50 is released after the hopper motor H80 is driven by considering the difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the constant speed state. It will be determined how much to shift in the rotation direction from the initial position to stop. The difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the constant speed state corresponds to the discharge position of the release urging means H70 from the position corresponding to the initial position of the release urging means H70 of the hopper motor H80. It is preferable that the angle B is sufficiently smaller than the angle A because it is sufficiently smaller than the width to the position where the rotation is performed. It should be noted that even if the angle B is deviated in the rotation direction, the detection of the game medal by the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 is not affected, and the timing chart of FIG. 120 shows. Based on this, the game medal is detected.

<< Effect >>
With this configuration, when a player who receives a game medal payout pays out a predetermined number of game medals, he / she can receive the game medal payout from the first card to the predetermined number of medals at substantially regular intervals. For example, by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, (1) game medals do not collide with each other, and (2) medal clogging due to collision between game medals does not occur. It can be configured and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, after the final game medal is paid out, the disc H50 is configured to be displaced by a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) in the rotation direction to stop, so that the illegal device can be removed from the discharge port D240. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is illegally obtained by invading.

<<<<< 6th Embodiment Control when communication between the main control board and the sub control board is not possible >>>>>
Next, as a sixth embodiment, a process when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible will be described. As a case where communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible, it is assumed that various commands set from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side cannot be transmitted. There is. In the game progress control process of FIG. 16, for example, in the game progress control process of FIG. 16, various commands related to the game are transmitted to the sub control board side based on the progress of the game, and as in step 1622 of FIG. In addition, as a process related to the subroutine, various commands are periodically sent from the main control board side to the sub control board side in a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set). Is configured to send. The sub-control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and execute an effect based on the commands. The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and the sub control board S can receive commands from the main control board M, but the main control board side. It is configured so that it is not possible to send commands to. The game machine has a program related to execution processing on the main control board M and the sub control board S, respectively (a program possessed by the main control board M is referred to as a main side program, and a program possessed by the sub control board S is referred to as a sub side program). For example, the sub-control board S is configured with a sub-side program so as to execute an effect triggered by receiving a predetermined command from the main control board M. That is, in a situation where the command cannot be received from the main control board M, the sub-control board S cannot execute the process configured in the sub-side program. When a situation may occur in which the sub-control board S cannot receive a command from the main control board M, for example, a member due to poor contact of a harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub-control board S may occur. There may be a problem. However, even if communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible, it is possible to execute the main side program of the main control board M that controls the progress of the game. The game itself related to the main program can be executed even when communication with the sub control board S becomes impossible. Further, when communication is restored between the main control board M and the sub control board S from the situation where communication is disabled between the main control board M and the sub control board S, the progress of the program on the main side is changed. Based on this, a command related to processing after communication is restored is transmitted from the main control board side to the sub control board side, and the sub control board S is a command related to processing after communication received from the main control board M is restored. Performs processing based on. In the following, when communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible while executing various commands on the main control board M using FIGS. 122 to 126, the main control board M and the sub An embodiment of the process performed on the control board S will be described as the sixth embodiment.

<<< 6th Embodiment When the processing command and channel are 1: 1 when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement >>>
FIG. 122 shows the flow of processing in chronological order as an example of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible during the execution of the processing related to the settlement. First, it is assumed that the number of games is a predetermined number of games, starting from the N game, and processing is performed over the N + 1 games. Then, in the sixth embodiment, a command based on the progress of the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S as a process performed by the main control board M, and a command is received from the main control board M as a process performed by the sub-control board S. Executing the effect based on the command is one set of processing (in the sixth embodiment, the order is one). The sub-control board S does not execute the effect based on all the commands received from the main control board M, and may or may not execute the effect based on the received command. be. For example, in FIGS. 122 to 126, the sub-control board S executes an effect for each command transmitted by the main control board M as an example, but when the effect is executed based on the reception of each command. It is supplemented that there are cases where the production is not performed. When the settlement button is operated to execute the settlement of credits in the situation where one or more credits exist, the sound during settlement corresponding to the settlement of the game medal is output from the speaker S20 from the speaker S20. However, it is assumed that the audio channel that outputs the sound being settled is a channel corresponding only to the sound being settled. For example, the sub-control board S executes the effect based on the command received from the main control board M. In particular, when executing the process of outputting the sound from the speaker S20, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M. The command is associated with the audio channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sound is output from the speaker S20 from the sound channel corresponding to the received command. The command and the audio channel do not have to have a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, a plurality of commands (for example, a command related to the start of settlement and a plurality of commands related to a predetermined error detection) may be associated with one voice channel. With this configuration, even if the number of commands related to audio output increases, it is possible to configure the audio output without increasing the number of channels.

<< Configuration 1 >>
FIG. 122 will be described in detail. First, as the processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of settlement to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the sound being settled from the speaker S20 based on the received command. In << 6th Embodiment, when the processing command and channel are 1: 1 when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement >>, the sound that outputs the sound during the settlement is output. It is assumed that the channel supports only the command related to the start of settlement, and does not support other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound being settled, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, as a case where communication is disconnected, electricity between the main control board M and the sub control board S, such as a poor connection of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S, etc. The case where the communication is disconnected is not limited to this. Any case may be used as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound being settled, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed. By making a judgment, a command related to the end of settlement is transmitted to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, so that the output of the sound during settlement is output. Execute the process to end.

In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the end of settlement to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is settled. The command related to the end of the above cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. While the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determines that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Communication with the board S is disconnected, but the process performed by the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, is in progress.

The main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. .. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to the settlement has been completed, and is the Nth game. Set the command related to the next process.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S by determining that the N game is started and the game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M issues a command related to the end of settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on receiving a command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, and receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be done, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started by operating the start lever. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on receiving a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be done, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed, and the player can perform the reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel (the first reel is the reel in which the player first performs the stop operation among the plurality of reels) is accepted, the main control board M is set to the first reel. The command related to the stop operation reception is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S is settled from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 7, it is determined that the stop operation of the second reel (the second reel is the reel in which the player performs the second stop operation among the plurality of reels) is accepted, and the main control board M Sends a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S is settled from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 8, it is determined that the stop operation of the third reel (the third reel is the reel in which the player performs the third stop operation among the plurality of reels) is accepted, and the main control board M Sends a command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the main control board M is settled. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game. As a command set at this time, the stop operation of all reels is performed, and the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop is taken as an example. As a command for the sub-control board S to output audio based on the command from the control board M, the winning combination (for example, the push order bell combination) in which the game medal is paid out in the N game is determined, and the reel stop operation is performed. Send a command related to the case where the symbol combination related to the winning condition device is stopped and displayed based on (in the sixth embodiment, it is referred to as a "command related to winning") (as a command for the next processing of the N game). It is also possible to configure to.

By determining that the stop operations of all the reels have been performed in the order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. Based on the reception of the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs the sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while the main control board M issues a command related to the end of settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the process related to the N game. In the N game, the communication between the two is temporarily disconnected, so that the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that has not been received from the sub control board S to the main control board M is a command related to the end of settlement, and is a command related to the end of settlement, and is a period from the insertion of the game medal of the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue the output of the sound being settled without ending the output of the sound being settled.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the processing proceeds in the order 10 and the order 11. As the order 10, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of settlement to the sub control board S as in the order 1 in the N game. The sub-control board S outputs the sound being settled from the speaker S20 based on the received command. At this time, the sound being settled output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the sound being settled output in the N game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command from the main control board M to the sub control board S based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button in the N + 1 game, the sub control board S setstles the N + 1 game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start, the output of the sound being settled is started, while the output of the sound is ended during the settlement related to the N game (as the process of the sub-control board S, the sound being settled for the N game is being settled. Sound output → Receives a command related to the start of settlement related to the N + 1 game → Ends the output of the sound being settled for the N game → Starts the output of the sound being settled for the N + 1 game).

In order 11, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, determines that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, and issues a command related to the end of the settlement. It is transmitted to the sub control board side. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S executes a process of ending the output of the sound being settled for the N + 1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is configured so that the game can proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, both players do not have to temporarily shut down the game machine due to an error response or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of ending the audio output while advancing the game.

<<< When the processing command and channel are not one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the sixth embodiment >>>
<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, as the processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of settlement to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the sound being settled from the speaker S20 based on the received command. In << 6th Embodiment, when the processing command and the channel are not one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement >>, the sound that outputs the sound during the settlement is output. It is assumed that the channel supports not only commands based on the detection of the operation of the checkout button but also other commands (here, "error detection command by detecting the door open error flag"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound being settled, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound being settled, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed. By making a judgment, a command related to the end of settlement is transmitted to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, so that the output of the sound during settlement is output. Execute the process to end.

In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the end of settlement to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is settled. The command related to the end of the above cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. While the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determines that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Communication with the board S is disconnected, but the process performed by the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, is in progress.

The main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. .. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to the settlement has been completed, and is the Nth game. Set the command related to the next process.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S by determining that the N game is started and the game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M issues a command related to the end of settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on receiving a command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, and receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be done, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started by operating the start lever. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on receiving a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be done, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed, and the player can perform the reel stop operation. Upon determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the stop operation of the first reel to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S is settled from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being scrutinized is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 7, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S is settled from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the main control board M is settled. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game. As a command set at this time, the stop operation of all reels is performed, and the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop is taken as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command to output audio based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next processing of the N game).

By determining that the stop operations of all the reels have been performed in the order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. Based on the reception of the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs the sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while the main control board M issues a command related to the end of settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the process related to the N game. In the N game, the communication between the two is temporarily disconnected, so that the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that has not been received from the sub control board S to the main control board M is a command related to the end of settlement, and is a command related to the end of settlement, and is a period from the insertion of the game medal of the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue the output of the sound being settled without ending the output of the sound being settled.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the process proceeds in order 10. It is assumed that a predetermined error occurs in the order 10. As an error at this time, a door opening error will be described as an example, but the content of the error is not limited to this, and any error such as an input error error, a payout error error, an input reception sensor retention error, etc. good. When the main control board M determines that a door opening error has occurred due to the opening of the front door DU in particular, it transmits an error detection command by detecting the door opening error flag to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S performs processing so as to output a door opening error notification sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the error detection command by detecting the door opening error flag. Here, as described above, the command based on the detection of the settlement button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door open error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives an error detection command by detecting the door open error flag in the N + 1 game while the output of the sound being settled is being continued from the N game, so that the sub control board S receives the error detection command in the N game. It is configured to end the sound output during the settlement and start the output of the door opening error notification sound in the N + 1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
Further, when an error occurs, by associating the voice channel output from the speaker S20 with a plurality of commands such as a command related to error detection, the error notification sound is surely output and an error occurs in the player. To provide a user-friendly game machine that can reliably notify that an error has occurred and that the communication between the two parties can be restored so that the sound output can be terminated while the game is being advanced. Can be done.

<<< 6th Embodiment When the processing command and channel are 1: 1 when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed >>>
<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible during the period in which the minimum gaming time from the operation of the start lever D50 to the start of rotation of the reel has not elapsed. The flow of processing in the case of the above will be described. First, as the processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect (hereinafter referred to as a weight sound) related to the start lever operation from the speaker S20 based on receiving a command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M. In << 6th embodiment, when the processing command and channel are 1: 1 when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed >>, a weight sound is output. As for the audio channel, only the command related to the start lever operation is supported, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the weight sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, as a case where communication is disconnected, electricity between the main control board M and the sub control board S, such as a poor connection of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S, etc. The case where the communication is disconnected is not limited to this. Any case may be used as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the weight sound, the main control board M is started in a state in which it is ready to start the rotation of the reel based on the start lever operation (here, the reel rotation start standby state). By determining that (referred to as start), a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, thereby weighting. It is configured to perform the process of ending the sound output.

In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is in a disconnected state. M cannot transmit a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, the output of the weight sound is continued without ending the output of the weight sound. While the main control board M is executing the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in the disconnected state. However, the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

After the main control board M completes the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, but the main control board M has completed the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. And set the command related to the next processing of the N game.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started by operating the start lever. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S is related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M. Since the command cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

As the order 4, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed and the player can perform the reel stop operation. Upon determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the stop operation of the first reel to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start of the start standby state cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start standby state start cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 6, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start of the start standby state cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game. As a command set at this time, the stop operation of all reels is performed, and the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop is taken as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command to output audio based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next processing of the N game).

In order 7, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operations of all the reels have been performed. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the stop of the stop display symbol based on the reception of the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while the main control board M issues a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Since it cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the process related to the N game. In the N game, the communication between the two is temporarily disconnected, so that the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that has not been received from the main control board M from the sub control board S is a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, and is from the insertion of the game medal of the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue the output of the weight sound without ending the output of the weight sound during the period.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the processing proceeds in order 8 and order 9. In order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S by determining that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M starts the reel rotation of the N game. Since the command related to the start of the standby state cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

In order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a weight sound based on the reception of the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. At this time, the weight sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the weight sound output in the N game, as described above. That is, by transmitting the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state in the N + 1 game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the reel rotation of the N + 1 game from the main control board M. The output of the weight sound related to the N game is started based on the command related to the start of the start standby state, while the output of the weight sound related to the N game ends (as a process of the sub-control board S, the output of the weight sound related to the N game is output). → Receives a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state related to the N + 1 game → Ends the output of the weight sound related to the N game → Starts the output of the weight sound related to the N + 1 game).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is configured so that the game can proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, both players do not have to temporarily shut down the game machine due to an error response or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of ending the audio output while advancing the game.

<<< When the processing command and channel are not one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the payout process >>>
<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, FIG. 125 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, a processing flow will be described when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible in a state where game medals are paid out from the hopper H40. First, as the processing order 1, when the winning combination (for example, the push order bell combination) in which the game medal is paid out in the Nth game wins and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is the hopper H40. The command related to the start of medal payout from is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect (hereinafter referred to as a medal payout sound) related to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. In << 6th Embodiment, when the processing command and the channel are not one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the payout process >>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is It is assumed that not only the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 but also other commands are supported (here, it is referred to as "command related to start lever operation"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the prize, and the number of game medals to be paid out by the prize is paid out from the hopper H40. By determining that the medals have been paid out, the command related to the end of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of paying out the medals from the hopper H40. It is configured to execute the process of ending the output of the medal payout sound.

In order 2, a command relating to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is the hopper H40. The command related to the end of medal payout from is not able to be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. It should be noted that the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the prize, and while the determination that the game medals are to be paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize is completed, the main control board controls the progress of the game. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

The main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the prize, and after it is determined that the number of game medals paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize is completed, the main control board M and the sub-control The communication with the board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the end of medal payout from the main control board M, but the main control board M is paid out from the hopper H40 of the number of game medals to be paid out by the winning. Since it is determined that the game has been processed, the processing of the N game is completed, and the command related to the N + 1 game is set.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the processing proceeds in order 3 and order 4. In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S by determining that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M finishes paying out the medals for the N game. Since the command related to the above cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a weight sound based on the reception of the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. As described above, here, the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state in the N + 1 game while the output of the medal payout sound is being continued from the N game, thereby paying out the medal in the N game. It is configured to end the sound output and start the weight sound output in the N + 1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, by associating with multiple commands such as commands related to the progress of the game, communication between the two can be restored, and a user-friendly game that can end the audio output while the game is in progress. Machines can be provided.

<<< 6th Embodiment When the processing command and channel are 1: 1 when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the payout process >>>
<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, FIG. 126 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, from the state in which the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40 to a predetermined period (here, from the start of reel rotation (acceleration processing is performed)), the main control board M and the sub control board S The flow of processing when communication becomes impossible will be described. First, as the processing order 1, when the winning combination (for example, the push order bell combination) in which the game medal is paid out in the Nth game wins and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is the hopper H40. The command related to the start of medal payout from is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. In << 6th Embodiment, when the processing command and the channel are one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the payout process >>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is Only the command related to the start of medal payout is supported, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the prize, and the number of game medals to be paid out by the prize is paid out from the hopper H40. When it is determined that the medals have been paid out, the command related to the end of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40. Is configured to execute the process of ending the output of the medal payout sound.

In order 2, a command relating to the end of payout of the game medal from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M The command relating to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. It should be noted that the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the prize, and while the determination that the game medals are to be paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize is completed, the main control board controls the progress of the game. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the process proceeds in order 3 to 10. In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S by determining that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, but the main control board M and the sub control board M Since the communication with S is disconnected, the main control board M cannot transmit the command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, it cannot output the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, but does not end the output of the medal payout sound. Continue to output the medal payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command related to the acceptance of medal insertion. Therefore, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, but communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S. Is in a disconnected state, so that the main control board M cannot transmit a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, it cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation, but the medal is not output without ending the output of the medal payout sound. Continue to output the payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the sub control board S can be used for commands related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, commands related to medal insertion reception, and start lever operation. Since the command cannot be received, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is in a disconnected state. M cannot transmit a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, it cannot output the weight sound, but the medal payout sound is not finished without ending the output of the medal payout sound. Continue to output. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the sub control board S relates to a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to medal insertion reception, and a start lever operation. Since the command and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state cannot be received, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

After the main control board M determines that the reel rotation start standby state has started, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to the acceptance of medal insertion, a command related to the start lever operation, and a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Although not completed, the main control board M determines that the reels are ready to start rotating based on the start lever operation, and sets a command related to the next processing of the N + 1 game.

In order 6, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started by operating the start lever. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while the main control board M ends the medal payout from the hopper H40. Since such a command cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

As the order 7, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed and the player can perform the reel stop operation. Upon determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the stop operation of the first reel to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the hopper H40 is output from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

In order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the hopper H40 is output from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

In order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the hopper H40 is output from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game. As the next process of the N + 1 game, a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 is used for a brief explanation, but during this period, the command transmitted by the main control board M to the sub control board S is used. For example, it is possible to configure the command for stopping the stop display symbol, the command for winning a prize, and the like to be transmitted.

As the order 10, when the winning combination (for example, the push order bell combination) in which the game medal is paid out in the N + 1 game is determined and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is from the hopper H40. A command related to the start of payout of game medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. At this time, the medal payout sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the medal payout sound output in the N game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in the N + 1 game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the hopper of the N + 1 game from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start of medal payout from H40, the output of the medal payout sound is started, while the output of the medal payout sound related to the N game ends (as a process of the sub-control board S, the medal payout sound is related to the N game). Output of medal payout sound → Receive command related to start of medal payout from hopper H40 related to N + 1 game → End output of medal payout sound related to N game → Start output of medal payout sound related to N + 1 game Become).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is configured so that the game can proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, both players do not have to temporarily shut down the game machine due to an error response or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of ending the audio output while advancing the game.

<< Configuration related to the number of units applicable to this example >>
Here, the configuration regarding the number of internal lottery that can be applied to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that the following configuration is applicable to all the embodiments in this example.

First, with reference to FIG. 127, the configuration regarding the number of units applicable to this example will be described in detail.

<When BB is not operating>
The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has a type 1 BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and a type 2 BB (sometimes referred to as MB), and has a role related to the type 1 BB (one type after winning). The combination of symbols in which the BB operates is a combination that can be stopped and displayed, and is sometimes referred to as a type 1 BB combination). It has "seed BB + cherry" (a condition device in which a type 1 BB role and a cherry are elected in duplicate). In addition, as a role related to the type 2 BB (a combination of symbols in which the type 2 BB operates after being elected is a role that can be stopped and displayed, and is sometimes referred to as a type 2 BB role), "type 2 BB alone" (type 2 BB alone). It has a "conditional device in which the BB combination is independently won) and a "two-kind BB + cherry" (a conditional device in which the two-kind BB combination and the cherry are won in duplicate).

In addition, as a winning combination (a role having a symbol combination in which a game medal is paid out by displaying a stop), there are four types of roles, a bell, a watermelon, a symbol, and a cherry. (Winning at 10400/65536) may be referred to as the main small role.

“When BB is not operating” shown at the top of the figure is a table relating to the number of placements in a state where Type 1 BB and Type 2 BB are not operating (sometimes referred to as a normal gaming state or the like). The "number of inputs" is the number of inputs when it is assumed that the game is executed by betting three cards in order to calculate various expected values described later, and is defined during the operation of Type 1 BB and the operation of Type 2 BB. The number is 2, but the "number of inputs" is 3. In addition, the "number of payouts" is the number of game medals to be paid out when the "number of inputs" is 3, for example, in a game when the type 1 BB is activated, 15 cards are paid out by betting two cards. Only will be won, but since the "number of inputs" is assumed to be 3, the "number of payouts" is also "15 x 3/2 = 22.5".

The “number of units” is a number of units determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and the denominator is 65536. Further, the "probability" is the probability that the condition device is determined by the internal lottery.

The "number of games" is the number of games required when calculating various expected values described later. For "1st class BB alone", "1st class BB + cherry", "2nd class BB alone", and "2nd class BB + cherry", 1st class BB or 2nd class BB in the game that won the 1st class BB or 2nd class BB. The "number of games" is 1 because the case where the symbol combination according to the above is stopped and displayed is illustrated. In addition, in "1st class total", after winning "1st class BB alone" or "1st class BB + cherry", the 1st class BB is executed after the symbol combination in which the 1st class BB is to be activated is stopped and displayed (1st class BB). The "number of games" is 24 because the case of (digestion) is illustrated. In addition, "2 types total" executes 2 types BB after winning "2 types BB alone" or "2 types BB + cherry" and then stopping and displaying the symbol combination in which the 2 types BB will operate (2 types BB). The "number of games" is 8 because the case of (digestion) is illustrated.

The "expected value of the number of inputs" is an expected value of the number of inputs per game in consideration of the probability determined by the internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "the number of inputs x the probability x the number of games". The "expected value of the number of payouts" is an expected value of the number of payouts per game considering the probability determined by the internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "number of payouts x probability x number of games". There is.

The configuration in the figure may be applied when the game is played as follows.

<Game method 1>
A game medal is paid out in a game in which a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry is won, which is a game method in which the game is executed by a game method that is most profitable for the player and is not a push order role such as a push order bell. The game is executed in a stop operation mode (a stop button operation mode, a stop button pressing order, a stop button operation timing, etc.) in which a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed (winning). In addition, in a game in which a push order combination such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, but may be configured to have a push order combination) is won, the stop operation mode is the largest number of payouts. And run the game.

<Game method 2>
In a game in which a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry is won, which is not a push order role such as a push order bell, a stop operation mode (stop button operation mode) is used to stop and display (win a prize) a combination of symbols for which game medals are paid out. The game is executed in the order of pressing the stop button, the operation timing of the stop button, etc.). In addition, in a game in which a push order role such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, but may be configured to have a push order role) is won, the game is random regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is executed. The game is executed in various stop operation modes (the order in which the stop buttons are pressed and the timing of the stop button operations are random). Random means, for example, that all six types of pressing orders are selected at an equal ratio for the pressing order of the stop button, and all 20 frames of stopping operation timing are selected at an equal ratio for the stopping timing. It is to be.

"Inside" is a game after winning any of "1st class BB alone", "1st class BB + cherry", "2nd class BB alone", and "2nd class BB + cherry", and 1st class BB. Or, a game in which the symbol combination in which the 2nd class BB is activated and the symbol combination related to the bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay are not stopped and displayed (in the situation where the winning of the 1st class BB or the 2nd class BB is carried over). It is a game that did not win a small role or a replay). In the figure, at 290/65536, a game in which the winning of the 1st class BB or the 2nd class BB is carried over and the small role or the replay is not won is executed, and the "expected value of the number of inputs" is about 0. It is .013275146, and the "expected value of the number of payouts" is 0.

<Type 1 BB is in operation>
“During type 1 BB operation” shown in the second row from the upper part of the figure is a table relating to the number of units in the state where type 1 BB is operating. During the operation of Type 1 BB, the specified number is two, and it is configured to win any of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry without winning the loss. In addition, the "number of payouts" is 15 for all of the bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, making it the easiest to win (easily determine) the bell. In addition, one or more (or all) of the "numbers" that will win the watermelon, the symbol, and the cherry may be configured to be the same as "when the BB is not activated". As described above, in the game in which the type 1 BB is operating, 15 cards are paid out by betting 2 cards in all games. The "number of payouts") of "1 type total" in "" is 22.5.

<Type 2 BB is in operation>
“During type 2 BB operation” shown at the bottom of the figure is a table relating to the number of units in the state where type 2 BB is operating. While the 2nd class BB is operating, the specified number is 2, and when the game is executed in the predetermined stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in the pressing order of "left → middle → right"). , Only the symbol combination related to the bell is configured to stop and display. In addition, the "number of payouts" is 15 when the symbol combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the games in which the two types of BB are operating, 15 cards are paid out by betting 2 cards in all games. The "number of payouts") of "total of two types" in "" is 22.5.

<BB is not operating>
Again, "when BB is not operating" will be described in detail. "No replay" indicates four types of winning roles of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, and "including replay" means five types of roles of bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay. Shown. The "winning OUT" in "no replay" is the total value of the expected number of payouts of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, which is about 1.237258911. In addition, the "winning payout rate" in "no replay" is the "total value of the expected number of payouts (winning OUT)" and the "total value of the expected number of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries". It is the value obtained by multiplying the divided value by 100, that is, the payout rate including the winning combinations, which is about 222.8%.

The "winning OUT" in the "replay included" is the sum of the expected number of payouts of the bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay, which is about 1.649246216. In addition, even if the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the game medal is not actually paid out, but when the game is executed by betting three cards and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Since the automatic betting for 3 cards is executed, the "number of payouts" related to the re-game is 3. In addition, the "winning payout rate" in "including replay" is the sum of the "expected number of payouts (winning OUT)" and the "expected number of bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays". It is a value obtained by dividing the value by "value" and multiplying it by 100, that is, the total payout rate of the winning combination and the replay, which is about 170.5%.

The "1 type total calculation ball rate" is a value obtained by dividing the expected payout number of the "1 type total" by the expected input number value and multiplying by 100, which is 750.0%. Further, the "two-kind calculation ball rate" is a value obtained by dividing the expected payout number of the "two-kind sum" by the expected number of inputs and multiplying by 100, which is 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values>
Here, when the above-mentioned values are compared, the relationship is as follows.
(1) "Expected payout number" of "2 types total"<Expected payout number of "No replay" (Winning OUT)
(2) "Expected number of payouts" of "2 types total"<Expected value of payouts of "including replay" (winning OUT)
(3) Expected number of payouts for "total of 2 types"<Expected number of payouts for main small role
(4) "Expected value of input number" of "Internal medium"<Expected value of input number of main small role
(5) "Expected value of input number" of "Internal"<"Expected value of input number" of "Replay"

In addition, when the 2nd class BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st class BB is activated, and the 1st class BB is not won during the 2nd class BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game will be diminished. Therefore, as described in (1) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the "total of the two types" <the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the total of "no replay", the type 2 BB is in operation. The "expected value of the number of payouts" of the small role can be made higher than that, and even when the type 2 BB is operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating). This makes it easier for the player to feel, and makes it possible for the player to play the game without being aware that the player is in a special state.

In addition, when the 2nd class BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st class BB is activated, and the 1st class BB is not won during the 2nd class BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game will be diminished. Therefore, as described in (2) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the "total of the two types" <the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the total of "including replay", the type 2 BB is in operation. The "expected value of the number of payouts" of the small role can be made higher than that, and even when the type 2 BB is operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating). This makes it easier for the player to feel, and makes it possible for the player to play the game without being aware that the player is in a special state.

In addition, when the 2nd class BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st class BB is activated, and the 1st class BB is not won during the 2nd class BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game will be diminished. Therefore, as described in (3) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the "total of the two types" <the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the main small role, the main size is smaller than that during the operation of the type 2 BB. It is possible to increase the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the role, and even when the two types of BB are operating, it is not the operation of the BB (the operation of the bonus) but the non-operation of the BB (the non-operation of the bonus). It becomes easier for the player to feel, and the player can play the game without being aware that he / she is in a special state.

As a gaming machine having one or more configurations of the above (1) to (3), the specified number is set to 2 and the average number of payouts per game is set to 2 while the 2 types of BB are in operation. It may be configured to lower the ball ejection rate (the ball output rate calculated for the two types) during the operation of the type 2 BB. With such a configuration, the effect of having the configurations (1) to (3) described above will be further enhanced.

In addition, when a player with low skill such as a player who cannot push the ball plays in "inside", the symbol combination related to the winning type 1 BB or type 2 BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill There is concern that low players will be significantly disadvantaged. Therefore, as described in (4) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of inputs" of the "internal medium" <the "expected value of the number of inputs" of the main small winning combination, the main small winning combination can also be achieved in the "internal medium". It is possible to increase the ratio of games in which Bell wins, and it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause any disadvantage even when a player with low skill plays a game.

In addition, when a player with low skill such as a player who cannot push the ball plays in "inside", the symbol combination related to the winning type 1 BB or type 2 BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill There is concern that low players will be significantly disadvantaged. Therefore, as described in (5) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of inputs" of the "internal medium" <the "expected value of the number of inputs" of the "re-game", the re-game is also performed in the "internal medium". The ratio of winning games can be increased, and even when a player with low skill plays a game, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to cause a disadvantage.

<<< Gate Technology of the 7th Embodiment >>>
Next, as a seventh embodiment, a gate mechanism included in the main board case M40 for storing the main control board M installed inside the gaming machine (housing) will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the entrance portion through which the resin material (plastic) flows when the main substrate case M40 is molded is referred to as a gate.

<< Molding of main board case >>
As described above, the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment is configured by using a resin material (plastic) as a material. The main substrate case M40 is formed by injecting a resin material (plastic) from a gate into a metal mold (hereinafter referred to as a mold) for forming a specific predetermined shape, and then performing a cooling / solidifying process. It is generally molded by an injection molding method for obtaining a product. The molding method of the main substrate case M40 is not limited to the injection molding method. For example, a tubular plastic hollow body is sandwiched between molds, and air is blown into the mold to bring it into close contact with the wall surface of the mold to cool and solidify it. Any molding method may be used as long as it is molded by pouring a resin material (plastic) from the gate, such as a blow molding method for obtaining a molded product. After the resin material (plastic) is injected and injected, the gate is cut and the cut portion will have some dents as compared to a flat surface without a gate.

<< Gate method >>
When injecting a resin material (plastic) from a gate by an injection molding method, various restrictions are imposed on the gate. Here, examples of the restrictions include the inflow rate of the resin material (plastic), the temperature of the resin material (plastic), the size and shape of the gate portion M80, and the like. That is, by determining the optimum conditions (inflow speed, temperature, gate size / shape) according to the size of the main substrate case M40 to be molded, and performing a molding process according to the conditions, high-quality molding is performed. You can get the goods.

The methods for injecting resin material (plastic) can be broadly divided into restricted gates that limit the inflow of resin material (plastic) by making the size of the gate as small as possible, and resin material (plastic) directly without going through the gate. There is an unrestricted gate for pouring plastic). For various case members used in gaming machines, the size of the gate can be reduced to some extent from the viewpoint of size, etc., and a restricted gate may be used in consideration of the aesthetic appearance of the finished product. However, in the seventh embodiment, if the main substrate case M40 has a gate, there is no problem with the method for injection-injecting the resin material (plastic).

<< Gate type >>
When a resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate by a limiting gate, there are types of gates having various characteristics. As an example, a side gate type in which a resin material (plastic) is injected and injected from a gate arranged on the side surface of a molded product, a pin gate type in which a plurality of molded products are molded from one mold, and a tunnel-shaped arrangement in a mold. There is a submarine gate type in which a resin material (plastic) is injected and injected from the gate. The main substrate case M40 used in the seventh embodiment may be molded by using any of these gate types.

As described above, the main board case M40 described as the seventh embodiment is molded, and the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

<< Configuration of main board case M40 >>
First, the configuration of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a front view of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment. As described above, the main substrate case M40 is molded from a resin material (plastic) as a raw material. The surface of the main board case M40 (for example, the front surface that can be visually recognized by the player or the manager of the game hall when the front door DU is opened) is, for example, a sticker on which the model information of the gaming machine is described. In addition to model stickers, which are members, sticker members (not shown) that have information related to gaming machines, such as caulking recording paper that records security measures taken at production factories, etc., are affixed. Further, it has a gate portion M80 including a gate mark (a state after the gate is cut) in which a resin material (plastic) is injected and injected. The shape of the surface of the main substrate case M40 in FIG. 128 is an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, it may have a square shape, a rectangular shape, or a trapezoidal shape.

<< Accommodation diagram of main control board M >>
Next, FIG. 129 is a front view when the main control board M is housed in the main board case M40. When the main control board M is housed in the main board case M40, the main control board M is housed so as to be sandwiched between the main board case M40 and other case members (not shown), and further, the main board case M40 and other cases. It is common that the case member and the case member are integrally formed by fitting screws (screws) so that the main control board M is fixed inside the main board case M40.

The main control board M includes a microprocessor CPUMC as an IC element having a CPU function, other IC elements IC01 to IC05 not having a CPU function, resistors R1 to R6, capacitors C01 to C02, and a connector CN01. ~ CN04 is implemented. Further, on the main control board M, a setting display LED M90 capable of displaying a set value, a performance display device SH formed by arranging four-digit segments described later in a horizontal row, and the like are arranged. Other electronic components such as diodes and LEDs may be mounted on the main control board M, but they are not shown.

<< Gate arrangement of main board case M40 >>
The main board case M40 is arranged so as to cover the main control board M (the dotted line in FIG. 129 corresponds to the main board case M40), and since the main board case M40 is made of plastic as a raw material, the main board case M40 is used. It is configured so that the parts and the like mounted on the main control board M can be visually recognized through the main control board M.

As described above, the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment is configured to have the gate portion M80 on the surface. It is particularly preferable that these gate portions M80 are arranged at positions that do not impair the visibility of the members arranged on the main control board M. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, the model seal, the performance display device SH, the setting display LED M90, etc., which are confirmed by the game hall manager or the National Police Agency through the main board case M40, are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the visibility. The pattern is given as an example. More specifically, the model seal, the performance display device SH, and the setting display LED M90 are configured so as not to be arranged at the position projected onto the main board case M40 in the direction perpendicular to the main control board M. Has been done.

<Effect>
By arranging the gate portion M80 in this way, the gate portion M80 hinders visibility when the manager of the game hall confirms information related to the game machine from the performance display device SH or the setting display LED M90. It is possible to prevent it. Further, by configuring the gate portion M80 so as not to be arranged at a position overlapping with various seal members such as a model seal, the seal member can be made difficult to peel off.

Further, it is preferable not to arrange the gate portion M80 at the position where the CPUMC is projected onto the main board case M40 in the direction perpendicular to the main control board M (the gate portion M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). be. Details will be described later, but in the main board case M40, since the gate portion M80 is a fragile portion, a so-called goto action is performed on the main control board M inside the main board case M40 via the gate portion M80. There is a possibility that it will be damaged. Therefore, in the direction perpendicular to the main control board M, the CPUMC is configured so that the gate portion M80 is not arranged at the position projected on the main board case M40 (the gate portion M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). As a result, the main control chip C that controls the operation of the gaming machine and the built-in ROMC110 that stores the program related to the operation control of the gaming machine are provided, and the gate portion M80 can be kept away from the CPUMC that affects the result of the game. It is possible to prevent so-called goto acts such as program tampering through the gate portion M80.

Further, when a current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) arranged on the main control board M, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such an IC element is installed in the vicinity of the CPUMC, the noise generated from the IC element may adversely affect the operation of the CPUMC to a considerable extent. Therefore, the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) and the like are the CPUMC. It is preferable not to place it in the vicinity of.

In the seventh embodiment, the IC element is not arranged in the vicinity of the CPU MC on the main control board M. Specifically, in any IC element, W1 (dotted line in FIG. 129) is the length of the short side of the upper surface of the package body, which is rectangular, from the outer circumference of the package body of the CPUMC in the vicinity region of the CPUMC. It is arranged at a position separated by more than the virtual boundary line of the above. W1 has a length equal to or longer than the length (length at the time of mounting) of one of the resistors (R1 to R6).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board M are all arranged at a distance of W1 or more from the CPU MC. With this configuration, even if noise is generated from the IC element, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise adversely affects the operation of the CPU MC.

<< Structure of gate M80 >>
Next, the structure of the gate portion M80 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the main board case M40 according to the seventh embodiment and a side view of the main board case M40 as viewed from the direction of the side surface A. As described with reference to FIG. 128, the main board case M40 has a gate portion M80 on the surface (for example, a surface that can be visually recognized by a player or a game hall manager when the front door DU is opened). , The gate portion M80 has some dents on the surface as compared with the portions other than the gate portion M80.

In the side view of the main board case M40 of FIG. 130, the main board case A surface (the surface described above) has a gate portion M80, and the main board case B surface does not have a gate portion. Here, the A side of the main board case will be described in detail. The main board case A surface is, for example, a surface close to the front door DU direction from the center of the short axis in the side view of the main board case M40 of FIG. 130, and the main board case B surface is based on the center of the short axis. It is a surface close to the main control board M direction. In other words, it can be said that the main board case A side is the side closer to the front door DU, and similarly, the main board case B side is the side closer to the main control board M. In other words, the main control board M is provided on the B surface side of the main board case from the center of the short axis.

FIG. 131 shows the details of the structure of the gate portion M80. The detailed structure of the gate portion M80 included in the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment may be configured as described in detail below.

<< Structural pattern 1 of gate M80 >>
First, as the structural pattern of the first gate portion M80, the main substrate case B surface is configured to be flat. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 131, the gate portion M80 is composed of one convex portion and two concave portions, and is formed by extending the main board case A surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the distance A is away from the tip of the convex portion and the distance B is away from the tip of the concave portion. At this time, in the relationship between A and B, it is preferable that the relationship A <B is established. It should be added that the one convex portion constituting the gate portion M80 is a gate mark as a state after the gate is cut. Further, it may be designed so that A = 0.

<Effect 1>
When the convex portion of the gate portion M80 is separated from the surface of the main board case A by a distance A, for example, when the main board case M40 is removed from the gaming machine, when the confirmer holds the portion related to the gate portion M80. It is possible to prevent accidents such as the hand slipping and dropping the main board case M40.

<Effect 2>
Further, since the recess of the gate portion M80 is separated from the surface of the main substrate case A by a distance B, it is possible to smoothly flow in the resin molding (plastic) when molding the main substrate case M40.

<Effect 3>
Further, since the main board case B surface directly below the gate portion M80 on the main board case A surface is flat, the surface related to the gate portion M80 when the main control board M is visually recognized through the main board case M40. It is possible to visually recognize the main control board M without lowering the visibility due to the refraction of light even when visually recognizing from the above.

<< Structural pattern 2 of gate M80 >>
Next, as a structural pattern of the second gate portion M80, the main board case B is recessed (bulges outward from the main board case M40). The gate portion M80 in the lower part of the figure is formed by one convex portion and two concave portions on the A surface side of the main board case, and is a surface obtained by extending the A surface of the main board case (a portion other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, it is the same as the first pattern that the distance A from the tip of the convex portion and the distance B from the tip of the concave portion are separated from the main substrate case A surface (flat surface).

Further, the main board case B surface is recessed, and the distance from the deepest portion (the portion bulging to the outermost side) of the recess to the convex portion on the main board case A surface side is C, and the main board is also The distance from the tip of the recess on the case B surface to the surface extending the main board case B surface (the part other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction is D, and in the relationship between C and D, D <C. It is preferable that the relationship is established. Further, in the seventh embodiment, from the surface where the main board case A surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) is extended in the horizontal direction to the surface where the main board case B surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) is extended in the horizontal direction. The distance is also set to C, but the present invention is not limited to this. ) May be C', C <C', C> C', or C≈C'.

<Effect>
In this way, the tip of the recess on the B surface of the main board case is separated from the surface extending the B surface of the main board case (the portion other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction by a distance D, for example, the A surface of the main board case. It is possible to compensate for the decrease in the strength of the member related to the gate portion M80. In other words, the gate portion M80 is recessed as compared with the flat surface, and when a force for breaking the main board case M40 is applied, the recessed distance (for example, the distance B of the structural pattern 1) is thinned. Therefore, it is configured to prevent the main board case A surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) from being easily destroyed as compared with the horizontally extended surface. In this way, even from the surface related to the gate portion M80, the main board case B surface is recessed by a predetermined distance, so that the material strength equivalent to that of the portion other than the gate portion M80 of the main substrate case A surface can be obtained. It becomes possible to keep.

The arrangement and configuration of the gate portion M80 in the main board case M40 have been described in detail above in the seventh embodiment, but this configuration is a case in which the other case members (main board case M40 and the main control board M are sandwiched) described above. It can also be applied to the member), and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the gate portion M80 in the main board case M40 described above.

<<<<<< Power Off and Sensor Detection >>>>>
Next, as an eighth embodiment, sensors related to detection of game medals installed inside the game machine (for example, insertion reception sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, shoot sensor D40s, first payout). The sensor is off before the sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 detect the passage of the game medal, or the sensor is off → on after detecting the passage of the game medal, and further, the game. When the medal passes through the detection area of the sensor and the sensor is turned off in any of the on → off states, the power off processing and the processing related to the detection of the passage of the game medal (8th embodiment). Then, the credit addition processing of the game medal related to the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, the counting processing of the insertion monitoring counter related to the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, the first payout sensor H1, the second The relationship with the payout sensor H2 (count processing of the number of game medals paid out) will be described.

<<< Relationship between power off processing and game medal credit addition processing >>>
First, the game medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s (off → on → off) in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medal, and the game medal is awarded without an error. It flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the selector DS.

The timing at which the credits of the game medals are added is as described in detail in the third embodiment. For example, based on the description in step S1226-8, the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on → off, and the second insertion sensor D30s is When it is turned off → on, the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and can be added to the credit, but it is not limited to this, and the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on / off or The game medal inserted at the timing when any of the on / off of the second insertion sensor D30s is switched may be detected as a bet medal and may be added to the credit. The timing at which the credit addition of the game medal in the eighth embodiment described in detail below is performed is added to the credit when the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on → off and the second insertion sensor D30s is turned off → on. It is configured to be possible. As described above, in this example, "occurrence of power failure" means that the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detection of power failure" means that the gaming machine is powered off. It is to detect the occurrence.

The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. Hereinafter, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and as a comparison of time values, even if an event that deviates from the illustrated range occurs, it deviates as a design value. It will not be. Further, the same applies to the time other than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure, and the time for the game medal to flow down, the time for the disc D50 of the medal payout device H, and the like, which are illustrated in this example, are various. Applicable to the configuration.

In order to define the relationship between the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, the time from the occurrence of the power-off to the detection of the power-off is T1, the power-on reception sensor D10s off → on to the second power-on sensor. The time from D30s on to off is T2, and the time from the first closing sensor D20s off to on to the second closing sensor D30s on to on is T3. The relationships of T1, T2, and T3 applicable to this example will be described in detail below. The details will be described later, but it should be added that the starting point of T2 is just an example.

<< Action pattern 1 of power off processing and game medal credit addition processing >>
FIG. 133 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off time processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to the insertion included in this configuration are the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the detection status of the game medal by these sensors is shown in the figure. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (a1) to (a8), and as time elapses, they change from (a1) to (a8).

Under the situation where the power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the input reception sensor D10s is turned off → on at the timing of (a1). Further, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned off. Next, at the timing of (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned on → off. Next, the power is cut off at the timing of (a3). Next, at the timing of (a4), the first input sensor D20s is turned off → on.

Next, at the timing of (a5), the second closing sensor D30s is turned off → on (the first closing sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing of (a6), the first input sensor D20s is turned on → off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing of (a7), the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (a8), the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage process. That is, in the figure, even when the power is cut off after the game medal has passed through the insertion reception sensor D10s and the insertion reception sensor D10s is turned on and off, the second insertion sensor D30s is at the timing of (a7). After the game is turned on and off, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing, so that the credit addition processing can be normally executed. In the eighth embodiment, the interrupt processing for detecting the power failure is configured to execute the power interruption processing by the same interrupt processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power interruption detection and the power interruption processing are not limited to this. Execution can also be processed by separate interrupts.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T1, T2, and T3 described above is T3 <T1 <T2. By setting T3 <T1, the power off processing can be executed after the credit addition processing is executed. Further, it can be said that the relationship of T1 <T2 and T3 <T2 is a clear relationship based on the flow process of the game medal.

<Effect>
In this way, even if the power is cut off while the game medal is flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after passing through the input reception sensor D10s), the power is turned off after the credit addition process of the game medal is executed. By configuring the time processing, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals, and even though the game medals are inserted (not returned) inside the game machine because the blocker is on. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credit is not added.

In addition, as the configuration regarding the on sensor and the power off, the following (1-1) to (1-3) or (2-1) to (2-3) may be configured.
(1-1) A power failure occurs after the input reception sensor D10s is turned from off to on (timing of (a3) in FIG. 133).
(1-2) Before the first closing sensor D20s is turned off → on, the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off processing (timing between (a3) and (a4) in FIG. 133).
(1-3) By turning the blocker from on to off, the game medal can be returned without executing the credit addition process.
(2-1) A power failure occurs after the input reception sensor D10s is turned from off to on (timing of (a3) in FIG. 133).
(2-2) Before the second closing sensor D30s is turned off → on, the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off processing (timing between (a4) and (a5) in FIG. 133).
(2-3) By turning the blocker on and off, the game medal can be returned without executing the credit addition process.

<< Action pattern 2 of power off processing and game medal credit addition processing >>
FIG. 134 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to the insertion included in this configuration are the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the detection status of the game medal by these sensors is shown in the figure. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (b1) to (b8), and as time elapses, they change from (b1) to (b8).

Under the situation where the power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the input reception sensor D10s is turned off → on at the timing of (b1). Further, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned off. Next, at the timing of (b2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (b3), the first input sensor D20s is turned off → on. Next, the power is cut off at the timing of (a4).

Next, at the timing of (b5), the second closing sensor D30s is turned off → on (the first closing sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing of (b6), the first input sensor D20s is turned on → off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing of (b7), the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (a8), the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage process. That is, in the figure, even when the game medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s and the power is cut off after the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off → on, the second insertion is performed at the timing of (b7). After the sensor D30s is turned on and off, the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off processing, so that the credit addition process can be normally executed.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T1, T2, and T3 described above is T3 <T1 <T2. It should be noted that T1 <T3 <T2 may be configured to hold. In either configuration, as shown in the figure, the credit addition process is completed even when the power is cut off after the first input sensor D20s is turned off → on at the timing of (b3). The power off processing can be executed later.

<Effect>
In this way, even if the power is cut off while the game medal is flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off → on), the credit addition process of the game medal is executed. By configuring to perform power off processing after the power is turned off, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals, and the game medals are inserted inside the game machine because the blocker is on (returned). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credit is not added in spite of the fact that the credit is not added.

<< Action pattern modification of power off processing and game medal credit addition processing >>
Further, as a modification of the operation pattern of the power off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, for example, the timing of the power off is such that the first on sensor D20s is on and the second on sensor D30s is on. In this case, the power off processing is executed after the first on sensor D20s is turned off and the second on sensor D30s is turned off, that is, the power off processing is executed after the credit addition processing is executed. It may be configured.

<Effect>
Even if the power is cut off during the insertion of the game medals, the inserted game medals can be reliably added to the credits by performing the power off processing after the credit addition processing of the game medals is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credit is not added even though the game medal is inserted inside the game machine.

Further, as a modified example of the action patterns of the power off time processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, it is possible to configure the timing of detecting the power off. For example, the timing at which the power off occurs is the same as << the action pattern 1 of the power off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal >>, and the game medal passes the input reception sensor D10s at the timing of detecting the power off. In addition, when the timing is set before reaching the first input sensor D20s, power is supplied to the gaming machine as a processing flow based on the occurrence timing of various events based on the pattern 1, and the blocker is turned on. Under a certain situation, the input reception sensor D10s is turned off → on at the timing of (a1). Further, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned off. Next, at the timing of (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned on → off. Next, the power is cut off at the timing of (a3). Next, at the timing of (a4), the gaming machine detects the power outage, the power outage processing is executed, and then the blocker is turned off. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off immediately after the inserted game medal has passed the insertion reception sensor D10s, the power off processing is performed before the inserted game medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s. Since it can be executed, the credit addition process is not executed, and the blocker is turned off, so that the game medal is returned from the return port, and it is possible to prevent the event that the player is disadvantaged.

<Effect>
In this way, if the power-off processing is executed before the game medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s, and the credit addition processing related to the inserted game medal is not executed due to the occurrence of the power-off, the credit addition process is not executed. It can be configured to return the game medal to the player, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credit is not added even though the game medal is inserted inside the game machine. ..

In the eighth embodiment, "the time from the insertion reception sensor D10s off-> on to the second insertion sensor D30s on-> off" is set to T2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot". The time from the timing when the game medal is no longer visible to the player to the second insertion sensor D30s on → off may be set as T2, or "half of the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot can be visually recognized by the player." The time from the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on to off may be set as T2, or the second insertion sensor may be set from the timing when a part of the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot cannot be seen by the player. The time from D30s on to off may be set to T2.

<<< Relationship between power off processing and counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>>
Next, the relationship with the timing related to the counting process by the insertion monitoring counter of the game medal will be described as the timing in which the power is not supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of the power failure. Referring to FIG. 135, in the path of the game medal in the medal selector DS, the flow path member of the medal after passing through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s (referred to as a chute main body in the third embodiment). ). In FIG. 135, a shoot sensor D40s is provided downstream of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s includes the above-mentioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, and the second input sensor D30s. Similar to the above, it is a sensor related to detecting whether normal medal insertion is being performed, and in particular, it can detect errors that occur after the credit addition process has already been executed (for example, insertion medal retention error, insertion medal backflow error, etc.). It is configured as.

The timing at which the counting process by the game medal insertion monitoring counter is performed is as described in detail in the third embodiment. For example, the main control board M is inserted at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from on to off. The monitoring counter performs addition processing from 0 to 1. Then, the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS, and for example, when the shoot sensor D40s is turned from off to on, the insertion monitoring counter performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0. The timing of adding (subtracting) game medals by the input monitoring counter is not limited to this. As described later, for example, when the first closing sensor is turned from off to on, the closing monitoring counter performs an addition process from 0 to 1, and when the shoot sensor D40s is turned from on to off. Any configuration may be used as long as it is possible to monitor whether or not the game medal has passed normally, such as by configuring the input monitoring counter to perform subtraction processing from 1 to 0. Further, the counting process of the game medals by the input monitoring counter may be performed in the order of subtraction → addition (after 0 → -1, then -1 → 0) instead of performing the counting process of the game medal in the order of addition → subtraction. As a configuration for determining that an error has occurred by the input monitoring counter, for example, an error occurs when the counter value C of the input monitoring counter becomes "C <-3 or C <3". It may be configured to determine that it is present.

In order to define the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal input monitoring counter, the time from the occurrence of the power-off to the detection of the power-off is set from T4, the second power-on sensor D30s on → off. The time from off to on of the shoot sensor D40s is defined as T5, and the relationship between T4 and T5 will be described in detail below. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. Hereinafter, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it deviates as a design value. It will not be. Further, the same applies to the time other than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure, and the time for the game medal to flow down, the time for the disc D50 of the medal payout device H, and the like, which are illustrated in this example, are various. Applicable to the configuration.

<< Operation pattern 1 of power off processing and counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>
FIG. 136 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power cutoff processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to the insertion shown in the figure are the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game medal (on or off). Further, the input monitoring counter is configured to perform addition / subtraction processing at a specified timing (in this operation pattern, the addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off, and the shoot sensor is used. The subtraction process is performed at the timing when D40s is turned from off to on). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are set to (c1) to (c6), and as a processing flow, power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, and (c1). ), The power supply is cut off (the timing of the various sensors at this time is that the first closing sensor D20s is on, the second closing sensor D30s is off, and the shoot sensor D40s is off). Next, at the timing of (c2), the second input sensor D30s is turned off → on. Next, at the timing of (c3), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → off, the game medal addition process is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter is changed from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned on and off at the timing between (c2) and (c3). Next, at the timing of (c4), the shoot sensor D40s is turned off → on, the game medal subtraction process is executed by the throwing monitoring counter, and the counter value of the throwing monitoring counter becomes 1 → 0.

Next, at the timing of (c5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned on → off. Next, the gaming machine detects the power outage at the timing of (c6), and the power outage processing is executed. In the eighth embodiment, the process of detecting the power failure and the process of detecting the power failure are configured to be executed within the same interrupt process, but the process is not limited to this, and the process of detecting the power failure , It is also possible to execute the power cutoff processing by separate interrupt processing. Further, in the figure, the subtraction process of the counter value of the closing monitoring counter is executed at the timing of (c4), but the closing monitoring counter is executed at the timing of (C5) (the timing when the shoot sensor is turned on → off). It may be configured to execute the counter value subtraction process.

As described above, in the figure, even if the power is cut off at the timing before the game medal reaches the second insertion sensor D30s, after the shoot sensor D40s is turned on → off at the timing of (c5). Since the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off processing, the credit addition processing and the counter value addition / subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter can be normally executed.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T4 and T5 described above is T4> T5. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off immediately before the addition process of the input monitoring counter is executed (the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is off), the input monitoring of the game medal is performed. It can be configured to execute the power-off processing after the addition processing and the subtraction processing by the counter are completed.

<Effect>
By performing the power off processing after the counting process (0 → 1 → 0) by the game medal insertion monitoring counter is executed, the game medal counting process by the insertion monitoring counter based on the detection by various sensors is normally executed. This makes it possible to normally detect an error or the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

<< Operation pattern 2 of power off processing and counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>
FIG. 137 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power cutoff processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. In this action pattern, the timing of detecting the power failure is different from that of the action pattern 1. The sensors here are the second input sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game medal (on or off). Further, in the input monitoring counter, addition / subtraction processing is performed at a specified timing (in this operation pattern, the addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off, and the shoot sensor D40s is turned on from off. Subtraction processing is performed at the timing when becomes). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are set as (d1) to (d5), and the power supply is cut off at the timing of (d1) as the processing flow (as the timing of the various sensors at this time). The first closing sensor D20s is on, the second closing sensor D30s is off, and the shoot sensor D40s is off). Next, at the timing of (d2), the second closing sensor D30s is turned off → on. Next, at the timing of (d3), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → off, the game medal addition process is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter is changed from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned on and off at the timing between (d2) and (d3). Next, (d4) the gaming machine detects the power outage, and the power outage processing is executed. Next, at the timing of (d5), the game medal reaches the shoot sensor D40s, but since the power off processing is executed, the game medal is not detected by the shoot sensor D40s. In the example of the figure, the case where the game medal passes through the blocker before the blocker is turned off is illustrated.

In the eighth embodiment, the process of detecting the power failure and the process of detecting the power failure are configured to be executed within the same interrupt process, but the process is not limited to this, and the process of detecting the power failure , It is also possible to execute the power cutoff processing by separate interrupt processing.

As described above, in the figure, even if the power cut occurs at the timing before the game medal reaches the second input sensor D30s, the game machine detects the power cut at the timing of (d4) and turns off the power. Since the time processing is executed, the subtraction processing of the power-on monitoring counter cannot be executed before the execution of the power-off processing, but the credit addition processing can be executed before the execution of the power-off processing. Further, the insertion monitoring counter is configured so that, for example, an error occurs when the counter value reaches 5, (even if the counter value shifts due to the insertion of one game medal, the error is not detected immediately). Therefore, even if a power failure occurs such as a power failure during the operation of the amusement park, it is not judged as an error related to the on monitoring counter even if the power is turned off once, so credit addition processing is performed. Is configured to ensure the continuation of a normal game if it can be executed normally.

<< Operation pattern 3 of power off processing and counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>
FIG. 138 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power cutoff processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. In this action pattern, the timing for detecting the power off is different from << action pattern 1 of the power off processing and the count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>, and the timing of performing the count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter. Is configured to be the same as << operation pattern 1 of the power off processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>. Further, in this action pattern, addition processing is performed by the insertion monitoring counter of the game medal at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → off, and subtraction processing is performed at the timing when the shoot sensor D40s is turned off → on. The sensors here are the second input sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game medal (on or off). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are set to (e1) to (e6), and the second input sensor D30s is turned off → on at the timing of (e1) as the processing flow. Next, at the timing of (e2), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → off, the game medal addition process is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter is changed from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned on and off at the timing between (e2) and (e3). Next, the power is cut off at the timing of (e3). Next, at the timing of (e4), the shoot sensor D40s is turned off → on, the game medal subtraction process is executed by the throwing monitoring counter, and the counter value of the throwing monitoring counter is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing of (e5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned on and off. Next, at the timing of (e6), the gaming machine detects the power outage, and the power outage processing is executed.

In the eighth embodiment, the process of detecting the power failure and the process of detecting the power failure are configured to be executed within the same interrupt process, but the process is not limited to this, and the process of detecting the power failure , It is also possible to execute the power cutoff processing by separate interrupt processing.

As described above, in the figure, even if the game medal has passed the second insertion sensor D30s and the power is cut off after the credit addition process is executed, the game machine is turned off at the timing of (e6). Is detected and the power-off processing is executed. Therefore, it is possible to configure the power-off processing to be executed after the addition processing and the subtraction processing of the ON monitoring counter are executed.

Further, in the figure, it is preferable that the relationship of T4> T5 is satisfied during the above-mentioned periods T4 and T5. Since the power failure is detected after the shoot sensor D40s is turned on and off, the period T4 from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure is the game medal counting process (addition and addition) by the input monitoring counter. It is preferably configured to be longer than the period during which the subtraction) is executed (for example, the period from (e2) to (e4)). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the power-off processing can be performed after the game medal counting processing by the input monitoring counter is surely executed.

With this configuration, after the count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter is executed, the power off processing is performed, and the game medal counting process by the insertion monitoring counter based on the detection by various sensors is normally performed. It becomes possible to execute, and it becomes possible to reliably detect an error or the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

In FIGS. 136 to 138, the timing of the addition process of the input monitoring counter is the timing when the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off, the timing of the subtraction process and the timing when the shoot sensor D40s is turned off → on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be as follows, and there is no problem in any combination of the timing of addition processing and the timing of subtraction processing.
(A1) Timing of addition processing of the input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s off → on (A2) Timing of addition processing of the input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s on → off (A3) Addition processing of the input monitoring counter Timing: 2nd input sensor D30s off → on (A4) Timing of addition processing of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s on → off (B1) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s off → on (B2) ) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s on → off

Although the configuration of the input monitoring counter for the gaming machine having the shoot sensor D40s has been described in detail in FIGS. 136 to 138, the configuration of the input monitoring counter may be applied to the gaming machine having the input reception sensor D10s. In that case, the timing of the addition processing / subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter may be configured as follows, and there is no problem in any combination of the timing of the addition processing and the timing of the subtraction processing.
(C1) Timing of addition processing of input reception counter: Input reception sensor D10s off → on (C2) Timing of addition processing of input reception counter: Input reception sensor D10s on → off (D1) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s off → on (D2) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s on → off (D3) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s off → on (D4) ) Timing of subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s on → off Also, when the game medal passes through the input reception sensor D10s, 1 is added to the counter value of the input monitoring counter, and then the blocker is off. Therefore, when the game medal is returned, the counter value of the input monitoring counter remains incremented by 1. Even in such a case, the gaming machine according to this example is configured to correct the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter to 0 by turning the blocker from off to on after that, so that the gaming machine is executed during the insertion of the game medal. It can be configured so that it does not become abnormal in the input monitoring counter judgment processing.

Further, in this example, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is added by 1 and then subtracted by 1, but the counter value of the input monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 and then added by 1 (counter value is "0 → -1 → 0". It may be configured to change as described above), and any of the configurations described above can be applied to the configuration.

<<< Relationship between power off processing and game medal payout count processing >>>
Next, as a timing in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of the power failure, the timing related to the payout number counting process of the gaming medals will be described with reference to FIG. 139. In the process of counting the number of medals to be paid out, for example, it is performed at the timing of 4 in FIG. 120. Specifically, the payout number counting process is performed at the timing when the release urging means H70 is displaced to the initial position again and a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the ON state is transmitted to the main control board M. It is configured to be done. As the payout number counting process, for example, it is common to use an addition process for adding normally paid out game medals such as 0 → 1 → 2 .... The payout count process is a process of counting 1 (may be added to or subtracted from the counter value) when it is determined that the gaming machine has executed the payout of one game medal.

The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. Hereinafter, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it deviates as a design value. It will not be. Further, the same applies to the time other than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure, and the time for the game medal to flow down, the time for the disc D50 of the medal payout device H, and the like, which are illustrated in this example, are various. Applicable to the configuration.

In addition, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 120, the first payout sensor H10s in FIG. 4 is referred to as the second payout sensor H2, the second payout sensor H20s in FIG. 4 is referred to as the first payout sensor H1, and the release urging means H70 is in the initial position. In the case of, the first payout sensor H1 = on and the second payout sensor H2 = off. That is, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70,
1st payout sensor H1 = on, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off (initial position)
1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = on 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = On / 2nd payout sensor H2 = Off (initial position)
It becomes the sensor state.

<< Operation pattern of power off processing and game medal payout number counting processing >>
FIG. 139 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off time processing and the game medal payout number counting processing are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2. In this action pattern, the timing at which the power supply is cut off is determined.
Action pattern A: The first payout sensor H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is off Action pattern B: The first payout sensor H1 is on → off and the second payout sensor H2 is off. The relationship between the processing and the processing for counting the number of payouts of game medals will be described.

<< Action pattern A of power off processing and game medal payout number counting processing >>
First, as a processing flow of the action pattern A, first, a power failure occurs after the release urging means H70 starts displacement from the initial position (the timing of the various sensors at this time is the first payout sensor. H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is off.) After that, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70,
1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = on 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = On / 2nd payout sensor H2 = Off (initial position)
Then, the payout number counting process is executed.

After that, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing. In the eighth embodiment, the power supply cutoff is detected and the power supply cutoff process is executed at the same interrupt interval, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply cutoff detection and the execution of the power supply cutoff process are executed. Can also be processed by separate interrupts.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs after the discharge urging means H70 starts displacement from the initial position, the power outage processing can be executed after the payout count processing is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unreasonable profit, such as the number of medals being paid out is not counted even though the game medals are paid out.

<< Action pattern B of power off processing and game medal payout number counting processing >>
First, as a flow of processing of the action pattern B, first, the displacement is started from the state where the release urging means H70 is in the initial position.
1st payout sensor H1 = on, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off (initial position)
The power is cut off after the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = off. After that, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70,
1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = on 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = on, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off (initial position)
Then, the payout number counting process is executed.

After that, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing. In the eighth embodiment, the power supply cutoff is detected and the power supply cutoff process is executed at the same interrupt interval, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply cutoff detection and the execution of the power supply cutoff process are executed. Can also be processed at different interrupt processing execution timings.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs after the discharge urging means H70 starts displacement from the initial position, the power outage processing can be executed after the payout count processing is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unreasonable profit, such as the number of medals being paid out is not counted even though the game medals are paid out.

The execution timing (execution trigger) of the payout count process is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure.
(1) Timing when the first payout sensor H1 = off, the second payout sensor H2 = off → the first payout sensor H1 = off, the second payout sensor H2 = on, (2) the first payout sensor H1 = off, The timing may be set such that the second payout sensor H2 = on → the first payout sensor H1 = off, and the second payout sensor H2 = off.

<Relationship between power off processing and sensor detection processing Applicable to pachinko gaming machines>
In the eighth embodiment, the sensors are off before the various sensors installed inside the spinning machine detect the passage of the game medal, or the sensors are off after the notification of the game medal is detected. For power-off processing and detection of the passage of game medals when the power is turned off in either the on state, or when the game medal passes through the detection area of the sensor and the sensor is in either the on-to-off state. The relationship with such processing has been described in detail, but regarding the relationship between the processing when the power is turned off and the processing related to the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball), not only the spinning type gaming machine but also, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. It can also be applied to ball game machines, gaming machines, and the like. Therefore, the case where the above-described configuration is applied to a pachinko gaming machine will be described in detail below. The various sensors installed inside the pachinko gaming machine correspond to, for example, the specific area entry detection device 2224-1, the discharge ball detection device 2224-2, the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, which will be described later, and the game ball. The process related to the detection of passage corresponds to, for example, the counting process of the total discharge game balls related to the specific area entry detection device 2224-1, the discharge ball detection device 2224-2, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, which will be described later.

First, the meaning of each term in the pachinko gaming machine applicable to this example will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which a prize ball is not paid out. The "identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably visual information such as numbers, letters, and patterns. Those having a shape such as, etc. can be mentioned. Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (designation), but the "special symbol (special symbol)" is a main control board. The identification information is displayed and controlled on the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is the identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to the display content that enhances the enjoyment of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action photographs, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including identification information fluctuation / stop, notice, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning state is easy, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning / failing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, and the like, and at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the entry port (for example, the start entry port) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as winning random number + fluctuation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number). .. Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, the "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the large winning opening can be opened, and a non-probability variable game state in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Transition to special game state Probability fluctuation game state with high lottery probability, auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the transition to special game (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, variable to the start port) When the member is attached, the opening period of the variable member is long, the probability of winning the opening of the variable member is high, the time for notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member is short), etc. be. The "game area" is an area in which the game ball can roll, and is not limited to the front side of the game board D35 (as seen by the player), for example, the back side of the game board D35 (as seen by the player). It may be an area in which the game ball including both the front side of the game board D35 and the front side (as seen from the player's point of view) can roll. The “left-handed” is to launch the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side (left-handed route ML10) of the game area D30, which will be described later. “Right-handed” means launching the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the right side (right-handed route MR10) of the game area D30, which will be described later. Further, the "left-handed area" is an area on the left side of the game area D30 when the center of the game area is used as a reference. The "right-handed area" is an area on the right side of the game area D30 when the center of the game area is used as a reference. The "expected average execution time of the easy-to-enter ball game per unit time" is assumed to be a situation in which the symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is constantly changed (for example, a situation in which a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol is always present). In the case, it means the ratio of the opening period to the unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, in other words, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example. , When a variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called opening extension function operating state / non-operating state), and the winning of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member. High or low probability (so-called high-probability lottery state / low-probability lottery state), length of fluctuation time of normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member (so-called normal figure fluctuation shortening function non-operating state / operating state) ), Etc. are realized by any one or a plurality of combinations. The "average value of the variable display period of the identification information" is not limited to the meaning that the variable display period is actually measured for each variable display of the identification information and the average value based on the measured value is taken. More specifically, when it is configured to determine the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information, and there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). , The expected value based on the multiple types of variable display periods (sum of "selection probability x variable display period"), but if there is only one type of candidate for the variable display period to be selected, that one type It becomes the variable display period itself (that is, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept is limited to the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss, the concept is limited to the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variable display period with the highest selection probability. It should be added that the concept may be limited to, that is, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that the player can experience (hence, "the variable display period of the identification information". As a realization method for making the "average value" different, the candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are different, or even if the candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are the same, a further variable display period is added. There are various methods such as different period values, but the method is not limited to one of them). "The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is different from the first period. "Having at least a variable period state" means that it may have not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states). For example, the state transition from "first fluctuation period state" → "second fluctuation period state" → "third fluctuation period state" is performed according to the number of fluctuation display times of the identification information. Including those that can be obtained. In this case, if the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information in each state is configured to be "first fluctuation period state" <"second fluctuation period state" <"third fluctuation period state", It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state {Of course, the opposite state transition (game progress state) may be constructed. In that case, it is suitable when used in combination with the probability fluctuation game state + electric chew specific game state that continues until the next big hit (despite the situation where the next big hit is definite, the next big hit cannot be obtained. As the situation continues, the speed of the game progresses, so it may be possible to dispel the fatigue at the time of so-called hamari)}. Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the "first variable period state", the difference between the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit is ". In the "third variable period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second variable period state", the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit are In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the "second fluctuation period state", the fluctuation display period of the identification information, especially at the time of loss, tends to be relatively long compared to the "first fluctuation period state" ( That is, fluctuations suggesting hits and reach or reach fluctuations are likely to occur), and in the "second fluctuation period state", the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is relatively longer than in other states. Easy {that is, the fluctuation display period of the short fluctuation loss where the loss is deterministic and the fluctuation display period of the medium fluctuation loss which suggests the hit are not selected (or difficult to be selected), but the fluctuation display of the reach fluctuation (per long fluctuation) It can be exemplified that it has a feature that it is selected (or easily selected) only for a period. The "specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game" may be the period immediately after the execution of the special game ends until the symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times, or the special game may be changed. It may be a period from the time when the symbol is changed one or more times after the execution of the special game is completed to the time when the symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times (that is, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed). If it is within the specified range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within that range. Therefore, the above-mentioned "first variable period state"-> "second variable period state"-> "third variable period state" When the state transition with and can be taken, the specific period can mean the period of stay in the "first variable period state" and / or the "second variable period state"). "When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold" means that, for example, a special game (so-called big hit game) is likely to occur at the time of the hold digestion, but the special game may occur. The judgment criteria are not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (win / fail lottery random number)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop symbol, A random number value such as a "winning symbol determination random number" that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, a probability fluctuation game) after the special game may be used as a judgment criterion, or the event content derived from these random number values (win / fail judgment result). , The length of the fluctuation time, the type of the stop symbol, the possibility of shifting to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment criteria. In the case of suggesting, "suggesting or notifying the existence of a hold" is, for example, an effect at the time of hold digestion until the hold is reached (the pattern variation mode of the decorative symbol and its interlocking performance). It is possible to change the execution mode of (background effect, etc.), and when notifying, for example, the display mode of the hold indicator lamp (which may be an image on a liquid crystal display device) at the time of the occurrence of the hold. (In that case, change the display color, change the display shape, etc.), change the sound of the hold generation sound and the sound such as BGM at the time of the hold occurrence, and the effect lamp at the time of the hold occurrence. The lighting mode of (frame lamp, etc.) is changed, or the execution mode of other effects (design variation mode of decorative symbols, background effect performed in conjunction with it, etc.) performed at the time of the pending occurrence. Can be mentioned.

The ninth embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. , The mode is not limited to the following. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described.

The ninth embodiment is a model (a first-class first-class multifunction device) in which two conventional first-class pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. The ninth embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. , The mode is not limited to the following. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the ninth embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Further, the term "table" in this example is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that it is an associated aspect. Further, the numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modification {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are This is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, by the conditions of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the conditions of the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, and the time reduction game and the non-time reduction game). It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (conditions with the time reduction game, etc.) may be changed as appropriate as long as they do not deviate significantly from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is that the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, even if the magnitude relationship is appropriately changed such that the first main game side <second main game side, or the first main game side> second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Further, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation game state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, whether to set "65535" as the number of continuations (configured to substantially continue). Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability fluctuation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples is not significantly deviated. Should be understood that may be changed as appropriate. The step numbers and codes in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to this example are different from the step numbers and codes in the embodiment of the rotating drum type game machine according to this example, and the same step numbers or codes are used. It should be added that even if they are used, they are not the same (process, function, member, etc.).

<9th embodiment>
Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

The step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in their respective embodiments. It indicates that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the ninth embodiment is a process that functions independently because it is step 2102 in another embodiment).

First, with reference to FIG. 140, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board D35. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching the game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board D35, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, extracting the game ball to the lower ball plate D22, and the like. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, speakers D24 are provided on the upper right and upper left of the game board D35, and sound effects according to the game state and the like are output.

The game board D35 and the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) on the front surface of the game machine are attached to the game machine frame so as to maintain a distance of more than 13 mm and not more than 25 mm (19 mm in this example) and to be parallel to each other. Has been done. Here, the game board D35 is firmly fixed by a fixing mechanism so as not to be easily shaken.

Further, the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) does not obstruct the view of the entire structure of the game board, and the entire game area is colorless and transparent so that the position of the game ball on the game board can be confirmed so that there is no unevenness. It is formed.

In the ball plate (for example, upper ball plate D20, lower ball plate D22), the game balls on the ball plate are visible to the player (the number of game balls can be roughly confirmed), and the game received by the player in the saucer. It has a shape that does not hinder the taking out of the ball (a shape that allows the game ball to be taken out freely).

Next, in the game board D35, a game area D30 divided by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed, and a game ball that flows down on the game board D35 (on the game area D30) via the transparent plate D16. You can check the position of. The game area D30 is roughly divided into a left-handed area DL10 and a right-handed area DR10. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to the mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, the left-handed route ML10, the right-handed route MR10, the first main game starting port A10, and the second main game Starting port B10, auxiliary game starting port H10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device S40, auxiliary game symbol A display device H20, a center decoration D38, a movable body accessory YK, a right general winning opening lamp LP10, a left general winning opening P10, a right general winning opening P20, a sub input button SB, and an out opening D36 are installed. In the ninth embodiment, the left-handed route ML10 may be referred to as a first flow-down route, and the right-handed route MR10 may be referred to as a second flow-down route. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start port B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is variable to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the closed state.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (left-handed area DL10) is provided. While it is easy to be guided to the first main game start port A10, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (right-handed area DR10) is not easily guided to the first main game start port A10. Further, both the game ball flowing down on the left side of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area D30 are configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In the ninth embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the ninth embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and It may be arranged so as to be separated from the second main game start opening B10.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, and the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area). It is configured so that the game ball flowing down the ball is less likely to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10.

Next, the left general winning opening P10 includes a left general winning opening ball detection device P11s. The left general winning opening ball detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the left general winning opening P10, and generates left general winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. A predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of game balls will be paid out as prize balls by entering the game balls into the left general winning opening P10. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is on the left. It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the general winning opening P10. That is, when a left-handed hit (to launch the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left-handed hit area DL10 (left-handed route ML10) on the left side of the game area D30) is executed. It is configured so that it is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10.

Next, the right general winning opening P20 includes a right general winning opening ball detection device P21s. The right general winning opening ball detection device P21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the right general winning opening P20, and generates right general winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. Here, the right general winning opening P20 is arranged in the right-handed area DR10, and has both the role of the auxiliary game starting opening for acquiring the auxiliary game random number and the role of the general winning opening for paying out the prize ball. There is. That is, the entry of the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d attached to the second main game starting opening B10. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls) of game balls will be paid out as prize balls by entering the game balls into the right general winning opening P20. The game ball (for example, 2 balls) paid out as a prize ball from the right general winning opening P20 by the entry of the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 is determined by the entry of the game ball into the left general winning opening P10. , It is configured to be less than the game balls (for example, 3 balls) paid out as prize balls from the left general winning opening P10. In the ninth embodiment, the game ball that has been hit right can enter the right general winning opening P20. That is, when right-handed (to launch the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right-handed area DR10 (right-handed route MR10) on the right side of the game area D30) is executed. It is configured so that it is easy to enter the right general winning opening P20.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, as the entry openings that can be entered when the right-handed hit is executed, in order from the upstream, "auxiliary game start opening H10 → right general winning opening P20 → second large winning opening C20". → 1st prize opening C10 → 2nd main game start opening B10 → out opening D36 ”. Further, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has passed through the auxiliary game start port H10 will further flow down on the game area, and the ball entry port located downstream (the above-mentioned right). It will be possible to enter the general winning opening P20, etc.). On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the right general winning opening P20 will flow into the back side of the game board surface, and will not subsequently enter the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20 (execute right-handed strike). Then, the game ball that did not enter the right general winning opening P20 can enter the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20).

When the left-handed player is executed in the non-time-reduced game state (the game is advanced by the left-handed player in the non-time-reduced game state), the game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). Since it is difficult to open the second main game start port, the electric accessory B11d is difficult to open, and the game proceeds mainly by entering the first main game start port A10 as the start port on the main game side. When right-handed is executed in the time-reduced game state (the game proceeds by right-handed in the time-reduced game state), the game ball easily enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). 2 Main game start port The electric accessory B11d is easy to open, and the game proceeds mainly by entering the second main game start port B10 as the start port on the main game side. In addition, the game ball is launched by right-handed in the time-reduced game state, rather than the ease of entering the first main game start port A10 when the game ball is continuously fired by left-handed in the non-time-reduced game state. It is easier to enter the second main game start port B10 when the game is continued, in other words, the first main game starts when the game ball is continuously fired by left-handed in the non-time shortened game state. The first main game start port A10 or the second main game start when the game ball is continuously fired by right-handed in a time-shortening game state rather than the ease of entering the mouth A10 or the second main game start port B10. The ease of entering the ball into the mouth B10 is higher. Therefore, in this example, the number of prize balls (3 balls in this example) when the ball is entered into the left general winning opening P10, which is easier to enter when the left-handed hit is executed, is right-handed. Non-time reduction game state by designing more than the number of prize balls (2 balls in this example) when entering the right general winning opening P20, which is easier to enter at the time of execution than at the time of left-handed execution. The difference between the average number of prize balls paid out by entering the winning opening, that is, the base It is possible to prevent the difference between the values (the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out with respect to the 100 game balls fired in the situation where the special game is not won) becomes too large.

Further, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal, an LED, or the like, and is configured to be lit when a game ball enters the right general winning opening during execution of a special game. .. Further, although the details will be described later, it may be suggested whether to shift to the probability-variable gaming state or the non-probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game depending on the difference in the lighting color of the right general winning opening lamp LP10. It is configured. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be provided in the left-handed area DL10 or the right-handed area DR10 on the game area D30. Further, it may be provided in an area other than the game area D30.

In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route MR10 passes through the right-handed route outlet D50 and flows down to the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20, and the like. It will be.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are provided on the upper right side of the out opening D36, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is , It is configured so that it can easily pass through the area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is an out opening that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of D36. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d {and a first large winning opening. The mouth electric accessory solenoid C13} is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 Grand prize opening Electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the ninth embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a big winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called sliding attacker). It is often suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape and is out, which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right side of the opening D36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d {and a second large winning opening. The mouth electric accessory solenoid C23} is provided. Here, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second large winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second large winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the ninth embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a big winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called sliding attacker). , It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol holding display unit A21h (second main game symbol holding display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and a maximum of four holding numbers can be displayed (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held. Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Blinking at low speed, Number of Holds 3: Blinking at medium speed, Number of Holds 4: Blinking at high speed).

Since the main game symbol does not necessarily have to have a directing role, the size of the first main game symbol display device A20 is set to an inconspicuous degree in the ninth embodiment. However, when a method is adopted in which the main game symbol itself has a directing role and the decorative symbol is not displayed, the main game symbol is displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device S40 described later. It may be configured as.

Next, the effect display device S40 is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device S40 includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations imitating a game of a slot machine, a first hold display unit SG12 for displaying main game hold information, and the like. It has a second hold display unit SG13. Although the effect display device S40 is configured by a liquid crystal display in the ninth embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13 are each composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed). In the ninth embodiment, there are two entrances, an auxiliary game start opening H10 and a right general winning opening P20, as entrances from which the auxiliary game random numbers can be obtained. Regardless of which ball is entered, the acquired auxiliary game random number display will be displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device S40, and has functions such as a flow path for a game ball, protection of the effect display device S40, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 and / or the game area D30, and plays a role of directing by blinking or the like.

Next, the movable body accessory YK is installed in the vicinity of the effect display device S40, and plays a role of driving and enlivening the game when the effect is executed due to the symbol change. It is preferable that the device is moved in the vertical direction, driven by rotation, or lit so that the drive is conspicuous, and the drive is easy to drive due to a symbol variation with a high expectation of a big hit.

Next, the sub-input button SB is an operation member that is electrically connected to the sub-control board S, and by operating (pressing), an effect based on the operation is executed. The operation modes of the sub-input button SB include a single press (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed only once for a short time), repeated hits (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed multiple times), and a long press. (Operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is continuously pressed for a predetermined period), and may be configured to have. Further, the operation member electrically connected to the sub-control board S and for which the effect based on the operation is executed by operating (pressing) is not limited to the sub-input button SB, and the upper and lower parts are not limited to the sub-input button SB. It has four operation units, left and right, and a cross key that allows you to select the effect (notice effect, etc.) to be executed by operating the operation unit, and the effect (movable) by pulling it toward you. It may be configured to have a lever, etc. on which the body accessory operates, etc.).

Next, the out port D36 is an entry port provided below the game area D30, and the game ball that has flowed down without entering any winning opening provided in the game area D30 enters the ball. When a game ball enters the out port D36, which is a ball opening, various lottery based on random numbers and prize balls based on the entry ball are not executed, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the game machine. Become. In this embodiment, the out port D36 for entering the game ball that did not win the winning opening is provided only at the bottom of the game board, but the out opening is provided at a predetermined position on the upper part of the game board. It is also possible. In that case, in order to clarify that the entrance is not a winning opening, it is desirable not to be confused with the winning opening, such as by using a sticker to display "OUT".

Although not shown, the size of the game board D35 (game area D30) is set to include a circle having a diameter of 300 mm and not exceeding a square frame having a side of 500 mm.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, when the accessory does not operate (when the variable winning opening such as the large winning opening C10 is closed), the winning opening (the one capable of winning the game ball, in other words Then, it is not impossible to win a prize even if the launched game ball has a physically possible trajectory. For example, the number of the first main game start opening A10 (the number of entrances of the winning opening) is five. (The first main game start opening A10 is one, the left general winning opening P10 is three, and the right general winning opening P20 is one). The number of winning openings can be set as appropriate, but it is desirable that the number is in the range of 5 to 15 from the viewpoint of the winning ratio and the suppression of complication of the game. Here, the entrance of the winning opening is a passing surface of a game ball composed of the winning opening and a game nail or the like connected to the winning opening (a game nail or the like which is continuously arranged so that the game ball cannot pass between them). Of these, it refers to the part farthest from the winning opening. The size of the entrance of the winning opening when the accessory does not operate (the maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board D35 among the entrances of the winning opening, and when it is set by the game nail, the nail and the nail It is desirable to configure the method so that it does not exceed 13 mm, and the size of the entrance of the winning opening of the variable winning device (electric accessory or non-electric accessory) other than the large winning opening (as described above). It is desirable that it does not exceed 55 mm. In addition, it is desirable that the size of the entrance of the large winning opening (the maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board) exceeds 55 mm and does not exceed 135 mm in order to distinguish it from other accessories.

Further, the size of the gate (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) that normally triggers the operation of the symbol display device (the gate and the game nails connected to the gate, etc. The maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board D35 at the position farthest from the gate, that is, the actual entrance of the gate) does not exceed 13 mm among the passing surfaces of the game balls composed of the game nails, etc. It is desirable to do so.

In the ninth embodiment, two large winning openings (two, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) are provided, but the number should not exceed two from the viewpoint of gambling. It is desirable to configure in. Further, as in the ninth embodiment, it is desirable to have a structure in which the two large winning openings are clearly physically separated regardless of whether they are open or not. Further, it is desirable that the game ball can pass between the two large winning openings without the two large winning openings being horizontally adjacent to each other as in the ninth embodiment. Further, in the ninth embodiment, two starting ports, a first main game starting port A10 and a second main game starting port B10, are provided, but the number of general winning openings (general winning openings in the ninth embodiment). It is desirable that the number does not exceed 3 in consideration of the balance with (4 is provided).

A movable object may be provided in the starting port, and the movement of the game ball that has already won a prize in the starting port may be changed by the movable object. In this case, it is desirable that the movable object has a structure in which a constant operation is constantly continued (including a device that repeats a series of operations) and the operation cannot be adjusted.

Further, as described above, a large number of game nails and the like are arranged in the game area D30, and although this arrangement causes the falling of the game ball to be irregular within a certain range, it should not be extremely irregular. Is desirable. Specifically, when the game ball collides with an electric or other power source (a windmill or other device for changing the direction of the game ball's fall, the game ball moves in a direction different from the direction of the fall. Devices that raise the game ball by (excluding changes) (excluding those that raise the game ball only slightly and that clearly do not make the direction of the game ball fall significantly irregular), etc. were fired. Since the order of the game balls and the order of entering the winning or out opening may be significantly different, it is desirable not to provide such a device. The game nails and the windmill are driven into the game board approximately vertically (about ± 5 degrees). Needless to say, the game nails and other structures provided on the game board are durable enough that the shape and the like do not change due to the collision of the game balls (for example, the Vickers hardness of the game nails of this example is 150 Hv to 230 Hv). Made of brass.) Is secured.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 141. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall game operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). Mainly the main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the pachinko machine, and the sub-main control unit SM that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device S40 that gives interest to the game content. The sub-sub control unit SS that executes the effect display, the error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs and notifies the occurrence of the error, the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prize ball according to the winning of each winning opening. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with a payout unit KE10 or the like for paying out game balls supplied from the tank KT to the upper ball plate D20, an error release switch KH3a for clearing a predetermined error, and a prize ball payout. The prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout operation by the unit KE10, the error display KH3 that displays the occurrence status of the error related to the payout (for example, 7-segment display), and the prize ball that controls the payout operation by the payout unit KE10. The payout control board KH, the launching device D42 that launches the game balls (storage balls) of the upper ball plate D20 one by one to the game area D30, the launching control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and the pachinko gaming machine. A power supply unit E for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine, a power switch Ea for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, and the like are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (opposite to the game side).

Further, on the main control board M, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the left general winning opening P10, the right general winning opening P20, the first major winning opening C10, and the second major winning opening A ball entry status display device J10 capable of displaying the entry status of a game ball into a winning opening such as C20 is provided, and four-digit 8-segment indicators are arranged and attached in a horizontal row. The ball entry status display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the back side direction, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with the key possessed by the game hall side to unlock the door unit. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check the boards. As an example of the ball entry status displayed on the ball entry status display device J10, the section information based on the total number of outs and the base ratio (value calculated by "(low probability payout number / low probability out number) x 100"). ) Etc. can be mentioned. The ROM / RAM area for executing the process of step 1550-10 and the ROM / RAM area for executing the process of steps 1000-1 to 3500 are configured to be different areas (addresses do not overlap with each other). You may.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment and the operating principle for paying out the game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) KE10m that is driven at the time of payout. Then, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 142, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to the stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters the winning opening in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and the prize ball signal is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH. do. Alternatively, a game ball lending device such as a card unit R requests ball lending to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes the payout of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 143, the rotation of the stepping motor KE10m causes the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) to rotate, and the game ball is moved. One ball is paid out one by one. Further, the paid-out game balls are detected by the payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. It should be added that the cross sections CC are shown along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easy to see) as shown in the figure.

Further, the lower part of FIG. 142 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (payout motor position sensor) KE10ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (one example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photosensor that has a pair of measuring units and detects an object between the measuring units by transmitting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measurement units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are arranged so as to sandwich the rotation confirmation member KE10p3. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six recesses formed along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part, it is turned on (the state in the lower part of FIG. 142).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 144. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment pays out game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Various effects on the display device S40 such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH and the main control board M, and the sound from the speaker D24. , The sub-control board S that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc. (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) and these. It is mainly composed of a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board of the above. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device S40 such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. It is provided with two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device S40. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.), and a backup area (and backup power supply) for holding information in the event of a power failure. ing.

Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined. First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s, second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, first 1 large prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning opening winning ball detection device P11s}, drive solenoid (described above, 1st large winning opening electric accessory solenoid C13, 1st Game peripherals (first main game peripherals A, first in the figure) that are essential input / output devices for the progress of the game, such as two major winning openings, electric accessory solenoid C23, etc. 2 Main game peripheral device B, 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H) are electrically connected, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signal from each input device. .. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the above and the like can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 144, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub The main control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. Further, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information (output to the hall computer HC side) via the external relay terminal board G. One-way communication) is possible.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a game ball lending request to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R (sometimes referred to as a card unit R) for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the ninth embodiment, the control circuit unit (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching device D42 are provided. It is also connected to (launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc.). In the ninth embodiment, the gaming ball lending device R is separated and adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. In that case, the prize ball payout control board KH is used. Lending control and management control of recording media for lending such as electronic money may be supervised.

Here, when it is detected (touch detection) that the player directly operates the launch handle D44, the launch device D42 determines the launch intensity (launch position) based on the amount of operation of the launch handle, and the game area D30. It is configured so that the game balls can be fired one by one toward any position of, and even if the game balls are fired continuously, the counter and timer are prevented so that the game balls cannot be fired more than 100 pieces per minute. The game balls are configured to be fired at regular intervals (for example, 599.9 ms / piece). In other words, the game balls are always fired at regular intervals (the rate of fire does not differ) regardless of the game state such as the probability fluctuation game state or the game state such as whether or not a special game is executed. As a result, the player's rate of fire is appropriately reflected regardless of the state of the game. More specifically, when the player desires a right-handed strike, the right-handed strike can be performed by operating the firing handle D44 at a position corresponding to the firing strength at which the right-handed strike can be performed, and the player can perform the right-handed strike. If you want, you can perform left-handed strike by operating the launch handle D44 at a position corresponding to the launch strength that allows left-handed strike, and whether or not a special game is being executed is a game. Regardless of the state of, the game ball can be launched with the firing intensity based on the operation of the constant firing handle D44.

The launch handle D44 is provided with a launch stop switch (not shown) so that the player can stop the launch of the game ball at an arbitrary timing (the launch can be performed in units of one ball). ing. Specifically, even when the player is operating the launch handle D44 (it is detected that the launch handle D44 is directly operated (touch detection)), the launch stop switch is operated to control the game ball. It is possible to stop the launch. Here, the "direct operation" means that a part of the player's body is used to come into contact with the gaming machine to play the game. Further, in this example, from the viewpoint of gambling, the launch motor and the launch handle (strength adjustment) so that the performance of the launch device D42 does not change over a predetermined period or due to external noise and the durability is ensured. Function), the control circuit of the launcher is designed respectively. Further, it is desirable that the launch handle D44 is not provided with a function of vibrating the launch handle D44 so as not to hinder the player from adjusting the launch position.

Further, the portion of the launching device D42, which is the entire device related to the launching of the gaming ball, that gives kinetic energy to the gaming ball is composed of one launching motor. Further, the firing intensity of the firing handle D44 returns to 0 when the player is not directly operating it (so that it is urged in the reference position direction by a spring or the like and returns to the reference position when the hand is released from the firing handle D44). The strength adjustment skill of the player can be reflected in the game result.

In this example, the game ball used is a ball having a diameter of 11 mm and a mass of 5.4 g or more and 5.7 g or less.

Next, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device S40 for displaying decorative symbols and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other drive devices for effect (not shown, but so-called effect). It is connected to the motor / solenoid of the movable body accessory. Further, by executing a predetermined operation (long press or press), the start or end of the measurement of the base value, the execution of the predetermined effect, the start of the display of the maintenance mode, etc. can be executed by the sub input button SB. Is also connected to the sub-control board S. Further, it can be determined that the sub-input button SB has been operated by the detection by the sub-input button detection device SBs. In the ninth embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect. (Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device S40 are performed, and the sub-sub control unit SS controls the display (substantial display control) on the effect display device S40. It is configured to be done. In the ninth embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (as a separate board). It may be configured, but by configuring it so as to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring and the like). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Further, the electronic value may be given without giving the physical prize ball as the prize ball.

Next, the flow path of the game ball provided for the game will be described with reference to the flow path image diagram of the game ball in the lower part of the figure. In the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment, the gaming balls launched into the gaming area D30 are each entry port {1st main game start port A10, 2nd main game start port B10, 1st grand prize opening C10, The ball enters any of the second major winning opening C20, the general winning opening P10, and the out opening C80}, passes through the entry sensor corresponding to each entry opening, and is guided into the gaming machine (inside the gaming machine frame D). NS. Here, the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 passes through the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. After that, all the game balls guided into the game machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged to the outside of the game machine. Although not particularly shown in this example, a switch for confirming ball entry {each entry port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, first major winning opening C10, first It is a switch through which a game ball that has entered the two major winning openings C20 (general winning opening) passes, and has one or more switches that are different from the switch for detecting the entry into each entry opening}. It is assumed that

Next, FIG. 145 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process shown in FIG. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the initial settings are performed (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the manager of the amusement park or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1015. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1007, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power is normally turned off is not stored in the RAM. In the case of Yes in step 1007, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is stored in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1007, that is, information indicating that the power was normally turned off is stored in the RAM, or No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, The CPU MC of the main control board M acquires various information commands stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M at the time of power failure, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are input to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or a command may be set at the relevant timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and the main control may be performed in step 1014-1. The CPUMC of the board M is set to return the solenoid {the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, the big winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). In order to return the open or closed state of the above to the state before the power was cut off, it is judged whether or not the solenoid operation bit is on in the order of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, the big prize opening, and the movable piece, and then turned on. In that case, store the solenoid operation flag at the corresponding address (in order to determine that the 2nd main game start port / big winning opening / movable piece is open and open it again before the power is turned off). The process proceeds to step 1015. In step 1015, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the information indicating that the power has been turned on normally in the RAM, and proceeds to the process of step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the figure (b) is executed}, and the process in step 1018 is performed. Transition. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment processes) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the input process described later in step 1000-1. Next, in step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number update processes described later. Next, in step 1000-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the initial value update type random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the initial value random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the timer subtraction process described later. Next, in step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a start port 2 valid period setting process (a process of setting the valid period of the second main game start port B10), which will be described later. Next, in step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the winning monitoring process described later. Next, in step 3000, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. When a game ball wins in each winning opening, the number of winning balls paid out is 4 for the 1st main game starting port A10, 1 for the 2nd main game starting port B10, 1 ball for the 1st major winning opening C10, and 2nd. The large winning opening C20 has 13 balls, the left general winning opening (sometimes also called the general winning opening) P10 has 3 balls, and the right general winning opening P20 has 2 balls. The number of prize balls paid out is an example, and the number of prize balls paid out is different between the case of entering the first main game start port A10 and the case of entering the second main game start port B10. Alternatively, the number of prize balls paid out may be different between the case where the ball is entered in the first prize opening C10 and the case where the ball is entered in the second prize opening C20. When a game ball enters the left general winning opening P10, a lottery such as a winning / losing lottery is not executed, and a predetermined number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. In addition, when a game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, a random number on the auxiliary game side is acquired and a predetermined number of prize balls paid out (2 balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. However, the number of prize balls in all the winning openings provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example does not exceed 15 for one winning (winning ball), and is constant (abnormal) regardless of the gaming state. (Except when it is invalidated due to circumstances or an error is occurring), and it is configured so that prize balls are not paid out except for winning, while realizing various gaming states. , The result of the direct game is summarized in "whether or not the launched game ball wins a predetermined winning opening".

In this example, since the specific prize ball payout control process is performed not by the main control board M but by the prize ball payout control board KH, the main control board M manages the progress of the payout control in real time. It is difficult to do so, and if there is an obstacle due to a sudden matter such as a power outage during the payout for winning one game ball, it may not be possible to obtain an accurate number of prize balls. Therefore, in this example, the retry function at the time of abnormality in which the game ball is paid out again for the prize (for example, when the game ball wins the first main game start port A10 and one game ball is paid out) It has a function of executing the payout of the remaining three game balls after the power is turned off and then the power is restored. Of course, by adding a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to realize an accurate number of prize ball payouts even when such an abnormality occurs. In this case, retry at the time of abnormality is possible. It is not necessary to provide a function.

Next, in step 2000, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the large winning opening validity period setting process. Next, in step 1550, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1550-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the game state display process. Next, in step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the handle state signal inspection process. Next, in step 1550-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the out port monitoring process. Next, in step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the LED output process. Next, in step 1900, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the fraud detection information management process described later. Next, in step 1950, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the error management process described later. Next, in step 1550-7, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the emission control signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the test signal output process. Next, in step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the solenoid output process. Next, in step 1999, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side). Next, in step 3500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the external signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the ball entry state control process. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to allow the generation of the timer interrupt, and returns to the process executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process.

The input process is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal. In this example, the input process is attached to the game board surface. Switches (for example, the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, the first major winning opening winning detection device C11s, Second major winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device, etc.), out ball count switch that detects entry into the out port D36, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, opening signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18) Etc.), magnetic detection signal 1 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 1), radio wave detection signal, impact detection signal, touch state signal and magnetic detection signal 2 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 2) are monitored. .. In this example, for a special input such as a RAM clear switch, an input determination or the like is performed by a process different from the input process.

Note that the various random number update processes are processes in which the random numbers used in the lottery, which has an extremely low effect on the payout, are updated relatively simply (for example, a constant is added). In this example, the normal symbol variation pattern random numbers are used. (For example, the auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number) and the variation pattern random number (for example, the variation mode lottery random number) are updated.

The initial value update type random number update process is a process for updating a random number used in a lottery that affects the number of balls to a certain extent (a process different from the above-mentioned various random number update processes), and in this example, it is a process. , Ordinary symbol per random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random number), normal symbol symbol random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number), special symbol symbol random number (for example, symbol lottery random number), soft random number per special symbol described later, etc. It is a process for updating.

The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number updated by the initial value update type random number update process used in the lottery in which the above-mentioned influence on the payout occurs to some extent. As an example of the random number to be updated in this example, an initial value random number per ordinary symbol, an initial value random number of the ordinary symbol symbol, an initial value random number of the special symbol symbol, a soft initial value random number per the special symbol, and the like can be exemplified. The initial value random number per ordinary symbol and the initial value random number of the ordinary symbol symbol are random numbers updated by the initial value random number update process when a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers are configured.

The timer subtraction process includes a 2-byte timer (for example, a timer MP11t-C for managing fluctuations in the first and second main game symbols, an electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B for the second main game start port, and a timer MP34t for special games. , Open time timer, etc.) is updated.

Further, the start port 2 validity period setting process is a winning opening that facilitates winning by operating the ordinary electric accessory depending on the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d). (For example, it is a process of setting the validity period of the second main game start port B10).

The winning monitoring process is a process of updating the pass counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and requesting the transmission of a command to be transmitted to the effect control board.

Further, the large winning opening valid period setting process is a process of saving the result of determining the valid period of the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). When the specific area C22 is configured to be included in the large winning opening as in the tenth embodiment described later, the result of the valid period determination of the specific area C22 is saved by the large winning opening valid period setting process. You may.

The abnormality detection process is a process of monitoring magnetism, monitoring disconnection / short circuit / power supply, monitoring radio waves, monitoring the open / closed state of the glass frame set / game board D35, monitoring impact, and the like. ..

In addition, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality when the game ball enters various entry ports (for example, the first main game start port A10), so that each switch level is used. It is a process of monitoring the continuous on-time of the ball (continuous on-time of the ball entry sensor).

Further, the game status display process is displayed on the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated (the number of execution rounds in the jackpot), the error status, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol display device (auxiliary game symbol display device H20). The current number of auxiliary game hold balls) and the number of operation hold balls of the special symbol display device (current number of main game hold balls displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20). This is a process for making a display request.

Further, the handle state signal inspection process is a process for monitoring the touch state of the launch handle (for example, the launch handle D44).

Further, the out port monitoring process is a process of monitoring the out port (for example, the out port D36) in order to create a security output request.

Further, the LED output processing is a display on the special symbol display device (for example, a display of the first main game symbol on the first main game symbol display device A20, a display of the second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20). , Display of the number of operation-holding balls on the first main game side in the first main game symbol display device A20, display of the number of operation-holding balls on the second main game side in the second main game symbol display device B20), normal symbol display device (Display of auxiliary symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of the number of operation-holding balls on the auxiliary game side on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20), error status display, game status display, and separate display (for example). , Display that the situation should be right-handed, left-handed) and the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously (display the number of rounds in the jackpot), so the display is initialized. This is a process for sequentially controlling the LED output controlled on the main control board M side such as the output of display data.

Further, the launch control signal output process is a process of outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting the launch of the game ball, and the details will be described later.

The test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the gaming machine and outputting it to a corresponding output port.

Further, the solenoid output processing is a solenoid of an ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) and a large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) solenoid. This is a process for outputting output data. When a shielding member (upper shielding member C24, lower shielding member C25) is provided in the large winning opening as in the fourth embodiment described later, the output data of the movable piece solenoid is output by the solenoid output processing. To execute.

Further, in the ball entry state control process, the calculation of the base value for displaying on the ball entry state display device J10, the storage of the calculation result, the display control of the calculation result, and the like are executed. At this time, when the setting changing means described later is provided, the normal prize ball counter value, the normal out number counter value, the total out number counter value, the final base value of the immediately preceding section, etc. are stored for each set value. , It is also possible to configure the ball entry status display device to display the ball. More specifically, when the power is turned on, the performance of the gaming machine corresponding to the current setting (for example, the jackpot winning probability and the number of winning balls of each winning opening) is read, and the storage area corresponding to the current setting (for example). , Normal time prize ball counter value, normal time out number counter value, total out number counter value, storage area for storing the final base value of the immediately preceding section, etc.) is set. Then, the receipt state information is generated and displayed based on the value stored in each storage area. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately generate and display the ball entry state information (for example, the base value) for each setting. Further, the ball entry status information to be displayed on the ball entry status display device is configured to be switched by operating the dedicated ball entry status display switching button or by operating the setting change button (for example,). When the current setting is 1, when the ball entry status display switching button is operated once, the ball entry status information of setting 2 is displayed, and when it is operated once more, the ball entry status information of setting 3 is displayed. By displaying), the latest information for each setting may be confirmed. Here, when using the setting change button, a configuration using the above-mentioned setting key (for example, turning the power on and turning the setting key counterclockwise) so that the setting is not changed by operating the setting change button. It is preferable that the display contents are switched by operating the setting change button in the state of being in the state). When the display of the ball entry status information is switched by the ball entry status display switching button or the setting change button, the display may be returned to the current setting display after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, FIG. 147 is a main flowchart showing the flow of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power interruption) performed by the main control board M. First, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing shown in FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer is interrupted. In the case of Yes in step 1019-1, in step 1019-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power has been turned on normally is not stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-1, the process of step 1019-1 is performed again. In the case of Yes in step 1019-2, in step 1019-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the information indicating that the power is cut off abnormally in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-2, in step 1019-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power is normally cut off in the RAM, and in step 1020, of the main control board M. The CPUMC sets the power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing. Although an example of executing the power interruption process (FIG. 147) by inputting the power interruption signal to the NMI terminal of the CPU has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power interruption signal is input to a specific input port. It may be set and the power failure may be determined and the power failure process may be performed by monitoring a specific input port in the main control board side main process (FIG. 145) or the timer interrupt process (FIG. 146).

Next, FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. 146. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes the payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes the payout control board reception control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 149 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. 146. First, in step 3105, the CPUMC of the main control board M then determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not the payout is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an unpaid prize ball (a prize ball for which the prize ball payout command has not yet been transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH side). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an error that is inappropriate for paying out the prize ball. , Ball out error, etc.) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M is issued a prize ball payout command for the number of prize ball payouts corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed this time (see FIG. 151). ) Is set. Then, in step 3125, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time, and executes a process of shifting the subsequent information. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and shifts to the next process (counter-payment control board reception control process in step 3200). do. In addition, even when No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information sent and received between the main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. 150. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the ninth embodiment includes specific information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls, for example, 0 (0000B) means 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111A) means 15 prize balls. ..

Next, the payout-related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M side will be described. Here, as an example, the payout-related information (prize ball payout-related information or payout abnormality-related information) includes a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, and payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, saucer full tank error, and prize ball payout completion information. Here, the details of each error content will be described later, but if the bit corresponding to each error is "0", it means that the error has not occurred, and if it is "1", the error is concerned. Means that is occurring. Note that bit 0 is related to the completion of prize ball payout, "0" means that the prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that the prize ball payout is not completed.

Next, FIG. 151 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. 146. First, in step 3205, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout-related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M has error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) in the received payout related information. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error to send the error information on the prize ball payout control board KH side to the main control board M side. But manage (centralized management). On the other hand, if No in step 3210, in step 3220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Then, in step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout-related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (prize ball payout command related to the completion of this payout), and the next process (step 3500). Process). Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 152 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered (inflowed, passed in the case of a gate) into the auxiliary game starting port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits an auxiliary game start port entry command, which is a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10, to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 of the above (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the process of step 1110. On the other hand, if No in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the right general winning opening P20. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the right general winning opening ball entry command, which is a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the right general winning opening P20, to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. Even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1110, in step 1112, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding balls in the form of being set in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on the number of holdings, and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 1200). In addition, even if No in step 1104 and step 1110, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Here, in the ninth embodiment, it is configured so that a random number on the auxiliary game side can be acquired when the ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 or the right general winning opening P20. Further, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (passes through the auxiliary game start port H10) will continue to flow down the game board surface and the auxiliary game start. While it is possible to enter a ball entering a ball opening (right general winning opening P20, etc.) downstream of the opening H10, a game ball entering the right general winning opening P20 flows down to the back of the game board surface, and thereafter other It is configured not to enter the ball entrance. Although the details will be described later, even if the game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 (the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10), the prize ball is not paid out, but the right general prize opening P20 It is configured so that the prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the ball.

Next, FIG. 153 is a flowchart of the ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. 146. First, in step 2150, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game start port entry ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2350, the ball entry determination means executes the first (second) large winning opening ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the general winning opening ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the discharge ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the out-port / in-ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the prize ball determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 154 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2152, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s). When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10). In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag. Next, in step 2158, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200).

On the other hand, if No in step 2152, in step 2160, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s for the detection end time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device). When the H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s). In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). Even if No in step 2154 or 2160, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 155 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first main game start port entry detection device A11s for the entry detection time (the time or more, the first main game start opening entry). When the ball detection device A11s detects the input, it is determined whether or not the ball detection device A11s is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the first main game start port A10). In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start port detection continuation flag.

Next, in step 2212-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). Judge whether or not. The non-time reduction game state may be the case where the main game time reduction flag is off, or the auxiliary game time reduction flag may be off (when the open extension function of the electric accessory is not activated). Further, the time shortening game state may be the case where the main game time reduction flag is on, or the auxiliary game time reduction flag may be on (when the opening extension function of the electric accessory is activated). In the case of Yes in step 2212-1, in step 2212-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting port entry number counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2222.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2213, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the ball entry counter MJ10c for the detection time (the first main game start port entry detection device A11s inputs for that time or longer). If is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first main game start port input ball detection device A11s). Next, in step 2214, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the long-time detection flag of the first main game start port, and proceeds to step 2222. In addition, even if No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2, or step 2213, the process proceeds to step 2222.

Next, in step 2222, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the input from the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s as the ball entry detection time (more than that time, When the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the second main game start opening B10 is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the second main game start opening B10). In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the second main game start port. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, in step 2230, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start port detection continuation flag.

Next, in step 2231-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting port entry number counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2240. As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition). When a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 when the device operation flag is off), 1 is added to the counter value of the start port entry number counter MJ12c. It is configured as.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the second main game start port B10 is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first in step 2232. 2 It is determined that there is an illegal entry in the main game start port B10, an illegal entry command for the second main game start port (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2240. In addition, even if No in step 2231-1, step 2231-2 or step 2224, the process proceeds to step 2240.

On the other hand, if No in step 2222, in step 2233, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the second main game start port entry detection device B11s for the detection time (the time or more, the second main game start port entry). When the ball detection device B11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s). In the case of Yes in step 2233, in step 2234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2238, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2240. Even if No in step 2233, the process proceeds to step 2240.

Next, in step 2240, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the illegal detection time (detected as a normal ball entry) by the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s (second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s). It is a time that exceeds the time to be performed, and it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time for determining that fraud is being performed). In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game start port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). On the other hand, even if No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2350).

Next, FIG. 156 is a flowchart of the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first winning opening winning detection device C11s (second winning opening winning detection device C21s) for the winning ball detection time (the time). As described above, when the ball entry detection device detects the input, it is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the ball entry port). In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the first (second) grand prize opening. In the case of Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2360, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2370.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2355 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the large winning opening is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M is illegal in the large winning opening in step 2361. It is determined that there was a good ball entry, the first (second) large winning opening illegal entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2370. Even if No in step 2354, the process proceeds to step 2320.

On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2362, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first winning opening winning detection device C11s (second winning opening winning detection device C21s) for the detection time {the time. As described above, when the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s (the second major winning opening winning detection device C21s) does not detect the input, the game ball is the first grand winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second winning opening winning detection device C11s). It is determined whether or not it is OFF for a time} or more when it is considered that the passage of the detection device C21s) has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2368, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the long-time detection flag of the first (second) grand prize opening, and proceeds to step 2370.

Next, in step 2370, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) for the illegal detection time {the time or more, the first large When the winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second major winning opening winning detection device C21s) detects an input, the time for considering that an illegal entry into the first winning opening C10 (the second major winning opening C20) is detected. } Determine whether or not it is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) large winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400). On the other hand, even if No in step 2370, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 157 is a flowchart of the general winning opening winning ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 153. The general winning opening P10 (the left general winning opening P10 and the right general winning opening P20 may be collectively referred to as the general winning opening P10) pays out the winning ball when the game ball enters. , General winning opening ball entry detection device P11s (9th embodiment), which is a ball entry port that does not affect the progress of the game (does not execute a lottery that affects the progress of the game) and is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball. In the general winning opening ball detection device P11s, which is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the left general winning opening P10, and a general winning sensor, which is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the right general winning opening P20. It has two general winning mouth-entry ball detection devices P11s with the mouth-entry ball detection device P11s).

First, in step 2402, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the general winning opening ball detection device for the entry detection time (the general winning opening ball detection device detects the input for that time or longer). Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the general winning opening). If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2410, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2411-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2411-2, in step 2411-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the general ball entry counter MJ13c, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the general winning opening ball detection device for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the general winning opening ball detecting device inputs. If is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the general winning opening ball entry detection device). In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2420. In addition, even if No in step 2404, step 2411-1, 2411-2 or step 2412, the process proceeds to step 2420. As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition). When a game ball enters the general winning opening P10 when the device operation flag is off), 1 is added to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c.

Next, in step 2420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning opening ball detection device is an illegal detection time {when the general winning opening ball detecting device detects the input for that time or longer, the general winning opening is won. It is determined whether or not the time is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the mouth is detected. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the ejection ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the emission confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the total emission when the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is the input ball detection time (when the total emission confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for that time or longer). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered). In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2600).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M did not detect the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s during the detection end time (the total emission confirmation sensor C90s did not detect the input for that time or longer). In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 159 is a flowchart of the out-port / in-ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the out port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the input from the out-port entry ball detection device C80s is the input ball detection time (the out-port entry ball detection device C80s detects the input for that time or longer). Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the out port C80). In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out port detection continuation flag and proceeds to the process of step 2620.

On the other hand, if No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the out-port in-ball detection device C80s for the detection end time (the out-port in-ball detection device C80s inputs the input for that time or longer). If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the out-mouth / in-ball detection device C80s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2615, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, even if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process proceeds to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out-port entry ball detection device C80s is an illegal detection time (when the out-port entry ball detection device C80s has detected the input for that time or longer). , It is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the out port C80 has been performed). In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700). On the other hand, even if No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the first main game start port A10. to add. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to pay out the prize balls related to the first main game start port A10, and steps 2712. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the second main game start port B10. to add. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to pay out the prize balls related to the second main game start port B10, and steps 2722. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2722.

Next, in step 2722, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) grand prize opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) grand prize opening entry flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out related to the first prize opening C10 (second prize opening C20) (13 in this example). ) Is added. Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M pays out the prize balls related to the first prize opening C10 (second prize opening C20) (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732.

Next, in step 2732, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2734, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information to pay out the prize balls related to the general winning opening (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out), and next processing (step 1100). Process). On the other hand, even if No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1100).

Next, FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) and sets the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining the auxiliary game symbol. Refer to it and determine the stop symbol based on the acquired game status of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, it is compared with the case where it is off. Then, the winning symbol is selected with high probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbols are "D0, D1, D2", and the stop symbols that are the hit symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the fact that each of them has stopped. In the non-time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing), and the electric accessory is stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 0.8 seconds → opening for 2.0 seconds, closing) (maximum opening). Further, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed), and the game is stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → closed). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time reduction game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time reduction game.

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol variation time to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M, and assists. After starting the game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, the auxiliary game symbol variation display is started on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. do. Then, in step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a “hit” (D1 and D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens for 1 second → closes for 1 second in the opening mode (for example, in the case of the hit symbol “D1”, based on the hit symbol on the auxiliary game side. → Open for 1 second → Close for 1 second → Open for 1 second → Closed, in the case of the hit symbol “D2”, open for 0.2 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds,) Is determined, and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory is set in the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and proceeds to step 1242. Even if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242. In the ninth embodiment, when the main game time reduction flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is the predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for continuing to open the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is the longest. It is configured.

Next, in step 1242, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory with reference to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, turns off the electric accessory opening flag, and performs the next process. (Processing in step 1300).

If No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 and step 1242, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms has elapsed (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining the success or failure of the auxiliary game, an auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number for determining the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and an auxiliary game symbol. Auxiliary game symbol variation mode random numbers and the like for determining the fluctuation time of the above may be provided.

Although not shown, in the one-time opening operation of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d (opening operation based on the stop of the symbol per auxiliary game), the game is played at the second main game starting port B10. Even when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are entered, the opening operation of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is terminated, that is, the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on). ), If the opening (longest opening) of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is executed, "open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → The opening time of "opening → closing for 4 seconds" ends, or during the opening period of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are placed in the second main game starting port B10. The opening (opening period) of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is configured to be completed by the achievement of the earlier of the cases when the ball enters the ball. In addition, when the second main game start port electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is opened (maximum open) in the non-time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag off), " The opening time of "opening for 0.2 seconds-> closing for 0.8 seconds-> opening for 2.0 seconds-> closing" ends, or during the opening period of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, The opening (opening period) of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is configured to be completed by achieving the earlier of the cases where the game ball (10 balls) enters the second main game starting port B10. ing. In addition, the total time during which the normal electric accessory is open at the maximum opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time-reduced game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on) is 4.2 seconds, which is non-existent. The total time during which the normal electric accessory is open at the maximum opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag off) is 2.2 seconds, and any game Even in the state, it is configured so that the maximum opening time of one time does not exceed 6 seconds, and each game state (time shortening game state) so that the maximum number of winnings during operation does not exceed approximately 10. (Whether it is a non-time reduction game state).

Further, in this example, when the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the operation of the normal electric accessory (second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is confirmed and displayed in the hit mode, it is immediately (for example, for example). It is configured to operate (within 500 ms, which is shorter than the shortest symbol fluctuation time in the gaming machine), and it is possible to clearly correspond to which trigger the ordinary electric accessory is operating. In addition, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning during the closing operation (during the operation of opening → closing) of the ordinary electric accessory (second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the ordinary electric accessory The drive source (solenoid) is selected so that the object (second main game start port electric accessory B11d) returns to the inactive state in a short time, and the game ball wins more than necessary and the ball is ejected. It does not differ significantly from the design.

Next, FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1302, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the first main game start port entry information from the first main game start port entry detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues the first main game start port entry command, which is a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the first main game start port A10, to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the main game (particularly the first main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / failing lottery random number for determining the winning / failing, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variable mode lottery random numbers for the purpose are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (hold generation command) to the effect that the first main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

The winning / failing lottery random number may be composed of one random number or may be a random number generated by two or more random numbers. Random numbers generated by two or more random numbers include a CPU built-in random number that is updated based on the CPU clock or an external clock, and a soft random number per special symbol (main game symbol) that is updated by timer interrupt processing. You may use the result of calculation (for example, addition) of.

Next, in step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start port entry information from the second main game start port entry detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (particularly the second main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the ninth embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a winning / failing lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the case of the first main game side. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random numbers in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (hold generation command) to the effect that the second main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). If No in steps 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312, and if No in steps 1312 and 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

Next, FIG. 163 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {processes of steps 1400 (1) and (2). }. On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {steps 1400 (1), (2). Process}.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the reserved ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the first main game symbol). It is configured to prioritize the hold digestion of the second main game symbol (even if the hold comes first), but it is not limited to this (hold digestion based on the winning order and both main game symbols at the same time). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery that draws in parallel).

Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 163. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbol is not changing, and the main game symbol is held. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the fixed variable time. May be configured so as not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number related to the current symbol variation ( The second main game content determination random number) is read, deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and the remaining hold information temporarily stored is shifted (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each game state, and refers to the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, Based on the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol winning / failing lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 165 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table (second main game winning / failing lottery table). As shown in this example, in the ninth embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), and the main game symbol winning / failing result and the first A stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number), and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

Here, FIG. 165 (main game symbol 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the ninth embodiment, when a big hit is won, among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). It is configured so that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, 5B, and 10R for 7A, 7B. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. May}.

Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and refers to the main game symbol. The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), and these are determined in the RAM area of the main control board M. Temporarily store in, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 165 is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this figure, in the ninth embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol with respect to a certain random number value can be determined based on the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol and the main game time reduction flag state. It is configured. For example, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit for a certain random number value, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction). In the game state), it is configured so that the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short can be easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selectivity, and the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {symbol variation on the second main game side. When is configured to be advantageous to the player, it is easy for the second main game side to hold the game by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}.

Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives commands (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. A command related to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M is for command transmission for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is completed to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, in step 1500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 166 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 164. First, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1510, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In addition, even if No in step 1506, step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). As described above, in this example, the remaining time reduction number (the remaining symbol variation number in which the time shortening game state ends depending on the symbol variation end number after the end of the special game) is transmitted to the sub-control board S. Has been done.

Next, FIG. 167 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. If No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is just before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, the set opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes a plurality of times) is set in step 1614. Next, in step 1616, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to make the first large winning opening. The winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning games, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, the second winning opening C20) is inserted into the first winning opening C10 (or the second winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (10 balls). If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, if No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and determines the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening. ) Has passed or not. In the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). 1st big winning opening C10 (or 2nd big winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, it is determined whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect that the special game is ended (special game end display instruction command) to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, in step 1650, the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

In this example, the maximum number of winnings of the game balls set on the program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set as 10, and when the maximum number of winnings is reached. Controls the large winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) to be closed immediately, and prevents the winning of game balls exceeding the maximum number of winnings, while the ball is squeezed (large). Even if the maximum number of winnings is exceeded due to an unforeseen situation such as the game ball temporarily stopping between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the winning opening, the specified conditions (within the specified period after closing) Only in the case of, the prizes exceeding the maximum number of prizes are treated as valid prizes.

More specifically, when the first big winning opening C10 is opened in the first round of the big hit, and when a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) is won in the first big winning opening C10 in the first round, the first The first round will be completed, but in the situation where 9 game balls have entered the 1st prize opening C10 in the 1st round, the 10th ball and 11 will enter the 1st prize opening C10. Even if the number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) at which the first round ends due to the occurrence of the balls entering the ball substantially at the same time enters the first large winning opening C10. It is configured to pay out the prize balls with the winning as valid. On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and opening / closing part (door, etc.) of the big prize opening are closed and the big prize opening is executed in real time so as to prevent excessive winning (winning exceeding the maximum number of prizes). Is closed, and structural design and electrical design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in or near the opening / closing member immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while suppressing the game performance from being different from the ball ejection design value.

In addition, the maximum opening time set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set to be 30 seconds or less throughout one unit game, and is large before the maximum opening time elapses. When the number of winning game balls to the winning opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the large winning opening is controlled to be closed immediately, and after the maximum opening time elapses, the winning of the game ball is blocked, while the ball Even if a prize is won after the maximum opening time has elapsed due to an unforeseen situation such as (the game ball temporarily stops between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the large winning opening), the specified conditions (after closing) Only within a predetermined period), the prize is treated as a valid prize.

More specifically, as an opening mode of the big winning opening when executing one round in the big hit, "15 seconds open → 2 seconds closed → depending on the type of big hit and the number of unit games (number of execution rounds)". One of multiple operation patterns such as "14.5 seconds open → close", "29.5 seconds open → close", etc. is set, but the big prize opening is set regardless of the operation pattern. It is configured so that the total opening time is 30 seconds or less, the maximum opening time (29.5 seconds) of the big winning opening has passed in one round, and the game ball is being closed during the closing process of the big winning opening. Even if the ball is entered, the prize ball is paid out with the winning valid within the valid period (about 1000 ms after the closing process of the large winning opening). On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (door, etc.) of the big prize opening are closed by executing the closing process and closing the big prize opening in real time so as to suppress the winning after the lapse of the maximum opening time. However, structural design and electrical design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in or near the opening / closing member immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while suppressing the game performance from being different from the ball ejection design value.

Next, FIG. 168 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 167. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that shifts to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game, and in this example, " 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B ") is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag and proceeds to step 1656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652 (in this example, the non-probability variable jackpot symbol, which is the jackpot symbol that shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the special game, is the stop symbol, and in this example, "4A". (In the case of "4B"), the process proceeds to step 1656. Next, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Further, in this example, the electric support game state (time for opening the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory, time until opening, the number of times of opening, etc., and the ordinary electric accessory are activated only based on the end of the big hit. It is a state in which the probability that the combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed is changed so as to facilitate winning, and it may be referred to as a time-shortened game state or an auxiliary game time-shortened game state). The state is until the main game symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (predetermined time of the main game symbol), except during the probability fluctuation of the special symbol (when the probability variation game state). Is limited to (until the end of the fluctuation). Furthermore, the number of game balls acquired in combination with the winning of other winning openings is approximately the same as the number of fired game balls (the ball output rate does not exceed 1) or less. The ball ejection design in the state (the arrangement of each winning opening, the operation content of the ordinary electric accessory, the hit probability of the auxiliary game symbol, etc. are designed), and the ball ejection performance in the electric support game state is the ball ejection performance of the big hit game. It is designed not to be higher than the performance. With this configuration, the game related to the main game symbol and the game related to the auxiliary game symbol become a master-slave relationship in the game, and the game is not complicated more than necessary.

Next, FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time saving flag, auxiliary game time saving flag). Next, in step 1558, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 170 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). It is a process executed in the above, and the purpose is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not the interrupts are turned on continuously in a predetermined number of interrupts. The same applies when the term "consecutively specified number of times" is used). In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that an illegal radio wave has been detected, turns on the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal radio wave is completed, turns off the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

Next, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the illegal magnetism has been detected, turns on the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, if No in step 1912, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal magnetism is completed, turns off the illegal magnetic detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

Next, in step 1922, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns on the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1926, in step 1928, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns off the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. Even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

Next, in step 1932, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns on the frame opening flag, and proceeds to step 1934. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been released, turns off the frame opening flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). .. Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1950).

Next, FIG. 171 is a flowchart of the error management process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) relating to the fact that an error has occurred and the error type information (control command in step 1990). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the transmission process). Next, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error canceling condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the information that the error has been cleared (control command transmission process in step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000). In addition, even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000).

Next, FIG. 172 is a flowchart of the emission control signal output process according to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates a payout control board (sometimes referred to as a prize ball payout control board KH), a communication state (BIT0), and a disconnection short-circuit power supply error (BIT1). Get the error flag. As for BIT0 indicating the communication state, if it is "0000000000B", it indicates normality, and if it is "00000001B", it indicates an abnormality. In BIT1 indicating a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, "0000000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates an abnormality. Next, in step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the logical product of the error flag acquired in step 1550-7-1 and the determination data (“00000011B”). Next, in step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the emission permission signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates a launch permission signal, and if it is "00000000000B", it indicates an error (abnormality), and if it is "001000000B", it indicates normality. Next, in step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-8). Here, the output port is, for example, BIT0 is digit 1 bit data, BIT1 is digit 2 bit data, BIT2 is digit 3 bit data, BIT3 is digit 4 bit data, BIT4 is digit 5 bit data, and BIT5 is launch permission signal bit data. , BIT6 is configured as a production strobe bit data, and BIT7 is configured as a security bit.

Next, FIG. 173 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 146. First, in step 3502, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the game state temporary storage means MB and confirms the state of the game machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and, based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, connects to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal plate G according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of the signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Game state information output terminal for outputting information related to specific game state, special game state, etc., error information for outputting various error information detected by the open detection sensor when the door is open, etc. Output terminals, etc.} are provided. Then, as will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the ninth embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout-related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot output terminals that output a signal during a jackpot at the time of a jackpot (there are a plurality of terminals depending on the type of jackpot). ), The door open output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, the start port winning output terminal that outputs a signal when the start port is won, and the prize ball tank KT are short of balls. Game-related information that is important information for the game hall operator, such as an output terminal when the ball is out, which outputs a signal while the door is running, and an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is confirmed, which outputs a signal when the special symbol is confirmed and stopped. It is an output terminal. That is, by setting the output terminal of the payout-related information as one output terminal, it is possible to prevent the output terminal of these important game-related information from being exhausted.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. ing. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, to explain the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment, first, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal. The plate G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always conductive. I'm not. That is, the electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being once replaced with a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is on / off) by the unit, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is degaussed, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC do not conduct with each other. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, by detecting the conduction period, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal plate G. With such a configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and the main control board M from the hall computer HC side can be secured. This is to prevent the goto act (so-called remote control goto) of illegally operating the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, a mechanism using a relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing a goto action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and a pair of light emitting units are used. A photosensor having a light receiving unit also enables one-way communication (for example, the light from the light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by the hall computer HC. It should be added that the signal can be received by reading by the unit.

However, since the configuration is such that the physical signal (switch state is on / off) is temporarily replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC, so that the external relay terminal board G is one. It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is fixed). It is customary to configure so that only the information that "one change of the special symbol has been completed" can be transmitted).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal plate according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, there are other signals; the preliminary signal that outputs that it is always off; from any timing after the power is turned on {for example, (a) main control board side main process execution start in FIG. 145}. It is a signal that always outputs an off signal. It should be noted that the signal is a signal that is used or not depending on the developed model (complexity of game playability).

Next, it is a signal of the IN / OUT section; the number of game balls that have entered all the entry ports (including the out ports) arranged on the game area D30 (≈ the number of game balls that have been driven into the game area D30). ) Is output; Is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds each time it reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10). If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

Next, the signal in charge of IN / OUT; the signal for outputting the number of game balls paid out by the game machine; every time the number of game balls detected by the payout count sensor KE10s reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10). A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after the elapse of a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and the output is waiting for the next output. May be configured to start output immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the predetermined period described above has not elapsed).

Next, the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the glass door of the game machine (a frame body with a transparent plate attached, for example, the glass door D18) is being opened; is the door unit open detection. When the sensor D18s changes from off to on (for example, when the door opening flag is turned on in step 1924) {* However, after changing from off to on, it is turned on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds). The output timing may be continuous}; during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the door opening flag is on), it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, it is on. → After turning off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Next, the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the front frame of the gaming machine (the frame body on which the gaming board is mounted, for example, the front frame unit D14) is open; is the front frame unit. When the open detection sensor D14s changes from off to on (for example, when the frame opening flag is turned on in step 1934) {* However, after changing from off to on, it is turned on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds). The output timing may be continuous}; during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the frame opening flag is on), it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, After changing from on to off, the on signal may be continuously output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Next, the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the saucer frame of the gaming machine (the frame body on which the ball saucer is attached and the ball plate unit D17) is open; is the ball plate unit open detection sensor. When D20s changes from off to on {* However, after changing from off to on, the continuous on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) may be the output timing}; the detection sensor is on. During the period, it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, after changing from on to off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Here, the signals of the above three types of unit monitoring systems may be the same output signal depending on the configuration between the units. In that case, the ON signal may be continuously output while any of the open detection sensors is ON. Further, the openness detection sensor of each unit may be connected to the main control board M or may be connected to the prize ball payout control board KH side (the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH). Because bidirectional communication is possible).

Next, the signal of the symbol fluctuation system; the signal that outputs the number of symbol fluctuations for all the symbol fluctuations that trigger the opening of the big winning opening (attacker); the first main game symbol or the second main When the variable display of the game symbol ends (for example, when the changing flag is turned on → off in step 1424) {* When the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends after the variable display ends (for example) Alternatively, when it is started, when it is in the period), it may be set as the output timing}; It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.5 seconds. The output period is preferably configured so that the variable display period of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is shorter than the shortest possible period. Further, the signal may be output during a period during which the fluctuation fixed time of the main game symbol is set.

Next, it is a signal of the symbol fluctuation system; a part of the symbol fluctuation that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) (for example, the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side) is targeted, and the number of symbol fluctuations is output. The signal to be output is; when the variation display of the second main game symbol is completed (for example, when the variation flag is turned on → off in step 1424 in the second main game symbol display process) {* Note that the variation display The output timing may be when the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends (or starts, or is in the period) after the end of}; a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.5 seconds. Is. It is preferable that the output period is configured so that the variable display period of the second main game symbol is shorter than the shortest possible period.

Next, the signal of the big hit system; the signal that outputs that the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during the continuous operation of the accessory); when the special game is started (for example, In step 1606, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned off → on, but in step 1432, the condition device operation flag may be turned off → on.) {* Before the start demo period starts, The output timing may be during the period and after the end}; During the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag or the condition device operation flag is on), the on signal is always output. This is the signal to be output.

Next, it is a signal of the big hit system; during the period when the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during the continuous operation of the accessory), and the symbol change that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker). The signal that outputs that the time reduction game is in progress (the fluctuation time reduction function is in operation) is; when the special game is started (for example, in step 1606, when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned off → on). Or, when the condition device operation flag is turned off → on in step 1432, and when the time saving game is started (for example, when the main game time saving flag is turned off → on in step 1708), and / or In step 1710, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is turned off → on); during the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period during which the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation flag is on). , And, during the period during which the time reduction game is being executed (for example, during the period during which the main game time reduction flag and / or the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on), the signal always outputs an on signal.

Next, other signals; output information for uniquely identifying the game machine {* game machine manufacturer identification code (2 bytes), game machine model name identification code (64 bytes), main board CPU The unique information (chip code register value = 4 bytes) of the above is output in order} The signal is; (Approximately 10 seconds after input); The unique information is divided into 1 frame (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 parity bit + 1 stop bit), and the serial transmission method (step synchronization, step synchronization, It is a signal to be output until all are output at 200 bps). It is preferable that the signal type (rated voltage, rated current) is different from that of other signal types.

Next, the IN / OUT signal; the signal that outputs the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out from the game machine; When detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out is totaled, and each time the total number of prize balls (for example, the value of the prize ball counter MHc) reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10); in 0.1 seconds. It is a signal that outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds after outputting an on signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after the elapse of a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and the output is waiting for the next output. May be configured to start output immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the predetermined period described above has not elapsed).

Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine; the power is turned on with the RAM initialization operation (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002). It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds from an arbitrary timing after {after a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds) elapses after the power is turned on}. The output period may be the same as the output period in the IN / OUT system or the winning detection system.

Next, it is a security signal; a period other than the period during which the large winning opening (attacker) can be opened (from the operation of the special electric accessory to the lapse of a predetermined period after the operation is completed) {for example, the first (second) ) During the period when the flag is off during the valid period of the big winning opening}, it is output that the ball has been detected in the big winning opening (attacker, for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20). The signal to be signaled is; When the entry sensor of the winning opening detects the entry of a game ball (for example, when it is determined as No in step 2305); after outputting the on signal for 0.2 seconds, for 0.2 seconds. It is a signal that outputs an off signal. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

Next, there is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there was a magnet sensor error (a sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism); when the signal from the magnet sensor is turned on ( For example, when the illegal magnetometer detection flag is turned off → on in step 1914) {* However, if it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is satisfied. None}; A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods are configured so that they cannot overlap.

Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave); when the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on (for example, When the illegal radio wave detection flag is turned off → on in step 1904) {* However, if it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is not satisfied} A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods are configured so that they cannot overlap.

Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave) on the payout control board side (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH). When the signal from the radio wave sensor input to the payout control board side is turned on (for example, when the information related to the radio wave detection error from the prize ball payout control board KH is confirmed in step 3215) {* However If it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is not satisfied}; It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods cannot overlap. Further, a command indicating that the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on is transmitted from the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH) side to the main control board (for example, the main control board M) side. The main control board that has received the command may be configured to output a signal.

Next, it is a security signal; illegal entry into each winning opening to be paid out the prize ball (for example, entry of a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time, the entry detection sensor continues to be ON for a predetermined time or longer. , The number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the special game is equal to or greater than the predetermined number determined for each execution mode of the special game, and the number of balls entered exceeds the design value during a certain period of validity of the entry, etc.) The signal that outputs this is; 1. After detecting one ball with the switch for detecting the ball entering each winning opening, the event of detecting one ball again within the period specified for each winning opening is determined in total. If it occurs more than once, and 2. 2. When the switch for detecting the entry into each winning opening continues to detect the entry for a predetermined period, and 3. When the number of balls entered by the ball entry sensor to the big winning opening exceeds the specified number (for example, 160) during the execution of a special game (for example, 16 round jackpot). When any of 1 to 3 is satisfied; it is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, in the case of 3 above, it is preferable to make the specified number different according to the execution content of the special game (Example 1: When the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds, the specified number = 100. Example 2: If the big winning opening is only short-opened, the above 3 does not apply).

Next, it is a security signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and the fraudulent activity that can be detected by the gaming machine {for example, illegal winning ... a big winning opening (attacker) During a period other than the period during which the special electric accessory can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), more than a predetermined number (5) of balls have been detected in the large winning opening (attacker), or the normal electric accessory cannot be released. During the period, a predetermined number (5) or more of balls entering the ordinary electric accessory were detected. Radio wave sensor error: A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves, or the sensor is not connected. Board switch error: The proximity sensor provided on the game board detects the approach of an object. Magnet sensor error: The signal that outputs that the sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism, or the sensor is not connected, etc.} is; 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and 2. When the fraudulent activity (illegal winning 1, radio wave sensor error) is detected, and 3. When any of 1 to 3 is satisfied when the fraudulent activity (board switch error, magnet sensor error) is detected; in the case of 1 above, an on signal is output for the first period (30 seconds). In the case of 2 above, an on-signal is output over a second period (30 seconds), and in the case of 3, an on-signal is output over a third period (during detection of each fraudulent activity). It is a signal. When the output periods overlap, all the output periods are overlapped, and the on-signal output is maintained until all the output periods expire. Further, the output period may be different between the case of 1 and the case of 2.

Next, it is a security signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and the fraudulent activity that can be detected by the gaming machine {for example, an abnormal winning error ... a big winning opening (attacker) During the period other than the period when the special electric accessory can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), the ball is detected in the big winning opening (attacker), and the normal electric accessory cannot be opened (predetermined immediately after closing). In (excluding the period), the entry into the ordinary electric accessory was detected, etc. Magnet sensor error: A sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism, etc. Discharge error: The number of balls entered by the switch for detecting the entry of balls into each entry port for which the prize ball is to be paid out, and the switch for confirming entry of balls downstream from the switch (especially in the figure). Although not shown, it is a switch through which a game ball that has entered each entry port passes, and is detected by one or more switches that are different from the switch for detecting entry into each entry port). The signal that outputs that the difference from the number of incoming balls exceeds a predetermined number (100), etc.} is performed; 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and 2. When the above fraudulent activity (abnormal winning error, magnet sensor error) is detected, and 3. When the fraudulent activity (emission error) is detected; in the cases 1 and 2, the on signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and then the off signal is output for 0.2 seconds. In this case, it is a signal that outputs an on signal until the next time 1 is satisfied. If the output periods overlap (other than 3 above), the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, even during the output period according to the above 1 and 2, the output of the on signal is maintained at the time when the output timing according to the above 3 is reached, and the output according to the above 1 and 2 is maintained during the output period according to the above 3. It is configured to maintain the on-signal output even when the timing comes.

Next, the signal of the winning detection system; the signal that outputs the number of times the ball has been entered into each starting port for all the starting ports related to the symbol change that triggers the opening of the large winning opening (attacker); 1 When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the entry into the main game start port, and the second main game start port (one equipped with an electric accessory, an electric accessory) When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering (one is not equipped with) (for example, when the first main game start flag is turned off → on in step 2206) Alternatively, in step 2226, when the second main game start flag is set from off to on); it is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.1 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when an illegal entry into the second main game start port (the one on which the electric accessory is mounted) is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied with the entry.

Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 175 to 186.

First, FIG. 175 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error control process at the time of abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception process, which will be described later, with the main control board M. Next, in step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive), which will be described later. Next, in step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, in step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven), which will be described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the motor error processing described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize ball payout control board KH of the game machine according to the ninth embodiment transmits / receives commands / information to / from the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. A transmission / reception control means 3100 that controls control, an error control means 3200 that controls errors related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of games that receive prize ball payout commands and ball lending commands. It has a payout control means 3300 that executes a payout process of balls. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the transmission / reception control means 3100 transmits information to the reception control means 3110 that controls reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R, and information to the main control board M and the card unit R. It has a transmission control means 3120 that controls control.

Here, the reception control means 3110 further includes a main reception control means 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, a command) from the main control board M. The main-side reception control means 3111 further includes a main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which the information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further includes a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 for temporarily storing error information related to the payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side.

Next, the error control means 3200 detected an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on / off state of the error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality. Error control means 3230 when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected, error control means 3240 when a payout abnormality is detected, and an error when a ball path abnormality is detected. Error control means 3250 at the time of ball path abnormality detection that controls control, error control means 3260 at the time of payout motor abnormality detection that controls error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation are detected. An error control means 3270 for detecting a payout stop abnormality that controls the error control when the error is made, a ball bite error generation timer 3200t that manages the error notification period when a ball bite error occurs in the prize ball payout unit KE10, and a ball bite error generation timer 3200t. It also has a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages the error notification period when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further has an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times that the payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Further, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further has an excess payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of the excess prize balls. Further, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further includes a payout interval extension control means 3251 that executes a time extension process of the payout interval related to the prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 that executes a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout process-related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310 temporarily stores the payout-related state (for example, whether or not the payout is in progress or whether or not a payout abnormality has occurred), and the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. At the time of payout processing, the payout counter 3312 in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. When this is performed, the exciting stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator and the predetermined time (waiting for ball passage) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation). It further has a ball passage waiting counter 3315 for measuring the time (time / motor pause time), and a unit payout counter 3317 in which the number of game balls to be paid out by the unit payout operation is set. Here, in the ninth embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement type timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0, but is not limited to this, and is an increment type. It is also possible to configure using the timer of. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

Next, FIG. 176 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. 175. First, in step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes the payout abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality, which will be described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 177 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detecting a payout motor operation abnormality, which is related to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of the abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and to indicate the occurrence of an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality exceeds the threshold value. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the condition that the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. This is a flag that turns on when this is done (delivery motor operation error). In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 adds 1 (increments) the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231. Next, in step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231, and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). do. In the case of Yes in step 4114, in step 4115, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4116. Even if No in step 4111 or 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

Next, in step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection time error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process ( The process proceeds to step 4120 (error control process when a payout abnormality is detected). Even if No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout abnormality is detected in step 4120).

Next, FIG. 178 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of excessive game ball payouts caused by the abnormality when a payout abnormality described later is detected, and when the count number exceeds the threshold value. Turn on the flag that indicates that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, when the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds a predetermined number of prize ball payouts based on the command transmitted from the main control board M side and an excessive payout of game balls is detected (payout). It is a flag that is turned on when (abnormal). In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the excess payout number temporarily stored in the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310, and transfers the excess payout number to the excess payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excess payout cumulative counter 3241, and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4125, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4126. Even if No in step 4121 or 4124, the process proceeds to step 4126. The overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning on the power again, but this example is only an example and is not limited to this. For example, the error may be resolved by pressing the error release switch, elapse of a predetermined time, or the like.

Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excess payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout error detection error control means 3240 sets the excessive payout error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process (step 4140). Move to error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected). Even if No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a ball path abnormality is detected in step 4140).

Next, FIG. 179 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is that when a ball path abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, (1) an abnormality occurs in which a game ball does not exist in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball out). Or, if an abnormality has occurred in which the number of game balls existing in the prize ball payout unit KE10 is small (ball shortage) has occurred, and if an abnormality corresponding to the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is detected, , Turn on the flag that indicates the occurrence of an error. In addition, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to a ball shortage abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, the waiting time until the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout. Is to create. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is at the end of execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. It is a flag to be turned on when a situation is detected in which the number of payouts is less than the predetermined number to be paid out under the situation where it is determined that the payout is being made. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for generating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the conditions for generating the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality are not particularly limited, but for example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the detection sensor is used. An example in which a ball out abnormality occurs when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball flow paths are used. An example may be given in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided in each of the presence), and when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, the condition is that a ball shortage abnormality occurs. In the case of Yes in step 4143, in step 4144, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Even if No in step 4141 or 4143, the process proceeds to step 4151.

Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for resolving the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the conditions for resolving the ball-cutting abnormality or the ball-deficient abnormality are not particularly limited, and an example in which the abnormality is resolved when the above-mentioned ball-cutting abnormality or ball shortage abnormality occurrence condition is unsatisfied. Can be mentioned. In the case of Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 continuously excites a predetermined number of payout operations at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms during normal operation) and balls. The passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 sets the excitation timing and the ball passing waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively low as compared with the normal operation. The change is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Even if No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, but for example, after executing the payout operation for one ball at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, a waiting time (for example, 5 seconds) is waited for. An example may be given in which a time is provided and the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed again at a speed of 1 in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Further, the waiting time for passing the ball to be changed is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

Next, FIG. 180 is a flowchart of the payout motor abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a payout motor abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and to retry the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10). It is to execute the switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as ball biting. In the case of Yes in step 4171, in step 4172, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets the payout motor error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Even if No in step 4171, the process proceeds to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation in the standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the motor error described later and providing a waiting time for resolving the motor error within the predetermined time.

Next, in step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control means 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4178, in step 4179, the retry operation control means 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, although the number of predetermined steps during the retry operation is not particularly limited, an example may be mentioned in which the number is set to the same as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms during the retry operation, which will be described later. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 is switched between an excitation method for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, a well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and a one-step switching speed for the retry operation (for example,). 6ms) is set. Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passage waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation execution flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190). do. Even if No in step 4177 or 4178, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190).

Next, FIG. 181 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected according to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of the error and to continue the prize ball payout process. It is impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormalities related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process are communication abnormalities between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH, communication abnormalities between the card unit R and the prize ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s and an abnormality of the saucer (upper plate) being full. First, in step 4191-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality sets the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t with an error duration (for example, 120 seconds) and starts the error control means. The process proceeds to step 4192-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and goes to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

Next, in step 4192-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and determines whether or not the switch non-passing error detection flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting an abnormality requiring payout stop sets the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 and starts it. The process proceeds to step 4193-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the switch non-passage error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4193-1. Move to. On the other hand, even if No in step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

Next, in step 4193-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality detects a flag related to an error including the pressing of the error release switch KH3a as an error release condition ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the game ball detection flag when the payout operation is not completed, the payout motor error flag, and the switch non-passage error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, even if No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

Next, in step 4194-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. .. On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

Next, in step 4195-1, the error control means 3270 when a payout stop abnormality is detected has a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or longer. It is determined whether or not (yes, etc.) is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4196- Move to 1.

Next, in step 4196-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality turns on the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality transmits a saucer full tank command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality transmits a saucer full tank release command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

Next, in step 4197-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the card unit R has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198-1. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198. Move to -1.

Next, in step 4198-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and a part of the error related to the payout operation stop (for example, an excessive payout error, a prize ball device). It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error, the payout motor operation error, the game ball detection when the payout operation is not completed, the payout motor error, and the switch non-passing error) are turned off.

In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, and the saucer are full. It is determined whether or not all the error flags of the error flag and the CR unit unconnected error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality executes the normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, the payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). Is paused, the payout operation is restarted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then the next step. (Processing in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 182 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information reception process (to the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. 175. Here, the first half of the flow is the information reception process from the main control board M (and the set processing of the number of prize balls paid out accompanying this), and the second half of the flow is the information transmission process to the main control board M. Therefore, to explain from the information reception process from the main control board M in the first half (and the set process of the number of prize balls paid out accompanying this), first, in step 4205, the main side reception control means 3111 is a payout state flag temporary storage means. With reference to 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" means that the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in the driving operation, the ball passing waiting time, and the motor pause time). It is a flag that is turned on when (if it is inside). In the case of Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main side reception control means 3111 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side received information temporary storage means 3111a, and pays out the prize balls. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). This completes the process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball payout process is executed. In addition, even if No in step 4205 and step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225).

Next, the information transmission process to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and whether or not the payout-related error transmission flag is on. To judge. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" means that when the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. Is a flag that is turned on and turned off after the error notification is sent to the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4225, in step 4230, the error control means 3200 turns off the payout-related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). Even if No in step 4225, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240).

Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the "prize ball payout completion flag" is a flag that is turned on when it is determined by the payout control means 3300 that the prize ball payout is completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information to the effect that the prize ball payout is completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4300 (prize ball payout start).・ At the start of motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4300 (at the start of prize ball payout / motor drive)}. This completes the prize ball payout completion information transmission process.

Next, FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) according to the subroutine of step 4300 of FIG. 175. Here, the process is a process before executing the motor drive process of the next step 4400, and the number of steps of the motor drive and the like are determined in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. It is a process to set. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 182) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in step 4310 and step 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag, and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. do.

Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of prize balls paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that a predetermined number of pieces are paid out, and proceeds to step 4332. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, if No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize balls to be paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out, and the step Move to 4332.

Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the payout planned number in the unit payout operation (that is, the payout number scheduled in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the exciting stator position specifying counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position at the time of payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches between an excitation method for normal operation (for example, a well-known 2-2-phase excitation method) related to stepping motor operation and a one-step switching speed for normal operation (for example, 3 ms). ) Is set. Next, in step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passing waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation executing flag. Here, the retry operation executing flag is a flag that is turned on during execution of the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / prize). (At the end of ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4345, since the motor has already been driven, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the prize ball payout continuation flag is a case where the prize ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and when the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time elapses ( It is a flag that is turned on (detailed conditions will be described later). If Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and whether or not the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, whether or not all the planned payouts by the current unit payout operation have been paid out). Whether or not) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, if No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is on, the process of setting the number of steps for driving the motor and the like is executed again without triggering the reception of the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. If it is determined that not all of the planned number of pieces to be paid out by the unit payout operation this time has been paid out, an abnormal occurrence that causes a ball out error or a ball shortage error will be detected.

Next, FIG. 184 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) according to the subroutine of step 4400 of FIG. 175. Here, the process is an end process when the drive termination of all the motors scheduled in the previous process (step 4300) is executed, or all the prize ball payouts scheduled are executed. .. Here, the motor drive end process is executed from step 4402 to step 4419, the game ball detection process is executed from step 4420 to step 4425, and the prize ball payout end process is executed from step 4430 to step 4462.

First, to explain from the motor drive termination process, first, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. do. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and whether or not the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. 183. It is determined whether or not all the steps in the current unit payout operation set in 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. In the case of Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the retry operation executing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4416, in step 4417, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation executing flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process proceeds to step 4418. Next, in step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the dormant state of the stepping motor (in this example, after lowering the excitation output, it is continuously excited to the current excitation stator position specifying counter value (j)). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and shifts to step 4420. In addition, even if No in step 4405 or step 4410, the process proceeds to step 4420. This completes the motor drive termination process.

Next, to explain the game ball detection process, first, in step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. In the case of Yes in step 4420, in step 4422, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. In addition, even if No in step 4420, the process proceeds to step 4430. Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time an incoming ball is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the incoming ball of a plurality of game balls is detected. If so, the value corresponding to the number of balls entered may be subtracted. This completes the game ball detection processing.

Next, to explain the prize ball payout end process, first, in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the sensor detects as many game balls as the number of game balls related to the payout even though the driving of the motor related to the payout is not completed), in step 4432. The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag when the payout is not completed in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, even if No in step 4431, the process proceeds to step 4435.

Next, in steps 4435 and 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn off the prize ball payout flag and turn on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than 0. In the case of Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and the number of overpayments is based on the count value (for example, if the counter value is “-3”, the number of overpayments is “3”). Is temporarily stored in the payout process-related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {the prize ball payout control process (when the motor drive is executed) in step 4500}. Even if No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts is normally paid out), the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500] (When driving the motor)}. In this example, excess payout is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the motor for payout is finished. When a predetermined time (for example, a detection waiting time sufficient for the game ball paid out by the drive to be detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed, the overpayment is detected (the value of the payout counter 3312 is less than 0). It may be configured to be able to execute (determination of whether or not) (that is, overpayment is an unforeseen situation in which the number of game balls that exceeds the number of game balls to be paid out is paid out. This unforeseen situation, which means that it has occurred and is extremely unlikely to occur in terms of design, means that one of the payout mechanisms has a problem, or that fraudulent activity has occurred during the payout operation. It means that it is likely to have been done).

On the other hand, if No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passage error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 (in this example, it is predetermined after the payout operation is completed). If the number of game balls related to the payout operation is not detected even after the waiting time for passing the ball has passed, it is immediately determined that a switch non-passing error has occurred. Without limitation, it may be configured to determine that a switch non-passage error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times).

Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor drive as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (step 4500). When the motor drive is executed)}. On the other hand, if No in step 4447, in step 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. Turn it on and move to the next process {Prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when the motor drive is executed)}. Even if No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 2400 (when the motor is driven)}.

Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the prize ball payout process is not being executed), whether or not the payout control means 3300 has received the game ball detection signal from the payout count sensor KE10s in step 4470. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 4470, in step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4500 (step 4500). When the motor drive is executed)}. Even if No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when the motor is driven)}.

Next, FIG. 185 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor drive is executed) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. 175. Here, the process is a process of actually executing the motor drive based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined number of step counters is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 183), and corresponds to the predetermined number of step counters. A flag that turns off when all excitation is performed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, in step 4510, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Next, in step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (increments) the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on a predetermined excitation method and switching speed. ..

Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation (step-out phenomenon due to ball biting or the like) related to the motor operation has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence / absence of the detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, in step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether or not the rotor is rotating correctly, that is, whether or not a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. In the case of Yes in step 4555, in step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to the next process (motor error time process in step 4600). In addition, even if No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (processing at the time of motor error in step 4600), and if No in step 4555, in step 4565, the error control means 3200 temporarily stores the error flag. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process at the time of the motor error in step 4600).

Next, FIG. 186 is a flowchart of motor error processing according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. 175. First, the purpose of this process is to forcibly shift the motor drive to the hibernate state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 185, after detecting whether or not the motor exists at a predetermined rotation position at a predetermined detection timing, if the motor does not exist at the predetermined rotation position, step-out or the like is performed. This motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, in step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and shifts to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to the hibernate state (step 4410 and step in FIG. 184). See 4415). Even if No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when an abnormality is detected in step 4100).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 193. First, FIG. 187 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the game machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes the initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received-> When the RAM on the sub-control board S side is initialized, when various information commands are received-> The effect-related information at the time of power failure is reset to the RAM on the sub-control board S side). After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (f) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed. Here, when (f) is executed, first, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the instruction image display control process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the hold information management process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2800, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this iterative processing routine. do.

As described above, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (S2100 to S2999) are looped after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3E is a process at the time of interruption of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is one terminal (this) of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM. In the example, it is the processing flow (e) when it is connected to the NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is a command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt process. Returns to the processing that was being executed in.

Next, FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the instruction image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2104, the process proceeds to step 2108. On the other hand, if No in step 2102 or step 2104, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S measures the ball entering the left-handed instruction counter HSc (the ball is easily entered into the ball-entry port when right-handed is executed). When the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that the left-handed strike is not executed in the situation where the game should be advanced by the left-handed strike, and the left-handed strike instruction image is displayed.) The counter value of is cleared to zero, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the auxiliary game start port entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the left-handed instruction counter HSc. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left-handed instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2112, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the left-handed instruction image for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2115, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the left-handed instruction counter HSc to zero, and proceeds to the process of step 2116. On the other hand, even if No in step 2108 or step 2112, the process proceeds to step 2116. Here, the lower right of the figure is a display image diagram of the instruction image, and the uppermost row is an image diagram of the left-handed instruction image. The left-handed instruction image is an image displayed on the effect display device S40 that prompts the player to execute the left-handed player, and is a situation of the game in which the left-handed player should be executed. The special game is not executed and the non-time is shortened. It is configured to display a left-handed instruction image for a predetermined time (5 seconds) when it is determined that right-handed hitting is being executed in the game state (when three balls are entered into the auxiliary game starting port H10). When the ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10, 1 is added to the counter value of the left-handed instruction counter HSc, but when the ball enters the right general winning opening P20, the counter value of the left-handed instruction counter HSc increases or decreases. It is configured not to.

Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game is being executed. If Yes in step 2116, the process proceeds to step 2122. On the other hand, if No in step 2116, in step 2118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a non-time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a right-handed instruction counter MSc (a counter that measures the ball entering the ball-entry port, which is easy to enter when the left-handed ball is executed. When the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that the right-handed hit is not executed in the situation where the game should be advanced by the right-handed hit, and the right-handed hit instruction image is displayed.) Clear the counter value to zero. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2118, the process proceeds to step 2122.

Next, in step 2122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the first main game start port entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2122, in step 2124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the right-handed instruction counter MSc. Next, in step 2126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the right-handed instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2126, in step 2128, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the right-handed instruction image for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2129, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the right-handed instruction counter MSc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Even if No in step 2122 and step 2126, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400). Here, the lower right of the figure is a display image diagram of the instruction image, and the second row is an image diagram of the right-handed instruction image. The right-handed instruction image is an image displayed on the effect display device S40 that prompts the player to execute the right-handed hit, and is in the state of the game in which the right-handed hit should be executed, during the execution of the special game or in the time-reduced gaming state. Then, when it is determined that the left-handed hit is being executed (when three balls are entered into the first main game start opening A10), the right-handed hit instruction image is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds). The bottom row is an image diagram of a time-saving medium-right-handed image, and since the game proceeds by right-handed in the time-saving game state, the time-saving medium-right-handed image will continue to be displayed in the time-saving game state. (It will continue to be displayed even during the special game). The display area on the effect display device S40 of the time-saving medium-right-handed image and the right-handed instruction image is configured so as not to overlap, and the size of the display area is larger than that of the time-saving medium-right-handed image. (Left-handed and right-handed images are displayed in a relatively large display area for the purpose of warning).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, for example, when the special game is not being executed and the game ball is hitting right in the non-time reduction game state, when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10, the sub-control board S The CPUSC is configured to count the number of passes and display a left-handed instruction image (for example, "left-handed") when the number of passes reaches a predetermined value (3 balls in this example). There is. Further, for example, when the special game is not being executed and the game ball is hitting right in the non-time shortened game state, when the game ball passes through the right general winning opening P20, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S counts the number of passes. Instead, it is configured not to display a right-handed instruction image (for example, an image called "right-handed"). Further, for example, in the case of a left-handed hit during a special game or in a time-reduced game state, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S counts the number of times the ball is entered. When the number of hits reaches a predetermined value (3 balls in this example), a right-handed instruction image (for example, an image called "right-handed") is displayed. In the ninth embodiment, a left-handed instruction image (for example, an image called "left-handed") or a right-handed instruction image (for example, an image called "right-handed") may be referred to as a firing instruction effect. With this configuration, in the situation of the game in which the left-handed hit should be executed (the special game is not being executed and the non-time shortened game state), the player mistakenly executes the right-handed hit, and the assistance is provided. When the game ball that has passed through the game start port H10 enters the right general winning opening P20, the counter value of the right-handed instruction counter MSc increases by 2 due to the launch of one game ball, and even unintentional right-handed hits are made. Regardless of this, it is possible to prevent the display related to the alerting from being performed at an unintended frequency such that the left-handed instruction image is frequently displayed. In this example, the left-handed counter value can be displayed every time the left-handed counter value reaches a multiple of a predetermined value (3 in this example) {the right-handed counter value is a predetermined value (3 in this example). The right-handed instruction image can be displayed each time it reaches a multiple of)}, but it is not limited to this, and left-handed when the left-handed counter value reaches a predetermined value (3 in this example). Display the instruction image {display the right-handed instruction image when the right-handed counter value reaches the predetermined value (3 in this example)}, which is twice or three times the predetermined value (3 in this example). When the counter value is reached, the left-handed instruction image (right-handed instruction image) may not be newly displayed. Further, the left-handed instruction image (right-handed instruction image) is configured to be erased within a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) from the start of display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left-handed instruction image (right-handed instruction image) is not limited to this. ) Is displayed, and then it is determined that the left-handed (right-handed) is executed (for example, when it is determined that the left-handed is executed, when the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10). Etc., when it is determined that the right-handed hit has been executed, the left-handed hitting instruction image (right-handed hitting instruction) when the game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10, etc.) or when the game state shifts. The image) may be configured to be erased.

Here, in a situation where the "left-handed instruction image" should be displayed, it is also possible that the hit ball is distributed and fired in both the right side area and the left side area, and the game ball accidentally passes through the auxiliary game start port H10. Be done. Therefore, if the first main game start opening A10 or the left general winning opening P10 arranged on the left side of the game area is won within the predetermined period, in other words, the game is executed by left-handed within the predetermined period. When it can be determined that, the predetermined value is changed (subtracted) or initialized to extend the period until the left-handed instruction image is notified, or the notification method (notification mode) is changed (for example). , Voice notification is not performed, and the warning is changed to a small display). The same process may be executed when displaying the "right-handed instruction image", but in a gaming state in which the "right-handed instruction image" can be displayed, it is extremely unsuitable for the player to perform left-handed hitting. In some cases, it is a specification that gives a profit, and in the case of such a specification, when displaying a "right-handed instruction image", a process of extending the period until notification or changing the notification method (notification mode). It is desirable not to do.

Next, FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2402, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (hold information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing hold counter value (in this example, the maximum number is 4 for the first main game and the maximum number is 4 for the second main game). Add "1". Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the hold information (random value, etc.) transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and proceeds to step 2418. ..

On the other hand, if No in step 2402, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter value. Next, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the hold information (random value, etc.) related to the symbol variation from the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and shifts the remaining hold information. Next, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2418. In addition, even if No in step 2410, the process proceeds to step 2418.

Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M lights and displays the same number of hold display images as the drawing hold counter value on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700). do.

Next, FIG. 190 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2704. Next, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is decorated with reference to the temporarily stored symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table for determining the content of the variation of the design. Stop symbol of the symbol {For example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, doublet such as "7, 7, 7", if it is a lost symbol, "1, 3, 5" , Etc.} and the variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2800). Even if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2800).

Next, FIG. 191 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2804. Next, in step 2806, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 2809, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2810. Even if No in step 2802, the process proceeds to step 2810.

Next, in step 2810, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2810, in step 2811, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2812, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has reached the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the map variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the variation of the decorative symbol on the effect display device S40 (sub-sub control in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). It is transmitted to the unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2832.

On the other hand, if No in step 2812, in step 2816, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a decorative symbol based on the design variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2816, in step 2818, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol on the effect display device S40 (display command transmission control in step 2999). In the process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2832.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2816, in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a preview image or a notice image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the sub-control board S. It is determined whether or not the display timing of the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2824, in step 2826, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the image display related to the notice image and the reach image on the effect display device S40 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2832. Even if No in step 2824, the process proceeds to step 2832.

Next, in step 2832, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, receives information from the main control board M side that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed). (Determine whether or not it was done). In the case of Yes in step 2832, in step 2834, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (confirmation display command) for the decorative symbol on the effect display device S40 (sub-sub in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). It is transmitted to the control unit SS side). Next, in step 2836, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2838, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol changing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). Even if No in step 2810 or step 2832, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

Next, FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game in-game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2904, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special gaming flag in step 2912. Next, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a jackpot start display on the effect display device S40 (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot), and proceeds to step 2920. Even if No in step 2902, the process proceeds to step 2920.

Next, in step 2920, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds, the number of winnings, and the number of prize balls on the effect display device S40 based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side. (It may be executed as needed based on the playability, the type of jackpot, etc.) Set the command. Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game-in-game effect display control process described later. Next, in step 2926, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the jackpot end on the effect display device S40 (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2929, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the number of balls entered counter NKc (counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the right general winning opening P20 during the special game) to zero. Next, in step 2930, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game in-game flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2999). Even if No in step 2904 or step 2926, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999).

Next, FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the special in-game effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 in FIG. 192. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the right general winning opening ball entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the right general winning opening ball entry effect (when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 during the execution of the special game, the effect display device. This is an effect displayed in S40. For example, a command is set to display "+2 GET!") And to add a predetermined number (2 balls in this example) to the number of prize balls to display. Here, in the ninth embodiment, since the right general winning opening P20 is arranged upstream of the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20, the first large winning opening is being executed during the special game. The game ball fired toward C10 and the second big prize opening C20 (the game ball fired by right-handed) is the right general winning opening P20 before entering the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20. It will be possible to enter the ball. With this configuration, in addition to the number of prize balls that can be obtained by entering the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game, the right general winning opening P20 is entered. As a result, more game balls can be acquired, and the number of game balls that can be acquired by executing a special game can be increased.

Next, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the ball entry counter NKc, and proceeds to the process of step 3058. Even if No in step 3052, the process proceeds to step 3058. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the ball entry counter NKc has reached a predetermined value (5 balls in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the lighting mode based on the stopped jackpot symbol with reference to the right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table (see FIG. 194). Then, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is turned on in the determined lighting mode, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2926). Even if No in step 3058, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2926). As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 during the special game, the right general winning opening entry effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 (for example, "" +2 GET! ”), And when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 by a predetermined value (5 balls in this example), the right general winning opening is lit based on the stopped jackpot symbol. It is configured to light the lamp LP10. The right general winning opening ball entry effect, which is executed when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, is not only displayed on the effect display device S40, but also "GET!" By the sound from the speaker D24. It may be configured to output "+2 GET!" On the screen and at the same time output "GET!" By voice. Further, the volume of the sound from the speaker D24 may be provided in a plurality of stages so that the loudness of the volume can indicate the degree of expectation of transition to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game (when the volume is high). If the expectation of transition to the probability fluctuation game state is higher than when the volume is low, or the sound "GET!" That should be output is not output (the output itself is not performed / the sound is output). Expectations for transition to a probability-variable gaming state are relatively high, etc.).

Next, FIG. 194 is an example of a right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table. In the figure, the probabilistic jackpot symbol stop time table referred to when the stopped jackpot symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (5A, 7A, 5B, 7B in this example) that shifts to the probability variation gaming state. It is composed of a non-probability change jackpot symbol (4A, 4B in this example) that is referred to when the stopped jackpot symbol shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state. NS. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 has five display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow color", and the probability after the big hit is completed. The order is "white-> blue-> green-> red-> rainbow color" in order from the one with the lowest expectation of transition to the variable game state. Since "rainbow color" is not selected as the lighting mode when shifting to the non-probability variable gaming state after the big hit ends, when the right general winning opening lamp LP10 lights up in rainbow color, after the big hit ends, It is almost definite to shift to the probability fluctuation game state. The lighting mode of the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is just an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is increased or the distribution of the number is changed. Further, when a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the right general winning opening P20 during the big hit, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be turned on at the end timing of the big hit, or once. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be lit multiple times during the big hit. Furthermore, even in the same lighting mode, the degree of expectation of transition to the stochastic gaming state differs depending on the transition timing of the lighting mode. Specifically, even in the same "red" mode, the mode changes to the "red" mode at a later timing. It may be set so that the expectation of transition to the probability-variable gaming state is higher than the case where the change is made in the "red" mode at the earlier timing (for example, the distribution of the number is set as such). With this configuration, even if the mode does not change at first and remains "white", if it changes to "red" later, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first change mode is "red". Therefore, it is possible to continuously give a feeling of expectation. Of course, on the contrary, it is possible to set the reliability to be higher when the change is made at an earlier timing, and in this case, it is possible to expect a larger change at an earlier timing.

<10th Embodiment>
As a configuration of a pachinko gaming machine applicable to this example, a configuration having a specific area in the large winning opening will be described in detail below as a tenth embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 195, the structures of the second special winning opening C20 and the first large winning opening C10 in the tenth embodiment will be described in detail. First, inside the second large winning opening C20, roughly, the distribution winning detection device 2221, the specific area C22, the shielding member 2224a, the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 and the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 are provided. Inside the first large winning opening C10, a normal winning detection device 2121 is roughly provided. Hereinafter, the structure of these large winning openings will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 195, the second big winning opening C20 is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which has a horizontally rectangular shape and is located above the first large winning opening C10 (as viewed from the player). As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 has a distribution winning detection device 2221 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a distribution electric accessory 2222, a specific area C22, and a specific area C22. A shielding member 2224a that shields the entry of the game ball, a specific area entry detection device 2224-1 for detecting the entry of the game ball into a specific area, and a discharge ball detection device 2224 for detecting the ejection ball. -2 and. Here, the distribution winning detection device 2221 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and generates distribution large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. .. The distribution electric accessory 2222 changes the second large winning opening C20 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second large winning opening C20 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. The specific area C22 is a determinant of the game state after the end of the special game depending on the presence or absence of the game ball entering, and when the shielding member 2224a is in the open state (evacuated state), the game ball enters the specific area C22. It is possible (or easy), and when the shielding member 2224a is in the closed state (advanced state), it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the specific area C22. Further, the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the specific area C22, and generates specific area entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. Further, since the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening C20 is configured to pass through either the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. The specific area entry detection device 2224-1 also serves as a sensor for detecting the ejected ball (it also generates the ejected ball entry information at the time of entry). The discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is a sensor that detects a game ball that has been ejected without entering the specific area C22 after entering the second major winning opening C20, and the ejection ball insertion indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. Generate sphere information. In the ninth embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed between a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (tilted attacker). ), But it is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located below the two major winning openings C20 (as seen from the player). As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a normal winning detection device 2121 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a normal electric accessory 2122. Here, the normal winning detection device 2121 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and generates normal large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The normal electric accessory 2122 changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. In the ninth embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed between a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (tilted attacker). ), But it is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

The flow path direction of the game ball of the distribution winning detection device 2221, the distribution flow path 132, the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1, the discharge ball detection device 2224-2, the normal prize detection device 2121 and the normal flow path 134. It is desirable that one game ball can smoothly pass through the cross-sectional area perpendicular to the cross section, but two game balls cannot (or are difficult) to pass through. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where a plurality of game balls are clogged in the flow path (distribution flow path 132, normal flow path 134) and cannot flow down.

In addition, since the two major winning openings are approximately close to each other, the player can enter the same location even if either the second major winning opening C20 or the first major winning opening C10 is in an easy-to-enter state during a special game. Therefore, it is possible to play the game without changing the launch strength of the game ball. In this case, since it is easy for the player to visually recognize which of the major winning openings is in the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to execute the game with less discomfort and less burden on the player.

Further, as will be described later, the game ball is sandwiched between the first large winning opening C10 by placing the second large winning opening C20 on the first large winning opening C10, where the possibility of entering the ball is greatly related to the profit of the player. Even if it is not closed due to an accident such as (when blocking the flow of the game ball below the first prize opening C10), if the second prize opening C20 is opened, the game ball can be entered. Become. Further, in this example, since the specific area C22 and the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 (exhaust ball detection device 2224-2) are provided below the distribution winning detection device 2221, the second large winning opening C20 It is more space-saving to provide the above the first prize opening C10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the flow mode of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening (second large winning opening C20 and first large winning opening C10) according to the ninth embodiment will be described in detail.

First, the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening C20 passes through the distribution winning detection device 2221, flows down the distribution flow path 132, and is provided in the specific area C22. It will pass through either 1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. When the shielding member 2224a is in the closed state (advanced state), the flowing game balls cannot pass through the specific area entry detection device 2224-1, and all pass through the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. It will be. On the other hand, when the shielding member 2224a is in the open state (evacuated state), the flowing game ball passes through the specific region entry detection device 2224-1 due to the shape of the distribution flow path 132. When the shielding member 2224a is in the open state (evacuated state), it is desirable that all the game balls that have flowed down pass through the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 (because the interests of the player are not impaired). .. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the shape of the distribution flow path 132 (particularly, the shape of the right side surface of the distribution flow path) so that the flowing game ball can easily pass through the specific region entry detection device 2224-1. As will be described later, in the ninth embodiment, the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 and the distribution winning detection device 2221 have passed. Whether or not the ejection ball is abnormal is determined by whether or not the number of game balls is equal.

On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening C10 passes through the normal winning detection device 2121 and flows down the normal flow path 134 and is discharged. It should be noted that a device for detecting the ejected ball is not provided in the first large winning opening C10.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment has a specific region C22 in which the gaming ball can enter inside the second special winning opening C20. Further, the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment has a configuration in which a gaming ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, so that the gaming machine shifts to the probability-changing game center state after the completion of the special game (so-called ball accuracy). Machine).

Next, FIG. 196 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 146 in the tenth embodiment. After determining the stop symbol of the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1408 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1408 (second), in step 1412-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode of the main game symbol based on the random number on the main game side and the result of the winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, if No in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1411, and the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1411, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 0, in step 1412-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game side random number / winning / failing lottery result. Determine the variation mode of the symbol.

Here, FIG. 197 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the tenth embodiment. Among the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols that facilitate the entry of the game ball into the specific area are "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B", and the specific area C22. The main game symbol on which a special game that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter is "2A".

Next, FIG. 198 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the tenth embodiment. After setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608, or when the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set in step 1611 (second). It is determined whether or not the currently executed round is the distribution game execution round (2nd R, 4R in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (second), the process proceeds to step 1612.

Next, FIG. 199 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 198 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process proceeds to step 1866. On the other hand, if No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a long open symbol for the stopped main game symbol (the second big winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot symbol that opens the time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M specifies a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds, which is specified as an opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. An open pattern designed so that the ball enters the region C22 is deterministic), and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, when the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a short open pattern as an open pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -N (for example, an opening pattern designed so that the non-ball entering the specific region C22 is deterministic with the opening for 0.1 seconds) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the tenth embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is "5A / 7A", the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "524/1024", and the second main game The long open symbol on the side is "3B, 5B, 7B", and the ratio selected at the time of big hit is "1024/1024", so the second main game side is more than the big hit on the first main game side. The big hit is configured so that the second big winning opening C20 is opened for a long time in the distribution game execution round, that is, the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22 at the time of the big hit.

Next, in step 1860, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won in the second large winning opening C20. .. If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, if No in step 1866, in step 1868, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second winning opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation transition reservation flag and proceeds to step 1878. If No is set in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1634). Even if No in step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 198 in the tenth embodiment. At the time of executing this subroutine, in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680 (second), in step 1682 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1652 and step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the probability variation number counter MP51c to a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M tells the time reduction counter MP52c a predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times, but this is Is not limited. A value of A or less is preferable for a predetermined number of times), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

Here, in the tenth embodiment, regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22 during the special game, the game is configured to shift to the time-shortened game state after the end of the special game. Further, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time-shortened game state after the special game is the same as the number of fluctuations in the probability-variable game state A. (80 times in this example), and if the game ball does not enter the specific area during the special game, the number of fluctuations in which the time is shortened after the special game is different from the predetermined number of times A (small). ) The predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example). As a result, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area C22 during the special game that facilitates entry into the specific area C22, a certain degree of advantageous period can be provided, and if the ball does not pass through the specific area C22. It can be expected to deter the decline in interest. Further, as for the variation mode of the main game symbol in the time-reduced game state, the three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3) is used in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times A. It is configured to refer to the main game table 3-2 in the time-reduced game state of a predetermined number of times B, and to refer to a table having a different effect content. It should be noted that the configuration is applied regardless of whether the jackpot symbols that triggered the execution of the special game are the same or different (for example, even if the special game is triggered by the same jackpot symbol, the special game is executed. The number of time reductions differs depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22, etc.). Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the time-saving game may be determined based on the symbol at the time of a big hit (for example, during a special game). If the ball is not entered in the specific area C22, the maximum number of fluctuations in the time-saving game is determined by the jackpot symbol, etc.).

Next, FIG. 201 is an example of the effect content determination table in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the game state after the special game does not become the probability-variable game state, but the non-probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state ( 50 fluctuations). In that case, the production content will be decided by referring to the table. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the number of fluctuations, the content of the effect, the mode of variation, the configuration of the table, and the like.

As described above, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the execution of the special game, depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game according to the tenth embodiment (specific area). In a gaming machine (so-called ball-probability type gaming machine) that shifts to the probability-changing gaming state with a ball entering and does not shift to the probability-changing gaming state without entering a ball By making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability-variable gaming state, an appropriate effect is executed according to the profit aspect of the player. Can be done. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the distribution game, a special effect (an effect that encourages whether or not the second large winning opening C20 is long open, entry into the specific area C22). It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not the ball is made, an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, etc.) {The execution mode is not particularly limited, but for example. In the case of an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, the effect display device S40 or the effect display device S40 is used at the timing (preferably immediately after) when the ball is entered. It can be exemplified that the effect device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable body accessory for effect, a light guide plate, etc.) is configured to execute the notification (for example, on the effect display device S40). An image drawn as "V" is displayed, or the movable object for production is displaced from the initial position to a position where production is possible, or an image is displayed on the light guide plate by irradiating the light guide plate with light. Make it emerge, etc.)}. In addition, when executing the effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, when a special game is won in a specific game state (for example, a probability fluctuation game state) or a specific special symbol (big hit symbol). ) Is won, and in a special game in which an open pattern designed to make the entry into the specific area C22 is executed is executed, the image drawn with "V" is displayed conservatively (for example). In a situation where there is a possibility that a special game may be performed in which the opening pattern designed so that the entry into the specific area C22 is almost definite, such as (displayed small), is performed (entry into the specific area C22 in the special game). (In a situation where the ball ease is unknown), then when an opening pattern designed to make the ball entering the specific area C22 substantially deterministic is executed, the ball is entered into the specific area C22. It is also preferable to execute an effect different from the effect of notifying the effect, whereby the effect can be executed with a priority as required.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big winning opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit game that can be opened for the first time (preferably less than or less than one firing interval of the game ball), and a predetermined after opening for the first time. It has a second unit game, which can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time, after the time is closed. By configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable in this way, the probability is high even after the opening operation of the first time, which has a low expectation for the transition to the probability fluctuation, is completed. It is possible to have the possibility that the opening operation of the second time, which has a high expectation for the fluctuation transition, is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is equal to or more than one firing interval of the game ball or more than one firing interval in order to secure the ball entering the specific area (half of the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game). It is more preferable that the ball is at least one shot interval) or more, and it is particularly preferable that it is at least (the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (one shot interval of the game ball) or more.

As described above, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the execution of the special game, depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game according to the tenth embodiment (specific area). In a gaming machine (so-called ball-probability type gaming machine) that shifts to the probability-changing gaming state with a ball entering and does not shift to the probability-changing gaming state without entering a ball By making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability-variable gaming state, an appropriate effect is executed according to the profit aspect of the player. Can be done. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the distribution game, a special effect (an effect that encourages whether or not the second large winning opening C20 is long open, entry into the specific area C22). It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not the ball is made, an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, etc.) {The execution mode is not particularly limited, but for example. In the case of an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, the effect display device S40 or the effect display device S40 is used at the timing (preferably immediately after) when the ball is entered. It can be exemplified that the effect device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable body accessory for effect, a light guide plate, etc.) is configured to execute the notification (for example, on the effect display device S40). An image drawn as "V" is displayed, or the movable object for production is displaced from the initial position to a position where production is possible, or an image is displayed on the light guide plate by irradiating the light guide plate with light. Make it emerge, etc.)}.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big winning opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit that can be opened for the first time (preferably, an opening time in which one or more game balls can enter but is relatively short). It has a game and a second unit game that can be opened (or opened / closed) again for a second time longer than the first time after being closed for a predetermined time after being opened for the first time. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time, which has a low expectation of transition to the probability fluctuation game state, is completed. , It is possible to have a possibility that the opening operation of the second time, which has a high expectation of transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state, is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is configured so that a plurality of game balls can easily enter the second large winning opening C20 in order to secure the entry into the specific area C22. It is more preferable that it is more than or equal to (half the maximum number of winnings in a round) x (one firing interval of a game ball) or more, and more or more than (the maximum number of winnings in a round) x (one firing interval of a game ball) or more. It is particularly preferable to have.

In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called ball pachinko machine) that can shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game as in the tenth embodiment, ( 1) Only one large winning opening is provided, and the normal round (a round in which entry into the specific area C22 is invalid) and the distribution game execution round (entry into the specific area C22) are provided at the one large winning opening. (2) A large winning opening A and a large winning opening B having a specific area C22 are provided, and a normal round is executed at the large winning opening A, and the large winning opening B is executed. (3) The large winning opening A and the large winning opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged so as to overlap each other (the large winning opening B is on the top). A normal round is executed at the large winning opening A, a distribution game execution round is executed at the large winning opening B, and the entry into the specific area C22 can be effective only during the execution of the distribution game execution round. , (4) The large winning opening A and the large winning opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged so as to overlap each other (the large winning opening B is on the top), and the large winning opening A is used for a normal round. Is executed, the distribution game execution round is executed at the large winning opening B, and the game ball can enter the specific area C22 only during the execution of the distribution game execution round (a shielding member is provided, and the shielding member is provided. When the member is in the open state, it becomes easy to enter the specific area C22, and when the shielding member is in the closed state, it becomes difficult to enter the specific area C22).

(Example 1 of change from the 10th embodiment)
In the tenth embodiment, a configuration of a gaming machine that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game has been illustrated. The configuration is not limited to 10 embodiments. Therefore, a configuration having a specific region C22 different from the tenth embodiment will be referred to as a modification 1 from the tenth embodiment, and only the changes from the tenth embodiment will be described in detail below.

The step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in their respective embodiments. It indicates that it is a code, a means name, or the like.

First, FIG. 202 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. The number of prize balls in the first main game start port A10 is three, the number of prize balls in the second main game start port B10 is one, and the number of prize balls in the first large prize opening C10 is fifteen. The number of prize balls in the second major winning opening C20 is 13, and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening is 10. As described above, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the number of prize balls in the second large winning opening C20 is smaller than the number of prize balls in the first large winning opening C10.

Next, FIG. 203 shows the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 163 in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart. First, the changes from the tenth embodiment are step 1450 (second variation 1), step 1431-1 (second variation 1) and step 1431-2 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1411. When the limited frequency counter value is not 0, in step 1450 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1413.

Further, after turning on the condition device operation flag in step 1440, in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol with a limit frequency jackpot symbol (time reduction after the jackpot ends). It is a jackpot symbol that becomes a limited frequency state after the game state ends, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), in step 1431-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Set and proceed to step 1500.

Next, FIG. 204 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) of FIG. 203 in the modification 1 from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the first stage range (100 ≧ G> 21). In the case of Yes in step 1451-1, in step 1451-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 3 and based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result, the variation mode related to the main game symbol ( The fluctuation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413). On the other hand, if No in step 1451-1, in step 1451-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is within the second stage range (G = 21). do. When the limited frequency counter value is 21, it is the final fluctuation in the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-3, in step 1451-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability-variable gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-4, in step 1451-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1, and based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result, the variation mode related to the main game symbol. (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1413). If No in step 1451-4, the process proceeds to step 1451-2, and the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined with reference to the main game table 3. As described above, in the change example 1 from the tenth embodiment, in the final variation of the time shortening gaming state, when the variation mode is determined depending on the case of the probability variation gaming state and the case of the non-probability variation gaming state. The table referenced in is different. In other words, the final symbol of the time-shortened game state after the end of the jackpot varies depending on whether the ball is entered in the specific area C22 or not during the execution of the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B". It is configured so that the table referred to when determining the variation mode is different. If No in step 1451-3, in step 1451-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M relates to the limited frequency table 2 and relates to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result. The variation mode (variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1413). Further, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, when the jackpot related to the above-mentioned limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, 100 times are set in the limited frequency counter, and the time reduction counter MP52c Is set to 80 times. Because of this configuration, when the limited frequency counter value is not within the first stage range, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 20 or less, the non-time shortened gaming state and the limited frequency counter value are 0. It will be a bigger situation. In such a state, by configuring to determine the variation mode of the main game symbol by referring to the limited frequency table, when the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, the "design" is displayed. The transition is made in the order of "time reduction game state for 80 fluctuations → limited frequency state for 20 symbol fluctuations (non-time reduction game state)". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and in the time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state A (the limited frequency table to be referred to is "limited frequency table A1 → limited frequency table A2 → limited" in the period of 80 symbol fluctuations. (Transition to frequency table A3)), and after the time-reduced gaming state ends and shifts to the non-time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state B (the limited frequency table to be referred to is the "limited frequency" during the period of 20 symbol fluctuations. (Only table B1), that is, the limited frequency state may be configured so as not to straddle different gaming states. If the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, 80 times is set in the time reduction counter MP52c regardless of whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to the "7B". This is done, and 100 times are set in the limited frequency counter, that is, the game is configured to shift to the limited frequency state after the end of the time saving game state. If a big hit is made when the limited frequency counter value is not 0, it may be regarded as a big hit in the consecutive villas, and the above-mentioned consecutive villa count counter value may be added (time reduction game state). Even if it is finished, if you win the jackpot in a limited frequency state, you can consider it as a jackpot of the consecutive villas). Not limited to this, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, if the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to the "7B", the time reduction counter MP52c is displayed. 80 times are set and 100 times are set in the limited frequency counter, while 50 times are set in the time reduction counter MP52c and 70 times are set in the limited frequency counter when the ball is not entered in the specific area C22. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game when the ball is not entered in the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B". In the final variation, the variation mode of the main game symbol may be determined with reference to the limited frequency table (for example, the limited frequency table 3) referred to only by the final variation. The content of the limited frequency table 3 does not depend on the number of holds, and may be configured so that a uniform fluctuation time of 7 seconds is determined in both cases of hit and loss. In addition, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game when the ball is not entered in the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B". The limited frequency to be referred to in the final variation When the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game execution related to the "7B", the limited frequency to be referred to in the final variation in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game. The tables may be configured to be the same, and in such a configuration, the effect content and the effect tendency in the final variation in the time-saving game state may be the same.

Here, FIG. 205 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. The changes from the tenth embodiment are that the combination of the main game symbols that are big hits is different and that a limited frequency table is provided. Among the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols that facilitate the entry of the game ball into a specific area are "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B" and are specified. The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the area is executed is "4A". In addition, when the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, the game shifts to the time-reduced gaming state of 80 symbol fluctuations (the fluctuation time is determined with reference to the main game table 3). When the 80-time symbol change is completed, the process shifts to the limited frequency state of the 20-time symbol change (the fluctuation time is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2). In the case of the limited frequency state with reference to the limited frequency table 2, the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is configured so that a long time exceeding 10 seconds is not selected regardless of the result of the winning or losing lottery. In addition, the final change in the time-shortening game state (80th change after the end of the big hit) that shifts when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" ends is specified during the execution of the "7B". When there is a ball entering the area C22, the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1, while when there is no ball entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the "7B", it is mainly. It is configured to determine the variation mode with reference to the game table 3 (the shortest variation time in the loss of the limited frequency table 1 is longer than the minimum variation time in the loss of the main game table 3). .. The limited frequency table 1 or the main game table 3 can be referred to in the final variation in the time-reduced game state, but the final variation in the time-reduced game state is the probability-variable game state and the non-probability-variable game. Even if the effect content in the final variation is different from that in the state, that is, the effect content in the final variation is different depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. good. For example, when the limited frequency table 1 in which the symbol changes for a relatively long time is referred to, it is possible to incite whether the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state end or become a big hit due to the symbol change. You may perform the production.

Next, FIG. 206 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 146 in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. First, the changes from the tenth embodiment are step 1611 (second variation 1), steps 1635-1 (second variation 1) and 1635-2 (second variation 1), that is, sub in step 1608. After setting the special game start display instruction command to the side, or when the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, in step 1611 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executed. It is determined whether or not the round to be played is a distribution game execution round (a round in which the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, the second R and the fourth R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1850 (second), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1612.

Further, in the case of the final round in the special game in step 1634, in step 1635-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the end demo execution permission flag (when it is turned on, the special game end demo is performed. Turn on the flag that will start the time) and move to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). In addition, even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Next, in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1800 (variation 1), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 207 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (variation 1) of FIG. 206 in the modification 1 from the tenth embodiment. First, the change from the tenth embodiment is step 1803 (second variation 1), that is, if the end demo running flag is off in step 1802, in step 1803 (second variation 1). The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22 in the special game. In step 1803 (second variation 1), if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1806, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1808. As described above, in the change example 1 from the tenth embodiment, the special game end demonstration time, which is the period after the end of the final round of the special game, is the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. The time value is configured to differ depending on whether or not there is a sphere. The conditions under which the special game end demo time differs are not limited to this, and may be different depending on the game state at the time of a big hit, for example. Specifically, (1) it differs depending on whether it is in the probability-variable gaming state or the non-probability-variable gaming state, and (2) it differs depending on whether it is in the time-shortening gaming state or the non-time-shortening gaming state. 3) Probability variation game state and time reduction game state, probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, (4) Probability-variable gaming state and time-shortening gaming state, probability-variable gaming state and non-time-shortening gaming state, non-probability-variable gaming state and time-saving gaming state, and non-probability-variable gaming state and It may be configured so that it differs from the non-time reduction gaming state in some combinations.

Further, in this example, regarding the special game related to a certain jackpot symbol, (1) a special game in which the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state and the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. The game end demo time is the first period (10 seconds), (2) The special game end demo time when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game. Is the second period (3 seconds), (3) The special game end demonstration time when the special game is won in the time shortened game state and the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game is the second period ( 1 second), (4) When the special game is won in the time-reduced game state and the ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the special game end demonstration time is the third period (3 seconds). As described above, it may be configured such that "second period <third period <first period". It should be noted that such a configuration is preferably applied to the special game won in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state or the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. As a specific example of the effect executed during the special game end demo time, in the first period, the effect of notifying the transition to the probability-variable game state and forgetting to remove the IC card used for lending the game ball. In the third period, the game will shift to a non-probability variable game state and a time-saving game state. An effect of notifying and an effect of calling attention to forgetting to remove the IC card are executed, and in the second period, an effect of notifying that the probability fluctuation game state (consecutive villa state) will continue is executed. In this way, the effect to be executed may be different depending on the length of the special game end demonstration time. In addition, comparing the length of the special game end demonstration time for each situation, the special game end demonstration time when the non-probability variable game state is before the start of the special game and the probability variable game state is after the special game ends (first hit). Is 10 seconds, the special game end demonstration time is 3 seconds when the non-probability variable game state and the time shortened game state are reached after the end of the special game, the probability fluctuation game state is before the start of the special game, and the probability fluctuates after the end of the special game. In the case of a game state (continuation of consecutive villas), the special game end demo time may be configured to have a time value relationship such as 1 second.

Next, FIG. 208 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. After turning off the special game in step 2430, in step 2480 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a long release command for the special game end command (end demo time information set in step 1810). It is a command related to, and it is determined whether or not it is a command related to the fact that the end demo time is 10 seconds, which is a long time. In the case of Yes in step 2480 (second change 1), in step 2482 (second change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S notifies that the continuous villa continuation image (transition to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game). For example, set a command to display "Congratulations! Still more!" For a long time (10 seconds in this example), and move to the next process (process in step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2480 (second change 1), that is, if the special game end command is a short release command, in step 2484 (second change 1), the consecutive villa end image (probability after the end of the special game). It is an effect to notify that the game does not shift to the variable game state. For example, a command for displaying "See you again!" For a short time (3 seconds in this example) is set, and the next process (step 2900) is performed. Process). It should be noted that the special game end demo time is configured to be different depending on whether the special game end demo time is a long time (10 seconds) or a short time (3 seconds). Shortening the time after the end of the special game when the game end demo time is long (10 seconds) The effect mode (effect tendency) in the game state and the special when the special game end demo time is short (3 seconds) Time reduction after the end of the game It is configured to be the same as the effect mode (effect tendency) in the game state.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the tenth embodiment, a special game end demonstration time is provided after the final round in the special game is completed, and the special game is specified by the running special game. By configuring the special game end demonstration time period to differ depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the area C22, it is highly profitable for the player to enter the specific area C22. While performing an effect that congratulates the player of the time, if the ball is not entered in the specific area C22, it is not highly profitable for the player, so the effect is performed for a short time and then the normal game is returned. It can be a gaming machine with more intonation.

In addition, in the change example 1 from the tenth embodiment, the special game start demonstration time may be provided. In the special game start demonstration time, since it is not determined whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the special game, the special game start demonstration time depends on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22. The period of will not be different. However, the special game start demonstration time may be different depending on the game state when the special game is won. For example, when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state, 10 seconds (right to the player). (Relatively long time to execute the effect that prompts the player to execute the hit), 3 seconds if the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state (relative because the effect that encourages the player to execute the right hit is not executed) It may be configured to be for a short time). In addition, when a special game in which an opening pattern designed so that the ball enters the specific area C22 is executed is performed, the special game start demonstration time is substantially like "SUPER lucky!". In addition, the intonation may be enhanced by performing an effect that suggests that the game will be in a probability-variable game state after the end of the special game.

(Example 2 of change from the 10th embodiment)
In addition, in the tenth embodiment and the change example 1 from the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game is configured. Although illustrated, such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the tenth embodiment and the configuration of the modification 1 from the tenth embodiment. Therefore, a configuration having a specific region C22 different from the tenth embodiment and the first modification from the tenth embodiment is referred to as the second modification from the tenth embodiment, and only the changes from the tenth embodiment are described below. Describe.

The step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in their respective embodiments. It indicates that it is a code, a means name, or the like.

First, FIG. 209 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 146 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, the difference from the tenth embodiment is step 1609-1 (second variation 2) and step 3100 (second variation 2), that is, in step 1608, a special game start display instruction command to the sub side is issued. After setting, in step 1609-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demo execution permission flag and proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). Next, in step 3100 (second variation 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the start demo time control process described later, and proceeds to step 1610.

Next, FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 209 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, the differences from the tenth embodiment are step 1851-1 (second variation 2), step 1899-1 (second variation 2) to step 1899-7 (second variation 2), that is, step. In 1851-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is off during the distribution demonstration time. If Yes in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1852, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1854. Further, after setting the long opening pattern in step 1856 or setting the short opening pattern in step 1858, in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol. It is determined whether or not it is the first main game symbol (first main game jackpot symbol). In the case of Yes in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in step 1899-2 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the distribution start demo timer for a long time {step 1899-3 (second variation 2). It is a time value that is longer than the time value set in change 2). In this example, 10 seconds} is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second change 2). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in other words, when the stop symbol is the second main game symbol (second main game jackpot symbol), step 1899-3 (second variation 2). ), The CPUMC of the main control board M is a time value that is shorter than the time value set in the distribution start demo timer in a short time {step 1899-2 (second variation 2). In this example, 3 Seconds} is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-4 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command related to the determined distribution start demo time information (a command to the sub side, and the distribution of the special game being executed. Set the command) related to the time value of the minute demo time. Next, in step 1899-5 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution demo time flag (the flag that starts the distribution demonstration time when it is turned on), and steps. Move to 1899-6 (2nd variation 2). Even if No in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1899-6 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the distribution start demo timer is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), in step 1899-7 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during the distribution demonstration time and proceeds to step 1860. .. If No in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634). As described above, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, the distribution start demonstration time, which is the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, is the second when the first main game side is a big hit. It takes longer than the case of a big hit on the main game side.

Next, FIG. 211 is a configuration diagram of an example of an opening pattern of the large winning opening. The jackpot symbols in the tenth embodiment are three types of the first main game jackpot symbol "4A, 5A, 7A" and three types of the second main game jackpot symbol "4B, 5B, 7B", for a total of six types of jackpots. It has a symbol, and there are only two types of open patterns in one round: "short open = 500 ms open → closed" and "long open = 30000 ms open → closed". The opening pattern of the large winning opening (first large winning opening C10 or second large winning opening C20) is not limited to this, and the types may be increased, or the opening may be performed multiple times in one round. An open pattern (for example, "10000 ms open-> 10000 ms closed-> 10000 ms open-> closed") may be used. Here, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, only the second main game chief opening jackpot "5B / 7B" has a long opening pattern of the big winning opening in all rounds (10R). .. In addition, the distribution game execution round in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened is the fourth round, and the first big winning opening is opened in the other rounds. In addition, the number of rounds executed in all jackpots is 4 or more, and the distribution game execution round is configured to be executed without fail. In this way, the first main game chief open jackpot "5A / 7A" has a round with a short opening (2nd R), while the second main game chief open jackpot "5B / 7B" has a round. There is no round that becomes a short opening, that is, the number of rounds that become a short opening is configured so that the number of rounds that become a short opening is larger than that of the second main game chief opening jackpot.

Next, FIG. 212 is a flowchart of the start demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (second variation 2) of FIG. 209 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the start demo executing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts by setting the start demo time (3 seconds in this example) in the start demo time timer. Next, in step 3016, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped jackpot symbol is the second main game jackpot symbol (3B, 5B, and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the second long release command (the special game related to the second main game jackpot symbol) as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. The command related to the above is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, if No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped jackpot symbol is the first main game length open jackpot symbol (5A and 7A in this example). do. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first long open command (the second big winning opening of the first main game jackpot symbol) as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command relating to the start of a special game in which C20 is open for a long time) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, if No in step 3110, in other words, the stopped jackpot symbol is not the first main game length open jackpot symbol, that is, the first main game short open symbol (2A in this example). In step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first short opening command (the second big winning opening C20 of the first main game big hit symbol is short opening as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command related to the start of the special game) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116.

Next, in step 3116, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined start demo time information to the sub side. Next, in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demo executing flag and proceeds to step 3120. Even if No in step 3102, the process proceeds to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is 0. If Yes in step 3120, in step 3122, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demo running flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demo execution permission flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game execution flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1610). On the other hand, even if No in step 3120, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1610).

Next, FIG. 213 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. The changes from the tenth embodiment are step 2403-1 (second variation 2) to step 2403-11 (second variation 2) and step 2350 (second variation 2), that is, the special game in step 2402. After turning off the middle flag, in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the special game start demonstration time by turning on the start demonstration flag (turning on). Determines if the flag) is off. If Yes in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2404. Next, in the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2403-2 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) in the start demo display timer and sets the timer. Start. Next, in step 2403-3 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the start demo in-progress flag. Next, in step 2350 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start demonstration effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 2403-4 (second variation 2). In addition, even if No in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-4 (second variation 2).

Next, in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is 0. In the case of Yes in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), in step 2403-5 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the start demonstration flag and proceeds to step 2412. On the other hand, if No in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

Further, after setting the command related to the jackpot start display in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command related to the distribution start demo time information from the main side in step 2403-6 (second variation 2). Determine if it has been done. In the case of Yes in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a long distribution start demonstration time (10 seconds in this example). ). In the second modification from the tenth embodiment, there are two types of time values of the distribution start demo time, that is, the start demo time of the distribution game execution round, long time and short time. In the case of Yes in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-8 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not easily enter the ball during the long distribution start demonstration time. The notification effect (the effect of not deterministically notifying the player whether or not the second big winning opening C20 will be open for a long time in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and the step 2403-10 (second change 2) is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-9 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S enters the ball at the distribution start demonstration time which is short. Execute an easy notification effect (a production that deterministically notifies the player that the second big winning opening C20 will be open for a long time in the distribution game execution round), and shifts to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). do. Even if No in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). As described above, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, in the distribution game execution round related to the first main game symbol, the ball entry easy unnotified effect is executed, and the distribution game related to the second main game symbol is executed. In the execution round, it is configured to execute an easy entry notification effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and which of the easy-to-enter ball notification effect and the easy-to-enter ball notification effect may be executed may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the distribution game execution round related to the long open jackpot (5A / 7A) on the first main game side, which is won in the non-time shortened game state and the non-probability variable game state, the ball entry easy unannounced effect is executed. In the distribution game execution round related to the long open jackpot (3B, 5B, 7B) on the second main game side, which is won in the time shortening game state and the probability fluctuation game state, it is configured to execute the ball entry easy notification effect. May be good. In addition, it is configured to enable the player to be notified that there is a hold that is a big hit among the holds that exist during the execution of the special game, and the hold inner consecutive villa effect is executed. Even in the case where the ball is easily entered, the unnotified effect of easy entry and the easy notification effect of entry may be displayed so as not to be noticeable to the player.

Next, in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game related to the second main game chief open jackpot symbol (2nd variation 2). The second main game chief open jackpot symbols are 3B, 5B and 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2416. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), in step 2403-11 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of winnings (short release). In the case of a big hit in which there is a round to be, the number of rounds is not notified), and the process proceeds to step 2426. As described above, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, the second main game chief open jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol in which the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is long open in all rounds. In the jackpot related to, the round being executed is notified at the time of each round (notifying how many rounds are currently being executed), while the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning is notified in any of the rounds. In the big hit where the mouth C20 is short-opened (or in the big hit where the first big winning mouth C10 has a short-opened round), the round being executed is not notified at the time of executing each round. If the running round is not notified, an object image (for example, a treasure chest, etc.) corresponding to the number of rounds (actual number of rounds) is displayed on the first large winning opening C10 or the second instead of the display notifying the round. The large winning opening C20 may be additionally displayed each time a round in which the opening is long is executed. In addition, a plurality of object images are displayed at the start of the special game (or immediately after the start of the special game), and an effect that guarantees that the number of rounds corresponding to the number of the object images is long open is executed. You may. It should be noted that the effect may not be executed or may be executed at the time of executing the special game in which all rounds are open for a long time, but if it is not executed, the number of rounds currently being executed is displayed. Is desirable. In any round, in the big hit where the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is short-opened (or in the big hit where the first big winning opening C10 has a short opening), The first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 may be configured to notify only the number of rounds in which the long opening is performed (for example, "1st R = long opening, 2nd R = short opening, 3R = long opening". If it becomes "open", it will be notified in the 3rd round that it is the second round, etc.). The effect to be executed during the execution of the special game is not limited to this. For example, a big hit is held in a predetermined round (or a distribution game execution round) after the distribution game execution round during the special game execution. If there is a hold that becomes, it may be configured to be able to execute the hold in-house consecutive villa effect that notifies that it is certain that the jackpot will be a big hit. In the case of such a configuration, the game state after the end of the special game is not determined (to the specific area C22) when the hold inner consecutive villa production is executed in the round before the distribution game execution round. Since it has not been decided whether or not to enter the ball), there is a possibility that the symbol change related to the hold that was the subject of the notification will be lost even though it has been notified that it will be a big hit. It is preferable that the execution timing of the villa effect is after entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round or after the distribution game execution round is completed. Further, the distribution game execution round may be any round, and for example, the first round may be configured to be the distribution game execution round (it can also be applied when there is one big winning opening). However, even if there is no game ball to hit (for example, if all the game balls are cut off during the winning symbol change), the second round so that there is enough time to lend additional game balls. It is desirable to do it after that.

Next, FIG. 214 is a flowchart of the start demo effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 2) of FIG. 160 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to receive the second long release command from the main side. If Yes in step 2352, the process proceeds to step 2360. On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to receive the first long release command from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S notifies that the final effect execution lottery (the second big winning opening C20 is opened for a long time in the special game being executed) that is won by 1/5. Execute a lottery to see if or not. Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the final effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2358, the process proceeds to step 2360. Next, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a long-opening confirmation notification effect (an effect of notifying that the second large winning opening C20 is long-opened in the special game being executed) as a start demonstration effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)}. If No in step 2354 (when the first short release command is received from the main side) or No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has no long open as a start demonstration effect. The notification effect (the effect of not notifying whether the second big winning opening C20 is long-opened or short-opened in the special game being executed) is executed, and the next process {process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)} Move to. In addition, even in the special game start demonstration time in which the start demonstration effect is executed, the jackpot on the first main game side (higher ratio) is 10 seconds, and the second main game is the same as the distribution start demonstration time. The jackpot on the side (higher percentage) may be configured to be 3 seconds.

With the above configuration, in the change example 2 from the tenth embodiment, in the special game related to the second main game side, the second big winning opening in the distribution game execution round in all the special games. In the special game in which the C20 opens for a long time and is related to the first main game side, a special game in which the second large winning opening C20 opens for a long time and a special game for which the second major winning opening C20 opens for a long time are provided in the distribution game execution round. In the special game on the 2nd main game side, it is notified that the 2nd big prize opening C20 will be opened for a long time at the start demonstration time of the special game, while in the special game on the 1st main game side, the 2nd big prize is won. Even if it is a special game in which the mouth C20 is opened for a long time, it is configured to have a case where the second big winning mouth C20 is notified to be long open and a case where it is not notified at the start demonstration time of the special game, and during the special game. In the special game on the side of the second main game in which it is certain that the ball will enter the specific area C22, the player is notified that the second large winning opening C20 will be opened for a long time, while the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. In the special game on the side of the first main game, which is not definitive to be played, the player is basically given an effect of inciting whether or not the second big winning opening C20 is opened for a long time, but there is also a case where the player is definitively notified. By configuring it as such, it is possible to make a highly entertaining gaming machine capable of performing an effect corresponding to the ease of entering the specific area C22.

In addition, in the change example 2 from the tenth embodiment, the ball entry easy notification effect and the ball entry easy non-notification effect are configured to be executed at the distribution start demo time, but before the distribution game execution round. It may be executed during the execution of the round to be executed (may be executed over a plurality of rounds), or may be executed during the execution of the distribution game execution round.

<<<<< 11th Embodiment Power Off and Sensor Detection >>>>>
Next, as the eleventh embodiment, the relationship with various sensors (sometimes referred to as a detection device, a ball entry detection device, etc.) installed inside the gaming machine will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the tenth embodiment, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 shown in FIG. 195 are provided. That is, the specific region C22 is provided inside the second prize opening C20. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, a specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1, a discharge ball detection device 2224-2, a total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, and the like are provided as sensors.

<<< Relationship between power off processing and total discharge game ball counting processing >>>
Next, the timing related to the counting process of the total discharged game balls will be described as a timing in which power may not be supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of the power failure. The total discharge game ball count process is based on, for example, the flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Determines if is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the total emission when the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is the input ball detection time (when the total emission confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for that time or longer). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered). In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2508, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90. In this way, the counting process of the total discharged game balls is performed.

The time from the occurrence of the power outage to the detection of the power outage can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine. For example, in the flowchart of timer interrupt processing in FIG. 146, the power is cut off depending on the period of the predetermined time of the interrupt interval T, and the power off processing is executed at a short interrupt interval or the power is turned off at a long interrupt interval. It is possible to determine whether to execute the process. The design value of the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. Hereinafter, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it deviates as a design value. It will not be. Further, the same applies to the time other than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure, and the time for the game medal to flow down, the time for the disc D50 of the medal payout device H, and the like, which are illustrated in this example, are various. Applicable to the configuration.

<< Operation pattern 1 related to power off processing and sensor >>
FIG. 215 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off state processing and the counter count processing related to the discharge ball abnormality are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the distribution winning detection device 2221 and the specific area entry detection device 2224-1, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game ball (on or off). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (g1) to (g6), and as time elapses, the timing changes from (g1) to (g6). In the eleventh embodiment, the power supply cutoff is detected and the power supply cutoff process is executed at the same interrupt interval, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power failure detection and the execution of the power supply cutoff process are executed. Can also be done with separate interrupts.

Under the situation where the game ball is flowing into the second prize opening C20, the power supply is cut off at the timing of (g1). Next, at the timing of (g2), the distribution winning detection device 2221 detects the game ball and turns off → on, and at the same time, executes the addition processing of the counter value related to the ejection ball abnormality. Next, at the timing of (g3), the distribution winning detection device 2221 is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (g4), the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 detects the game ball and turns off → on, and at the same time, executes the subtraction process of the counter value related to the ejection ball abnormality. As described above, the game ball that has flowed into the second large winning opening C20 passes through the distribution winning detection device 2221, and then the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 and the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. It is configured to pass through either of them, and when the distribution winning detection device 2221 detects a game ball, it executes a counter value addition process related to the ejection ball abnormality, and executes a specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or an ejection ball detection device. When 2224-2 detects a game ball, it is configured to execute a counter value subtraction process related to an abnormality in the ejected ball. Therefore, the game ball enters the 1st ball 2nd prize opening C20 and then flows down normally. In that case, the counter value changes as "0-> 1-> 0". In the figure, the case where the game ball flowing into the second large winning opening C20 passes through the specific area winning ball detecting device 2224-1 after passing through the distribution winning winning detection device 2221 is illustrated.

After that, at the timing of (g5), the specific region entry detection device 2224-1 is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (g6), the gaming machine detects the power outage, and the power outage processing is executed. In this way, even when the power is cut off when the game ball flows into the second large winning opening C20, the game ball passes through the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. Since it is configured to execute the power-off processing later, it can be configured to execute the power-off processing after the addition / subtraction processing of the counter value related to the discharge ball abnormality is normally executed. When the power is turned off while only the counter value addition process related to is executed, the game progresses while the counter value related to the discharge ball abnormality is not normal (while it is not 0), in other words, the power is turned off. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the discharge ball due to the execution timing of the time processing.

The execution timing of the counter value addition / subtraction process related to the discharge ball abnormality is not limited to the configuration illustrated in the figure, and any of the following may be adopted.
(1) Execution timing of counter value addition processing related to ejection ball abnormality: Timing when the distribution winning detection device 2221 is turned off → on, execution timing of counter value subtraction processing related to ejection ball abnormality: Specific area entry detection device Timing when 2224-1 or discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned off → on (2) Timing of execution of counter value addition processing related to discharge ball abnormality: Timing when distribution winning detection device 2221 is turned off → on, Execution timing of counter value subtraction processing related to discharge ball abnormality: Timing when the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned on → off (3) Counter value addition processing related to discharge ball abnormality Execution timing: Timing when the distribution winning detection device 2221 is turned on → off, execution timing of the counter value subtraction processing related to the ejection ball abnormality: Specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or ejection ball detection device 2224-2 Timing of turning off → on (4) Timing of execution of counter value addition processing related to ejection ball abnormality: Timing of turning on / off of distribution winning detection device 2221, execution timing of subtraction processing of counter value related to ejection ball abnormality : Timing when the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned on → off << Operation pattern 2 related to power off processing and sensor >>
FIG. 216 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off time processing and the counting processing of the total emission confirmation number counter are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game ball (on or off). .. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (h1) to (h6), and as time elapses, they change from (h1) to (h6). In the eleventh embodiment, the power failure is detected and the power failure process is executed by the same interrupt processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power failure detection and the execution of the power failure process are executed. Can also be performed by separate interrupt processing.

Under the situation where the game ball is flowing into the first main game start port A10, the power is cut off at the timing of (h1). Next, at the timing of (h2), the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s detects the game ball and turns off → on. Next, at the timing of (h3), the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (h4), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the game ball and turns off → on, and at the same time, the counter value addition processing of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is executed. As described above, the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is a counter for outputting information on the total emission number (which may be the total number of fired game balls) to the outside of the gaming machine. After that, at the timing of (h5), the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (h6), the gaming machine detects the power outage, and the power outage processing is executed. In this way, even if a power failure occurs when the game ball flows into the first main game start port A10, the power cutoff process is executed after the game ball passes through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. Therefore, it is possible to configure the counter value addition processing of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 to be executed normally and then the power cutoff processing to be executed, and the game ball is placed at the first main game start port A10. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the addition process of the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is not executed even though the ball has been entered.

In the figure, the configuration in which the addition process of the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is executed when the total emission confirmation sensor C90s detects the game ball is illustrated, but it is as shown in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 215. , 1st main game start port When the ball entry sensors of various entry ports such as the ball entry detection device A11s detect a game ball, the addition process to a predetermined counter value is executed, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s plays the game. By executing the subtraction process to the predetermined counter value when the ball is detected, it may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not the number of game balls that have entered and the number of game balls that have been discharged match.

In addition, also in FIG. 215 and FIG. 216, the time value can be compared in the same manner as the configuration of the eighth embodiment described above. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure by the gaming machine may be T1 and T2 may be any of the following.

In FIG. 125,
(1) After all the game balls have flowed into the inside of the distribution electric accessory 2222 (from the player to the back side), the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned on → off. Time until (2) After all the game balls have flowed into the inside of the distribution electric accessory 2222 (from the player to the back side), the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned off. Time until it is turned on (3) Distribution Ball entry detection device 2224-1 or discharge ball detection after half of the game ball (volume) has flowed into the inside (from the player to the back side) of the distribution electric accessory 2222. Time until device 2224-2 is turned on → off (4) Distribution ball (volume) half of the game ball (volume) flows into the inside (from the player to the back side) of the electric accessory 2222, and then the specific area entry detection device Time until 2224-1 or discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned off (5) Specified after a part of the game ball flows into the inside (from the player to the back side) of the distribution electric accessory 2222. Time until the area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned on → off (6) A part of the game ball is inside (from the player to the back side) the distribution electric accessory 2222. The time from when half of the inflow to when the specific region entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned off → on may be set as T2.

In FIG. 126,
(1) Time from the timing when the game ball that has flowed into the first main game start port A10 becomes invisible to the player until the total discharge counter C90 is turned on → off (2) Flow into the first main game start port A10 Time from the timing when the game ball is no longer visible to the player until the total discharge counter C90 is turned off → on (3) Half of the game ball (volume) that has flowed into the first main game start port A10 is the player. Time from the timing when the total discharge counter C90 is turned on → off from the timing when it becomes invisible from Time until the total discharge counter C90 turns off → on (5) The total discharge counter C90 turns on → off from the timing when a part of the game ball that has flowed into the first main game start port A10 becomes invisible to the player. (6) The time from when a part of the game ball that has flowed into the first main game start port A10 becomes invisible to the player until the total discharge counter C90 turns off → on can be set as T2. good.

As described above, when T1 and T2 are set, T1 <T2 is configured to hold in the eleventh embodiment as in the eighth embodiment.

<<< 12th Embodiment Stop button operation and reel stop control >>>
Next, a configuration relating to a stop button and reel control applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below as a twelfth embodiment.

In the twelfth embodiment, the reel stop control in the operation of the reel stop button (here, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are applicable) will be described. The operation control of the stepping motor related to the reel stop control is as described above, but the reel rotation is stopped after transitioning to the "reel deceleration state" which is the reel drive state shown in FIG. 35 (6). The reel can be stopped by exciting all the phases of the stepping motor (for example, four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) (four-phase excitation). In the twelfth embodiment, the treatment in which all the phases (for example, four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, Φ3) are excited (four-phase excitation) is referred to as “four-phase excitation treatment”. be.

In the reel-type gaming machine, the stop button sensor built into each stop button is turned off → on according to the operation of the stop button (corresponding to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Or, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute the control for stopping the rotating reel by the information that it is turned on → off. The operation of the stop button in the twelfth embodiment indicates a physical operation, and refers to, for example, pressing the left stop button D41 or moving away from the state in which the left stop button D41 is pressed. .. Further, the state in which the stop button is not operated may be referred to as, for example, the state in which the stop button is not pressed. In addition, turning the stop button sensor from off to on when the stop button is valid may be referred to as the operation of the stop button being accepted.

In the twelfth embodiment, the operation of the stop button for mainly stopping the rotating reel and the stop control of the reel will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, in order to explain in detail the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the stop control of the reel,
Pattern 1: The 4-phase excitation process is executed after the stop button sensor is turned on → off. Pattern 2: The 4-phase excitation process is executed before the stop button sensor is turned on → off. .. In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that these two patterns are possessed with respect to the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the stop control of the reel. As described above, the four-phase excitation process is the control of the step motor that is executed when the reel drive state becomes the reel deceleration state.

The operation of the stop button (corresponding to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) and the timing at which the stop button sensor is turned off → on and on → off will be described. The stop button sensor is a sensor built into each stop button, and is turned off by pressing the stop button by a predetermined distance from the initial position (the position corresponding to the non-operation state) (at the initial position). The main control board M is configured to be able to execute the reel rotation stop processing related to the flow of FIG. 34 by turning the stop button sensor from off to on. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined distance for satisfying the condition that the stop button sensor is turned off → on can be appropriately changed. As an example, the maximum distance at which the stop button can be pressed may be set, or the distance may be half the maximum distance at which the stop button can be pressed.

<< Pattern in which 4-phase excitation processing ends after the stop button sensor is turned off >>
FIG. 217 is an example of an image diagram in which the operation for stopping the rotating reel is drawn in chronological order. In FIG. 217, the operation from the stop button operation to the reel stop in the twelfth embodiment is divided into frames (a1) to (f1) for each focus event. In the twelfth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first is the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is the left stop button D41 among the reels that are rotating. Not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be added that the configuration is not applicable only to the reel and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop for all push orders.

Further, in the figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor is turned off → on), the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then until the left reel stops. The case where the reel stops after rotating the maximum design distance (also referred to as the maximum slip) is illustrated. It should be noted that the operation of the left stop button is accepted when rotating the maximum distance in the design (the stop button sensor is turned off → on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then left. When the maximum value of the sliding time according to the rule is 190 ms, the time value until the reel stops (sometimes called the sliding time) has some margin so as not to exceed the maximum value according to the rule. As an example in this example, the maximum value of the slip time in the design is 185 ms, and the distance corresponding to the 185 ms is the maximum distance in the design.

(A1) to (f1) of FIG. 217 will be described in detail. First, in (a1), the left stop button D41 is not stopped (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and in a state where the left stop button D41 is pressed by a distance of x from the initial position (b1), the left stop button sensor is turned off → on. Become. Here, the distance at which the left stop button D41 is pushed from the initial position is x. As will be described later, the left stop button D41 is configured to be able to be pushed by the maximum distance d from the initial position, and it is assumed that the relation of 0 <x <d is established as the relation of the pushed distance. At the timing of (b1), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant speed rotation). In addition, when the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, the reel (left reel M51) is stopped regardless of the operation status of the stop button (time until it is pushed, etc.). Is executed, the reel (left reel M51) is stopped after moving the maximum design distance from the timing of (b1).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed, and the left stop button D41 is in a state of being pressed by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (c1). In (c1), the left stop button sensor is maintained in the on state, and the reel driving state of the left reel M51 is maintained in the reel deceleration standby state. The time values from (b1) to (c1) vary depending on how the player operates the left stop button D41. In this example, the player performs a stop operation on the left stop button D41. The case where the stop operation is executed for the left stop button D41 in a short time (for example, 5 ms), which is a general time value required for the execution, is illustrated.

After that, the left stop button D41 is separated immediately after the state of (c1) is reached, and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and the distance x from the initial position (to be exact, The left button sensor is turned on and off in the state of returning to (d1) when the timing becomes less than x). In both (b1) and (d1), the state in which the left stop button is located at a distance of x from the initial position is shown, but the distance of x from the initial position is the on / off of the stop button sensor. Since it indicates off, more accurately, the stop button sensor is on at a distance of x or more from the initial position, and the stop button sensor is off at a distance of less than x from the initial position. Note that x may be adjusted as appropriate, and when the stop button is in the initial position, the stop button sensor is on, and when the stop button is not in the initial position (when pressed even a little), the stop button sensor is on. It may be configured to be. The time from the position where the left stop button D41 is pushed by the maximum distance d to the return to the initial position changes according to the spring constant of the spring of the left stop button D41.

Further, in (d1), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 maintains the reel deceleration standby state.

After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and in the state where the left stop button returns to the initial position (e1), the left stop button sensor remains off and the left. The reel drive state of the reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes 4-phase excitation. The timing at which the reel drive state is switched from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example in the figure, and may be a timing before or after the left stop button returns to the initial position. Timing may be acceptable. Further, the four-phase excitation of the step motor will be described in detail. When the reel drive state is switched from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (when the scheduled stop symbol and the passing symbol match), the counter of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter. Since 4-phase excitation is turned on after setting 100 (a value corresponding to about 223.5 ms) as a value, more accurately, about 0 after the reel drive state is switched from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state. After 5 ms, 4-phase excitation is turned on. After that, the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter is subtracted by the interrupt processing executed while the 4-phase excitation is turned on, and when the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter becomes 0. It is configured to turn off 4-phase excitation.

After that, while the left stop button is stopped at the initial position, the step motor is decelerated by 4-phase excitation with respect to the left reel, and the left reel is stopped at the position rotated by the maximum distance in the design described above, and then stopped in the middle. The operation of the button D42 and the right stop button D43 becomes valid (the reception of the stop operation is valid).

In the figure, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button of 1 stops (stop control ends), the stop buttons other than the stop button of 1 are used. The operation is configured so that it is not valid (it does not accept stop operations).

In this way, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, the other stop buttons are not effective until the reel corresponding to the stop button of the 1 is stopped, so that the operation of the plurality of reels is driven at the timing of 1. Control can be performed to prevent a situation in which the step motor is overloaded. Further, even in such a configuration, when the stop operation of the stop button 1 is executed and the vehicle is immediately separated (when the maximum distance d is pushed from the initial position and the vehicle is separated immediately), the stop button is released from the separation. The design value of the shortest time required for the sensor to turn on → off can be shorter than the design value of the time from when the stop button is turned off → on until the 4-phase excitation of the step motor is completed. .. That is, even when the stop operation of the stop button of 1 is executed and the reel is separated immediately, before the reel rotates by the maximum design distance and stops, in other words, before the stop operation of the other stop button becomes effective. Since the stop button of the above 1 is configured to be able to return to the initial position, the player can stop the stop button corresponding to the other reel immediately after the reel that has performed the other stop operation is stopped. Is configured to be able to do.

In addition, when the stop operation of the stop button of 1 is executed and the sensor is separated immediately, the time value of the shortest time required for the stop button sensor to turn on → off from the separation and the stop button off → on are obtained. The time value from to the end of 4-phase excitation of the step motor varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. In this example, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it deviates as a design value. It means that you have not done so.

In the figure, the configuration in which the stop button returns to the initial position before the reel rotates the maximum design distance and stops by pushing in the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately separating from the reel is excited. It is not limited to this, and it satisfies that the stop button sensor is turned on → off before the reel rotates the maximum distance by design and stops by pushing in the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately separating. It may be configured as follows.

<< Pattern 1 in which the 4-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off >>
FIG. 218 is an example of an image diagram in which the operation for stopping the rotating reel is drawn in chronological order. In FIG. 218, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the twelfth embodiment is divided into the frames (a2) to (f2) for each focus event. In the twelfth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first is the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is the left stop button D41 among the reels that are rotating. Not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be added that the configuration is not applicable only to the reel and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop for all push orders.

Further, in the figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor is turned off → on), the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then until the left reel stops. The case where the reel stops after rotating the maximum design distance (also referred to as the maximum slip) is illustrated.

(A2) to (f2) of FIG. 218 will be described in detail. First, in (a2), the left stop button D41 is not stopped (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and in a state where the left stop button D41 is pressed by a distance of x from the initial position (b2), the left stop button sensor is turned off → on. Become. At the timing of (b2), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant speed rotation).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed, and the left stop button D41 is in a state of being pressed by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (c2). In (c2), the left stop button sensor is maintained in the ON state, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes 4-phase excitation. The timing at which the reel drive state is switched from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example in the figure, and may be a timing before or after the left stop button returns to the initial position. The timing may be sufficient, as long as the reel is rotating in (c2).

After that, the left stop button D41 is released immediately after the state of (c2) is reached, and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and returns to the distance y from the initial position. At (d2), the left reel stops at a position rotated by the maximum design distance (also referred to as maximum slip) after the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state. The distance y may be y <d and may be y = x.

After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and when the left stop button is at a distance less than x from the initial position (e2), the left stop button sensor turns on → off. .. After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position at (f2), and the stop operation of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 is effective. It becomes. The timing at which the stop operation of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 becomes effective is not limited to this, and the timing at which the left stop button D41 is turned on → off (and the left reel is stopped). May be.

In the figure, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button of 1 stops (stop control ends), the stop buttons other than the stop button of 1 are used. The operation is configured so that it is not valid (it does not accept stop operations).

In this way, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, the other stop buttons are not effective until the reel corresponding to the stop button of the 1 is stopped, so that the operation of the plurality of reels is driven at the timing of 1. Control can be performed to prevent a situation in which the step motor is overloaded. In addition, in such a configuration, the reel is the maximum in design even when the stop operation of the stop button 1 is executed and the reel is immediately separated (when the maximum distance d is pushed from the initial position and the reel is immediately separated). Since the stop button of 1 is configured to return to the initial position after rotating a distance and stopping, the player can perform a stop operation of another stop button if the stop button returns to the initial position. The game can proceed smoothly.

<< Pattern 2 in which the 4-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off >>
FIG. 219 is an example of an image diagram in which the operation for stopping the rotating reel is drawn in chronological order. In FIG. 219, the operation from the stop button operation to the reel stop in the twelfth embodiment is divided into frames (a3) to (f3) for each focus event. In the twelfth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first is the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is the left stop button D41 among the reels that are rotating. Not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be added that the configuration is not applicable only to the reel and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop for all push orders.

Further, in the figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor is turned off → on), the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then until the left reel stops. The case where the reel stops after rotating the maximum design distance (also referred to as the maximum slip) is illustrated.

(A3) to (f3) of FIG. 219 will be described in detail. First, in (a3), the left stop button D41 is not stopped (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and in a state where the left stop button D41 is pressed by a distance of x from the initial position (b3), the left stop button sensor is turned off → on. Become. At the timing of (b3), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant speed rotation).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed, and the left stop button D41 is pressed by a distance y from the initial position (c3). By the time (c3) is reached, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and in (c3), the left reel M51 is stopped. Also, the left stop button sensor remains on. The distance y may be y <d.

After that, the left reel M51 is pushed in, and the left stop button D41 is pressed by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (d3). In (d3), the left stop button sensor remains on.

After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and when the left stop button is at a distance less than x from the initial position (e3), the left stop button sensor turns on → off. .. After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position at (f3), and the stop operation of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 is effective. It becomes. The timing at which the stop operation of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 becomes effective is not limited to this, and the timing at which the left stop button D41 is turned on → off (and the left reel is stopped). May be.

In the figure, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button of 1 stops (stop control ends), the stop buttons other than the stop button of 1 are used. The operation is configured so that it is not valid (it does not accept stop operations).

In this way, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, the other stop buttons are not effective until the reel corresponding to the stop button of the 1 is stopped, so that the operation of the plurality of reels is driven at the timing of 1. Control can be performed to prevent a situation in which the step motor is overloaded. Further, even in such a configuration, the reel is designed to be separated even when the stop operation of the stop button 1 is executed and the reel is immediately separated (when the maximum distance d is pushed from the initial position and the reel is immediately separated). Since the stop button of 1 is configured to return to the initial position after rotating the maximum distance of and stopping, the player can stop the other stop buttons if the stop button returns to the initial position. It can be done, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<<<<<< Performance Display Device SH >>>>>
The gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be provided with a performance display device SH that displays the operating status of the gaming machine such as the accessory ratio. It will be described in detail.

First, with reference to FIG. 220, a display example of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be illustrated. The performance display device SH is formed by arranging four-digit segments in a horizontal row, the upper two digits (two digits on the left side) are the identification segment SH10, and the lower two digits (two digits on the right side) are the ratio segment SH20. It has become. The identification seg SH10 is configured to display information that can identify the currently displayed item, and the ratio seg SH20 is configured to display numerical information corresponding to the currently displayed item. Further, a dot point SH30 is provided at the lower right of the lower digit (right digit) of the identification seg SH10, and is configured so that the identification seg SH10 and the ratio seg SH20 can be easily distinguished depending on the presence or absence of the dot point SH30. ing. There is no problem even if the dot point SH30 is not provided.

<<< Installation position >>>
The installation position of the performance display device SH may be configured to be directly attached to the main control board M, and in such a configuration, visibility is improved by a sticker or the like attached to the main board case M40 covering the main control board M. It is desirable to install it in an unobstructed position.

<<< Display items >>
The following items are given as an example of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH.
(A) = Cumulative advantageous section ratio The "cumulative advantageous section ratio" is the ratio of the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous section to the total number of games (cumulative number of games), and is "in the advantageous section". It can be calculated by "cumulative number of games divided by total number of games x 100 (%)". As an example, when the game progresses in the order of "start of operation of gaming machine-> normal section A-> advantageous section A-> normal section B-> advantageous section B", "(number of games in advantageous section A + game in advantageous section B" Number of times) ÷ (number of games played in normal section A + number of games played in advantageous section A + number of games played in normal section B + number of games played in advantageous section B) × 100 (%) ”.

The "cumulative" is the latest performance display device SH from the predetermined measurement start timing from the start of operation of the gaming machine to the calculation of the item to be displayed on the latest performance display device SH. It shows the cumulative total from the start of the measurement for displaying on the performance display device SH to the calculation of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, such as until the calculation of the item to be displayed on the performance display device SH is executed.

(B) = Consecutive bonus ratio between 6000 games The "continuous bonus ratio" is the ratio of the total number of payouts paid out when the Type 1 special bonus is activated to the total number of payouts, and is "6000 games". The "continuous bonus ratio between games" can be calculated by "the number of payouts during the operation of the first-class special bonus game between 6000 games / the total number of payouts between 6000 games x 100 (%)". As an example, if the number of game medals paid out during the operation of the first-class special accessory during 6000 games: 6000, and the number of medals paid out due to other triggers: 8000, "6000 ÷ (6000 + 8000) × 100 ≒ It is calculated as "42.9 (%)". In addition, "between 6000 games" indicates the interval between 6000 games before the timing when the ratio of continuous characters was calculated most recently.

(C) = Character ratio between 6000 games The "character ratio" is the ratio of the total number of payouts paid out by special and ordinary characters to the total number of payouts, and is "between 6000 games". The "feature ratio" is "(the number of payouts when the first-class special bonus is activated between 6000 games + the number of payouts when the second-class special bonus is activated between 6000 games + the payout when the normal bonus is activated between 6000 games". Number of sheets) ÷ Total number of payouts between 6000 games x 100 (%) ”can be calculated. As an example, the number of game medals paid out when the first-class special character is activated during 6000 games: 5000, and the number of game medals paid out when the second-class special character is operated between 6000 games: 3000, between 6000 games. If the number of payouts due to other triggers is 8000, it is calculated as "(5000 + 3000) ÷ (5000 + 3000 + 8000) x 100 = 50 (%)". In addition, "between 6000 games" indicates the interval between 6000 games before the timing when the accessory ratio was calculated most recently.

(D) = Cumulative continuous bonus ratio The "cumulative continuous bonus ratio" is calculated by "cumulative number of payouts when Type 1 special bonus is activated / cumulative total payout number x 100 (%)". can. As an example, if the cumulative number of game medals to be paid out when the first-class special accessory is activated is 600,000 and the number of medals to be paid out due to other triggers is 800,000, "600,000 ÷ (600,000 + 800,000) × 100 ≒ 42. It is calculated as "9 (%)".

(E) = Cumulative bonus ratio The "cumulative bonus ratio" is "(cumulative number of payouts when Type 1 special bonus is activated + cumulative number of payouts when Type 2 special bonus is activated + cumulative total". It can be calculated by "the number of payouts when the normal accessory is activated) ÷ the total number of payouts in total x 100 (%)". As an example, the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the Type 1 special character is activated: 500,000, the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the Type 2 special character is activated: 300,000, and the total number of game medals paid out due to other triggers. If the number of sheets is 800,000, it is calculated as "(500,000 + 300,000) ÷ (500,000 + 300,000 + 800,000) x 100 = 50 (%)".

Further, "7U" displayed on the identification seg SH10 indicates that the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed, and "6Y" displayed on the identification seg SH10 is the continuous character ratio between 6000 games. Is displayed, and "7Y" displayed on the identification seg SH10 indicates that the character ratio between 6000 games is displayed, and "6A" displayed on the identification seg SH10. "Indicates that the cumulative continuous bonus ratio is displayed, and" 7A "displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative bonus ratio is displayed.

Note that, in FIG. 220, the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed as (a), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cumulative combined accessory ratio may be displayed as (a). good. Here, what is the cumulative ratio of instructed accessories?
Cumulative number of payouts in the game in which the push order navigation (sometimes called an instruction) on the main control board M is executed + cumulative number of payouts by the accessory} ÷ all cumulative payouts x 100 (%)
It is a ratio that can be calculated by, and whether to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative indicated accessory ratio on the performance display device SH may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, since the stop operation is performed in a push order different from the push order navigation, the number of game medals related to the symbol combination that can be won when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is smaller than the number of payout medals. Is paid out, the number of payouts related to the symbol combination that can be won when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is calculated as the number of payouts in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. ..

<<< Display mode >>
The display mode in the performance display device SH may be configured as follows.
-The display is switched in the order of "(a)->(b)->(c)->(d)->(e)-> (a) ..." for about 5 seconds each. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the interval for switching the display is changed, and for example, the display may be configured to be switched every 3 seconds.
-For non-applicable items, "---" is displayed in the ratio segment. The non-applicable items are, for example, the advantageous section ratio in a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous section.
-Ratio display values {advantageous section ratio (%), continuous accessory ratio (%), accessory ratio (%), which are displayed on the ratio segment SH20} are displayed with the decimal point rounded down (in the case of 100%). Display as "99")
・ If the ratio display value is 70% for the advantageous section ratio, 60% for the continuous character ratio, and 70% or more for the character ratio, the ratio segment SH20 is blinked. ・ If the cumulative number of games is less than 400 games, the ratio is displayed in blinking. The ratio display displays "00".-If the cumulative number of games is less than 6000 games, the identification segment SH10 when displaying the continuous character ratio between 6000 games and the character ratio between 6000 games is displayed. Flashing display {Including non-applicable items (for example, in a game machine that does not have an advantageous section, the advantageous section ratio is a non-applicable item because there is no advantageous section ratio)}
-If the cumulative number of games played is less than 175,000 games, the identification segment is blinked when the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed. In addition, when the cumulative number of games played is less than 17,500 games, the identification segment is blinked when displaying the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and when displaying the cumulative bonus ratio (games without continuous bonuses). Including the case of a machine). That is, the cumulative number of games can be measured for 175,000 games or more in order to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio, and the cumulative number of games can be measured for 17500 games or more for displaying the cumulative continuous character ratio and the cumulative character ratio. It is configured to be possible.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the performance display device SH is configured to be able to display the information of (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) described above. The configuration for executing processing such as calculation and display of information related to (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) on the main control board (CPUMC of the main control board M) is described in detail below. Describe.

<<< Memory Map >>>
First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip C will be described with reference to FIG. 221. The memory map shows the address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of these, the built-in ROMC110 is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "27FFH", and the register area built in each circuit in the main control chip C is allocated to the space from "2800H" to "28FFH". The built-in RAMC120 is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F2FFH", and the XCS decoding area (decoding to interpret the given machine language as an internal representation is executed in the space from "FDD0H" to "FDFBH". Area) is allocated. By causing the CPUC 100 to execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to execute access to the corresponding hardware.

The built-in ROMC 110 mainly has a first ROM area which is an area for controlling the progress of the game, and a second ROM area which is an area for controlling processing different from the normal progress of the game such as error-related. The first ROM area is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "1FFFH", and the second ROM area is allocated to the space from "2000H" to "27FFH". The first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity existing in the first ROM area and accessed from the CPUC100 exists in the second ROM area and is CPUC100. It is configured to be larger than the amount of data accessed from).

Further, the first ROM area stores the first control area in which the program code (instruction code set for the CPUC100) is stored and the program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPUC100 based on this program code). The first data area is stored, the area where various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored, and various settings used when operating the main control chip C (operation of the random number generation circuit C140). It has a program management area in which settings, operation settings of the watchdog timer C222, etc.) are stored. Although the memory map image in the first ROM area is illustrated in the figure, the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area are merely examples.

Further, the second ROM area stores a second control area in which a program code (instruction code set for CPUC100) is stored and program data used by the program (read by processing of CPUC100 based on this program code). It has a second data area, and the second control area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first control area (in other words, it exists in the second control area and is CPUC100. The program code capacity accessed from is smaller than the program code capacity existing in the first control area and accessed from the CPUC100), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the program data capacity existing in the second data area and accessed from the CPUC 100 is smaller than the program data capacity existing in the first data area and accessed from the CPUC 100).

On the other hand, the built-in RAMC 120 has a first RAM area which is an area mainly for storing information based on the progress of the game, and a second RAM area which is an area for storing information mainly based on processing different from the normal progress of the game such as error-related. It has a stack area that is used when the program needs to store data internally, and a first RAM area is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F1FFH". A second RAM area is allocated to the space from "F200H" to "F2C9H", and a stack area is allocated to the space from "F2CAH" to "F2FFH" (however, the number of bytes in each area is just an example. ).

Further, the first RAM area mainly has a first work area which is a work area for temporarily storing information related to the progress of the game, and the second RAM area mainly temporarily stores information related to errors and the like. It has a second work area, which is a work area for the purpose, and a checksum area, which is a work area for performing error detection of information temporarily stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. The capacity of the first RAM area is larger than that of the second RAM area. Further, in the present embodiment, the checksum area is possessed only by the second RAM area (there is no first RAM area), and the checksum area is both the first RAM area and the second RAM area (). It is configured to manage checksums (total of information temporarily stored on both sides). Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the checksum is calculated, the unused area is also included in the calculation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area excluding the unused area (first). The checksum may be calculated for the work area and the second work area). Further, the method of performing error detection is not limited to the method of performing checksum check, and a method of performing other methods (for example, parity check, etc.) may be used. In that case, the checksum area is these. This is an area for storing error detection information (for example, parity bit, etc.) required when using the method.

There is no problem even if the address of the area where various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored is after the address of the built-in RAM. Further, although there is no problem even if the address that is the unused area is changed, it is preferable to provide an unused area between (the address between) the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of the memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 221, the program code existing in the first control area and accessed from the CPUC100 and the program code existing in the second control area and accessed from the CPUC100 are Since they are separated from each other on the memory map (the addresses are not contiguous) and an unused area is sandwiched between them, the placement positions of both program codes can be visually observed on the program source code or the dump list. It can be clearly separated above (the same can be said when an unused area is sandwiched between them).

Here, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to provide an unused area (unfilled area) in order to prevent a program or the like modified by fraudulent activity from being written. It is suitable (for example, all unused areas are filled with 0, used areas are packed in young addresses, etc.). Further, in the first control area and the first data area, in order to prevent data that is not normally referred to from being referred to due to noise or fraudulent activity, unused data (for example, referred to in a gaming machine having different specifications) is used. It is preferable to configure the data so that it is not provided (data to be used, data used only for testing at the development stage, etc.). Further, the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first work area, and the second work area are packed in a young address and used, and within the area (within the area). No unused area is provided in (address of) (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area in the range of "0000H" to "0FA7H" is not set as an unused area). It is preferable to do so. In the unused area in this example, all the bits are "0", and in the area other than the unused area, any bit is "1" (not "0"). ing).

In the thirteenth embodiment, in particular, the arithmetic processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH or the display processing of displaying the information on the performance display device SH is executed on the main control board (CPUMC of the main control board M). When doing so, it is configured to perform processing in the second ROM / RAM area. Hereinafter, the details of the processing performed in the second ROM / RAM area will be described.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
FIG. 222 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the thirteenth embodiment (the execution timing of this subroutine is the same as that of other embodiments). The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (T is set in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example). It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking the input port of a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power cutoff process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes a settlement button D60, a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a door switch D80, a setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, a power failure detection signal, an on reception sensor D10s, and a first on sensor. Information related to detection of the D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of operation and the sensor detection state of these operating members are sampled at the interrupt interval T. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a rotation cylinder drive control process (process related to control of the drive of the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53). Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. In addition, even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, all the error flags are turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number number error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, and the door switch flag are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (an error currently occurring) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes as in the second error (for example, payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (send the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), command related to stop timing of stop display symbol (sent immediately after operating the stop button as display symbol stop), winning / re-winning Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), commands related to RT status (all reels Commands related to AT status (sent between the time all reels are stopped and the next game is started), Highly secured failure counter value command (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (between all reels stopped until the next game starts, or immediately after starting lever operation (Sent), commands related to the game section (sent between the time all reels are stopped and the next game is started), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error error, a payout error error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and 7 Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). To judge.

If Yes in step 1636, then in step 1637 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M calls the count upper limit check process of the second ROM / RAM area as the process in the first ROM / RAM area.

<< Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area >>
Although not shown, when the process in the second ROM / RAM area is called, the CPUMC of the main control board M first saves the stack pointer and switches the stack area, and then performs the second stack area. Make settings to use. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the value of the register used in the processing in the first ROM / RAM area to the second stack area. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a process of creating and outputting a signal for external output from the value of the first RAM area or the register used in the process in the first ROM / RAM area.

After that, as shown in the figure, in step 1637-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a counter value of a counter (sometimes referred to as a total number of games counter) related to the total number of games played so far. And the counter value of the counter (sometimes called the total payout counter) related to the total number of game medals paid out up to now, and the count upper limit check as a check process related to whether or not the predetermined upper limit value has been reached. Perform processing. The details of the count upper limit check process include, for example, a predetermined number of repetitions in the address of the total payout counter and the address of the total game count counter set in a predetermined register (referred to as an HL register) in the second ROM / RAM area. The check process is performed based on the data of the count upper limit flag calculated based on the arithmetic process of the minute. The number of repetitions and the data of the count upper limit flag can be stored in, for example, the B register or the C register as an unused area.

Next, in step 1637-2 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a counting process of the cumulative number of games played so far. The details of the game count processing include, for example, an added value stored in the A register as an unused area at the address of the total game counter set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area (here, the number of games is counted). The process of adding data (1) is performed, and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-3 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs counting processing of the number of advantageous section games up to now. The number of advantageous section games is the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous section. The details of the counting process of the number of advantageous section games include, first, among the data stored in the address of the game section flag set in the predetermined register of the second ROM / RAM area, the flag indicating that the advantageous section is used. When the bit concerned is "1", for example, the address of the advantageous section game count counter is set in the DE register. After that, the process of adding data is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-4 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of payouts up to now and the number of payouts between 6000 games. The number of payouts is the total number of payouts regardless of the opportunity to pay out the game medals. The details of the counting process of the number of payouts are as follows: First, when the bit related to the data flag stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", The address of the total payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of payouts and the counter for the number of payouts between 6000 games) is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. After that, the data stored in the payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. After that, the process of data addition (here, addition of the number of payouts) is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-5 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of bonuses paid out up to now and the number of bonuses paid out between 6000 games. As details of the counting process of the number of bonuses paid out, first, the data of the bonus operating state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the accessory is operating. After that, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the bit is set to the predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. , Set the address of the bonus payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of bonus payouts and the counter for the number of bonus payouts between 6000 games). After that, the data stored in the bonus payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. After that, the process of data addition (here, addition of the number of payouts) is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register. The "characters" in this process are the first type special character, the second type special character, and the ordinary character.

Next, in step 1637-6 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of continuous bonus payouts up to the present and the number of continuous bonus payouts between 6000 games. As details of the counting process of the number of continuous accessory payouts, first, the data of the RB operation state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the RB is operating. After that, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the bit is set to the predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. , Set the address of the continuous bonus payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of continuous bonus payouts and the counter for the number of continuous bonus payouts between 6000 games). After that, the data stored in the continuous accessory payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. After that, the process of data addition (here, addition of the number of payouts) is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register. The "continuous accessory" in this process is a type 1 special accessory (sometimes referred to as RB).

Next, in step 1637-7 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the ratio calculation process. The ratio here is shown below.
(1-1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio: Number of advantageous section games ÷ Total number of games x 100 (%)
(1-2) Cumulative total number of instructed bonuses: {Number of payouts in the game in which push order navigation (sometimes called instructions) on the main control board M is executed + Number of payouts by bonuses} ÷ All payouts × 100 (%)
(2) Cumulative continuous bonus number ratio: Cumulative number of payouts during operation of Type 1 special bonus ÷ Cumulative total payout number x 100 (%)
(3) Cumulative bonus ratio: (Cumulative number of payouts during operation of Type 1 special bonus + Cumulative number of payouts during operation of Type 2 special bonus + Cumulative payout during operation of ordinary bonus Number of sheets) ÷ Cumulative total number of payouts x 100 (%)
(4) Consecutive bonus ratio between 6000 games: Number of payouts between 6000 games during operation of Type 1 special bonus ÷ Total number of payouts between 6000 games x 100 (%)
(5) Character ratio between 6000 games: (Number of payouts between 6000 games during operation of Type 1 special character + Number of payouts between 6000 games during operation of Type 2 special character + Normal character Number of payouts between 6000 games during operation) ÷ Total number of payouts between 6000 games x 100 (%)
The above (1-1) to (5) are the targets of the ratio calculation in the thirteenth embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, in the advantageous section ratio of (1-1) and the indicated accessory ratio of (1-2), the ratio calculation process is performed for each game, and in (2) to (5). Is configured to perform the ratio calculation process every 400 games, but for example, in (2) to (5), the ratio calculation process may be performed every one game. As described above, any of the above (1-1) and (1-2) may be calculated and displayed according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 223 is a flow of the subroutine of the ratio calculation process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-7 (13th). First, in step 1637-7-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of ratio calculations in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. Next, the data set in the predetermined register of step 1637-7-1 (13th) in step 1637-7-2 (13th) (the data here is the data related to the calculation number of the advantageous interval ratio). get. Next, a predetermined comparison calculation is performed on the data acquired in step 1637-7-3 (13th), and it is determined whether or not the number is the calculation number related to the calculation of the advantageous section ratio. If it is determined in step 1637-7-3 (13th) that the calculation number is not related to the advantageous section ratio (if it is determined as No), in step 1637-7-4 (13th), the predetermined register is entered. The data stored in the 400 game counter (for example, 2 bytes) is set, it is determined whether or not the data value at this time is "0", and when the data value is "0", it is paraphrased. Then, when the number of games played at this time is a multiple of 400 games (when it is determined to be Yes), the address data of the ratio calculation address table stored in advance in the second ROM in step 1637-7-5 (13th). Is set in the specified register. After that, in step 1637-7-6 (13th), a predetermined arithmetic process for calculating the ratio with respect to the set address data is performed.

Then, in step 1637-7-7 (13th), the data obtained by the arithmetic processing is set in the same register in which the data acquired in step 1637-7-2 (13th) is set. Then, in step 1637-7-8 (13th), it is determined whether or not the ratio is 100% based on the data obtained by the arithmetic processing, and if the ratio is 100%, step 1637-. In 7-9 (13th), the same register in which the data for displaying the ratio at 99% as described above is set in a predetermined register (for example, the data acquired in step 1637-7-2 (13th)) may be used. ) (Because the ratio segment SH20 is two digits). Then, in step 1637-7-10 (13th), the obtained ratio data is stored in the HL register, and the process proceeds to the next process.

If Yes in step 1637-7-3 (13th), the process proceeds to step 1637-7-5 (13th), and if No in step 1637-7-4 (13th), the process proceeds to step 1637-7-5 (13th). The process proceeds to step 1637-7-9 (13th), and if No in step 1637-7-8 (13th), the process proceeds to step 1637-7-10 (13th).

Next, in step 1637-8 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M performs the ratio display process. FIG. 224 is a flowchart relating to the subroutine of the ratio display process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-8 (13th). First, in step 1637-8-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the ratio display number in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. At this time, it is assumed that the data of the LED display counter is stored in, for example, the D register. Next, in step 1637-8-2 (13th), it is determined whether or not a 1000-digit display request in the performance display device SH has been received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that the performance display device SH has not received the 1000-digit display request, then, in step 1637-8-3 (13th), the performance display device is based on the data stored in the D register. It is determined whether or not a 100-digit display request in SH is received. If it is determined that the performance display device SH has not received the 100-digit display request, then, in step 1637-8-4 (13th), the data stored in the D register is acquired and a predetermined value is obtained. Perform arithmetic processing. Next, in step 1637-8-5 (13th), it is determined whether or not a single digit display request in the performance display device SH is received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that the performance display device SH has not received the single-digit display request, the logical product calculation of the data stored in the register in which the ratio display number is set is performed in step 1637-8-6 (13th). (For example, an operation such as exchanging the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits).

Next, in step 1637-8-7 (13th), the address of the ratio display segment data table is set in a specific register (for example, the HL register). Next, in step 1637-8-8 (13th), a predetermined arithmetic process is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and the data obtained by the arithmetic is acquired. Next, in step 1637-8-9 (13th), the data related to the blinking request flag stored in advance is stored in a predetermined register, and the process proceeds to the next process.

Returning to the description of the flowchart in FIG. 222, next, in step 1637-9 (13th), the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM / RAM area.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

<< Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area Modification 1 >>
Next, a modification in the case where the arithmetic processing of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH or the display processing for displaying the information on the performance display device SH is performed in the second ROM / RAM area will be described. As a modification 1 (sometimes referred to as a modification 1 from the 13th embodiment) of << processing in the second ROM / RAM area >> in the thirteenth embodiment, for example, a game progress control process of the main control board M (FIG. 16 to 18) can be configured to be executed. Hereinafter, a modified example of the processing in the second ROM / RAM area will be described.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 14 in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment. A detailed description of the same processing as in FIG. 18 will be omitted. Further, since the contents of the processing in the second ROM / RAM area (other than the display processing on the performance display device SH) are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, unlike the thirteenth embodiment in which the processing in the second ROM / RAM area is executed by the interrupt processing, in the change example 1 from the thirteenth embodiment, the processing in the second ROM / RAM area related to the performance display device SH is performed. It is executed by the main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side, which is different from interrupt processing).

In FIG. 225, the calculation process of the information displayed by the performance display device SH is configured to be executed after the game section transition control process of step 3500 is performed. The timing of performing arithmetic processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH is not limited to this timing. As long as it is in the main loop process, for example, it may be before the game section transition control process of step 3500 is performed.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
As a description of the flowchart, after the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M performs the second ROM as the process in the first ROM / RAM area in step 3501. -Call the count upper limit check process of the RAM area.

<< Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 3501-1 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the count upper limit check process. Next, in step 3501-2 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game count processing. Next, in step 3501-3 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the advantageous section game count processing. Next, in step 3501-4 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the payout number counting process. Next, in steps 3501-5 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the bonus payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-6 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the continuous accessory payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-7 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the ratio calculation process. Next, in steps 3501-8 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM / RAM area.

As described above, in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment, the arithmetic processing related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM / RAM area (calculation of the information displayed on the performance display device SH). Processing) is configured to be executed as the main loop processing. Further, although details will be described later, the display process on the performance display device SH, which is a process in the second ROM / RAM area, is configured to be executed as an interrupt process.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game end process and shifts to the next process.

Next, FIG. 226 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment. Since the content of the display process on the performance display device SH, which is the process in the second ROM / RAM area, is the same as that in the thirteenth embodiment, the details are omitted.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
Specifically, in step 1636, when the update state of the built-in random number is normal (Yes), in step 1637 (13th) (variation 2), the CPUC100 of the main control board M is in the first ROM / RAM area. As the process, the ratio display process of the second ROM / RAM area is called.

<< Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 1637-1 (13th) (variation 2), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the ratio display process. Next, in step 1637-2 (13th) (variation 2), the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM / RAM area.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process and shifts to the next process.

As described above, in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment, as the processing related to the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM / RAM area, the arithmetic processing related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is the main loop processing. The display processing to the performance display device SH is configured to be executed as an interrupt processing.

With this configuration, in the change example 1 from the thirteenth embodiment, the display processing to the performance display device SH, which needs to be constantly executed (updated), is executed by the interrupt processing, while the constant processing is performed. The data capacity used without executing unnecessary processing by configuring the arithmetic processing related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH that does not need to be executed (updated) to be executed for each game as the main loop processing. Can be reduced.

<<< Test display of performance display device SH >>>
Next, the test display of the performance display device SH will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment and the change example 1 from the thirteenth embodiment, as a configuration related to the display on the performance display device SH, is there a problem or the like in the seg of the performance display device SH (for example, the lighting location of the seg)? It is configured to have a test display mode for confirming whether or not the lights are evenly lit. The configuration of the test display mode applicable to the gaming machine of this example will be described in detail below.

The test display mode of the performance display device SH is configured to be able to be executed (displayed) at the following timings.
(1) The display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds. (2) The display starts when the setting change device control process starts (starts of the setting change mode) and ends within 5 seconds (3). ) The display starts when the setting confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the setting confirmation mode. (4) The display starts when the gaming machine detects an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M, and an error (abnormality) occurs. Display until resolved

FIG. 227 is an example of a test display in the performance display device SH when the performance display device SH is in the test display mode. First, the test display pattern 1 will be described. The test display pattern 1 illustrates a case where the test display is executed when the power is turned on. As described above, when the test display is executed when the power is turned on, it is preferable to end the display within 5 seconds from the start of the display. The case where the test display ends after 5 seconds is illustrated.

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 1 >>
The test display pattern 1 is composed of three display modes: a lighting pattern (a), a lighting pattern (b), and a light-off pattern (c) (this is a display mode at the end of the test display). The lighting pattern (a) is a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Further, the lighting pattern (b) also has a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a portion of the ratio segment SH20 are lit, and the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are alternately executed. As a result, all the segments of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once, and the segment that fails and does not illuminate can be found. The lighting patterns constituting the test display pattern are not limited to (a) and (b), but as a test display, at least the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 by the end of the test display ( It is preferable that the lighting pattern is such that all the segs are lit (the display mode may be such that all the lit parts of the identification seg SH10 and the ratio seg SH20 are lit by combining the two lighting patterns).

Further, the test display pattern 1 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are alternately displayed as (a) → (b) → (a) .... , The lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds. Then, starting from the timing when the power is turned on (0 seconds), the display mode of the extinguishing pattern (c) for notifying the end of the test display is displayed after 5 seconds so that the test display of the performance display device SH ends. It is configured. In the test display pattern 1, the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds, so for example, the period from (a) → (b) → (a), which is one lighting cycle, is set to 1 second, which is the test display period. Since the number of lighting cycles that can be test-displayed in 5 seconds is 5, that is, the number of lighting cycles is an integer, the test display is configured to end after displaying the display mode of the lighting pattern (b) for 0.5 seconds. ..

In the figure, when the test display is completed, as shown in (c), the case where the identification seg SH10 and the ratio seg SH20 are turned off is illustrated, but the case is limited to this. Instead, when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to be displayed in the display pattern described above in FIG. 220 (for example, the display is started from (a) in FIG. 220).

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Modification Example of Test Display Pattern 1 >>
As a configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine of this example, a modification related to the test display will be described in detail below.

The lighting period of each of the lighting patterns (a) and (b) illustrated in FIG. 224 is set to 1 second. With this determination, the period from (a) → (b) → (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 2 seconds, and 4 seconds elapses when the 2 lighting cycles are completed, and the next lighting cycle (third time). Lighting cycle) cannot be executed to the end. In such a case, the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) is executed twice to end the test display, in other words, the last lighting cycle that can be executed within 5 seconds is set. The test display may be configured to end when the test display is executed, or the test display is displayed by lighting in (a) for 1 second after executing the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) twice. It may be configured to end, in other words, to repeat the lighting cycle for a predetermined 5 seconds, and to end the test display at the timing when the 5 seconds have elapsed.

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 2 >>
Next, the test display pattern 2 will be described. It is assumed that the test display pattern 2 is executed during the setting confirmation mode or during an error related to an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M. It should be noted that the test display may be executed even during all the errors (or some errors) that may occur in the gaming machine according to this example.

The test display pattern 2 is composed of three display modes: a lighting pattern (d), a lighting pattern (e), and a light-off pattern (c) (display mode at the end of test display). The lighting pattern (d) is a display mode in which all the lighting portions of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Further, the lighting pattern (e) is a display mode in which all the lighting portions of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are turned off. In this way, by alternately executing the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) as the test display pattern, all the segments of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once. It is configured so that you can find segments that fail and do not light up.

Further, the test display pattern 2 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) are alternately lit in the order of (d) → (e) → (d). , The lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.3 seconds. Then, starting from the timing of the setting confirmation mode (0 seconds), the test display is alternately performed for 0.3 seconds in the order of (d) → (e) → (d) .... When the setting confirmation mode ends at a predetermined timing (here, 3.1 seconds after the setting confirmation mode is set), the test display also ends. That is, at the timing when the end condition of the test display is satisfied, the test display is ended regardless of the timing of the lighting cycle.

In the figure, when the test display is completed, as shown in (c), the case where the identification seg SH10 and the ratio seg SH20 are turned off is illustrated, but the case is limited to this. Instead, when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to be displayed in the display pattern described above in FIG. 220 (for example, the display is started from (a) in FIG. 220).

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 3 >>
Next, FIG. 228 shows the test display pattern 3. Compared with the test display pattern 1 and the test display pattern 2, the test display when the timing at which the test display can be executed overlaps will be described as the test display pattern 3. The display mode of the lighting pattern in the test display, the lighting period of each lighting pattern, and the like are the same as those of the test display pattern 1 and the test display pattern 2. Hereinafter, FIG. 228 will be described in detail.

First, to explain in the period in which the test display pattern 3 is performed, it is the same as the test display pattern 1 that the timing at which the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0 seconds). Then, the setting confirmation mode is set within 5 seconds after the power is turned on (here, the timing is 2.7 seconds after the power is turned on). That is, before the test display started to be executed when the power is turned on ends with the passage of time, the start condition of the test display is newly satisfied with the start of the setting confirmation mode. After that, starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the setting confirmation mode ends and the test display is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 3.1 seconds after the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered). The flow is to end.

In the test display pattern 3, since the setting confirmation mode is set after 2.7 seconds from the timing when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is not started at the end timing of the lighting cycle described above. Even in such a case, when the test display is started when the setting confirmation mode is started, the performance display device SH is lit as a test display from the first timing of the lighting cycle. More specifically
Lights in 0.5 seconds (a) → Lights in 0.5 seconds (b) → Lights in 0.5 seconds (a) → Lights in 0.5 seconds (b) → Lights in 0.5 seconds (a) ) → Lights in 0.2 seconds (b) → Lights in 0.3 seconds (a) → Lights in 0.3 seconds (b) → ... → When the setting confirmation mode ends, the test display will be executed as if the test display had ended.

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 3 Deformation Example 1 >>
In the test display pattern 3 in this configuration, the period from the timing when the power is turned on to the end of the setting confirmation mode is 2.7 seconds + 3.1 seconds = 5.8 seconds, and after the power is turned on. If the test period exceeds the range of 5 seconds, but the setting confirmation mode ends at an early timing, for example, if the test display period related to the setting confirmation mode is 1.5 seconds, the power is turned on. Starting from the timing, the period until the setting confirmation mode ends is 2.7 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 4.2 seconds, which does not exceed the range of 5 seconds, which is the test period after the power is turned on. In such a situation, the test display is not executed from the end of the setting confirmation mode to the end timing of the test display period after the power is turned on (when the setting confirmation mode ends regardless of the end timing of the setting confirmation mode). The test display may be terminated), or the test display after the power may be turned on for 0.8 seconds (until 5 seconds have passed since the power was turned on), which is the remaining period of the test display period after the power is turned on. It may be configured to restart, or it may be configured to restart the test display after the power is turned on until the end timing of the test display triggered by the power on. When restarting the test display after the power is turned on, for example, it is determined that the timing at which the setting confirmation mode ends is the starting point (at this time, the test display in the setting confirmation mode ends and the power is turned on again). , The test display period is newly set to 0.8 seconds instead of 5 seconds), and according to the display mode of the test display pattern 1, (a) → (b) → (a) ... And 0.8 It may be configured to display a test for a second.

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 3 Deformation Example 2 >>
The configuration in the case where the test displays are duplicated, which is illustrated as the second modification of the test display pattern 3 in this configuration, is only an example, and can be applied to all combinations executed in duplicate as the test display.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment,
(1) The display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds. (2) The display starts when the setting change device control process starts (starts of the setting change mode) and ends within 5 seconds (3). ) The display starts when the setting confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the setting confirmation mode. (4) The display starts when the gaming machine detects an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M, and an error (abnormality) occurs. The above four test displays to be displayed until they are resolved are configured to be able to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one or more of the above test displays may be configured to be executed. In addition, it should be added that any of the configurations related to the above-mentioned test display may be applied even in such a configuration.

Further, in the test display of (3) above, the same test display may be executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (test at the end of the setting change mode or the end of the setting confirmation mode). End the display). Further, the display period of 5 seconds according to the above (1) and (2) is only an example, and there is no problem even if the time value is changed.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the lighting pattern of the above (1) and the lighting pattern of the above (3) are different lighting patterns, but the lighting pattern is not limited to this, and the same lighting pattern (lighting time / extinguishing time). May be.

The lighting pattern of the test display may be a pattern other than the above, but it can be distinguished from the normal lighting pattern as described above in FIG. 220 (it can be visually recognized by the administrator). It is preferable to configure (different the period for switching the lighting mode, different lighting segments, etc.).

Even when the performance display device SH is executing the test display, the calculation processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (the calculation processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH) can be executed. May be good. As a specific example of such a configuration, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) Power off occurs → (2) Accepts the operation of the final stop reel → (3) Executes power off processing before executing the arithmetic processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH → (4) Game machine Power supply to 0 becomes 0 → (5) Recovery from power failure → (6) Performance display device SH enters test display mode → (7) Calculation of items to be displayed on performance display device SH during test display mode Execution of processing → (8) Test display mode ends → (9) Information displayed on the current performance display device SH corresponding to the latest calculation result is displayed on the performance display device SH. Since the information displayed on the performance display device SH is displayed after the arithmetic processing is executed, the information may be different from that before the power failure occurs. Further, even if the power is cut off after the final stop reel is received, if the power off time processing is executed before the arithmetic processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is executed, the above (3) and subsequent steps are performed. Follows the same flow.

<< 14th Embodiment >> Configuration related to suspension / automatic settlement >>
As a configuration applicable to the gaming machine of this example, a configuration relating to a gaming machine capable of executing a game progress suitable for a business form desired by a game hall manager will be described in detail below.

As an example of the business form of the amusement park
(1) Quantitative: The progress of the game is stopped by the acquisition of a predetermined number of balls, and the operation of the game machine for the day is ended (2) One exchange: The game is temporarily ended at a specific timing (3) Lucky number system: The game can be continued when a specific privilege is given, but various business forms such as temporarily ending the game when a predetermined privilege is given can be considered. As a configuration of a gaming machine capable of realizing such a business form, a gaming machine capable of executing and setting stoppage and automatic settlement is suitable.

In addition, "stop" means to stop the progress of the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and "automatic settlement" means to perform the settlement process through the operation of the player when a specific condition is satisfied. Do it without. In addition, stopping the progress of the game means that the reception of the start lever operation is invalid or the bet is invalid (the game medal cannot be inserted due to the blocker being turned off, and the reception of the bet button operation is invalid). Is.

Here, exemplifying the action in the case of stopping after a certain game is completed, the rotation of the reels related to a certain game is started, and then the stop operation is performed to stop each reel, and finally the reels are rotated. A stop operation is performed on the reel (here, the right reel M53), and the reel drive state of the right reel M53 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (the scheduled stop symbol and the passing symbol match). After setting 100 (a value corresponding to about 223.5 ms) as the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter, the 4-phase excitation of the step motor is turned on. After that, the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter is subtracted by the interrupt processing executed while the 4-phase excitation is turned on.
(1) When the game is a game in which the payout of game medals does not occur, stop processing should be executed in a situation where the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter is 90 or more (between 100 and 90). If it becomes less than 90, the stop processing is executed, and if the above-mentioned game is a game in which the payout of the game medal occurs, the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter is 0 after the payout of the game medal is completed. (2) Regardless of whether or not the game is a game in which the payout of the game medal does not occur, after the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter becomes 0 (after) It may be configured as described above to execute the stop processing (after the payout of the game medal is completed). In the case of the above configuration (1), the reel may be moving (rotating) while the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter becomes 100 to 90. , The stop process can be configured to not perform the stop process and the stop process to be performed after the reel is completely stopped below 90, and the player can tell that the reel has stopped and the game is over. It becomes easier to recognize, and the player can be made to recognize earlier that it is not necessary to insert the game medal related to the next game.

In addition, the settlement process related to automatic settlement (the settlement process executed when a specific condition is satisfied) and the settlement process executed by operating the settlement button are configured to be executable as the same process. It may be configured to be executable as separate and different processes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the configuration related to the stop / automatic settlement applicable to this example will be described in detail.

First, the predetermined conditions for executing the stop that can be selected in this example are (1) none, (2) at the end of all target BBs, (3) at the end of BB1, (4) at the end of BB2, and (5). It is configured to be selectable from eight items: (6) more than 500 difference sheets, (7) more than 1000 difference sheets, (7) at the end of AT3 set or more, and (8) at the end of a specific AT.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for executing the automatic settlement that can be selected in this example are (1) none, (2) at the end of all target BBs, (3) at the end of BB1, (4) at the end of BB2, and (5). ) Difference number of sheets exceeds 500 sheets, (6) Difference number of sheets exceeds 1000 sheets, (7) At the end of AT3 set or more, (8) At the end of a specific AT, (9) At the time of stopping, 9 items can be selected. There is.

Regarding (5) and (6) above, if the difference number exceeds the specified number and the player is in an advantageous state such as during the execution of BB or in the advantageous section, the advantageous state is concerned. It may be configured to determine that a predetermined condition or a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the above is completed. Further, in this example, the difference number is 500 or 1000, but the administrator may be able to set any number. Further, for counting the difference number, a counter (may be referred to as a MY counter or a difference number counter) capable of counting the maximum difference number in one advantageous section, in which the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, is provided. The counter may be used to count the difference number of sheets, or a counter dedicated to counting the difference number of sheets controlled by the main control board M different from the counter may be used. Further, instead of the difference number of sheets exceeding 500 and the difference number of sheets exceeding 1000, the difference number of sheets of 500 or more and the difference number of sheets of 1000 or more may be set as predetermined conditions.

Since the MY counter is updated only with one bet number, for example, when the number of one bet is set to "3", the counter value of the MY counter is stopped as a result of playing a predetermined game with three bets. Although the number of cards reached 500, the actual number of cards acquired may be less than 500 because the game was executed other than betting 3 cards before the arrival timing. When the stop is performed based on the counter value of the MY counter, as described above, the stop may occur even if the actual number of acquired sheets is small. Therefore, by providing a counter related to the difference number of sheets different from the MY counter and counting the number of inserted sheets and the number of paid out sheets for any number of bets, it is possible to ensure the consistency between the actual number of acquired sheets and the execution of the stop. .. Since the two-card betting game (a game other than the three-card betting) is a game that is disadvantageous to the player by design, the two-card betting game may be regarded as some kind of capture / fraud and stopped based on the MY counter. ..

Regarding (7) above, for example, it is preferable that AT (or ART) continues for 3 sets or more, and the timing is such that the AT and the advantageous section end. Further, when having an AT that is not so-called set number management, it may be a condition that the game continues for a predetermined number of games or more.

Further, the specific AT in (8) above may be an AT that is relatively advantageous to the player, for example, an AT that is likely to obtain a predetermined number or more (for example, 500 or more) of game medals. ..

In addition, information on a predetermined condition for stopping and a specific condition for performing automatic settlement is stored in a specific RAM area (dedicated RAM area), and the specific RAM area is referred to when the power is turned on. It is configured to determine the predetermined condition and the specific condition. The dedicated RAM area is configured to be provided in the first ROM / RAM area.

The timing for determining the predetermined condition and the specific condition with reference to the specific RAM area is not limited to only when the power is turned on, and when the setting change mode ends, the stop / automatic settlement setting mode It may be the end of the operation, the operation of the setting / reset button M30, the selection of the determination item in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode, or the like, or the configuration may be such that the determination can be made at a plurality of timings.

Further, as a method of changing the predetermined condition and the specific condition stored in the specific RAM area, the setting can be changed by operating a stop button or the like during the setting change mode. ..

The predetermined conditions and specific conditions illustrated in FIG. 229 are merely examples, and the number of types (number of options) may be changed. Further, it may be configured so that only one item is determined as a condition, or a plurality of items may be determined as a condition.

As an example of changing a predetermined condition or a specific condition, it may be configured as follows.
(1) A predetermined bonus to be satisfied when the inside of the predetermined bonus is inside (as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device related to the predetermined bonus is determined and the symbol combination related to the condition device is not stopped and displayed). It is suitable when the inside is in a relatively disadvantageous state for the player (the expected value of winning the game medal is negative (the number of input medals is larger than the number of payouts), the probability of winning the AT is low, etc.). be.
(2) A state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player during the execution of the predetermined bonus that is satisfied when the predetermined bonus starts (the expected value of the game medal is negative (the number of input medals is larger than the number of payouts). It is suitable when there are many) and the probability of winning the AT is low).
(3) Satisfied when shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section This is suitable when the winning rate of the lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is high (for example, 99/100) in the normal section.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 230 to 232, an example of the predetermined condition and the method of changing the specific condition will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 230 is an image diagram of each mode transition. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, “stop / automatic settlement setting mode” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as shown in (a) in the figure. After that, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (b) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays the above-mentioned options of the predetermined conditions as the "stop setting mode". In (b), since the stop is not set, the predetermined condition is "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". If the predetermined condition is set to "None", the stop is not executed.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (c) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays the above-mentioned options for the specific conditions as the "automatic settlement setting mode". In (c), since the automatic settlement is not set, the specific condition is "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". If a specific condition is set to "None", automatic settlement will not be executed.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, “1 not present” and “2 present” are set as the “notification setting mode” in the effect display device S40 as shown in (d) in the figure. When "None" is determined as the "notification setting mode", the effect display device S40 does not execute the notification related to the stop or automatic settlement even when the stop or automatic settlement is performed, and the "notification setting mode" is set. When "Yes" is determined as "", the effect display device S40 is configured to execute the notification related to the stop or automatic settlement when the stop or automatic settlement is performed.

The cursor position when the mode is changed by operating the right stop button D43 may be configured to select "1 none" at the top, or may be configured to select a predetermined condition currently determined, a specific condition. It may be configured to select the condition or the setting of the notification setting mode.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the "stop / automatic settlement setting mode" shown in the figure (a) is set again, and thereafter, for each operation of the right stop button D43, (a) → (b) → (c) → It will switch as in (d) → (a) ....

In this example, the configuration in which the right stop button D43 is used as the operation member related to the mode transition is illustrated, but this is just an example, and there is no problem even if the left stop button D41 or the middle stop button D42 is used.

Next, FIG. 231 is an image diagram of item selection in the mode. In the figure, FIG. 230 illustrates a configuration related to an operation when an item is selected in one mode in the above-mentioned "stop / automatic settlement setting mode".

By shifting to the setting change mode and operating the right stop button D43 while the "stop / automatic settlement setting mode" is displayed, the effect display device S40 is displayed in the "stop setting mode" as shown in (e) in the figure. ", The options of the predetermined conditions described above are displayed (similar to (b) in FIG. 230). In (b), since the stop is not set, the predetermined condition is "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". If the predetermined condition is set to "None", the stop is not executed.

After that, by operating the middle stop button D42, as shown in (f) in the figure, the cursor in the "stop setting mode" is moved, and "2 at the end of all BBs of the target" is selected.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (g) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays the above-mentioned options for the specific conditions as the "automatic settlement setting mode". In (g), since the automatic settlement is not set, the specific condition is "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". If a specific condition is set to "None", automatic settlement will not be executed.

After that, by operating the left stop button D41, as shown in (h) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays the options of the predetermined conditions described above as the "stop setting mode". That is, the mode is changed for each operation of the right stop button D43 in the order of "stop / automatic settlement setting mode"-> "stop setting mode"-> "automatic settlement setting mode"-> "notification setting mode"-> "stop / automatic settlement setting mode". The transition will occur, but by operating the left stop button D41, it is configured to transition to the previous mode. In addition, the cursor in the current mode can be moved by operating the middle stop button D42 (in this example, the cursor is moved down by one). Since the cursor selected "at the end of all BBs of 2 targets" in (f), the cursor also selected "at the end of all BBs of 2 targets" when transitioning to (h). Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cursor may be configured to always select the initial position (such as "1 none") when a new mode is changed.

The method of determining the predetermined condition, the specific condition, and the setting of the presence / absence of notification (the method of changing the information stored in the specific RAM) in FIGS. 230 and 231 is configured as follows. May be good.
(1) Determines the item selected by the cursor when the mode changes (2) Determines that the time selected by the cursor continues for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) (3) Determines a predetermined operating member (start lever) By accepting operations such as), the item selected by the cursor when staying in each mode is determined. (5) As an operation to end the setting change mode, the setting key switch is turned on and off to determine the item selected by the cursor when staying in each mode. You may.

Further, as in the "stop / automatic settlement setting mode" illustrated in FIGS. 230 and 231, the setting related to the stop (sometimes referred to as the setting of a predetermined condition or the setting of the stop function) and the setting related to the automatic settlement (specific). In a state where conditions can be set and the automatic settlement function can be set), whether or not the stop function is effective and whether or not the automatic settlement function is effective when determined in the current situation. May be displayed on a display unit (for example, payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M. As an example of the display mode, valid is "A" and invalid is "F", and the validity / invalidity of the stop function is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270, and the payout number display device D270-1 It may be configured to display the enable / disable of the automatic settlement function in the digit of the digit. More specifically, the display mode is as follows.
Stop function: Enabled, automatic settlement function: Enabled, display of payout number display device D270 "AA"
Stop function: Enabled, automatic settlement function: disabled, display of payout number display device D270 "AF"
Stop function: invalid, automatic settlement function: valid, display of payout number display device D270 "FA"
Stop function: invalid, automatic settlement function: invalid, display of payout number display device D270 "FF"

It should be noted that the above-mentioned display of validity / invalidity of the stop function and the automatic settlement function may be configured to be displayed in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode before the stop function and the automatic settlement function are determined. In such a configuration, for example, in a situation where a value other than "1 None" is selected in the stop setting mode, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 becomes "A", and the stop setting mode is set. In the situation where "1 None" is selected, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 is "F", and in the situation where other than "1 None" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, the payout is made. The one-digit digit of the number display device D270 is "A", and in the situation where "no one" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, the one-digit digit of the payout number display device D270 is "F". Become.

Further, when the validity / invalidity of the stop function and the automatic settlement function is determined, the above-mentioned indication of the validity / invalidity of the stop function and the automatic settlement function may be displayed. In this case, for example, when a value other than "1 None" is determined in the stop setting mode, "A" is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the determination. Is displayed, and if "1 None" is determined in the stop setting mode, "F" is displayed in the tens digit of the predetermined time payout number display device D270 from the determination, and in the automatic settlement setting mode. When a value other than "1 None" is determined, "A" is displayed in the 1st digit of the predetermined time payout number display device D270 from the determination, and "1 None" is determined in the automatic settlement setting mode. In this case, "F" may be displayed in the one-digit digit of the predetermined time payout number display device D270 from the determination.

The valid / invalid display of the stop function and the automatic settlement function as described above may be displayed on a display unit controlled by the main control board M other than the payout number display device D270. Further, the display mode is only an example, and may be appropriately displayed in a display mode that is not used for displaying the number of game medals to be paid out, displaying the push order navigation, displaying credits, or the like.

Further, when displaying the valid / invalid display of the stop function and the automatic settlement function as described above on the display unit controlled by the main control board M, the display unit controlled by the sub control board S (for example, The effect display device S40) may also be configured to display the valid / invalid display of the stop function and the automatic settlement function (at the same time). In such a configuration, the display mode in the display unit controlled by the sub-control board S is appropriately displayed in a display mode in which the manager of the amusement park can easily recognize the validity / invalidity of the stop function and the automatic settlement function. You may.

Next, in FIG. 232, when the "notification setting mode" is determined to be "2 present" and the "stop setting mode" is determined to be "at the end of 3 BB1", the effect display device when the stop is actually performed. It is a display image figure in S40.

As shown in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays "BB1 end" which triggered the stoppage, and "300 medals acquired" which is the number of game medals acquired in BB1. The message "Please call the staff during the suspension" that is displayed when the "Notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes" will be displayed. In this way, when the "notification setting mode" is set to "2", the player can proceed with the game without being confused by notifying the player that the game has been stopped. Further, although not shown, the effect display device S40 is configured to be able to display information indicating that the automatic settlement has been executed even when the automatic settlement is executed.

The configuration of the operating members illustrated in the 14th embodiment is just an example, and any combination of the operating members controlled by the main control board M may be used.

In addition, as a release method in the case of a stop, the player may not be able to release it, and the administrator may be able to release it. For example, opening the front door DU (key for opening the front door DU) It may be configured so that it can be canceled by (off → on) or by operating the setting / reset button M30.

Further, when the automatic settlement is executed, the game may be executed (the game medal can be inserted) as soon as the settlement is completed, as in the case where the player operates the settlement switch. , The game may be configured so that the game can be executed after the operation of the administrator is performed in the same manner as the stop.

The conditions for shifting to the "stop / automatic settlement setting mode" illustrated in FIGS. 230 to 232 are merely examples.
(1) Transition to setting confirmation mode (2) Press and hold the setting / reset button M30 (for example, keep it on for 3 seconds) when all reels are stopped (3) Open the front door DU and main The transition condition may be the operation of any of the operating members controlled by the control board M. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned (2) or (3), it is possible to shift to the stop / automatic settlement setting mode even during the business of the amusement park and switch the setting related to the stop / automatic settlement.

Further, the above-mentioned information of the specific RAM area may be configured to be cleared when the setting is changed, or may be configured not to be cleared.

<Other applicable configurations related to suspension / automatic settlement>
The configuration related to stop / automatic settlement applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that one or more configurations described in detail below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example.

After executing the processing related to turning on / off the advantageous section indicator YH, it may be configured to execute the processing of stopping and automatic settlement. With this configuration, the lighting or extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH can be matched with the game section of the next game.

The difference number is specified when the difference number is equal to or more than the specified value (for example, 500 sheets) and the player is configured to satisfy the predetermined condition or the specific condition when the advantageous state for the player ends. If the stop flag or the automatic settlement flag is turned on when the value is exceeded, and then the difference number falls below the specified value again by the end of the advantageous state for the player (for example, the advantageous section), the stop flag is set. Alternatively, the automatic settlement flag may be configured to be turned off (stopping or automatic settlement is not executed), or may be left on (stopping or automatic settlement is executed). As a specific example, any one of "5 difference number more than 500 sheets", "6 difference number more than 1000 sheets", "5 difference number 500 sheets or more", and "6 difference number 1000 sheets or more" is set as a predetermined condition ( Even if a certain game is executed and the difference number satisfies a predetermined condition, the predetermined bonus is being executed (sometimes referred to as a predetermined game state) after the end of the certain game. In some cases, the stop process may not be executed immediately (the flag is turned on), and the stop process may be executed when the predetermined bonus is completed.

If the game is configured to be stopped by stopping or automatic settlement, and the re-game symbol is displayed as stopped in the game that will be stopped or automatic settlement, stop or automatic settlement will be performed before executing the automatic bet related to the re-game. It may be configured to execute, or it may be configured to execute a stop or automatic settlement after executing an automatic bet.

Even if the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, the menu screen and QR code can be displayed by operating the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S such as the sub-input button SB by the player. good. With this configuration, even if the player does not recognize that the game is stopped and the game is stopped due to the stop, the game history can be saved without any problem. Further, in such a configuration, even if the power is cut off, the data related to the game history may be retained.

From the start of the display of the end screen (bonus end screen, advantageous section end screen, AT end screen, etc.) that notifies the player that the advantageous state ends, without operating the operating members (without proceeding with the game) ) When the standby screen can be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the end screen is displayed when the game is stopped due to a stop, the standby screen is not displayed even after the predetermined time has elapsed. You may. Further, if a power failure occurs during the display of the end screen, the normal screen (a screen different from the end screen and the standby screen) or the standby screen may be displayed after the power is restored.

When the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, if the output condition of the external signal related to stoppage or automatic settlement is satisfied, the external signal is output even if the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement. May be configured to be sustainable.

When the game is configured to be stopped by stopping or automatic settlement, when the game is stopped, the lamp unit is turned on in red and the back lamp is turned off so that the game field manager can easily recognize the game stop. It may be configured to turn on / off in a lighting mode (combination of the lighting mode of the lamp unit and the lighting mode of the back lamp) that can be easily distinguished from the progress.

The voice data being settled may be the same or different between the settlement executed by the player operating the settlement button and the automatic settlement.

In a situation where one or more game medals are electrically stored in the credit and one or more game medals are bet.
(1) When the automatic settlement is executed, both the credit and bet game medals are settled, and even when the settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the credit and the bet are settled. Any game medal may be configured to be settled.
(2) When automatic settlement is executed, both credit and bet game medals are settled, and when the settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the bet game medal is settled. It may be configured to settle only.
(3) When the automatic settlement is executed, both the credit and bet game medals are settled, and when the settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the medals are stored in the credit. Only game medals may be settled.

As described above in FIGS. 230 and 231. When the end condition of the stop / automatic settlement setting mode is satisfied during the setting in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode (when the game is started, the power is cut off). If this is the case, etc.), it may be configured to execute the process of confirming the item that was being selected (the cursor was selected) in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode.

A mechanical switch that can be physically switched on and off may be provided. As an example, a mechanical switch for stopping and a mechanical switch for automatic settlement may be provided, and in such a configuration, the predetermined condition and the specific condition are predetermined in the gaming machine. It may be a condition. Further, a mechanical switch related to stop or automatic settlement may be provided, and stop or automatic settlement may be set (can be set by software) in the above-mentioned stop / automatic settlement setting mode. If a mechanical switch is provided, the execution conditions for stopping or automatic settlement will be set when the switch is turned from off to on.

The gaming machine according to this example is configured to execute an error display on a display unit (for example, payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M when an error is detected (for example, when a inserted medal retention error is detected). But
(1) When the game is stopped by stopping or automatic settlement, the display unit does not display that the game has stopped. (2) When the game is stopped by stopping or automatic settlement, the display is displayed. The unit executes the display of the display mode different from that at the time of error detection. (3) When the game is stopped due to the stop or automatic settlement, the display unit executes the display of the same display mode as at the time of error detection. It may be configured as follows.

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, the execution of the settlement process is stopped and a predetermined error state is set (notification related to the predetermined error). May be configured to execute). Further, in such a configuration, the payout sensor detects the payout of the first game medal after detecting a predetermined error (one game medal is turned on and off by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). It may be configured to stop the payout related to the settlement process immediately after (it is considered that the payout has been made).

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, a predetermined error state is set after the settlement process is completed (notification related to the predetermined error is executed). ) May be configured. Further, in the case where the game is configured to stop (execute the stop processing) after the execution of the automatic settlement in such a configuration, a predetermined error state is set after the stop processing is executed, so that a predetermined error occurs. Even in the state, it is possible to execute the notification related to the stop (notification related to the game stop).

When a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, a predetermined error state is set after the settlement process is completed (notification related to the predetermined error is executed). ), And when the game is configured to stop (execute the stop processing) after the execution of the automatic settlement, a predetermined error state may be set before the stop processing is executed. For such a configuration, it is possible to promptly notify that an error state has occurred.

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected after the reel is stopped for the game to be stopped and before the stop processing is executed, a predetermined error is executed after the stop processing is executed. By setting the error state, it is possible to execute the notification related to the stop (notification related to the game stop) even in the predetermined error state.

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected at a timing before the stop processing is executed after the reel is stopped related to the game to be stopped, a predetermined error is made before the stop process is executed. It may be configured to be in the error state of. For such a configuration, it is possible to promptly notify that an error state has occurred.

When the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, the operation of the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S such as the sub-input button SB may be invalidated.

When the game is stopped due to stopping or automatic settlement, it is preferable to turn off the blocker (a state in which the game medal cannot pass).

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected in a situation where notification related to stoppage or automatic settlement is being executed (for example, notification is performed by the effect control device S40), an error occurs. Notification may be executed and an external signal related to the error may be output. In such a case, when executing error notification,
(1) The notification related to the stop or automatic settlement is terminated and the error notification is executed (the notification may be a display on the effect display device S40 or a voice from a speaker).
(1-1) After that, if the error is canceled and the game by stopping or automatic settlement is stopped, the notification related to stopping or automatic settlement is restarted (1-2) After that, the error is canceled and the game is stopped. Alternatively, when the game by automatic settlement is stopped, the notification related to stop or automatic settlement is not restarted. (2) The effect display device S40 so that both the notification related to stop or automatic settlement and the error notification can be recognized. In different areas (or partially overlapping areas), the notification related to the stop or automatic settlement and the error notification may be configured as described above. In this example, even when the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, it is possible to execute the determination process of whether or not the error is a predetermined error.

In other words, in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted even in the situation where any of the screens (a) to (d) in FIG. 230 is displayed on the effect display device S40. A new screen (for example, (e) different from (a) to (d)) not shown in FIG. 230 may be provided so that the volume and volume may be increased during the display of the new screen. It may be configured so that the amount of light can be adjusted.

When the stop setting is in progress (the situation where "1 none" is determined in the stop setting mode), the setting is higher than when the stop setting is not in progress (the situation where "1 none" is determined in the stop setting mode). It may be configured to relatively increase the appearance rate of the suggestion effect (an effect that suggests the current set value, and the presence / absence of execution and the execution frequency differ depending on the current set value). This makes it possible to improve the player's willingness to play during the stop setting.

When a predetermined condition for executing the stop processing and a specific condition for executing the automatic settlement processing are set as the same condition, and if the same condition is satisfied, after executing the automatic settlement processing It may be configured to execute the stop processing. Further, in such a configuration, the stop processing may be executed after the last game medal related to the automatic settlement process is paid out (passes through the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). good.

When only the stop function is valid (the predetermined condition for stopping is set and the specific condition for automatic settlement is not set), or the predetermined condition for executing the stop processing and the automatic settlement processing are When the stop processing is executed when the specific condition to be executed is set as a condition different from the specific condition to be executed, the settlement process may be configured to be executable by operating the settlement button during the stop.

While the settlement process related to the automatic settlement is being executed, the settlement process by operating the settlement button may not be executed (the settlement process is not newly executed by operating the settlement button).

The situation in which the stop setting is in progress may be referred to as "the stop function is effective", and the situation in which the stop setting is not set may be referred to as "the stop function is invalid" or "the stop function is not effective". Further, determining the predetermined condition may be referred to as "determining the predetermined condition", and the option of the predetermined condition described above in FIG. 229 or the like may be referred to as a "specific condition candidate". May include or may not include "1 none". Further, satisfying the determined predetermined condition may be referred to as "specific condition".

Further, the predetermined conditions of "5 difference number of sheets exceeding 500 sheets" and "6 difference number of sheets exceeding 1000 sheets" described above in FIG. 229 are satisfied by "the number of game media acquired in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number". "5 The difference number of sheets is 500 or more" and "6 The difference number of 1000 sheets or more" is satisfied with "The number of game media acquired in the predetermined period is the predetermined number or more". May be called.

Further, as described above in FIG. 229, in this example, a selection candidate for a predetermined condition related to stopping (sometimes referred to as a specific condition A selection candidate) and a selection candidate for a specific condition related to automatic settlement (specific condition). (Sometimes referred to as B selection candidate) is configured so as to partially overlap, but the selection candidate of a predetermined condition for stopping and the selection candidate of a specific condition for automatic settlement are
(1) All candidates are different (2) All candidates are the same (3) Only a part is the same Any of the above may be used. Even in the case of the above (2) or (3), it is possible to make the predetermined condition to be determined (set) and the specific condition to be determined (set) the same. However, it should be added that it is possible to make a difference.

The stop function can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines. As a specific example, as a stop processing, the firing function stop processing (the game ball is not fired even if the firing handle D44 is operated) and the entry of the game ball into various entrances are invalidated (entering the winning opening). The game ball is not paid out even if the ball is balled, the random number is not acquired even if the ball enters the ball entrance, etc.) Processing and the like can be mentioned. As an alternative to the difference in the number of revolving game machines, the difference between the number of fired balls and the number of payout balls related to the prize (subtract the number of fired balls from the number of payout balls related to the prize) and the prize. The total number of payout balls, which is the cumulative number of payout balls, can be mentioned.

<<< Configuration related to stop suggestion image >>>
The rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be capable of displaying a stop suggestion image that prompts the player to stop the rotating reel on the effect display device S40. The configuration applicable in such a configuration will be described in detail below. It should be added that one or more configurations described in detail below can be combined with all the configurations according to this example.

<Stop suggestion image>
The stop suggestion image is an image displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side, and is a stop operation (operate the stop button to stop the reel) for the player while the reel is rotating. It is an image that prompts, for example, "Please stop the reel", "Please press the stop switch", etc. are displayed.

<Reel rotation time timer>
The reel rotation time timer is a timer controlled on the sub control board S side, and in this example, it is an increment timer, and when the reel rotation starts based on the operation of the start lever, the main control board M side. Sends a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer by receiving the reel rotation start command.

By providing the reel rotation time timer in this way, the stop suggestion image can be appropriately displayed based on the reel rotation time. Further, by configuring the reel rotation time timer to start measuring by receiving the reel rotation start command, the time during which the reel is rotating can be accurately measured.

When the reel rotation time timer is timing and all the reels are rotating, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds), the sub-control board S suggests to stop. The image is displayed on the effect display device S40. After that, when the player operates any of the stop buttons (when the operation of the stop button is accepted), the stop button acceptance command is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S stops. By receiving the button reception command, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is completed, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, and the display of the stop suggestion image is erased. After erasing the display of the stop suggestion image, the effect display device S40 displays the corresponding effect image after the stop operation is executed (if the effect image is not switched by the stop operation, the effect image is stopped. The image displayed on the back layer of the suggestion image is displayed, and if the effect image is switched by the stop operation, the effect image after the switch is displayed).

In this way, by configuring the reel rotation time timer to be able to notify that the timer value has reached a predetermined value, it is possible to prompt the player to stop the operation and increase the number of games per vehicle per day. be able to. Further, by accepting the stop operation of the stop button (sometimes referred to as a stop switch) and erasing the display of the stop suggestion image, the visibility of the effect displayed on the effect display device S40 after the stop operation can be improved. Can be improved.

Further, when the sub-control board S receives the stop button reception command and clears the timer value of the reel rotation time timer to zero, (1) there is a reel that is still rotating after the reel is stopped by this stop operation. If so, the reel rotation time timer measurement is started again. (2) If this stop operation is the final reel stop operation and all reels are stopped, the reel rotation time timer is measured. Will not start. Further, after the stop operation is performed and the display of the stop suggestion image is erased, the effect image based on the stop operation is displayed on the effect display device.

With this configuration, it is possible to accurately measure the period during which the reel stop operation is not executed. For example, in a situation where a stop suggestion image is displayed before the stop operation related to the first stop, the game is played. Even though the person executes the stop operation related to the first stop and the stop suggestion image is deleted, a new stop suggestion image is displayed immediately after that, and the player's motivation to play is discouraged. The situation can be prevented.

The reel rotation time timer may be a decrement timer, and measurement start conditions, measurement end conditions (conditions for clearing the timer value to zero), and the like may be changed. As a specific example, the start lever is operated in a state where the operation of the start lever is valid (for example, all reels are stopped and a specified number of game medals are bet), and the start lever is operated from the main control board side. The measurement start condition may be configured such that a start lever operation command is transmitted to the sub control board side and the sub control board receives the start lever operation command.

Further, in a situation where the reel rotation time timer is a specific value (for example, 30 seconds) that is less than a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) for displaying a stop suggestion image, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. , If the power off occurs when the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off time processing, and then the power is turned on again, the initial value is set in the reel rotation time timer and the power is turned off again from the beginning. It may be configured to measure. As specific examples, (1) when the reel rotation time timer is an increment timer, the timer value is cleared to zero after the power is turned on and the timer is started again. (2) When the reel rotation time timer is an increment timer, the timer is started again. , The timer value is cleared to zero by the power off processing, and the timer is restarted after the power is turned on. (3) If the reel rotation time timer is a decrement timer, the initial value (for example, 60) is set to the timer value after the power is turned on. Seconds) may be set to start measurement, and so on.

With this configuration, even if an unexpected situation such as a power failure occurs, an unintended stop suggestion image is displayed by setting the initial value in the reel rotation time timer and re-measuring from the beginning. It can be configured not to. The timing for resuming the measurement of the reel rotation time timer may be changed as long as it is a predetermined timing after the power is turned on.

In addition, as a configuration regarding the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) described above,
"The start lever D50 related to this game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses → Power is cut off before the minimum game time elapses → Power is restored → Measurement of the minimum game time is restarted from the middle → The minimum game time has elapsed → The reel starts to rotate, and the reel rotation start command is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the reel rotation start command, so that the reel rotates. It may be configured as "start measurement of time timer".

<< Configuration related to errors >>
<Structure 1>
When a predetermined error (recoverable error, for example, a medal empty error) occurs (when detected) while the stop suggestion image is displayed, the stop suggestion image is deleted and the predetermined error occurs. The error display is configured to be displayed on the effect display device S40. At that time, the reel rotation time timer is reset and the timing is stopped. It should be noted that the stop operation is impossible during the occurrence of the predetermined error (the rotating reel is not stopped even if the stop button is operated).

With this configuration, the error display can be displayed with priority, and the gaming machine can be made illegally strong.
<Structure 2>
In a situation where the reel rotation time timer is a specific value (for example, 30 seconds) that is less than a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) for displaying a stop suggestion image, a predetermined error (recoverable error, for example, for example) , Medal empty error) occurs (when detected), an error display related to the generated predetermined error is displayed on the effect display device S40. At that time, the reel rotation time timer is reset and the timing is stopped. Therefore, even when 30 seconds have passed from the occurrence of the error and the timing is such that the stop suggestion image should be displayed, the stop suggestion image is not displayed. It should be noted that the stop operation is impossible during the occurrence of the predetermined error (the rotating reel is not stopped even if the stop button is operated).

In the case of the above configuration 1 or 2, the rotating reel may be stopped even when a predetermined error occurs (the rotating reel can be stopped by operating the stop button).

With such a configuration, the reel can be stopped even if it takes time to clear the error, so that the stepping motor (sometimes called a step motor) is not overloaded. Can be done. If the stop operation related to the first stop is executed during the occurrence of a predetermined error, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer related to the second stop may not be started, or the measurement of the reel rotation time timer related to the second stop may be started. When the stop operation related to one stop is executed, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer related to the second stop may be started.

Further, the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows. An example is shown in which a stop suggestion image is displayed when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches 60 seconds.
(Structure A)
"The reel starts rotating in a predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A predetermined error occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The predetermined error is resolved. The stop suggestion image is not displayed 60 seconds after the reel rotation starts. "
(Structure B1)
"The reel starts rotating in a predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A predetermined error occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → 30 seconds after the start of reel rotation. The specified error is resolved → A stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the start of reel rotation. "
(Structure B2)
"The reel starts rotating in the predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A predetermined error occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The predetermined error remains unresolved. 60 seconds after the start of reel rotation, the stop suggestion image is not displayed → After that, the stop suggestion image is not displayed even if the specified error is resolved. "
(Structure C)
"The reel starts rotating in the predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A predetermined error occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The predetermined error is resolved. The stop suggestion image is not displayed 60 seconds after the reel rotation starts → The stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the predetermined error is resolved. "
It may be configured as described above.

Further, the reel rotation time timer may be configured to continue measuring even while the front door is open, and may be configured to operate as follows, for example. An example is shown in which a stop suggestion image is displayed when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches 60 seconds.
(Structure D1)
"The reel starts rotating in the predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → The front door is opened when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The reel rotates with the front door open. A stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the start. "
(Configuration D2)
"The reel starts rotating in the predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → The front door is opened when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The timer value of the reel rotation time timer is Close the front door in the situation of 30 seconds → The stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the reel rotation starts with the front door closed. "
With this configuration, even if the manager of the amusement park is working with the front door open, a stop suggestion image can be displayed, and it is properly notified that the stepping motor is under load. can do. In addition, in the situation where the front door is open, the configuration in which the error display indicating that the front door is open is not displayed on the effect display device S40 is illustrated.

Further, in the situation where the reel rotation failure occurs, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is continued, but the stop operation may not be accepted. For example, the reel rotation time may be configured to operate as follows. good. An example is shown in which a stop suggestion image is displayed when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches 60 seconds.
(Structure E1)
"The reel starts rotating in a predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A reel rotation failure occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The timer value of the reel rotation time timer. Reel rotation failure is resolved in the situation where is 30 seconds → A stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the start of reel rotation. "
(Structure E2)
"The reel starts rotating in a predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A reel rotation failure occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The reel rotation failure remains unresolved. A stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the start of reel rotation. "
With this configuration, a reel rotation failure occurs, and even in a situation where the reel is not rotating normally (a situation where the reel is not rotating at a constant speed), a load is applied to the stepping motor. It is possible to display a stop suggestion image corresponding to the load of. In addition, by configuring so that the stop operation is not accepted during the occurrence of reel rotation failure, it may not be possible to accurately execute stop control when stopping during rotation failure, so the symbol is stopped and displayed at the wrong position. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused.

<< Operation of operating members on the main control board side >>
The reel is rotating in a predetermined gaming state, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is a specific value (a value smaller than 60 seconds at which the stop suggestion image is displayed), and the reel rotation time timer is clocked. In this situation, when the operating member controlled by the main control board M is operated, it may be configured to operate as follows.

(Action 1)
When the checkout button is operated (pressed and released immediately, or held down), the timer value is continued to be clocked. The settlement process may not be executed by the operation, or the settlement process may be executed.

(Action 2)
If the stop button is operated (pressed) while the stop button is not enabled, such as when acceleration processing for the reel is being executed, the timer value will continue to be clocked and the reel will not stop based on the operation of the stop button. ..

(Action 3)
When the stop button is operated (pressed) while the stop button is enabled, the timer value is continuously clocked and the reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button.

(Action 4)
When the bet button (max bet button, 1 bet button, etc.) is operated, the timer value is continuously clocked and the bet is not executed based on the operation.

(Action 5)
When the start lever is operated, the timer value is continuously clocked, and the reel does not start rotating newly based on the operation (nothing happens because the reel is rotating).

(Action 6)
When the setting key switch is turned from off to on, the timer value is continuously clocked, and the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is not changed based on the setting key switch from off to on.

(Action 7)
When the setting / reset button is operated, the timer value is continuously clocked, and the setting value is not changed or the error is not cleared based on the operation.
It may be configured as described above.

<< Configuration when push order navigation is displayed >>
When the push order navigation is executed in the game in which the predetermined game state (for example, during AT) and the predetermined combination (for example, the common bell) is won, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The push order navigation image suggesting the push order is displayed on the effect display device S40. (2) The timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds), and the stop suggestion image is displayed. Even in the case of, the push order navigation image remains displayed (3) The display area of the stop suggestion image overlaps with the display area of one or more push order navigation images (4) Stops more than the push order navigation image. Suggested image has higher display priority (displayed on the front layer)
It may be configured as described above.

<< Modification example of stop suggestion image >>
As a modification of the configuration relating to the stop suggestion image, the configuration may be as follows.

<Stop suggestion voice>
The stop suggestion of the reel is not limited to the display of the stop suggestion image, and may be configured so that the stop suggestion is performed by voice. As a result, not only the visual sense but also the auditory sense can be notified. It should be noted that the stop suggestion may be given only by voice, or the stop suggestion image may be displayed and the voice may be output. Further, the stop suggestion may be given depending on the lighting mode of the lamp controlled on the sub-control board S side such as the decorative lamp unit D150, or the stop suggestion may be given in combination with the other configurations described above.

Further, as a display mode of the stop suggestion image, the content displayed on the rear surface layer may be made semi-transparent so that the content displayed on the rear layer may be visually recognized, or may be configured to blink at a predetermined cycle.

Similar to the display condition of the stop suggestion image, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) under the condition that the reel rotation time timer is timing and all the reels are rotating. Then, the sub-control board S outputs a stop suggestion sound (for example, "Please stop the reel") from the speaker S20. After that, when the player operates any of the stop buttons (when the operation of the stop button is accepted), the stop button acceptance command is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S stops. By receiving the button reception command, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is terminated, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, and the output of the stop suggestion voice is terminated.

The sub-control board S also ends the display of the stop suggestion image and the output of the stop suggestion voice even when the sub input button SB is detected, and clears the timer value of the reel rotation time timer to zero. If the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero by pressing the sub-input button SB, the timer measurement will be restarted immediately (a stop suggestion image can be displayed 60 seconds after the sub-input button SB is pressed. ). During reel rotation, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer may be cleared to zero each time the pressing of the sub input button SB is detected.

The reel rotation time timer is configured to output a stop suggestion voice when it reaches a predetermined value. However, once the stop suggestion voice is output, the stop suggestion voice is output every specific time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Output (when there is no stop operation). After that, when the player operates any of the stop buttons (when the operation of the stop button is accepted), the stop button acceptance command is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S stops. By receiving the button reception command, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is terminated, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, and the output of the stop suggestion voice is terminated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to periodically notify and promote the reel stop request.

<Control while the front door is open>
First, the screen display of the effect display device S40 when the front door DU is open will be described. Even when the sub-control board S detects that the front door DU is open, the sub-control board S continues to display the same effect as when the front door DU is closed on the effect display device S40. Further, when an error occurs, the sub-control board S displays an error screen for notifying the error even when it is detected that the front door DU is open. The error screen is, for example, a character display of "medal empty error" indicating that the hopper H40 is empty. It should be noted that the character display such as "medal empty error" may be displayed instead of the character display such as "HE".

With such a configuration, the production is not interrupted even when the door is opened, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, when the sub-control board S detects that the front door DU is open, it indicates that the front door DU is open to the effect display device S40 (for example, "the door is open". May be configured to display. In addition to the display on the effect display device S40, the sound may be output from the speaker. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the open state of the front door DU.

<When continuing to count the reel rotation time timer while the front door is open>
The sub-control board S may be configured to continue the measurement of the reel rotation time timer when the front door DU is opened. In such a configuration, the sub-control board S displays a stop suggestion image when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) when the front door DU is closed. And stop suggestion voice output is started. The sub-control board S does not display the stop suggestion image or output the stop suggestion voice even when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value while the front door DU is open. .. Further, the sub-control board S clears the timer value of the reel rotation time timer to zero when the front door DU is closed, or the timer of the reel rotation timer when the front door DU is closed and the setting / reset button is pressed. Clear the value to zero. When the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) when the front door DU is closed and a stop suggestion image is displayed, the stop suggestion image is displayed by opening the front door DU. It may be configured to display the stop suggestion image again by erasing the display of and closing the front door DU.

With this configuration, it is possible to smoothly suggest the stop of the reel when the front door DU is closed without interrupting the notification of the error while the front door DU is open.

<When stopping the counting of the reel rotation time timer while the front door is open>
The sub-control board S may be configured to stop the measurement of the timer value of the reel rotation time timer when the front door DU is opened. In such a configuration, the sub-control board S clears the timer value of the reel rotation time timer to zero when the front door DU is closed, or when the front door DU is closed and the setting / reset button is pressed. The timer value of the reel rotation timer may be configured to be cleared to zero.

With this configuration, it is possible to configure the configuration so that the error notification is not interrupted while the front door DU is open.

The sub-control board S has a sub input regardless of whether the counting of the reel rotation time timer is continued while the front door is open or the counting of the reel rotation time timer is stopped while the front door is open. Even when the button SB is detected, the display of the stop suggestion image and the output of the stop suggestion sound are terminated, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero. As a result, the stop suggestion image can be erased without stopping the reel, and the effect can be made easier to see.

<Configuration to stop timer measurement during error>
The sub-control board S may be configured to stop the measurement of the reel rotation time timer when a predetermined error occurs. With this configuration, the notification of the predetermined error and the notification of the stop suggestion do not overlap, and the notification of the predetermined error can be reliably performed. In such a configuration, when a predetermined error is cleared, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer may be restarted from the stopped timer value, or the timer value of the reel rotation time timer may be set. It may be configured to restart the measurement after clearing zero.

<< Configuration related to power failure >>
The rotating body type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows as a configuration related to power failure.
"The game is executed in the predetermined gaming state and all the reels are rotating. → The power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing. A stop suggestion image may not be displayed even after a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of disconnection → power recovery → power recovery. ”

<< Action on stop suggestion image >>
Next, the action related to the stop suggestion image applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236.
<Display condition 1 of the stop suggestion image displayed when a predetermined time elapses during reel rotation>
First, FIG. 233 will be described. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in a predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer (increment timer).

Next, the sub-control board S stops the reels when a predetermined period elapses after the reel rotation starts (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer). An image display (sometimes referred to as a stop suggestion image) such as "press the stop switch" or "stop the reel" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating.

On the other hand, after the front door DU is opened before the predetermined period elapses during reel rotation (for example, the front door DU is opened 30 seconds after receiving the reel rotation start signal), before the predetermined period elapses. Even when the front door DU is closed, the sub-control board S presses the "stop switch" that prompts the player to stop the reel after a predetermined period (60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reel. An image display (stop suggestion image) such as "Please" or "Please stop the reel" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating. If a predetermined period elapses (60 seconds have passed from the reception of the reel rotation start signal) while the front door DU is open, the effect display device S40 may be configured to be able to display a stop suggestion image. It may be configured not to be displayed.

With this configuration, even if the front door DU is opened after the reel starts rotating, the reel continues to rotate. Therefore, by continuing to measure the time during which the reel is rotating, the motor It is possible to accurately measure the time when the load is applied to the reel.

<Display condition 2 of the stop suggestion image displayed when a predetermined time elapses during reel rotation>
Next, FIG. 234 will be described. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in a predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer (increment timer).

After that, poor rotation of the reel occurs. After that, the reel rotation failure is resolved by a game clerk or the like. Even during the occurrence of the rotation failure, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is continued.

The sub-control board S has "press the stop switch" and "reel" that prompt the player to stop the reel after a predetermined period (60 seconds) has passed since the reel rotation failure was resolved and the reel rotation started. An image display (stop suggestion image) such as "Please stop" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating.

With this configuration, reel rotation failure occurs, and even if the reel rotation seems to have stopped, the motor is continuously loaded, so the door is opened or the reel rotation is poor. Even if there is, by continuing to measure the time when the reel is rotating, it is possible to accurately measure the time when the load is applied to the motor.

In the figure, when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (60 seconds) while the rotation failure is occurring (the situation where the rotation failure is not resolved), a stop suggestion image is displayed. It may be configured to be possible, or it may be configured to display when the rotation failure is subsequently resolved without displaying the stop suggestion image.

In addition, when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (60 seconds) during execution of the reel reacceleration process (reel reacceleration process described in FIG. 33) related to the occurrence of rotation failure, The stop operation is invalid (the reel does not stop even if the stop button is operated), and in that case, the stop suggestion image may be configured to be displayed, or the rotation failure may occur after that without displaying the stop suggestion image. It may be configured to be displayed when it is resolved.

<Display condition 3 of the stop suggestion image displayed when a predetermined time elapses during reel rotation>
Next, FIG. 235 will be described. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in a predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer (increment timer).

Next, the sub-control board S stops the reels when a predetermined period elapses after the reel rotation starts (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer). An image display (sometimes referred to as a stop suggestion image) such as "press the stop switch" or "stop the reel" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating.

Next, when the player presses any of the stop buttons (here, the left stop button D41 is pressed), the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped and displayed on the effect display device S40. The stop suggestion image that has been displayed is deleted.

On the other hand, after the stop suggestion image is displayed on the effect display device S40, a reel rotation failure occurs before the stop button is pressed, and then the stop button is pressed during the reel rotation failure. However, since the pressing of the stop button is invalid, the reel does not stop based on the pressing of the stop button. Further, even when the stop button is pressed, the stop suggestion image displayed on the effect display device S40 is continuously displayed. It should be noted that the reel in which the rotation failure occurs and the stop button pressed in the figure correspond to each other. For example, when the left stop button is operated as the stop button, the reel in which the rotation failure occurs is the left reel. ..

With this configuration, even if the reel rotation is defective and the reel rotation is apparently stopped, the motor is continuously loaded, so even if the reel rotation is defective. By continuing to measure the time when the reel is rotating, it is possible to accurately measure the time when the load is applied to the motor, and the stop button is pressed when a reel rotation failure occurs. If the reel does not stop due to the pressing, it is possible to suggest to the player or the game clerk that the reel rotation failure may continue by continuing to display the stop suggestion image.

<Display condition 4 of the stop suggestion image displayed when a predetermined time elapses during reel rotation>
Next, FIG. 236 will be described. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in a predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer (increment timer).

Next, the sub-control board S stops the reels when a predetermined period elapses after the reel rotation starts (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer). An image display (sometimes referred to as a stop suggestion image) such as "press the stop switch" or "stop the reel" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating.

On the other hand, if a recoverable error occurs before the predetermined period elapses after the reel rotation starts (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer), the reel rotation will start. Even if a predetermined period has elapsed from the start, the stop suggestion image is not displayed, and the rotation of the reel is stopped because the stop button is pressed (here, the left stop button D41 is pressed). That is, while a recoverable error (for example, a medal empty error) is occurring, the error screen is displayed without displaying the stop suggestion image and the background image. Note that (1) while a recoverable error is occurring, the timer value is cleared to zero without measuring the reel rotation time timer, and when the recoverable error is resolved, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is started. Alternatively, (2) When the recoveryable error is being generated, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is continued, the recoverable error is resolved, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer has reached a predetermined value. May be configured to display a stop suggestion image, or (3) the reel rotation time timer is continuously measured while a recoverable error is occurring, and the stop button is operated while the recoverable error is occurring. By doing so, when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is started, the recoverable error is resolved, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer has reached the predetermined value. May be configured to display a stop suggestion image.

On the other hand, when a reel rotation failure occurs before the stop button is pressed and then the timer value of the reel rotation start timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds), a stop suggestion image is displayed on the effect display device S40. After that, even if the stop button is pressed while the reel rotation failure is occurring, the reel is not stopped based on the pressing of the stop button because the pressing of the stop button is invalid. Further, even when the stop button is pressed, the stop suggestion image displayed on the effect display device S40 is continuously displayed. It should be noted that the reel in which the rotation failure occurs and the stop button pressed in the figure correspond to each other. For example, when the left stop button is operated as the stop button, the reel in which the rotation failure occurs is the left reel. .. It should be noted that the left reel does not stop based on the pressing of the left stop button because the pressing of the left stop button is invalid (the acceptance of the stop operation is invalid) even when the rotation failure occurs for the middle reel. That is, when a rotation failure occurs in any of the reels, the acceptance of the stop operation of all the stop buttons becomes invalid.

With this configuration, even if the reel rotation is defective and the reel rotation is apparently stopped, the load is continuously applied to the motor, so even if the reel rotation is defective. By continuing to measure the time when the reel is rotating, it is possible to accurately measure the time when the load is applied to the motor, and when the stop button is pressed and the reel does not stop due to the pressing, By continuing to display the stop suggestion image, it is possible to suggest to the player or the game clerk that the reel rotation failure may continue. In addition, even if the motor is continuously loaded and the stop suggestion image should be displayed, the situation does not immediately affect the progress of the game, so that the progress of the game is greatly affected. It is possible to make a gaming machine capable of executing an appropriate display according to the situation of the game, in which the display of the returnable error is displayed with priority.

It is also possible to configure the stop suggestion image to be deleted when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is pressed while the stop suggestion image is being displayed. More specifically, when the sub-control board S detects that the sub-input button SB is pressed, the display of the stop suggestion image is erased, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero. If the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero by pressing the sub-input button SB, the timer measurement will be restarted immediately (a stop suggestion image can be displayed 60 seconds after the sub-input button SB is pressed. ). During reel rotation, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer may be cleared to zero each time the pressing of the sub input button SB is detected. Further, when the sub control board S detects that the sub input button SB is pressed, the display of the stop suggestion image is erased, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, and until the reel rotation is started in the next game. The timer may not be measured (once the sub-input button SB is pressed to delete the stop suggestion image, the stop suggestion image is not displayed until the next game).

With this configuration, in a game in which the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 and a game in which an image suggesting a winning combination is displayed on the effect display device S40, the player can press the stop button. When you want to check the effect display device S40 before executing the reel stop operation (press the stop button) in order to grasp accurately, the display of the stop suggestion image is deleted by pressing the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2. Even in a gaming machine capable of notifying the load status of the motor by displaying a stop suggestion image, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player mistakenly operates the stop button and causes a disadvantage.

<<< Configuration / Reset Button Configuration >>>
As a configuration relating to the setting / reset button M30 included in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example, a configuration applicable to the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that one or more configurations described in detail below can be combined with all the configurations according to this example.

When the setting / reset button is ON (ON), the sensor related to the setting / reset button is detecting the pressing, and when the setting / reset button is OFF (OFF), the setting / reset button is used. Indicates a state in which the sensor related to is not detecting an operation (pressing). For example, even if the error cancellation or setting value selection operation is not executed even if the setting / reset button is operated, if the sensor detects that the setting / reset button is pressed, the setting / reset button is turned on. It is called (ON).

When an error occurs, the main control board M determines that the error has occurred and enters an error state, and a command indicating that the error has occurred is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Then, the sub-control board S grasps the occurrence of the error by receiving the command. Since the main control board M is configured to be able to transmit commands according to the type of error occurring to the sub control board S, the sub control board S grasps the type of error that has occurred by the received command. can do.

<(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (while the front door is closed)>
First, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior (while the front door is closed) when the number of credits is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) and the setting / reset button is on and various operation members are operated will be described. ..

First, the terms used in this figure will be described. The "max bet button" is the pressing of the max bet button, which is an operating member controlled on the main control board M side, which can bet the maximum number of bets in one game of the game machine by operating the max bet button. .. By pressing the max bet button, it may be possible to bet only the maximum number of bets. That is, when the credit is 3 or more, the number of bets is 0 and the number of bets is 3, the number of bets is 1 and the number of bets is 3, and the number of bets is 2 and the number of bets is 3. If the credit is 2 and the number of bets is 0, the bet will not be bet even if the max bet button is pressed, and if the credit is 1 and the number of bets is 1, the bet will not be bet even if the max bet button is pressed. You may. The fact that the "max bet button" is invalid means that even if the max bet button is operated in a situation where the credit is 3 or more and the number of bets is 0, no bet is made.

By operating the "1 bet button", it is possible to bet 1 bet each time the player presses within the range of the maximum number of bets in one game of the game machine (the number of bets is 1 or 2 in one operation). The number of bets is 3) by operating the number 2 or 3 times. This is the pressing of the 1-bet button, which is an operating member controlled on the main control board M side. It should be noted that even if the 1-bet button is operated a plurality of times, the number of bets may be set to 1 only (1 operation is performed when the number of bets is 0, and 1 operation is performed when the number of bets is 1). The number of bets is 1 and the number of bets is 2, the number of bets is 1, and the number of bets is 3 and the number of bets is 1). In addition, "1 bet button" is invalid means that even if the 1 bet button is operated in the situation where the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 0, no bet is made.

"Medal insertion" means that the player manually inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot. "Automatic bet" means that when the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can play the game again without inserting a medal or pressing the bet button. It is a control to bet the same number of bets in this game. The "start lever" is to start the rotation of the reel by operating the start lever. The "left stop button" is a pressing of the left stop button to stop the rotation of the left reel. The "middle stop button" is a pressing of the middle stop button to stop the rotation of the middle reel. The "right stop button" is the pressing of the right stop button to stop the rotation of the right reel. The "payment button" is an operation of the payment button for executing a payment process for paying out bets and credits that have already been made as medals. The operation of the settlement button for executing the settlement process includes a single press (for example, 0.1 second on → off) and a long press (on for 0.3 seconds or more), and the settlement process is executed by the operation. When the bet is made, all the bet game medals and the credit game medals may be settled, or if there is no bet game medal, the credited game medal is settled and bet. If there are game medals, only the bet game medals may be settled.

The "setting / reset button (error cancellation)" is the pressing of the setting / reset button to be pressed to cancel the error. In the setting change mode, the setting value may be selected by operating the setting / reset button.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is Max Bet Button: Disable, 1 Bet Button: Disable, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is Max Bet Button: Disable, 1 Bet Button: Disable, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 3)
Pattern 3 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, 1 Bet Button: Enabled, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 4)
Pattern 4 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, 1 Bet Button: Enabled, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled.
The pattern 4 may be applied at all times when the setting / reset button is on. As an example, when the set / reset button is on, the start lever, stop button, bet button (all bet buttons such as max bet button and 1 bet button may be disabled, or some bet buttons may be disabled. It may be configured to enable). With this configuration, even if the setting / reset button is turned on due to a failure, it can be configured so as not to affect the progress of the game.

(Pattern 5)
In pattern 5, max bet button: invalid, 1 bet button: invalid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: invalid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Disabled.
The pattern 5 may be applied at all times when the setting / reset button is on. In addition, all bet buttons such as the max bet button and the one bet button may be disabled, or some bet buttons may be disabled. With this configuration, when the setting / reset button is on, even if the setting / reset button is illegally operated, the game can be stopped to prevent fraud. Further, even in a situation where the result is not notified in the final game of the continuous production, the result of the continuous production can be confirmed by inserting the game medal by care.

(Pattern 6)
Pattern 6 is Max Bet Button: Disable, 1 Bet Button: Disable, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 7)
Pattern 7 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, 1 Bet Button: Enabled, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Disable, Start Lever: Disable, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 8)
In pattern 8, max bet button: valid, 1 bet button: valid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: invalid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 9)
In pattern 9, max bet button: invalid, 1 bet button: invalid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 10)
In pattern 10, max bet button: invalid, 1 bet button: invalid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 11)
In pattern 11, max bet button: valid, 1 bet button: valid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 12)
In pattern 12, max bet button: valid, 1 bet button: valid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Enabled.

As described above, in the situation where the front door is closed and the setting / reset button (sometimes referred to as a reset switch) is on, the above patterns 1 to 12 may be configured to operate.

(Change example)
When it is configured in any of the above-mentioned patterns 1 to 12, it may have the following configuration.

When the betting operation (operation of the max bet button or operation of the 1-bet button) is invalid, the medal insertion (maintenance of the medal) is effective, but the start lever may be configured to be invalid.

When a predetermined operating member controlled by the main control board is being operated and the betting operation (max bet button operation or 1 bet button operation) is invalid and the symbol combination related to replay is stopped, automatic betting is performed. However, the start lever may be configured to be invalid.

The configuration may not have a 1-bet button. That is, the configuration excluding the item of "1 bet button" in patterns 1 to 12 in the figure may be applied.

The settlement button and the 1-bet button may be the same button. With this configuration, for example, when pressed for a short time (for example, less than 1 second), it functions as a 1-bet button, and when pressed for a long time (for example, 1 second or more), it functions as a settlement button. It can be configured to work.

When canceling the error with the setting / reset button, the error may be canceled based on the rising signal when the button is pressed (the error can be canceled by turning off → on). With this configuration, even if the setting / reset button breaks down when the setting / reset button is pressed and the button is continuously pressed on, the button is pressed (off → on). The error can be cleared with.

When the error is canceled by the setting / reset button, the error may be canceled based on the falling signal when the button is pressed (the error can be canceled by turning on → off). With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to cancel an error due to fraud. More specifically, even if the setting / reset button is turned off → on due to fraud, it is necessary to turn it on → off in order to clear the error, and it takes time to clear the error. Therefore, it becomes difficult to cancel the error due to fraud.

In a game in which a small winning combination of PB = 1 (for example, a common bell) is won, from the situation where only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted and the reel related to the final stop is used. The setting / reset button is turned off → on when a slip is occurring, and then the setting / reset button is on. After the reeling is completed, the payout process is executed, but the pressing of the bet button is invalidated. (Bet is not made even if the bet button is operated). With this configuration, the progress of the game can be stopped when fraud is performed.
Similarly, in a game in which a small winning combination of PB = 1 (for example, a common bell) is won, since only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted and the final stop is received. When the reel related to the stop is slipping, the setting / reset button is turned off → on, and then the setting / reset button is on. After the slip is completed, the payout process is executed, but the start lever It may be configured so that the game does not start (the reel does not rotate) based on the operation. By configuring in this way, if the player is slipping, a privilege is given to the player for the result of the game, but by preventing the progress of the next game, damage is caused if it is fraudulent. It can be suppressed.

In a game in which a small winning combination of PB = 1 (for example, a common bell) is won, from the situation where only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted and the reel related to the final stop is used. The setting / reset button may be turned off → on when slip occurs, and then the payout process may not be executed after the setting / reset button is on and the slip is completed (reel stopped). .. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent profit acquisition due to fraud by stopping the progress of the game without giving profit due to fraud.

In the game in which the replay of PB = 1 is won, when only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted, and the reel related to the final stop is slipped. After the setting / reset button is turned off → on, and then the setting / reset button is on, automatic betting is performed, but the subsequent operation of the start lever is invalidated (operate the start lever). However, the reel may not start rotating). With this configuration, the progress of the game can be stopped when fraud is performed.

In the game in which the replay of PB = 1 is won, when only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted, and the reel related to the final stop is slipped. After the setting / reset button is turned off → on, and then the setting / reset button is on, the automatic betting may not be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent profit acquisition due to fraud by stopping the progress of the game without giving profit due to fraud.

<(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open) will be described.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, 1 Bet Button: Enabled, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is Max Bet Button: Disable, 1 Bet Button: Disable, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Disable, Start Lever: Disable, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 3)
In pattern 3, max bet button: invalid, 1 bet button: invalid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: valid only once, left stop button: valid only once, middle stop button: valid only once Enabled, right stop button: valid only once, settlement button: valid only once.

(Pattern 4)
In pattern 4, max bet button: valid only once, 1 bet button: valid only once, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: invalid, start lever: valid only once, left stop button: valid only once, medium Stop button: Valid only once, Right stop button: Valid only once, Settlement button: Valid only once.

"Valid only once" means "max bet button", "1 bet button", "automatic bet", "start lever", "left stop button" after turning the setting / reset button off → on. , "Middle stop button", "Right stop button", or "Settlement button" is valid, and after performing any of the first operations, all the above operations are invalid. be.

In this way, in the situation where a predetermined error occurs, the front door is opened, the setting / reset button is turned off → on in the situation where the front door is open, and the on state is maintained, the above It may be configured to act like pattern 1 to pattern 4.

In the above patterns 1 to 4, the front door is opened in a situation where no error has occurred, and the setting / reset button is turned off → on in a situation where the front door is open to maintain the on state. It may be applied to the situation.

It may also be configured as follows:
(1) After turning the setting / reset button off → on (error is cleared) (on continues), "max bet button", "1 bet button", "automatic bet", "left stop button", The first operation of the "middle stop button", "right stop button", or "payment button" may be enabled only once, and the "medal insertion" and "start lever" may be enabled. The "start lever" is effective after "inserting a medal" while the setting / reset button is on, and if the reel starts rotating by operating the start lever, then the stop button is operated only once. It will be possible.
(2) After turning the setting / reset button off → on (error is cleared) (on continues), "medal insertion" is effective, and after "medal insertion", "payment button" is effective. It may be configured as follows. In addition, if there is a game medal bet in such a configuration and only the game medal bet is settled by one settlement process (credits are not settled), the settlement process is concerned. After that, the betting operation (max bet button or 1-bet button) may be invalidated (“medal insertion” is valid).

(Change example)
During the reel rotation, the error may not be notified even if a predetermined error occurs, or the predetermined error may not be notified even when the front door is open.

While the reel is rotating, if a predetermined error occurs, the error is notified, but the error may not be cleared by operating the setting / reset button.

When the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) is on, the configuration may not notify the error even if a predetermined error occurs. In such a configuration, when the stop button is turned on → off, a predetermined error may be notified.

When the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) is on, an error is notified when a predetermined error occurs, but the error may not be canceled by operating the setting / reset button.

<(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the Max Bet button is on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on will be described.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is: start lever: valid, left stop button: valid, middle stop button: valid, right stop button: valid, settlement button: valid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is start lever: valid, left stop button: valid, middle stop button: valid, right stop button: valid, settlement button: invalid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 3)
Pattern 3 is start lever: invalid, left stop button: valid, middle stop button: valid, right stop button: valid, settlement button: valid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 4)
Pattern 4 is: start lever: invalid, left stop button: valid, middle stop button: valid, right stop button: valid, settlement button: invalid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 5)
Pattern 5 is: start lever: valid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement button: valid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 6)
Pattern 6 is: start lever: valid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement button: invalid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 7)
Pattern 7 is start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement button: valid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 8)
Pattern 8 is start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement button: invalid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

As described above, in the situation where the max bet button is on, it may be configured to operate as in the above patterns 1 to 8.

In the above patterns 1 to 8, the pattern 8
(1) In the situation where the credit is 0 and the number of bets is 0, the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (2) The situation where the credit is 50 and the number of bets is 0. The situation where the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued (3) When the credit is 50 and the number of bets is 1, the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (4) The situation where the max bet button is turned off → on and the bet number is kept on when the credit is 50 and the number of bets is 3. (5) The credit is 0 and the number of bets is 3. Situation where the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued (6) When one or more reels are rotating, the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued. Situations that may be applied to the above situations.

<(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on will be described.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled, Setting / Reset Button (Error Clearing): Enabled.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Disabled, Setting / Reset Button (Error Cancellation): Enabled.

(Pattern 3)
Pattern 3 is Max Bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Enabled, Setting / Reset button (Error clearing): Enabled.

(Pattern 4)
Pattern 4 is Max Bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Disable, Setting / Reset button (Error clearing): Enabled.

(Pattern 5)
Pattern 5 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Enabled, Setting / Reset Button (Error Clearing): Enabled.

(Pattern 6)
Pattern 6 is Max Bet button: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Disable, Setting / Reset Button (Error Cancellation): Enabled.

(Pattern 7)
Pattern 7 is Max Bet Button: Disable, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Enabled, Setting / Reset Button (Error Cancellation): Enabled.

(Pattern 8)
Pattern 8 is Max Bet Button: Disable, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Disable, Setting / Reset Button (Error Cancellation): Enabled.

As described above, in the situation where the start lever is on, it may be configured to operate as in the above patterns 1 to 8.

In the above patterns 1 to 8, the pattern 8
(1) When the number of bets is 0, the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (2) When the number of bets is 1, the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (3) The situation where the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued in the situation where the number of bets is 3. (4) The re-game symbol is stopped and the automatic bet is displayed. In the executed situation, the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (5) In the situation where one or more reels are rotating, the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued. The situation may be applied to the above situation.

<(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on will be described. The on of the stop button in FIG. 237 (E) indicates the on during the period when the stop button is invalid. That is, the situation in which one of the stop buttons is pressed during the period when the stop operation by the stop button is not accepted (for example, all reels are stopped) is described. "Left stop" indicates whether or not the stop operation based on the operation of the left stop button is valid, and "Middle stop" indicates whether or not the stop operation based on the operation of the middle stop button is valid. Therefore, "right stop" indicates whether or not the stop operation based on the operation of the right stop button is effective. In this example, if any one of the stop buttons is turned from off to on and the on state continues, it indicates whether the other stop buttons are valid or invalid, and is turned on. It should be added that it does not indicate whether the stop button is enabled or disabled. For example, when the left stop button is turned from off to on and the on state continues, it is applied to the items of "middle stop" and "right stop", but not to the item of "left stop". .. Similarly, when the middle stop button is turned from off to on and the on state continues, it is applied to the items of "left stop" and "right stop", but it is applied to the item of "middle stop". Not done. Similarly, when the right stop button is turned from off to on and the on state continues, it is applied to the items of "left stop" and "middle stop", but it is applied to the item of "right stop". Not done.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is: Start lever: Enabled, Max bet button: Enabled, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Enabled, Setting / Reset button (Error clearing): Enabled. be.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is: Start lever: Enabled, Max bet button: Enabled, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Disabled, Setting / Reset button (Error clearing): Enabled. be.

(Pattern 3)
Pattern 3 is: Start lever: Disable, Max bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Enabled, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. be.

(Pattern 4)
Pattern 4 is: Start lever: Disable, Max bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Disable, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. be.

(Pattern 5)
Pattern 5 is: Start lever: Enabled, Max bet button: Enabled, Left stop button: Disable, Middle stop button: Disable, Right stop button: Disable, Settlement button: Enabled, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. be.

(Pattern 6)
Pattern 6 is: Start lever: Enabled, Max bet button: Enabled, Left stop button: Disable, Middle stop button: Disable, Right stop button: Disable, Settlement button: Disable, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. be.

(Pattern 7)
Pattern 7 is: Start lever: Disable, Max bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Disable, Middle stop button: Disable, Right stop button: Disable, Settlement button: Enabled, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. be.

(Pattern 8)
Pattern 8 is: Start lever: Disable, Max bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Disable, Middle stop button: Disable, Right stop button: Disable, Settlement button: Disable, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. be.

As described above, in the situation where any of the stop buttons is on, it may be configured to operate as in the above patterns 1 to 8.

In the above patterns 1 to 8, the pattern 8
(1) When the reel is rotating and the stop button is effective (constant speed state, etc.), the stop button is turned off → on and the on state is continued. In some situations, the start lever is turned off → on. (2) When the reel is stopped and the stop button is invalid, the stop button is turned off → on and the on state is continued (3) Reel rotation The situation where the stop button is turned off → on and the on state is continued in the situation where the stop button is disabled (acceleration state, etc.) may be applied to the above situation.

Although "error cancellation" is enabled in all of the above patterns 1 to 8, the error may not be cleared in any of the patterns. For example, (1) the stop button is turned off → on while the reel is rotating, and the reel is stopped. When the on state of the stop button is continued, (2) the stop button is pressed as the final stop operation during the reel rotation. It may be configured so that "error cancellation" cannot be performed when the reel related to the final stop is slipping from off to on and the stop button related to the final stop is continuously on.

(Change example)
Regarding the operation of various buttons and start levers, it seems that whether or not the subsequent game progress is possible differs depending on whether the operation is turned on when the operation is valid and when the operation is turned on when the operation is invalid. It may be configured. With this configuration, the game progresses when the operation member is turned on when the operation is valid, but if the on continues, there is a possibility of fraud related to the progress of the game. The operation of other operating members is invalidated, but the game does not proceed depending on the on by the operation of the operating member when the operation is invalid, so there is a possibility of fraud related to the progress of the game even if the on continues. Since it is low, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly distrusted without invalidating the operation of other operating members.

In addition, when the left stop button is turned from off to on when all reels are stopped and the on state is continued, the betting operation (max bet button or 1 bet button) and the "start lever" are effective. , In the situation where the reel is rotating by operating the start lever after operating the max bet button and betting the maximum number, the "middle stop button" and the "right stop button" are disabled (the left stop button is on). It may be configured to remain in the state). It can also be applied to a configuration in which the middle stop button is turned on and a configuration in which the right stop button is turned on. In such a configuration, when the left stop button is turned on → off while the reel is rotating, and then off → on, the stop operation of the left stop button is accepted and the left stop button is kept on. May be configured so that the middle stop button or the right stop button is enabled (accepts a stop operation). With such a configuration, the result of the game may differ depending on the reel stop order and the timing of accepting the stop operation, but usually one of the stop buttons is already turned on at the start of reel rotation. If the situation is different from the progress of the game, you can prevent such a situation by disabling the operation of the stop button, and if the stop button is turned on → off, the above Since the situation different from the normal game progress has been resolved, the stop button can be enabled to smooth the game progress.

In addition, when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped and the right reel is rotating, the operation of the right stop button is accepted (off → on), the right reel stops and the game ends. When the right stop button is still on, the betting operation (max bet button or 1 bet button) and the "start lever" are effective, and after operating the max bet button and betting the maximum number, the start lever The "left stop button" and the "middle stop button" may be enabled in the situation where the reel is starting to rotate by operating. With such a configuration, the off → on of the right stop button as the final stop operation related to the previous game is detected, and if the on continues after that, the player executes the final stop operation. There is a high possibility that the game will continue to be on, and it is unlikely that the right stop button is out of order. can do. It should be noted that the fact that the right stop button is the final stop operation is just an example, and the configuration can be applied even when the left stop button or the middle stop button is the final stop operation.

In addition, as described above, in the situation where one of the stop buttons is continuously on and one of the reels is rotating, the power is cut off, then the power is restored, and when the power is restored, either one is used. If the stop button of is on, all stop buttons may be configured to be disabled. As a specific example, it may be configured as follows.
(1) When the left stop button is on and all reels are rotating, the power is cut off, then the power is restored, and the left stop button remains on even when the power is restored ( If it was continued before the power was turned off, all stop buttons will be disabled.
(2) When the left stop button is on and all reels are rotating, the power is cut off, then the left stop button is released (on → off), and then the left stop button is pressed (). (Off → On), then the power is restored, and if the left stop button remains on when the power is restored, all the stop buttons are invalidated.
(3) When the left stop button is on and all reels are rotating, the power is cut off, then the left stop button is released (on → off), and then the middle stop button is pressed (). (Off → On), then the power is restored, and if the middle stop button remains on at the time of the power restoration, all the stop buttons become invalid.
It may be configured as described above. With such a configuration, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure in the game hall, etc. in a situation different from the normal game progress in which one of the stop buttons is already turned on at the start of reel rotation. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the result of the game differs depending on the reel stop order or the timing of accepting the stop operation.

In addition, in the situation where the left stop button is still on and the middle stop button and the right stop button are disabled, the power is turned off, then the power is restored, and the left stop button is turned on. In the continuous situation, the operation of the middle stop button and the right stop button may be valid, and the operation of the middle stop button and the right stop button may be invalid.

Regarding the operation of various buttons and start levers, whether or not the subsequent game progress is possible differs depending on whether the operation is turned on when the operation is valid and when the operation is turned on when the operation is invalid. Will be described in detail below.

<Structure 1>
The start lever that causes the reel to rotate is maintained on (when the start lever is turned off → on in a valid situation, and the reel starts rotating based on the fact that the start lever is turned off → on). When it is, the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) is invalid, but the start lever turns off → on while the reel is rotating (the start lever turns off → on in the invalid situation). , The stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) when the on is maintained may be enabled (in the case of a constant speed state). With this configuration, it is difficult for the game to proceed when the game is started illegally, but the operation of the start lever after the game is started may cause a failure or an operation error. By enabling the progress of the game because it is high, it is possible to maintain the fraud prevention effect and not hinder the progress of the game.

<Structure 2>
One of the stop buttons operated as a reel stop operation is turned on (when the stop button is turned off → on in a valid situation, and the reel is stopped based on the fact that it is turned off → on). When it is maintained, the other stop buttons are disabled, but after the reel is stopped, one of the stop buttons is turned off → on (the stop button is turned off → on in the invalid situation), and the on is maintained. When it is set (for example, when the left stop button is turned off → on in the situation where the left reel is stopped and the left stop button is kept on), the other stop buttons are enabled. May be.

<Structure 3>
When the bet button (max bet button, 1 bet button) is kept on (when the bet button is turned off → on in a valid situation, it is newly based on the fact that it is turned off → on. The operation of the start lever (betting) is invalid, but when the betting button is turned off → on (the betting button is turned off → on in an invalid situation) and the on state is maintained after the bet is completed. The operation of the start lever may be enabled.

<Structure 4>
It is in a state where no bet is made (the number of bets is 0), and the setting / reset button for clearing the error is turned on (when a predetermined error occurs, the setting / reset button is turned off → on. (The error is cleared based on the fact that the error is cleared) is maintained, the operation of the bet button is invalid, but the setting / reset button is turned off → on in the situation where no error has occurred, and The operation of the bet button while the on state is maintained may be valid.

In addition, the setting / reset button for clearing the error is turned on (when a predetermined error occurs, the setting / reset button is turned off) when the bet is not bet (the number of bets is 0). → The error is cleared based on the fact that it is turned on), the operation of the bet button is invalid, but the setting / reset button is turned off → on when an error occurs. However, when the cause of the error is not resolved and the error is not cleared, the operation of the bet button while the on state is maintained may be valid.

Further, when the setting / reset button is kept on, the setting may not be changed.

<< An example of a combination of configurations related to the operation member on the main side >>
An example of a combination of configurations relating to the above-mentioned operation member on the main side (operation member controlled on the main control board side) will be described in detail below.

<Combination 1>
(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when the front door is closed): Pattern 1
(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open): Pattern 1
(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on: Pattern 1
(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on: Pattern 1
(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on: Pattern 1

By combining and configuring as described above, all except the "max bet button", "1 bet button", and "payment button" in the special situation where the setting / reset button is turned on while the front door is closed. Since it can be enabled, the game can proceed smoothly.
<Combination 2>
(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when the front door is closed): Pattern 1
(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open): Pattern 3
(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on: Pattern 4
(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on: Pattern 4
(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on: Pattern 5

By combining and configuring as described above, even if the same setting / reset button is turned on, the "max bet button", "1 bet button", and "payment button" can be set while the front door is closed, which is a special situation. It is disabled so that a new game cannot be started, and when the error is cleared while the front door is open, it is set / reset by enabling only once except for "Insert medal" and "Automatic bet". Even when the error canceling operation of turning on the button is continued, the manager of the playground can confirm whether or not the error is cleared and the game can be executed.
<Combination 3>
(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when the front door is closed): Pattern 5
(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open): Pattern 1
(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on: Pattern 8
(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on: Pattern 8
(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on: Pattern 8

By combining and configuring as described above, when the setting / reset button is on, basically all operations of the operation members on the main side can be invalidated, and an illegally strong gaming machine can be configured. can.
<Combination 4>
(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when the front door is closed): Pattern 10
(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open): Pattern 1
(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on: Pattern 7
(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on: Pattern 7
(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on: Pattern 7

By combining and configuring as described above, when the main member is operated, the operation of the main member related to the progress of the game is invalidated, while the operation of the settlement button related to the end of the game is performed. By enabling it, it is possible to settle the medals held by the player even in an abnormal situation so as not to suffer a disadvantage.

Although the configuration related to the setting / reset button has been described above, the error may be canceled by turning on / off the door key switch operated when the front door is opened / closed (for example, the door key is inserted to the right). When twisted, the front door can be opened, and when twisted to the left, the error can be cleared). When configured in this way, it may be configured as follows.

<Structure 1>
It has a setting / reset button and a door key switch, and all the operations at the time of error cancellation and the errors that can be canceled are the same. As an example, when canceling the medal empty error, the error can be canceled by turning the setting / reset button off → on, or turning the door key switch off → on.

<Structure 2>
It has a setting / reset button and a door key switch, and some or all of the operations at the time of error cancellation and the errors that can be canceled are different. As an example, (1) When canceling the medal empty error, it can be canceled by turning the setting / reset button off → on, and it cannot be canceled by turning the door key switch off → on, and the door is opened. When canceling the error, it cannot be canceled by turning the setting / reset button off → on, but it can be canceled by turning the door key switch off → on, or (2) a medal empty error. When canceling, the setting / reset button may be turned off → on → off, or the door key switch may be turned off → on.

<Structure 3>
The error can be canceled by either the setting / reset button or the door key switch (the same error or different error may occur), and when canceling the error by the setting / reset button, The condition includes that the front door is open, and the condition may include that the front door is closed when the error is cleared by the door key switch.

<Structure 4>
The error can be canceled by either the setting / reset button or the door key switch (the same error or different error may occur), and when canceling the error by the setting / reset button, The condition includes that the front door is open, and when the error is cleared by the door key switch, it may be configured so that whether the front door is closed or open is not included in the condition.

<Structure 5>
It has a setting / reset button and a door key switch, and when the setting / reset button is on (pressed) and when the door key switch is on (door key is twisted to the left). In some cases, the valid / invalidity of the operating member controlled by the main control board M may be different. As an example, the operation of the start lever may be invalid when the setting / reset button is on, and the operation of the start lever may be effective when the door key switch is on.

In addition, one or a plurality of the above <configuration 1> to <configuration 5> may be combined. Further, the above-mentioned configuration related to the setting / reset button (the configuration related to the setting / reset button may be replaced with a door key switch) may be applied to the gaming machine adopting the above <configuration 1> to <configuration 5> (the configuration related to the setting / reset button may be replaced with a door key switch). The above-mentioned configuration that is valid only once, and various valid / invalid configurations).

<Combination of configurations according to this example>
As described above, the gaming machine having the configuration according to the sixth embodiment from the configuration according to the present embodiment has been described. In the configurations from this example to the sixth embodiment, they can be appropriately combined and configured. Hereinafter, an example of a gaming machine in which the configurations according to this example are combined across the configurations according to the sixth embodiment. Are listed.

<Combination configuration 1>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of <Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor in the third embodiment >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing for starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing is performed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not executed.

<Combination configuration 2>
For example, the configuration according to <Structure 1> of << Configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> in this example, and <<< A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to <4th embodiment medal return member >>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is sufficient with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collides with the collision part is , It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a situation in which the medal is bounced up to the medal receiving entrance D341.

<Combination configuration 3>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to << Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Distributor >>>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing for starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and when the player who receives the payout of the game medal pays out the predetermined number of game medals, the player can receive the payout of the game medals from the first card to the predetermined number of games at the same interval. , It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 4>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the sixth embodiment. <When the processing command and channel are one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement according to the sixth embodiment >>><< Configuration 1 >> To be a gaming machine configured by combining.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing for starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while executing the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 5>
For example, the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >>> in the third embodiment and <<<< 4th in the fourth embodiment. Embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to the medal return member >>>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but when an error occurs at this timing, , The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing It is possible to prevent the medal from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though the above is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is relative to the diameter of the game medal. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a sufficient distance and capable of preventing a situation in which the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341.

<Combination configuration 6>
For example, in the third embodiment, <<<< Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >>><< Configuration 1 >>, and in the fifth embodiment, <<<< Fifth Embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to the drive control of the medal payout device >>>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but when an error occurs at this timing, , The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing It is possible to prevent the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the game medal is not executed, and when the player who receives the game medal payout pays out a predetermined number of game medals. It is possible to receive the payout of game medals from the first piece to a predetermined number at the same interval, and it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 7>
For example, the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >>> in the third embodiment and <<<< 6th embodiment in the sixth embodiment. Form A configuration in which the processing command and the channel are one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement >>><< configuration 1 >> It will be a game machine that has been played.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but when an error occurs at this timing, , The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process. It is possible to prevent the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the above is not executed, and while the processing accompanied by the audio output is being executed, the main control board M and When the communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player does not end the output of the voice, so that the user-friendly gaming machine can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine. Can be provided.

<Combination configuration 8>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the 4th embodiment and <<<<<< drive control of the medal payout device in the 5th embodiment >> in the 5th embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion. However, it is possible to prevent the situation where the medals bounce back to the medal receiving entrance D341, and when the player who receives the payout of the game medals pays out the predetermined number of game medals, the same interval from the first to the predetermined number of medals. It is possible to receive the payout of game medals at, and to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 9>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<< medal return member >>> in the fourth embodiment and <<< the main processing related to the settlement of the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment during execution. Processing when communication between the control board and the sub-control board is disconnected When the command and channel are one-to-one >>> The gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion. However, it is possible to prevent the situation where the medal is bounced up to the medal receiving port D341, and the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while the process accompanied by the output of the voice is being executed. In such a case, the player does not end the output of the voice, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 10>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<<< drive control of the medal payout device of the fifth embodiment >>> in the fifth embodiment and <<< execution of the process related to the settlement of the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment. The gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected and the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of >>> when the channel is one-to-one.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when a player who receives a game medal payout pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medal can be paid out at the same interval from the first card to the predetermined number of game medals. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the player, and when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while executing the process accompanied by the sound output, the player hears the sound. Since the output of is not terminated, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 11>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. <Example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>> The configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> in << Configuration 1 >> and <<<<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the above configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing for starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing is performed. Prevents the game medal from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the game medal. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of preventing a situation in which the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341.

<Combination configuration 12>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. <Example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>> The configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> in << Configuration 1 >> and <<<<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<<<<< drive control of the medal payout device of the fifth embodiment >>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing is performed. Prevents the medal from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the game medal. This makes it possible to prevent the situation where the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341, and the player who receives the payout of the game medal receives a predetermined number of game medals. When the medals are paid out, the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first to a predetermined number, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 13>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. <Example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>> The configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> in << Configuration 1 >> and <<<<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. The configuration according to <<<<<< the drive control of the medal payout device of the fifth embodiment >>>> in the fifth embodiment and the processing related to <<< the settlement of the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment. Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of do.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing is performed. Prevents the medal from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the game medal. This makes it possible to prevent the situation where the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341, and the player who receives the payout of the game medal receives a predetermined number of game medals. When paying out, the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first to a predetermined number, so the player does not feel uncomfortable, and while the process accompanied by the output of voice is being executed, the main When the communication between the control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred in the game machine because the output of the voice is not completed. It is possible to provide a friendly game machine.

<Combination configuration 14>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of <Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor in the third embodiment >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting. By determining the speed state → the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp (book). In the example, it can be executed by using (lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310) or the like, and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. In the state, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the error occurs, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, the blocker D100 is turned off). Then, the blocker D100 prevents the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the execution process (such as refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240) is not in time and the credit addition process is not executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible.

<Combination configuration 15>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to << Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member >>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting. By determining the speed state → the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp (book). In the example, it can be executed by using the reel window frame lamp D310, etc.), and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. A user-friendly gaming machine that has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the machine and makes it possible to prevent the first gaming medal that collides with the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving entrance D341. Can be provided.

<Combination configuration 16>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to << Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Distributor >>>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting. By determining the speed state → the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp (book). In the example, it can be executed by using the reel window frame lamp D310, etc.), and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. When the cards are paid out, the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first card to a predetermined number of cards, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 17>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the sixth embodiment. <When the processing command and channel are one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement according to the sixth embodiment >>><< Configuration 1 >> To be a gaming machine configured by combining.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting. By determining the speed state → the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp (book). In the example, it can be executed by using the reel window frame lamp D310, etc.), and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the voice is not completed. Can provide user-friendly gaming machines.

<Combination configuration 18>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << configuration related to the display end of push order navigation >> and <<< example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor in the third embodiment >>> in the third embodiment < A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to <Structure 1 >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the push order navigation must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden that the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. When the closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the error has occurred. , The execution process of the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, the blocker D100 is turned off and the game medal is refunded to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the game medal is not executed even though the credit addition process is not executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting into the gaming machine (swallowing).

<Combination configuration 19>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << configuration related to the display end of push order navigation >> and the configuration related to <<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining them.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the player must visually recognize the push order navigation at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden of being able to visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, and the medal falls. The depth of the surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collides with the collision portion bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to prevent.

<Combination configuration 20>
For example, it relates to the configuration related to << configuration related to the display end of push order navigation >> in this example, and <<<< the drive control of the medal payout device in the fifth embodiment >>> in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the push order navigation must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden that the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, and the game medal. When a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player who receives the payout can receive the payout of the game medals from the first piece to the predetermined number at the same interval, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. A game machine can be provided.

<Combination configuration 21>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << configuration related to the display end of push order navigation >> and the configuration related to <<< sixth embodiment settlement processing in the sixth embodiment, the main control board and the sub The gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board and the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of >>> when the channel is one-to-one.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the player must visually recognize the push order navigation at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden of the player being able to visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. If the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while the process accompanied by the output is being executed, the player does not end the audio output, so that some kind of thing is done in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to recognize that a problem has not occurred.

<Combination configuration 22>
For example, << Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >> in this example, and << Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor in the third embodiment >> in the third embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to <Structure 1 >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Because it is clear, it is unlikely that the player will have an unintended disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of medals due to a mistake in the pushing order, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credits are still available. If an error occurs at this timing even though the addition process is not performed, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the error occurs, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, the blocker D100 is turned off and the blocker D100 turns off the blocker D100). It is possible to prevent the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the execution process (such as refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240) is not in time and the credit addition process is not executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 23>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << reel control and push order navigation >> and the configuration related to <<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. It is a gaming machine configured by combining.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Since it is clarified, it is unlikely that the player will have an unintended disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of medals due to a mistake in the pushing order, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is relative to the diameter of the gaming medal. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that has a sufficient distance and makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion bounces off to the medal receiving entrance D341. ..

<Combination configuration 24>
For example, in this example, it relates to the configuration related to << reel control and push order navigation >>, and in the fifth embodiment, it relates to <<< drive control of the medal payout device in the fifth embodiment >>>>. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Because it is clear, it is unlikely that the player will have an unintended disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of winning medals due to a mistake in the pushing order, etc. Since the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first card to a predetermined number of cards, it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 25>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << reel control and push order navigation >>, and the configuration related to <<< sixth embodiment settlement processing in the sixth embodiment, the main control board and the sub The gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board and the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of >>> when the channel is one-to-one.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Because it is clear, it is unlikely that the player will have an unintended disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of cards to be acquired due to a mistake in the push order, etc. A user-friendly game that enables the player to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the audio output does not end when the communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected. Machines can be provided.

The example of the gaming machine combined over the configuration according to the sixth embodiment from the configuration according to this example has been described above, but these are examples, and the configuration according to the sixth embodiment from the configuration according to this example is appropriate. , Can be combined and configured.

<<<<<< Disclaimer of the 15th embodiment >>>>>
Next, as a fifteenth embodiment, an example of the structure of the front door locking device and the back box (base) UB will be described. In the fifteenth embodiment, the rotating body type gaming machine P shown in FIG. 2 is different from the rotating body type gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 in that the cover of the locking device shown by the reference numeral CV of FIG. 2 is not provided. Is different. Hereinafter, this point and the like will be described, but with respect to the housing and each member and the like in the housing, FIGS. 1 to 3, FIG. 66, FIG. I will do it. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, for convenience of reference and explanation with reference to FIG. 2, a new reference numeral is added to a member which has already been described but is not designated in the above-described embodiment, such as the back box UB. Or, in the above-described embodiment, a member (for example, the above-mentioned "hinge HJ") and the like which are newly described by giving a name or a reference to a member which is shown only in the drawings will appear. Needless to say, it does not exist only in the 15th embodiment, but also exists in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this is not limited to the fifteenth embodiment, but the same applies to the above-described embodiment.
<<< Schematic structure of the fifteenth embodiment >>>

First, the schematic structure of the housing KY will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 243, the housing KY of the revolving pachinko machine P has a back box UB having an opening on the front side and a front door DU capable of opening and closing the opening of the back box UB. .. The back box UB is formed in a box shape including a bottom surface portion UB10 on which the medal payout device H and the like are placed, left and right side surface portions UB12A and UB12B, a top surface portion UB14, and a back surface portion UB16. Further, two hinges HJs that support the front door DU so as to be openable and closable are provided on the left side surface portion UB12A of the back box UB at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, of the back surface side of the front door DU, the side portion on the anti-hinge side (the position where the cover CV is located in FIG. 2. The rotating body type gaming machine P of the present embodiment does not have the cover CV in FIG. 2 as described above. (Although it is in a state, the illustration is omitted), as shown in FIGS. 238 and 243, a locking device DJ for locking the front door DU is provided.
<<< Structure of the locking device in the 15th embodiment >>>

The locking device DJ is a predetermined key by rotating the front door DU in the open state (open state) that is unlocked by the locking device DJ to a position that closes the opening of the back box UB. It is locked without being inserted and turned, and can be unlocked by inserting and turning a predetermined key into the keyhole D260 (see FIG. 1) in the locked state. As shown in FIG. 238, this locking device DJ has a lock portion DJ10 for locking the front door DU and a lock portion DJ30 for operating the lock portion DJ10 with a key inserted through a keyhole D260. ing.
<<< Structure of lock front DJ10 >>>

The lock portion DJ10 is rotatably supported by a fixing member DJ11 fixed to a structure on the back surface side of the front door DU and an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the fixing member DJ11 via pins DJ12a, respectively, and the front door Two hook-shaped upper hooks DJ13A and lower hooks DJ13A and lower hooks DJ13B that protrude toward the back surface side of the DU and are provided at intervals in the vertical direction, and a first moving member DJ14 that is movably attached to the fixing member DJ11. And a second moving member DJ15, and the upper hook DJ13A and the lower hook DJ13B are provided on the back box UB at intervals in the vertical direction, respectively. The front door DU is locked by locking the UB 20B (see FIG. 2), and the front door DU is unlocked by releasing the lock.

As shown in FIG. 238, the fixing member DJ11 fixes the first moving member DJ14, the second moving member DJ15, the upper and lower hooks DJ13A and DJ13B, and the lock portion DJ30 while supporting them on the back surface side of the front door DU. .. The fixing member DJ 11 is integrally provided with a first side portion DJ 11A substantially parallel to the back surface of the front door DU and extending vertically and a second side portion DJ 11B substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the front door DU and extending vertically. It is a metal plate whose cross-sectional shape is formed into a substantially L-shape. The upper hook DJ13A and the lower hook DJ13B are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the fixing member DJ11, respectively, as described above, and the lock portion DJ30 is located near the lower end portion when viewed from the central portion in the vertical direction of the fixing member DJ11. Is installed (more on this later).

A locking recess DJ13a for locking to the upper locking member UB20A is formed at the tip of the upper hook DJ13A, and the rear end of the upper hook DJ13A is connected to the upper end of the first moving member DJ14 via a pin DJ12b. It is attached so that it can rotate. In the upper hook DJ13A, a portion between the locking recess DJ13a and the pin DJ12b and slightly above the locking recess DJ13a is rotatably fixed to the second side portion DJ11B of the fixing member DJ11 via the pin 12a.

With this configuration, the first moving member DJ 14 moves upward from the locking position (initial position) shown by the solid line in FIG. 238 toward the unlocking position shown by the alternate long and short dash line along the fixing member DJ 11. Then, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 238, the pin DJ12b moves upward together with the first moving member DJ14 and pushes up the rear end portion of the upper hook DJ13A, so that the upper hook DJ13A is moved upward. It rotates (swings) around the pin DJ12a so that its tip is lowered, so that the locked state with the upper locking member UB20 is released (the front door DU is unlocked). It has become.

A locking recess DJ13b for locking to the lower locking member UB20B is formed at the tip of the lower hook DJ13B, and the second side of the fixing member DJ11 is formed at the rear end of the lower hook DJ13B via a pin DJ12a. It is rotatably supported by the portion DJ11B. Further, in the lower hook DJ13B, a portion between the locking recess DJ13b and the pin DJ12a and slightly below these is rotatably attached to the lower end portion of the first moving member DJ14 via the pin DJ12b.

With this configuration, when the first moving member DJ14 moves upward from the locking position shown by the solid line in FIG. 238 toward the unlocking position shown by the alternate long and short dash line along the fixing member DJ11, the pin DJ12b is moved. It moves upward together with the first moving member DJ14 and pushes up the portion of the lower hook DJ13B between the pin DJ12a and the locking recess DJ13b. As a result, the lower hook DJ13B rotates about the pin DJ12a so that its tip portion rises upward, and the locked state with the lower locking member UB20B is released.

The first moving member DJ14 is interposed between the protruding piece DJ11C protruding from the first side portion DJ11A of the fixing member DJ11 toward the back surface of the front door DU and the second side portion DJ11B of the fixing member DJ11. The locking position (the position of the solid line in FIG. 238 or the position of FIG. 239 (a)) and the front door DU that lock the front door DU along the fixing member DJ11 while being guided by the second side portion DJ11B and the protruding piece DJ11C. Is provided so as to be movable up and down at the unlocking position (the position of the two-point chain line in FIG. 238 or the position in FIG. 239 (b)).

Although only one projecting piece DJ11C as a guide member for the first moving member DJ14 is shown in FIG. 238, a plurality of projecting pieces DJ11C may be provided at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the guide member is not limited to this protruding piece DJ11C. For example, the second side portion DJ11B of the fixing member DJ11 is provided with a protruding piece protruding from the second side portion DJ11B toward the first moving member DJ14, while the first moving member DJ14 is provided with an elongated hole extending vertically, and the elongated hole is described above. By configuring the protruding piece of the second side portion DJ11B of the above to be inserted, the vertical movement of the first moving member DJ14 with respect to the fixing member DJ11 may be guided. In short, it is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to guide the vertical movement of the first moving member DJ14 with respect to the fixing member DJ11. Further, in the present embodiment, the projecting piece DJ11C is provided integrally with the first moving member DJ14, but it goes without saying that a projecting piece of another member may be provided instead.

The first moving member DJ14 extends from the first hanging DJ14A substantially hanging from the upper end thereof and the first hanging DJ14A in the side direction (right side when viewed in FIG. 238) on the hinge HJ side of the front door DU. The first bent portion DJ14B bent in the direction, the second hanging portion DJ14C substantially hanging from the extending direction tip (right end when viewed in FIG. 238) of the first bent portion DJ14B, and the first from the second hanging portion DJ14C. The second bent portion DJ14D bent so as to extend in the direction of the hanging portion DJ14A (left side when viewed in FIG. 238), and the second bent portion DJ14D which is substantially hung from the extending direction tip (left end when viewed in FIG. 238). It consists of the lower part of the three-hanging DJ14E.

A spring hooking portion DJ14a to which the upper end portion of the spring BN is attached is integrally provided at the central portion in the vertical direction of the first hanging portion DJ14A and the end portion on the first side portion DJ11A side of the fixing member DJ11. The moving member DJ14 is constantly urged downward by this spring BN. Further, the second hanging portion DJ14C is formed with an upper insertion hole DJ14Ca and a lower insertion hole DJ15Cb through which the upper protrusion DJ32 and the lower protrusion DJ33 of the cam DJ34 in the lock portion DJ30 described later are inserted, respectively. Further, the second bent portion DJ14D of the first moving member DJ14 is integrally provided with a handle DJ14F for projecting toward the back surface side of the front door DU and inserting and gripping the first opening UB17 described later. ing. In the present embodiment, the handle DJ14F is provided integrally with the second bent portion DJ14D to form a part of the first moving member DJ14, but instead of this, a separate handle DJ14F is attached / detached. It may be provided so as to be free. Further, in the present embodiment, the first moving member DJ14 is provided with the handle DJ14F, but the first moving member DJ14 without the handle DJ14F may be used.

Like the first moving member DJ14, the second moving member DJ15 has a first hanging DJ15A substantially hanging from the upper end thereof and the first hanging DJ15A in the direction of the side of the front door DU on the hinge HJ side. The first bent portion DJ15B bent so as to extend, the second hanging portion DJ15C substantially hanging from the extending direction tip of the first bent portion DJ15B, and the second hanging portion DJ15C extending in the direction of the first hanging portion DJ15A. It is composed of a second bent portion DJ15D (see FIG. 239) that is bent as described above, and a third hanging portion DJ15E (see FIG. 239) that substantially hangs from the tip of the second bent portion DJ15D in the extending direction.

As shown in FIG. 239 (a), the second moving member DJ15 is arranged so that the first bent portion DJ15B is located above the first bent portion DJ14B of the first moving member DJ14 in the locked position. This position is the initial position of the second moving member DJ15. The first hanging portion DJ15A of the second moving member DJ15 is integrally provided with a spring hooking portion DJ15a located below the spring hooking portion DJ14a of the first moving member DJ14 and to which the lower end portion of the spring BN is attached. The second moving member DJ15 is constantly urged upward by this spring BN. Further, in the second hanging lower portion DJ15C of the second moving member DJ15, the upper insertion hole and the lower insertion hole (not shown) similar to the upper insertion hole DJ14Ca and the lower insertion hole DJ15Cb of the first moving member DJ14 are provided. It is formed so as to overlap and communicate with DJ14Ca and the lower insertion hole DJ15Cb. Therefore, the upper protrusion DJ32 and the lower protrusion DJ33 of the cam DJ34 in the lock portion DJ30 described later are inserted into the upper insertion hole and the lower insertion hole of the second hanging lower portion DJ15C via the upper insertion hole DJ14Ca and the lower insertion hole DJ15Cb. It is possible.

Further, the third hanging portion DJ15E of the second moving member DJ15 is integrally provided with a detection piece DJ15Ea protruding toward the second hanging portion DJ15C. The detection piece DJ15Ea is provided in the housing KY and is for being detected (to release the error state) by the photosensor FS having the light emitting element FS1 and the light receiving element FS2 shown in FIG. 238. That is, as shown in FIG. 239 (a), when the second moving member DJ15 is in the initial position, the light emitting element FS1 is in a light receiving state (ON state) receiving light from the light receiving element FS2. In this state, when the lock portion DJ30 operates by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)} as described above (this will be described later), the initial position. By moving the second moving member DJ15 in the above to the reset position below it (see FIG. 239 (c)), the detection piece DJ15Ea is interposed between the light emitting element FS1 and the light receiving element FS2, and the light receiving element DS1 is used. By blocking the light, the light receiving element FS2 is put into a non-light receiving state (OFF state), and for example, an error state such as a door opening error is released (the error state is reset). In order to release this error state, for example, the error state may be released by pressing the reset button provided in the housing. Further, in the present embodiment, the detection piece DJ15Ea is provided integrally with the second moving member DJ15, but it goes without saying that a detection piece of another member may be provided instead.
<<< Structure of the lock portion DJ30 of the 15th embodiment >>>

As shown in FIGS. 240 and 242, the lock portion DJ30 is arranged so as to be located between the first bent portion DJ14B and the second bent portion DJ14D of the first moving member DJ14 on the back surface side of the front door DU. It is located below the center CML (see FIG. 242) in the vertical direction of the front door DU. As shown in FIG. 240, the lock portion DJ30 has an inner cylinder (not shown) that is rotated by a key inserted from a keyhole D260 (see FIG. 1) inside the outer cylinder DJ31, and is on the opposite side of the inner cylinder from the keyhole D260. A plate-shaped cam DJ34 having an upper protrusion DJ32 and a lower protrusion DJ33 is attached to the end portion of the above. The upper protrusion DJ32 of the cam DJ34 can be inserted into the upper insertion hole DJ14Ca of the first moving member DJ14 and the upper insertion hole of the second moving member DJ15, and the lower protrusion DJ33 of the cam DJ34 is inserted into the upper insertion hole of the first moving member DJ14. It can be inserted into the lower insertion hole of the hole DJ14Cb and the second moving member DJ15.

Therefore, when the key inserted into the inner cylinder through the keyhole D260 is turned clockwise (in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction) in the closed state (closed state) in which the front door DU is locked, the initial stage is changed. The cam DJ34 at the position (the position shown in FIG. 239 (a)) rotates about the rotation shaft DJ34a so that the lower protrusion DJ33 faces upward, so that the lower protrusion DJ33 becomes the first moving member DJ14. The lower insertion hole DJ14Cb is pushed up while entering the lower insertion hole of the lower insertion hole DJ14Cb and the second moving member DJ15 (see FIG. 239 (b)). As a result, the first moving member DJ 14 moves upward, and as described above, the locked state of the upper hook DJ 13A and the lower hook DJ 13B is released along with this movement.

On the other hand, when the key inserted into the inner cylinder through the keyhole D260 is turned counterclockwise while the front door DU is closed, the cam DJ34 in the initial position has its upper protrusion DJ32 directed downward. By rotating around the rotation shaft DJ34a, the upper protrusion DJ32 enters the lower insertion hole of the second moving member DJ15 via the upper insertion hole DJ14Ca of the first moving member DJ14, and enters the lower insertion hole. It will be pushed down (see FIG. 239 (c)). As a result, the second moving member DJ15 moves downward, and the detection piece DJ15Ea of the second moving member DJ15 cuts the photosensor FS (the detection piece DJ15Ea is between the light emitting element FS1 and the light receiving element FS2 of the photosensor FS. By intervening), the error state will be released.

As shown in FIG. 240, the lock portion DJ30 is provided on the back surface side of the front door DU by a fixing portion including a fixing base DJ36, a screw hole DJ36a, an insertion hole DJ11a, a screw hole DJ11b, and a screw N on the back surface side of the front door DU. It is a structure that is fixed from. Specifically, a fixed base DJ36 in which a screw hole DJ36a is formed is provided on the opposite side of the keyhole D260 of the outer cylinder. Further, in the first side portion DJ11A of the fixing member DJ11, an insertion hole DJ11a for inserting the outer cylinder DJ31 of the lock portion DJ30 from the back surface side of the front door DU, and a screw hole into which the screw N of the lock portion DJ30 is screwed. A screw hole DJ11b is formed at a position corresponding to the DJ36a and into which the screw N is screwed.

Then, while inserting the outer cylinder DJ31 of the lock portion DJ30 into the insertion hole DJ11a of the fixing member DJ11 from the back surface side of the front door DU, the positions of the screw hole DJ36a of the lock portion DJ30 and the screw hole DJ11b of the fixing member DJ11 are aligned. In this state, the lock portion DJ30 is fixed to the fixing member DJ11 by inserting the screw N, which is a fixture, from the back surface side of the front door DU into these screw holes DJ36a and DJ11b and screwing them together. As described above, the lock portion DJ30 has a structure that can be attached to and detached from the fixing member DJ11 (with respect to the back surface of the front door DU) by the screw N.

In the present embodiment, the screw N is used as the fixing tool of the fixing portion, but other fixing tools such as pins may be used as long as the lock portion DJ30 can be fixed, and welding or Needless to say, it may be fixed directly by adhesion or the like. Further, in order to allow the lock portion DJ30 to be attached only from the back surface side of the front door DU, the inner diameter of the insertion hole DJ11a of the fixing portion FB gradually increases from the back surface side to the front side of the front door DU. The shape may be tapered so as to be narrowed, and the outer shape of the outer cylinder DJ 31 inserted through the insertion hole DJ 11a may also be made to match the taper shape.

As described above, the lock portion DJ30 has a structure of being fixed from the back side of the front door DU and cannot be attached to or detached from the front side of the front door DU. Therefore, the front door DU is in the closed state. It cannot be removed from the side, and the lock portion DJ30 cannot be removed unless the front door DU is opened. For this reason, even if you try to remove the lock DJ30 by fraudulent activity, you cannot do it unless you have the key, and even if you have the key, you must perform a conspicuous act of opening the front door DU. This type of fraud can be prevented because it makes it harder to cheat.

<<< Structure of back box UB in the 15th embodiment >>>
Next, the structure of the back box UB will be described. As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the back surface UB 16 of the back box UB has a substantially rectangular first opening UB 17 for inserting a hand when performing various operations such as maintenance inside the housing KY. The front door DU is formed so as to straddle the central CML (see FIG. 242) in the vertical direction (in other words, the central CML passes substantially the center in the height direction of the first opening UB17).

The first opening UB17 is formed so that its maximum diameter (in this embodiment, the diagonal distance TS10 described later) is equal to or larger than the width of the human hand so that a person can insert a hand. This person's hand width is the radial middle hand point (second middle hand head) with the fingers and palm extended, the 2nd to 5th fingers (from the index finger other than the thumb to the little finger) aligned, and the thumb abducted. It is the linear distance from the point that protrudes most to the thumb side of the hand) to the middle hand point on the scale side (the point that protrudes to the little finger side of the fifth middle hand head).

The approximate size of human hand width, especially Japanese hand width, is known from statistics. For example, according to the database "AIST (National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology) Human Body Size Database 1991-92" of the National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology, the average value of the hand width of an adult male is 83.3 mm. The maximum value is about 95.1 mm, and the average value is about 74 mm and the maximum value is 82.1 mm for the width of an adult female. In addition, according to the database "AIST (National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology) Human Body Size Database 1997-98" of the National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology, the average value of the hand width of an adult male is 81.8 mm. The maximum value is about 89 mm, and the average value of the hand width of an adult woman is 73.6 mm, and the maximum value is 85 mm. In addition to the above, statistical information on the dimensions of the human body includes the "Human Characteristics Database" of the Human Life Engineering Research Center.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first opening UB17 is such that the width WI10 is about 90 mm, the height HI10 is about 86 mm, and the diagonal distance TS10 is about 120 mm. The distance TS10 is larger than the maximum diameter of the human hand width of 95.1 mm in the above statistics, and the hand can be inserted into the first opening UB17 with a margin. .. The first opening UB17 has a rectangular shape as described above, but each corner of the four corners is chamfered in a substantially arc shape in order to smoothly insert a hand. Needless to say, even in the case of such a rounded quadrangle with rounded corners, the maximum diameter thereof is still the distance TS10 of the diagonal line TS.

Here, regarding the size of the first opening UB17, the larger the size, the easier it is to insert a hand and perform various operations, but on the other hand, if the size is too large, the medal payout device inside the housing KY from the first opening UB17. (Game medium payout device) H, the main board case M40, and the like may fall off to the outside or be taken out by fraudulent acts. Therefore, regarding the size of the first opening UB17, it is preferable that the hopper H40 and the main substrate case M40 are of a size that cannot be pulled out from the first opening UB17.

Specifically, the medal payout device H has, for example, a small one having a width of about 200 mm, a height of about 200 mm, and a depth of about 200 mm, and the main substrate case M40 has a size of about 200 mm. For example, a small one has a horizontal width (vertical direction as seen in FIG. 128) of about 380 mm and a vertical width (horizontal direction as seen in FIG. 128) of about 170 mm. In this case, from the viewpoint that neither the medal payout device H nor the main board case M40 can be pulled out as the size of the first opening UB17, the size of the first opening UB17 is these medal payout devices. Of the above-mentioned sizes of H and the main board case M40, it is sufficient if the size is smaller than the vertical width of 170 mm of the smallest main board case M40. In this case, the size of the first opening UB17 may be such that the diagonal distance TS10 is less than 170 mm. As described above, the lower limit of the size of the first opening UB17 is the size at which the hand can be inserted as described above (the diagonal distance TS10, which is the maximum diameter, is equal to or larger than the human hand width or larger than the human hand width) ( For example, 100 mm or more), a predetermined member that is not to be pulled out in the housing KY (refers to the above-mentioned medal payout device H, main board case M40, etc. Of course, other members in the housing KY may be used. Needless to say, the upper limit may be a size that does not allow passage (the diagonal distance TS10, which is the maximum diameter, is equal to or less than the minimum diameter of a predetermined member or less than the minimum diameter), depending on the specifications and requests. It can be set as appropriate.

In this way, the lower limit of the size of the diagonal distance TS10, which is the maximum diameter of the first opening UB17, is set to be equal to or larger than the human hand width or larger than the human hand width, and the upper limit thereof is set to be equal to or lower than the minimum diameter of the predetermined member. By setting the value to less than, it becomes easy to insert a hand from the first opening UB17 to perform various operations in the housing KY, and to pull out a predetermined member in the housing KY from the first opening UB17. It is possible to prevent falling off. The shape of the first opening U17 is not limited to the above-mentioned rectangle, and can be appropriately set, for example, a circular shape or an elliptical shape. In short, regardless of the shape, if the lower limit of the maximum diameter is greater than or equal to the width of a person's hand or larger than the width of a person's hand, and the upper limit is within the range of less than or less than the minimum diameter of a predetermined member. It is not particularly limited, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the back surface portion UB16 of the back box UB, in addition to the above-mentioned first opening portion UB17, a substantially circular second opening portion UB18 located at the lower left of the first opening portion UB17 is formed. Specifically, the second opening UB18 is formed in the back surface UB16 of the back box UB at a position facing the handle DJ14F of the first moving member DJ14, and as shown in FIG. 243, the second opening is formed. By looking into the portion UB18, the handle DJ14F of the first moving member DJ14 can be directly visually recognized. Further, in the back surface UB16 of the back box UB, in addition to the first opening UB17 and the second opening UB18 described above, a plurality of the first opening UB17 and the second opening UB18 are above and below the first opening UB17 and the second opening UB18. A long hole-shaped third opening UB19 is formed, and light outside the rotating body type gaming machine P is inserted through these third openings UB19 (lighting is possible). ..

The shape of the second opening UB18 is not limited to a circular shape, but can be an appropriate shape such as a rectangular shape or an elliptical shape. It may have such a shape. Further, the shape of the third opening UB19 may be any shape as long as it is opened so that light from the outside of the rotating body type gaming machine P can enter. Further, the position of the third opening UB19 can be formed at an appropriate position, for example, at least one of the left and right sides of the first opening UB17 and the second opening UB18. Further, the first to third openings UB17, 18, and 19 are provided on the back surface portion UB16 of the back box UB, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, any of both side surface portions UB12A and UB12B of the back box UB. It can be provided at an appropriate place on the back box UB, such as by providing it.

By forming the second opening UB18 in this way, when a hand is inserted from the first opening UB17 to perform various operations in the housing KY, various operations are performed while visually checking the inside of the housing KY. Can be done, and the efficiency of various industries can be improved. Further, by forming the third opening UB19, it is possible to collect light into the housing KY, and the visibility inside the housing KY can be improved.
<<< Positional relationship of devices in the housing KY >>>

Next, the positional relationship of the devices in the housing KY will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 242, a medal payout device H is mounted on the bottom surface portion UB10 of the back box UB so as to be movable back and forth along the rail Ra. The power supply unit E is arranged on the left side when viewed (right side when viewed in FIG. 242), and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located on the bottom surface of the medal payout device H on the right side when viewed in FIG. 2 (left side when viewed in FIG. 242). It is placed on the UB10 so that it can be moved. As is clear from FIG. 242, the height of the medal payout device H from the bottom surface portion UB10 is lower than the lower end of the first opening portion UB17. Further, the height of the power supply unit E from the bottom surface UB10 is lower than the height of the medal payout device H from the bottom surface, and the height of the medal auxiliary tank HS from the bottom surface 10 is the bottom surface of the power supply unit E. The height of each of the medal payout device H, the power supply unit E, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is lower than the height of the part (in other words, the heights of the medal payout device H, the power supply unit E, and the medal auxiliary tank HS are all lower than the central CML, and they are all central. It is located below the CML).

As shown in FIG. 242, under the condition that the front door DU is in the closed state, a gap GU1 is formed between the medal payout device H and the locking device DJ in the left-right direction of the housing KY. Further, as shown in FIG. 244, when the front door DU is in the closed state, between the medal payout device H and the handle DJ14F of the first moving member DJ14 in the locking device DJ in the front-rear direction of the housing KY. Also, a gap GU2 is formed. Therefore, in this state, the medal payout device H is not in contact with any part of the lock portion DJ10 or the lock portion DJ30 of the locking device DJ. Further, neither the auxiliary tank HS nor the power supply unit E is in contact with the back surface of the front door DU or various structures provided on the back surface. Further, the first opening UB17 of the back box UB is formed between the medal payout device H and the reel unit RU, and is formed in the gap GU3 between the medal payout device H and the reel unit RU from the first opening UB17. You can put your hand in it.

In FIG. 242, the lower end of the reel unit RU and the upper end of the first opening UB17 are slightly separated from each other, but the position is not limited to this, and the lower end of the reel unit RU and the upper end of the first opening UB17 are not limited to this. Or the lower end of the reel unit RU may be located slightly below the upper end of the first opening UB17. In short, the positional relationship is not particularly limited as long as at least one of the gaps GU1 to 3 into which the hand can be inserted from the first opening UB17 is formed. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaps GU1 and GU2 between the medal payout device H and the locking device DJ and the gap GU3 between the medal payout device H and the reel unit RU have been described as examples, but the description is limited thereto. Not done. That is, among the devices mounted on the bottom surface UB10 of the back box UB, the devices protruding toward the front door DU side (medal payout device H in the above example) and the devices on the back side of the front door DU. -A device having a predetermined gap formed between the member (locking device DJ in the above example) and having the highest height among the devices mounted on the bottom surface UB10 of the back box UB (the above example). Then, it is sufficient that a predetermined gap is formed between the medal payout device H) and the reel unit RU. In the present embodiment, the reel unit RU is mounted in the back box UB, but instead of this, the reel unit RU may be mounted directly on the back surface of the front door DU. By doing so, the gap between the reel unit RU and the back box UB becomes wider than when the reel unit RU is installed in the back box UB, and various operations in this gap can be performed. Can be easy.
<<< Action of the 15th embodiment >>>

Next, the operation based on the configuration of the fifteenth embodiment described so far will be described. When performing maintenance of the housing KY of the rotating game machine P, the front door DU is opened with a key to supply the game medals to the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H, or the game medals are full. The auxiliary tank HS is taken out to remove the game medal in the auxiliary tank HS, the power supply unit E is turned on / off, etc. At this time, the key is placed in the housing KY. If you accidentally close the front door DU or lose the key itself, you will not be able to open the front door DU (Situation 1). Further, for example, when performing maintenance of the locking device DJ, the lock portion DJ30 may be removed, and if the front door DU is accidentally closed in such a state, the front door DU can be opened even if there is a key. It disappears (situation 2).

In the present embodiment, when the situation 1 and the situation 2 and the like are encountered, the front door DU can be opened as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 243, while looking into the second opening UB18 and confirming the position of the handle DJ14F of the first moving member DJ14, insert a hand from the first opening UB17 and lift the handle DJ14F upward while holding the handle DJ14F. .. As the first moving member DJ14 moves upward along with this, the hooks DJ13A and DJ13B of the locking device DJ move from the position of the solid line shown in FIG. 238 (the position of FIG. 239 (a)) to the position of the alternate long and short dash line. (Position in FIG. 239 (b)), the locked state of the locking members UB20A and UB20B is released, and the front door DU is opened. In the above example, the first moving member DJ14 is moved upward by holding the handle DJ14F, but for example, the first moving member DJ14 is directly held by a portion other than the handle DJ14F such as the second bent portion DJ14D. Needless to say, it is possible to move the above.

If the medal payout device is close to the front door DU and it is difficult to perform the work when the hand is inserted from the first opening UB17, the medal payout device H is moved toward the back portion UB16 ( In FIG. 244, the medal payout device H may be moved to the right side) to widen the gap GU1 between the medal payout device H and the front door DU to secure a work space. Further, as the work to be performed by inserting a hand from the first opening UB17, not only the above-mentioned unlocking of the front door DU but also the positions of the medal payout device H and the auxiliary tank HS are set to appropriate positions if they are misaligned. Returning, turning on / off the power to the power supply unit E, picking up the game medals scattered in the back box UB, moving the game medals in the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H to the auxiliary tank HS, etc. You may perform various operations such as.

As described above, by forming the first opening UB17, the front door DU cannot be opened without the key, or the front door DU cannot be opened even with the key. Even if it falls into the above, the front door DU can be opened because the first moving member DJ14 can be directly touched from the first opening UB17. Further, by forming the second opening UB18, the position of the handle DJ14F can be directly visually recognized through the second opening UB18, and the work can be carried out while checking the handle DJ14F. The work on the moving member DJ14 can be facilitated.

Further, in the situation where the front door DU is in the closed state, since the medal payout device H and the first moving member DJ14 and its handle DJ14F are not in contact with each other, a hand is inserted from the first opening UB17 and the first moving member is inserted. It is possible to easily perform operations such as directly operating the DJ14 and gripping and operating the handle DJ14F. Further, since the gaps GU1 to GU3 are formed between the medal payout device H and the back surface of the front door DU, and between the medal payout device H and the reel unit RU, insert a hand through the first opening UB17. A space for unlocking the front door DU can be secured, and this work can be easily performed. Further, since such a space can be secured, even in a situation where the front door DU cannot be opened, not only the work on the first moving member DJ14 described above, but also the medal payout device H and the auxiliary as described above. Return the tank HS to the proper position, turn on / off the power to the power supply unit E, pick up the game medals scattered in the back box UB, and assist the game medals of the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H. Various operations such as returning to the tank HS can be easily performed.
<<< Modified example of the locking device DJ in the 15th embodiment >>>

The locking device DJ of the present embodiment has the above configuration. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, as a locking device, a cover for preventing fraud on the first moving member DJ14 and the second moving member DJ15. Further CVs may be provided. In this case, next to the cover CV, for example, an operation unit similar to the handle DJ14F described above and a link mechanism for moving the first moving member DJ 14 up and down in conjunction with the operation of the operation unit are provided, and the first opening is provided. The front door DU may be unlocked by moving the first moving member DJ14 in the cover CV up and down by inserting a hand from the UB 17 and operating the above-mentioned operation unit. The point is that the first moving member DJ14 can be directly touched (a state in which the cover CV can be directly touched without the cover CV as in the present embodiment) or indirectly (the cover CV is present and directly touched as in the present modification). It suffices if it can be moved to the above-mentioned operation unit and link mechanism) when it cannot be performed.
<<< Structure of Door Switch D80 >>>

Next, the structure of the door switch (open / close detection device) D80 capable of detecting the open / close chain state of the front door DU will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 248, the door switch D80 is provided above and inside the right side surface portion UB12B on the opposite hinge side of the back box UB. The door switch D80 has an initial protruding position (position shown in FIG. 248 (a)) and a retracted (retracted) retracted position (shown in FIG. 248 (b)) with respect to the main body D80A. It has a detection piece D80B that can appear and disappear at the position), and the detection piece D80B is always urged to the initial position by an urging member (not shown) when the front door DU is open. In the present embodiment, the door switch D80 is the upper part of the right side surface portion UB12B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a central portion or a lower portion of the right side side surface portion UB12B. In short, it suffices if it is provided in the back box UB at a position where the opening and closing of the front door DU can be detected.

When the detection piece D80B of the door switch D80 is pressed by the closed front door DU and is in the retracted position, the open / close sensor (front door sensor) (not shown) for detecting the detection piece D80D is turned on and the front door is turned on. Detects the closed state of the DU (detects the closure of the front door DU) (the ON signal, which is a detection signal, is output to the main control board M). Further, the detection piece D80B of the door switch D80 moves toward the protruding position in accordance with the operation of opening the front door DU, and the front door DU is SK (specifically, the front door DU) a predetermined distance from the back box UB. It will be located in the protruding position when it is separated by the distance between the right end of the back surface and the right end of the front of the back box UB. At this time, the open / close sensor is turned off and the open state of the front door DU is detected (front door). The opening of the DU is detected) (the OFF signal, which is a detection signal, is output to the main control board M).

In other words, from the state in which the open / close sensor detects the closed state of the front door DU (the state in which the detection piece 80B is located in the retracted position), the moment when the open / close state is detected (the detection piece 80B is in the protruding position). The open state of the front door DU is detected at the moment when the front door DU is located (hereinafter, the open state of the front door DU at this time is simply referred to as a "slightly open state"). That is, the open / close sensor is either from the state where the front door DU is in the closed state to the state before the front door DU in the closed state is in the slightly opened state (predetermined open state) separated from the back box UB by a predetermined distance SK. In the specific distance TK (not shown), which is the distance of, the closed state of the front door DU is detected, and after the front door DU is slightly opened, the open state of the front door DU is detected. In short, the open / close sensor is the maximum distance among the specified distance TK (the specific distance TK immediately before the predetermined distance SK) from the locked and closed front door DU (the distance between the front door DU and the back box UB is 0). ), When the front door DU is located at a specific open position, the opening of the front door DU is not detected, and after a predetermined distance SK (after the slightly open state, which is a predetermined open state), the front door DU It is designed to detect opening. Therefore, the relationship between these distances is 0 <specific distance TK (closed detection state) <predetermined distance SK (moment of open detection).

When the open / close sensor detects the open state of the front door, error processing is performed by the main control board M and the sub control board S as described in the above-described embodiment. That is, again, when the main control board M receives a signal from the open / close detection sensor that the front door DU is open and determines that a door open error has occurred, an error due to this detection occurs. The detection command is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a door opening error notification sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the error detection command by detecting the door opening error flag, or, as shown in FIG. 249, "door opening error". By performing processing such as displaying an image display such as "" on the effect display device S40, a notification that the front door DU is in the open state (hereinafter, simply referred to as "door opening error notification") is sent. It is configured to be done.

In the open / close sensor, when the detection piece 80B is in the initial position, it is turned off to detect the closed state of the front door, and when the detection piece 80B is in the protruding position, it is turned on and the front door DU is in the open state. May be detected. Regarding the ON / OFF state of the open / close detection sensor, an opening error process or the like is performed by outputting to that effect to the main control board M. Further, as the one that detects the opening of the front door DU by the detection signal of the open / close sensor, the one that detects only that the front door DU is in the open state may be used. That is, when the front door DU is in the open state, the open / close detection sensor is in the detection state (the state where there is a detection signal from the open / close detection sensor), and the main control board M recognizes the open state of the front door DU. When the front door DU is in the closed state, the open / close detection sensor is in the non-detection state (there is no detection signal from the open / close detection sensor), so that the main control board M recognizes the closed state of the front door DU. You can do it. Similarly, as the open / close detection sensor, a sensor that detects only the closed state of the front door DU is used, and when the open / close sensor is in the detected state, the main control board M recognizes the closed state of the front door DU and does not detect it. The main control board M may recognize the open state of the front door DU depending on the state.

<<< Positional relationship between the medal shooter DS92 and the hopper H40 >>>
As shown in FIG. 248 (b), the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 of the front door DU were appropriate medals (medals satisfying the standard) by the medal selector DS (see FIG. 3). In this case, the medal shooter DS92, which is the shoot body schematically shown in FIG. 135, is used to insert the medal into the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H. That is, the medal shooter DS92 is a communication passage (specific communication passage) that guides an appropriate medal among the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 to the hopper H40. The base end of the medal shooter DS92 extends in the horizontal direction substantially parallel to the back surface of the front door DU (horizontal direction as seen in FIG. 2), and is inside the medal selector DS substantially parallel to the back surface of the front door DU. It is designed to accept game medals that have passed through the medal flow path DR. Further, the tip portion of the medal shooter DS92 is bent and extends in an arc shape so as to be substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the front door DU from the base end portion, and the game medal passing through the medal shooter DS92 is transferred to the back surface of the front door DU. It is designed to discharge in a direction almost perpendicular to. That is, as shown in FIG. 248 (b), when the front door DU is in the closed state, the tip of the medal shooter DS92 extends substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the front door DU, and the game is played in this direction. The medals are ejected and inserted into the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H.

Regarding the shape of the medal shooter DS92, for example, when the medal flow path DR of the medal selector DS extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the front door DU, the bent tip portion as described above is used. It can be appropriately changed according to the direction of the medal flow path DR of the medal selector DS, such as forming a straight gutter shape from the base end portion to the tip end portion without providing the medal selector DS. In short, the game medal ejected from the tip of the medal shooter DS92 may be inserted into the hopper H40, and its shape is not particularly limited. However, from the viewpoint of surely inserting the game medal into the hopper H40, it is desirable that the game medal discharged from the medal shooter DS92 has a direction and a length so as to be discharged to a substantially central portion of the hopper H40.

The positional relationship between the hopper H40 and the medal shooter DS92 is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 248 (b), when the front door DU is in the closed state, the tip of the medal shooter DS92 (the tip in the moving direction of the game medal) is the opening H30 of the hopper H40 (see FIG. 66). (The tip of the medal shooter DS92 is located between the front side wall H42 and the rear side wall H46 of the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 65). The game medal that has been inserted into the medal shooter DS92 and has passed through the medal shooter DS92 is inserted into the hopper H40 through the opening H30. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), at the moment when the front door DU is separated from the back box UB by a predetermined distance SK, in other words, the open / close sensor detects the closed state of the front door DU. The tip of the medal shooter DS92 is still above the hopper H40 even under the condition that the front door DU is opened at the moment when the opened state is detected as described above and the door opening error is notified. The game medals that have been inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and passed through the medal shooter DS92 are inserted into the hopper H40. In the present embodiment, the predetermined distance SK is less than twice the diameter b of the medal (predetermined distance SK <2 × diameter b), but the distance is not limited to this, and the door switch described above is not limited to this. Needless to say, it is variable according to the protruding length of the detection piece 80B of the D80.

<<< Deformation example of the positional relationship between the medal shooter DS92 and the hopper H40 >>>
In the above-described embodiment, the tip of the medal shooter DS92 is located above the hopper H40 in the closed state and slightly open state of the front door DU, but the medal shooter DS92 is located in the closed state and slightly open state of the front door DU. Is located in front of the front end of the front side wall H42 of the hopper H40 (in the direction of the front door DU), and a predetermined first distance is provided between the tip of the medal shooter DS92 and the tip of the front side wall H42 of the hopper H40. The tip of the medal shooter DS92 is located above the hopper H40 in the closed state of the front door DU, but the tip of the medal shooter DS92 is on the front side of the hopper H40 in the slightly open state. Even if it is located in front of the front end of the side wall H42 (in the direction of the front door DU) and a predetermined first distance is formed between the tip of the medal shooter DS92 and the tip of the front side wall H42 of the hopper H40. good. As the predetermined first interval, since the game medal that has popped out (discharged) from the medal shooter DS92 has the momentum at the time of popping out, the diameter b of the game medal shown in FIG. It may be less than twice the diameter (preferably about 5 mm to 25.5 mm), but from the viewpoint of surely inserting the game medal from the medal shooter DS92 into the hopper H40, it is preferable that the diameter of the medal is less than b. be.
<<< Positional relationship between the game medal outlet H60 of the hopper H40 and the medal receiving entrance D341 of the medal return member D340 >>>

As shown in FIG. 248 (b), when the front door DU is in the closed state, the medal receiving of the game medal exit H60 of the hopper H40 (see also FIG. 2) and the medal return member (predetermined communication passage) D340. The entrance D341 (see also FIGS. 116 and 117) is in contact with each other, and the game medal from the game medal exit H60 is received by the medal receiving entrance D341, and the medal tray (receiving portion) is received via the discharge port D240. It will be paid out to D230. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), when the front door DU is in the slightly opened state and the door opening error notification is made, the game medal exit H60 and the medal receiving entrance D341 have a predetermined second interval. Only separated.

The predetermined second interval is substantially the same as the above-mentioned predetermined distance SK, and similarly to the above-mentioned predetermined first interval, the game medal that has popped out from the game medal exit H60 has the momentum at the time of popping out. , It is set to be less than twice the diameter b of the game medal. Even in this predetermined second interval, the diameter of the medal is preferably smaller than b from the viewpoint of reliably accepting the game medal from the game medal outlet H60 into the medal receiving port D341. When the front door DU is in the closed state, the game medal outlet H60 of the hopper H40 and the medal receiving entrance D341 of the medal return member D340 are separated from each other within the range of the second interval. Is also good. In short, regardless of whether the front door DU is closed or slightly opened, it is sufficient that the medal receiving entrance D341 can accept the game medal from the game medal exit H60.

In this way, even when the front door DU is slightly open, the game medal from the medal shooter DS92 is inserted into the hopper H40, so that the game medal is erroneously awarded when the front door DU is slightly open. The game medal was inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 without noticing that it was inserted into the insertion slot D170 or the front door DU was slightly opened, or the game medal was inserted into the medal insertion slot D170. Immediately after (the inserted game medal is passing through the medal selector DS and the medal shooter DS92), even if the front door DU is slightly open, etc., the game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 is surely inserted. It can be inserted into the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H. As a result, when the front door DU is slightly open, the inserted game medals are scattered in the housing KY outside the medal payout device H, or fall out of the rotating body type game machine P. It is possible to prevent it from happening. In particular, since it is possible to prevent the game medals from being scattered in the portion of the housing KY outside the medal payout device H, it is possible to prevent the game medals from staying in the portion outside the medal payout device H. Even if the front door DU is opened in this state, it is possible to prevent the game medal in the portion outside the medal payout device H from falling to the outside P of the rotating drum type game machine. Therefore, there is no need to pick up the game medals that have fallen outside the rotating machine P, and the maintainability can be improved.

Further, even when the front door DU is slightly opened, the game medal from the game medal exit H60 is accepted by the medal receiving entrance D341, so that the medal payout device H is used to pay out the game medal. Even if the front door DU is erroneously opened slightly during the process, the game medals from the medal payout device H can be reliably paid out to the medal tray D230. As a result, in a situation where the front door DU is slightly open, the game medals from the medal payout device H are scattered in the portion other than the medal payout device H in the housing KY, or the spinning type game. It is possible to prevent the machine P from falling out of the machine P. Therefore, under the condition that the front door DU is slightly opened, the game medal from the medal payout device H is not paid out to the medal tray D230 and falls to a part other than the medal payout device H or to the outside of the rotating drum type game machine P. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money. Furthermore, the trouble of picking up the game medals that have fallen outside the rotating game machine P is eliminated, and the game prevention that the player does not notice the game medals that have fallen outside the rotating game machine P is prevented from being lost. can do. Moreover, regardless of whether the front door DU is closed or slightly open (whatever the state of the front door DU), the inserted game medals and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H are displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the game medal from spilling out of the pachinko / pachislot machine P, there is no need to worry about the game medal spilling out of the pachinko / pachislot machine P, and stable gaming can be performed. ..
<<< Structure of front door DU and back box UB >>>

Next, the structures of the front door DU and the back box UB will be further described. FIG. 245 is a perspective view schematically showing the front door and the back box under the condition that the front door DU is in the open state. As shown in FIG. 245, the front door DU is formed by assembling the left and right vertical plate members DU10a and DU10b extending in the vertical direction and the upper and lower horizontal plate members DU10c and DU10d extending in the horizontal direction in a square shape, and is in a closed state. The outer frame portion DU10 projecting toward the back box UB in the front door DU, and the left and right vertical plate members DU11a and DU11b and the upper and lower horizontal plate members DU11c and DU11d are legally formed in the same manner as the outer frame portion DU10. It has an inner frame portion DU 11 that is about one size smaller than the outer frame portion DU 10 and projects toward the back box UB in the closed front door DU.

Specifically, the upper horizontal plate member DU10c of the outer frame portion DU10 is on the upper part on the back surface side of the front door DU, and the lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10 is on the bottom (lower part) on the back surface side of the front door DU. However, the left vertical plate member DU10a of the outer frame portion DU10 is on the left side portion (side portion on the hinge side) on the back surface side of the front door DU, and the right vertical portion of the outer frame portion DU10 is on the right side portion on the back surface side of the front door DU. Each of the plate members DU10b is configured to project toward the back box UB. Further, the upper horizontal plate member DU11c of the inner frame portion DU11 is located above the back surface side of the front door DU and below the upper horizontal plate member DU10, and is located at the bottom of the front door DU on the back surface side and above the lower horizontal plate member DU10d. The lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11 is provided on both sides of the front door DU on the back surface side, and the left and right vertical plate members DU11a of the inner frame portion DU11 are inside the left and right vertical plate members DU10a and DU10b. And DU11b are configured to project toward the back box UB, respectively. The back surfaces of the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11 are in contact with the front surface of the back box UB in the closed front door DU, and form a part of the back surface of the front door DU. (Of the entire back surface of the front door DU, it constitutes the back surface located closest to the back box UB). In the present embodiment, the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11 are integrally provided on the front door DU, but instead of these, they are configured as separate members from the front door DU. It goes without saying that it is okay to do so.

The back box UB is formed by assembling the left and right vertical plate members UB15a and UB15b extending in the vertical direction and the upper and lower horizontal plate members UB15c and UB15d extending in the horizontal direction in a square shape, and becomes the front door DU in the closed front door DU. It has a back box frame portion UB15 that projects toward it. That is, from the front side (front side of the back box UB) of the left and right side surface portions UB12A and UB12B of the back box UB, the left and right vertical plate members UB15a and UB15b are on the front side (back side) of the top surface portion UB14 and the bottom surface portion UB10, respectively. From the front side of the box UB), the upper horizontal plate member UB15 projects toward the front door DU. In the present embodiment, the back box frame portion UB15 is provided as a separate member from the back box UB, but instead of this, the back box frame portion UB15 is provided integrally with the back box UB. Needless to say, it is also good. The back box frame portion UB15 having such a configuration is inserted between the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11 of the front door DU in a state where the front door DU is closed. Next, this point will be described in detail one by one.

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB when the front door DU is closed, and FIG. 246 is a side view when the front door is closed. , (B) is a top view under the condition that the front door DU is closed. Further, FIG. 247 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB under the condition that the front door DU is in the slightly open state, and FIG. 247 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB under the condition that the front door DU is in the slightly open state. (B) is a top view under the condition that the front door DU is slightly opened.

As shown in FIG. 246 (a), when the front door DU is closed, a back box is placed between the upper horizontal plate member DU10c of the outer frame portion DU10 and the upper horizontal plate member DU11c of the inner frame portion DU11. The upper horizontal plate member UB15c of the frame portion UB15 is inserted (intervened state), and this upper horizontal plate member UB15c functions as an insertion piece (first piece), and the upper horizontal plate member DU10c and each of them The DU 11c is configured to function as a plurality of receiving pieces (second pieces) for receiving the upper horizontal plate member UB15c that functions as an insertion piece. In other words, in the situation where the front door DU is closed, in FIG. 246, from the top, the upper horizontal plate member DU10c of the outer frame portion DU10, the upper horizontal plate member UB15c of the back box frame portion UB15, and the inner frame portion DU11. The upper horizontal plate member DU11c is arranged in this order, and of the upper horizontal plate member DU10c as the second piece, the portion from the substantially central portion to the tip is located above the upper horizontal plate member UB15c as the first piece. Of the upper horizontal plate member DU11c as the second piece, the portion beyond the central portion is located below the upper horizontal plate member UB15c as the first piece, and is in a plan view (housing KY). (Viewed from above), the first piece and the second piece are in an overlapping positional relationship with each other.

Further, a state in which the lower horizontal plate member UB15d of the back box frame portion UB15 is inserted between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10 and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11 (intervened state). The lower horizontal plate member UB15d functions as an insertion piece, and the lower horizontal plate members DU10d and DU11d each function as a plurality of receiving pieces for receiving the lower horizontal plate member UB15d that functions as an insertion piece. It has become. In other words, in the situation where the front door DU is closed, in FIG. 246, from the top, the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11, the lower horizontal plate member UB15d of the back box frame portion UB15, and the outer frame portion DU10. The lower horizontal plate member DU10d is arranged in this order, and of the lower horizontal plate member DU11d as the second piece, the portion from the substantially central portion to the tip is located above the lower horizontal plate member UB15d as the first piece. Of the lower horizontal plate member DU10d as two pieces, the portion beyond the substantially central portion is located below the lower horizontal plate member UB15d as the first piece, and is in a plan view (housing KY). (Viewed from above), the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other.

In the present embodiment, the upper horizontal plate member UB15c is fixed to the lower surface of the top surface portion UB14, and the lower horizontal plate member UB15d is fixed to the upper surface of the bottom surface portion UB10. The upper horizontal plate member UB15c is not limited to this, and the upper horizontal plate member UB15c is configured to project directly from between the upper surface and the lower surface of the top surface portion UB14 (in other words, the front surface of the top surface portion UB14). Also, the configuration may be such that it protrudes from between the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom surface portion UB10 (in other words, the front surface of the bottom surface portion UB10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), when the front door DU is closed, between the right vertical plate member DU10b of the outer frame portion DU10 and the right vertical plate member UB11b of the inner frame portion DU11. The right vertical plate member UB15b of the back box frame portion UB15 is in a state of being inserted, and this right vertical plate member UB15b functions as an insertion piece, and the right vertical plate member DU10b and the right vertical plate member DU11b, respectively, are inserted pieces. It is configured to function as a plurality of receiving pieces for receiving the right vertical plate member UB15b. In other words, in the situation where the front door DU is closed, in FIG. 246, from the top (from the left in the front view of the front door DU), the right horizontal plate member DU11b of the inner frame portion DU11 and the back box frame portion. The right horizontal plate member UB15b of the UB15 and the right horizontal plate member DU10b of the outer frame portion DU10 are arranged in this order, and the right horizontal plate member DU11b as the second piece is above the right horizontal plate member UB15b as the first piece (front door). Located on the left side in the front view of the DU), and the right horizontal plate member DU10b as the second piece is located below the right horizontal plate member UB15b as the first piece (right side in the front view of the front door DU). When viewed from the side surface side of the housing KY, the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship of overlapping each other.

The left vertical plate member DU10a, the left vertical plate member DU11a, and the left vertical plate member UB15a have the same configurations as the right vertical plate member DU10b, the right vertical plate member UB11b, and the right vertical plate member UB15b, respectively. , The illustration and description thereof will be omitted. Further, these vertical plate members UB15a and UB15b are also fixed to the inside of both side surface plates UB12 of the back box UB, but like the above-mentioned upper and lower horizontal plate members UB15c and UB15d, both side surface plates UB12A And UB12B may be configured to protrude from the front surface. Further, each member functioning as the above-mentioned insertion piece may be in a state of being entirely inserted or a part thereof may be in a state of being inserted. In short, at least a part of the insertion piece (in other words, at least a part of the second piece located above and / or below the first piece, or to the left and / or right of the first piece) is inserted. I just need to be there.

Further, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), even under the condition that the front door DU is slightly opened and the door opening error notification is made, the upper horizontal plate member DU10c and the inner frame portion DU11 of the outer frame portion DU10 The tip of the upper horizontal plate member UB15c of the back box frame portion UB15 is located between the upper horizontal plate member DU11c. Therefore, even in this slightly open state, the upper horizontal plate member UB15c is maintained in a state of being inserted between the upper horizontal plate member DU10c and the upper horizontal plate member DU11c. Further, in this slightly open state, the tip of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d of the back box frame portion UB15 is also between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10 and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11. It is in a positioned state, and the state in which the lower horizontal plate member UB15d is inserted between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), even under the condition that the front door DU is slightly opened and the door opening error notification is made, the right vertical plate member DU10b and the inner frame portion DU11 of the outer frame portion DU10 The tip of the right vertical plate member UB15b of the back box frame portion UB15 is located between the right vertical plate member UB11b, and the right vertical plate member is located between the right vertical plate member DU10b and the right vertical plate member UB11b. The configuration is such that the UB 15b is maintained in the inserted state.

In this way, by providing the outer frame portion DU10, the inner frame portion DU11, and the back box frame portion UB15 inserted between them, the front door DU is closed from between the front door DU and the back box UB. Since the path of the fraudulent device to be inserted is in the shape of a crank, it can be very difficult to reach the fraudulent device to the destination in the housing KY. As a result, it is possible to prevent the insertion of the unauthorized instrument from any direction of the housing KY from the top, bottom, left and right. Further, even if the front door DU is in a slightly open state, the back box frame portion 15B is still maintained in a state of being inserted between the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11, and the illegal device is used. Since the path is maintained in a crank-like state, it is possible to prevent the insertion of an unauthorized device from any of the top, bottom, left, and right directions of the housing KY even under this situation.
<<< 15th Embodiment Modification of the structure of the front door DU and the back box UB >>>

In the present embodiment, the left and right vertical plate members DU10a and DU10b and the upper and lower horizontal plate members DU10c and DU10d are assembled in a square shape, and an outer frame portion DU10 is provided so as to surround substantially the entire back surface of the front door DU. For example, there is only the left vertical plate member DU10a in the outer frame portion DU10, the left vertical plate member DU11a in the inner frame portion DU11, and the left vertical plate member 15a of the back box frame portion UB15 inserted between them. The lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10, the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11, and the lower horizontal plate member 15d of the back box frame portion DU15 inserted between them. It may be provided at a necessary place according to a possible intrusion route of an unauthorized device, such as providing only a door.

Further, in the present embodiment, two frame portions, an outer frame portion DU10 and an inner frame portion DU11, are provided. For example, a frame portion slightly smaller than the inner frame portion DU11 is provided inside the inner frame portion DU11. The number of frame portions is not particularly limited, for example, the number of frame portions is not particularly limited. In short, a pair of receiving pieces into which each plate member UB15a, UB15b, UB15c and UB15d can be inserted as an insertion piece (in the present embodiment, a set of the left vertical plate member DU10a and the left vertical plate member DU11a, the right vertical plate member). It suffices to have a set of the DU10b and the right vertical plate member DU11b, a set of the upper horizontal plate member DU10c and the upper horizontal plate member DU11c, and a set of the lower horizontal plate member DU10d and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d, respectively).

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11 are provided on the front door DU, and the back box frame portion UB15 is provided on the back box UB. A frame portion similar to the DU 10 and the inner frame portion DU 11 may be provided, and a frame portion similar to the above-mentioned back box frame portion UB 15 inserted between these frame portions may be provided in the front door DU. In short, one of the front door DU and the back box UB is provided with a frame portion similar to the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11, and the other of the front door DU and the back box UB is the same as the back box frame portion UB15. It suffices if a simple frame portion is provided.
<<< Dimensional relationship between each lower horizontal plate member DU10d, DU11, UB15d and the game medal >>>

Here, the dimensional relationship between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10, the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11, the lower horizontal plate member UB15d of the back box frame portion UB15, and the game medal will be described. As shown in FIG. 246 (a), the thickness of the game medal is a, the diameter of the game medal is b, the distance (distance in the vertical direction) between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d is c, and the lower horizontal plate. The distance between the member DU11d and the lower horizontal plate member UB15d is d, the length of the lower horizontal plate member DU10d is e, the distance between the lower horizontal plate member UB15d and the lower horizontal plate member DU10d is f, and the thickness of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d. When g is set, the dimensional relationship is such that the following relational expression holds under the condition that the front door DU is in the closed state.
a <d ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (5)
c (= d + g + f)> d ... Equation (6)
b <e ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (7)
a <f ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (8)

By satisfying the formula (5), even if the front door DU is closed with the spilled game medal on the bottom surface UB10, the game medal can enter within the above interval d. It is possible to prevent the game medal from being sandwiched between the front door DU and the back box UB, and the front door DU can be closed without sandwiching the game medal.

Further, by satisfying the equation (6), it is possible to prevent the game medals spilled on the bottom surface portion UB10 from entering the interval c in the standing state and being pinched. In this case, as is clear from FIG. 246 (a), when the projecting length of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d from the front surface of the bottom surface portion UB10 is h (not shown), the length of this h and the lower horizontal plate member DU10d. The relationship between e and the game medal thickness a is "a <(e-h)". That is, assuming that the distance from the tip (left end in the figure) of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d to the end of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d is i (= e-h) (not shown), this distance i (for example, the lower horizontal plate member UB15d) From the tip of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d to the back surface of the front door DU, or from the tip end of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d to the structure / device located on the back surface side of the front door DU, facing the tip end of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d. Since the interval) is larger than the medal thickness a (i> a), the standing game medals can be inserted with a margin within this interval i, and the game medals can be prevented from being pinched. It is helping.

Further, by satisfying the equations (7) and (8), the game medal can be placed on the lower horizontal plate member DU10d in a lying state with a margin, and even if the front door DU is closed in this state. The game medal is not pinched. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage due to pinching of the game medal, and it is also possible to prevent unauthorized equipment from being inserted from the defective portion due to this damage.
<<< 15th Embodiment Dimensional Deformation >>>

The dimensional relationship in the present embodiment is as described above, but is not limited to this, and for example, the following relational expression can be satisfied.
a> d ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (9)
b / 2 <e ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (10)
b / 2 <e <b ... Equation (11)
b / 2 <e and a> f ... Equation (12)

By satisfying the formula (9), even if the front door DU is closed with the game medal spilling on the bottom surface UB10, this game medal is used by the lower horizontal plate member DU11d to form the back box UB. Since it is pushed back toward the back portion UB16 (toward the right side in FIG. 246 (a)), it is possible to prevent the game medal from being pinched between the front door DU and the back box UB, and the game medal is sandwiched. The front door DU can be closed without any need. Further, by satisfying the equation (10), when the front door DU is in the open state (open state), the game medal is lying on the lower horizontal plate member DU10d and a part of the game medal. Can be placed in a state of protruding from the lower horizontal plate member DU10d.

Further, by satisfying the formula (11), the same operation and effect as the above-mentioned formula (10) is obtained, and the game medal is placed on the lower horizontal plate member DU10d in a state where a part of the game medal protrudes from the lower horizontal plate member DU10d. Even if you try to close the front door DU in this state, the game medal is caught and the front door DU cannot be closed. Therefore, in this state, the game medal intervenes between the front door DU and the back box UB. You can tell that you are doing it. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to remove the game medal interposed between the front door DU and the back box UB. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game medal interposed between the front door DU and the back box UB from falling out of the rotating machine P, and the player falls out of the rotating game machine P. It is also possible to prevent the game medal from being lost without being noticed.

Further, by satisfying the formula (12), the same action and effect as the above-mentioned formula (10) can be obtained, and the lower horizontal plate member DU10d has a part of the game medal protruding from the lower horizontal plate member DU10d. Even if you try to close the front door DU in the mounted state, the game medal is caught and the front door DU cannot be closed. It can be in a state of being held by entering the inside of f. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game medal interposed between the front door DU and the back box UB from falling outside the rotating game machine P, and the player can be prevented from falling outside the rotating game machine P. It is also possible to more reliably prevent a game medal that has fallen into the door from being lost without being noticed.
<<< Operation of the rotating machine P when an opening error occurs >>>

Next, the operation of the rotating drum type gaming machine P at the time of an opening error will be described with reference to FIG. 249. FIG. 249 is an image diagram showing the operation of the rotating machine P before and after the opening error. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in the predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and performs processing corresponding to the command (measurement of the reel rotation time timer, etc.).

An open / close detection sensor that detects that the front door DU has been opened before a predetermined period has elapsed since the reel rotation started (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer). Is detected, the main control board M sends an error processing command to the sub control board S, so that the sub control board S performs the door opening error notification process. That is, the sub-control board S notifies the effect display device S40 of a door opening error such as displaying a "door opening error". On the other hand, when the main control board M determines that a door opening error has occurred, the stop operation for the stop button is invalidated so that the rotation of the reel does not stop even if the stop button is pressed (the reel is stopped). Make it impossible).

By performing the error notification in this way, in the slightly opened state of the front door DU, it is possible to notify the player who does not notice this that the front door DU is open, so that the front door DU is slightly opened. Even if the stop operation is invalidated due to the open state, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. In addition, in a slightly open state where the front door DU does not seem to be open at first glance, the front door DU in the slightly open state is notified to notify the hall clerk that the front door DU is open. In the above, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting fraudulent instruments through the gap.

When the open / close sensor detects the closed state of the front door DU by closing the front door DU (closing the front door DU) in the situation where the stop operation for the stop button is invalidated, a signal to that effect is the main control. It is output to the board M. Even if the main control board M receives the signal indicating that the closed state is received, the main control board M still maintains the invalidation of the stop operation for the stop button (maintains the state in which the reel cannot be stopped).

In this state, by inserting the key from the keyhole D260 of the housing KY and performing the reset operation of rotating this key counterclockwise, the second moving member DJ15 moves downward and the second moving member DJ15 is detected. One DJ15Ea turns off the photosensor FS (see FIG. 239 (c)), and the main control board M that receives this detection signal cancels the door opening error. Further, in addition to the process of canceling the door opening error, the main control board M cancels the invalidation of the stop operation for the stop button and enables the stop operation for the stop button. That is, if there is a door opening error during the rotation of the reel, the main control board M performs a stop operation on the stop button until the door opening error is cleared, even if the front door DU is opened or closed during that time. It is designed to be disabled.

Here, the open / closed chain state of the front door DU from the closed state to the fully opened state of the front door DU and from the fully opened state to the return to the closed state, the valid / invalid of the stop operation, and the error cancellation by the above reset operation. The relationship between the validity and invalidity of is as follows. First, under the condition that the reel is in steady rotation and the stop button is in the effective state, the front door DU is opened in each of the states (A) to (D) from the closed state to the fully open state of the front door DU. The relationship between the closed state and the validity / invalidity of the stop operation is as follows.

(A) The front door DU is closed (the distance between the front door DU and the back door UB is 0. Hereinafter referred to as the original position).
(A-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Close detection (detection piece D80B is retracted position)
(A-2) Valid / invalid stop operation: Valid (no open error has occurred in the first place)
(A-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: invalid (no open error has occurred in the first place)

(B) From (A) above to before the front door DU is slightly opened (specific opening position)
(B-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Close detection (between the detection piece D80B from the retracted position to the front of the protruding position)
(B-2) Valid / invalid stop operation: Valid (no open error has occurred in the first place)
(B-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: invalid (no open error has occurred in the first place)

(C) The moment when the state is slightly opened from the above (B) (predetermined opening position)
(C-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Open detection (detection piece D80B is protruding position)
(C-2) Validity / invalidity of stop operation: Invalid (However, if an error is cleared, it becomes valid for a moment, but immediately becomes an error state and becomes invalid.) Note that the stop operation in this (C-2) Hereinafter, the validity / invalidity of the above will be simply described as "same as C-2 above".
(C-3) Error clearing enabled / disabled: Enabled (However, the error is cleared for a moment, but since the open / close sensor is still open detection, an error state occurs immediately. Note that the error cancellation here is disabled. It may be present.) Note that the error cancellation effectiveness in this (C-3) will be simply described as "similar to the above C-3".

(D) From (C) above until the front door DU is fully opened (predetermined open position (normal open position))
(D-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Open detection (detection piece D80B is protruding position)
(D-2) Enable / disable stop operation: Invalid (same as C-2 above)
(D-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: valid (similar to C-3 above)
On the other hand, the relationship between the open / close chain state of the front door DU and the validity / invalidity of the stop operation in each of the states (E) to (I) from the fully open state to the closed state of the front door DU is as follows.

(E) From the fully open state to the front of the slightly open state of the front door DU (predetermined open position (normal open position))
(E-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Open detection (detection piece D80B is protruding position)
(E-2) Valid / invalid stop operation: Invalid (same as C-2 above)
(E-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: valid (similar to C-3 above)

(F) The moment when the state is slightly opened from the above (E) (predetermined opening position)
(F-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Open detection (detection piece D80B is in the protruding position; the front door DU moving in the closing direction is in contact with the detection piece D80B, but is still pressed toward the retracted position. Not in the state)
(F-2) Enable / disable stop operation: Invalid (same as C-2 above)
(F-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: valid (same as C-3 above)

(G) From the above (F) to before the closed state (specific open position)
(G-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Detects open state (From the state of (F-1) above, the front door DU moving in the closing direction moves the detection piece D80B toward the retracted position. On the way, the detection piece D80B is not yet detected by the open / close sensor)
(G-2) Enable / disable stop operation: Invalid (same as C-2 above)
(G-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: valid (same as C-3 above)

(H) The moment when the state is closed from the above (G) (original position)
(H-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Close detection (after the detection piece D80B is detected by the open / close sensor at the retracted position)
(H-2) Valid / invalid of stop operation: Invalid (However, if there is an error cancellation, it will be "valid", but in reality it is impossible to cancel the error at the moment of closing detection, so it is practically invalid. Can say)
(H-3) Error clearing valid / invalid: Valid (Error clearing is effective from this moment, but in reality, error clearing is impossible at the moment of closing detection, so it is practically synonymous with invalidity)

(I) Closed state of front door DU after (H) above (original position (normal closed position))
(I-1) Detection status of open / close sensor: Close detection (I-2) Valid / invalid of stop operation: Invalid (However, if the error is cleared, it becomes "valid")
(I-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: Valid (This error cancellation makes the stop operation "valid" and the error cancellation valid / invalid becomes "invalid". Also, until the error is cleared, The stop operation remains "invalid")

Regarding the release of the door opening error, not only the error is released by the above-mentioned key, but also, for example, when a door opening error occurs (from the moment when the open / close sensor detects the opening of the front door DU), the error release timer (increment timer). ) Is started, and when the error release timer measures a predetermined time (for example, 40 seconds) (when the predetermined time elapses), the door opening error may be automatically canceled. On the contrary, the door opening error may be canceled when the front door DU is closed. Specifically, the measurement of the error release timer is started from the moment when the open / close sensor detects the closure of the front door, and when the error release timer measures a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) (after a predetermined time elapses), The door opening error may be automatically canceled. Further, these error release timers may be combined with the present embodiment. That is, as a general rule, the relationship between the open / close chain state of the front door DU and the valid / invalid state of the stop operation is as described in the above (A) to (I) states, but the above (C) to (H). In the state, the door opening error may be canceled when the error canceling timer measures a predetermined time. In this case, in the above states (C) to (H), even if the error is cleared, the opening / closing sensor detects the opening of the door door DU, so that the error state is immediately established and the stop operation is immediately invalidated. Needless to say.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the above-mentioned (C) to (G), when the open / close sensor is in the detection state, even if the above-mentioned reset operation or the error release by the error release timer is performed, the error state is immediately set. Instead of this, once the stop operation becomes "valid" by the above reset operation or error cancellation by the error release timer, the "valid" state is maintained even if the open / close sensor is in the detection state. After that, the stop operation may be set to "invalid" only in the case of the above (H), and then the stop operation may be set to "valid" again in the case of the above (I). In short, regardless of whether the stop operation is enabled or disabled in other states, it is sufficient that the stop operation is "invalid" at least in the above (H).

Further, in the present embodiment, the door opening error is detected when the front door DU is slightly opened. For example, a sensor for detecting the state where the front door DU is fully opened is provided, and this sensor is used as the front door. A door opening error may occur only when the fully opened state of the DU is detected. In short, it suffices if it is possible to detect the open state of any of the front door DUs from the slightly open state of the front door DU to the fully open state of the front door DU, and the detection timing is not particularly limited. Further, the error that invalidates the stop operation by the main control board M is not only the above-mentioned door opening error but also a recoverable error such as the above-mentioned medal empty error (among the errors, it may be automatically recovered. It may be a minor error) or the like.

In this way, when a door opening error occurs, the stop operation for the stop button is invalidated regardless of whether the front door DU is opened or closed until the door opening error is cleared. Since the stop operation is invalidated at the moment when the door DU is closed, the stop button is activated by the impact when the front door DU is closed while the reel is rotating, contrary to the player's intention. It is possible to prevent the reel from stopping without permission.

<<<<<< 16th Embodiment >>>>
Next, the 16th embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those of the above-described embodiments. FIG. 250 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the spinning machine according to the 16th embodiment, and FIG. 251 is a main game in the spinning machine according to the 16th embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the state, and FIG. 252 is a transition diagram of the sub-gaming state of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 16th embodiment.
<<< Outline of the 16th embodiment main game state >>>

As shown in FIGS. 250 and 251 the rotating drum type gaming machine has a plurality of main gaming states 0 to 8 controlled by the main control board M. The parentheses in this paragraph indicate the sub-game states described later corresponding to each main game state. The main game state 0 (in FIG. 251, the main game state number = 0; the same applies hereinafter) is a normal section (sub-normal state, etc.) which is a non-advantageous section, and the main game state 1 is an advantageous section. It is a normal state (sub-normal state, etc.) in which a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to shift to the AT in-progress state, which is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player, and the main game state 2 is an advantageous section and is in the AT in-progress state. AT3 (CZ3 state), which is one of the above, main game state 3 is an advantageous section and AT2 (CZ2 state), which is one of the states during AT, and main game state 4 is an advantageous section and AT. AT6 (ST state), which is one of the medium states, main game state 5 is an advantageous section and AT7 (latent state), which is one of the AT mid-states, and main game state 6 is an advantageous section. Each is AT5 (this AT state), AT8 (BB state) and AT9 (ending state), which are one of the AT-in-states, and the main game state 7 is an advantageous section and is one of the AT-in-states. It is AT1 (CZ1 state), and the main game state 8 is AT4 (additional specialization state) which is an advantageous section and is one of the AT-during states. It should be noted that the transition triggers, transition destinations, etc. of these main game states are as described in FIGS. 250 and 251.
<<< Outline of 16th Embodiment Sub-Game State >>>

As shown in FIG. 252, the rotating drum type gaming machine has a plurality of sub-gaming states controlled by the sub-control board S. With reference to FIG. 252, various sub-game states (game states seen from the player's point of view) will be described in comparison with the main game state (described in parentheses). In FIG. 252, for example, in the case of the main gaming state 3, this is referred to as “M3”. These plurality of sub-game states are roughly classified into a non-AT in-game state and an AT-in-game state, and the non-AT in-game state is a sub-normal state (main game state 0 which is a normal section or advantageous Main game state 1), which is the normal state of the section, and point specialization 1 state (normal state of the normal section or advantageous section) that shifts when the AT state ends and can acquire more points than the sub normal state, which will be described later. Main game state 0 or 1), transition from the sub normal state to a lottery by a rare role, etc., and the point specialization 2 state (normal section or advantageous section normal state) similar to the point specialization 1 state. Main game state 0 or 1), these point specialization 1 state and point specialization 2 state, or points acquired in the sub normal state shift when a predetermined point (for example, 1000 points) is acquired, and the CZ1 state To acquire an icon (which will also be described later), which is the first information indicating information advantageous to the player regarding the transition to the AT state such as increasing the breakthrough rate of the CZ2 state and confirming the breakthrough. There is a precursor state (main game state 0 or 1) that suggests a transition to a state (main game state 0 or 1 which is a normal state of a normal section or an advantageous section) and an AT state (CZ1 state, etc.). is doing. The icon acquired in this icon acquisition state is displayed in the first predetermined area (predetermined area) SR1 on the upper right in the display unit of the effect display device (information display means such as an image) S40, for example. (See, for example, FIG. 293).

Further, as the AT in-game state of the plurality of sub-game states, the initial stage suggests whether or not to shift to the additional specialized state after the effect of shifting to the CZ1 state is executed in the above-mentioned precursor state. CZ1 state (game state 7 which is AT1) for executing the judge effect (initial judge effect) of After the failed effect is executed in the CZ2 state (main game state 3 which is AT2), the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state, which executes the final stage judge effect (final judge effect) that suggests whether or not, or Transition to the main AT state in the ST state The CZ3 state (AT3) may shift after the effect that the lottery was not won is executed, and the pullback effect suggesting the transition to the CZ1 state is executed again. It has a main game state 2). If it does not shift from the CZ1 state to the CZ2 state, if it does not shift from the CZ2 state to the additional specialized state, or if it does not shift from the CZ3 state to the CZ1 state, it shifts to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In the present embodiment, these CZ1 states to CZ3 states may be collectively referred to as “CZ”.

Further, the AT in-game state of the plurality of sub-game states shifts after the successful effect of the above-mentioned CZ2 state judge effect is executed, and the player is in the additional specialized state, the main AT state, the ST state, and the like. The number of times the navigation effect is executed (hereinafter, simply referred to as the number of times of navigation) that informs the reel stop order and the stop timing, which is the most advantageous for Addition specialization state (main game state 8 which is AT4), transition by the end of this addition specialization state, and navigation production until the number of feasible navigations becomes 0 (navigation of the last set is 0) In the main AT state (AT5, main game state 6) and the main AT state, when the number of navigations becomes 0, the transition is made, and the number of sets is obtained again while executing the navigation effect for the predetermined number of games. In the ST state (main game state 4 which is AT6) in which the effect of whether or not to shift to the main AT state is performed, the failure effect that the number of sets could not be acquired in the ST state (the navigation effect could not be acquired) It may shift after it is executed, and it is a latent state that executes a latent effect that suggests that either the number of navigations acquired internally or the pseudo bonus is hit (main game state 5 which is AT7). , The game shifts after the bonus confirmation effect that the pseudo bonus is hit in the latent state is executed, and the end condition (for example, the reel stop order and the stop timing that are advantageous to the player is hidden at least a part of the game). BB state (main game state 6 which is AT8), ST state where pseudo-bonus effect is executed until the selection that makes the person guess the correct reel stop order and stop timing fails, or the maximum number of games is reached, etc.) It has an ending state (main game state 6 which is AT9) for executing an ending effect to play a game up to the upper limit of the number of games in an advantageous section while shifting from the above. The transition route of these sub-game states is as shown in FIG. 252. Further, in the present embodiment, the additional specialized state, the main AT state, the ST state, the main AT state, the BB state, and the ending state may be collectively referred to as “AT”.
<<< Details of the 16th embodiment main game state >>>

FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing performed by the main control board M according to the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 253, when the start lever D50 is received (Yes in step S5001), an internal lottery is performed (step S5002), and a group number set process for setting the production group number according to the result of the internal lottery. (Step S5003). In step S5003, taking the list of conditional devices of FIG. 10 as an example, if the internal lottery result is out of order, the production group number is set to 0, and in the case of replay, the production group number is set as the type of replay. Set one of the numbers 1, 2, and 13 according to the number, and in the case of a bell (so-called selection bell) whose winning order depends on the push order and stop timing, set the production group number according to the type of bell to 2. In the case of a rare role, it is set to any of the production group numbers 3 to 6 according to the type of the rare role, and the production according to these production group numbers is executed. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the inside of the bonus winning combination 2 which is valid only by betting two cards is the normal state. Therefore, in this state, the bonus winning combination 1 and 2 are not won, but the inside of the bonus winning combination 2 is not won. In the non-internal middle time before the inside, either bonus combination 1 or 2 will be won. At this time, in FIG. 10, when the type 1 BB-A is read as the bonus combination 1 and the type 1 BB-B is read as the bonus combination 2, the effect number 7 is the bonus combination in the case of the bonus combination 1. In the case of 2, the effect number 8 is set. Regarding the above-mentioned production groups, for example, the winning and losing roles other than the bonus are referred to as the production group A, and the bonus roles are referred to as the production group B. A and B may be used, and in the same way, small roles and rare roles can be separated, small roles and replays can be separated, and so on.

After this group number setting process, the lever process for each main game state, which performs the process according to any of the above-mentioned main game states 0 to 8 when the start lever D50 is pressed, is performed (step S5004). After that, when all the reels M50 are stopped (Yes in step S5005), the processing according to any of the above-mentioned main game states 0 to 8 when all the reels M50 are stopped is performed. (Step S5006).

Next, when all the reels M50 are stopped and a small winning combination with a payout has won a prize, the game medal is paid out by the winning (step S5007), and the player stays in the advantageous section (series of increase sections). A series of increase checks for monitoring so that the net increase in the number of game medals during the game is within a predetermined number (for example, 2400) is executed (step S5009. In this step S5009, specifically, the main game state is executed. Of these, when the main game states 1 to 8 are in the advantageous section, the series increase counter is updated based on the number of payouts due to the winning. In the present embodiment, in the case of replay, the method is performed. The series increase counter is not updated, but even if it is a replay, for example, 3 is added in the case of a replay with a 3-card bet, and 2 is added in the case of a replay with a 2-card bet. In addition, the series increase counter may be updated.

Next, the number of staying games in the advantageous section is managed, that is, 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the number of games at the start of the advantageous section, is cleared in the same advantageous section as the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 in the above-described embodiment. An advantageous section clear counter that manages the number of staying games in an advantageous section, such as setting it in a counter (not shown) and subtracting the value of the advantageous section clear counter by 1 each time one game elapses after the start of the advantageous section. The management process is performed (step S5010).

In the present embodiment, the advantageous section clear counter is set to 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the number of games at the start of the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game. It goes without saying that, instead of this, an increment method may be used in which 1 is set in the advantageous section clear counter at the start of the advantageous section, and the number is incremented (incremented) by 1 for each game. The same applies to the various counters in the subsequent embodiments.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart of all stop processing for each main game state according to the subroutine of step S5006 in FIG. 253. First, if the winning combination (bonus combination 1 or 2 described later) is inactive and the betting state of 3 cards (the specified number is 3 cards) (Yes in step S5101, Yes in step S5102), The process proceeds to step S5103. In the revolving pachinko machine of the present embodiment, generally, only a 3-card bet (3 specified number) is won and a prize is won, and a bonus winning combination 1 and a 2-card bet (2 specified number) are won and won. It has a bonus role 2 to be played, an internal RT1 that shifts when the bonus role 1 is won, and an internal RT2 that shifts when the bonus role 2 is won, and the internal middle state of the bonus role 2 (bonus). In the internal RT2 of (a state in which the player has won the role 2 but has carried it over without winning a prize), the state in which the game is played with a bet of 3 cards is the most advantageous state, and this is the normal specification. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the expected medal acquisition value in the AT is set higher than the expected medal acquisition value in the bonus combinations 1 and 2, and the three-card bet in the internal medium state of the bonus combination 2 is set. Is a prerequisite for executing AT (in other situations, a penalty described below will be imposed). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is better to get the ball at AT than to win the bonus roles 1 and 2 and get the ball out by the bonus, and as a result, in the internal state of the bonus role 2. Three-card bet becomes normal.

In this specification, if the bonus combination 2 is won by betting two cards, a penalty for not shifting to the AT state during a predetermined number of games (between bonus games related to the bonus combination 2, for example, 300 games). The state shifts to the state (in this case, the penalty activated flag is 1. If the penalty is not activated, the penalty activated flag is 0). Therefore, in steps S5101 and S5102, it is checked whether or not the bonus combination 1 or 2 is operating and whether or not the specified number is 3, and if any of these is satisfied, the normal state is obtained. As a result, the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, it is determined which of the nine states 0 to 8 the current main game state is, and the process proceeds to steps S5104 to S5112 according to the main game states 0 to 8 currently staying, and each of them In steps S5104 to S5112, processing is performed according to the main gaming state. In this embodiment, only the processing in the main game state 0 will be described, and the other processes in the main game states 1 to 8 will be omitted.

After completing the process in any one of steps S510 to S5112, the base counter update process described later is performed (step S5113). After that, if the current RT state is normal RT2 as described above (Yes in step S5114), it is determined to be a normal state, and if it is not RT2 (No in step S5114), it is determined to be an abnormal state and output. The ball ejection normal flag indicating whether or not the ball is in the normal state is saved as 0 as an abnormal state (note that when the ball ejection is in the normal state, the ball ejection normal flag is 1).
<16th Embodiment Advantageous section transition all stop processing>

FIG. 255 is a flowchart of the advantageous section transition total stop processing according to the subroutine of step S5104 in FIG. 254. In this advantageous section transition all stop process, the transition is made when the main gaming state is determined to be the main gaming state 0, which is the normal section (non-advantageous section), in step S5103 of FIG. 254. Further, in the present embodiment, since the specification is such that the advantageous section is won regardless of which winning combination other than the loss is won in the normal section, the advantageous section is won and the advantageous section is won when the game has shifted to the normal section. (The specification is that the staying game in the normal section is about one game. Instead of this, by drawing an advantageous section with a predetermined probability, it is possible to stay in multiple games in the normal section. Needless to say, it's good). First, in the case of a normal section, the advantageous section transition flag is 0 (advantageous section transition flag = 0), and in the case of an advantageous section, the advantageous section transition flag is 1 (advantageous section transition flag = 1). The state of the advantageous section transition flag for confirming whether or not it is determined is determined, and if it can be confirmed that the advantageous section transition flag is 1, the advantageous section transition flag is reset to 0 (No in step S5201, step S5202).

Next, as described above, the number is set to 7 if it is inside the non-normal bonus combination 1, and the number is 8 if it is inside the normal bonus combination 2. When the production group number corresponding to is 8 (Yes in step S5203), it is judged to be a normal state because it is inside the normal two-card betting bonus combination 2, and the above-mentioned payout normal flag is set. After saving 1 (step S5204), the initial set process (step S5205) described later is executed. If the effect group number is not 8 (for example, if the effect group number is 7), it is determined that the bonus combination 1 is in an abnormal state, and the process proceeds to step S5205 as it is.

Next, in the advantageous section, a game number counter range lottery, which is the number of games that shift to AT1 (CZ1 state in the sub-game state), which is the main game state 7, is performed (step S5206), and the lottery result is used as the winning game counter (step S5206). The process of saving in (not shown) is executed (step S5207). That is, in the present embodiment, the game shifts from the Xth advantageous section to the normal section, and then, in the game of the normal section, the game satisfying the condition of shifting to the next X + 1th advantageous section (advantageous section transition flag is set to 1). Then, the number of games (so-called ceiling games) to be transferred to AT1 in the next X + 1th advantageous section after all the stops in the normal section are determined. In this way, after shifting to the advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section is performed, so that the processing corresponding to the advantageous section can be surely performed.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned number of ceiling games is set at the time of entering the advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined timing after shifting to the normal section (for example, shifting to the advantageous section in one game). In this case, if it is possible to stay in the normal section for a plurality of games after stopping all reels M50 of the final game of the advantageous section that triggered the transition to the normal section, one of the normal sections It may be determined at the time of pressing the start lever D50, after the stop of all reels M50 in this game, or at any timing during the next game of the game shifted to the normal section). In this case, since the processing related to the next advantageous section is performed in the normal section before the transition to the next advantageous section, various processing burdens after the transition to the next advantageous section can be reduced. ..

After the number of ceiling games is saved in the number of hit games counter in step S5207, a process of saving 1 as the main game status number is executed (step S5208). That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the normal section is performed, but as described above, the advantageous section is won in the case of the lottery result other than the loss in the normal section, which is advantageous. Since the advantageous section is won in the game that has shifted from the section to the normal section and the main game state of the next game is 1, in step S5208, 1 is saved as the main game state number. .. Further, in the present embodiment, when staying in the advantageous section (in other words, until S5201 in FIG. 255 is determined to be NO and the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied), the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit. The specification is such that when the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, the advantageous section indicator YH is controlled by the main control board M so that the indicator YH is turned off. Needless to say, instead of the specification in which the advantageous section is always won in the game shifted to the normal section as in the present embodiment, the game may be shifted to the advantageous section with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. ..

Next, a constant P (for example, 50 or the like) which is a predetermined initial value is set in the area of 1 to 19 (hereinafter, also referred to as “IN number counter”) of an IN ring buffer (not shown) for storing the number of inserted sheets. (Step S5209), and a constant Q (for example, a constant Q) which is a specific initial value in an area of 1 to 19 (hereinafter, also referred to as “OUT number counter”) of an OUT ring buffer (not shown) for storing the number of payouts. , 35, etc.) is executed (step S5210).

These IN ring buffer values (hereinafter, simply referred to as "IN number of sheets") and OUT ring buffer values (hereinafter, simply referred to as "OUT number of sheets") are used for confirming the ball ejection status. For example, when calculating the payout rate, it is generally obtained by dividing the number of OUTs by the number of INs (the number of INs ÷ the number of OUTs) and multiplying it by 100. If there are 3 cards and the number of payouts is 15, the payout rate in the game is (OUT number 15 ÷ IN number 3) × 100 = 500%.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, since the specification is such that the ball ejection rate at a predetermined number of games is controlled so as not to be within a predetermined range (for example, the ball ejection rate is 220% or more), 17 The ball output rate (difference number) between 340 games is monitored for each game. In this case, when the initial values of the IN number and the OUT number are 0 respectively, in the game, if 15 pieces are paid out by inserting 3 pieces as described above, the payout rate becomes 500%. It will exceed 220%. In order to prevent this, as described above, by setting 50 as the constant P of the number of IN sheets and 35 as the constant of the number of OUT sheets as the initial values, even if 15 sheets are paid out by inserting 3 sheets (OUT). The number of sheets is 65 (15 of the number of payouts + 50 of the constant P) ÷ 38 of the number of INs (3 of the number of inputs + 35 of the constant Q)) × 100 = approximately 186%, which is within the above 220%. In the present embodiment, the timings for setting these constants P and Q are after the setting is changed or at the start of the advantageous section, and the situation where the initial values of the number of IN sheets and the number of OUT sheets become 0 is prevented. Further, the time for using the constants P and Q may be a period of 20 blocks (between 340 games in terms of the number of games), which will be described later, after the setting is changed or after entering the advantageous section from the normal section. After that, the constants P and Q may or may not be used. In this way, by setting the predetermined constants P and Q as the initial values of the IN number and the OUT number, respectively, the ball ejection rate exceeding the predetermined range due to the bias of the payout number when the number of games is short is generated. Can be suppressed.

<Initial set processing of the 16th embodiment>
FIG. 256 is a flowchart of the initial set processing according to the subroutine of step S5205 in FIG. 255. In this initial set processing, 1 of the processing during the advantageous section transition all-stop processing that is shifted when the main gaming state is determined to be the non-advantageous section (normal section) main gaming state 0 in step S5103 of FIG. When the player shifts from the Xth advantageous section to the normal section and wins the X + 1th advantageous section transition lottery, the main game state 7 (CZ1 in the sub game state) which is the AT1 of the next X + 1th advantageous section. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the main game state 8 (additional specialized state in the sub-game state) which is AT4 in the main game state 3 (CZ2 state in the sub-game state) which is AT2 and the AT2.

Specifically, first, in AT1 (CZ1 state), if it is possible to shift to AT2 (CZ2 state), it is 1, if it is not possible to shift, it is 0, and so on. Is temporarily saved as 0 (step S5301), and in AT2 as well, it is possible to shift from AT2 to AT4, such as 1 if it is possible to shift to AT4 (additional specialization state), 0 if it is not possible to shift to AT4. A process of temporarily saving the CZ2 breakthrough flag as 0 or not is executed (step S5302).

Next, the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter used for the lottery to shift to AT2 in AT1 and the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter used for the lottery to shift to AT4 in AT2 are once reset (saved) to 0 (save). Steps S5303 and S5304).

Next, the breakthrough rate A in CZ1, that is, the value (40 to 80) of the second digit (10th place) of the breakthrough rate in CZ1 is drawn (step S5305), and the lottery result is stored in the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter. The process is executed (step S5306). That is, in the present embodiment, regarding the second digit breakthrough rate A, for example, the winning number 0 is 40, the winning number 1 is 50, the winning number 2 is 60, the winning number 3 is 70, and the winning number 4 is 80. In addition, the breakthrough rate A according to the winning numbers 0 to 4 determined by the lottery is determined by assigning each winning number 0 to 4 up to 80, which is the maximum value with 40 as the minimum value, in increments of 10. , If the winning number is 3, the second digit will be 70). In other words, the minimum value of the breakthrough rate A, 40%, is the minimum guaranteed value for breaking through the CZ1 state, and the maximum value of the breakthrough rate A is the second digit of the maximum winning rate.

Similarly, the breakthrough rate B in CZ1, that is, the value (0 to 9) of the first digit (1st digit) of the breakthrough rate in CZ1 is drawn (step S5307), and the lottery result is added to the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter. The process is executed (step S5308). That is, in the present embodiment, similarly, in the case of the breakthrough rate B, for example, 0 to 9 are assigned to the winning numbers 0 to 9 respectively, and the breakthrough rate is determined according to the winning numbers 0 to 9 determined by the lottery (for example). , If the winning number is 7, the first digit will be 7). According to these steps S5305 to S5308, for example, when the lottery result of the breakthrough rate A is 70 and the lottery result of the breakthrough rate B is 7, as described above, the value A of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter is 77. (77%) is added (preserved). In this example, the maximum value (maximum winning probability) of the CZ1 breakthrough rate is 89%.

Next, the breakthrough rates C and D in CZ2, that is, the second digit value of the breakthrough rate in CZ2 is drawn for the breakthrough rate C, and the first digit value of the breakthrough rate in CZ2 is drawn for the breakthrough rate D. , These lottery results are stored in the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter (steps S5309 to S5312).

That is, similarly to the breakthrough rates A and B described above, in the case of the breakthrough rate C, for example, 50 to 80 are assigned to the winning numbers 0 to 3 in increments of 10 (in this case, the minimum guaranteed value is the winning number 0). The maximum value of the second digit is 80 of the winning number 3), and in the case of the breakthrough rate D, 0 to 9 is assigned to each of the winning numbers 0 to 9 as in the breakthrough rate B, and the breakthrough rate C The numerical values corresponding to the winning numbers determined by the winning number lottery and the winning number lottery of the breakthrough rate D are added to the breakthrough rate counter. According to these steps S5309 to 5312, for example, in the lottery with the breakthrough rate C, the second digit value is 70 if the winning number is 2, and if the winning number is 5 in the lottery with the breakthrough rate D, the first digit number is 5. In this case, a value of 75 (75%) is stored as the value B of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter. In this example, the maximum value (maximum winning probability) of the CZ2 breakthrough rate is 89%.

In this way, each breakthrough rate is determined by drawing and multiplying the winning number and the value assigned to it, respectively, and the minimum and maximum values assigned to the winning number (in the case of breakthrough rate A). Is the value of 40 (minimum value) of winning number 0 and 80 (maximum value) of winning number 4, and in the case of breakthrough rate C, the value of 50 (minimum value) of winning number 0 and 80 (maximum value) of winning number 3). The minimum guaranteed value and the maximum winning probability can be easily changed simply by changing. In the case of the specification of the present embodiment in which the final judge is made as to whether or not to shift to the AT in the CZ2 state after breaking through the CZ1 state, the minimum guaranteed value of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter in the CZ1 state (in the above example). By raising the minimum guaranteed value (50% in the above example) of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter higher than 40%), the player is expected to be able to shift to AT after breaking through the CZ1 state. Can be granted.

Regarding the breakthrough rates A to D, instead of the above example, for example, the breakthrough rates A to D may be randomly drawn from 0 to 9 and multiplied by each other. In this case, 0 may be selected for both the breakthrough rates A and B, but for this, the CZ1 breakthrough counter and the CZ2 breakthrough counter are set to 100%, or 0% as it is. You may set it with.

Next, the acquired random number value C is obtained by randomly acquiring a value from 0 to 99, and this value C is compared with the value of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter, and the value of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter is the above-mentioned acquired random number value. If it is larger than (Yes in step S5313), the CZ1 breakthrough flag indicating that the CZ1 state has been breached (the transition from the main game state 7 which is AT1 to the main game state 3 which is AT2 has been decided) is set to 1. Is executed (step S5314). If the value of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter is smaller than the acquired random number value (No in step S5313), the process proceeds to the next step S5315 with the CZ1 breakthrough flag set in step S5301 remaining at 0. That is, in this step S5313, it can be said that a lottery for whether or not to shift from AT1 to AT2 (a lottery for whether or not to shift to the CZ2 state in the CZ1 state) is performed. Further, the value of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter used in this lottery is a value such as 77% in which the first digit and the second digit are drawn as described above, and this value can be said to be the winning probability itself.

In step S5315, as in step S5313, the acquired random number value is obtained by randomly acquiring a value from 0 to 99, and this value is compared with the value of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter to obtain the value of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter. If it is larger than the acquired random number value (Yes in step S5315), it is determined that the CZ2 state has been exceeded (the transition from the main game state 3 which is AT2 to the main game state 4 which is an additional specialized state) has been decided. The process of saving 1 in the CZ2 breakthrough flag of (meaning) is executed (step S5316). If the value of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter is smaller than the acquired random number value (No in step S5315), the process proceeds to the next step S5317 with the CZ2 breakthrough flag 0 set in step S5302. That is, in this step S5315, it can be said that a lottery for whether or not to shift from AT2 to AT4 (a lottery for whether or not to shift to the additional specialized state in the CZ2 state) is performed. Further, the value of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter used in this lottery can be said to be the winning probability itself, like the value of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter described above.
<16th Embodiment Management of ball output rate>

Here, in explaining step S5317, first, the premise will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball ejection rate in a predetermined number of games is controlled so as not to be within a predetermined range (for example, the ball ejection rate is 220% or more), and the ball ejection rate is controlled. The number of balls is managed according to the number. In other words, in order to distribute a spinning machine to the market, it is necessary to comply with a so-called type test to confirm whether the spinning machine complies with the wind business law and regulations, and the ball output rate is within a predetermined range. Is one of the conditions for conforming to the type test. In addition, if the number of medals given is long or excessive, the player will be overly enthusiastic about gambling.

In order to satisfy this condition, in 400 games, which is assumed to be the number of games (number of games) that can be digested in about 1 hour, the payout rate (short-time payout rate) is in the range of about 33% to 220%. In 1600 games, which is assumed to be the number of games that can be digested in about 4 hours, the ball output rate (medium period ball output rate) is within the range of about 40% to 150%, and it is digested in about 1 day. In 6000 games, which is assumed to be the number of possible games, the number of games that can be digested in about 3 days is assumed to be within the range of about 50% to 126%. In the 17500 games, it is necessary to keep the payout rate (long-time payout rate) within the range of about 60% to 115%. It should be noted that the above-mentioned values of 400 games, 1600 games, and 33% to 220% are examples, and it goes without saying that the values corresponding to the revisions of the Fudosan Law and the regulations can be appropriately dealt with.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball ejection rate in 400 games is set to 220% with the ball ejection state 3 (ball ejection state number = 3) when the ball ejection rate exceeds 220% based on the upper limit of 220%. A close heavy attention state (hereinafter referred to as "attention state 2") is set as a ball ejection state 2 (ball ejection state number = 2), and a light caution state (hereinafter, "caution state") which is close to 220% but not as much as a caution state. 1 ”) is set as the ball ejection state 1 (ball ejection state number = 1), and the default state less than the ball ejection state 1 is managed as the ball ejection state 0 (ball ejection state number = 0). ing.

This management is based on 220%, which is the upper limit of the payout rate in 400 games, but instead of this, it is 150%, which is the upper limit of the payout rate in the above-mentioned 1600 games, in 6000 games. It may be managed based on either 126%, which is the upper limit of the payout rate, or 115%, which is the upper limit of the payout rate in 17,500 games. This can be determined in consideration of the net increase in the number of sheets per game in AT. That is, when the net increase is relatively high (for example, a net increase of 8), there is a higher concern that the net increase will exceed 220% at the time of 400 games as compared with other 6000 games, so 220% in this 400 games. Need to be the standard. On the other hand, when the net increase is relatively low (for example, net increase of 3), there is not much concern that it will exceed 220% in 400 games, but it was seen in 150% in 1600 games, which has a lower upper limit than 400 games. In some cases, the concern of exceeding 150% is higher than 220% in 400 games, so it is better to manage based on 150% in this 1600 games. In this way, it is possible to change whether to use the upper limit in any of the games as a reference in consideration of the net increase in the number of cards.

These ball ejection states 0 to 3 are stored in, for example, the first RAM area (specific area) of the main control board M. The specific area for storing the ball ejection states 0 to 3 may be, for example, a second RAM area or the like in addition to the first RAM area. In short, a storage area that can be referred to by the main control board M. Needless to say, there is no particular limitation.

As described above, the ball ejection rates 0 to 3 are based on 220%, which is the upper limit of the ball ejection rate in 400 games. Based on this, in the present embodiment, 17 games are set as one cycle, this is used as a monitoring unit for the payout rate (as one block in which 17 games are regarded as one block), and this is set as 20 cycles (blocks). The number is 20, and thereafter, it may be simply referred to as "20 blocks"), and the payout rate is monitored for a total of 340 games (predetermined number of games) to monitor the payout states 0 to 3. There is. It should be noted that the monitoring of the ball ejection states 0 to 3 is performed not only in the AT state but also in the non-AT state, and the monitoring is performed in any game state.

Here, one block is 17 games, and the unit is set to 20 blocks for the following reasons. That is, from the viewpoint of keeping the used capacity (used area) of the first RAM area (specific area) of the main control board M as low as possible, the capacity for storing the number of OUTs in one block is 1 byte (256 ways). I want to do it. Therefore, assuming that 15 cards, which is the upper limit of the number of payouts, are paid out for each game (assuming the maximum value of the number of OUTs in 17 games), it is necessary to keep the number of OUTs in one block within 1 byte. The maximum number of games is 256 (maximum capacity of 1 byte) ÷ 15 (upper limit of the number of games that can be paid out at one time) = about 17. In other words, the maximum number of OUTs in 17 games is 255 (the number of INs at this time is 51), which is less than the above-mentioned 256. When trying to monitor a value close to the above 400 games as much as possible based on these 17 games, the maximum value of the number of blocks is 400/17 = about 23 blocks, but if it is too close to 400, a small role Since it is expected that the prize will exceed 220% due to the bias of winning, 20 blocks were set with some margin. It should be noted that the calculation may be made in 23 blocks.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball output rate is managed based on 400 games (in other words, the predetermined number of games that is the standard for the ball output rate management is 400 games). When the payout rate exceeds 220%, for example, the ball payout rate reaches 400 games while maintaining 220%, and the payout rate in 400 games (predetermined number of games) is within the range of 220% (predetermined range). Difficult to fit. Therefore, by setting 340 games (the number of games for 20 blocks), which is less than 400 games, as the monitoring period, the navigation effect is not performed in the remaining games up to 400 games, for example, even in the actual AT state. (Specifically, the additional probability in the ball-out state 1 or the ball-out state 2 is higher than the table used when the ball-out state is 0. The lottery is performed by switching to a lower table (including the table with a winning probability of 0), or even if the rare role is won, no additional lottery is performed (in this case, the effect display device S40 fails to add). It is possible to keep it within the range of 220% when 400 games are reached by making adjustments such as forcibly terminating the AT state itself. .. In this way, in managing the payout rate in the predetermined number of games, which is the standard for managing the payout rate, the payout rate is managed by managing the payout rate in units of the management period, which is the number of games smaller than the predetermined number of games. It is possible to adjust the payout rate between the maximum number of games in the period and the predetermined number of games, and it is possible to prevent the payout rate from exceeding the predetermined range when the predetermined number of games is reached. Further, as for the ball ejection state 3, since it can be seen that the ball ejection rate has already exceeded the predetermined range, the performance may be the same as that of the ball ejection state 0. This may be a condition that is advantageous to the player because when the number of acquired sheets, which is one of the end conditions of one advantageous section, exceeds 2400 (series operation check of S5009), the section shifts to the normal section. , As a derivative plan, the ball may be treated more coldly as described above than the ball ejection state 2.

Here, in the main control board M of the present embodiment, among the values calculated by the calculation, the value after the decimal point is rounded down. For example, 111 ÷ 33 = 3.3636 ..., But the value after the decimal point is rounded down. Then, the value becomes "3", and the value obtained by the calculation becomes a rough one. This is because the storable storage area is limited. However, in managing the payout rate, it is desirable to manage with as detailed a value as possible. Therefore, for example, when 11100, which is a multiplication value obtained by multiplying 111 by 100 as a predetermined coefficient, is used, it becomes 11100 ÷ 33 = 336.3366 ..., And when the decimal point is rounded down, it becomes “336”. In this way, by multiplying the numerator value in the division operation by a predetermined coefficient to increase the numerator value, it is possible to obtain a more detailed value as a result of the numerical value after the decimal point being carried up. become able to.

From this point of view, in the present embodiment, "64" is used as the above-mentioned predetermined coefficient to be multiplied by the number of INs in the calculation of the payout rate. The reason why this predetermined coefficient is set to 64 is as follows. That is, when 1 block (1 cycle) is 17 games and 20 blocks (20 cycles), the number of INs in 20 blocks is 3 (specified number 3) × 17 games × 20 = 1020. Further, as described above, from the viewpoint of keeping the used capacity (used area) of the first RAM area (specific area) of the main control board M as low as possible, the capacity for storing the number of OUTs in 20 blocks is 2 bytes (65536). Since we want to fit in (pieces), 65536 (maximum capacity of 2 bytes) ÷ 1020 (cumulative number of INs in 20 blocks) = about 64, and this 64 is used as a coefficient.

In other words, the number of OUTs (3 (specified number 3) x 340 games = 1020) in the number of games during the monitoring period (the number of games for 20 cycles) is multiplied by the coefficient 64, which is the calculated OUT number. The numerical value is 65280, which is less than the maximum capacity of 2 bytes, and an area (storage area) for about 2 bytes is used in the first RAM area. The maximum number of OUTs (17 games x 15 = 255) in the number of games in one cycle (1 block), which is a monitoring unit constituting this monitoring period, is 255, which is less than the maximum capacity of 1 byte. In one RAM area, an area (storage area) of about 1 byte, which is smaller than the storage area of the above-mentioned calculation OUT number value of 2 bytes, is used. In the present embodiment, the monitoring period is in units of 20 blocks (1 block is 17 games), and the coefficient is 64. However, these various numbers are not limited to these, and the model specifications and the desired ball ejection state are not limited to these. Needless to say, it can be set as appropriate according to the management of.

Here, the general payout rate is obtained by "OUT number (number of payouts in a predetermined number of games) / IN number (number of inputs in a predetermined number of games) x 100". For example, the number of INs in 10 games (the number of inputs in the predetermined number of games) is 30, and if there is a total of 15 payouts (the number of payouts in the predetermined number of games) in these 10 games, 15 cards are paid out. ÷ 30 sheets x 100 = 50% payout rate. However, in the present embodiment, since the coefficient “64” is multiplied as described above, when a value obtained by multiplying the number of OUTs by 64 is used, 15 sheets ÷ (30 sheets × coefficient 64) × 100 = 0. If it becomes .78125 and the decimal point is rounded down, the obtained value becomes "0" and the payout rate cannot be calculated. This is because the denominator is excessively larger than the numerator of division by using the coefficient, and generally, the number of OUTs (numerator of division) is larger than the number of INs (denominator of division). In a rotating game machine with a smaller number, if the general calculation of the payout rate is used as it is, it is not suitable for the calculation using the coefficient.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the constant X, which is the result of this calculation, is calculated by the constant calculation of "(the number of INs in the predetermined number of games x the predetermined coefficient) / the number of OUTs in the predetermined number of games", and the constant X is calculated. I am trying to get the ball output rate corresponding to. In other words, the coefficient multiplication process (predetermined value multiplication process) in which the number of INs (input number) in the predetermined number of games is multiplied by a predetermined coefficient (predetermined value), and the calculation result of this coefficient multiplication process are added to the calculation result in the predetermined number of games. By executing the division process of dividing the number of OUTs (the number of payouts), the constant X, which is a predetermined calculation result, can be derived.

Specifically, the number of INs in 20 blocks (that is, 340 games, which is the predetermined number of games) is 1020 as described above, whereas when the number of OUTs is 375, the payout rate is 375 sheets (OUT number of sheets) ÷ 1020 (IN number of sheets) × 100 = about 37%, while in the above constant calculation, 1020 sheets (value related to the number of inputs) × 64 (predetermined coefficient which is a predetermined value) ÷ 375 sheets (Number of OUTs) = 174.08, and 174, which is obtained by rounding off the decimal point of 174.08, is set as a constant X with a payout rate of 37%.

FIG. 261 shows the relationship between the constant X thus obtained and the ball output rate. As shown in FIG. 261, when the above-mentioned constant X is 174 (hereinafter, this kind is simply referred to as "constant X = 174"), the payout rate corresponds to about 37%, which corresponds to the constant X = 39. The payout rate is 164%, the payout rate of the constant X = 30 is about 213%, and the data of the constant X is stored in the main control board M. In this way, the main control board M can manage the ball output rate by calculating the constant X by calculation.

In the present embodiment, the coefficient multiplication process of multiplying the input number by a predetermined coefficient is performed, but the coefficient multiplication process may be a process of multiplying the payout number by a predetermined coefficient, and the payout number may be multiplied. Of the value obtained by dividing the input number by the value obtained by multiplying the value obtained by multiplying the value by a predetermined coefficient, the value obtained by rounding off the decimal point may be set as the constant X. Specifically, when the number of INs in 20 blocks is 1020 and the number of OUTs is 375, 375 (OUTs) x 64 (predetermined coefficient) ÷ 1020 (INs) = 23.529 ...・ Therefore, 23 with the decimal point rounded down may be set to a constant X with a payout rate of 37% (375 sheets (number of payouts) ÷ 1020 × 100 = about 37%). In short, as the coefficient multiplication process, a predetermined coefficient may be multiplied by either the input number or the payout number.

Each constant X thus obtained is stored in a first RAM area or the like that can be referred to by the main control board M. That is, in the first RAM area of the main control board M, a constant X = 25 to 29 (a range in which the ball ejection rate is larger than 220%) is set as a ball ejection state 3 in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 220%, and the constant X = Note that the constant X = 34 to 40 (the ball ejection rate is in the range of about 160% to 180%) is set to 30 to 33 (the ball ejection rate is in the range of about 193% to 213%) as the ball ejection state 2 of the caution state 2. As the ball ejection state 1 of the state 1, a constant X = 41 or less is stored as the default ball ejection state 0. Further, in the first RAM area of the main control board M, of the constant X, 30 which is the upper limit of the constant X corresponding to the ball ejection state 2 is set as the constant I, and the upper limit of the constant X corresponding to the ball ejection state 1 is set. A certain 33 is stored as a constant J, and 41, which is the upper limit of the constant X corresponding to the ball ejection state 0, is stored as a constant K. In this embodiment, the ball ejection state is managed in 4 stages of 0 to 3, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is said that the ball ejection state is in 3 stages of 0 to 2, 5 stages of 0 to 4, and the like. Needless to say, it can be set as appropriate according to the model specifications and the payout rate for which management is requested. Further, it goes without saying that each range of the ball ejection states 0 to 3 can be appropriately set according to the model specifications, the ball ejection rate for which management is requested, and the like.

Here, the above-mentioned constants P and Q will be supplemented. As described above, the constants P and Q are used in a situation where at least the initial values of the number of IN and the number of OUT are 0. Specifically, when the number of INs and OUTs up to that point is reset with the end of the previous advantageous section, and then a new advantageous section is entered via the normal section, or after the setting is changed, a new number is entered through the normal section. Since this can occur when the vehicle enters the advantageous section (hereinafter, this is simply referred to as "after the setting is changed"), the constants P and Q are at least when the advantageous section is entered and after the setting is changed, as described above. It has come to be used during 340 games.

As shown in the left figure of FIG. 298 (a), in the normal state, the total number of INs between 17 games, which is one block, is 51, and the total number of OUTs at this time is 47. However, assuming that there are 20 blocks in which the same state as this one block is repeated, the total number of INs for 20 blocks is 1020, and the total number of OUTs is 1020, as shown in the right figure of FIG. 298 (a). Is 940. In this case, the constant X is 69, and the ball ejection state is the default 0. Similarly, at the time of AT in FIG. 298 (b), assuming that all 15 games are paid out, the total number of INs in one block (17 games) is 51, and the total number of OUTs is 255. The total number of INs in 20 blocks (340 games) is 1020, the total number of OUTs is 5100, the constant X is 12, and the number of balls is 3. In these FIGS. 298 (a) and 298 (b), since the number of IN and OUT is not reset because the number of games has exceeded 340 after the setting is changed or when the advantageous section is entered, the constant X is set. It can be said that the ball ejection state at that time is accurately represented.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 298 (c), in the case of the situation after the setting change, at the time of 17 games (at the time of one block) after the setting change, the total number of INs is 51 and OUT. Assuming that the total number of sheets is 105, the constant X of 20 blocks is calculated in this state to be 31, and the ball ejection state is 2 in the caution state. This is because the number of INs from 2 blocks to 20 blocks is 0 (at this point, it is impossible that the game proceeded without any input between 18 games and 340 games), and the number of OUTs is It is calculated as 0, and it cannot be said that the ball ejection state at that time is accurately represented. In addition, it is not appropriate to manage the AT or the like based on such an inaccurate ball ejection state, and such a situation should be avoided.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, constants P and Q are used as provisional values. In FIG. 298 (c), the case where the constant P (50) and the constant Q (35) are used (substituted) for the 2 blocks to 20 blocks is shown in FIG. 298 (d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 298 (d), the total number of IN sheets is 1001 and the total number of OUT sheets is 770. In this case, the constant X is 84, and the ball ejection state is 0 by default, and the ball ejection state at that time is tentatively but somewhat accurately represented as compared with FIG. 298 (c) described above. It can be said that. This is an example after changing the joint, but the same applies when entering an advantageous section.

In this way, after the setting is changed, the number of IN and OUT can be 0, and after the setting is changed or when the advantageous section is entered, the constants P and Q are tentatively used so that the number of IN and OUT is 0. It is possible to prevent the resulting increase in the ball ejection rate, and it is possible to calculate an appropriate ball ejection state to some extent. As a result, even if the AT is won in 200 games (the number of games less than 20 blocks above), for example, after changing the setting or entering the advantageous section, appropriate processing is received based on the appropriate payout state. This makes it possible to prevent an unfavorable process based on an erroneous ball ejection state (for example, the hit AT is canceled as described later).

Based on the above-mentioned premise, in step S5317, when the ball ejection state number = 2 (ball ejection state 2) (Yes in step S5317), it is a heavy attention state close to 220% as described above. Since it is expected that the navigation effect will exceed 220% when the navigation effect is executed in this AT state in this state, the process of saving 1 saved in the CZ2 breakthrough flag to 0 is executed in step S5316 (step). S5318). That is, in step S5318, in step S5316, once the state in which the transition to the additional specialized state (AT4) is determined is canceled and the transition to the additional specialized state is impossible, once the process is chewed, once The process of setting the AT hit state in the CZ2 state to the AT off state is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from inciting excessive gambling.

Further, in step S5317, when the ball ejection state number = 2, that is, when the ball ejection state numbers = 0, 1, 3 (ball ejection state 0, 1, 3) (No in step S5317), It is determined whether or not the above-mentioned ball ejection normal flag is 0, and if it is 0 in the abnormal state (Yes in step S5319), the process proceeds to step S5318, and if it is 1 in the normal state (Yes). N0) in step S5319), the CZ2 breakthrough flag 1 set in step S5316 is maintained.

In addition, even in the case of the ball ejection state number = 3, which is already in the state of exceeding 220% in step S5317, it is said that it is the state of exceeding 220% that the ball is treated as a normal state and proceeded to step S5319. Is a value that is non-conforming in the above-mentioned type test, and as long as it is non-conforming anyway, it is not necessary to separately perform a processing corresponding to this, and therefore, it is merged with the processing in step S5319.

That is, in the case of the ball ejection state = 3, in step S5318, the state of being hit once in the CZ2 state is maintained as it is, and compared to the case of the ball ejection state = 0 in which the hit is canceled in step S5318. This means that the expected value of winning medals will increase. By doing so, if the ball ejection state = 3 and a condition that is non-conforming in the test occurs accidentally in the market, it is not necessary to limit the ball ejection state, and the most ejected state (state in which the ball is ejected) ). It should be noted that this may be used to perform the production. For example, when the ball ejection status number = 2, and when it is confirmed that the ball ejection status number = 3 by winning the 15-card combination and paying out 15 cards, the AT is in progress. If there is, an effect such as "Congratulations!" Will be performed to announce that the number of balls released has reached the climax (the rate of balls released has exceeded 220). On the other hand, if it is not during AT, the selection navigation effect is performed like "???", and the player performs the correct operation mode (by answering the selection correctly), and the above-mentioned "Congratulations!" You may try to perform such an effect. By performing such an effect, it is possible to further increase the player's motivation to play.

In step S5317, when the ball ejection state = 3, the process proceeds to step S5318, so that the expected value of the medal acquisition may be substantially the same in the ball ejection states = 0 and 3. In addition, the expected value of medal acquisition in the ball ejection state = 2 is α, the expected value of medal acquisition in the ball ejection state = 0 is β, the expected medal acquisition value in the ball ejection state = 3 is γ, and the medal in the ball ejection state = 1 When the expected acquisition value is ω, α <ω <β <γ may be set, and it goes without saying that the expected medal acquisition value in each ball ejection state can be appropriately set depending on the specifications of the game machine and the like. stomach.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the payout state, which is the calculation result of the number of INs and the number of OUTs in the predetermined number of games, is 2 (when the caution state is 2), the CZ2 is an advantageous game. Based on the ball ejection states 0 to 3, the hit / fail in the CZ2 state (shift to the main AT state) is executed, such as executing the process of making the hit state in the state into the off state (the process of canceling the hit). Since the control related to the management of advantageous games such as (whether or not) is executed, it is possible to manage such advantageous games within the range of the intended payout rate. As a result, the conformity rate of the type test can be improved, and it is possible to suppress excessive gambling for the player.

As for the management of the advantageous game, in addition to the process of canceling the hit in the case of the ball ejection state 2 as described above, the management related to the winning of the advantageous game as described in (1) and (2) below is performed. , (3) to (6) below, such as those that manage advantageous games and advantageous sections themselves. In short, the control is not particularly limited as long as it is a control related to the management of advantageous games.
(1) For example, before step S5301 in FIG. 256, a determination step for determining whether the ball ejection state is 2 or 3 is placed, and if the ball ejection state is 2 or 3, AT (advantageous) as it is. It is also possible to perform a process of dismissing the game (for example, a process of setting the flag 0 indicating that the AT has been disengaged, as in step S5318). This makes it possible to prevent AT winning from the beginning.
(2) For example, before step S5301 in FIG. 256, a determination step for determining whether or not the ball ejection rate is low and the constant X is 174 or more in FIG. 261 is placed, and the constant X is set. If is 174 or more, the process of winning the AT may be performed. As a result, AT can be forcibly generated.
(3) For example, when the ball ejection state becomes 2 or 3 during AT, the AT is forcibly terminated (or the advantageous section is forcibly terminated), and the ball ejection rate is lower than that of AT. The end timing of the AT may be adjusted, such as performing a process of shifting to a gaming state such as a normal section. As a result, even if the ball ejection rate exceeds the range of the intended ball ejection rate, the ball ejection state can be quickly reduced to 0 or 1 depending on the subsequent gaming state in which the ball ejection rate is low.
(4) For example, when the AT is won, if the ball ejection state is 2 or 3, the AT start timing is adjusted so that the AT is not started until the ball ejection state becomes 0 or 1. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball output rate from continuing beyond the intended range as much as possible.
(5) For example, just before the end of AT, if the ball ejection state is 1, the number of ATs is forcibly added, or if the ball ejection state becomes 2 or 3 during AT, the addition is not performed. You may adjust the length of the continuation of AT. Similarly, in this case as well, it is possible to prevent the ball output rate from continuing beyond the intended range as much as possible.
(6) For example, the magnitude of the expected value of the game medal in the AT may be adjusted by changing the so-called navigation probability according to the ball ejection states 0 to 3. In this case, the ball output rate can be kept within the intended range.
<16th embodiment pullback processing>

FIG. 257 is a flowchart of the pullback process relating to the main game state 2 (CZ3 state in FIG. 252) which is AT3 shown in FIG. 251. That is, as described above, in the main game state 7 (CZ1 state) which is AT1 or the main game state 3 (CZ2 state) which is AT2, it is not possible to shift to the main game state 8 (additional specialization state) which is AT4. In this case, or when the main game state 4 (ST state) which is AT6 cannot shift to the main game state 6 (this AT state) which is AT5, in AT3 (may be a pullback state). It is a flowchart of the pull-back process for returning to AT1 again.

Regarding this pullback process, in the main game states 3, 7 and 4 (CZ1 state, CZ2 state and ST state), the main game state 8 (additional specialization state) and the main game state 6 (main AT state) which is AT5 are set. This is a process for returning to the main game state 7 (CZ1) when the transition cannot be made. The main game state 3 total stop process in step S5107 of FIG. 254, the main game state 4 total stop process in step S5108, and the step. This is a process to be executed during each process of the main game state 7 total stop process of S5111 (details of each of these processes are omitted as described above).

In this pullback process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball ejection normal flag is normal, and if the abnormal state is 0 (ball ejection normal flag = 0) (Yes in step S5401), the ball is pulled back by step S5403. Without performing the lottery, 2 is saved as a pull-back number to be used for the lottery of the number of games counter range later (step S5402).

In the present embodiment, the pullback number 0 corresponds to the clearing of the advantageous section, corresponds to the shift to the pullback state in which the pullback number 1 does not hit, and corresponds to the shift to the pullback state in which the pullback number 2 hits. Further, these pull-back numbers 0 to 2 are used for the game number counter range lottery executed in step S5206 of FIG. 255, step S5408 of FIG. 257, and the like. That is, in the game number counter range lottery, for example, when the payout normal flag is 1 in the normal state, the pullback number is 1 or 2, and the payout state number is 0, which is the default, the number is relatively short. If a lottery is performed based on a table (not shown) in which the number of games can be easily selected, and the ball ejection normal flag is 1, the pullback number is 0, and the ball ejection status number is caution status 2, it is relatively long. It is possible to perform a lottery based on a table (not shown) or the like in which the number of games is easily drawn. Further, regardless of the ball ejection status number when the ball ejection normal flag is 0 and the pullback number is 2, the lottery can be performed using the above-mentioned table or the like in which a relatively long number of games is easily drawn. As described above, in the lottery of the game number counter range, the lottery is performed based on the table or the like that refers to the payout normal flag, the pullback number, and the payout status number. Needless to say, it is possible to refer to at least one of these, instead of referring to all three of the ball ejection normal flag, the pullback number, and the ball ejection status number.

On the other hand, when the ball ejection normal flag is 1 in the normal state (ball ejection normal flag = 1) (No in step S5401), the process of performing the pullback lottery is executed (step S5404). That is, in this pullback lottery, any of the above-mentioned pullback numbers 0 to 2 is drawn.

When the lottery result is the pullback number 0 (lottery result = 0) (Yes in step S5404), 1 is stored in the above-mentioned advantageous section clear counter, and when the lottery result is 1 or 2. (No in step S5404) stores 1 or 2 as the pull-back number, which is the result of the lottery (step S5406).

Next, in step S5407, the same initial set processing as in FIG. 256 is executed. In addition, when the process shifts to step S5402 and then shifts to step S5407 because the result is Yes in step S5401, in other words, when the ball ejection status flag is 0 in the abnormal state, the process of step S5407 is performed. (See the state in which the AT is forcibly detached in step S5319 in FIG. 256 and is in the detached state in step S5318 in the same figure).

Next, in step S5408, the same processing as in step S5206 of FIG. 255 is executed. In the case of passing through Yes, step S5402, and step S5406 in step S5401 (when the ball ejection state flag is 0 in the abnormal state and the pullback number 2 is set), the above-mentioned step S5408 is performed. As in the above, a lottery is performed based on a table or the like that refers to the payout normal flag, the pullback number, and the payout status number. If the ball ejection normal flag is 0, the ball is forcibly removed in step S5407. Therefore, the number of ceiling games determined here is reached, and AT1 (sub game), which is the main game state 7, is reached. Even if it shifts to the CZ1 state in the state), it cannot shift to AT2, which is the main state 3, and it is confirmed that it shifts to the normal section (point specialized state 1 in the sub-game state), which is the main game state 0. It is in a state of being.

Next, in step S5409, the lottery result A of the number of games counter range lottery performed in step S5408, that is, the number of games that shift to AT1 (the CZ1 state in the sub-game state), which is the main game state 7, (the number of so-called ceiling games). ) Is smaller than the value α obtained by subtracting a predetermined constant H (for example, 350) from the number of games of the current advantageous section clear counter (comparing).

That is, since the advantageous section ends when 1500 games are reached as described above, when the player returns to AT5 (main AT state) via AT1 (CZ1 state) by winning the pullback lottery, the advantageous section ends. In order to execute the AT5, AT6 (ST state), etc., it is necessary to keep a sufficient number of games of the current advantageous section clear counter (for example, when the number of games of the advantageous section clear counter is only 4 games). Therefore, even if AT5 continues for 5 or more games, AT5 is forcibly terminated in the 4th game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, AT5, AT6, and the like can be sufficiently executed. The number of games for this is set to 350, and this 350 is set as a constant H (in other words, the constant H can be said to be the number of guaranteed games for executing the AT state such as AT5 and AT6), and the current advantage. The value α obtained by subtracting this constant H from the number of games of the section clear counter is compared with the lottery result A, which is the number of ceiling games described above.

By this comparison, when the lottery result A> the value α (No in step S5409), for example, the lottery result A is 700 games, the current advantageous section clear counter value is 900 games (the remaining 600 games), and a constant. If H is 350, the lottery result A (= 700)> value α (600-350 = 250), and it is assumed that the number of remaining games of the advantageous section clear counter for sufficiently executing AT5 and AT6 is insufficient. , Step S5408 returns to the process of performing the game number counter range lottery again.

On the other hand, when the lottery result A <value α (Yes in step S5409), for example, when the lottery result A is 200 games and the current advantageous section clear counter value is 900 games, the lottery result A (= 200) <value α (600-350 = 250), and assuming that the number of remaining games in the advantageous section clear counter is sufficient to execute AT5, AT6, etc., this lottery result A is the number of winning games. The process of saving in the counter and saving 2 in the main game state number is executed (steps S5410 and S5411). In this way, by providing the constant H, as compared with the case where the constant H is not provided, even if the player shifts to the AT state such as AT5 or AT6 again by pulling back, a sufficient number of games are maintained in the AT state. can do.

In the present embodiment, the constant H is set and the number of games counter range lottery is performed so that the number of remaining games does not fall below 350, but when the value of the current advantageous section clear counter is less than 350. For example, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated, or the AT may not be transferred to the remaining advantageous section at all. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the AT and the advantageous section are managed based on the ball ejection states 0 to 3, and in addition to the ball ejection states 0 to 3, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section You may also refer to. That is, if the advantageous section is less than 350 games remaining at the end of the AT, even if the ball ejection state is 0, the advantageous section is forcibly ended at the end of this AT. good. In addition, when the remaining 350 games are cut and the ball ejection state is 2 or 3, the ball ejection rate is lowered by not shifting to AT at all during the remaining advantageous section. You may. In this way, it is also possible to manage the advantageous section and the AT by taking into consideration both the ball ejection state 0 to 3 and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section.
<16th Embodiment Base Counter Update Processing>

258 to 260 are flowcharts of the base counter update process according to the subroutine of step S5113 in FIG. 254. First, when the replay symbol is displayed (replay operation symbol is displayed) in the winning determination after all reels M50 are stopped (Yes in step S5501), the number of games in one block (the number of games in one block) because the game medal is not paid out. In the present embodiment, a process of adding 1 to a calculation cycle counter (counting 0 to 16) (which counts 0 to 16) that counts 17 games as described above is executed (step S5504). On the other hand, when the replay symbol is not displayed in the winning judgment, the specified number of 3 is added to the IN number counter, and the payout number buffer storing the payout number according to the winning combination in the game is added to the OUT number counter. (For example, if the number of payouts is 15, the value is 15) is added, and a process of adding 1 to the calculation cycle counter is executed (step S5504).

Next, when the value of the calculation cycle counter reaches the upper limit value (16 in this embodiment) (when it is the 17th game) (No in step S5505), 0 is stored in the calculation cycle counter (No). The process of resetting the calculation cycle counter) is executed, and the process of obtaining the total IN number counter value is executed by setting the total sum of the IN number counters in the IN number total value data (step S5507), and the IN number for 17 games is executed. The process of obtaining the IN number calculation value is executed by multiplying the total value by the above-mentioned predetermined coefficient (step S5508). For example, when 7 replay symbol combinations are displayed out of 17 games, 1920 obtained by multiplying 30 of the total IN number number value by 64, which is the above-mentioned predetermined coefficient, becomes the IN number number calculation value. On the other hand, if the value of the calculation cycle counter has not reached the upper limit value (less than 17 games) (Yes in step S5505), the process of calculating the sum is not executed until the calculation cycle counter reaches the upper limit value.

Next, the process of obtaining the total value of the number of OUTs is executed by setting the sum of the number of OUTs counters in the total value data of the number of OUTs (step S5509). For example, out of 17 games, 7 replay symbol combinations are displayed, 15 payout symbol combinations are 3 games, and 1 payout symbol combination is 5 games, 0 payout symbol combinations (so-called loss or loss). When (missing) is 2 games, (15 × 3) + (1 × 5) + (0 × 2) = 50 is the OUT number calculation value.

Next, as the base counter data (not shown) corresponding to the value of the constant X described above, the base counter value obtained by dividing the OUT number value data by the IN number calculation value data (IN number calculation value data ÷ OUT number value data) is set. As a result, the process of obtaining the base counter value is executed (step S5510). For example, the above-mentioned IN number calculation value data 1920 ÷ the above-mentioned OUT number total value 50 = 38.4, and among these values, “38”, which is the value with the decimal point rounded down, is the base counter value (constant X). (In this case, as shown in FIG. 261, the ball output rate is about 168%). Then, it is determined whether or not the current ball ejection state is the ball ejection state 3 (ball ejection state number = 3) in which the ball ejection state exceeds 220%, and if it is not the ball ejection state 3 (No in step S5511). , Step S5512 or later, and if the ball is in the ball ejection state 3, the process proceeds to step S5520 or later.

In step S5512, it is determined whether or not the base counter value (constant X) obtained in step S5510 is less than the constant I (30 in this embodiment), which is the upper limit of the constant X corresponding to the ball ejection state 2. do. When the base counter value (constant X) is less than the constant I, that is, when the constant X is 29 or less in the ball ejection state 3 (Yes in step S5512), step S5513. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the base counter value (constant X) is larger than the constant I, that is, when the constant X is 30 or more and is in any of the ball ejection states 0 to 2, as shown in FIG. 261, the step. Proceed to S5515.

In step S5513, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter is less than 1200 games (whether or not the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is less than 1200 games), and if the advantageous section clear counter is less than 1200, in other words. Then, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 1219 games or more sufficient to execute the AT in-progress state (Yes in step S5513), the process of saving 3 in the payout state number is executed. (Step S5514). On the other hand, when the advantageous section clear counter is 1200 or more, in other words, when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is 300 games or less and the advantageous section is forcibly ended after 300 games are exhausted at the maximum (step S5513). No), the process proceeds to step S5516. In the present embodiment, 1200 games are adopted as the threshold value of the number of remaining advantageous section games in step S5513, but the number of remaining advantageous section games is not limited to this, and the specifications of the revolving pachinko machine. Needless to say, it can be appropriately selected according to the above.

In step S5515, it is determined whether or not the base counter value (constant X) obtained in step S5510 is less than the constant J (34 in this embodiment), which is the upper limit of the constant X corresponding to the ball ejection state 1. do. When this base counter value (constant X) is less than the constant J, that is, when the constant X is in the ball ejection state 2 in the range of 30 to 33 as shown in FIG. 261 (Yes in step S5515). , The process of saving 2 in the payout status number is executed (step S5516). On the other hand, when the base counter value (constant X) is larger than the constant J, that is, when the constant X is 34 or more in the ball ejection state 0 or 1, as shown in FIG. 261, the process proceeds to step S5517. ..

In step S5517, it is determined whether or not the base counter value (constant X) obtained in step S5510 is less than the constant K (41 in this embodiment), which is the upper limit of the constant X corresponding to the ball ejection state 0. do. When this base counter value (constant X) is less than the constant K, that is, when the constant X is the ball ejection state 1 in the range of 34 to 40 as shown in FIG. 261 (Yes in step S5517). , The process of saving 1 in the payout status number is executed (step S5518). On the other hand, when the base counter value (constant X) is larger than the constant K, that is, when the constant X is 41 or more and the ball ejection state is 0, the ball ejection information number is 0. Is executed (step S5519).

Here, returning to step S5511, if Yes in this step S5511 (if the ball is ejected), in step S5520, a settling buffer (not shown) that counts the above 20 blocks ( A process of storing 0 to 19 and adding 1 to (the upper limit value is 19) (adding 1 to the setting buffer number) is executed. Next, when this setling buffer number (value stored in the setling buffer) has reached the upper limit value (No in step S5521), 0 is stored in the setling buffer number to save the setling buffer. Is reset (step S5523), and if the settling buffer number does not reach the upper limit value, the IN number counter and the OUT number counter according to the settling buffer number (according to the number of blocks which are the number of cycles) are set to 0. Is saved, and the process of resetting each of them is executed (step S5522).
<<< Details of the 16th embodiment sub-game state >>>

Next, the details of the sub-game state will be described. As described above, the sub-game states are the sub-game state shown in FIG. 252, the point specialization 1 state, the point specialization 2 state, the non-AT in-progress state having the icon acquisition state and the precursor state, and the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state. , CZ3 state, additional specialized state, main AT state, ST state, latent state, BB state, and AT in progress state having an ending state. After that, each of these states follows the game flow of FIG. 252. The main game state will be described, but for convenience of explanation, the AT state will be described first, and then the normal state will be described.
<16th Embodiment AT in progress state (CZ1 state to CZ3 state)>

In the present embodiment, the AT in-progress state is first started from the CZ1 state (main game state 7 which is AT1). This CZ1 state shifts when the number of ceiling games determined in step S5206 of FIG. 255 is reached in the normal state, in other words, the number of games counter = 0 (see (2) with reference to FIG. 250). It has become like. Further, in this CZ1 state, if the pullback is successful in the ST state (main game state 6 which is AT6), in other words, in the ST state in the state where the pullback number 2 is saved in step S5406 of FIG. It also migrates when is finished. Among the winning combinations, the direct hitting role that directly shifts to the CZ1 state, the main AT state, or the ending state that gives the right to acquire at least 2400 medals (hereinafter, also referred to as the CZ direct hitting role, the AT direct hitting role, and the ending direct hitting role). It may be provided and the transition may be made by winning this direct hit role. In this case, in order to excite the game, for example, a long freeze effect of about 1 minute may be performed.

In this CZ1 state, as shown in FIG. 262, the effect display device S40 executes the navigation effect three times. Further, in the CZ1 state, after the navigation effect of 3 times is completed, the game continues for a predetermined number of games such as 5 games, 7 games, and 9 games, and a predetermined story is set according to the number of games. The so-called scenario effect for advancing is executed. For example, whether or not it is possible to shift to the CZ2 state over the final three games of this scenario effect (when the CZ challenge counter described later is in the state of 3). A judge effect is being performed to notify the player of the fact. As this judge effect, in the first game, for example, what kind of weapon or attack method is used to attack the opponent, or an introduction effect such as selecting a character to play against the opponent is performed, and in the second game, the opponent is produced. It is possible to perform a battle effect such as performing a battle effect during a battle with a character and performing a result notification effect of notifying the victory or defeat in the third game. The number of navigation effects in this CZ1 state is not limited to three, and an appropriate number can be set. In addition, the judge production is not limited to the battle production, but may be a production that merely notifies the player of a hit or a miss, and the point is whether or not to move to the next state for the player. Needless to say, the production is not particularly limited as long as it can be notified.

Further, in this state, the number of points accumulated in the non-AT state is displayed in the second predetermined area SR2 (which will be described later) at the lower right of the display unit of the effect display device S40 (currently in the numerator). The number of points and the upper limit of points are displayed in the denominator), and the icons acquired in the non-AT state are left and right in the first predetermined area SR1 in the upper right part of the effect display device S40. They are displayed side by side in the direction. The icons are not limited to the form of being displayed side by side in the left-right direction as described above, and may be displayed side by side in the vertical direction, for example. Further, points are displayed and icons are displayed in the first predetermined area SR1 and the second predetermined area SR2 of the effect display device S40, respectively, but the display of these points and icons is not limited to these areas, for example. , The upper left area of the upper left part of the effect display device S40, the left middle area of the central part of the left side, the lower right area of the lower right, the right middle area of the central part of the right side, or the center of the upper part of the effect display device S40. It suffices if it is appropriately displayed in any of the upper middle area of the portion, the lower middle region of the lower central portion, and the like, and the point is that it is displayed in a part of the entire display area of the effect display device S40. Just do it.

Further, in the CZ1 state, an effect indicating the start of the battle effect is executed before the battle effect. In the effect indicating the start of this battle effect, an effect of displaying a button image such as "PUSH" prompting the player to press the sub input button (effect button) SB is executed on the effect display device S40, and the player subs. When the input button SB is pressed, as shown in FIG. 263, the winning percentage of the battle effect in the CZ1 state, in other words, the winning rate of the battle effect which is the expected value of shifting from the CZ1 state to the CZ2 state (for example, 77% in FIG. 263). Is displayed.) Is displayed. The expected value display effect is executed.

In this expected value display effect, the expected value is added according to the icon of the first predetermined area SR1. In this expected value display effect, the base of the expected value is set to, for example, 40%, and after displaying this 50% for the first time, for example, if the icon is "1st" with an addition rate of 5%, this icon is erased. The effect of displaying 45% as the total expected value obtained by adding 5% to 40% is executed. At this time, the total expected value according to the addition rate of the icon may be displayed by pressing the sub-input button SB once, or the sub-input button SB may be repeatedly pressed. , Each time the player presses the sub-input button SB once, a predetermined percentage (for example, + 1%, + 3%, etc., as appropriate) is raised to finally display the above 45%. You can also do it. Further, when the icon is "heat!" That the CZ1 state breakthrough is confirmed, the total expected value may be displayed as 100% before shifting to the battle effect. In short, it suffices to execute an appropriate effect according to the content of the icon.

Further, when displaying the total expected value, the remaining points (777 points in FIG. 262) are erased from the points remaining in the second predetermined area SR2, and the points are changed to the above-mentioned "1st" icon and displayed. It is also possible to display a return effect such as, to the player, or to use the remaining points to perform an effect that the icon acquisition lottery was performed but the icon could not be acquired. In this way, when the state shifts to the CZ1 state, even if the points for acquiring the icon are less than the predetermined value for acquiring the icon, a lottery for whether or not to acquire the icon according to the points is performed. By showing the player the effect of effectively utilizing the remaining points, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of loss such as wasting the points even though the points have been accumulated to some extent. ..

In the CZ1 state, if a rare role is won before the end of the three navigation effects from the rush game, in other words, before the battle effect is executed, an icon acquisition lottery is performed. You may try to get an icon. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss of the rare role before the start of the battle production.

In the present embodiment, in the winning percentage displayed in the battle effect, the value stored in the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter in step S5308 of FIG. 256, that is, from the CZ1 state to the CZ2 state in step S5131 of FIG. The value of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter actually used in the lottery for whether or not to shift to is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S (as described above, the hit probability itself), and the sub control board S Is designed to display this value as the winning percentage on the effect display device S40. By displaying the actual hit probability in this way, it is possible to display the genuine reliability to the player.

In the battle production, as shown in FIG. 264, a battle is performed between the ally character and the enemy character, and in the process, the damage given to the enemy character is, for example, 456 hit points as shown in FIG. 264. When it is displayed that the setting value is given, it is confirmed that the set value is any one of 4 to 6, or it is indicated that the setting value is 4 to 6 with a high probability. As an example of this kind, for example, in the case of damage of 666 hit points, it may be confirmed that it is setting 6 or it is shown that it is set 6 with a high probability, or it may be damage of 246 hit points. For example, the so-called even-numbered setting is confirmed or has a high probability of being an even-numbered setting, and the damage of 135 hit points indicates that the so-called odd-numbered setting is confirmed or has a high probability of being an odd-numbered setting. .. In this way, during the production of notifying whether or not to proceed to the next more advantageous stage, such as from the CZ1 state to the CZ2 state, the set value is also suggested in addition to the notification, so that the interest of the game is improved. It can be expected that the player's eyes will be attracted to the effect display device S40. As the frequency of suggestion effect of the set value, the appearance frequency of the even number setting may be higher than the appearance frequency of the odd number setting. This is because if there are 6 levels of setting values and the odd number setting is confirmed, the setting value 6 (highest setting) will be denied, so by reducing the chances that the player will see it as much as possible, the player's setting It is possible to maintain curiosity about guessing.

In this battle production, when it is decided to shift from the CZ1 state to the CZ2 state (when the hit is achieved in step S5313 in FIG. 256 and 1 is saved in the CZ1 breakthrough flag in step S5314). Notifies the player that the player is in the CZ2 state by performing an effect that the ally character wins as a battle effect. Further, in the present embodiment, in the CZ1 state, the number of staying games of the battle effect after the navigation is completed is managed by a CZ1 game number counter (not shown), and the CZ game number counter is a predetermined value (for example, 0). ), The effect that the ally character wins is performed, and in the transition from the CZ1 state to the CZ2 state, the CZ1 game number counter is 0 and the CZ state 1 breakthrough flag is 1. There is a case (see (4) in FIG. 250).

When the predetermined value of the CZ1 game number counter is set to 1, an effect that the ally character wins at this time is performed, and when the CZ1 game number counter becomes 0, an effect of notifying that the CZ2 state is advanced is performed. It goes without saying that the timing (a predetermined value of the CZ1 game number counter) for notifying the player of whether to shift to the CZ2 state can be appropriately set. Further, the CZ1 game number counter may be a game number counter from the start to the end of the CZ1 state. In this case, it is desirable that the value is obtained by adding the number of times to execute the battle effect to the number of games in which the predetermined number of times of navigation (three times in this embodiment) can be surely performed.

On the other hand, if the player cannot advance to the CZ2 state (when the player deviates from step S5313 in FIG. 256), the player cannot advance to the CZ2 state by performing an effect that the ally character loses as a battle effect. Is notified. In the present embodiment, the number of games of the battle effect is managed by a CZ1 challenge counter (not shown), and when the CZ1 challenge counter is 0 and the above-mentioned CZ1 game number counter is 0, the ally character loses. It is designed to produce. When the pullback number is 0 of "advantageous section reset", the transition destination after this losing effect shifts to the point specialization state 1, and the pullback number "shifts to a pullback that does not hit" 1 or "hits". In the case of "shifting to pullback" 2, the state shifts to the CZ3 state (see (5) and (6) in FIG. 250). In this CZ1 state, when the upper limit of the advantageous section reaches 1500 G or the difference number of balls to be ejected reaches 2400 (MY2400) (hereinafter, it is simply referred to as "when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached". ), The transition to the point specialization state 1 in the non-AT state, which is a normal section (see (20) in FIG. 250).

If you win the battle effect in the CZ1 state and proceed to the CZ state 2, in this CZ2 state, the same battle effect as the above-mentioned CZ1 state is performed, and the player is given the next transition destination depending on the victory or defeat of the ally character. Notify. In the present embodiment, the specification is such that the navigation effect is not performed in this CZ2 state, and the number of staying games of the battle effect in this CZ2 is managed by the CZ2 game number counter similar to the above-mentioned CZ1 game number counter. .. Therefore, in the CZ2 state, the value of the CZ2 game number counter is the number of staying games in the CZ2 state as it is. Further, the number of battle effects in the CZ2 state is managed by a CZ2 challenge counter similar to the above-mentioned CZ1 challenge counter.

That is, even in the CZ2 state, a so-called scenario effect is executed in which a predetermined number of games is continued for a predetermined number of games, for example, 5 games, 7 games, and 9 games, and a predetermined story is advanced according to the number of games. For example, a judge who notifies the player whether or not it is possible to shift to the CZ2 state over the final three games of this scenario production (when the CZ challenge counter described later is in the state of 3). The production is being performed. Further, since the navigation effect is not performed in the CZ2 state, the above-mentioned scenario effect is executed as soon as the CZ2 state is entered. It should be noted that the navigation effect may be performed even in the CZ2 state, and it goes without saying that the CZ2 game number counter in this case may be handled in the same manner as the CZ1 game number counter.

In the CZ2 state, when it is decided to shift from the CZ2 state to the additional specialized state when the CZ2 game number counter becomes 0 (a hit in step S5315 in FIG. 256 and a breakthrough in CZ2 in step S5316). In the case where 1 is stored in the flag (see also (4) in FIG. 250), the ally character wins and proceeds to the specialization state (see (7) in FIG. 250). Further, even in this CZ2 state, the winning percentage of the battle production, that is, the value of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter saved in step S5312 of FIG. 256, is used as it is before or at the start of the battle production, as in the CZ1 state. It is designed to be displayed on the effect display device S40.

In the CZ2 state, if it is not possible to proceed to the additional specialized state (when it is removed in step S5315 of FIG. 256), the ally character will be defeated and the player will not be able to proceed to the additional specialized state. Notify. When the pullback number is 0 of "advantageous section reset", the transition destination after this losing effect shifts to the point specialization state 1, and the pullback number "shifts to a pullback that does not hit" 1 or "hits". In the case of "shifting to pullback" 2, the state shifts to the CZ3 state (see (8) and (9) of FIG. 250). Even when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during this CZ2 state, the state shifts to the point specialization state 1 in the non-AT state, which is the normal section (see (20) in FIG. 250).

Further, in the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state, it is possible to shift to the CZ3 state (main game state 2 which is AT3) in which the pullback effect suggesting the transition to the CZ1 is executed again in a part of the case where the battle effect is lost. be. That is, as described above, when the pullback number is 1 or 2 (see (6) and (9) in FIG. 250), the state shifts to the CZ3 state. Further, in the ST state during the AT state, which will be described later, the ST counter (not shown) that manages the number of staying games in the ST state becomes 0, and the CZ state 3 also shifts to the case where the pullback number is 1 or 2 (FIG. 250 (see (16)). Further, after the end of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state and the ST state, if the pullback number is 2, the state always shifts to the CZ3 state, but if the pullback number is 1, a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the CZ3 state is performed. If you win, you will move to the CZ3 state, and if you do not win, you will move to the point specialization 1 state as it is. That is, in the main game state, although it is the main game state 2 which is AT3, in the sub game state, it may shift to the point specialization 1 state.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the state is CZ1 or CZ2, a scenario effect that continues for a predetermined number of games such as 5 games, 7 games, and 9 games is executed. However, this scenario effect is executed. It is also possible to suggest that the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state is breached according to the number of staying games. For example, in the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state, when the scenario production of 9 games is normally performed, when the CZ1 state ends in 7 games, the transition to the CZ2 state is confirmed, and the CZ1 state is 5. When the game ends, the transition to the additional specialized state can be confirmed (AT confirmed). Further, in the case of the scenario production of 7 games in the CZ1 state and the scenario production of 7 games in the CZ2 state, the AT is confirmed and a large number of additional numbers can be expected in the additional specialized state (for example, every time in the normal state). It is also possible to suggest that the addition of at least 3 sets of games is the addition of at least 6 sets, etc. Of course, the same applies to the addition of the number of games and the number of games). .. In short, if the combination of the number of staying games in each scenario effect of the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state is used to notify the advantageous state such as AT confirmation notification and development after AT, the number of staying games and the like can be appropriately determined. It can be set. From this point of view, the number of combinations increases by preparing three or more states instead of two, which are the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state, as the state for notifying the transition to the additional specialized state. There will be a wide variety of productions that will be notified by.

Even in the CZ3 state (main game state 2 which is AT3), the number of staying games is managed by a CZ3 game number counter (not shown) similar to the CZ1 game number counter, and this CZ3 game number counter is a predetermined value ( For example, until it becomes 0 or 1), a pull-back effect suggesting whether or not to return to the CZ1 state is performed. When the CZ3 game number counter reaches a predetermined value, if the pullback number is 1, after producing an effect that the pullback has failed, the game shifts to the point-specialized 1 state in the non-AT state. When the pullback number is 2, the state shifts to the CZ1 state again after the effect that the pullback is successful is performed (see (18) and (19) in FIGS. 250). Even if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during this CZ3 state, the point-specialized state 1 in the non-AT state is entered (see (20) in FIG. 250).

When the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, and the CZ3 state are completed, the end screen indicating the end of these CZs can be displayed on the effect display device S40. In this case, the display mode of the display screen, specifically, if it is a specific display mode in which all the characters are gathered, the highest setting of 6 is confirmed, and if it is the first display mode in which even numbers of characters are gathered, In the second display mode in which the even number setting is fixed and the characters are gathered in odd numbers, the setting suggestion associated with the display correspondence may be made such that the odd number setting is fixed. Further, in this setting suggestion, in addition to the fact that the setting status is fixed as described above, the higher setting suggestion display mode, the even number setting suggestion display mode, the even number setting suggestion display mode, and the odd number setting suggestion mode are selected. Needless to say, it may be an odd-numbered setting suggestion display mode that suggests the setting status.

In addition, a special lottery for whether or not to shift to AT is performed at the time of entering the CZ1 state in the out-of-state state, or at a predetermined timing such as the final game of this CZ1, and if this special lottery is won, the special lottery is performed. At a predetermined timing after the next game (the next game may be used, the scenario of three games may be produced, and this timing can be set as appropriate), an effect indicating that the AT has been hit is performed. In this case, the AT (in this case, an additional specialized state) may be entered. This can be similarly applied to the CZ2 state and the CZ3 state in the detached state. Since such a special lottery has a strong specification with a strong extra element of forcibly hitting what was originally out of the game, it is desirable that the winning probability be in the single digit range (3%, etc.), for example. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she may hit at a predetermined timing such as at the start or end of the CZ1 state, and a feeling of tension in the game such as the CZ1 state. It is possible to provide a certain game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the CZ1 state to the CZ3 state, for example, when the "reverse push black 7 matching replay" of the winning number 3 in FIG. 10 is established, the effect of aiming at the black 7 by the reverse push is performed to produce the black 7. By displaying it, it is possible to produce an effect that the CZ1 state to the CZ3 state have been exceeded. Since it does not change, it is treated in the same way as when Black 7 is displayed). In this case, in a situation where it is possible to break through the CZ1 state to the CZ3 state, during the scenario production of the CZ1 state to the CZ3 state, the effect of aiming at the black 7 by pushing back is cut in, and when the black 7 is displayed, the scenario effect is performed. You may forcibly terminate and rush into the AT, or you may continue the scenario production as it is and then rush into the AT. In addition, when the CZ1 state to the CZ3 state cannot be broken through, even if the above-mentioned winning number 3 is won, the batting order other than the reverse push is navigated without producing the effect of aiming at the black 7 by the reverse push. Black 7 may not be displayed by performing a navigation effect.
<16th Embodiment AT in progress state (additional specialization state)>

In the additional specialized state (main game state 8 which is AT4), the set is continued until a predetermined number of navigation effects such as 3 times are executed, and the set obtained over each game during the stay. An effect of notifying the number (for example, an effect of displaying that one set is acquired) is performed. In the present embodiment, the additional specialization state continues until the value of the navigation count counter (not shown) that manages the execution of the navigation effect becomes 0, and during this continuation, a set according to the winning combination is set over each game. The number of sets to stock the number is stocked (for example, the number of sets 0 to 3 is drawn according to the winning combination). When the value of the navigation count counter becomes 0 in this additional specialization state, the total number of sets acquired in the additional specialization state is displayed and the additional specialization state ends (see (10) in FIG. 250). ..

In addition, regarding the continuation of the additional specialized state, instead of the above-mentioned until the navigation effect is executed a predetermined number of times, the number of games is limited to a predetermined number, or after the navigation effect is completed a predetermined number of times or a predetermined game. After a few lapses, you may continue until the game where the small role etc. is out (in the case of a selected role, the navigation effect is not performed, if you can select it by yourself, continue, if not, end etc.) .. In this case, the predetermined number of navigation effects and the predetermined number of games are the minimum guaranteed sections in which the additional specialized state can be executed at the minimum. By doing this, even after the end of the predetermined number of navigation effects or the elapse of the predetermined number of games, if you continue to hit small roles and replays on your own (including successful selection), the additional specialization state will not end. , It is possible to expect a further addition of the number of additions due to the specialization state of addition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, in the additional specialization state, the number of additional sets according to the winning combination is drawn. Specifically, if the selection role or replay is the target of the navigation effect, at least one set is added (if the number of games is added, the number of games such as 5 games is added, and if the number of games is added, the number is 10 or the like. The same applies to the following.) In the case of a rare role, at least 3 sets can be added, and the rare role can obtain a larger number of additional sets. If "7" is won, a larger number of additional sets can be obtained. Further, in the effect display device S40, the character A is likely to appear when one set is added, and the character B is likely to appear when three sets are added, so that the effect according to the number of additions is executed. .. Needless to say, the relationship between the winning combination and the number of additional sets is not limited to the above-described embodiment and can be set as appropriate. In addition, if a rare role is won in a game after a predetermined number of navigation effects (including the number of games described above) have been executed in the additional specialization state, the predetermined number of navigation effects are given again. You may. In other words, it is possible to redo the additional specialization state. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

At the time of performing this addition, the effect display device S40 is subjected to an effect (see FIG. 263 for an image) for prompting the pressing of the sub-input button SB, and the player presses the sub-input button SB in accordance with this effect. As a result, the number of additional sets is displayed (see FIG. 292 (c)). In addition, as the operation mode of the sub input button SB, in addition to the simple pressing, the player is prompted to repeatedly hit or hold the button, and when the player repeatedly hits, the number of sets is added each time the player hits repeatedly. When the player presses and holds the button for a long time, the number of sets is added as the pressing time elapses. Further, in this additional specialization state, for example, when the "reverse push white 7 matching replay" of the winning number 2 in FIG. 10 is established, an effect of urging the player to aim at the white 7 by the reverse push is performed, and the player can perform the effect. When White 7 is aligned by pressing back, the number of additional sets as shown in FIG. 291 (c) is displayed. Even if the player fails to press White 7 by pushing backward, the winning number 2 in FIG. 10 is still won, so that the addition is made and FIG. 291 (FIG. 291) is added to the effect display device S40. The number of additional sets as shown in c) is displayed.

Further, when the additional specialization state ends, the number of sets acquired in the additional specialization state is set in a V set number counter (not shown) that manages the number of sets. That is, 3 is set in the navigation count counter at the start of the addition specialization state, the value of the navigation count counter is decremented each time the navigation effect is performed, and the addition specialization state ends when the value of the navigation count counter becomes 0. However, after that, the value of the number of navigations acquired in the additional specialization state is set in the V set number counter. In the present embodiment, three navigation effects are set as one set. For example, if the number of acquired sets is 5, this 5 is set in the V set number counter.

In this set number stock lottery, if the lottery target has 0 sets, the number of sets may be 0 at the end of the additional specialization state depending on the lottery result, but this is prevented. Therefore, for example, the number of sets 0 is removed from the lottery target so that the number of sets of 1 or more can always be obtained, or if the number of sets is 0 in the final game in the additional specialization state, the number of sets is forcibly 3 (Pre-set number of guaranteed sets.) Or, if there is a navigation effect in the additional specialized state, be sure to acquire one or more sets, etc. In the additional specialized state, be sure to We are trying to get the number of sets. Further, even when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during this additional specialization state, the point specialization state 1 in the non-AT state is entered (see (20) in FIG. 250).

Further, AT levels such as AT level 1, AT level 2, and AT level 3 are provided in this order with a high probability of being added during AT (in the additional lottery table used in the additional lottery, the probability of being added is high in this order). An AT level lottery to determine this AT level may be performed when the state shifts to the additional specialized state. This AT level setting is not limited to the case of shifting to the additional specialized state, and it is possible to set an appropriate timing, for example, to perform it together with a lottery to determine whether or not to break through the CZ1 state at the time of entering the advantageous section. Is. In short, any timing may be used as long as it is set by the time the AT is entered. Further, in the AT level lottery, for example, at AT level 1, an additional low-probability state, a high-probability state table, and the like, an additional low-probability state, a high-probability state, and the like are added to each AT level. At each AT level, you can switch between the low-probability state and the high-probability state by winning a rare role, or you can get a promotion lottery by a rare role while staying at AT level 1. , Promotion lottery by winning the additional lottery, promotion lottery at the timing of the end of 1 set, promotion lottery by the final game when 3 sets are continued, promotion lottery at the time of entering or ending the pseudo bonus, etc. It is also possible to shift between AT levels 1 to 3 by performing a promotion lottery by. This AT level is not limited to the level according to the high addition probability. For example, when the AT is a loop type that loops (continues) by winning the loop lottery, the loop probability is high or low. If the AT level is set according to the AT level, or if various additional modes with different expected added values are selected after the additional lottery, the lottery probability for the one with the higher expected additional value is increased. It may be an AT level. In short, in the AT, the AT level may be set for the high or low probability of the player shifting to an advantageous state.
<16th Embodiment AT in progress state (this AT state)>

After the addition specialization state is completed, the state shifts to the main AT state (main game state 6 which is AT5). In this AT state, the navigation effect is executed a number of times corresponding to the number of sets acquired in the additional specialized state (for example, 1 set x 6 sets = 18 times in 3 navigation effects). In the present embodiment, in the present AT state, the navigation effect of 3 times is set as one set, and the specification is such that the navigation is continued only in multiples of 3, 6, 9 ... Any multiple of 3 will be selected. Then, when the V set number counter becomes 0 (at this time, the navigation count counter in the BB state described later is 0 and the latent number is also 0), the AT state ends and the state shifts to the ST state (FIG. 250). (11). In addition, in this AT state, if a rare role is won, a lottery for adding the number of sets or a lottery for adding the number of navigations itself is performed, and if the player wins, the amount added is during the main AT. It is also possible to extend the condition.

In the present AT state, the specification may be such that the probability of the above-mentioned additional lottery fluctuates. For example, modes α, β, and γ (for the addition probability, α <β <γ) having different addition probabilities are provided, and a mode selection lottery for which mode α to β is started when the AT state is entered is selected. Then, the AT state is performed in the mode corresponding to the lottery result. Then, the winning of a rare role in this AT, each number of staying games (for example, every 10 games, etc.), each number of navigations (for example, every time there is a navigation effect 10 times, etc.), and each number of digestion sets (for example, 3) At the opportunity of taking (for each set, etc.), a mode selection lottery is performed to switch to a mode according to the selection lottery result, and the effect display device S40 explicitly or suggestively displays the mode in which the player is currently staying. You may try to do it. By doing so, in addition to digesting the navigation effect during AT, it is possible to impart ancillary playability and promote the motivation to play.

Further, when the additional lottery is won during the main AT, the additional points may be notified to the player by the same roulette effect as in the icon acquisition state. In this case, in the roulette effect in the icon acquisition state, it is only necessary to use an image displaying a plurality of points instead of the icon that is the target of the roulette, which facilitates the creation of the effect image and the like. can.
<16th Embodiment AT in progress state (ST state)>

In the ST state, during a predetermined number of games (for example, 7 games, etc.), in each game, according to the winning combination of the game, the above-mentioned set number stock lottery execution lottery is actually performed, although it is in the AT state. Above is a BB lottery to the BB state (main game state 6 which is AT8), which is a pseudo bonus that looks like a big bonus, a pull-back lottery to the CZ3 state (main game state 3 which is AT3), etc. The production according to these lottery results is executed. Specifically, in the ST state, first, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the player has won the ST, and if the player has not won the ST (out of ST), a pullback lottery (lottery for any of the pullback numbers 0 to 2) is performed, and the ST is won. If there is, the latency flag 0 to 2 that manages the transition of the latent state (0 is the execution lottery of the set number stock lottery without latency, 1 is the winning of the transition to the current AT state or more, 2 is the BB state You can win more than the transition) by lottery. The predetermined number of games in this ST state is managed by the ST game number counter, and when the ST game number counter becomes 0 (when the predetermined number of games is reached), the number of sets is 0 and the game is pulled back to the BB lottery. If the lottery is not won (pull-back number = 0), the AT-in-AT state ends and the game shifts to the non-AT-in-AT point-specialized 1 state (see (15) in FIG. 250).

In the present embodiment, the end condition of the ST state is the passage of a predetermined number of games (ST game number counter is 0), but instead of this, for example, even if a predetermined number of navigation effects are executed. It is good, or similar to the above-mentioned modified example of the additional specialized state, the number of navigations is displayed and the elapsed game is displayed with the ST state as the minimum guaranteed section that can be executed at the minimum until the predetermined number of navigations and the elapsed number of games. The number display is displayed in the first area SR1 or the like of the effect display screen S40 (note that it may be displayed in any area), and after that, it continues until the game in which the small role or the like is removed (in the case of an alternative role). It is also possible to prevent the navigation effect from being performed, and to continue if it can be selected by oneself, and to end if it cannot be done).

In the ST state, if the ST is won and the latent state 0 is won, the number of sets in the main AT state is drawn, and the ST end management flag that manages the end of the ST state (0 continues, 1 is). End) is set to 1. After that, the number of precursor games for notifying that the lottery for executing the set number stock lottery has been won is drawn, and the number of precursor games drawn is set in the precursor game counter (not shown) that manages the number of precursor games. .. During this number of precursor games, an effect suggesting that the state can be returned to the current AT state is executed, and an effect of shifting to the present AT state is performed in the final game or the like of the number of precursor games. Then, when the precursor game number counter reaches 0 (precursor end) or the ST game count counter reaches 1, the AT state is entered from the next game (see (14) in FIG. 250). Even during this number of precursor games, the scenario effect described in the above-mentioned CZ1 state or the like may be executed. Further, when the precursor game number counter becomes 0 or the ST game number counter becomes 1, a notification may be given by the effect display device, or the reel fluctuates specially when the player operates the stop switch. You may do so. Here, the special fluctuation means that the reel is temporarily stopped to rotate in the reverse direction, and after one lap, the symbol is stopped for the purpose, or the stopped reel is operated by 3 steps up and 3 steps down. Can be considered. The reel to be specially changed may be determined by lottery as appropriate.

In the ST state, if the ST is won and the latent state 1 or 2 is won, the ST end flag is set to 1 and the number of precursor games for performing an effect suggesting the transition to the latent state is drawn. It is decided by and set in the precursor game number counter. During this precursor game, an effect suggesting that the game shifts to the latent state is executed, and when the precursor game counter becomes 0 or the ST game counter becomes 1, the latent state (main game state which is AT7) is executed. 5) (see (15) in FIG. 250).

Further, in the ST state, if neither the execution lottery of the above-mentioned set number stock lottery nor the BB lottery (pseudo-bonus lottery) is won, the draw-back lottery to the CZ3 state (main game state 3 which is AT3) is drawn. I do. In this pullback lottery, as described above, any of the pullback numbers 0 to 2 is drawn. Then, when the pullback number is 1 or 2, an effect suggesting that the ST game number counter shifts to the CZ3 state is executed until the ST game number counter becomes 0, and then the shift to the CZ3 state is performed ((FIG. 250 (FIG. 250)). 16)). Even if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during this ST state, the process shifts to the point specialization state 1 in the non-AT state, which is the normal section (see (20) in FIG. 250).
<16th Embodiment AT in progress state (latent state)>

In the incubation state, depending on the incubation flag, 0 to the effect of winning the execution lottery of the set number stock lottery, 1 to the effect of winning the normal big bonus (for example, a bonus that continues for 30G), which is a pseudo bonus, 1 of the pseudo bonus However, the Hyper Big Bonus (for example, a bonus that continues for 60G), which is more advantageous than the Normal Big Bonus, is won, and the ending bonus (sometimes called the ending state) that continues until the end of the advantageous section is won. Any one of the advantageous state identification numbers 0 to 3 such as 3 to that effect is drawn. That is, when the latent flag is 1 (the state transition or more during this AT can be won), any one of the advantageous state identification numbers 0 to 3 is drawn, and the latent flag is 2 (BB state transition or more can be won). ), Any one of the advantageous state identification numbers 1 to 3 will be drawn.

When the advantageous state identification number 0 is won in the latent state, a lottery is performed for the number of sets in this AT state, and the ST end management flag (0 is continued, 1 is ended) that manages the end of the ST state is set to 1. Set to. Then, an effect or the like suggesting the transition to the present AT state is executed, and when the ST game number counter becomes 0, the transition to the present AT state is performed (see (17) in FIG. 250).

Here, before shifting to the main AT state, the value of the above-mentioned series increase counter is checked, and if this value is less than 2000 (sheets), the state shifts to the main AT state as it is, and this value is from 2000. If the value is also large, the game shifts to the ending state (main game state 9 which is AT9) which continues until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. That is, before shifting to the main AT state, it is checked how much difference the number of sheets is for reaching 2400 sheets, which is one of the end conditions of the advantageous section, and the ending state in the present AT state. If the threshold value for transition to is smaller than the predetermined value M (for example, 2000 sheets), the AT state is shifted as it is, and if it is larger than the predetermined value M, the ending state is shifted. Regarding this threshold value, in the present AT state, it is preferable that the value obtained by adding the number of game medals that can be obtained in the present AT state to the threshold value is less than 2400. In this case, it is possible to prevent the advantageous state such as the present AT state from ending by satisfying the advantageous section end condition in the middle of the advantageous state such as the present AT state.

In addition, in the latent state, when the advantageous state identification numbers 1 to 3 are won, the ST end management flag is set to 1, and then an effect suggesting the transition to one of the BB states or the like is executed. , When the ST game number counter becomes 0, if the advantageous state identification number is 1, it is one of the BB states, which is the normal big bonus (main game state 6 which is AT8), and if it is 2, it is one of the BB states. If it is a certain hyper big bonus (main game state 6 which is AT8) and 3, it shifts to the ending state (main game state 6 which is AT9) (see (17) in FIG. 250).

Before shifting to these bonuses, the value of the series of increase counters is checked in the same manner as before the transition to the AT state described above. In the case of the normal big bonus (advantageous state identification number 1), the threshold value of the series increase counter is 1800 (sheets), and in the case of the hyper big bonus (advantageous state identification number 2), the threshold value of the series increase counter is 1600 (sheets). ), If it is larger than these thresholds, it shifts to the ending state, and if it is less than these thresholds, it shifts to the normal big bonus (main game state 6 which is AT8) or hyper big bonus (main game state 6 which is AT8). do. As for these threshold values, as in the above, a value obtained by adding the number of game medals that can be obtained in each of the normal big bonus and the hyper big bonus to the threshold value is preferable. Further, in the present embodiment, the normal big bonus and the hyper big bonus are collectively set as AT8, but they may be managed as different AT states, and the main game corresponding to these bonuses may be managed. Needless to say, a state may be provided separately.

As for the ending state, since the AT continues until the end condition of the advantageous section, no additional lottery or the like is performed. For this reason, in the ending state, when the rare role is won, the effect that the rare role has been won is performed, but the effect related to the addition is not performed at all. Further, even if it is not in the ending state, the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined threshold value (for example, 2200 sheets) close to 2400 sheets, which is one of the end conditions of the advantageous section, or the game. In a specific threshold value (for example, 1400 games) in which the number of games staying in the section is close to 1500 games, which is one of the end conditions of the advantageous section, the additional lottery may not be performed.

Further, the predetermined threshold value and the specific threshold value are not limited to one. For example, if the predetermined threshold value of the difference number is 1800 sheets as the first predetermined threshold value, 2000 sheets as the second predetermined threshold value, and the third predetermined threshold value. 2200 sheets are set as the threshold value, and in the case of the first threshold value, a lottery for transition to the ending state is performed with a first predetermined probability, and in the second threshold value, a lottery for transition to the ending state is performed with a second predetermined probability higher than the first threshold value. And forcibly shift to the ending state at the third threshold, or switch to the lottery table where the addition probability is higher than the previous state when the first threshold is exceeded, and when the second threshold is exceeded, the first threshold It is also possible to perform a predetermined lottery or a predetermined process according to each threshold value, such as switching to a lottery table having a higher addition probability than in the case of. Regarding this, similarly, in the number of games in the advantageous section, the first threshold value (for example, 1000 games), the second threshold value (for example, 1200 games), and the third threshold value (for example, 1400 games) are set. Predetermined processing such as an additional lottery table corresponding to each threshold value, a lottery for shifting to the ending state, or a predetermined lottery may be performed.

Further, in the ending state, even the rare role is not added, so it is not desirable that the rare role appears in the ending state. A winning area for replays with different replay symbol combinations displayed depending on the batting order is provided, such as "7-matched replays". It is set to perform stop control to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the replay having symbols such as, and to perform stop control to stop the normal replay symbol combination when the reverse push, which is the second operation mode, is performed. (Set a so-called rare role replay), if this winning area is won when it is not in the ending state, perform a navigation effect to push forward and display a cherry on the left reel and add it as a rare role treatment On the other hand, in the ending state, the rare role of cherry may not be displayed from the player's point of view by performing a navigation effect to push backward. Regarding this, the design corresponding to the replay took cherry as an example from the player's point of view, but for this, the watermelon design etc. can be set as appropriate, and it is recognized as a rare role by the player. A symbol may be used. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the symbol corresponding to the rare role from being displayed in the ending state without addition, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss that the rare role has been pulled during the ending state. ..

Further, as described above, the conditions for shifting to the ending state are that when the lottery for shifting to the ending state is won or when the number of staying games in the advantageous section exceeds the predetermined number of games, the difference number in the gaming section is predetermined. It is not limited when the number of games is exceeded, and for example, the number of continuous games of AT acquired in the additional specialized state is based on the expected value of game medals per game in AT (net increase in number of games per game during AT). Then, in a state where the upper limit number of sheets, which is one of the end conditions of the advantageous section, is exceeded (for example, when the net increase number of sheets is 10, if 240 game AT continues, 10 sheets × 240 games = 2400 sheets. The end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.) Or, the number of remaining continuous games of AT added by the addition during AT and the expected value of the game medal will exceed the above upper limit. Even in the case of a situation, it is possible to shift to the ending state on the assumption that the condition for shifting to the ending state is satisfied. In short, it is sufficient to shift to the ending state when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during AT.

Further, in the additional specialization state, taking the case where the above-mentioned net increase number is 10 as an example, when the number of AT continuous games due to the addition exceeds 240 games, it does not make sense to add more. , The additional specialization state may be continued as it is, and finally, for example, 280 games and the number of games exceeding the end condition of the advantageous section in terms of the net increase number may be displayed, or the number of games exceeds 240 games. At that point, the additional specialization state may be forcibly terminated and the transition to the ending state may be made.

In addition, this latent state is also drawn in the above-mentioned main AT state and BB state), and in these main AT states and BB states, the latent number 1 or 2 is won, and the main AT state or BB state. When is completed, the state shifts to the latent state (see (12) in FIG. 250). In addition, even when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during this latent state, the point-specialized state 1 in the non-AT state is entered (see (20) in FIG. 250).
<16th embodiment non-AT state>

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 250 to 253, when the above-mentioned AT in-progress state (main game state 2 to 8) which is an advantageous section ends, in principle, the normal section which is a non-advantageous section is shifted to. As described in the flowchart of FIG. 255, when the advantageous section is won in this normal section, the game shifts to the main game state 1 which is the normal state in the advantageous section (see (1) in FIG. 250). In this normal state, the number of ceiling games determined in step S5206 of FIG. 255 is set. Further, in the normal state, if the AT direct hitting combination that directly shifts to the additional specialized state is not won, the state shifts to the CZ1 state (see (2) in FIG. 250). Further, in the normal state, when the AT direct hit role is won, the value of the winning game counter is forcibly set to 0 to shift to the additional specialized state ((3) in FIG. 250). )reference). In other words, in the normal state, it can be said that the number of games shortening lottery is performed to forcibly set the value of the winning game counter to 0. If you have a direct hit role, if you win the direct hit role in the normal state, the value of the winning game counter is forcibly set to 0, and the game shifts to the CZ1 state, the additional special state, or the ending state. You may try to do it.

The non-AT in-game state is a state in which the game is executed in the normal state in the normal section and the advantageous section, and the non-AT in-game state is basically executed until the winning game counter becomes 0. In addition, among the non-AT state, in the point specialization 2 state, the icon acquisition state, and the precursor state, in principle, the player stays in the normal state (main game state 1), but the point specialization 1 state and the sub normal state. In, there is a possibility of staying in a normal section or a normal state. That is, even if the AT in-progress state is terminated, the Xth advantageous section does not end, and after continuing to the middle of the point specialization 1 specialized state and the sub-normal state, it becomes a normal section, and then the X + 1th advantageous section becomes. A situation can occur in which it is initiated (more on this later).

Further, when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, as described in the flowchart of FIG. 256, it is also determined whether or not to shift to the additional specialized state via the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state. These information, that is, the value of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter in step S5308 in FIG. 256, the value of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter in step S5312 in the figure, and the presence / absence of transition to the CZ2 state by the CZ1 breakthrough flag in step S5314 in the figure. The main information (predetermined information) such as the presence / absence of transition to the additional specialization state by the CZ2 breakthrough flag in step S5316 is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. If there is such main information, the sub-control board S controls the non-AT state based on the main information, and if there is no main information, the sub-control board S controls the non-AT state based on a predetermined specific information. (This will be described later). The main information is not particularly limited as long as it is information necessary for controlling the non-AT state by the sub-control board S.
<16th embodiment non-AT in progress state (point specialization 1 state)>

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 266, when the AT ends, the point-specialized 1 state in the non-AT state is always entered. Specifically, it is as shown in FIG. 268, which is a flowchart showing the point specialization 1 state preparation process by the sub-control board S. That is, when the sub control board S receives the information (command) that all reels M50 have stopped in the final game of AT from the main control board M and the information that the AT in-progress state has ended (steps S6001 and S6002). ), The upper limit of the number of staying games in the point-specialized 1 state (for example, 30 (games)) is set in the point-specialized G number counter (not shown) that manages the number of staying games in the point-specialized 1 state, and non-AT. The effect state (effect game state) in the middle state is set to the point specialization 1 state (steps S6003 and S6004). As a result, in the non-AT state, the point specialization 1 state is entered.

In this point specialization 1 state, points (counter value) for acquiring an icon (first information) indicating information advantageous to the player regarding the transition to the main AT state such as increase in the breakthrough rate of CZ1 and CZ2 and confirmation of breakthrough. Is in a state where more can be obtained than in the sub-normal state, and a state dedicated to the point specialization 1 state is performed. In the first game of the point specialization 1 state, an eye-catching image indicating that the point specialization 1 state has been entered is displayed, and in this game, the point acquisition lottery is not performed, and from the second game. Point acquisition lottery is performed over a total of 29 games of 30 games, and in the final 30th game, the cumulative number of points obtained in this point specialization 1 state is displayed. Needless to say, the point acquisition lottery may be performed in the first game.

When points are acquired in this point specialization 1 state, as shown in FIG. 265, an effect indicating that the points have been acquired is executed on the effect display device S40. That is, the sub-control board S is performing a point acquisition lottery according to the winning combination of the game (for example, it is selected in the range of 0 to 1000 according to the winning combination), and the points obtained by this lottery are used. , Points are stored in a point counter (predetermined counter) (not shown) that manages points.

Further, in the point specialization 1 state, the sub-control board S performs a point acquisition lottery for obtaining a predetermined number of points for the same winning combination with a higher probability than in the sub-normal state. This can be achieved, for example, by providing a low point lottery table used in the sub-normal state and a high point lottery table having a higher probability of allocating a predetermined number of points or more than the low point lottery table. be. In addition, in the point specialization 1 state and the point specialization 2 state described later, points may be always obtained in each game, and even if the same point acquisition lottery is won, the sub-normal state may be used. Also, so that more points can be earned in the point specialization 1 state and the point specialization state 2 (for example, if the winning combination wins the point acquisition lottery corresponding to the bell, it is 1 point in the sub normal state. , 10 points in the point specialization 1 state and the point specialization 2 state, etc.). In short, in the point specialization 1 state and the point specialization 2 state, it is sufficient that points can be obtained more advantageously than the sub normal state.

Further, in the final game in the point specialization 1 state (counter value of the point specialization G number counter is 1), the value becomes higher than the upper limit value (for example, 1000 points. In FIG. 266, it is described as 1000pt) which is the upper limit of points. If it is (more than pt1000), it shifts to the icon acquisition state. In this icon acquisition state, the effect table device S40 or the like executes a roulette effect or the like in which a plurality of icons are rotated and displayed like a roulette icon to indicate that the icon that is finally stopped is the acquired icon, and the player is informed of the roulette effect. The acquired icon is notified (this will also be described later).

In addition to the above-mentioned roulette effect, the effect in the icon acquisition state is, for example, as shown in FIG. 267, a battle effect similar to the above-mentioned CZ1 state is performed, and the ally character wins in this battle effect. An icon corresponding to the enemy character, for example, in FIG. 267, the icon "heat!" May appear to notify the player of the acquired icon. Further, the damage given to the enemy character in this battle effect may be suggested to be set in the same manner as in the above-mentioned battle effect. In short, it is sufficient if the effect is such that the player can be notified of the icon to be acquired.

Further, in the point specialization 1 state, a plurality of stages and characters appearing are prepared, for example, the stage B is better than the stage A, or the character B is better than the character A until the next CZ1 state. The number of games required for the game may be short, suggesting the length of the number of games required until the next CZ1 state, or setting suggestion depending on the stage or character.

Further, for example, the number of games that shift to the CZ1 state in either the maximum number of ceiling games (for example, 900 games) or the first number of games section (for example, 200 games, 500 games, etc.) (hereinafter). Mode A in which the number of unlocked games can be easily selected, the maximum number of ceiling games shorter than this mode A (for example, 600 games), or the second game section (for example, 150 games to 250 games, 350 to 450 games, etc.) ), The maximum number of ceiling games shorter than this mode B (for example, 400 games), or the third game section (for example, 150-200 games, 250 games-). Mode C in which the number of released games is easily selected in any of (300 games, etc.), Mode D in which the number of released games is selected in any of up to a predetermined number of games (for example, 250 games) lower than Mode C, this mode D Mode E, in which the number of unlocked games is selected by any of the lower specific number of games (for example, 100 games), the maximum ceiling is the same as in mode C, but when the number of unlocked games is reached, it goes directly to AT without going through CZ. When there are a plurality of modes A to E such as the mode E to be shifted, it may be suggested which mode is used according to the above-mentioned stage or character.

Further, if the sub input button SB is pressed after all the reels have stopped in the end game in the point specialization 1 state and before the start of the next game, for example, the second predetermined area SR2 of the effect display device S40 ( It goes without saying that any area may be used), and the above-mentioned mode suggestion, setting suggestion, etc. are performed by displaying an image imitating a card associated with the above-mentioned modes A to E. You may.

The control by the sub-control board S related to such a point specialization 1 state is shown in FIGS. 269 and 270. Note that FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing processing by the sub-control board S when the lever is pressed in the point specialization 1 state (point specialization-related lever processing), and FIG. 270 is a flowchart at the time of final stop in the point specialization 1 state. It is a flowchart which shows the processing by the sub-control board (the processing at the time of all stop related to a point specialization).

When the sub control board S receives information from the main control board M that the start lever D50 has been pressed in the point specialization 1 state (step S6101), the point specialization G number counter (in FIG. 269, simply "counter". (Notation) is the upper limit of the number of staying games in the point specialization 1 state, in other words, the initial value of the point specialization 1 state (for example, 30 (game) as described above) (step S6102). If Yes), the process proceeds to step S6103, and if it is not the initial value (No in step S6102), the process proceeds to step S6107.

When the counter value of the point specialization G number counter is the initial value, the game has entered the point specialization 1 state, and the sub-control board S has entered the point specialization 1 state. The rush screen command related to the screen, the point specialized background command related to the background of the point specialized 1 state, the IF command related to various effects executed in the point specialized 1 state, etc. are transmitted to the effect display device S40 or the like. (Step S6103, step S6104). Further, since it is determined that the sub-control board S displays the above-mentioned entry screen when entering the point specialization 1 state, for example, in a game that has entered the point specialization 1 state, it is rare. In order to prevent the effect related to this from being executed by winning the role, etc., after executing the limited process (limited without effect) to limit the effect to be executed only to the above-mentioned rush screen-related (step S6105), the point special A process of subtracting 1 from the counter value of the G number counter is executed (step S6106). Regarding the limited processing, for example, the selected image is limited to the above-mentioned rush screen or the like, or even if the winning combination such as a rare role is won, the production lottery based on the winning combination is prohibited. Can be done by As a result, when the point specialization 1 state is entered, a unique effect at the time of entry such as the entry screen or the like is executed by the effect display device S40 or the like.

On the other hand, when the counter value of the point specialization G number counter in the point specialization 1 state is not the initial value, that is, when the point specialization 1 state is in the state, the sub-control board S is assigned according to the winning combination. An effect table that determines and executes a point addition process for determining and adding points (step S6107), and determines an effect table for drawing an effect (an effect unique to the point specialization 1 state, etc.) according to the points to be given. The determination process is executed (step S6108). Then, the sub-control board S executes the same process as in step S6104 in step S6109, and executes a process of drawing an effect pattern from the above-mentioned effect table (S6110). As a result, in the effect display device S40 or the like, as shown in FIG. 265, an effect or the like indicating that the points have been obtained is executed.

Next, the point specialization-related all-stop processing of the sub-control board S according to the flowchart of FIG. 270 will be described. When the sub-control board S receives information from the main control board M that all reels M50 have stopped in the point specialization 1 state (step S6130), points (points given to the player) are added to be described later. The point addition process is executed (step S6131). After this addition processing, when the point specialization G number counter is 1, that is, when it is the final game in the point specialization 1 state (Yes in step S6132), the sub-control board S has the point specialization 1 state. Set the end of the state (step S6133).

On the other hand, when the point-specific G-number counter is not 1 (No in step S6132), the sub-control board S determines whether or not the point-specific G-number counter is not 0 in step S6134, that is, points-specialized. It is determined whether one state is completed or one state specializing in points is in progress. If it is determined in step S6134 that the number of point specialization G is not 0 and the point specialization 1 state is in progress (No in step S6134), the production state (effect game state) is changed to the point specialization 1 state. The process of setting is executed (step S6135).

Further, when the point specialization G number counter is 0, in other words, when the point specialization 1 state is completed (Yes in step S6134), the sub control board S is in the icon acquisition state. , When the roulette flag (0 is no execution or cannot be executed, 1 is executed once, 2 is executed twice) that manages the execution of the above-mentioned roulette effect indicating that the icon has been acquired is 1 or more, that is, When the roulette effect is executed (Yes in step S6136), the roulette effect activation process, which is the process of activating the roulette effect, is executed (step S6137).

Further, when the roulette flag is not 1 or more (when the roulette flag is 0), that is, when the roulette effect is not executed (No in step S6136), the sub-control board S has the point specialization 1 state. A turning point stechen lottery, which is a lottery for the production stage to stay in the sub-normal state that shifts after the end, is performed, and the production state corresponding to this lottery is set (steps S6138 and S6139). In addition, as the end condition of this point specialization 1 state, not only the above-mentioned predetermined number of games but also a fall lottery for ending the point specialization 1 state is performed in each game, and the fall lottery is won. It may be terminated based on the above, and the termination condition is not particularly limited.
<16th embodiment non-AT in progress state (sub-normal state)>

In the sub-normal state, the player stays in one of a plurality of types of normal stages, and these normal stages are appropriately changed according to the number of staying games in the sub-normal state. In the present embodiment, in each of these normal stages, the specialization transition lottery is performed by the lottery tables having different winning probabilities of the specialization transition lottery, and the points specialization 2 state is set according to the stay stage. Expectations for the transition are different. Even if you are staying at the same stay stage, the expected value of transition to the point specialization 2 state is different in the order of day background, evening background, and night background (in this order, the probability of winning the special transition lottery is high). A table may be used).

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of games (for example, 150 games, 250 games, 350 games, etc.) is reached after the sub-normal state is started, an effect suggesting a transition to the CZ1 state is performed, and the effect is performed. Move to this precursor stage. In addition, in the predetermined number of games before the transition to the precursor stage (for example, in the case of transitioning to the precursor stage in 150 games, from 120 games 30 games before, etc.), the transition to the precursor stage is performed. Move to the pre-precursor stage where suggestive productions are performed. Further, the present precursor stage may shift to the true precursor stage in which the expected value of transition to the CZ1 state is higher than that of the present precursor stage.

These pre-precursor stages, main precursor stages, and true precursor stages perform productions according to each stage over a plurality of games. In each of these pre-precursor stage, main precursor stage, and true precursor stage, the above-mentioned scenario production in which a predetermined story progresses according to the number of staying games of the precursor is executed. In the pre-precursor stage, the main precursor stage, and the true precursor stage, respectively, the number of staying games is managed by the pre-precursor counter, the main precursor counter, and the true precursor counter, and the counter value of each counter is, for example. When it becomes 0 (the final game of the scenario effect, etc.), a judge effect or the like is executed to notify the player whether or not the state can be changed to the CZ1 state.

The number of games (stay period) of these precursor stages may be selected from, for example, 30 games, 35 games, or 40 games at a predetermined timing, or may be randomly selected from 30 to 40 games. It is decided by doing. The predetermined timings include, for example, the timing of pressing the start lever of the game before the game to enter each precursor stage, the timing of stopping all reels, or the pressing of the start lever when shifting to an advantageous section. The time and the timing when all reels are stopped can be mentioned, and the point is that any timing may be used as long as it is decided before entering the precursor stage. Further, as explained in the scenario production of the CZ1 state and the like described above, for example, when the precursor ends in 30 games, there is a high possibility of shifting to the CZ1 state. It is also possible to indicate the expected value of transition to the state, or to suggest a setting such as suggesting a high setting when the precursor ends in a doublet such as 33 games.

In these pre-precursor stage, main precursor stage, and true precursor stage, when the effect of shifting to the CZ1 state is made, the stage shifts to the CZ1 state, and when the effect of not shifting to the CZ1 state is made, the normal stage is performed. It is designed to move to one of the stages. Needless to say, the above-mentioned various stages in the sub-normal state are not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and can be appropriately set according to the model specifications and the like. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the true precursor stage in the present precursor stage, an effect suggesting that the transition to the true precursor stage may be performed during the present precursor stage may be performed.

In such a sub-normal state, as shown in FIG. 271, in any stage, a point acquisition lottery is performed according to the winning combination in each game, and when points are acquired, the points are displayed in the point counter. While being added, the effect that points have been acquired by the effect display device S40 or the like is performed (see FIG. 265). When this point becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1000 points) or more, 1000 points are subtracted from the total points stored in the point counter while setting the point flag which is the transition flag to the icon acquisition state. For example, if 1230 points are stored in the point counter, by subtracting 1000 points from it, the value of the point counter becomes 230 points, and in the state where this is taken over as it is, the subsequent sub-game state etc. It is supposed to progress.

Further, even in the point specialization 1 state and the point specialization 2 state, when the points exceed a predetermined value, the roulette flag (hereinafter, also referred to as a point flag, for example, is expressed as a point flag in FIG. 271). .) Is set, and the state shifts to the icon acquisition state. In the present embodiment, if you are staying in any of the normal stages, you can immediately shift to the icon acquisition state, and while shifting to the icon acquisition state in the next game where the point flag is set, it is a pre-precursor. If you are staying in the stage, the main precursor stage, the true precursor stage, the special precursor stage (this will be described later), the point specialization 1 state and the point specialization 2 state, the transition to the icon acquisition state will be made. It is on hold, and it is designed to shift to the icon acquisition state after the next game when these stages and states have ended.

Therefore, after the point flag is set, a convenient timing according to the stay stage (as described above, in the case of the normal stage, the next game in which the point flag is set, and in the case of various precursor stages, this precursor stage is set. In the next game that has ended, if it is in the point specialization 1 state and the point specialization 2 state, the next game in which these states have ended, etc.) will shift to the icon acquisition state, the roulette effect will be executed, and it will be acquired by this roulette effect. Notify the player of the icon. As shown in FIG. 292 (a), the acquired icon is displayed in the first predetermined area SR1 on the upper right of the effect display device S40. A plurality of these icons can be acquired, and when a plurality of icons (up to 5 in the present embodiment) are acquired, they are displayed side by side in a predetermined area of the effect display device S40.
<16th embodiment point addition process>

Next, the processing by the sub-control board S regarding the acquisition of points will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 272 and 273. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing a process related to point acquisition when the lever is pressed according to the subroutine of step S6108 of FIG. 269. When the start lever D50 is pressed, the sub-control board S executes a specialization shift lottery for whether or not to shift to the point specialization 2 state (step S6201 and step S6202). In this specialization transition lottery, for example, a special direct hitting role that directly shifts to the point specialization 2 state may be provided, such as the above-mentioned CZ direct hitting role or AT direct hitting role, or the lottery probability according to the winning combination. (Rare roles have a higher probability of winning than small roles and replays, etc.).

If the specialization transition lottery is won and it is decided to shift to the point specialization 2 state (Yes in step S6203), the sub-control board S manages the transition to the point specialization 2 state. The process of setting the status flag (0 means no migration, 1 means migration) to 1 is executed (step S6204). Next, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned AT direct hit combination (the processing is the same even if there is a CZ direct hit combination. The same applies hereinafter) has not been won. That is, in this embodiment, the point acquisition lottery is not performed after winning the AT direct hit role, and when this direct hit role is won, the main control board M wins this direct hit role. Information that the number of games is forcibly reduced to 0 (information for shortening the number of sub-Gs) is transmitted. Upon receiving this information, the sub control board S sets the sub G number shortening flag (0 is no G number reduction and 1 is G number reduction) to the effect that the number of winning games is forcibly reduced to 0. It has become like.

Then, when the sub G number shortening flag is not 1, in other words, when the AT direct hit combination is won and the number of winning games is not forcibly set to 0 (No in step S6205), the sub control board S Executes a point acquisition lottery (point addition lottery) (step S6206). When the points (winning pt) are obtained by winning the point acquisition lottery (Yes in step S6207), the process of adding the points and the value stored in the point counter (points obtained so far) is executed. Then, a process of storing the temporary counter value, which is the total number of temporary points currently acquired, in the temporary point counter (not shown) is executed (step S6208).

The temporary counter value of the stored temporary point counter is 1000 (points) or more (Yes in step S6209), and an additional parameter flag (a flag indicating whether or not the icon can be displayed), which will be described later, indicates that the icon can be displayed. When all the states (1 is a state without an icon, 2 is a state with one icon, etc.) are 0 (Yes in step S6210), the process of setting the temporary counter value to 0 is executed (step). S6212).

That is, as a result of winning the point acquisition lottery in step S6203, even if the points reach a predetermined value (1000 points) for shifting to the icon acquisition state, no more icons can be acquired (for example, CZ1 state or AT). If an icon indicating that the transition to the state is confirmed is displayed and there is no point in acquiring any more icons), reset the temporary counter value to 0 so that the icon cannot be acquired. There is. In this case, in the effect display device S40, an effect indicating that the point acquisition has failed is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the points for acquiring this icon from reaching a predetermined value in a state where the icon cannot be displayed, and even though the points of the predetermined value are accumulated. , It is possible to avoid the situation where the icon is not given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of loss.

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing a process related to point acquisition at the time of total stop according to the subroutine of step S6131 of FIG. 270. When all the reels 50M are stopped, the temporary counter value is not 0, and the predetermined value of 1000 points has not been reached (No in step S6222, No in step S6223), the sub-control board S is elected. The winning pt command for displaying the points is transmitted to the effect display device S40 or the like (step S6224). Then, the sub-control board S adds (substitutes) the value of the temporary counter value to the point counter, and executes a process of resetting the temporary counter value to 0 (step S6225 and step S6226).

If the temporary counter value is not 0 and is 1000 points or more, which is a predetermined value (No in step S6222, Yes in step S6223), the sub-control board S is stored in the temporary point counter. A predetermined value (1000 points) is subtracted from the total points, and a counter reaching command indicating that the points have reached the predetermined value and a command indicating that the execution of the roulette effect is stocked are transmitted (steps S6227 to 6229).
<16th embodiment non-AT in progress state (point specialization 2 state)>

Next, the point specialization 2 state will be described. The point specialization 2 state continues for a predetermined number of games (the number of continuous games), and during the predetermined number of games, each game is point-specialized to the effect that points are obtained as shown in FIG. 265. It is a state in which an effect dedicated to two states is executed. In this point specialization 2 state, for example, in the case of character A, 10 points are easily given, and in the case of character B, 30 points are easily given. Then, the characters selected by the character selection lottery according to the acquired points (the lottery table in which character A is easily selected in the case of 10 points and the lottery table in which character B is easily selected in the case of 30 points are used) are shown in the figure. By displaying the effect on the effect display device S40 before the effect indicating that the points have been obtained as shown in 265, an effect such as giving a prior suggestion of the points to be given to the player is performed. The number of continuous games in the point specialization 2 state is determined by, for example, being selected by lottery from either 6 games or 12 games, or being selected by lottery from 6 to 12 games. .. The number of continuous games is managed by a specialized stay counter (not shown).

Regarding the point specialization 2 state, for example, when the point specialization 2 state ends, a so-called loop lottery is performed to decide whether or not to restart the point specialization 2 state, and the process is repeated until the loop lottery is lost. The point specialization 2 state may be performed. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the loop probability, so that the player can expect that the higher the number of loops, the higher the loop probability. In this case, a loop number ceiling is provided to forcibly remove the loop lottery when the number of loops reaches a predetermined number, or the number of points exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 1000 points where one icon can be acquired). Then, the addition of excessive points may be suppressed by adopting a measure such as forcibly terminating the loop in the extra specialization 2 state that exceeds the limit.

In addition, in the point specialization 2 state, points can always be earned for each game over the number of continuous games, and at least a predetermined point (for example, 10 points) or more can be earned. There is. Of the number of continuous games in the point specialization 2 state, in the first game, an eye-catching image indicating that the point specialization 2 state has been entered is displayed, and in this game, the point acquisition lottery is not performed and the second game. Points are earned for each game over a total of 5 games from 1 to 6 games, and in the final 6th game, the cumulative number of points obtained in this point specialization 2 is displayed. Needless to say, the point acquisition lottery may be performed in the first game.

Further, in the point acquisition lottery in this point specialization 2 state, an ultra-high point table that can always acquire a predetermined point or more is used, and it is in a state where it is easier to acquire points than in the sub normal state or the point specialization 1 state. In summary, in the point specialization 2 state, the point of transition from the sub normal state, the point that the production dedicated to the point specialization 2 state is performed, and the expected value of point acquisition than the point specialization 1 state High points etc. are different from the point specialization 1 state.

In the present embodiment, the expected value of point acquisition is higher than that of the point specialization 1 for the point specialization 2 state, but instead, the high point table used in the point specialization 1 state is used. May be used to make the expected value of point acquisition in the point specialization 2 state the same as that in the point specialization 1 state. In short, it suffices if it is easier to earn points than in the sub-normal state.

As shown in FIG. 274, which is also a diagram explaining the process from the sub-normal state to the point specialization 2 state, the point specialization 2 is achieved by winning the specialization transition lottery related to the point specialization 2 state in the sub normal state. Move to the state. In this specialization transition lottery, for example, as in the case of the above-mentioned CZ direct hitting role or AT direct hitting role, the winning or not of the specialized direct hitting role that directly shifts to the point specialization 2 state is drawn, or the rare role or the like is used as an opportunity. It is possible to perform a lottery for transition to the point specialization 2 state with a predetermined probability, or by an appropriate lottery.

If you win this special direct hit lottery, you will set a point special 2 state flag to the effect that you will move to the point special 2 state, and you will move to the point special 2 state over multiple predetermined games. After going through the specialization precursor stage that suggests that, it shifts to the point specialization 2 state. The number of games (stay period) of this specialized precursor stage can be determined in the same manner as in the case of the various precursor stages described above. It should be noted that the specification of this specialization precursor may be the same as that of the scenario production such as the above-mentioned CZ1 state.

Regarding the transition from the sub-normal state to the point specialization 2 state, in the sub normal state, one of the conditions is that you are staying in the normal stage (this will be described later), and you can shift to the specialization precursor, and point specialization. While it is possible to shift to the specialization precursor from the next game on which the 2 status flag is set, if you are staying in the pre-precursor stage, the main precursor stage, or the true precursor stage, the point specialization 2 status After the next game in which the transition to is suspended and these precursor stages are completed (the game may be the next game of the end game of the precursor stage, or may be after multiple games from the end game), the special precursor It is a specification to move to the stage.

Therefore, after the point specialization 2 state flag is set, a convenient timing according to the stay stage (in the case of the normal stage as described above, the next game in which the point specialization 2 state flag is set, various precursors If it is a stage, after the next game when this precursor stage ends, if it is the point specialization 1 state and the point specialization 2 state, after the next game when these states end, etc.), it shifts to the special precursor stage, and special After the premonition stage is over, it shifts to the point specialization 2 state.

During the number of continuous games in the point specialization 2 state, when the point reaches a predetermined value (1000 points, which is expressed as 1000 pt in FIG. 274), which is a condition for shifting to the icon acquisition state, the point specialization After the two states are completed, the state shifts to the icon acquisition state and the roulette effect is performed. Here, even if the points reach a predetermined value during the point specialization 2 state, the point specialization 2 state continues for the remaining number of continuous games, and the points obtained here are carried over as they are. ing. On the other hand, at the end of the point specialization 2 state, if the points are less than the above-mentioned predetermined values, the game returns to the sub-game state. In the present embodiment, even if the points reach a predetermined value in the middle of the point specialization 2 state, the point specialization 2 state continues as it is. For example, when the points reach the predetermined value, the point specialization 2 state continues. You may end the state and shift to the icon acquisition state.
<16th embodiment point specialization 2 state-related processing>

Next, the related processing of the point specialization 2 state by the sub-control board S will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 275 to 277. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the point-specific 2 state-related processing according to the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 275, after all reels M50 are stopped, if the icon acquisition state is not in progress or the point specialization 2 state (indicated as “specialization 2 state” in FIG. 275) is not in the state (step S6301). No in step S6302, No in step S6303), and the same point addition process as in step S6107 of FIG. 269 is executed (step S6304).

Further, when all reels M50 are not in the icon acquisition state but in the point specialization 2 state after all reels M50 are stopped (No in step S6301 and step S6302, Yes in step S6303), the point specialization 2 described later The state processing is executed (step S6305). After these point addition processing or point specialization 2 state processing, the roulette flag that manages the execution of the above-mentioned roulette effect that the icon has been acquired (0 is no execution, 1 is executed once, 2 is executed twice) ) Is less than 1 (No in step S6306), the special precursor set process described later is executed (step S6307).

On the other hand, when the roulette flag that manages the execution of the above-mentioned roulette effect that the icon has been acquired is 1 or more (Yes in step S6306) after the point addition processing or the point specialization 2 state processing, the sub-control board S transmits a roulette stock command to stock the roulette effect to the effect display device S40 or the like, executes the roulette activation process for activating the roulette effect, and then uses the point value obtained in the point addition process as the point counter. A process of transmitting as a point counter value command for storing is executed (steps S6308 to 6310).

FIG. 276 is a flowchart of the point-specific two-state processing (at the time of lever) according to the subroutine of step S6305 of FIG. 275. First, in the next game of the game in step 6301 of FIG. 275, if the start lever D50 is pressed (Yes in step S6321), the process proceeds to step S6322, and if the start lever D50 is not pressed, the process proceeds to step S6322. The process proceeds to step 6342 of FIG. 277. In step S6322, when the value of the special stay counter that manages the number of continuous games in the point special 2 state is 6 (special stay counter = 6), which is the upper limit of the number of continuous games in the point special 2 state. In other words, in the case of the first game in the point specialization 2 state (the entry game in the point specialization 2 state) (Yes in step S6322), the sub-control board S has entered the point specialization 2 state. Specialized 2 rush eye-catching command to display the eye-catching image of, and special 2 background command to display the background image when entering the point-specialized 2 state. , Sent to the effect display device S40 and the like (step S6323, step S6325). Further, in the rush game in the point specialization 2 state, the sub-control board S is here in order not to execute another effect due to winning the rare role or the like, as in step S6105 of FIG. 269. Executes a limited process that limits the effect to be executed only to the entry screen related to the point special 2 state, and executes the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the special stay counter (the value of the special stay counter becomes 6 to 5). (Step S6325, step S6326).

In addition, the value of the special stay counter is less than 6 (when the point special 2 is in the middle state), and the sub-G number shortening flag is not 1 (as explained in step S6225 of FIG. 272), the AT direct hit role is won. If the number of winning games is not forcibly set to 0) and the number of winning games counter (denoted as the winning G number counter in FIG. 276) is not 0 (No in step S6322, No in step S6327, step S6328). No), the sub-control board S executes the same point addition process as in step S6107 of FIG. 269 (step S6329). After that, the sub-control board S transmits a specialization 2 background command for displaying the background image related to the point specialization 2 to the effect display device S40 or the like, and the sub-control board S is displayed in the point specialization 2 on the front side of the background image. The effect, that is, the process of determining the effect of notifying the player of the points obtained as a result of the point addition process in step S6329 (for example, the effect of obtaining points as shown in FIG. 265) by lottery is executed. (Step S6330, step S6331).

Further, when the value of the special stay counter is less than 6 and the sub-G number shortening flag is 1 (No in step S6332, Yes in step S6327), that is, in the point specialization 2 state, the AT direct hit is used. If you win and the number of winning games becomes 0 forcibly, you need to shift to AT (in this case, additional specialization state) from the next game, and end the point specialization 2 state in this game. In order to make the special stay counter forcibly set to 1 which is the final game of the point specialization 2 state (step S6332), the process of resetting the sub G number shortening flag to 0 is executed (step S6333). .. In this way, if it is decided to shift to AT by lottery on the main control board M side during the point specialization 2 state, the number of staying games in the point specialization 2 state is forcibly set as the final game. As a result, the main game state of the main control board M can be quickly synchronized with the main game state, and the main game state and the sub game state can be surely matched.

After that, the sub-control board S transmits a special 2 background command for displaying a background image corresponding to the final game in the point special 2 state to the effect display device S40 or the like, and also sends a sub input button (effect button) to the player. ) An effect of displaying a button image such as "PUSH" for prompting the pressing of the SB is executed (step S6334, step S6335). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of button images having different expectations for shifting to AT (different expectations for shifting to an advantageous state), specifically, ordinary buttons used for switching scenes and the like. Image (see Fig. 263), big button image with high expectation of AT transition, larger than normal button image, button image with high expectation of AT transition, different color from normal button image (depending on color) The degree of expectation may be different, or the transition of AT may be confirmed), and in step S6335, a deca button image (deca PUSH) is displayed.

Then, the sub-control board S indicates that the transition to the CZ1 state or the like is confirmed by the player pressing the sub-input button SB, and is a production having a lower appearance probability than other productions, and is specific. A premier cut-in process for producing a premier cut-in image, such as an effect in which an image of the character cut-in is displayed, is executed (step S6336).

FIG. 277 is a flowchart of the point-specific 2 state processing (when all are stopped) according to the subroutine of step S6305 of FIG. 275. First, if all reels M50 are stopped (Yes in step S6341), the process proceeds to step S6342, and if not, the process proceeds to step S6322 of FIG. 276. In step S6342, the sub-control board S executes the same point addition process as in step S6107 of FIG. 269. After that, when the specialization counter is not 0 and the roulette flag is 1 or 2 (No in step S6343, Yes in step S6345), the sub-control board S activates the roulette as in step S6309 of FIG. 275. The process is executed (step S6346).

Further, when the specialization counter is not 0 and the roulette flag is 0 (No in step S6343, No in step S6345), the sub-control board S has a predetermined effect peculiar to the point specialization 2 (for example,). A process of ending (clearing) the state in which the image of FIG. 265 is displayed and the state in which an effect (such as an effect effect for displaying an effect such as blinking around the image) is appearing is executed (step S6347). Then, the Fuku control board S performs a stechen lottery of which normal stage to stay in (which normal stage to change to) in the sub-normal game after the point specialization 2 state is completed, and responds to the lottery result. The process of setting the effect state related to the normal stage is performed (step S6348, step S6349).

Next, the specialization precursor stage related to be performed before the transition from the sub-normal state to the above-mentioned point specialization 2 state will be described. FIG. 278 is a diagram for explaining the process of transition from the sub-normal state to the point-specific 2 state according to the 16th embodiment. In the present embodiment, the specialization precursor stage is continuously performed for a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games), and when all the reels M50 are stopped, the specialization precursor stage (in FIG. 278, "special". If it is possible to shift to the precursory game, the next game is the precursory first game, the next game is the precursory second game, and the next game (next-next game) is the precursory third game (precursor final game). ), Then move to the specialization precursor stage. In this specialization precursor stage, the specifications may be the same as those for the scenario production such as the CZ1 state described above.

The specialization precursor set processing related to this specialization precursor stage set will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 279. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing a specialization precursor set process according to the subroutine of step S6307 of FIG. 275. After all the reels M50 are stopped, the sub-control board S executes an existing state transition process such as presence / absence of transition of the effect stage according to the situation at that time (step S6361 and step S6362).

After that, the sub-control board S has the point specialization 2 state flag (Yes in step S6363), stays in the normal stage (No in step S6364), and the count values of the main precursor counter and the true precursor counter. Are equal to or greater than the predetermined values (20 in FIG. 279) (No in step S6365, No in step S6366), and the effect is not in the predetermined effect state in which the effects used for the effects such as continuous effect and roulette effect are executed. On condition (step S6367), the special precursor counter that manages the number of staying games in the specialized precursor stage is the maximum value of the number of staying games in the specialized precursor stage 3 (in other words, the beginning of the specialized precursor stage). (Value indicating that it is a game of specialization) is set, and it is set that the production state is 3 games before the transition to the point specialization 2 state (specialization precursor 3G) (specialization precursor set processing), and the point special 2 The state flag is reset to 0 (steps S6368 to 6370). Needless to say, the number of games staying in the special precursor stage is not limited to the above-mentioned three games, and can be set as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the values of the main precursor counter and the true precursor counter are checked in steps S6365 and 6366 (in other words, the present precursor counter and the true precursor counter are each equal to or more than a predetermined value. It is one of the conditions for performing the specialization precursor set processing) for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the scenario production is performed in each of the book precursor and the book precursor whose number of staying games is managed by the book precursor counter and the true book precursor counter. In this scenario production, it is necessary to secure a sufficient number of games (20 games in this example) to execute a story of a mass flow, and if this number of games cannot be secured (less than 20 in this example). By not performing the set processing of the specialization precursor, the transition to the point specialization 2 state is suspended (delayed). In the present embodiment, when the CZ1 state is reached as it is in the main precursor stage or the true precursor stage, the point specialization 2 state is extinguished, but it may not be extinguished. Of course it is possible.

Further, in step S6363, the specialization 2 state flag is set to 0 by the above-mentioned step S6370 or the like (No in step S6363), the counter value of the specialization precursor counter is not 0 (No in step S6371), and the specialization If the counter value of the precursor counter is 3 (Yes in step S6372), 2 (the number of games in the middle of the precursor) is set in the special precursor counter, and the production state shifts to the point special 2 state. The process of setting that it is two games before (specialization precursor 2G) is executed (step S6373, step S6374).

Similarly, when the counter value of the specialization precursor counter is 2 instead of 3 (No in step S6372, Yes in step S6375), the sub-control board S stays in the specialization precursor counter in the specialization precursor stage. Set the minimum number of games, 1 (in other words, the value indicating that it is the last game of the specialization precursor stage), and one game before the transition state to the point specialization 2 state (specialization precursor). (Last) is executed (step S6376, step S6377).

Then, when the counter value of the specialization precursor counter is not 2, in other words, when this counter value is 2 (No in step S6375), the sub-control board S sets the specialization precursor counter to 0 (in other words). If so, set the value indicating that the specialization precursor stage has been completed), set the production state to the point specialization 2 state, and set the specialization stay counter to the number of stay games in the point specialization 2 state (in this example). , 6) is executed (steps S6378 to 6380).
<Specifications related to the 16th embodiment icon>

Next, the specifications related to the icon will be described. First, in the present embodiment, the types of icons that can be acquired are listed below.
(1) Icon indicating the addition of the CZ1 state breakthrough rate (1-1) The icon indicating that the first value (for example, 5%) is added to the CZ1 state breakthrough rate, which is shown in FIG. 280. An icon that is described as 1st in and is displayed in a format in which the characters of 1st are yellow (hereinafter referred to as "1st yellow").
(1-2) It is an icon indicating that the addition of the breakthrough rate in the CZ1 state is a second value (for example, 10%) larger than the first value, and is described as 1st in the circle shown in FIG. 280. An icon that is displayed in a format in which the 1st character is green (hereinafter referred to as "1st green").
(1-3) It is an icon indicating that the addition of the breakthrough rate in the CZ1 state is a third value (for example, 20%) larger than the second value, and is described as 1st in the circle shown in FIG. 280. An icon that is displayed in a format in which the 1st character is red (hereinafter referred to as "1st red").
(2) Icon indicating the addition of the CZ2 state breakthrough rate (2-1) An icon indicating that only the first value (for example, 5%) is added to the CZ2 state breakthrough rate, which is abbreviated as shown in FIG. 280. An icon in which 2nd is described in a star-shaped frame and the 2nd character is displayed in a yellow format (hereinafter referred to as "2nd yellow").
(2-2) An icon indicating that the addition of the breakthrough rate in the CZ2 state is a second value (for example, 10%) larger than the first, and 2nd in the substantially star-shaped frame shown in FIG. 280. An icon displayed in a format in which the 2nd character is green (hereinafter referred to as "2nd green").
(2-3) It is an icon indicating that the addition of the breakthrough rate in the CZ2 state is a third value (for example, 20%) larger than the second value, and is in the substantially star-shaped frame shown in FIG. 280. An icon that is described as 2nd and is displayed in a format in which the characters of 2nd are red (hereinafter referred to as "2nd red").
(3) Icon indicating the confirmation system of various states (3-1) The above-mentioned "heat!", Icon indicating that the CZ1 state breakthrough has been confirmed (3-2) Icon indicating that the CZ2 state breakthrough has been confirmed. And the icon that displays "Heat !!".
(3-3) An icon indicating that the transition to the additional specialized state has been confirmed, and an icon displayed as "confirmed".

In the present embodiment, the icons (1) and (2) above may be collectively referred to as "1st" and "2nd" (for example, in FIG. 280, "1st" and "1st" of this summarization. Notated as "2nd"). Further, it goes without saying that the type and display form of the icon are not limited to those described above, and various modifications are possible.

Next, the outline of the specifications regarding the icon will be described with reference to FIG. 280. Note that FIG. 280 is a diagram for explaining specifications relating to the icon. As shown in FIG. 280, when an icon is acquired by the roulette effect in the icon acquisition state, N + 1 is placed in the Nth area of this buffer acquired Nth in the icon buffer (not shown) that stores the type of the icon and the like. The second acquired icon is saved (stored) in the N + 1 area of this buffer, and is saved in the icon buffer in the order of acquisition, and is also stored in the first predetermined area SR1 (see FIG. 292) on the upper right of the effect display device S40. They are displayed side by side in the order in which they were acquired.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 262, when "1st" is first acquired and then "heat!" Is acquired, it is on the left side in the first predetermined area SR1 on the upper right of the effect display device S40. "1st" and "heat!" Are displayed side by side on the right side. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the predetermined area of the effect display device S40, the previously acquired icon is displayed on the left side. The number of icons that can be displayed in the predetermined area of the effect display device S40 (in other words, the number of icons that can be acquired) is five as described above, but the number of icons that can be acquired can be appropriately set. Needless to say. In the specifications of the present embodiment, "1st" and "heat!" Cannot be described together as described later, but in FIG. 262, "1st" and "heat!" Are described together for convenience of explanation. It should be added that it is described.

Further, if the acquired icon is an icon indicating that the breakthrough rate of the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state is improved, the icons are listed in order as they are, and it is confirmed that the icon breaks through the CZ2 state and shifts to the additional specialized state. If it is an icon indicating that, the icons below this are deleted. In this way, the icons are displayed in the order in which they are acquired, and the existing icons may be deleted depending on the type of newly acquired icon. The details of this icon display (notice of adding an icon) will be described later, but in order to help this understanding, first, a schematic description will be given along with FIGS. 280 (A) to (E).

As shown in FIG. 280 (A), the acquired icons are "1st (stored in the Nth area of the icon buffer)", "2nd (stored in the N + 1th area of the icon buffer)", and "1st" in the order of acquisition. It is assumed that there are four "(N + second save in icon buffer)" and "2nd (N + third save in icon buffer)" (even in the first predetermined area SR1 of the effect display device S40, they are displayed side by side in this way. ing). In this state, if a new "1st" is acquired, there are two "1st" and two "2nd", and even if a new "1st" is added, it is within the range of 5 which is the maximum value of the icon display. Therefore, a new "1st" can be added (displayed), and as shown in FIG. 280 (B), a new "1st" is added on the far right (save in N + 4th of the icon buffer). In a predetermined area of the effect display device S40, five of these icons are displayed side by side as shown in FIG. 280 (B)).

In the state shown in FIG. 280 (B), that is, in the state where the five icons which are the maximum values of the icon display are displayed, it is impossible to display any more "1st" and "2nd" at the same level. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 280 (c), the icon acquisition lottery is excluded from the lottery. On the other hand, for example, "heat!", Which is an icon higher than "1st" (an icon indicating more advantageous information) and is confirmed to break through the CZ1 state, is subject to the lottery for the icon acquisition lottery and acquires "heat!". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 280 (C) and 280 (D), the two "1st" lower than "heat!" Are meaningless to be displayed, so they should be erased. (After deleting the "1st" saved in the Nth and N + 2nd of the icon buffer), add "Heat!". In this case, "2nd" is stored in the Nth and N + 1th areas of the icon buffer, respectively, "heat!" Is stored in the N + 3rd area, and these are stored in the predetermined area of the effect display device S40. Icons are displayed side by side in this order.

Next, the processing of the sub-control board S related to the icon acquisition will be described, and in the description thereof, the outline of this processing will be described with reference to FIG. 281. Note that FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing an icon acquisition process by the sub-control board S according to the 16th embodiment. When there is a CZ2 breakthrough flag, that is, when the CZ2 breakthrough flag is 1 (Yes in step S6401), the sub-control board S has a value A of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter and a CZ2 breakthrough rate counter described in FIG. 256. Based on the value B of, a process of calculating (selecting) an icon of a type that can be acquired (added) from a plurality of types of icons is performed (step S6402). When the CZ2 breakthrough flag is 0 (No in step S6401), the sub-control board S sets the gaze addition flag to 1, and also, based on the above-mentioned values A and B, a plurality of types of icons. A process of calculating an icon of a type that can be selected from is performed (step S6403).

In this way, the sub-control board S can shift from the main control board M to the above-mentioned information related to the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter and the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter and the information related to the CZ2 breakthrough flag (in other words, can it shift to the additional specialized state? At least the information on whether or not it is received), and based on this information, the types of icons that can be acquired are calculated.

Next, in step S6404, the point acquisition (point play) in the sub-normal state is advanced, and when this point becomes a predetermined value (1000 points) or more (Yes in step S6405), the roulette effect is set and the icon is displayed. The selected process is executed (step S6406, step S6407).

In step S6407, when selecting an icon, the sub-control board S selects the icon in consideration of the current icon acquisition status (icon display status in the effect display device S40). That is, in step S6408, a process of checking whether or not a new icon can be acquired (whether or not an icon can be added) is executed.

In step S6408, the number of icons acquired by the sub-control board S up to now is less than 5, which is the upper limit, and the breakthrough confirmation icons such as "heat!" And "heat !!" are not retained. If it is determined that the CZ2 breakthrough flag is 1, all the icons can be acquired. Therefore, the sub-control board S selects all the icons and selects one of them. Execute (step S6409, step S6410).

In step S6408, when the sub-control board S acquires a new "1st", the breakthrough rate of the CZ1 state becomes a specific value (for example, by accumulating the added values of this and the "1st" icon acquired so far. If it is determined that the state exceeds 100%) and the state B has already acquired 5 icons, there is no point in acquiring "1st". Therefore, the sub-control board S uses "1st" as the icon. Exclude from the options (1st expectation increase ×), and execute a process of selecting one of the icons from the remaining options (step S6411, step S6412).

In step S6408, when the sub-control board S acquires a new "2nd", the breakthrough rate of the CZ2 state becomes a specific value (for example, by accumulating the added values of this and the "2nd" icon acquired so far. If it is determined that the state exceeds 100%) and the state C has already acquired 5 icons, there is no point in acquiring "2nd". Therefore, the sub-control board S uses "2nd" as the icon. Exclude from the options (2nd expectation increase ×), and execute a process of selecting one of the icons from the remaining options (step S6413, step S6414). As the states B and C, among the "1st" and "2nd", the states in which "1st red" and "2nd red" having the highest addition rate have already been acquired are determined to be these states B and C. It may be set as one condition for this.

In step S6408, if it is determined that the sub-control board S has already acquired five icons so far, there is no point in acquiring "1st" and "2nd", so that the sub-control board S has no meaning. Excludes "1st" and "2nd" from the icon options (1st & 2nd expectation increase ×), and executes a process of selecting one of the icons from the remaining options (step S6415, step S6416). That is, it is meaningless to acquire "1st" and "2nd" when these "1st" and "2nd" are acquired in total of 5, and in this case, in the next icon acquisition state, If it is decided that the CZ1 state breakthrough or higher is determined, at least an icon of "heat!" Or higher can be obtained. By doing so, even if the 5 icons are lined up and full in the first area SR1 of the effect display device S40, the significance of acquiring points for acquiring the icons is not lost. , Even in this state, the motivation to play can be promoted.

In step S6408, if it is determined that the sub-control board S has already acquired "heat!", There is no point in acquiring "1st". Therefore, the sub-control board S is set to "1st". Is excluded from the icon choices, and the process of selecting one of the icons from the remaining choices is executed (step S6417, step S6418).

In step S6408, if it is determined that the sub-control board S has already acquired "heat !!", there is no point in acquiring "2nd". Therefore, the sub-control board S is set to "2nd". Is excluded from the icon choices, and a process of selecting one of the icons from the remaining choices is executed (step S6419, step S6420).

In step S6408, if the sub-control board S determines that the state G has already acquired "confirmation" so far, there is no point in acquiring another icon, so that the sub-control board S has all the icons. Is excluded from the selection (all ×), and the process of not selecting the icon is executed (step S6421, step S6422). In this case, only the "confirmed" icon is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the player is notified that no more point acquisition lottery is performed and no more icons are added. It is preferable to do.

In this way, since the sub-control board S selects the icons that can be acquired based on the CZ2 breakthrough rate and the presence / absence of the CZ2 breakthrough flag received from the main control board M, the icons that are meaningless to be acquired are displayed. It is possible to prevent this from happening, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation for playing due to the display of an icon that has no meaning to be displayed.

In the present embodiment, as described in step S6402 of FIG. 281, of a type that can be acquired (added) from a plurality of types of icons based on the value A of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter and the value B of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter. The process of calculating (selecting) the icon is being performed. That is, the addition parameter set processing for setting the addition parameter related to the addition of the icon is performed based on the value A and the value B, and the icon acquisition is adjusted by the set addition parameter. Next, this additional parameter set processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 285. Note that FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the additional parameter set process by the sub-control board S according to the 16th embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the additional parameter determination process according to the subroutine of step S6706 in FIG. 282. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the additional parameter clearing process by the sub-control board S according to the 16th embodiment.

First, the sub-control board S is not in the penalty state (No in step S6501) and the AT is not completed (No in step S6502) when the above-mentioned penalty already activated flag is not 1. If it is not the time to recover from the power failure (No in step S6503), the game is advanced until the advantageous section is reached (advantageous section ON state), and after all reels M50 are stopped (step S6504, Step S6505), the additional parameter determination process described later is executed (step S6506).

Further, in step S6503, when the above-mentioned return is performed (Yes in step S6503), and when the power is restored (due to a setting change) and the user is staying in the advantageous section (Yes in step S6507), The sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game state number transmitted from the main control board M is 1, which is the normal state of the advantageous section, after the game of one game (in the next game), and determines whether the main game state is 1. If the number is 1 (Yes in step S6508 and step S6509), the process proceeds to step S6505 described above, and if the main game state number is other than 1, the process proceeds to step S6514.

Further, in step S6502, if the current AT state is at the end, or if it is the final game in the current AT state (Yes in step S6502), the sub-control board S is displayed on the AT end screen (for example,). , FIG. 291 (c)) is displayed (step S6510). Then, if all reels M50 are stopped and then the AT3 is not in the pullback state (No in step S6512), the advantageous section ends in the main game state and falls into the non-advantageous section (main game state 0). In the (shifted) state, after executing the process of setting the above-mentioned gaze addition flag to 1 (step S6514), the process proceeds to step S6506.

In step S6512, if the pullback number is 2 to shift to the hit pullback state (AT3 in which pullback is successful) (Yes in step S6513), the process proceeds to step S6506. On the other hand, in step S6513, when the pullback number is not 2, that is, when the pullback number is 1 to shift to the pullback state (AT3 in which pullback fails) of the gaze that does not hit (step S6513). No), the process proceeds to step S6514. In the case of No in step S6513, while staying in the main game state 4 in the main game state, staying in the point specialization 1 state or the sub normal state in the non-AT in-game state in the sub game state. In this case, various information (predetermined information) from the main control board M is not transmitted to the sub control board S, so that until the various information is received, various effects related to this may be performed. Various processes are performed based on predetermined provisional information (specific information) (this will be described later).

Next, the additional parameter determination process according to step S6706 of FIG. 282 will be described with reference to FIG. 283. In the sub-control board S, first, the gaze addition flag is set to 0 (step S6531), the 1st addition possible breakthrough rate is calculated by the calculation formula 1 (step S6532), and the 2nd addition possible breakthrough rate is calculated by the calculation formula 2. Calculate (step S6533). In the present embodiment, the calculation formula 1 is obtained by subtracting a specific correction value from the value A (reference value) stored in the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter described with reference to FIG. 256 among various information from the main control board M. Yes, the calculation formula 2 is obtained by subtracting a specific correction value from the value B (reference value) stored in the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter described with reference to FIG. 256 among various information from the main control board (the following). (See formulas 1 and 2).
(Calculation formula 1)
1st can be added Breakthrough rate = CZ1 Breakthrough rate Value stored in the counter A-Specific correction value (Calculation formula 2)
2nd addable breakthrough rate = CZ2 breakthrough rate Value stored in the counter B-Specific correction value For example, if the value A is 33 (%), the value B is 70%, and the specific correction value is 30, the 1st addable breakthrough is possible. The rate is "3", and the 2nd additionable breakthrough rate is "50". Further, when the value A is 20 (%) and the specific value is 30, the 1st additional breakthrough rate is "-10". As described above, depending on the numerical values of the reference values A and B and the numerical value of the specific correction value, the additional breakthrough rate may be a negative value. The value of the specific correction value is not limited to the above-exemplified value, and any value can be appropriately set. Further, although the same specific correction value is used in the calculation formulas 1 and 2, different specific correction values may be used.

Next, when the CZ1 breakthrough flag is 1 (Yes in step S6534), the sub-control board S heats up! The notification flag is set to 1 to indicate that "heat!" Can be notified (step S6535), and even when the CZ2 breakthrough flag is 1 (yes in step S6536), heat! !! The process of setting the notification flag to 1 to the effect that "heat !!" can be notified is executed (step S6537). And the sub-control board S has these heats! Announcement flag and fever! !! When the total of the notification flags is 2 (heat! + Heat !! notification flag = 2), that is, a state in which the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state can be exceeded and the state can be shifted to the AT (in this case, the additional specialized state). If (Yes in step S6538), the process of setting the confirmation flag to 1 indicating that "confirmation" can be announced is executed (step S6540).

Then, if the sub-control board S has acquired the icon (step S6540), the 1st addable breakthrough rate is set to the corrected 1st addition breakthrough rate calculated by the calculation formula 3, and the 2nd addable breakthrough rate is set to the calculation formula 4. The process of calculating the correction 2nd additional breakthrough rate is executed (step S6541 and step S6542).
(Calculation formula 3)
Correction 1st additional breakthrough rate = Calculation formula 1-1st Icon counter counter value x 3
(Calculation formula 4)
Correction 2nd additional breakthrough rate = formula 2-2nd Icon counter counter value x 3
Here, the 1st icon counter and the 2nd icon counter (both not shown) are counters that manage the number of "1st" and "2nd" icons, respectively, and each counter value is currently possessed (currently). The number of icons (displayed on the effect display device S40) is shown.
For example, when the 1st additional breakthrough rate is "3" as described above and the counter value of the 1st icon counter is 2, the corrected 1st additional breakthrough rate is 3- (2 × 3) = "-". 3 ”. Further, when the 1st additional breakthrough rate is "-10" and the counter value of the 1sst icon is 2, the corrected 1st additional breakthrough rate is -10- (2 x 3) = "-16". Become. When the 2nd additional breakthrough rate is "50" and the maximum value of the 2nd icon counter is 5, the corrected 2nd additional breakthrough rate is 50- (5 x 3) = "35". Become. As described above, the correction 1st additional breakthrough rate and the correction 2nd additional breakthrough rate also have negative values such as the above-mentioned 1st additional breakthrough rate depending on the value of the specific correction value, while the above-mentioned There may be a situation where there is no negative value, such as the 2nd additional breakthrough rate.

Next, the additional parameter clearing process for clearing the additional parameter will be described with reference to FIG. 284. When the sub-control board S is not at the time of the above-mentioned recovery (No in step S6561) and at the time of power failure recovery, for example, the setting is changed, the advantageous section up to that point is reset, and the sub-control board S stays in the normal section. If this is the case (No in step S6562), the process proceeds to step S6570.

Further, when the power is restored (Yes in step S6561) and the penalty state is activated (Penalty operation G) (Yes in step S6563), after all reels 50M are stopped (Step S6564), The process proceeds to step S6571. On the other hand, in step S6563, if the game is not a game in which the penalty state is activated (No in step S6567) but is a game that has entered the AT (Yes in step S6565), after pressing the start lever of the next game (step S6566). If the RT state is the normal RT state (Yes in step S6567), the process proceeds to step S6570, while if the RT state is other than RT2 (No in step S6567), the process proceeds to step S6571.

If the game does not enter the AT in step S6565 (No in step S6565), the game is advanced until the advantageous section ends, and all reels M50 stop in the game in which the advantageous section ends (advantageous section OFF). After that (step S6568, step S6569), the penalty already activated flag is set to 0, and the gaze addition flag, CZ1 breakthrough flag, and heat described in FIG. 283 are set. Notification flag, CZ2 breakthrough flag, heat! !! A process of resetting all the flags related to the addition such as the notification flag and the final notification flag and the counter values related to the addition such as the counter values A and B used in the calculation formulas 1 to 4 to 0 is executed (step S6570, step S6571).

Next, the processing of the sub-control board S related to the icon acquisition will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing an additional notification processing for notifying the player of the icon acquired by the sub-control board according to the 16th embodiment. Among the icons to be selected (displayed on the effect display device S40), the sub-control board S first has "1st" (winning value 0), "2nd" (winning value 1), and "heat!" (Winning value 2). , "Heat !!" (winning value 3), "confirmed" (winning value 4), and other large-scale lottery processes (roulette temporary lottery 5 branches) are executed (step S6701). That is, for example, in the above-mentioned state A, the sub-control board has a winning value corresponding to a currently selectable icon, such as drawing from winning values 1 to 4 excluding the winning value 0 of "1st". From the inside, I try to decide the outline of the icon to be displayed.

In step S6701, when the winning value of "1st" is 0 or the winning value of "2nd" is 1 (step S6702, step S6703), the sub-control board S is "1st yellow" in the case of "1st". From any of (winning value 0), "1st green" (winning value 1), and "1st red" (winning value 2), in the case of "2nd", "2nd yellow" (winning value 3), "2nd green" (Step S6704) is executed to draw a lottery (roulette secondary lottery 6 branches) for an icon to be displayed from either (winning value 4) or "2nd red" (winning value 5).

In step S6704, when the winning value is 0 (“1st yellow”), the sub-control board S has a 1st addable breakthrough rate or a correction 1st addable breakthrough rate according to the formula 1 or 3 of FIG. , In this flowchart, 1 is simply subtracted from "1st additional breakthrough rate, etc." (step S6705, step S6706), and if the winning value is 1 ("1st green"), the 1st additional breakthrough is possible. 3 is subtracted from the rate and the like (step S6707, step S6708), and if the winning value is 2 (“1st red”), the process of subtracting 5 from the 1st addition possible breakthrough rate and the like is executed (step S6709). , Step S6710).

For example, when the 1st additional breakthrough rate is "3" as described above, the 1st additional breakthrough rate is 3-1 = "2" in step S6706, and the 1st additional breakthrough rate is 3-3 = "2" in step S6708. 0 ”, and in step S6710, the 1st additional breakthrough rate becomes 3-5 =“ -2 ”. Similarly, when the 2nd additional breakthrough rate is "50" as described above, the 2nd additional breakthrough rate is 50-1 = "49" in step S6721 and the 2nd additional breakthrough rate is 50-3 = in step S6723. It becomes "47", and in step S6725, the 2nd addition breakthrough rate becomes 50-5 = "45".

Next, the sub-control board S adds 1 to the 1st icon counter (not shown) that manages the number of "1st" icons, saves the acquired icons in the icon buffer in the order of acquisition, and then executes the icon management process described later. (Steps S6711 to 6713).

Next, when the 1st additional breakthrough rate is 0 or more (No in step S6714), the sub-control board S has a counter value of a 1st icon counter (not shown) that manages the number of "1st" icons and "2nd". If the total with the counter value of the 2nd icon counter (not shown) that manages the number of icons is 5, which is the upper limit of the number of icons that can be displayed (Yes in step S6716), "1st" and "2nd" can be added. A process of setting the breakthrough rate to 0 to the effect that no further addition is possible is executed (step S6717). Then, when the counter value of the 1st icon counter is 5, which is the upper limit of the number of icons that can be displayed (Yes in step S6718), heat! !! The process of setting the notification flag to 0 to the effect that "heat !!" is not notified is executed (step S6719).

On the other hand, when the 1st addable breakthrough rate is smaller than 0 (Yes in step S6714), the sub-control board S sets the 1st addable breakthrough rate to 0 and executes a process for preventing the acquisition of any more icons. (Step S6715). For example, as described above, since the 1st additional breakthrough rates of steps S6706 and S6708 are "2" and "0", respectively, the process proceeds to the process of transitioning to step S6716, while the 1st additional breakthrough rate of step S6710. Is a negative value of "-2", so that no more icons can be acquired in step S6715. Further, as described above, since the 2nd additional breakthrough rates of step S6721, step S6723, and step S6725 are "49", "47", and "45", respectively, the process proceeds to the process of transitioning to step S6716.

In the present embodiment, if the 1st addition possible breakthrough rate is a negative value (less than 0) in step S6514, no more icons can be acquired in step S6515. As for the breakthrough rate that can be added to the 1st, which is related to the presence or absence of the acquisition of this icon, the value A of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter, which is the breakthrough rate of the CZ1 state (probability of winning the CZ2 state) itself, is the reference value as described above. It is a value obtained by subtracting a specific correction value from this reference value (value calculated by formula 1).

When the value A is, for example, 30%, if too many icons are acquired, there are many situations in which the AT cannot be transferred (70% AT cannot be transferred) even though a large number of icons have been acquired. I can imagine. Since such a situation should be avoided as much as possible from the viewpoint of the commercial value of the revolving pachinko machine, by setting the specific correction value to 30, a negative value of 1st can be added to the breakthrough rate. Therefore, it is difficult or impossible to obtain the maximum value icon.

On the other hand, when the value A is, for example, 70%, even if a large number of icons are acquired, many of them shift to the additional specialized state, and even though a large number of icons have been acquired, the additional specialized state is entered. It can be assumed that there are few situations where migration is not possible (70% AT can be migrated). In this case, if the specific correction value is 30, as described above, since there is no occurrence of the 1st addition possible breakthrough rate of the negative value, the icon of the maximum value can be acquired.

In this way, the presence or absence of icon acquisition depends on the value of the specific correction value, and when it is difficult to break through the CZ1 state, it is possible to acquire too many icons, while making it impossible to acquire too many icons. Adjust the specific correction value to set the difficulty level of icon acquisition according to the actual CZ1 state breakthrough rate, such as making it easier to acquire many icons when it is easy to break through the CZ1 state. It can be done easily just by. The same can be said for the 2nd additional breakthrough rate.

Regarding the processing of steps S6720 to 6734, when the wording of "1st" is read as "2nd" and the wording of "heat !!" is read as "heat!" In the above description of steps S6705 to 6719. Since it is the same as, the explanation is omitted.

In step S6701, if the winning value of "heat!", Which is an icon indicating that the CZ1 state breakthrough has been confirmed, is 2 (step S6735), the sub-control board S sets the 1st additional breakthrough rate to 0. ,heat! The process of setting the notification flag to 0 is executed (step S6736, step S6737). Next, since the sub-control board S does not need to display "1st" any more, after setting the 1st icon counter to 0, the number of "heat!" Icons, 1 is set to the 1st icon counter. The process is executed (step S6738, step S6739). Next, the sub-control board S erases the "1st" icon in the icon buffer and stores "heat!" In order in the icon buffer (for example, when only "heat!" Is present, the Nth icon buffer. If there is one "2nd" before "heat 1" in the area of, save it in the N + 1th area of the icon buffer, etc.), and then execute the same icon management process as in step S6713 (step). S6741, step S6742).

In step S6701, when the winning value of "heat !!", which is an icon indicating that the CZ2 state breakthrough has been confirmed, is 3 (step S6743), the sub-control board S is set to "1st" in steps S6736 to 6742. Is replaced with "2nd" and "heat!" Is replaced with "heat !!" (steps S6744 to 6750).

In step S6701, if the winning value of "confirmed", which is an icon indicating that the transition to the additional specialized state is confirmed, is 4 (step S6751), the 1st additional possible breakthrough rate and the 2nd additional possible breakthrough rate ,heat! Announcement flag, fever! !! The notification flags are set to 0, the confirmation flag is set to 0 to prevent "confirmation", and the 1st icon counter and the 2nd icon counter are set to 0, respectively (steps S6752 to 6758). .. Then, the sub-control board S erases all the contents in the icon buffer, saves "heat!" In the icon buffer in order (saves in the Nth area of the icon buffer), and then performs the same icon management process as in step S6513. It is executed (steps S6759 to 6761).

Next, the icon management process of step S6713 and the like will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing an icon management process related to a subroutine such as step S6713 in FIG. 285. In this icon management process, after all the reels M50 are stopped, the counter value of the 1st icon counter (the number of "1st") and the counter value of the 2nd icon counter (the number of "2nd") for ico, which is the number of icons. Is executed (step S6771, step S6772) to define (Iico = 1st + 2nd icon counter) as the sum of the values.

Next, the sub-control board S has the Nth region (N) in the icon buffer when the value of this ico is not 0, that is, when "1st" or "2nd" exists (No in step S6773). = 1) is defined and the Nth area in the icon buffer is acquired (step S6774, step S6775), and then the type of the acquired icon (for example, "1st" is "1st yellow", "1st". A process of transmitting a second system auxiliary command indicating "green" etc.) and a lighting command of the Nth icon to the effect display device S40 or the like is executed (step S6776, step S6777).

After that, the sub-control board S subtracts the value of ico by 1, in other words, reduces the number of icons currently possessed by one (step S6778), and as a result, the value of ico is 0, in other words, it currently possesses. When the icon becomes 0 (Yes in step S6779), a process of transmitting an icon acquisition effect command for executing an effect effect to the effect that the icon has been acquired to the effect display device S40 or the like is executed (step S6780). .. On the other hand, if there is an icon currently held (No in step S6779), the Nth next N + 1th area is defined (N = N + 1) in the icon buffer (step S6781), and the icon is currently held. The processes of steps S6775 to 6779 are repeated until the number of icons is 0 (until the icon is yes in step S6779 and ico = 0).
<Relationship between the transition status of the advantageous section and the sub-game state in the 16th embodiment>

As described above, the sub-control board S is acquired based on various information such as the value A of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter, the value B of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter, the CZ1 breakthrough flag, and the CZ2 breakthrough flag transmitted from the main control board M. We are sorting out possible icons. In the present embodiment, the transmission timing of various information by the main control board M to the sub-control board S is defined as the time when the normal section is entered into the advantageous section (Note that this timing is, for example, the normal section is entered. Various timings such as when, when the normal section ends, or when a predetermined timing after entering the advantageous section (when the start switch is pressed, when all stops, after a plurality of games, etc.) can be appropriately set). Further, in the sub-control board S, the selection of icons based on these various information is performed in the first game in which the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section. However, as the control based on these various information, the control is performed. Not only the selection of icons, but also the acquisition of points in the non-AT state.

Regarding the point acquisition based on this various information, in the sub-normal state, the low point lottery table is used as described above, but the probability of acquiring points and the points obtained by one winning are used in this low point lottery table. Multiple types with different numbers, for example, table A, table B, which has a higher probability of earning points than this table A and has a large number of points that can be earned in one winning (hereinafter, simply referred to as "high certainty and high points"). Three types of tables C, which are more reliable and have higher points than the table B, are prepared, and one of these tables is selected according to the contents of various information from the main control board M. It goes without saying that the table to be used is not limited to the above-mentioned three stages of tables A to C, and a table having four or more stages may be used. Further, regarding these tables A to C, the probability of earning points is the same, and the tables may have a large number of points earned at one time. In short, they may be a plurality of tables that can obtain different profits from each other. Just do it.

Specifically, in various information, when the CZ2 breakthrough flag is 0 and it is not possible to shift to the additional specialized state, table A or B can be used and the CZ2 breakthrough flag can be set to 1 to shift to the additional specialized state. If so, use table B or C. Further, when the CZ2 breakthrough flag is 0 and the value B of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter is 90 (%), in other words, the lottery probability of shifting to the additional specialization state is a high probability of 90%. If the values are off, the table B having a relatively high probability is used among the tables A and B, the CZ breakthrough flag is 0, and the value B of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter is 20 (%). In other words, if the lottery probability of shifting to the additional specialized state is low with a probability of 20% and is out of the range, Table A with a relatively low probability is used. Further, when the CZ2 breakthrough flag is 1 and the value B of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter is 90 (%), in other words, the lottery probability of shifting to the additional specialized state is 90% high and the winning is won. In this case, if the CZ breakthrough flag is 1 and the value B of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter is 20 (%) using the table C having a relatively high probability among the tables B and C, in other words. Then, if the lottery probability of shifting to the additional specialized state is as low as 20% but the winning is won, the table B having a relatively low probability is used. The lottery of points based on various information is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and in short, any lottery method may be used as long as the lottery is performed based on various information from the main control board M.

Further, the sub-control board S has no basis for the point acquisition lottery in the unreceived state without various information from the main control board M (the state in which the Gaze flag described later is on), and in this state, points are unnecessarily acquired. Is not preferable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, tentatively, in the above-mentioned non-received state, the probability of earning points is lower than that of table A in the point-specialized 1 state, and the number of points obtained by one winning is small (hereinafter). (Simply referred to as "low certainty and low point".) In the sub-normal state, the table β with a lower probability and a lower point than this table α is used. Specifically, since the main control board M does not have various information (predetermined information) instead of various information, provisional various information to the effect that these tables α, table β, etc. are used is tentatively provided to the sub control board S. When transmitting and receiving the provisional various information (specific information), the sub-control board S uses these tables α and β, and in this situation, various information is transmitted from the main control board M. Continues until is sent.

From the same point of view, it is not preferable to display an icon with a very high expected value even if the points become equal to or higher than a predetermined value and the icon can be acquired in the above-mentioned non-received state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the non-received state, the values A and B used in the calculation formulas 1 and 2 described with reference to FIG. 282 do not exist, but from the above viewpoint, the icons cannot be acquired so much. Therefore, for example, the value A and the value B include the fact that the values are equal to or less than the specific correction value as one of the above-mentioned provisional information, and are transmitted to the sub-control board S so that the icons cannot be acquired so much. I have to. Further, as the icon selection table used in step S5701 and step S6504 of FIG. 285, by using a table in which only the winning value 0 is won or a table in which the ratio of the winning value 0 is larger than the other winning values, a plurality of icons are used. Of the types of icons, icons with relatively low expectations are preferentially selected, and the range of icon selection is narrower than the reception state (when the winning value is 0, the confirmation system of various states is selected. The selection probability of the indicated icon is 0). The situation of using these tables continues until various information is transmitted from the main control board M.

In the present embodiment, when various information is not available, the temporary various information is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, but instead of this, the temporary various information is transmitted on the sub control board S side. May be prepared in advance, and when the sub-control board S does not have various information from the main control board M, various controls may be performed based on the provisional various information. Further, regarding the transmission of various information, the sub-control board S may refer to the various information only when the sub-control board S enters the advantageous section from the normal section after making sure to transmit each game. In this case, when the transmission of various information is interrupted and the section enters the advantageous section from the normal section, the sub-control board S refers to the provisional various information.

Such a non-received state (in other words, a received state of provisional various information) is caused by a deviation between the main game state and the sub-game state. Next, a plurality of patterns regarding the correspondence between the main game state and the sub game state, including the deviation between the main game state and the sub game state, will be described with reference to FIG. 287. Note that FIG. 287 is a timing chart showing various gaming states according to the 16th embodiment. Further, in FIG. 287, for convenience of explanation, among the AT states, the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state are directly referred to as the CZ1 state and the like, and the other additional specialized states, the main AT state, the ST state and the like are simply expressed. It shall be written as "AT".

Pattern 1 of FIG. 287 is the most basic pattern in which the advantageous section is turned off (the advantageous section ends) at the end of AT and all stops at the end of CZ, and the main game state becomes 1 after 0. .. That is, it is a basic pattern in which the main game state and the sub game state are synchronized.

Specifically, it stays in the Xth advantageous section until the game before the final game of AT, specifically, until the final game of CZ1 state, CZ2 state, and ST state (in this state, the advantageous section indicator). YH is always lit as described above). Here, in the final game in the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state, the above-mentioned judge effect and the like are executed, and in the final game in the ST state, the effect related to the final game of ST is executed. Then, in the final game in the AT state, specifically, in the next game of the final game in the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, and the ST state, the effect that the AT state has ended in the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, and the ST state ( For example, for the effect that the ST state has ended, FIGS. 292 (a) and 292 (c) are executed). Further, the advantageous section ends with this game (the advantageous section is turned off and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off), and the Xth advantageous section ends as the game section. In the next game, he will stay in the normal section (main game number 0).

In the next game after the AT ends, the game shifts to the point 1 specialized state, and the X + 1th advantageous section (main game number 1) is started in this game (this causes the advantageous section indicator YH to light up again. And always lights up until the end of the X + 1th advantageous section). In the present embodiment, at this timing, the sub-control board S is in the receiving state of receiving various information from the main control board M. Then, in the game section in the main game state, while staying in the X + 1th advantageous section, in the sub game state, the transition is made to the point specialization 1 state, the sub normal state, the CZ1 or CZ2 state, and the AT. Among the sub-game states during staying in the X + 1th advantageous section, in the point specialization 1 state and the sub-normal state, the sub control board S receives various information from the main control board M, and these various information. We are conducting a point acquisition lottery based on.

That is, as shown in the point cumulative image of pattern 1 in FIG. 288, in the state where the X + 1th advantageous section has started, it stays in the point specialization 1 state (denoted as "specialization 1 state" in the figure). Since the point acquisition lottery is conducted based on the above various information, the points are accumulated with a certain gradient. In addition, although pattern 1 of FIG. 288 is an example of accumulating with a constant gradient, in the present embodiment, since the point specialization 1 state shifts to the point specialization 1 state based on the combination lottery result, the point increase angle changes. It goes without saying that there are situations in which to do so. The same applies to the point specialization 2 state.

Pattern 2 of FIG. 287 is a case where the player shifts to the main game state 2 which does not pull back, that is, when the player shifts to the main game state 2 in S5411 by winning the pullback number 1 which does not hit as described in FIG. (6), (9), and (16) of FIG. 250 are also referred to), and the counter value of the pullback G number counter (not shown) that manages the number of staying games in the main game state 2 is the point specialization 1 state. The case where the number of staying games was less than 30 is shown.

In the present embodiment, the counter value of the pullback G number counter in the main game state 2 is determined according to the ball ejection state number 0 to 3 (ball ejection state 0 to 3). That is, as described above, when the ball ejection state 3 exceeds the upper limit of the ball ejection rate in 400 games of 220%, the ball ejection state 2 in the caution state 2, and the ball ejection state 1 in the caution state 1. Since it is necessary to lower the ball ejection rate, it is preferable that there is no navigation effect for a long time after the end of AT. In these ball ejection states 2 or 3, the counter value of the pullback G number counter is, for example, 50 (game) is set. On the other hand, in the case of the default ball ejection state 0 which is less than the caution state 1, it is not necessary to lengthen the state where there is no navigation effect as much as the ball ejection states 1 to 3, so the counter value of the pullback G number counter in this case is For example, 15 (game) is set. Needless to say, the value of the pull-back G number counter corresponding to the ball ejection states 0 to 3 is not limited to the above-mentioned example and can be set as appropriate.

In this pattern 2, for example, there is a case where the ball ejection state is 0, and the value of the pullback G number counter is the above-mentioned 15 which is smaller than the number of staying games (30 games) in the point specialization 1 state. The Xth advantageous section in the main game state is a state in which the advantageous section continues for 15 games after the end of AT (a state in which the main game state 2 continues for 15 games). In other words, from the start of the point specialization 1 state to the 15th game, it is the Xth advantageous section, and after that, it is in the N + 1th advantageous section after passing through the normal section.

In this case, at the time of the N + 1th advantageous section entry started from the middle of the point specialization 1 state, it is the reception state in which the above-mentioned various information is obtained from the main control board M, and in the sub control board S, these are It is a situation where the point acquisition lottery can be performed based on various information of the above, but from the start of the point specialization 1 state to the 15th game, it is the state where the AT is finished in the previous Xth advantageous section. It is in an unreceived state without various information from the main control board M.

On the other hand, in the pattern 3 of FIG. 287, the case where the game shifts to the main game state 2 in which the player does not pull back, and the value of the pullback G number counter is larger than 30, which is the number of staying games in the point specialization 1 state, is shown. That is, this pattern 3 shows the case where the value of the pullback G number counter is, for example, 50 as described above in the case of the ball ejection states 1 to 3. In this case, the Xth advantageous section in the main game state is a continuous state from the start of the sub-normal state after the point specialization 1 state to 20 games, and after that, the normal section (only one game stays). After that, it is in the state of N + 1th advantageous section. Also in this case, from the start of the point specialization 1 state and the sub-game state to 20 games, the main control board M is in an unreceived state without various information from the main control board M, and after the sub-game state 21 games, the main control board M It is in a receiving state that has various information from.

As described above, in the patterns 2 and 3, unlike the basic pattern 1, the main game state and the sub game state are in a deviated state in which the Xth advantageous section does not end at the end of the AT. There is. Next, various gaming states and the like in these patterns 2 and 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 289. As shown in FIG. 289, in the pattern 2, the end of the AT in the sub-game state and the end of the main game state 4 (ST state) are synchronized, and when the main game state 4 ends, the sub-game state is set. Although the AT ends, the Xth advantageous section continues as it is. In addition, the main game state 2 that starts when the main game state 4 ends and the point specialization 1 state that starts with the end of AT are also synchronized, and the pullback G number counter (15 games) also counts from here. As soon as it starts, the Gaze flag is turned on.

In the point specialization 1 state in this state, various information from the main control board M is not transmitted to the sub control board S, and the Gaze flag is turned on. Therefore, the sub control board S uses the table α. A lottery to earn points will be held. When 15 games, which is the number of games of the pullback G number counter, have elapsed from the start of this point specialization 1 state, the Xth advantageous section ends with the end of the main game state 2, and the normal section (main game). After passing through the number 0), the player enters the X + 1th advantageous section (main game number 1). By entering the advantageous section for the X + 1th time, various information is transmitted from the main control board M, so that the Gaze flag is turned off, and thereafter, the sub control board S can perform a point acquisition lottery based on various information. Then, the sub-control board S performs a point acquisition lottery using any of the tables A to C according to the ball ejection states 0 to 3.

In this pattern 2, in the Xth advantageous section, the sub-control board S becomes the main game number 2 (point-specialized 1 state in the sub-game state), which is the normal state after the AT ends, and then the main game. In the main game number 1 (point specialization 1 state and sub normal state in the sub game state) in the X + 1th advantageous section shifted through the normal section of number 0 (point specialization 1 state in the sub game state), the main Until the end of the game state number 1, in other words, until the start of the main game state 3 (CZ1 state in the sub-game state) (until a predetermined timing), a point acquisition lottery is performed to obtain points. (The point is stored in the point counter).

That is, in pattern 2, the counter value stored in the point counter is cleared from the end of AT in the Xth advantageous section to the start of the CZ1 state of the X + 1th advantageous section via the normal section. It is possible to update without doing this (note that points can be earned even in the above-mentioned normal section, and the counter value can be updated accordingly). In this straddling period, the sub-game state is the point specialization 1 state and the sub-normal state, and in the effect display device S40, as an effect related to these, in other words, an effect other than the effect related to AT, for example. , The effect that the icon of "heat!" Has been acquired and the effect that the points shown in FIG. 265 have been acquired are performed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 292, the cumulative points acquired during the period from the end of AT in the Xth advantageous section to the end of the normal section (during the non-reception state) in the straddling period are also shown in the effect display device S40. It is displayed in the second predetermined area SR2 at the lower right of the display unit. To the displayed cumulative points, the points acquired after the X + 1th advantageous section (after the reception state) after the end of the normal section are added and the updated value is displayed. In other words, the points obtained in the unreceived state are carried over as they are, and the points obtained in the received state are added based on the accumulated points based on the carried over points.

In addition, in this straddling period, the icon can be acquired even when the points exceed the predetermined value, and even if the icon is acquired during the straddling period, the effect that the icon has been acquired is executed. Then, the acquired icon is displayed on the effect display device S40. In the straddling period in which such an effect is performed, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off in the normal section ending in one game, and is always lit in other cases.

Therefore, in the main game state, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the Xth advantageous section has ended and the next X + 1th advantageous section has ended (without looking at the effect display device S40, the advantageous section is always displayed. You won't notice unless you look at the vessel YH). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the Xth advantageous section has ended and the player has shifted to the normal section, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation for playing due to the shift to the normal section. Further, since the timing at which the sub-control board S starts the point acquisition lottery after the end of the AT in the Xth advantageous section is the point specialization 1 state in which it is relatively easy to acquire points, the game is played even if the AT ends. Can be motivated. Furthermore, points can be earned even in the normal section, and the effect that the points have been earned is also executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know that he / she is staying in the normal section. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play due to staying in the section.

In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit when staying in the advantageous section. Instead, for example, the advantageous section indicator YH is off from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the player enters the section, the light-off state is maintained as it is, and any timing from this point to the start of the first AT (anywhere such as the CZ1 state or the additional specialized state) (for example, the timing when a predetermined number of games have passed since the entry into the advantageous section). Alternatively, the specifications may be such that the lights are turned on at the timing when a predetermined winning combination is won, etc.). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing of turning on and off the advantageous section indicator YH, which notifies the transition to the normal section or the advantageous section. As a result, it becomes difficult to understand the transition timing between the normal section and the advantageous section, so it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not it is difficult to obtain points after the end of AT in the Xth advantageous section, and the player can make points. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play due to the recognition that it is difficult to acquire.

In this pattern 2, as described above, the point acquisition lottery is performed from the end of AT in the Xth advantageous section to the start of the CZ1 state of the X + 1th advantageous section via the normal section. It is easier to get points in the X + 1th advantageous section than in the advantageous section of the first time. That is, as shown in the "point accumulation image of pattern 2" of FIG. 288, in the Xth advantageous section, the X + 1th advantageous section started from the gradient of the point accumulation from the end of AT to the start of the normal section. The gradient of accumulated points after that is steeper, and in the Xth advantageous section, after the start of the X + 1th advantageous section than the expected value of points earned between the end of AT and the start of the normal section. It can be said that the expected value of points is higher.

In the present embodiment, in the Xth advantageous section, the sub-control board S becomes the main game number 2 (point-specialized 1 state in the sub-game state), which is the normal state after the AT ends, and then the main game number. For the first period until the end of the normal section of 0 (point specialization 1 state in the sub-game state), the point acquisition lottery is performed using the above table α. On the other hand, in the main game number 1 (in the sub-game state, the point specialization 1 state and the sub-normal state) in the X + 1th advantageous section shifted from this normal section, in other words, until the main game state number 1 ends. For example, for the second period (until a predetermined timing) before the start of the main game state 3 (CZ1 state in the sub game state), any one of tables A to C having a higher probability than the above table A is used. We are holding a lottery to earn points. Therefore, the points obtained in one game are larger in the second period than in the first period, in other words, the value added to the point counter is larger (the degree of change in the counter value of the point counter is larger). It will be (large).

In this way, the sub-control board S continuously acquires points across the X-th advantageous section and the X + 1-th advantageous section, and the counter value of the point counter changes between the former and the latter. Since the degree of the amount is different (as a result, when one winning lottery is won, the number of points displayed on the effect display device S40 is different, for example, as shown in FIG. 265), the degree of change of this point is different. It is possible to provide a new game property in which the player who sees the game is made to guess the internal situation such as whether the current game situation is the Xth advantageous section or the X + 1th advantageous section.

In the point acquisition lottery, the point acquisition probability and the number of points obtained may be different depending on the winning combination. In addition, the expected value of points earned according to the predetermined role such as the bell won in any of the first period and the expected value of points earned according to the predetermined role won in any of the second period are the same. On the other hand, the expected value of points earned according to the specific role such as the rare role won in any of the first period and the expected value of points earned according to the specific role won in any of the second period are It may be different (for example, the expected value of points earned is higher in the specific role in the second period than in the specific role in the first period). In this case, since the points earned in the first section and the second section fluctuate the same or differently depending on the winning combination, it is difficult to tell whether it is the Xth advantageous section or the X + 1th advantageous section. ..

In addition, α (α> 0) is the ratio of the predetermined points (for example, 10 points, etc.) given when the predetermined combination is won in any of the first periods, and is specified in any of the second periods. The ratio of the above-mentioned predetermined points given when the winning combination is won is different from β (β> 0) (for example, the ratio α is higher than the ratio β, such as α> β). Is also good. Further, the same may be applied to the ratio in which a predetermined icon (for example, "1st blue" or the like) is given in the first period and the second period. In this case, even if the predetermined points and the predetermined icons are the same, the ratios given in the first period and the second period are different, so it is difficult to understand whether it is the Xth advantageous section or the X + 1th advantageous section. be able to.

In this pattern 2, as described above, even when the icon is acquired during the straddling period from the end of AT in the Xth advantageous section to the start of the CZ1 state of the X + 1th advantageous section via the normal section. , The effect of acquiring the icon is executed, and the acquired icon is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, regarding this straddling period, the first straddling section from the end of AT to before the start of the normal section in the Xth advantageous section, the second straddling period in the normal section, and before the start of the CZ1 state in the X + 1th advantageous section. (Situationally, it is possible to divide into the third straddle section of the Xth advantageous section as before the start of CZ1), and the icon can be acquired in any of these first straddle sections to the third straddle section. Is. Here, since the first straddle section and the second straddle section are in the unreceived state, the icons with relatively low expectations are preferentially selected as described above, and the icons of the icons are selected. The range of selection is narrowed (as mentioned above, no definite icons are selected, etc.). On the other hand, since the third straddle section is in the reception state, an icon with a high degree of expectation can be selected depending on the value A of the CZ1 breakthrough rate counter and the value B of the CZ2 breakthrough rate counter. Therefore, it can be said that the third straddle section has a higher degree of advantage in acquiring the icon than the first straddle section and the second straddle section in the sense that an icon with a high degree of expectation such as "confirmation" can be obtained.

In this way, since the degree of advantage of the icons that can be acquired differs between the first straddle section and the third straddle section, it may be the Xth advantageous section or the X + 1th advantageous section depending on the acquired icon. It is possible to provide a new playability that allows the user to guess the internal situation such as whether or not. In addition, even in the second straddle section, which is a normal section, an icon can be acquired and an effect to that effect is executed, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that he / she is staying in the normal section. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation for playing due to staying in a normal section.

Next, various gaming states in pattern 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 290. As shown in FIG. 290, the end of the AT in the sub-game state and the end of the main game state 4 (ST state) are synchronized, and when the main game state 4 ends, the AT ends in the sub-game state as well. However, the Xth advantageous section continues as it is. In addition, the main game state 2 that starts when the main game state 4 ends and the point specialization 1 state that starts with the end of AT are also synchronized, and the pullback G number counter (50 games) also counts from here. As soon as it starts, the Gaze flag is turned on.

In the point specialization 1 state in this state, since the gaze flag is turned on, the sub-control board S performs a point acquisition lottery using the table α. When 30 games, which is the number of staying games in the point-specialized 1 state, have elapsed, the point-specialized 1 state ends and shifts to the sub-normal state, but at this point, the value of the pullback G number counter is 20. , The main game state 2 continues as it is (the Xth advantageous section also continues as it is). Since the Gaze flag is turned on even in the sub-normal state in this state, the sub-control board S performs a point acquisition lottery using the table β, and the icon with a relatively low expectation is given priority as an icon. It is supposed to be selected.

Then, when 20 games, which is the number of remaining games of the pullback game counter, have elapsed from the start of the sub-normal state, the Xth advantageous section ends with the end of the main game state 2, and the normal section (main game number) After 0), the player enters the X + 1th advantageous section (main game number 1). By entering the advantageous section for the X + 1th time, various information is transmitted from the main control board M, so that the Gaze flag is turned off, and thereafter, the sub control board S can perform a point acquisition lottery based on various information. Then, the sub-control board S performs a point acquisition lottery using any of the tables A to C according to the ball ejection states 0 to 3.

The various game states of the pattern 3 are as described above, and the sub-control board S uses the table α in the point acquisition lottery in the point specialization 1 state until the end of the Xth advantageous section. Table β is used in the point acquisition lottery in the state, and any of tables A to C is used in the point acquisition lottery after entering the X + 1th advantageous section in the sub-normal state. The probability of the point acquisition lottery is higher in the table α than in the table β, and higher in the tables A to C than in the table α.

As shown in FIG. 288, the cumulative status of points in this pattern 3 is the point specialization 1 state in the Xth advantageous section rather than the sub-normal state in the Xth advantageous section (sub-normal state in the unreceived state). (Point specialization 1 state in the unreceived state) is more likely to accumulate points, and points are more likely to be accumulated in the X + 1th sub-normal state (sub-normal state in the received state) than these. Therefore, in this pattern 3, the same action and effect as in pattern 2 can be obtained, and even in the same unreceived state, the degree of point acquisition can be different depending on the game situation, which is advantageous for the Xth time. It is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether it is a section or the X + 1th advantageous section.

Here, the relationship between the above-mentioned patterns 1 to 3 and the ball output will be described. First, in the case of pattern 1, when the AT with the highest number of balls is completed among the various gaming states, the Xth advantageous section ends as it is. At this point, the ball ejection rate is higher than in other states, and it is assumed that the player is staying in the ball ejection states 1 and 2. If AT is performed immediately in this state, there is a higher possibility that the ball ejection state 3 at the nonconformity level will occur as compared with other states. Therefore, after the AT, the AT is activated during a certain number of ball ejection adjustment games, specifically, the number of ball ejection adjustment games (for example, 200 games, etc.) until the ball ejection state becomes around 0. It is necessary to reduce the ball output rate by eliminating it.

Therefore, in the case of pattern 1, after the end of the AT, the AT cannot be activated during the number of ball ejection adjustment games. Therefore, in the game number counter range lottery described with reference to FIG. 255, the number of ball ejection adjustment games The number of games larger than is targeted for the lottery. Specifically, when the number of standby games is 200 games, it is necessary to exclude the lottery from 0 to 200 games and to make the number of games after 201 games a lottery target. Here, since the advantageous section ends in 1500 games, the number of games that can be selected is up to 1500 games, but it is necessary to secure a sufficient number of games to perform AT, and assuming that the number of games is 350 games. , Substantially, 201 games to 1150 games are subject to the lottery. In this way, in the case of pattern 1, in the X + 1th advantageous section after the end of AT, the AT is not activated during the above number of ball ejection adjustment games, and the player wins the CZ direct hit role or the AT direct hit role. Unless otherwise, AT will be activated at least 201 games or later.

On the other hand, in the case of pattern 2 and pattern 3, the Xth advantageous section continues as it is even after the end of AT, and it is possible to reduce the ball output rate in the Xth advantageous section after this AT. There is. Here, if the Xth advantageous section after AT continues for 50 games (count value of the pullback G number counter), in the X + 1th advantageous section, after 200-AT of the number of AT ball output adjustment games. AT cannot be activated until 50 = 150 games, which is the number of continuations of the advantageous section, but AT can be activated after 151 games. As described above, in the case of the pattern 2 and the pattern 3, the AT can be activated with a smaller number of games than the pattern 1.

Further, in the case of the pattern 2 and the pattern 3, the number of continuous games in the Xth advantageous section after AT depends on the counter value of the pullback G number counter. Specifically, if the counter value of the pullback G number counter is, for example, 100, the number of AT-activated games in which AT can be activated in the X + 1th advantageous section is 101 games or later, and the counter value is, for example, 30. For example, the number of AT-activating games in the X + 1th advantageous section is 171 games or later, and the number of AT-activating games in the X + 1th advantageous section varies according to the count value of the pullback G number counter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of pattern 1, the number of games that can activate AT in the X + 1th advantageous section is fixed at 201 games, but in the case of pattern 2 and pattern 3, in the X + 1th advantageous section. The number of games that can activate AT fluctuates, and these are mixed. Further, in patterns 1 to 3, it is related during non-AT from after the last AT of the Xth advantageous section to before the first AT is activated in the X + 1th advantageous section via the normal section transitioned from this advantageous section. The appearance of the effect display device S40 is the same regardless of the patterns 1 to 3.

Here, in the case where there is only pattern 1, the number of ATs that can be activated by the first AT in the X + 1th advantageous section is fixed after 201 games, so that the previous AT (the Xth advantage). Immediately after the end of the last AT in the section), the player may not be motivated to play the game and may quit the game, which contributes to a decrease in operation. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by mixing the pattern 2 and the pattern 3, the number of games that can activate AT in the X + 1th advantageous section is not fixed after 201 games, and the number of AT games is shorter than this. As the activation becomes possible, the number of AT activation games also fluctuates. Moreover, the appearance of the effect display device S40 from the previous AT to the current AT is the same regardless of which patterns 1 to 3 are, and it is difficult to understand which patterns 1 to 3 are. Therefore, even immediately after the end of the previous AT, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation to play, and it is possible to improve the operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned patterns 1 to 3, patterns 4 and 5 exist. That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the pattern 4 cannot break through the CZ1 state (main game state 7) or the CZ2 state (main game state 3) after shifting to the main game state 2 that does not pull back, and is in the non-AT state. It is a pattern that has shifted to (point specialization 1 state). In this case, in the start game of the point specialization 1 state, the player stays in the normal section, but in the next game, the section shifts to the X + 1th advantageous section. The information will be transmitted to the sub-control board S. Therefore, this pattern 4 is substantially the same as the pattern 1.

Further, the pattern 5 shown in FIG. 287 is a pattern in which the player shifts to the main game state 2 to be pulled back, then breaks through the CZ2 state through the CZ3 state, and then shifts to the AT (additional specialized state) again, in other words, the Xth time. This is a pattern in which AT is executed a plurality of times in an advantageous section. In this case, when the last AT in the Xth advantageous section (the second AT in FIG. 287) ends, the Xth advantageous section ends. Therefore, this pattern 5 is the same as that of pattern 1.
<16th Embodiment Production Display Device S40 and Advantageous Section Display YH>

Next, the effect display device S40 and the advantageous section display YH according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display device S40 performs each of the effects shown in FIGS. 262 to 265 and 267 described above in the non-AT state or the AT state. In addition to the above-mentioned effects, the effect display device S40 also performs the effects shown in FIGS. 291 and 292, for example.

In FIG. 291, in the final game of the AT, specifically, the next game of the final game in the ST state (hereinafter, simply referred to as “end game”), the effect that the AT has ended, specifically, from the ST state. This is an effect that suggests whether or not the AT state can be returned to the current AT state, and a shutter effect that produces a shutter effect image in which the shutter image gradually descends from above is performed. Here, when the ST state can be returned to the main AT state again, at the timing when the start lever D50 of the end game is pressed, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the reel 50M is stopped, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), the shutter effect image is lowered to the bottom, and an image indicating that the AT state can be returned is displayed. At this time, a freeze may be accompanied. On the other hand, when it is not possible to return to the main AT state and the state shifts to the point-specialized 1 state in the non-AT state, as shown in FIG. The shutter effect image that had been used is retracted upward to display an image showing the number of game medals acquired, the number of games staying in the AT state, and the like in the AT state. In addition, this image also has a so-called anti-slip display, such as "Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately."

In the present embodiment, when the effect image of FIG. 291 (c) is displayed, in principle, the player is notified that the AT state has ended, but the AT state is in progress again from the ST state. As another effect when the state can be returned, the effect shown in FIG. 292 is also performed. As shown in FIG. 292 (a), after the entanglement prevention display is made, as shown in FIG. 292 (b), the effect display device S40 prompts the player to press the sub input button (effect button) SB. An effect of displaying a button image such as "PUSH" is performed. When the player presses the sub-input button (effect button) SB in accordance with this instruction, as shown in FIG. 292 (c), a display indicating that three sets of navigation effects have been added is displayed during this AT. (In addition, when the number of games is added, it is possible to display the number of games to be added as appropriate, such as +10.) As shown in FIG. 292 (d), this AT It returns to the state and the navigation effect is resumed. In this way, even if the immersive prevention display is made, since the effect of returning to the AT in-progress state is prepared from here, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the AT-in-progress state can be returned to the end.

In addition, in the final game of AT, etc., when a specific role such as a rare role is won, an additional set number is given under specific conditions (50% probability, 100% probability, etc. may be appropriately designed). , AT may be forcibly restarted. In this case, when the rare role is won in the game in which the shutter effect is executed, the effect that the shutter retracts as shown in FIG. 291 (c) was originally planned to be executed, but FIG. 291 (b) ) May be switched to the effect in which the shutter is fully released, the effect shown in FIG. 291 (c) may be executed once, and then the effect shown in FIG. 291 (b) may be executed once. After performing the effect shown in FIG. 291 (c), an effect of displaying a button image such as “PUSH” shown in FIG. 292 (b) may be performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the subsequent effect is executed by pressing the sub-input button SB controlled by the sub-control board S, but instead of this, it is controlled by the main control board M. By operating the operation unit (for example, the bet button D220 or the like) to be operated, the subsequent effect may be executed. Further, when the start lever D50 of the next game is pressed without operating the operation unit such as the sub input button SB or the above-mentioned bet button D220, or when the automatic input by replay is performed, these Predetermined timing after the start lever D50 is pressed or automatically turned on (timing when a signal indicating that the start lever D50 has been pressed or automatically turned on (immediately after pressing or automatic closing), or the main control board related to pressing or automatic closing The subsequent production may be executed at the timing when various processes by M are completed).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 1 (or 96) and 293 (a), the effect display device S40 is arranged above the reel window D160, and the advantageous section display YH is below and inside. It is located between the reels M52 and the right reel M53 and below the reel window D160. Regarding the location of the advantageous section indicator YH, for example, the position near the input number indicator lamp D210 shown in FIG. 1, in other words, the lower left position of the reel window D160 (below the left reel M51 and seen in FIG. 1). The location is not particularly limited, but it is desirable that the location is as far away from the effect display device S40 as possible because the player wants the player to concentrate on the effect by the effect display device S40. .. Further, instead of providing the dedicated advantageous section display YH as in the above-described embodiment, for example, by turning on / off one dot of the credit number display device D200 configured by the 7-segment display. You may substitute it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 293 (a), the effect display device S40 has a normal normal screen as an image to be displayed, and any operation unit (bet button D220, start lever D50, etc.) on the normal screen. When the first predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses and the game is on standby when there is no input of the sub input button SB, etc., the screen is switched from the normal screen, and bibliographic items such as the model name, manufacturer name, and product number (second). There is a demo screen (demo display) in which information) is displayed, characters move around, and an error screen (not shown) displayed in an error state.

Further, in the above-mentioned normal screen, in the sub-normal state during non-AT, as shown in FIG. 293 (a), in the display unit of the effect display device S40, as described above, in the first predetermined area SR on the upper right. Is displayed with the acquired icon (first information), the number of acquired points (first information) is displayed in the second predetermined area SR2 at the lower right, and the third predetermined area SR3 at the lower left is displayed. , The number of staying games (first information) in the sub-normal state is displayed. The first information displayed in these predetermined areas SR1, SR2, and SR3 includes the above-mentioned icons, the number of staying games, and the number of points, as well as, for example, the number of medals acquired in the AT state and the AT state in the AT state. The number of staying games, the number of additional sets (the number of additional games, the number of additional games), etc. may be used, and information related to the game, etc. can be displayed. In the present embodiment, of the predetermined areas SR1, SR2, and SR3 of the effect display device S40, the first predetermined area SR1 (of the effect display device S40) farthest from the advantageous section display YH arranged below the reel window D160. Since the icon that is information that attracts the player's interest is displayed in the upper right part of the display unit), when the player is looking at this icon, he notices that the advantageous section display YH is turned on and off. It can be difficult. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation for playing due to staying in the normal section.

It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately set what kind of first information is displayed in each area, such as displaying the number of games in the second area SR2 and displaying the number of points in the third area SR3. Further, as the display area, for example, in the effect display device S40, between the first area and the second area, between the second area and the third area, the third area and the fourth upper left of the effect display device S40. It goes without saying that it can be appropriately set between the area and the fourth area and the first area, and any of the above-mentioned first information may be displayed in each of them. ..

In the present embodiment, among the icons, the number of games, and the number of points displayed in the predetermined areas SR1, SR2, and SR3 of the effect display device S40, the icons and the number of points are all cleared in the game recovered from the power failure. Therefore, the icon and the number of points are not displayed, and the number of points is displayed as 0 when the reel rotation of the next game starts. That is, at the time of recovery from power failure, the sub-control board S erases the icon stored in the icon buffer and also erases the value of the point counter and resets it to 0 (). See FIG. 295 below).

The timing of erasing these by the sub-control board S may be between the time when the sub-control board S receives the power failure information and the time when the power is actually turned off, or the power failure information received at the time of the power failure. It may be a predetermined timing after the power failure is restored (any timing in the game at the time of power failure recovery, or when the start lever D50 of the next game is pressed, etc.). It suffices if the icon is erased from the effect display device S40 and the number of points becomes 0 after the time of disconnection. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of games is not erased at the time of recovery from power failure, but instead of this, the number of games may be erased at the time of recovery from power failure. At times, at least one of the plurality of types of displays displayed before the power failure may be deleted, such as deleting only the icon. Further, the specification may be such that none of the displays is erased at the time of recovery from power failure, and it is possible to appropriately set which display is to be erased / saved at the time of recovery from power failure.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 293 (a), on the demo screen, a product name such as "product A" and a product number such as "product number XX", which are not shown in particular, are copyrights used for copyright display. Bibliographic items (second information) such as a mark (copyright mark) are displayed in a specific area which is a central portion of the display unit of the effect display device S40. Here, as is clear from FIG. 293 (a), on the demo screen, the effect performed on the normal screen disappears, the effect for the demo screen is performed, and the above bibliographic items are displayed. However, even in this state, the display of the first information such as the icons of the respective predetermined areas SR1, SR2, and SR3, the number of staying games, and the number of points remains as it is. By doing so, even if it is a demo screen, in order to switch from the demo screen to the normal screen, it is not necessary to insert a game medal or press the bet button D220 to switch from the demo screen to the normal screen. 1 Information can be confirmed as it is.

Further, as is clear from FIG. 293 (a), characters (predetermined symbol information) such as "1st" and "heat!" Included in the icon (first information) of the first predetermined area are displayed on the demo screen. Characters such as "Product A" and "Product number XX" (specific symbol information) included in the bibliographic items of the above are different in character size and font from each other, and have different visibility from each other. ing. Similarly, the character "250G" (predetermined symbol information) included in the number of staying games in the second predetermined area (first information) and "777 /" included in the number of points in the third predetermined area (first information). The characters "1000" (predetermined symbol information) are different in size and font from the characters "Product A" and "Product number XX" (specific symbol information), and they are visually different from each other. It has sex.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined symbol information and the specific symbol information are described by taking characters as an example, but instead of this, some kind of mark such as a star-shaped mark may be used. , The symbol is not particularly limited as long as it can convey some information to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, all the characters of the first information and all the characters of the second information are different in size and font from each other. Instead, for example, the character "777/1000" having the number of points is used. In ", the part of" 777 "may have the same display mode with the same size and the same font as the part of" ○○ "of" product number XX ", or may have different colors from each other. Well, the point is that it is not particularly limited as long as at least one of the characters of the first information and the like has a visibility different from that of at least one of the characters of the second information.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 293 (b), the demo screen is switched to when the first predetermined time elapses from the normal screen and the game is on standby, but the second predetermined time (for example, 180) is further changed from this. When seconds) elapses, the demo screen ends, and the effect for the demo screen (predetermined display on the demo screen) and the display of bibliographic items in the specific area disappear, but the icons of the respective predetermined areas SR1, SR2, SR3 , The first information such as the number of staying games and the number of points remains as it is.

As described above, since the visibility of the first information of each predetermined area SR1, SR2, SR3 and the second information of the specific area are different from each other, the distinction between the first information and the second information should be clarified. It is possible to easily grasp the characters and the like of the first information. In addition, even if a predetermined time elapses from the display of the demo screen and the demo screen ends and the demonstration production and bibliographic items are deleted, the first information is still left, so that the first information is always available. Can be confirmed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the screen shifts to the demo screen, as shown in FIG. 294, the display mode of the number of points is changed to suggest the internal situation. explain. It should be noted that FIG. 294 (a) is the same as FIG. 293 (a), but it should be added that this is to make the comparison with FIGS. 294 (b) and (c) easy to understand. For example, among the number of staying games, the number of games that are easily selected by the winning game counter (for example, 250 to 300 games, 350 to 400 games, etc.), that is, when in a so-called zone, is shown in FIG. 294 (b). As described above, when the normal screen is changed to the demo screen, in the point number display of the second predetermined area SR2, the point number display frame is the display mode in which the point number is displayed in the frame on the normal screen. By making the display mode in which is disappeared, the player is made to suggest the internal situation.

Further, when staying in the above zone, it is a zone that is easier to be selected than other zones, and when the expectation of shifting to AT is higher than in the case of FIG. 294 (b), also in FIG. 294. As shown in (c), when the demo screen is displayed, the character "777", which was an Arabic numeral on the normal screen, is changed to the Chinese numeral "777", thereby changing the display mode to the game. I try to suggest the internal situation to the person. In the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the number of points is changed, but instead, the display mode of the number of staying games and the icon may be different between the normal screen and the demo screen. Needless to say. In particular, when the display mode of the number of staying games is changed to notify the internal situation, the zone can be directly suggested by the number of games.

In this way, by changing the display mode of the second predetermined area SR2 according to the internal situation, it is possible to suggest the internal situation that appears only when the demo screen is displayed, which is a game peculiar to the demo screen. It can be given sex, and the player can be motivated to play by the demo screen. Further, in this case, since the display mode of the second predetermined area, which is different in visibility from the second information of the specific area, is further changed by switching to the demo screen, the first information and the second information are changed. The distinction from the information can be made clearer, and the characters and the like of the first information can be more easily grasped. In addition, even if a predetermined time elapses from the display of the demo screen, the demo screen ends, and the production and bibliographic items for the demo are deleted, the first information is still left. It is possible to check the first information at all times.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 294 (c), in the navigation effect of the screen during AT, in order to navigate the push order, a number indicating the push order is displayed, but the left reel M51 The positional relationship is such that the display area of the numbers indicating the pushing order and the third predetermined area overlap, and the display area of the numbers indicating the pushing order of the right reel M53 and the second predetermined area overlap. In this way, the second predetermined area and the third predetermined area are used as areas for displaying the number of staying games and the number of points in the non-AT state, while the navigation effect is pushed in the AT state. It can be used as an area for performing sequential display and the like, and the display area of the effect display device S50 can be efficiently used.

In the present embodiment, the first information and the second information have been described by taking a rotating body type gaming machine as an example, but for example, the display area SG10 of the pachinko gaming machine effect display device S40 shown in FIG. 140 is also described. It can be handled in the same manner as the above-described embodiment. That is, as described above, the display area SG10 includes, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations imitating a game of a slot machine, and a first hold for displaying main game hold information. It has a display unit SG12 (corresponding to a fourth predetermined area in the above embodiment) and a second reserved display unit SG13 (corresponding to a first predetermined area in the above embodiment). In such a first hold display unit SG12 and a second hold display unit SG13, in addition to these hold displays (first information), information related to the game such as the number of games since the previous jackpot can be displayed. Similar to the above-described embodiment, such information can be displayed as it is even when the screen is switched to the demo screen. In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Play. Although the lamps corresponding to the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13 shown in FIG. 140 are each composed of four lamps, numerical display may be performed. Specifically, in a situation where two lamps of the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h are lit, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the first hold display unit SG12, and the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h In a situation where 0 lamps are lit, it is conceivable to display a numerical value of "0" on the first hold display unit SG12. Needless to say, the display of these numerical values may be different from the bibliographic items described above in terms of visibility.

As described above, in the effect display device S40, even when the normal screen is switched to the demo screen, the first information remains as it is, but when the setting is changed, it is as shown in FIG. 295. That is, as shown in FIG. 295 (a), from the state in which the first information such as the icon, the number of staying games, and the number of points is displayed in each of the predetermined areas SR1, SR2, and SR3 on the normal screen, the electric power associated with the setting change is generated. When the disconnection / recovery is performed, the first information is erased and the effect display device S40 has no display. In this state, when the first predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the demo screen. In this state, the first information is not displayed, but the second information such as "Product A" and "Product number XX" is displayed. It has become. When this setting is changed, the advantageous section is also reset and the user stays in the normal section, so that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. Not limited to this, only specific information may be displayed among the first information. Specifically, it is conceivable to display the number of points as "0/1000".

Further, as shown in FIG. 295 (b), in the case of recovering from the power failure, the first information is erased and there is no display on the effect display device S40 as in the case of the above-mentioned setting change. Become. In this state, when the first predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the demo screen. Even in this state, the first information is not displayed as in the case of the above setting change, but "Product A" and "Product number ○" are displayed. The second information such as "○" is displayed. At the time of recovery from the power failure, the advantageous section is not reset. Therefore, if the advantageous section is before the power failure, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit and the normal section is before the power failure. If so, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. Not limited to this, as in the above, only specific information may be displayed among the first information. Specifically, it is conceivable to display the number of points as "0/1000". By displaying at least one piece of the first information (the number of points and the number of games staying), the hall manager can easily change the visibility of the bibliographic items and the number of points display after changing the setting or after the power is restored. It is possible to confirm.

As described above, it has been explained that the arrangement location of the advantageous section indicator YH can be appropriately set, and that any information of the first information may be displayed in each of the predetermined areas SR1, SR2, and SR3. , One of the specific examples relating to this is shown in FIG. 296. In the example shown in FIG. 296, the number of points is displayed in the first predetermined area SR1 of the effect display device S40, and the number of credits is displayed in the third predetermined area (in FIG. 296, the number of credits is 30). 30 is displayed), and the advantageous section indicator YH is arranged at the lower left of the reel window D160. In this state, the reel window D160 is interposed between the advantageous section indicator YH and the first predetermined area SR1, and the advantageous section indicator YH located at the lower left of the reel window D160 and the reel window D160 In the effect display device S40 located above, the first predetermined area located at the upper right of the display unit has a diagonal positional relationship.

That is, in this positional relationship, when the advantageous section indicator YH is arranged at any position below the reel window D160 and the predetermined area is arranged at any of the effect display devices S40, the advantageous section indicator YH and the first 1 It can be said that the predetermined areas are in the most distant positional relationship. By doing so, when the player is looking at the number of points in the first predetermined area, since the advantageous section indicator YH is in a position where it is difficult to see, he / she notices that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on and off. It can be difficult. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the player is staying in the normal section, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation to play due to staying in the normal section.

The effect produced by the effect display device S40 can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the main game state. Next, this kind of production will be illustrated.

(Example 1)
For example, in the present embodiment, there are five patterns of patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 287 between the main game state and the sub game state, but when there is only pattern 1, as described above, the main game state and the sub game state and the sub game state. The game state is synchronized, and as shown in pattern 1 of FIG. 287, only the situation where the Xth advantageous section ends, the X + 1th advantageous section starts after the normal section.

In this case, in the final game of the Xth advantageous section, an effect indicating that AT has ended is performed, and in the normal section, a dedicated effect indicating that the player is staying in the normal section is performed, and then the X + 1th advantageous section is produced. In the start game of, the player may be made to clearly indicate where the main game state is staying by executing the effect corresponding to the point specialization 1 state. In this case, in the game in which the X + 1th advantageous section is won in the normal section, the setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 264 may be performed. In this setting suggestion effect, in addition to the one shown in FIG. 264, for example, if the result of rolling the dice is 6, the setting 6 may be confirmed. It may be a direct number, or it may be a character or the like that implies the number), and is not particularly limited as long as it can be performed. This setting suggestion effect is not limited to the above-mentioned battle effect in the CZ1 state and the effect in the normal section. It may be performed, or the joint suggestion may be made according to the number of points acquired in the point specialization 1 state, the point specialization 2 state, and the sub normal state, and the timing and display method of setting suggestion are not particularly limited.

Further, after the setting is changed, the main state is reset and the game starts from the state of the main game state 0, so that the above-mentioned dedicated effect is also performed at this time. Here, in the game in which the advantageous section is won in the normal section, in other words, in the final game of the normal section, the specification may be such that the special effect is completed. In this way, when staying in the normal section, the effect display device S40 is designed to perform a dedicated effect corresponding only to the normal section, so that even if the advantageous section indicator YH is not viewed, It is possible to easily determine the switching between the advantageous section and the normal section.

This setting suggestion effect may be produced when the setting suggestion effect is selected in the effect lottery when entering the normal section. In addition, in the normal section where this setting suggestion effect can be executed, when a rare role is won, an effect table in which the setting suggestion effect is likely to appear is used in the normal section after the next X + 1th advantageous section, or When a setting suggestion effect is selected, it may be easier to select an effect that directly informs the setting rather than an effect that implicitly informs the setting. Further, when the rare role is won in the normal section, as the mode used for the next X + 1th advantageous section, the mode B in which the maximum number of ceiling games is smaller than that in the above-mentioned mode A in which the maximum number of ceiling games is maximum. , C, D, etc. may be easily selected, and the next mode may be given preferential treatment. By doing so, the rare role won in the normal section is not wasted, and the so-called loss feeling can be reduced in the player.

Further, in the specification having only this pattern 1, a specific condition is satisfied such as when the number of games in the remaining advantageous section remains more than the threshold value such as 1000 games, or when a specific mode is selected. In the case, in the Xth advantageous section, even if the AT ends, the advantageous section may continue without ending. Similarly, in this case, the modes B, C, and D may be selected more easily than the above-mentioned mode A. In this case, since the advantageous section indicator YH is not turned off, the player who senses this can have a feeling of expectation that the next AT can be executed relatively quickly, and can increase the motivation to play. It will be possible.

(Example 2)
Further, during the present AT, the navigation effect is executed, and as described above, the navigation effect of the present embodiment notifies the player of the reel stop order and the stop timing that are most advantageous to the player. Specifically, taking the case where the symbols A and B, which are outside the pull-in range of each reel, are arranged in the reels M51, M52, and M53, the navigation effect is the symbols A of the left, middle, and right reels. Alternatively, in addition to the navigation of B, the push order is navigated. Here, when the pushing order is 6 choices, 6 choices × symbols A and B = 12 choices, and in the navigation effect, the navigation of the choices 1 to 12 established internally is performed. Then, a plurality of any of these options 1 to 12 are randomly displayed on the effect display device S40, and if any of the displayed options 1 to 12 is actually performed, the navigation effect is performed. The effect of erasing the display is executed. As a result, if any one of the plurality of randomly selected options 1 to 12 disappears, in other words, all the navigation effects corresponding to any of the plurality of randomly selected options 1 to 12 are performed. Then, you may draw a lottery with the number of sets and the number of games added. By doing so, it is possible to promote the motivation to play during AT.
<16th Embodiment Other Modifications>

In the above-described embodiment, there are two bonus winning combinations: 1 for winning and winning only with a 3-card bet (3 specified numbers) and 2 for winning and winning only with a 2-card bet (2 specified numbers). Bonus roles have been provided, but the types and number of bonus roles are not limited to this. Next, an example of this will be described. In this modified example, in addition to the bonus combination 1 (hereinafter referred to as "BB-A") that is won and won only by betting three cards, the same type of bonus combination 3 (hereinafter referred to as "BB-B") is used. In addition to the bonus combination 2 (hereinafter referred to as "BB-C") that wins and wins only by betting two cards, the same type of bonus combination 4 (hereinafter referred to as "BB-D") is provided. There is. In other words, it has a configuration in which two bonus combinations are provided, which are valid only for three-card bets, and two bonus combinations are valid only for two-card bets.

Further, in this modification, BB-A and BB-B (hereinafter collectively referred to as "BB-A and the like") are BB-C and BB-D (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "BB-C"). The winning probability is lower than that of BB-C and the like, but the number of medals won (expected value) during BB operation is higher in BB-A and the like than in BB-C and the like. In addition, AT is valid only in the 3-card betting game in the BB-C internal medium state. That is, in this modified example, it is possible to realize different game characteristics such as the following (gaming property 1) to (gaming property 3).
(Gameability 1)
In the non-internal, the game is always played with a bet of 3 cards, and the game is aimed only at winning either BB-A or BB-B. In other words, the playability of a so-called normal machine that increases the number of balls with only a bonus.
(Playability 2)
In the non-internal, the game is always played with two bets, and the game is aimed only at winning either BB-C or BB-B. That is, the game is a so-called normal machine as in the game 1 above, but the game is less than the BB-A and the like because the number of game medals required per game is smaller and the winning probability is higher than the BB-A and the like. Easy to win with medals. However, the number of game medals that can be obtained is smaller than that of BB-A and the like. It can be said that this playability 2 is suitable for a player who wants to win a lot with a small number of game medals even if the number of medals that can be obtained is small.
(Gameability 3)
In the non-internal, a game is played with a two-card bet, and if the BB-C is won, the game is a so-called AT machine game in which the BB-C is not admitted and the game is switched to a three-card bet to aim for AT winning. Gambling (also normal in this embodiment described above). It can be said that it is a game that is suitable for players who want to increase the number of balls with AT. It should be noted that the presence or absence of winning of the BB-C can be detected by notification by a so-called reach eye or the effect display device S40 or the like.
In this way, by providing a plurality of BBs having a different specified number and setting whether or not the AT can be executed according to the game state, even though it is one spinning machine, it has a plurality of different playability. Can be made.

In this case, the relationship between the above-mentioned advantageous section clear counter (counter for the number of staying games in the advantageous section) and the number of hit games counter (referred to as "AT winning game number counter" in FIG. 297), which is the counter for the number of AT ceiling games. Is as shown in FIG. 297. In this modified example, since AT is executed with a 3-card bet (specified number 3), as shown in FIG. 297, the inside of each BB-A to D is inside the non-internal with the 2-card bet (specified number 2). During the middle and operation (hereinafter, these are simply referred to as "all states"), the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT lottery are not performed, and even if one game is exhausted, the winning game number counter is not counted. .. On the other hand, the advantageous section clear counter is counted every time one game is consumed in all the states with two bets. It should be noted that this advantageous section clear counter is counted even if one game is exhausted, as in the case of the winning game counter, during non-internal betting with two cards, inside each BB-A to D, and during operation. You may not do.

On the other hand, in the case of a game with three bets, the counter value of the advantageous section clear counter is added by 1 when one game is exhausted in all the states, and the count of the advantageous section clear counter is counted. Will be done. In addition, an advantageous section transition lottery is also held in the non-internal with a three-card bet and in the internal of BB-A to D. Here, since the condition of AT is a 3-card bet inside the BB-C, in this 3-card bet game inside the BB-C, the winning game counter is counted, but other than that. In the state, the AT lottery and the winning game counter are not counted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the capture of winning bonuses such as BB-A and BB-C, increasing the number of balls to be played during this bonus, and advancing the ceiling counter of the AT. As a result, the fairness of the game can be ensured, and the selection of the above-mentioned game characteristics 1 to 3 can be effectively shown.

The functions of BB-A to D in the above other modifications are as described above, but are not limited to this, and for example, the replay probability during bonus operation in BB-A and the like is higher than that of BB-C and the like. It is also possible to increase the winning probability, and the winning probability of BB-C etc. is higher than that of BB-A etc. These winning probabilities, the number of game medals won in the bonus, bonus It goes without saying that various parameters related to medals such as RT changes caused by the above and various items such as lottery for bonus triggers can be changed as appropriate, and different playability will occur depending on the changed contents. Further, when it is desired to play only the AT instead of selecting from the playability 1 to 3, a so-called penalty state (in addition, what kind of situation) if the BB-C is won as in the above-described embodiment. It goes without saying that it is possible to set a penalty as appropriate.) Then, by making the expected value of medals obtained by AT higher than the expected value of medals obtained by BB-A to D, etc. By setting the three-card bet inside the BB-C to be the most advantageous situation in all states, the player is more willing to play with the three-card bet inside the BB-C. Can be encouraged.

<16th Embodiment Modification 1>
Next, a modification 1 according to the 16th embodiment will be described. This modification 1 is different from the present embodiment mainly in that the transition as shown in FIG. 299 is used instead of the transition of the main gaming state and the sub-gaming state in the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 251 and 252. FIG. 299 is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the spinning machine according to the modified example 1 of the 16th embodiment, and FIGS. 300 and 301 are the rotating games according to the modified example 1 of the 16th embodiment. It is an image diagram for demonstrating the effect performed by the effect display device in a machine. Note that FIG. 299 shows a simple sub-transition state as well as a main game state.

As shown in FIG. 299, in the modified example 1, the main gaming state generally has <normal section> and <advantageous section>, and in the <advantageous section>, the normal state (non-AT in progress state) ( It is a general term for a game state in which AT can be executed, and a state during AT (in other words, a normal state even in a sub state), and this may be simply referred to as "AT" or "AT state" thereafter. ), The first AT, the second AT, which is in an AT-in-AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the first AT, and whether to shift to the first AT or to the second AT after the end of the first first AT. The first CZ for which a lottery is performed and the second CZ for which a lottery is performed to determine whether to return to the first AT or to shift to the second AT after the second and subsequent ATs are completed or after the second AT is completed. Have.

<Normal state of advantageous section>
In the <normal section>, as in the normal section of FIG. 251, by winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, the normal state of the <advantageous section> (in the present embodiment, the normal state of this <advantageous section> is In the advantageous section, AT is not executed, the transition probability to the first AT and the second AT is lower than that in the decrease section described later, and the state related to AT is the normal state.) Transition. When the normal state of this <advantageous section> is entered, the counting of the advantageous section clear counter (counting the number of games) is started. In this normal state, the specification is such that a so-called periodic lottery is performed for each predetermined number of periodic games (for example, 50G or the like) to determine whether or not to shift to the first AT. Specifically, a transition lottery is performed for each game to determine whether or not to shift to the first AT between the predetermined number of periodic games, and if the game is won, the transition to the first AT is performed in the last game of the predetermined number of periodic games. It is designed to notify whether or not to do so. In addition, if the player wins the first AT transition lottery for each game, a freeze lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a freeze. If the freeze lottery is not won, the game shifts to the first AT and the freeze lottery is won. If this is the case, a freeze will occur in the winning game, and the effect display device S40 or the like will perform an effect corresponding to the freeze to notify that the game will shift to the second AT, which is more advantageous than the first AT. After shifting to the second AT, the second AT is started from the next game of the game. Further, when shifting from the normal section to a new advantageous section, it may be configured to shift to the first CZ or the second CZ.

As for the periodic lottery, as described above, the transition lottery was performed in each game, but instead of this, for example, a lottery for whether or not to shift to AT in the first game is performed, and the AT is won. If so, it will be notified in the last game (Specification 1), or in the first half of the number of games with a predetermined cycle, a transition lottery will be held to determine whether or not to shift to AT, and in the second half. , After performing an effect to incite whether or not to shift to the first AT, it is possible to notify whether or not to shift to the first AT (Specification 2), or every game during a predetermined cycle number of games, a predetermined point. When the predetermined number of points reaches the predetermined number of points, a lottery method is used, such as notifying that the game will shift to the first AT at an appropriate timing and shifting to the first AT (Specification 3). It is possible. Further, in the case of the above specifications 1 and 2, when the AT is won in the first game or the first half part, and in the case of the above specification 3, when the predetermined number of points is reached, the same freeze lottery as described above is performed. If you win this freeze lottery, the freeze will be suspended and the freeze will occur when you notify that the AT has won, such as the timing of the last game or the second half. You can let it do. In short, it suffices to be notified by freeze before shifting to AT, and if the freeze lottery is won, it may be notified immediately, or it may be temporarily held and then the freeze effect may be executed in a later game.

In this modification 1, when the number of games having a predetermined cycle is one and this cycle is the tenth cycle (the cycle from the 450th game to the 500th game after shifting to the advantageous section), the tenth cycle is the ceiling. As a cycle, the first AT is always won. In other words, the 1st to 9th cycles are in the normal cycle state, the 10th cycle is in the ceiling cycle state, and when the predetermined number of games in the 10th cycle has elapsed, either the 1st or 2nd AT is used. It is designed to move to. Further, in the present modification 1, the specification is such that the above-mentioned freeze is more likely to occur in the ceiling periodic state than in the normal periodic state. Specifically, when a freeze lottery is executed in a game in which a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination) is won in a normal cycle state, if the winning probability is, for example, 1/10, the ceiling cycle. When a freeze lottery is executed in a game in which a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination) is won in the state, the winning probability is set to 1/3, so that the ceiling cycle state is better than the normal cycle state. , It can be realized by increasing the winning probability in the freeze lottery.

The number of games in one cycle does not have to be fixed. For example, the number of games in one cycle may be determined by lottery so that the number of games in any of 10 to 50 games is one cycle. good. Further, the number of games remaining until the end of the cycle may be subtracted depending on the winning combination during the cycle.

As described above, the ceiling cycle state has a higher probability of winning the freeze lottery than the normal cycle state. Instead, for example, in the AT lottery, the AT has a lottery probability according to the winning combination. It is a specification to draw a lottery for winning or failing, and rare roles such as prize-C (cherry), prize-D (watermelon A) and prize-E (watermelon B) win the AT lottery rather than small roles and replay roles. If the specification has a high probability, in the normal cycle state, it freezes only when the AT is won in a small role or a replay role (in other words, only when the AT is won with a probability lower than the winning probability in the rare role). On the other hand, in the ceiling cycle state, freeze occurs only when the AT is won in the rare role (in other words, only when the AT is won with a higher probability than the winning probability in the small role or the replay role). It is also possible to increase the probability of freezing by making it. The rare role may be a replay role instead of a winning role for paying out game medals. As a specific example, the rare role may be configured to have a cherry replay role, a watermelon A replay role, and a watermelon B replay role. In the normal cycle state, the freeze occurs only when the AT is won by winning-E (watermelon B) among the rare roles, while in the ceiling cycle state, winning-C (cherry) and winning-E It is also possible to make it easier for freezes to occur by causing freezes when (Watermelon B) is won (by increasing the number of rare roles that are the targets of freezes). Further, in the normal cycle state, the freeze may or may not occur by executing the freeze lottery, while in the ceiling cycle state, the freeze may always occur (100% freeze occurs). The point is that the ceiling cycle state is more likely to cause freeze than the normal cycle state, and the specifications for that purpose are not particularly limited. Further, when the freeze is generated, the freeze is generated at a predetermined timing before the reel rotation of the game won in the freeze lottery starts, and at a predetermined timing before the reel rotation of the next game of the game won in the freeze lottery starts. It may be configured to have a case of causing a freeze. With such a configuration, the player is expected to win the freeze lottery in the game that won the rare role even if the rare role is stopped in the game in which the freeze did not occur. Can be embraced. Further, the freeze may be generated at the time of the start lever operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the third stop operation, or the like.

In this way, even if the ceiling cycle state reaches the ceiling cycle state by causing a freeze and shifting to the second AT, which is more advantageous than the first AT, than in the normal cycle state, the ceiling cycle state is higher than the normal cycle state. Since the possibility of shifting to the second AT, which leads to a large number of balls, is increased, the ceiling cycle state can be a game that promotes the motivation to play, rather than a mere digestion game, and is in the ceiling cycle state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this modified example 1, the specification is such that the ceiling state is such that the AT is always won in a predetermined number of cycles (10th cycle in the above example). Therefore, when the predetermined number of games (for example, 500 games) is reached, the ceiling state may be set, and the conditions for setting the ceiling state are not particularly limited.

In the condition of this ceiling state, only the upper limit of the difference number of balls, which is one of the end conditions of the advantageous section (also referred to as the maximum difference number, specifically, 2400 (MY2400), etc.). , It is preferable to set it so that it can be put out within the advantageous section. Specifically, when setting the number of ceiling games, if the average net increase in the number of games per game in the 1st AT is, for example, 10, a minimum of 240 games are required to output the above 2400 games. In order to secure the above, it is preferable that the ceiling game number is any number of games less than 1260 games obtained by subtracting 240 games from 1500 games which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Further, in the specification for performing the periodic lottery as in the first modification, it is preferable to set the ceiling cycle to end in less than the above 1260 games. The point is that the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games) should be satisfied before the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section (2400 games) is satisfied, and the ceiling condition is set within the range satisfying this condition. You just have to do it. Even when the ceiling condition is set in this way, for example, assuming a game with a 3-card bet, the number of games up to the ceiling is counted (the number of games is subtracted) with a 3-card bet. In the case where the specification is such that this is not performed in the two-card bet, if an irregular situation occurs in which the player mistakenly plays the two-card bet game for a predetermined number of games, the above-mentioned also occurs between the predetermined number of games. Since the advantageous section is counted as in the above, it is assumed that the number of remaining games in the advantageous section will be less than the number of games required to obtain the above difference number upper limit when the ceiling state is reached. NS. In such a case, the above 2400 game medals cannot be obtained, but when the number of games to the ceiling is low, the player intentionally plays a game with two bets on the ceiling. It is possible to prevent capture such as reaching.

By doing so, even if the ceiling state is reached, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is small and the maximum number of difference sheets in the advantageous section cannot be obtained. As in Example 1, when a freeze occurs and the player shifts to the second AT, which is expected to generate more balls than the first AT, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second AT, which has been shifted, ends in the middle. Further, in particular, in a rotating machine equipped with an ending state (AT that continues until the end of the advantageous section; see FIGS. 251 and 252) in which a large number of balls can be obtained, the advantageous section is surely set. It is possible to secure the maximum number of balls to be played, and it is possible to meet the player's expectation that a large number of balls can be played.

<1st AT>
The first AT is an increasing section in which the game medals increase by shifting to the AT lottery or the like in the normal state of the <advantageous section> and executing the navigation effect. The first AT continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games), and ends when the predetermined number of games is reached. In this first AT, when the first AT is completed, the process shifts to the first CZ, and when the second and subsequent first ATs are completed, the process shifts to the second CZ. The end condition of the first AT is that the number of games reaches a predetermined number as described above, but instead of this, for example, as in AT5 (this AT state) in FIG. 251 the number of navigations. May be the end condition that the number of players has reached a predetermined number, or the fall lottery that ends the first AT with a predetermined probability may be performed and the fall lottery may be won as the end condition. It goes without saying that it is not limited.

<2nd AT>
The second AT can be mainly transferred from the first CZ, and by continuing a specific number of games (for example, 100 games) longer than that of the first AT, it is possible to obtain more game medals than the first AT. .. In this second AT, after the end, the process shifts to the second CZ. In the second AT, the number of specific games is longer than that of the first AT, which is more advantageous to the player than the first AT. However, for example, the number of continuous games is the same as that of the first AT. However, in addition to this, by making it possible to win the BB state (so-called pseudo-bonus) shown in FIG. 252, it is more advantageous for the player, or every time the predetermined number of games is reached, the second AT is restarted from the beginning. It may be more advantageous to the player by performing a loop lottery as to whether or not to execute, and the point is that the second AT may be more advantageous to the player than the first AT.

<1st CZ>
As described above, the first CZ is a state in which the transition is made after the first AT is completed, and the player stays for a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games) and returns to the first AT during the predetermined number of games. It is a chance zone to draw lots for whether or not to move to the second AT. Further, in this first CZ, the navigation effect (push order navigation) is not executed, and the number of balls is reduced. Here, the decrease section is a state in which the expected value of the number of OUTs per game is less than 3 while the number of INs per game is 3 in the case of betting 3 cards, and 1 game. The expected value of the number of OUTs around is less than the number of INs. Regarding the expected value of the number of OUTs, when the push order navigation occurs, the push order small winning combination is awarded accordingly, and for the winning combination where watermelon or the like may be missed, the winning combination is made without missing. Needless to say, it is an expected value. That is, if the game is continued in the decreasing section, the medals held will decrease.

In the 1st CZ, a 1st point acquisition lottery (point addition lottery) is performed for each game according to the winning combination, and when the 1st point is acquired (granted), the 1st point is not shown as a 1st point counter (secondary). It may be a counter on the control board S side, or it may be configured to transmit the counter value information to the sub control board S side as a counter on the main control board M side), as shown in FIG. The first point acquired in the first point display area PR1 located at the upper left portion of the effect display device S40 is displayed (in the figure, the state in which "5" points are acquired is shown).

In this 1st point acquisition lottery (1st point granting lottery), for example, in the case of a winning combination such as a small role or a replay role, it is selected from 0 to 2 points and for 0 to 1 point. While using a low-probability lottery table with a high selection probability, in the case of a rare role, etc., a high-probability lottery table with a high selection probability for 1 to 2 points is used while being selected from any of 1 to 3 points. Therefore, the first point is more likely to be given to the rare role than the small role or the replay role. Regarding the first point acquisition lottery, for example, regardless of the winning combination, a lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability and any point may be given, and the lottery method is not particularly limited.

In addition, after the first point acquisition lottery is performed, an icon acquisition lottery is performed to determine the icon to be displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to Sa5, which will be described later, according to the acquired first point. It has become like. Specifically, for example, when the number of points is 0 (when points cannot be obtained), there is no icon or an icon with a low expectation of obtaining the first point (for example, "crying lion" described later. Use the icon acquisition low lottery table where it is relatively easy to select (etc.), and if you can acquire 1 point or more (if you can acquire points), the icon with high expectation of acquiring the first point (for example, The icon acquisition height table, which is relatively easy for the "laughing lion" described later) to be selected, is used. Needless to say, the relationship between the number of points earned (including 0) and the selected icon (including no icon) can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the revolving pachinko machine. ..

As a production state of the first CZ, as shown in FIG. 299, the player indicates that the production of an introductory movie or the like that is continuously performed for a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) is performed and the first CZ is started. Based on the introduction part that notifies to, the point accumulation part that is executed after the end of the introduction part and accumulates the first point, and the predetermined number of points (for example, 10 points) accumulated in this point accumulation part. It has a judge part that notifies whether or not to shift to the first AT or the second AT in one game.

That is, in the 1st CZ, after the introduction part, when the 1st point is accumulated in the point accumulation part, a transfer lottery to the 1st AT or the 2nd AT is performed, and if the transfer lottery is won, the judge part In the case of a shift to the 1st AT or the 2nd AT, and if the lottery is missed, the judge part will give a performance to the effect that neither the 1st AT nor the 2nd AT will be transferred. In this modification 1, when the transition lottery is won and the transition to the 1st AT or the 2nd AT is decided, for example, in the judge part, a battle effect in which the ally character and the opponent character battle is performed, and the 1st AT is reached. In the case of transition, in response to this, for example, a production such as victory 1 such as winning the opponent character normally is performed. In addition, when shifting to the second AT, in response to this, for example, the production of victory 2 such as overwhelming the opponent character is performed. Furthermore, if neither the 1st AT nor the 2nd AT shifts, the defeat effect such that the ally character loses to the opponent character is performed. The judge part may be configured to be continuous between a plurality of games, and if such a configuration is made, each game is based on the game result of the point accumulation part and / or the lottery result of the game executed in the judge part. At the above, a lottery for whether or not to shift to the first AT or the second AT may be executed.

When the predetermined number of games of the 1st CZ remains after the defeat is produced in this judge part (for example, when the judge part is performed in the 20th game from the start of the 1st CZ and the remaining 20 games remain. Etc.), the process of returning to the point accumulation part, accumulating the first point again, and shifting to the judge part when a predetermined number of points are accumulated is repeated until the predetermined number of games is reached. In addition, even if the number of points is less than the predetermined number of points in the point accumulation part, when the predetermined number of games is reached, a lottery for shifting to the first AT or the second AT according to the first point is performed, and the game is transferred to the judge part. If the victory 1 or 2 is described above, the game shifts to the first AT or the second AT, and if the game is defeated, the game shifts to the normal state of the <advantageous section>. As shown in FIG. 299, when the conditions for shifting to the normal section are satisfied in the advantageous section, the game shifts to the normal section after the end of the game. For example, if the player is defeated in the judge part and is configured to satisfy the transition conditions for the normal section, the game will shift to the normal state of the <normal section> after the end of the game.

In this way, the point accumulation part and the judge part are repeated, but since the judge part returns to the point accumulation part and the first point is accumulated again from the beginning, the first (Nth) judge part and the second time The degree of expectation of victory (in other words, the degree of expectation of winning the above transition lottery) is the same as that of the (N + 1th) judge part. Instead of this, the N + 1th judge part has a higher expectation of victory than the Nth judge part, and the N + 2nd judge part has a higher expectation of victory than the N + 1th judge part. As described above, the higher the number of repetitions of the judge part, the higher the expectation of victory. Specifically, in the point accumulation part corresponding to the Nth time, the first point starts from 0 points, whereas in the point accumulation part corresponding to the N + 1th time, the first point starts from 10 points. In the point accumulation part corresponding to the N + 2nd time, it can be realized by adding the initial points every time there is a repetition, such as starting from the state where the first point is 20 points. In addition, the point accumulation part corresponding to the N + 1th judge part uses the lottery table with a higher probability of acquiring the first point than the point accumulation part corresponding to the Nth judge-part, and so on. It can also be realized by using a lottery table with a higher probability of acquiring the first point each time. Furthermore, when the first point is accumulated in the point accumulation part and exceeds a predetermined value, it is configured to shift to a judge part that continues for multiple games (it is possible to stay in the judge part for multiple games), and this judge is configured. In each game, the transition lottery is performed based on various parameters including the number of times the judge part is repeated as described above (one parameter is how many times the judge part is). You may. In this case, since the number of times the judge part is repeated is one of the parameters that affect the transition lottery, the more the judge part is repeated, the higher the overall winning percentage of the judge part can be (compared to the Nth judge part). The winning percentage is higher for the N + 1th judge part). Further, in the case of this specification, in the judge part that continues for a plurality of games, if the transition lottery is won, the judge part may be terminated and the game may be shifted to the first AT or the second AT (shift to the gaming state according to the transition lottery result). However, even if the transition lottery is won, a plurality of first ATs or second ATs can be won by stocking the winning result (for example, stocking the winning result when the first AT is won) so as not to end the judge part. It may be configured as follows. The point is that every time the judge part is repeated (the point accumulation part is repeated), the winning expectation of the above transition lottery (winning expectation in the judge part) should be higher, and the specific method Is not particularly limited.

In the above, even if the number of points is less than the predetermined number, when the predetermined number of games is reached, the game is forcibly shifted to the judge part. If the game is played over (), even if the number of first points earned is less than the predetermined number of N games before the predetermined number of games, the game is forcibly transferred to the judge part. The point is that if the first CZ ends with a predetermined number of games, at what timing does the judge part shift to just before the end of the first CZ (in the number of games approaching the predetermined number of games)? Can be set as appropriate.

In the introduction part, as described above, a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) are continuously produced by the introduction movie or the like (in other words, the current display unit SA1 and each hold display unit Sa1 to be described later shown in FIG. 300). The icon of Sa5 and the like are not displayed and the points are not displayed in the point acquisition area PR1.) On the other hand, even during this predetermined number of games, the first point acquisition lottery according to the winning combination is performed for each game. It has become. The first points acquired here are not notified in the introduction part, but are notified in the point accumulation part after the end of the introduction part.

In the point acquisition part, as shown in FIG. 300, in the area on the right side of the effect display device S40, the hold display units Sa1 to Sa5 arranged so as to be arranged vertically and the current hold display units Sa1 arranged above the hold display unit Sa1. The effect of displaying the display unit SA1 is executed. An icon or the like indicating an expected value of the first point that can be acquired in the current game can be displayed on the current display unit SA1, and a predetermined game from the next game of the current game is displayed on each of the reserved display units Sa1 to Sa5. It is possible to display an icon or the like indicating an expected value of points that can be obtained in up to a number of games (after 5 games, the predetermined number of games may be described as 5 games). Specifically, in the introduction part, as described above, the first point acquisition lottery is performed for each of the first to fifth games, and the first point acquisition of the first to fifth games of the introduction part is performed. The lottery results are displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to Sa4, respectively.

That is, in the present modification 1, generally, the hold display corresponding to the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed in the past game is displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to 5, and these current display units are displayed. The display of SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to 5 moves so as to shift one by one from the bottom to the top as seen in FIG. 300 for each game, and also in the production of the game, the past lottery result (or the current). The production mode corresponds to the display unit SA1) (when a predetermined point has been obtained in the past first point acquisition lottery, an effect indicating that the predetermined point has been obtained is executed in the game, etc.). .. Specifically, it is as follows.

In the current game, the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed 5 games before the current game is reflected, and the current display unit SA1 corresponds to the result of the 1st point acquisition lottery performed 5 games before. Icons, etc. may be displayed (in other words, icons, etc. may not be displayed). In addition, for the game one game after the current game (next game), the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed four games before the current game is reflected, and the hold display unit Sa1 is displayed four games before. An icon or the like corresponding to the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed may be displayed, and for the game two games after the current game, the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed three games before the current game. Is reflected, the hold display unit Sa2 may display an icon or the like corresponding to the first point acquisition lottery performed three games before, and the game three games after the current game is currently displayed. The result of the first point acquisition lottery two games before the game is reflected, and the hold display unit Sa3 may display an icon or the like corresponding to the first point acquisition lottery performed two games before. , After 4 games of the current game, the 1st point acquisition lottery 1 game before (previous game) from the current game is reflected, and the 1st point acquisition lottery performed 1 game before that is reflected in the hold display section Sa4. An icon or the like corresponding to the result may be displayed.

In addition, the result of the 1st point acquisition lottery performed in the current game is reflected in the game 5 games after the current game, and the 1st point acquisition lottery result performed in the current game is displayed on the hold display unit Sa5. Corresponding icons, etc. may be displayed. In other words, the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed in the current game is, in principle, the points to be acquired in the game after the predetermined game (after N games) from the current game.

Then, the display of the icon or the like (including no display) displayed on the current display unit SA1 is erased when the game ends and the next game is started, and is displayed on the hold display unit Sa1. The display of the icon etc. is moved to SA1, the display of the icon etc. displayed on the hold display unit Sa2 is moved to Sa1, and the display of the icon etc. is sequentially moved up and displayed. ing. In this case, the display of the icon or the like of the hold display unit Sa5 moves to the hold display unit Sa4, and the icon or the like corresponding to the first point acquisition lottery performed in the previous game is newly added to the hold display unit Sa5. It will be displayed.

Regarding the display of the icons of the current display unit SA1 and the icons of the respective hold display units Sa1 to Sa5, they are displayed so as to be sequentially moved up as described above at the timing when the game ends and the next game starts. (Although the display of the current display unit SA1 and each hold display unit Sa1 to Sa5 has been updated), instead of this, the timing when the game ends (for example, the timing when the last stop button D40 is released, or the game medal (Predetermined timing after the payout is completed, etc.), or the timing when the bet button D220 of the next game of the game is pressed, the timing when the bet button D220 is released, the start lever D50 is pressed. It may be an appropriate timing such as timing, and the point is that icons and the like can be displayed to the player before the reel of the next game of the game rotates (before the stop operation becomes possible). If this is the case (if the expectation of acquiring the first point is notified), the timing is not particularly limited.

Here, in FIG. 300, assuming that the state of the effect display device S40 in the next game (the first game of the point accumulation part) of the game in which the introduction part is completed is shown, the first game of the introduction part (from the current game) is shown. On the current display unit SA1 corresponding to (the game 5 games before), a "laughing lion" icon indicating that the expectation for obtaining the first point is high is displayed, and the player is asked to use this game. We are informing you that there is a high possibility that you will be able to earn points.

In addition, the same "laughing lion" icon as SA1 is displayed on the hold display units Sa1 and Sa4, and points can be obtained in the next game of the current game and four games after the current game. It informs that there is a high possibility. Further, no display is made on the hold display units Sa2 and Sa3, indicating an unknown state regarding the degree of expectation of earning points. In addition, the icon of "crying lion" is displayed on the hold display unit Sa5, and the player is notified that the expectation of acquiring the first point is lower than that of the icon of "laughing lion". ing.

The icons and the like displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to Sa5 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 300, and are directly displayed, for example, "high expectation" and "low expectation". Etc., and various display forms can be applied. In short, it goes without saying that the mode is not particularly limited as long as it is displayed in such a manner that the player can grasp the degree of expectation of acquiring the first point. Further, in notifying the degree of expectation of acquiring the first point, in addition to the visual notification shown in FIG. It may be a tactile notification by a thing or the like.

When a predetermined number of points are acquired in the point accumulation part, the process shifts to the judge part as described above. In other words, in the point accumulation part, the next game (after one game) of the game in which a predetermined number of points are accumulated (hereinafter referred to as "reaching game") becomes the judge part, and in the case of defeat in this judge part (AT). (If you do not win in the lottery to move to), the next game of the reached game (after 2 games) will return to the point accumulation part, but in this modification 1, this judge part also The specifications are such that the first point acquisition lottery is held. Further, in this judge part, an effect (not shown) different from that of FIG. 300 is executed, and the point number display unit RPR1 shown in FIG. 300, the current display unit SA1, and each hold display unit Sa1 to Sa5 and the like are not displayed.

In this case, assuming that the state at the time of the reaching game is FIG. 300, in the next game, the judge part, while performing an effect different from that of FIG. 300, the first point acquisition lottery and the icon are internally performed. In addition to conducting the acquisition lottery, the results of the point acquisition lottery performed 5 games before this judge part are not reflected. If the judge part is defeated, the player returns to the first point acquisition part and the production is performed as shown in FIG. 300. In addition, the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed 5 games before the above-mentioned judge part will be reflected in the point acquisition part returned from the judge part, that is, in the next game of the judge part (games one after another of the reached games). It has become.

Therefore, in the next game of the judge part, the result of the first point acquisition lottery 6 games (the value obtained by adding 1 game of the number of staying games of the judge part to the predetermined number of games) is reflected. The Rukoto. Therefore, here, an icon or the like reflecting the result of the first point acquisition lottery in the judge part is displayed on Sa5, and an icon or the like reflecting the result of the first point acquisition lottery in the reaching game is displayed on Sa4. Then, the lottery result of 6 games before is reflected in the current display unit SA1. In other words, when passing through the judge part, the current display unit SA1 reflects the result of the first point acquisition lottery before the number of games obtained by adding the number of staying games in the judge part to the predetermined number of games, and displays the hold. Part Sa5 reflects the result of the first point acquisition lottery in the final game of the judge part.

In the present embodiment, if the judge part is defeated, the point accumulation part is shifted to, but instead, if the judge part is defeated, the introduction part may be returned. In this case, the icons displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to 5 up to that point are deleted (the past first point acquisition lottery result is deleted), and the predetermined number of games of the introduction part is deleted from the beginning. The first point acquisition lottery may be performed. That is, after the end of the judge part, the result of the first point acquisition lottery up to that point may be reset and the introduction part may be restarted. In other words, every time the judge part ends, the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to 5 are all hidden, and a period for accumulating the hold called the introduction part may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, in the judge part, the result of the transition lottery to the first AT or the second AT is notified, and the first point acquisition lottery is also performed. However, in this judge part, the first point is obtained. Instead of performing the acquisition lottery, a transfer lottery to the first AT or the second AT according to the first point accumulated in the point accumulation part may be performed, and the lottery result may be notified.

As described above, in the present modification 1, in the point accumulation part of the first CZ, in the current game currently being played, the first point acquisition lottery is performed in advance before the current game, and the result is transferred to the current game. In addition to reflecting the results, the results of the first point acquisition lottery performed in advance are displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to Sa5, and the first points over the current game and the subsequent five games are displayed. The player is notified of the degree of expectation of acquisition. Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the game while having a sense of expectation for the result of the game to be executed in the future.

In addition, in the 1st CZ, the 1st point acquisition lottery is also performed in the introduction part and the judge part other than the point accumulation part, and it is reflected in the subsequent game. Therefore, in the 1st CZ, the 1st point acquisition lottery is performed. Can be done at all times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game in the introduction part and the judge part from becoming a useless digestion game in acquiring the first point, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Moreover, since the introduction part and the judge part do not become a useless digestion game (because the first point acquisition lottery is performed), the useless digestion game is possible within the limited number of games of the first CZ, which has an upper limit on the number of games. It is not necessary to reduce the number of games to be executed by the introduction part and the judge part, and the number of games to be executed by the introduction part and the judge part can be freely set to improve the degree of freedom in the production composition. Can be done.

<2nd CZ>
The second CZ is a state of transition after the second and subsequent first ATs are completed or after the second AT is completed, and stays for a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games), and during the predetermined number of games, the first AT is reached. It is a chance zone for drawing lots to decide whether to return or move to the second AT. Further, this second CZ is set as a reduction section in which the number of balls to be ejected is reduced without the navigation effect being executed. In the present embodiment, the predetermined number of games in the first CZ and the predetermined number of games in the second CZ are both the same number of games (40 games), but the number is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of games in the first CZ and the second CZ Needless to say, the number of games may be different from the predetermined number of games. Further, the predetermined number of games of the second CZ may be changed instead of fixed. Specifically, in the game that has entered the second CZ, the predetermined number of games may be determined by lottery, or if the fall lottery is won with a predetermined probability instead of the predetermined number of games. The predetermined number of games may be changed by the end of the second CZ.

In the second CZ, a second point acquisition lottery (point addition lottery) is performed every game, and when the second point is acquired (granted), the second point is added to a second point counter (not shown), and the figure shows. As shown in 301, the second point acquired in the second point display area PR2 or the like located at the lower right of the effect display device S40 is displayed.

In this second CZ, as shown in FIG. 301, an effect in which a ally character and an enemy character battle is executed from the start to the end of the second CZ. Further, patrol hold display units Sb1 to Sb5 arranged side by side are provided in the lower part of the effect display device S40, and a second point display area PR2 for displaying the accumulated second point is provided on the right side of the patrol hold display unit Sb5. (In FIG. 301, it is displayed that there are 30 accumulated second points).

Similar to the above-described hold display units Sa1 to Sa5 in FIG. 300, the patrol hold display units Sb1 to Sb5 are configured to display an icon or the like indicating the degree of expectation of acquiring the second point. In the 2CZ, in the game that has entered the second CZ, the icons and the like to be displayed on each of the patrol hold display units Sb1 to Sb5 are determined according to the winning combination in the game. In the example shown in FIG. 301, the patrol display unit Sb1 displays the character 1 as an icon or the like, the patrol display unit Sb3 displays the character 2 as an icon or the like, and the patrol display unit Sb4 displays the character 3 as an icon or the like. At the same time, in the patrol display units Sb2 and Sb5, there is no character as an icon or the like. In the first modification, the expectation that the second point can be obtained is set in the order of the character 2, the character 1, and the character 3.

The icons and the like displayed on the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 301, and are directly displayed, for example, as described above, such as "high expectation" and "low expectation". Etc., and various display forms can be applied. In short, it goes without saying that the mode is not particularly limited as long as it is displayed in such a manner that the player can grasp the degree of expectation of acquiring the second point. Further, in notifying the degree of expectation of acquiring the second point, in addition to the visual notification shown in FIG. 301, the notification may be made audibly or tactilely.

The patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5 reflect the display (character 1) of the leftmost patrol display unit Sb1 in the game that has entered the second CZ, and in the next game, the display on the right side of the patrol display unit Sb1. The display of the patrol display unit Sb2 (without characters) is reflected, and in the next game, the display of the patrol display unit Sb3 (character 2) is reflected. It is designed to reflect the display on the right patrol display. Then, in the next game that reflects the display of the rightmost patrol display unit Sb5, the display of the leftmost patrol display unit Sb1 is reflected again, and so on, in the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5, for each game. It is designed to patrol each patrol display unit while sequentially shifting to the adjacent patrol display unit. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301, by making the patrol display unit Sb3 currently reflected larger than the other patrol display units, the player is shown which patrol display unit is currently reflected. ing.

Regarding the icons and the like displayed on the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5, in the rush game that has entered the second CZ, a lottery is performed to determine the icons to be displayed on the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5, and the icons based on the lottery result are obtained. Etc. are displayed. In the lottery for determining this icon, the lottery may be performed with a certain probability, or the lottery may be performed with a probability according to the winning combination of the above-mentioned rush game.

Further, regarding the icons and the like displayed on the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5, in the second CZ, a lottery for displaying the icons and the like is performed for each game. Specifically, a character acquisition lottery for displaying a new character on the patrol display unit without a character and a character change lottery for changing to a better character are performed on the patrol display unit where the character is already displayed. There is. By winning these lottery, a new character is added to the patrol display unit without an icon or the like, or a better character is displayed on the patrol display unit where the character already exists. In the above example, a lottery is performed to add a character as an icon or the like, but conversely, a lottery may be performed without a character, and an icon or the like is added to each patrol display unit. And deletion can be set as appropriate. On the other hand, the same state as that at the time of the rush game may be maintained until the end of the second CZ without changing the icon or the like determined in the rush game.

In this 2nd CZ, the 2nd point acquisition lottery (2nd point granting lottery) is performed for each game, and in this 2nd point acquisition lottery, the display of the patrol display part currently reflected and the winning at that time are performed. It is designed to be performed according to the role. That is, the second point acquisition lottery is based on the lottery table (not shown) according to the combination of the icons such as characters 1 to 3 and no character in the patrol display unit currently reflected and the winning combination at that time. I try to do. For example, if character 2 has the highest expectation, even if the winning combination is a small role or a replay role, a predetermined number of second points (for example, 5 points) can always be obtained, and character 2 and rare. If it is a combination with a combination, the second point can always be obtained, and more points (for example, 20 points, etc.) than the predetermined number of second points can be obtained. In addition, in the case of a combination of no character and a small role or a replay role, the ratio of the second point being 0 is high, and in the case of a combination of no character and a rare role, the ratio of the second point that can be obtained is high. , It is higher than the case of a small role or a replay role, but the number of points that can be obtained can be reduced. The point is that it may be appropriately set so that an appropriate second point can be given step by step according to the reliability of the icon or the like and the strength of the winning combination.

In the second CZ, as a result of performing the above-mentioned second point acquisition lottery, for example, when 10 points are obtained as the second point, for example, the ally character shown in FIG. 301 attacks the enemy character and the enemy. The character takes 10 points of damage, and these 10 points are cumulatively added to the 2nd point display area PR2 to inform the player that the 2nd point has been obtained and the current cumulative number of points. It is designed to do.

Here, in the second CZ, the threshold value of the accumulated second points has a breakthrough value and a maximum value, and when the second point acquired as described above reaches the breakthrough value, the first AT is reached. While the return is confirmed, the specification is such that when the maximum value is reached, the transition to the second AT is confirmed. When the return to the 1st AT is confirmed, the effect of defeating the enemy character shown in FIG. 301 is executed, after that, a new enemy character appears, and when the return to the 2nd AT is confirmed, the new one is executed. The effect display device S40, such as executing an effect of defeating an enemy, notifies the player of the shift to the first AT or the second AT. Needless to say, the effect of shifting to the first AT or the second AT is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to notify the effect.

Further, in the second CZ, in the rush game shifted to the second CZ, the above-mentioned breakthrough value is determined according to the winning combination in the rush game, and the breakthrough value of the second CZ is the second CZ. It is a variable value determined by lottery every time the game shifts to (in other words, it can be said to be an initial determination value determined at the time of entering the second CZ). In this rush game, the specifications may be such that the predetermined number of games is determined together with the breakthrough value as described above. Further, the maximum value of the second CZ is a predetermined fixed value (for example, 100 points or the like). In this second CZ, since the breakthrough value is a variable value, the difference between the maximum value and the breakthrough value is large (for example, when the breakthrough value is 30 and the difference is 70) and when it is small (for example, when the difference is 70). , When the breakthrough value is 70 and the difference is 30, etc.).

In such a case, in situation A where the difference between the maximum value and the breakthrough value is large, the number of points up to the breakthrough value is small (for example, the number of second points reaches 30), and the number of points from the breakthrough value to the maximum value is large. Since it becomes large (for example, if the breakthrough value is 30, 70 is required as the number of second points after that), it is easy to shift to the first AT, but it is difficult to shift to the second AT. On the other hand, in situation B where the difference between the maximum value and the breakthrough value is small, the number of points up to the breakthrough value is large (for example, the second point reaches 70), and the number of points from the breakthrough value to the maximum value is small. Therefore (for example, if the breakthrough value is 70, the number of second points is 30 after that), so it is difficult to shift to the first AT, but after the shift to the first AT is confirmed, it is easy to shift to the second AT. Become.

In this way, by setting the breakthrough value to the variable value, the above-mentioned situation A and situation B will occur. In such a case, for example, in situation A, it is shown that the transition to the first AT is easy. In the production mode (for example, giving strength to the enemy character and giving a relatively weak enemy character (in other words, a highly reliable production for the transition to the 1st AT)), or in situation B , Until the 1st AT is confirmed, the normal production is performed, and after the 1st is confirmed, the production in the production mode indicating that it is easy to shift to the 2nd AT (as described above, a relatively weak enemy character is put out, etc.) ) Is possible. In the above example, it was shown that the reliability is high by putting out a weak enemy character, but instead of this, for example, the frequency of so-called cut-in production etc. is increased as the reliability is high. As described above, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode such as notifying the player by switching the effect frequency. In short, the production mode may be any production mode according to the reliability of the transition of the first AT and the second AT according to the breakthrough value which can be said to be the initial determination value, and the production mode is not particularly limited.

In this modification 1, the breakthrough value is a variable value and the maximum value is a fixed value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the breakthrough value is a fixed value and the maximum value is a variable value, or the breakthrough value and the maximum value. Both values may be fixed values or variable values determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when determining the fluctuation value, it is not the game that has transitioned to the second CZ as described above, but it is determined between several games after the transition to the second CZ, or at any timing after the transition to the second CZ. Is also good. Furthermore, when determining the fluctuation value, it is not a lottery according to the winning combination of the game in which the determination is made as described above, but a separate lottery (for example, a lottery with a certain probability) regardless of the presence or absence of the winning combination. It may be decided by (decision, etc.).

That is, in the second CZ, when the accumulated second points reach the breakthrough value (when the breakthrough value is exceeded) during the predetermined number of games which is the maximum number of staying games in the second CZ, the return to the first AT is performed. Although it is confirmed, even in this state, the second CZ does not end, and the second point is accumulated even after that. In the present embodiment, in a situation where the second point after reaching the breakthrough value is accumulated, the player is directed to the effect that the breakthrough value has been reached (the effect that the transition to the first AT has been confirmed). Is not performed, and the player is provided with a tense game until the end of the second CZ. When the accumulated 2nd points reach the maximum value (exceeding the maximum value), the effect that the maximum value is immediately reached (the transition to the 2nd AT is confirmed) even before the predetermined number of games is produced. The second CZ is terminated and the game shifts to the second AT. On the other hand, if the accumulated second points are less than the maximum value even if the predetermined number of games is reached, the second CZ is performed. Is finished, and it shifts to the first AT.

In the present embodiment, under the situation where the second point after reaching the breakthrough value is accumulated, the effect of reaching the breakthrough value is not performed, but as soon as the maximum value is reached, the effect is not performed. Although it is set to notify, instead of this, an effect indicating that the breakthrough value has been reached may be executed at any timing under the above circumstances, or the next after reaching the maximum value. It is possible to notify that the maximum value has been reached at a predetermined timing of a game or the like, and it goes without saying that the presence / absence and timing of notification that the breakthrough value or the maximum value has been reached can be appropriately set. Further, in the present embodiment, the second CZ is terminated when the maximum value is reached, but instead of this, when the predetermined number of games of the second CZ remains at the time when the maximum value is reached, the second CZ is used as it is. You may try to continue. In this case, a lottery related to the subsequent AT, such as a lottery for adding the number of AT games to be performed after that, is performed so that the rare role won in the remaining games after reaching the maximum value is not so-called loss. It is desirable to do.

If the accumulated second points are less than the maximum value even after reaching the predetermined number of games, the number of second points is increased according to the excess number of second points obtained by subtracting the breakthrough value from the second points at that time. A lottery for transition to 2AT is performed, and if the player wins, the game shifts to the second AT, and if the player does not win, the game shifts to the first AT. Regarding the lottery for shifting to the second AT according to the number of excess second points, in this modification 1, the larger the second point, the larger the value obtained by adding the excess second point to the breakthrough value. , The closer it is to the maximum value), the winning probability of the 2nd AT is set to be high, but it is not limited to this, and the lottery can be done with a certain probability regardless of the number of excess 2 points. , Lottery according to the winning combination in the game that has reached the predetermined number of games in the 2nd CZ (final game of the 2nd CZ) (for example, the rare role is more likely to win the 2nd AT than the small role or the replay role, etc. ) May be performed.

In addition, in the second CZ, when the accumulated second points are less than the breakthrough value and the predetermined number of games is reached, a lottery for transition to the first AT is performed according to the number of the second points, and the game is won. On the other hand, if the player does not win the first AT transition lottery, the first CZ ends and the player shifts to the normal state of the <advantageous section>. Regarding the lottery for shifting to the first AT according to the above-mentioned second point, in the present modification 1, the closer the second point is to the breakthrough value, the higher the winning probability of the first AT is set. However, the lottery is not limited to this, and a lottery is performed with a certain probability regardless of the number of second points, or a lottery according to the winning combination in the game that has reached the predetermined number of games in the second CZ (the final game of the second CZ). (For example, a rare role has a higher probability of winning the first AT than a small role or a replay role).

In this way, in the second CZ, which is the decreasing section, even if the cumulative value of the second point reaches the breakthrough value and the first AT is determined, the number of balls to be ejected at the first AT is reduced by continuing to perform the second CZ. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suppress the ball ejection so as not to cause an excessive ball ejection with high gambling. Further, in the second CZ after the first AT is confirmed, since it has a game property of accumulating the second point up to the maximum value in order to shift to the second AT which is more advantageous than the first AT, the breakthrough value has been reached. Even after that, the game can be played with a purpose, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second CZ after the first AT is determined from becoming a mere digestion game, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Moreover, when the accumulated second point reaches the maximum value, even before the predetermined number of games, the second CZ, which is the decreasing section, ends and the game shifts to the second AT, so that the maximum value is quickly reached. The more it reaches, the more it is possible to give the player a substantial privilege of suppressing the decrease in the number of balls to be played, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In the second CZ of the present modification 1, in the rush game, the breakthrough value is a variable value determined according to the winning combination in the game, but the breakthrough value determined here is the maximum value. It is also possible to make it possible to select less than, or to make it possible to select a value including the maximum value. In the latter case, the determined breakthrough value may be the same as the maximum value (breakthrough value = maximum value), but in this case, the second point reaches the breakthrough value (= maximum value). It is also possible to end 2CZ and shift to the first AT (in other words, not shift to the second AT). In this way, when a value including the maximum value can be selected for the breakthrough value, if a value less than the maximum value is selected as the breakthrough value, the second AT can be transferred, while the breakthrough value can be selected. It is possible to provide a revolving pachinko / pachislot machine with specifications that the benefits at the maximum value differ depending on the value of the breakthrough value, such that if the maximum value is selected, it is impossible to shift to the second AT.

Further, regarding the benefit at this maximum value, in this modification 1, the transition to the second AT was performed, but the benefit is not limited to this, and for example, the benefit is changed according to the difference between the breakthrough value and the maximum value. You may do so. Specifically, if the difference between the breakthrough value and the maximum value is the first value (for example, 30), it is a transition to the second AT, but if the difference is the second value (for example, 50), it is a transition to the second AT. In addition to the transition to the second AT, the BB (pseudo-bonus) shown in FIG. 252 is given, and if the difference is the third value (for example, 30), the transition to the ending state shown in FIG. It is possible to give the benefits of. In this case, since the benefit at the maximum value changes depending on the value of the breakthrough value, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present modification 1, the second CZ is terminated based on the fact that the number of games reaches the predetermined number when the second point is less than the breakthrough value, but instead, the predetermined game is terminated when the second point is less than the breakthrough value. After reaching the number, a fall lottery to end the second CZ with a certain probability or a probability according to the winning combination is performed, and the second CZ is continued until the fall lottery is won. good. In this case, even if the second point is less than the breakthrough value when the predetermined number of games is reached, it is possible to create a playability in which the second point and the breakthrough value are reached before winning the fall lottery. , It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

<<<<<< 17th Embodiment >>>>>
Next, the 17th embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those of the above-described embodiments. FIG. 302 is a diagram showing a main gaming state controlled by the main control board M in the spinning machine according to the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 303 shows a reel arrangement in the spinning machine according to the 17th embodiment. FIG. 304 is a list, and FIG. 304 is a diagram showing an excerpt of a part of the condition device in the revolving gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment, and FIGS. 305 to 307 are the revolving type according to the 17th embodiment. It is an image diagram for demonstrating the effect performed by the effect display device in a game machine.

In this 17th embodiment, the specifications around the bonus of the 16th embodiment described above are mainly different. As shown in FIG. 302, the 17th embodiment has one type BB, and the transition of RT controlled by the main control board M is as follows. That is, in the normal gaming state (non-RT), when the type 1 BB is won (when the type 1 BB condition device is activated), the probability of at least one replay is different from that of the non-RT RT1 (in other words, the type 1 BB). It shifts to the RT state in the inside), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st class BB is displayed in this RT1 (when the 1st class BB wins), the 1st class BB operating state (in the 1st class BB) is set. When the type 1 BB operation is completed, it shifts to non-RT. Further, in the present embodiment, the game is played in a predetermined number (for example, 3 cards) in any of the above-mentioned states (non-RT, RT1, type 1 BB operating (when RB is operating)). ..

As shown in FIG. 303, the reel arrangement of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment has a specification composed of 20 frames from No. 1 to No. 20. In FIG. 303, the first cylinder means the left reel M51, the second cylinder means the middle reel M52, and the third cylinder means the right reel M53 (in FIG. 303, the above-mentioned description). Reference numerals M51 to 53 are omitted). In the present embodiment, as the symbol combination constituting the first type BB, the first combination consisting of "blue seven, red seven, red seven" in the order of the first cylinder, the second cylinder, and the third cylinder, " The second combination consisting of "Blue Seven / Red Seven / Blue Seven", the third combination consisting of "Blue Seven / Blue Seven / Red Seven", the fourth combination consisting of "Blue Seven / Blue Seven / Blue Seven", and "Gold Bar"・ 5th combination consisting of "Red Seven / Red Seven", 6th combination consisting of "Gold Bar / Red Seven / Blue Seven", 7th combination consisting of "Gold Bar / Blue Seven / Red Seven", "Gold Bar / Blue" It has an 8th combination consisting of "Seven / Blue Seven" (8 types in total).

That is, the symbol combination related to the 1st BB starts with the blue seven that exists only once in the 1st cylinder (with the 1st cylinder as the head), and the red 7 and blue that exist in the 2nd cylinder one by one. The first to fourth combinations, which consist of a combination of Seven and one each of Red Seven and Blue Seven, which are present in the third cylinder, and the second, starting with the gold bar that is present only once in the first cylinder. It is the 5th to 8th combination consisting of the combination of the red seven and blue seven of the rotating cylinder and the red seven and blue seven of the third cylinder. In addition, this type 1 BB ends on the condition that the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 125), and the RB that ends when two winnings or two games are performed continuously operates. It is a specification to do. It goes without saying that the bonus is not limited to this type 1 BB, and the bonuses (BB) of various specifications described in the above-described embodiments can be appropriately applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the AT can be activated only in the state of RT1 in the inside of the type 1 BB, and the first game in which the AT is performed while maintaining the inside of the type 1 BB and the type 1 BB It is possible to realize both the second game in which winning and winning are repeated. That is, the player who wants to play the first game by the former AT wants to play the game while removing the symbol combination of the first type BB in the state inside the first type BB, and wants to play the second game by the latter type 1 BB. When the player detects the winning of the 1st class BB by the reach or the like, he / she immediately wins the 1st class BB and operates the 1st class BB.

Further, as shown in FIG. 304, as the winning combination of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the push order bell group 123, the push order bell group 132, the push order bell group 213, and the push order, which are push order combinations, are used. It has a bell group 231 and a push order bell group 312, and a push order bell group 321 (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to simply as a "push order bell group"). Here, in FIG. 304, the push order bell group in the state where the type 1 BB is won and carried over (the state inside the inside of the type 1 BB) is shown. The push order bell group 123 corresponds to the "role" in FIG. 10, and is a plurality of aggregates of condition devices (names) such as winning A-1 which is the role of the push order bell 123 in FIG. In order to distinguish it from the forward bell 123, the push order bell group 123 is used. Therefore, as an example of the condition device (name) constituting the push order bell group 123, the above-mentioned winning A-1 can be mentioned, but in the present embodiment, the detailed condition device and the like of the push order bell group 123 will be omitted. .. The same applies to the other push order bell groups 132 and the like.

Further, in the rotating drum type gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effective line for which the winning is determined is one line of "left reel M51 lower stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage". In addition to the push order bell group shown in FIG. 304, as the winning combination of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, for example, the replay combination (replay combination) shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 and the cherry It has rare roles such as watermelon and watermelon, but these illustrations and symbol combinations are omitted. Needless to say, the number and positions of effective lines can also be appropriately set according to the reel arrangement, the combination configuration, or the specifications of the gaming machine.

These push-order bell groups include a single combination of PB = 1 (also referred to as “PB = 1”) with a pull-in probability of 100% (also referred to as “PB = 1”) and a stop button, which are always aligned regardless of the timing of pressing the stop button D40. If D40 is pressed at an appropriate timing (timing within the pull-in range of the corresponding symbol), it will be aligned, but at other timings it will not be aligned. It is in a state of being elected in duplicate with the one-card role) of (also referred to as "1"). Regarding the push order bell group, other multiple types of single combinations similar to the above-mentioned single combination of PB = 1 and single combination of PB ≠ 1 have been won in duplicate, and each push order bell has been won. In the group, the types of one-card winning combinations that overlap each other are set to be different, but the description of these other single-card winning combinations will be omitted. Further, in the present embodiment, the push order bell group is a one-card combination with one payout less than the specified number (for example, three), but a two-card combination may be used. Any role may be used as long as the number of payouts is less than the specified number.

Here, among the push order bell groups, the push order bell group 123 will be described. This push order bell group 123 is a non-battle corresponding to the battle eye 1 role related to the battle eye 1 symbol combination of "Replay Blank Watermelon" and the non-battle eye 1 symbol combination of "Replay Cherry / Watermelon Watermelon". There are two types of PB = 1 for the first role, and the first spilled pattern combination of "Cherry / Red Seven / Blue Seven / Red Seven / Blue Seven / Bar / Gold Bar". The component is a combination and a single combination of multiple types of PB ≠ 1 including the second spilled role corresponding to the second spilled symbol combination of "Blue Seven / Red Seven / Blue Seven / Gold Bar / Bar". These are the winning areas (winning areas) where the winners are won in duplicate. It should be noted that, in the single combination of PB ≠ 1 of the push order bell group 123, there are a plurality of types other than the first and second spilled symbol combinations, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

In the push order bell group 123, regarding the "replay blank watermelon" related to the first battle symbol combination, the "replay" which is the symbol corresponding to the left reel M51 (first body) is as shown in FIG. 303. By arranging four of them at equal intervals (with four symbols intervening between each "replay") at intervals of five frames (maximum pull-in range is four frames) (No. 4 in FIG. 303). , 9th, 14th, and 19th), and the pull-in probability is 100%. In addition, the "blank", which is a symbol corresponding to the middle reel M52 (2nd cylinder), and the "watermelon", which is a symbol corresponding to the right reel M53 (3rd cylinder), are also mutually similar to the "replay". By arranging four of them at equal intervals every five frames (in FIG. 303, the "blanks" of the middle reel M52 are 1, 6, 11, 16 and the right reel M53 "blanks". "Watermelon" is located at Nos. 4, 9, 14, and 19), and the pull-in probability is 100%.

When this battle eye 1 symbol combination is aligned on the effective line, that is, any "replay" of the left reel M51 is in the lower row of the left reel M51, and any "blank" of the middle reel M52 is in the middle reel M52. When any "watermelon" on the right reel M53 stops at the lower stage of the right reel M53, a "blank" or "bar" arranged directly above each "replay" of the left reel M51 is placed in the middle stage of the left reel M51. (Refer to the 5th, 10th, 15th, and 20th symbols of the 1st reel in FIG. 303), and any of the "blanks" is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. At the middle stage of the right reel M53, one of the "blanks" arranged directly above each "watermelon" on the right reel stops (in FIG. 303, the 5th, 10th, and 15th of the 3rd reel). See each of the 20th symbols). As a result, the symbol combination of "blank / bar / blank / blank" is apparently aligned with the straight line of the middle stage such as the left reel M51 middle stage, the middle reel M52 middle stage, and the right reel M53 middle stage (appearance, middle stage alignment). blank).

In the push order bell group 123, regarding the "replay cherry / watermelon watermelon" related to the non-battle first symbol combination, the above-mentioned non-battle in the "replay" of the left reel M51 and the "watermelon" of the right reel M53. Same as the 1st symbol combination, but for the "cherry / watermelon" on the middle reel M52, "cherry" and "watermelon" are alternately arranged at equal intervals every 5 frames on the middle reel M52. Either "cherry" or "watermelon" can be pulled in without fail, but since either "cherry" or "watermelon" stops at the middle stage of the middle reel M52, it looks like "blank" on the left and right. The tempai is in a collapsed state and the blank is not aligned in the middle row.

In the push order bell group 123, regarding the "cherry / red seven / blue seven / red seven / blue seven / bar / gold bar" related to the first spilled symbol combination, the right reel M53 "red seven / blue seven / bar" Since each symbol of "/ Gold Bar" is arranged at equal intervals of 5 frames each, it is possible to always draw any of "Red Seven / Blue Seven / Bar / Gold Bar" on the effective line. On the other hand, there is only one "cherry" on the left reel M51 on the left reel M51, and there is only one "red seven / blue seven" on the middle reel M52 on the middle reel M52, so pull them. If the stop button D40 is not pressed at the timing when it can be inserted, these symbols cannot be stopped on the effective line and will be dropped. The same applies to the second spilled symbol combination, so the description thereof will be omitted here.

Here, regarding the numbers such as "123" attached after the push order bell group, "1" indicates the first reel, "2" indicates the second reel, and "3" indicates the third reel. For example, the push order bell group 123 is in the order of "1st cylinder (left reel M51)", "2nd cylinder (middle reel M52)", and "3rd cylinder (right reel M53)". When the reels are stopped by (the so-called order of pressing the stop button D40 in the order of left, middle, and right), the number of battle eyes 1 symbol combination has priority over the above-mentioned number among the 1-card combination of PB = 1. It shows the push order (hereinafter referred to as the "first correct answer hitting order") in which one card combination related to the symbol combination of the first battle is aligned on the effective line by being drawn in preferentially by control. This is the same for other push order bell groups, "132" is in the order of left, middle and right (so-called pinching order), and "213" is in the order of middle left and right (middle forward push order). "231" indicates the order of middle right and left (middle reverse pinching order), "312" indicates right middle left (reverse pressing order), and "321" indicates (reverse pinching order). The combination of the batting order of "123" and "132" is the combination of the batting order of "left 1st" and "213" and "231" as the batting order combination of first pressing the stop button D40 corresponding to the left reel M51. , The batting order combination of "middle 1st", "321" and "312" is used as the batting order combination for first pressing the stop button D40 corresponding to the middle reel M52, and the stop button D40 corresponding to the right reel M53 is pressed first. It is sometimes called "right 1st" as a batting order combination.

Further, in the push order bell group 123, when the batting order of "132" is performed, the non-battle eye 1 symbol combination is aligned by the above-mentioned number priority control (hereinafter, the non-battle eye 1 symbol combination is aligned). The batting order is called the "second correct batting order"). In other words, in the case of the left 1st batting order (first and second correct batting order), the push order bell group 123 draws in one piece in either batting order, but in the first correct batting order "123", The battle eye 1 symbol combination is drawn in, and in the second correct batting order "132", the non-battle eye 1 symbol combination is drawn in.

Further, in the push order bell group 123, in the case of the batting order of the middle 1st or the right 1st (hereinafter, the batting order that is not the correct batting order like these may be referred to as the "incorrect batting order"), the number priority control is used. , In order to preferentially pull in the first and second spilled symbol combinations corresponding to the first or second spilled role, when the stop button D40 is pressed at an appropriate timing when these symbol combinations can be stopped, If the 1st or 2nd spilled role (1 piece combination) wins, but the combination of these symbols cannot be stopped at an inappropriate timing, the 1st or 2nd spilled role will be dropped. Here, as described above, in FIG. 304, the type 1 BB is inside, and when the type 1 BB is pressed at this inappropriate timing, the first and second spilled symbol combinations are not aligned, so the type 1 BB If it is possible to pull in, the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB is pulled in. That is, in the case of the batting order of the middle 1st or the right 1st, it is either missed (no prize), one piece, or one type BB prize.

The push order bell group 123 has been described above, but for the other push order bell groups 132 and the like, the first and second correct batting orders are different, and the apparent display line of the battle eye 1 is different (FIG. 304). In battle eye 2, the lines appear to rise to the right, etc. After that, battle eye 1 and battle eye 2 may be collectively referred to as "battle eye"), and the overlapping single role is different. Except for the above, the same as the push order bell group 123, and as shown in FIG. 304, the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, although the push order bell group in which the 1st class BB can win the prize has been explained here, in addition to the push order bell group, if the wrong answering order is used, only 1 card is played or the player misses the prize, and the 1st class BB does not win the prize. In the possible push order bell group and the non-internal state of the 1st class BB, the above 1st class BB is the same as the non-winning push order bell group, and when the 1st class BB is inside the 1st class BB, 1 is used in any striking order. It is also possible to provide a push order bell group or the like in which the card combination wins (one piece combination wins regardless of the striking order).

Here, when the first game by AT is performed as described above, it is necessary to prevent the type 1 BB from winning in order to intentionally maintain the state inside the type 1 BB. Further, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility of winning the 1st class BB inside the 1st class BB only when the push order bell group shown in FIG. 304 is won (in other words, these). It can be said that the push order bell group is a winning area (a part of all winning areas) in which one type BB can win a prize). In such a specification, when any of the push order bell groups is won, for example, when the push order bell group 123 described above is won, the effect display device S40 is provided with a push order navigation that displays the push order of the left 1st. conduct. At this time, the player who wants to play the first game can win the 1-card combination without winning the 1st class BB by following the push order navigation, and maintain the internal state of the 1st class BB. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, for example, when the push order bell group 123 is won, a battle eye display lottery for navigating the first correct batting order that displays the battle eye 1 with a predetermined probability is performed, and the battle eye display lottery is performed. In that case, the push order navigation of the first correct batting order is performed, and if the player does not win, the push order navigation of the second correct batting order is performed (in other words, the push order navigation of the first correct batting order is not performed). , Do not display battle eye 1). Specifically, when the battle eye display lottery is won, for example, as shown on the left side of FIG. 37, in the push order display device, a display indicating that the push order is left, middle, or right. This is done, and the effect display device S40 also displays that the pressing order is left, middle, and right. On the other hand, if the battle eye display lottery is not won, the push order display device displays the push order of left, right, and middle, and the effect display device S40 also displays the left, right, and middle push order. It is displayed that the pressing order of is. That is, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation by the push order display device controlled by the main control board M and the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is notified or suggested depending on whether or not the battle eye display lottery is successful. The push order will be different. Here, in the present embodiment, when the word "push order navigation" is used, the push order is displayed by at least one of the push order display device and the effect display device S40 described above, except when there is a disclaimer. Say that you are.

If the battle eye display lottery is won, the effect display device S40 displays that the push order is left, middle, and right, while the push order display device displays the left 1st (the first stop is the left). It is a reel, and the operation mode after that is not instructed) (Since the push order of the middle and right is not displayed, it is practically a two-choice navigation), and the battle eye display lottery is won. If not, the effect display device S40 displays that the push order is left, right, and middle, while the push order display device displays the left 1st as in the case of winning the battle eye display lottery. In the production control device S40, the push order instruction differs depending on whether or not the battle eye display lottery is successful, whereas in the push order display device, one card is used regardless of whether or not the battle eye display lottery is successful. It is also possible to display only the fact that the left 1st is the minimum push order instruction that can win a prize. On the contrary, in the effect display device S40, regardless of whether the battle eye display lottery is successful or not, the left 1st is displayed, while in the push order display device, the battle eye display lottery is won. In that case, the push order of left, middle, and right is displayed, and if the battle eye display lottery is not won, the push order of left, right, and middle is displayed. Well, the point is that at least one of the push order display device and the effect display device S40 may display an accurate push order according to the success or failure of the battle eye display lottery.

Here, the pushing order of the second correct batting order is the order of left and right, and the result displayed in this case is "blank replay blank". That is, in the process of performing the stop operation in the order of left and right, at the time of performing the stop operation in the left and middle, the blanks that make up the battle eye are tempered to the left and right, such as "blank, rotating, blank". It is in a state. Therefore, the player can maintain the expectation that the battle eyes will be displayed until the stop button D40 corresponding to the last middle reel M52 is pressed.

In addition, when the battle eye display lottery is won, the AT lottery is performed based on this winning. In addition to this AT lottery, the lottery that is performed when the battle eye display lottery is won is, for example, if a so-called chance zone that is easier to shift to AT than usual is installed, the lottery shifts to this chance zone. A lottery may be held, or in an AT lottery held at the time of winning a rare role or the like, a lottery for transitioning to a so-called high-accuracy state in which the winning probability is relatively high may be performed. If a score such as an advantageous lottery is given, the mode is not particularly limited.

Further, in the present embodiment, the battle eyes are displayed in the first correct hit order, and the non-battle eyes (specifically, the blanks constituting the battle eyes are listened to on the left and right reels) in the second correct hit order. The middle reel is displayed with a pattern in which symbols other than blanks are stopped), but instead, as a non-battle eye, one blank constituting the battle eye is displayed in the symbol combination. Prepare a single-card combination that has 0 disjointed rolls (for example, "arbitrary symbol / blank / arbitrary symbol" in the case of 1 and no blank in the symbol combination in the case of 0). By performing the push order navigation of the single-card role, it is possible to display different outcomes. In short, any combination of symbols may be used as the non-battle item as long as it is not a combination of symbols that constitute the battle eye, and this may be the result of the second correct batting order.

Here, the total winning probability of the push order bell group in the non-AT state (the winning probability of the entire push order bell group) is set to A (for example, 1/8), and the winning probability by the battle eye display lottery in the non-AT state is set. B (for example, 1/20) (in other words, the probability C that the battle eye is displayed is A × B, for example, 1/8 × 1/20 becomes 1/160), and in the non-AT state. Assuming that the winning probability of the cherry, which is a rare role, is D (for example, 1/60) and the winning probability of the watermelon, which is a rare role, is E (for example, 1/100), the examples in parentheses are summarized below. The relationship between (1) and (2) is established.
(1) Probability of displaying battle eyes (appearance rate) C <Cherry winning probability (appearance rate) D
(2) Probability that the battle eye is displayed C <Watermelon winning probability (appearance rate) E
That is, the probabilities D and E in which various rare roles (cherries and watermelons) are displayed are higher than the probabilities C in which the battle eyes are displayed. It goes without saying that the numerical values in parentheses are examples, and appropriate numerical values can be set.

In this way, even when navigating the push order of the first correct batting order (1 card), which is less than the specified number (3 cards) at which the game can be started, the player such as AT lottery Since we are trying to give advantageous benefits, we will give the player a prize of type 1 BB and play the second game with type 1 BB, or the first correct answer that the number of game medals paid out is less than the specified number. It is possible to select whether to receive the AT lottery according to the batting order push order navigation (if the AT lottery is not performed, the merit of selecting the game 1 is reduced because the payout is less than the specified number). Further, even when the first correct batting order with less medal payout is selected, there is an advantage that the AT lottery can be received, so that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, by setting the appearance rate of battle eyes lower than that of various rare roles, it is a great deal to receive AT lottery by battle eyes in the meantime, while focusing on AT lottery by rare roles from the player's point of view. Can be obtained, and the motivation for playing can be improved.

In addition, in the push order navigation when the push order bell group is won, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the battle eye is displayed while performing the stop operation according to this navigation (stop operation according to the navigation). Since the movement is not just the digestion of the game), it is possible to improve the fun of the game. Moreover, by simply adjusting the winning probability B by the above battle eye display lottery, the probability that the battle eye will be displayed will be higher than the probability that various rare roles will be displayed, or the battle eye will be displayed. The probability can be the same as any of the various rare roles. As a result, for example, if the probability that the battle eyes are displayed is higher than the probability that various rare roles are displayed, the AT lottery by the battle eyes is the main axis, but in the meantime, It is possible to provide various playability only by adjusting the winning probability B by the battle eye display lottery, such as being able to provide the playability of being able to receive the AT lottery by the rare role.

<Specifications during AT>
Next, the production during AT in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery is performed based on the fact that the rare role is won and the battle eyes are displayed as described above, and when the AT lottery is won, the game shifts to AT. During this AT, the number of balls to be played is increased by executing the push order navigation of the push order small winning combination (for example, 10 cards), which is larger than the specified number by winning a prize. In addition, when the above-mentioned push order bell group is won, the push order navigation of the correct batting order of each push order bell group (for example, in the case of the push order bell group 123, the push order of any of the left 1st) is performed. conduct.

In this AT, a battle that shifts and performs battle production by winning the normal state during AT, winning the rare role during AT, and winning the battle production execution lottery based on the fact that the battle eyes are displayed. It has an effect state, and ends with the end condition that the count of the number of games in the normal state during AT reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games). Further, in the AT of the present embodiment, by winning the last judge lottery (winning the battle effect), which will be described later, in the battle effect state performed during the normal state during the AT (during the predetermined game), the above-mentioned predetermined state is obtained. Whether or not AT is repeated depending on whether or not the predetermined number of games is reset between the predetermined number of games, such that the number of games is reset and AT is repeated (whether or not AT continues). It is a so-called ST specification that determines. Further, in this battle production state, the normal state during AT is not counted.

Specifically, after the start of AT, the normal state during AT is shifted to the battle production state after, for example, 10 games have been digested, and this battle production state is returned to the normal state during AT due to defeat, for example, after 10 games have been executed. In that case, the count in the normal state during AT is set to 11 games next to 10 games. It should be noted that the specifications may be such that the predetermined number of games is counted even in the battle production state, and the presence or absence of counting the predetermined number of games in the battle production state can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the gaming machine and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on winning the last judge lottery in the battle production state, a so-called pseudo bonus (a form of AT, which increases the number of balls to be output by push order navigation, but the production display device S40 In, instead of AT, the one that produces the effect as if it were in the bonus) is confirmed, and after digesting this pseudo-bonus, the game shifts to the normal state during the AT in which the predetermined number of games has been reset. ing. In addition, a loop lottery that continues AT with a high probability (for example, 98%) based on reaching a predetermined number of games in a part of the last judge lottery result (with a big victory of a part of the battle production victory). Is performed, and by winning the loop lottery, the predetermined number of games is reset and the AT is continued. It is easy for AT to continue, but it goes without saying that the completion of the advantageous section is not confirmed). Regarding the specifications of the special AT, in addition to the above, the completion of the advantageous section is not confirmed, but the specifications may have a higher probability of addition than other ATs, in short, than other ATs. Any AT that is advantageous to the player may be used. Further, for other ATs, when the end condition of the AT (AT for managing the number of games) is that the number of games has reached the predetermined number, in the special AT, the net increase number or the like reaches the predetermined number of ATs. The specification may be switched to the end condition (AT for managing the number of sheets), and the effect display device S40 may also be specified to switch from the display of the number of remaining games to the display of the number of remaining games. Further, in the present embodiment, when the AT continues for 1000 games or when the net increase number (MY) during the AT exceeds 2000, the above-mentioned ending state is reached and the AT continues until the advantageous section ends. It has become like.

On the other hand, in the normal state during AT, in addition to the AT lottery based on the rare role and the battle eye (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "rare role, etc."), the winning probability of the battle production execution lottery is determined. A variable state determination lottery is performed, and depending on the lottery result of this state determination lottery, the winning probability of the battle production execution lottery is low, or the battle production execution lottery is won more than this low probability state. It is possible to shift to one of the high-probability high-accuracy states. Further, in the effect display device S40, in the normal state during AT, if it is in the low accuracy state, for example, it is easy to perform an effect indicating a daytime state, and if it is in the high accuracy state, it is, for example, in the evening or at night. It is made easy to perform the effect indicating the state of (at night, the high accuracy state is confirmed), and suggests the ease of transition to the battle effect in the normal state during AT.

Next, the battle production state will be described. This battle production state is such that the end lottery for ending the battle production state is performed every game, and the end lottery is completed based on winning the end lottery. In this battle production state, in addition to the end lottery, a battle point lottery to obtain specific points is performed in each game, and the AT is continued by the last judge lottery performed based on the specific points and the like. It is designed to determine whether or not the predetermined number of games will be reset (this will be described later). Similar to the above-mentioned point acquisition lottery, the battle point lottery is performed according to the winning combination during the battle production state, and it is easier for the rare role to acquire specific points than the small role or the replay role, or it is relative. It is easy to get a lot of specific points. It should be noted that this specific point is an internal parameter used to determine the battle effect result, and the numerical value is not displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like, while in the battle effect, the ally character or the enemy character By displaying the degree of damage, etc., it is suggested how many specific points there are.

Further, in the battle point lottery, in addition to the above-mentioned point acquisition lottery, a lottery using the battle eyes is also performed, and this will be described next with reference to FIGS. 305 to 307. In the battle production state, in the game of the Nth game (including the first game in which the battle production state is entered), as shown in FIG. A display selection lottery is performed to determine the display target to be displayed in each of the first to third regions PR5 to 7 provided directly above each of the reels M51 to 53.

This display target is "enemy first", which suggests that the expectation of acquiring specific points is low, "ally first", which suggests that the expectation of acquiring specific points is higher than "enemy first", and points acquisition. There is an "antagonism" between "enemy first" and "ally first". Hereinafter, the combination of display targets such as "enemy first," "ally first," and "antagonism" arranged in the first to third regions PR5 to 7, respectively, will be referred to as a "display arrangement." It should be noted that the display target is not the characters such as "enemy first", "friend first" and "antagonism", but the icon by the graphic shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, or the combination of the character and the icon. It is good, and the display mode and type are not particularly limited.

In the present embodiment, in the Nth game, a display arrangement lottery for determining the display arrangement corresponding to the winning combination in the Nth game is performed based on the final stop operation. Specifically, in the case of a small role or a replay role, a display arrangement in which "enemy first," "ally first," and "antagonism" are randomly arranged one by one in the first to third regions PR5 to 7, respectively. In the case of a rare role, for example, a display array that is all "ally first" or a combination of two "ally first" and the remaining one "enemy first" or "antagonism" Is an advantageous display arrangement that tends to be a display arrangement that is randomly arranged in the first to third areas PR5 to 7. A display arrangement in which a rare role is more advantageous to the player than a small role or a replay role. It is designed to perform a display arrangement lottery that is easy to become. Further, in the present embodiment, as the display arrangement lottery, in addition to the above-mentioned normal display arrangement lottery and advantageous arrangement lottery, for example, a display arrangement in which all are "enemy first" or "antagonism", and two remain in "enemy first". One has a disadvantageous sequence lottery in which a combination of "ally first" or "antagonism" is easily selected.

When the display arrangement is determined by this display arrangement lottery, the display arrangement is stored in a storage means (not shown), and the first stop operation after pressing the start lever D50 in the N + 1 game, which is the next game of the N game. The display arrangement stored in the storage means at a predetermined timing before the operation, for example, as shown in FIG. 305, the first display area PR5 corresponding to the left reel M51 is "enemy first", middle A display arrangement such as "ally first" is displayed in the second display area PR6 corresponding to the reel M52, and "antagonism" is displayed in the third display area PR7 corresponding to the right reel M53. In the present embodiment, among the display targets, the display target corresponding to the reel to be stopped first in the push order navigation of the push order small winning combination is reflected in the battle point lottery. The predetermined timing may be any timing after all the reels are stopped in the Nth game and before the start lever D50 is pressed, and all the reels are stopped in the Nth game. It may be any timing from after that to before the first stop operation is performed in the N + 1 game.

That is, if the winning combination by pressing the start lever D50 in the N + 1 game is the above-mentioned push order small combination, the correct batting order of this push order small combination (the combination of symbols for which 10 cards are paid out is displayed) is displayed. The push order navigation of (order) is performed, and the display target corresponding to the reel that stops first in this push order is reflected in the battle point lottery. In other words, in the Nth game, the display arrangement (candidates for the target to be reflected in the battle point acquisition lottery, which can be said to be candidates for the content related to AT continuation (transition to AT) (provisional content)) is determined, and N + 1 By performing the stop operation according to the push order navigation of the game eye, it is determined which display target is reflected from the display arrangement determined in the N game eye (determines which of the above-mentioned candidates to be selected). Alternatively, among the candidates for the above contents, it can be said that the provisional contents corresponding to the stop operation according to the push order navigation of the N + 1 game are determined as the contents related to AT continuation). In other words, after all the reels have stopped in the Nth game, the content candidates are determined and displayed on the main control board M, and the content is based on the winning combination when the start lever D50 in the N + 1th game is pressed. The content to be selected from the candidates is decided, and the battle point acquisition lottery is performed based on the content.

Specifically, on the main control board M, when the start lever D50 of the N + 1 game is pressed and the push order small winning combination is won, the left reel "enemy first strike" which is a candidate of the content decided in the N game. , "Allies first" on the middle reel, and "Competition" on the right reel, a battle point lottery will be held for the reel that stops first in the winning push order small winning combination (the reel corresponding to the correct push order). Further, when the push order small winning combination is won in the N + 1 game, the main control board M transmits a command for displaying an effect such as "enemy preemption" on the effect display device S40 on the sub control board S. , A command related to the battle point lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S causes the effect display device S40 or the like to execute an effect corresponding to these various commands.

For example, after pressing the start lever D50 of the N + 1 game, the display arrangements arranged in the first to third regions PR5 to 7 of the effect display device S40 by the sub-control means S are as shown in FIG. 305. , "Enemy first", "Friend first", "Competition", and the correct batting order of the push order small role is in the order of middle left and right (213) (in other words, "enemy first" as a candidate for the above content , "Friend first", "Competition" is selected), "Friend first" corresponding to the middle reel M52 that is stopped first will be used for the battle point lottery (in other words, the candidate of the above contents) It can be said that the "ally first system" is determined from the above, or the provisional content "ally first system" among the above provisional contents is determined as the content related to AT continuation). In this case, as shown in FIG. 306, when the middle reel M52 is stopped, the effect display device S40 displays the left and right (first and third display areas PR5, 7) as "enemy first" and "antagonism". Disappears and only the "ally first" in the middle reel M52 (second display area PR6) remains, and the ally character attacks the enemy character, and the "ally first" is reflected in the battle point lottery. Notify the player that it will be done.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 305, when the correct batting order of the small winning combination is in the order of left, middle, right (123), the "enemy first" corresponding to the left reel M51, which is first stopped, is selected for the battle point lottery. As shown in FIG. 307, only the left (first display area PR5) "enemy preemption" corresponding to the left reel remains, and the ally character is attacked by the enemy character in the battle. Notify the player that the "enemy first" will be reflected in the point lottery.

In this way, the display arrangement lottery is performed in the Nth game to determine and display the content candidates, and the final content is determined from the content candidates according to the correct hitting order of the push order small winning combination in the N + 1 game. However, while the battle production state continues, in the N + 1 game that determines the final content, the display arrangement lottery of the next game will be performed at the same time (in other words, the N + 1 game will be , It corresponds to the Nth game from the next game). That is, in the game at the time of entering the battle production state (the first game in the battle production state and the Nth game), the introduction effect for notifying the entry into the battle production state is performed, while the next second game is performed. Display arrangement lottery for (N + 1 game) is performed. In the next second game, the display target to be reflected is determined from the display arrangement determined by the display arrangement lottery performed in the first game described above, but at the same time, for the next third game. Display arrangement lottery is performed (N + 1 game when viewed from the first game, N game when viewed from the third game). Then, in this third game, the display target to be reflected is determined from the display arrangement in the display arrangement lottery performed in the second game, and the display arrangement lottery for the next fourth game is controlled. It is designed to repeat until the final game in the battle production state.

In the present embodiment, in the game in which the "ally first strike" is reflected as described above, the attack of the ally character is confirmed, and a predetermined number of specific points can be obtained. At this time, as described above, the display arrangement lottery for the next game is performed, and in the display arrangement lottery at this time, the above-mentioned advantageous display arrangement lottery is performed. In other words, when the "ally first" is reflected, it is easy to display an advantageous arrangement in the next game. In this way, when the "ally first" is reflected, it is easy to display an advantageous arrangement in the next game, so after the "ally first" is reflected, the "ally first" is continuously displayed. It becomes easier to be reflected, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Also, in a game that reflects "enemy first", specific points cannot be earned and the enemy character's attack is confirmed. Further, in this game, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the attack of the enemy character hits an ally, and if this lottery is won, the above-mentioned disadvantageous arrangement lottery is performed. In other words, when the "enemy preemption" is reflected, it is easy to display an unfavorable arrangement in the next game, and this lottery can be said to be a lottery for determining the arrangement of the next game. At this time, as shown in FIG. 307, by performing an effect in which the enemy character attacks the ally character, it is notified that an unfavorable arrangement display is likely to occur in the next game. On the other hand, if the enemy character's attack does not win the lottery to see if it hits an ally, the above-mentioned normal arrangement lottery is performed. In this case, in the effect display device S40, it is notified that the unfavorable arrangement display is unlikely to appear in the next game by performing the effect of avoiding the attack of the enemy character by the ally character. In this way, when the "enemy first strike" is reflected, it is easy to display an unfavorable arrangement in the next game, so after the "enemy first strike" is reflected, what is the above-mentioned "ally first strike"? On the contrary, the "enemy first-come-first-served" can be easily reflected continuously, and a sharp game can be performed in combination with the above-mentioned "ally-first-come-first-served".

In addition, in a game in which "antagonism" is reflected, a lottery is made separately so that "friend first" or "enemy first" is selected at a rate of 50%, for example (note that the lottery probability is about this lottery probability). , Needless to say, it can be set appropriately according to the specifications of the gaming machine), and processing is performed according to the result of this lottery (similar to the game in which the above-mentioned "friend first" or "enemy first" is reflected. Perform processing).

In this embodiment, as described above, the final content is determined from the candidates for the content such as "friend first", "enemy first", and "antagonism", and the determined final content is the next game. Although it affected the sequence display lottery, it goes without saying that the specifications may be such that the sequence display lottery in the game is independently performed regardless of the final reflected contents. In other words, when executing the array display lottery, it may be configured to execute without referring to the past lottery results.

Further, in the present embodiment, during AT, the push order small winning combination (for example, 10-card combination, hereinafter also referred to as 10-card combination navigation) in which the payout is larger than the specified number (for example, 3 cards) is pushed. The probability of occurrence of forward navigation (for example, about 1/2) is less than the specified number of payouts including the above-mentioned push order bell group. It is set to be higher than the probability of occurrence of push order navigation (for example, about 1/8). In addition, when performing the push order navigation effect, it is not notified whether the payout is the push order for the push order small winning combination that is larger than the specified number or the payout is the pushing order winning combination that is less than the specified number. It informs which push order the stop operation should be performed. By doing so, when push order navigation occurs, there is a higher probability that this push order navigation is a 10-card role navigation with more game medals than a 1-card role navigation with fewer game medals. The occurrence of navigation itself is a nice event for the player. As a result, the player can perform the stop operation with the expectation that the number of game medals will increase, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

Here, if the N + 1th game is a rare role (first-come-first-served basis), a specific point is obtained, and the display arrangement determined by the display arrangement lottery performed in the Nth game and stored in the storage means. (The display arrangement is not displayed in the first to third display areas PR5 to 7), and the effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character is executed. In the case of a rare role or the like, the acquisition of more specific points may be confirmed than in the case of the above-mentioned "friend first", and in this case, the above-mentioned "friend first" It is also possible to notify the player that more specific points have been determined than in the case, for example, by making a stronger attack than in the case where the ally character is "allied first".

In addition, when the N + 1 game is a push order bell group and the push order navigation of the second correct batting order of the non-battle is performed, the same processing as when the above-mentioned push order combination is won is performed. .. On the other hand, when the push order navigation of the first correct batting order of the battle eye is performed, even if the display target determined in this N + 1 game is "enemy first" or "antagonism", "ally first" is forcibly performed. , And when the determined display target is "ally first", the same processing as when the above rare combination is won is performed. In addition, when the above rare role is won or when the battle eye is displayed, a lottery to confirm the victory may be separately performed, and by winning this, the AT continuation may be confirmed.

Here, when the push order navigation of the first correct batting order of this battle eye is performed, the battle eye is displayed even when the push order different from the first correct batting order is performed due to a player's push mistake. As a result, the same processing as when the battle eye is displayed (AT lottery described above, etc.) is performed. In this way, we are trying to relieve the player who made a mistake in pushing in the situation where he won the battle eye display lottery. On the other hand, when the push order navigation of the second correct batting order of the non-battle eye is performed, if the battle eye is displayed by performing the first correct batting order due to a player's operation error or intention, it is treated as a non-battle eye. And, the same processing as in the non-battle time (as described above, the batting order small role is treated as winning) is performed. In this way, even if a battle eye is displayed by ignoring the operation error or intentionally pushing order navigation in the situation where the battle eye display lottery has not been won, this is treated as a non-battle eye display. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be guaranteed. From the same point of view, for example, the left reel is "enemy first", the middle reel is "ally first", the push order bell that is the left 1st is won, and the first stop reel of the push order navigation is the left reel. Yes, even if the player intentionally presses the middle reel in the situation where the production corresponding to "enemy first" is executed, the lottery result corresponding to "enemy first" is reflected (about the production). However, the production corresponding to "enemy preemption" is executed) to ensure the fairness of the game.

In the battle production state, as described above, the end lottery is performed in each game, the last judge lottery is performed based on the winning of the end lottery, and the predetermined game of AT is performed according to the result of the last judge lottery. It is now decided whether or not to reset the number (whether or not to continue AT). This last judge lottery is based on the specific points earned so far and the number of continuous games in the battle production state. In the present embodiment, the higher the value obtained by adding the continuous points according to the number of continuous games in the battle production state to the acquired specific points, the easier it is to win the last judge lottery. In other words, the higher the specific point and the longer the number of continuous games in the battle production state, the easier it is to win the last judge lottery, and the easier it is for AT to continue.

For example, if the added value obtained by adding specific points and continuous points is equal to or higher than the first value (for example, 100), the special AT is confirmed, and as a corresponding effect, the ally character overwhelms the enemy character. Perform a production such as a big victory to notify the transition to a special AT. If the added value is a second value (for example, 70) or more, which is less than the first value, the continuation of the AT is confirmed, and then a special AT transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability. If it wins, it will be notified to the special AT, and if it is not, the continuation of AT will be confirmed, and the effect that the ally character will win the enemy character will be executed to notify that the AT will continue. If it is less than the second value, a lottery will be drawn with a probability according to the value (for example, if it is 0 to 10, the AT continuation rate is 10%, if it is 11 to 20, the AT continuation rate is 20%, etc.). Is performed, and whether or not to shift to a special AT or continue AT is determined according to the result of this lottery. In addition, instead of the above-mentioned AT continuation, a privilege such as winning a pseudo bonus or continuing AT after winning the pseudo bonus may be given.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display arrangement lottery is performed in the Nth game, and the display target is determined according to the correct batting order (display mode of the push order navigation) of the push order small winning combination in the N + 1 game. Since the battle point lottery is performed based on the display target, it is possible to prevent the batting order navigation from becoming a mere digestion game. In addition, the display mode of the push order navigation is reflected in the battle point lottery, and the so-called abandoned game can be eliminated during AT. In addition, from the player's point of view, the display mode of the push order navigation drawn by himself / herself is reflected in the battle point lottery, so that he / she can concentrate on the game during AT while having a sense of self-help. Furthermore, in the last judge lottery of whether to continue AT, the longer the number of continuous games in the battle production state, the easier it is to transfer the special AT and continue the AT, so the battle production state during AT In the above, the so-called abandoned game can be eliminated, and even if a specific point is not acquired so much, the expectation of the continuation of the AT can be increased.

The lottery method for the last judge lottery is not limited to the above example, and it goes without saying that an appropriate lottery method such as drawing with a certain probability based on the winning of the final lottery can be applied. As an example of this, instead of performing a battle point lottery, in the case of the above-mentioned "allied first-come-first-served basis", a state-up (chance-up) lottery that increases the probability of winning the last judge lottery is performed, and the number of times this lottery is won. A lottery may be performed based on the added value obtained by adding the value corresponding to (number) and the continuation points corresponding to the number of staying games in the above-mentioned battle production state.

As another example, for example, a plurality of lottery tables whose winning probability is gradually increased from the lowest low probability table are prepared, and a rank-up lottery is performed to decide which lottery table to use, and this rank is obtained. If the lottery is performed by the lottery table determined by the up lottery, or if the above-mentioned continuation point is the first value based on the lottery table determined by this rank up lottery, it is one step higher than the table that became this standard. If the second value is larger than the first value in the lottery table, the lottery table is decided by the rank-up lottery, such as drawing a lottery by a lottery two steps higher than the table that became the standard. On the other hand, there is a lottery table that takes into account the value of the continuation points. In addition, if the number of games is a predetermined number, such as the 7th game and the 17th game after the game in which the last judge lottery is performed enters the battle production state, the continuation of AT is confirmed, or The lottery may be performed according to the number of staying games, such that it will be confirmed if the last judge lottery is executed within 10 games or after 50 games.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specification is such that the winning of the first type BB is avoided depending on the pushing order, but instead of this, the specification is such that the game can be played only with one specified number (the game can be played only by so-called three-card bet). Max bet only specifications, etc.), out of all winning areas (all winning areas), the area where one type BB wins alone is extremely narrowed (probability is extremely low), and for other winning areas, It is also possible to adopt a specification that fills with a small role or replay of a single role with a pull-in probability of 100%. In this case, as the probability that the first type BB is elected alone, for example, 1/65536 to 4/65536 and the like can be mentioned. By doing so, since there is almost no single winning of the 1st class BB in which the 1st class BB can win, it is almost unnecessary to avoid the winning of the 1st class BB depending on the pushing order. Regarding this, as a combination of winning symbols of type 1 BB, there is only one for each reel, and by making the symbols difficult to press, it becomes more difficult for type 1 BB to win. Suitable. In addition to the above specifications, for example, the winning area of "Type 1 BB + combination A + combination B" and the winning area of "type 1 BB + combination C + combination D", the type 1 BB always overlaps with other combinations. For example, the lottery result is the winning area of "Type 1 BB + Combination A + Combination B", and the stop operation is performed in a predetermined push order and a predetermined push position. Only in the case, by setting the reel stop control for pulling in the type 1 BB, it is possible to make the specification avoiding the winning of the type 1 BB by stopping the operation in a position other than the above-mentioned push order and stop position. Further, RB may be used instead of the first type BB.

<Processing when shifting to an advantageous section>
Next, the processing when shifting to the advantageous section will be described. The process described here is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be applied to other embodiments. In particular, as in the 16th embodiment, the “normal section” and the “advantageous section” It is preferable to apply it to a gaming machine having the above.

In the present embodiment, predetermined information regarding the game is stored in any of the RAM areas of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M at a specific timing after the transition to the advantageous section is determined (hereinafter, simply "stored in the RAM"). ".) It is designed to perform processing. Then, at a predetermined timing after the predetermined information is stored, the content related to the advantageous state such as AT is determined based on the stored predetermined information (referring to the stored predetermined information). There is. In other words, the content related to the advantageous state determined according to the stored predetermined information is different depending on whether the stored predetermined information is A or B, respectively. They are different (in other words, the mode to be shifted to is different among the plurality of modes having different contents regarding the advantageous state from each other). When A is stored as predetermined information in the RAM, it is more disadvantageous than when B is stored as predetermined information in determining the content related to the advantageous state such as AT (for example). , Set so that the ball output rate is low, etc.) The content is decided. When the RAM is configured to store the RT state as predetermined information, the information stored in the RAM may be configured so that the information corresponding to the non-RT and the information after the RAM is cleared are the same.

By doing so, if the RAM or the like of the main control board M is removed or replaced with an illegal one due to fraudulent activity and the stored predetermined information is erased, the RAM or the like is subsequently deleted. The value corresponding to RT will be stored, and even if the transition to the advantageous section is performed in this state, it will be in a disadvantageous state as compared with the case where the value corresponding to the RT state other than non-RT is stored in the RAM. It is possible to dilute fraudulent activities. In the present embodiment, the predetermined information is stored in any of the RAM areas of the CPUC100 of the main control board M, but the storage area of the predetermined information is not limited to this, and the predetermined information can be stored. Needless to say, an appropriate storage area can be used as long as it is a suitable area.

Next, various aspects in which the above-mentioned predetermined information, contents related to AT, specific and predetermined timing, and the like are specified will be described.
(1) Aspect 1
In this aspect 1, a determination game in which the transition of the advantageous section is determined at a specific timing, with the "RT state" as predetermined information regarding the game and the "AT winning probability" as the content regarding the advantageous state (hereinafter, "advantageous section"). The "decision game in which the transition is determined" is simply referred to as the "decision game") at the first timing (for example, after the reel has reached a steady rotation (constant speed rotation), after the first stop operation, or the last stop button. The start game of the advantageous section (the next game of the decision game, and thereafter, " The "starting game of the advantageous section" is simply referred to as the "starting game") either after the pressing of the start lever D50 and before the reel enters the steady rotation state or before the first stop operation. (Timing, etc.) is applied.

In this aspect 1, every game (may be every game for all games, for example, if the specifications do not refer to non-RT, the situation is staying in a predetermined gaming state such as an RT state other than non-RT. It may be every game below.) The RT state is stored in the RAM. Specifically, when the start lever D50 of the game is pressed, the RAM maintains the state in which the RT state of the previous game of the game is stored, and at the first timing in the determination game. , The RT state of the game is stored in the RAM (the RT state stored in the RAM is updated). Then, at the second timing in the start game, the winning probability of AT according to the RT state stored at this time (RT state stored in the determination game which is the previous game of this start game) (related to AT). AT lottery will be held at (contents).

For example, if the RT state stored at that time is non-RT, an AT lottery is performed with a winning probability of 1/3, and if the RT state stored at that time is RT1, the winning is 1/2. AT lottery is performed with probability. Then, from the next game of this start game, the game based on the AT lottery result, that is, the AT state in the advantageous section if the AT is won, and the normal state in the advantageous section if the AT is not won. .. The AT winning probability according to the RT state is not limited to the above-mentioned probability, and an appropriate winning probability can be applied. In the above example, the non-RT has a higher AT winning probability than RT1. Although it is set high, it goes without saying that it is possible to make appropriate settings such as lowering the probability of winning AT for non-RT than for RT1.

As for the content regarding the advantageous state, instead of the above AT lottery, for example, as a specification regarding the game state, the AT lottery probabilities at the AT lottery opportunity such as winning a rare combination are different from each other in modes 1 and 2 (modes rather than mode 1). 2 has a higher AT lottery probability), set mode 1 if the RT state stored in the RAM is non-RT, and set mode 2 if the RT state stored in the RAM is RT1. The specifications may be set so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is different, such as setting. Regarding modes 1 and 2, in addition to the AT lottery probability at the AT lottery opportunity, for example, the number of ceiling games in mode 1 is 1000 games, while the number of ceiling games in mode 2 is less than 500 games in mode 1. As such, it may be related to the number of ceiling games, and the point is not particularly limited as long as it is related to various gaming states in an advantageous section. The same applies to other aspects.

(2) Aspect 2
This aspect 2 is different from the first aspect in that the RT state is not stored in the RAM for each game, but the RT state is stored in the RAM only at the time of the determination game in which the transition of the advantageous section is determined. That is, in the determination game, the RT state at that time is stored in the RAM at the first timing in the determination game. Then, at the first timing in the start game of the advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed with the winning probability of the AT according to the RT state stored at that time. In the case of the second aspect, the RT state stored in the RAM may be deleted after being referred to in the start game, or the advantageous section is entered again after the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered. It may be updated at the time.

(3) Aspect 3
In this aspect 3, the predetermined information regarding the game and the content regarding the advantageous state are the same as those in the above-mentioned aspect 1, and the predetermined timing is the third timing in the determination game (for example, after storing the predetermined information in the determination game). Any timing from to before the start of the advantageous section game) is applied. That is, in the determination game in which the transition of the advantageous section is determined, after the RT information is stored in the RAM, the winning probability of the AT according to the RT information stored in the RAM is determined at the third timing in the determination game. do. Then, in the start game of the advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed with the determined AT winning probability.

(4) Aspect 4
This aspect 4 is different from the above aspect 3 in that the "operating condition device" is applied as predetermined information regarding the game. That is, the following situations 1 to 3.
(Situation 1) In a situation where the type 1 BB has not been won, the internal lottery result in the decision game in which the transition of the advantageous section is decided may be a small role, a replay role, a rare role, etc. (hereinafter, a small role, etc.). ), The operating condition device has the same "small winning combination" as the result of this internal lottery.
(Situation 2) If the internal lottery result in the decision game is lost in the situation where the winning of the 1st class BB is won (under the situation where the winning of the 1st class BB is carried over), the operating condition device is ". It becomes "Type 1 BB".
(Situation 3) If the internal lottery result in the decision game is a small role, etc. in the situation where the winning of the 1st class BB is carried over (under the situation where the winning of the 1st class BB is carried over), the condition device is operating. Is "Type 1 BB + Small role, etc."
At the third timing in the game (decision game) of the above (situation 1) to (situation 3), the winning probability of the AT according to the "operating condition device" is determined. Then, in the start game of the advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed with the determined AT winning probability. With this configuration, the AT winning probabilities can be different between (Situation 1), (Situation 2), and (Situation 3).

For example, if the "operating condition device" is a rare combination, the AT lottery is performed with a winning probability of 1/3, and if the "operating condition device" is a small combination, the winning probability is 1/5. If the "operating condition device" is "type 1 BB + rare role", the AT lottery is performed with a winning probability of 1/2, and the "operating condition device" is "type 1 BB +". In the case of "small role", there is an example in which an AT lottery is performed with a winning probability of 1/4. In this aspect 4, when a small winning combination or the like is won in the game, there are two patterns of "operating condition device", that is, "small winning combination, etc." and "Type 1 BB + small winning combination, etc." (That is, in addition to the number of types such as small wins, there are as many types of predetermined information as the number of combinations of these and the type 1 BB. If a plurality of types of seed BBs are possessed, or if RBs and the like are possessed in addition to these, the types will be further increased), so that the contents related to AT can be varied.

(5) Aspect 5
In this aspect 5, the predetermined information regarding the game and the content regarding the advantageous state are the same as those in the above aspect 1, and as a specific timing, the first timing after pressing the second timing (for example, the start lever D50) in the start game. A third timing in the start game (for example, a second timing in the start game) is applied as a predetermined timing by applying any timing until the stop operation is performed or before the reel is in the steady rotation state. Any timing after the timing of the above and before the start game of the advantageous section ends, etc.) is applied.
That is, in the start game of the advantageous section, the RT state at that time is stored in the RAM at the second timing in the start game, and then according to the stored RT state at the third timing in the start game. Determine the winning probability of AT. Then, in the next game of the start game of the advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed with the winning probability of the determined AT.

Although the aspects 1 to 5 have been illustrated above, the predetermined information regarding the game includes the above-mentioned RT state and the internal lottery result (operating condition device), for example, the number of continuous games in the RT state, and the normal section. When a conditional device number is assigned to each winning combination such as the number of staying games, a small role, a replay role, and a bonus, it is possible to apply appropriate information such as the conditional device number, and regarding predetermined information regarding the game. Needless to say, is not particularly limited. Similarly, as for the content regarding the advantageous state, in addition to the above-mentioned AT winning probability, again, the number of so-called ceiling games (the number of ceiling games differs depending on predetermined information, etc.) and the number of games shift to AT. In the game number management specifications, the number of games for the first time to shift to AT (the number of games for the first time is shorter in mode 2 than in mode 1 etc.) and the zone where it is easy to hit for the first time (for example, depending on the predetermined information, the mode Mode 2 has a higher probability of allocating the number of AT winning games in the 101 to 200 game zone than in the 0 to 100 game zone than in 1), and the transition probability to the AT or chance zone. Modes of state transition (specific aspects of modes 1 and 2 above) such that the transition probability to high accuracy is different in specifications with low accuracy and high accuracy (mode 2 is easier to transition to high accuracy than mode 1). ), Etc., and it goes without saying that the content regarding this advantageous state is not particularly limited.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned modes 1 and 2, when the mode 0 which is the initial state is provided and the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the normal section, the mode 0 is shifted to the advantageous section in the next game and stored in the RAM. By referring to the predetermined information provided, the mode 1 or 2 of the advantageous section may be shifted to in the next game (games one after another of the games won in the advantageous section). For example, taking the number of ceiling games as an example, in the mode 0 game of the advantageous section (the next game of the game that won the advantageous section transition lottery), by referring to the predetermined information stored in the RAM, In the next game, the number of ceiling games shifts to, for example, mode 1 of 500 games or mode 2 of 1000 games (in other words, in mode 1, the number of ceiling games of 500 games is set in the next game, and mode 2 If so, the number of ceiling games of 1000 games may be set in the next game), or in the mode 0 game of the advantageous section (the next game of the game that won the advantageous section transition lottery). By referring to the predetermined information stored in the RAM, 500 games or 1000 games may be set as the number of ceiling games (the mode remains mode 0).

<<<<<< 18th Embodiment >>>>
Next, the 18th embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those of the above-described embodiments. The 18th embodiment can be applied to other embodiments. In particular, it is preferable to apply it to a revolving gaming machine having a plurality of bonuses having different specified numbers that can be operated with each other, such as the 16th embodiment, and this embodiment can be applied to, for example, the 16th embodiment and the like. Needless to say, there is no problem even if it is regarded as a detailed explanation of the bonus. FIG. 308 is a list of reel arrangements in the spinning machine according to the eighteenth embodiment, FIGS. 309 to 313 are a list of symbol combinations in the spinning machine according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 314 is a list of symbol combinations. , Is a list of condition devices in the revolving pachinko machine according to the 18th embodiment, FIG. 315 is a list of bonus specifications in the revolving gaming machine according to the 18th embodiment, and FIG. 316 is a list of bonus specifications in the 18th embodiment. It is a list of the main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the revolving gaming machine according to the above, and FIGS. 317 and 318 are internal lottery data in the revolving gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. 319 to 324 are a list of ball ejection rates in the spinning machine according to the 18th embodiment, and FIGS. 325 to 328 show the dispersion of the ball ejection rates in the spinning machine according to the 18th embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

The reel arrangement of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 308, and has a specification composed of 20 frames from No. 0 to No. 19. In FIG. 308, as in FIG. 303, the first cylinder means the left reel M51, the second cylinder means the middle reel M52, and the third cylinder means the right reel M53. (Also in FIG. 308, the above-mentioned reference numerals M51 to 53 are omitted). Although not shown, in the 18th embodiment, the effective line is one line of "left reel M51 middle stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 middle stage".

Further, the symbol combinations for each of the specified number of the rotating drum type gaming machines in the present embodiment are as shown in FIGS. 309 to 313. Here, there are four types of Type 1 BB of the present embodiment (Type 1 BB-A to Type D) (see FIG. 314), and these are collectively referred to as “Type 1 BB” as shown in FIG. 309 and the like. There is also. In FIGS. 309 to 313, the "specified number" is the so-called bet number as described above, and in FIGS. 309 to 313, "3" and "2" in the "specified number and gaming state" column. Means a game with a 3-card bet and a game with a 2-card bet, respectively. Further, in the same column, "-" means that the symbol combination is not displayed in the specified number and the game state (the winning combination related to the symbol combination is not subject to the lottery). Further, in the same column, numbers such as "15", "7", "3" and "1" indicate the number of game medals to be paid out when the symbol combination wins, in other words, the symbol combination. The winning combination means a small combination with the payout of game medals.

Specifically, for example, in the symbol combination related to the 46th "white seven / box / box" in FIG. 310, as shown in FIG. 314, the so-called "medal push" of the "winning / replay" number 7 It is one of the components of "Bell", and 15 cards are won by 3 bets inside the 1st class BB, 3 cards are won by 2 bets inside the 1st class BB, RB-A. (As shown in FIG. 315, 1 type BB-A or RB that continuously operates during the operation of B) 15 medals by betting 3 cards at the time of operation, RB-B (1 type as shown in FIG. 315) It is shown that 15 game medals are paid out by winning a prize with a two-card bet at the time of operation of RB) which is continuously operated during BB-C or D operation. Since the other parts in the "Specified number and game state" column are the same as above, the description thereof will be omitted. In the following, the descriptions in the other columns that require explanation will be described in sequence, but the explanation will be given by showing only one example and omitting the others.

The condition device for the rotating drum type gaming machine in this embodiment is as shown in FIG. 314. In FIG. 314, the “component” indicates a role that constitutes the condition device. For example, in the “winning-A1 condition device” of No. 7 of “winning / replay”, the component is There are four prizes, prize 01, prize 13, prize 15, and prize 17, indicating that these roles are duplicated.

Further, "non-internal inside" and "internal inside" in FIG. 314 indicate a state in which the type 1 BB is in the non-internal state, respectively, and the state in which the type 1 BB is in the internal state is shown in the column of "non-internal medium". The description shows the pull-in priority and the pull-in rate according to the batting order. This will be described below by taking as an example the column of "non-internal medium" of the "winning-A1 condition device" of the above number 7 in FIG. 314. First, "1--" in the "non-internal middle" column indicates the push order in which the winning 01 with 15 payouts is the correct batting order in which the winning can be won, and "1" indicates the above-mentioned left 1st. (Note that "2--" indicates the 1st of the above, and "3--" indicates the 1st of the right above). The "winning 01" described on the right side of this "1--" is a component winning 01 (3) of the "winning-A1 condition device" by the above-mentioned number priority control when the left reel M51 is stopped for the first time. 15 bets, 2 bets, 2 bets, 3 bets, 2 bets, 1 bet, 15 bets, 2 bets, 1 bet, 17 bets, 3 bets Of the four (1 for both 2 bets), the symbol that constitutes the symbol combination for winning 01, which has the largest number of payouts, has priority over the symbols that constitute the other symbol combinations for winning 13, 15, and 17. Means to stop.

In addition, "1/4" on the right side of "1--" in the "non-internal middle" column performs a stop operation for the symbol combination related to the above-mentioned winning 01 without pressing (in other words, in other words). , This is the winning rate (pull-in probability) of the symbol combination related to winning 01 when the game is played by "appropriate pressing" (also referred to as "free hitting") in which the stop button D40 is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310, the symbol combination related to the winning 01 is one type of No. 46 “white seven / box / box”. As shown in FIG. 308, among these symbol combinations, The symbol corresponding to the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 (hereinafter, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 may be simply referred to as "left", "middle", and "right", respectively). As for the "box", as in the case of the "replay" described in FIG. 303 above, four boxes are arranged at equal intervals every five frames (in FIG. 308, both the middle and the right are No. 1 and 6, respectively. No., No. 11 and No. 16), the winning rate is 100%. On the other hand, for "White Seven" on the left, only one of No. 3 is placed on the left.

Therefore, with respect to 20 which is the number of symbols in front of the reel, 5 (1 frame of the symbol + 4 frames of the maximum pull-in range) / 20, that is, 1/4 is won in consideration of 4 frames of the maximum pull-in range. As for the rate, the winning rate on the left is 1/4, and the winning rate on the middle and right is 1/1, so the winning rate as a whole is 1/4. In other words, the winning 01 is the so-called correct batting order, but if you do not press "White Seven" on the left, you need to press the button that you may miss at 3/4. In other words, in order to win the prize 01, it is necessary to press "White Seven" on the left and then stop the operation in the order of middle and right (middle and right can be aligned by pressing appropriately), and the prize- In the navigation when the A1 condition device is activated, it is notified that "white seven" is aimed at the left and that the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right.

On the other hand, "Other" in the "Non-internal middle" column indicates the batting order such as the middle 1st other than the left 1st and the right 1st, and the winning 01 with 15 payouts is an incorrect answer that cannot be won. Batting order. The "winning 13, 15, 17" described on the right side of this "other" is any of the "winning 13, 15, 17" by the above-mentioned number priority control when the pressing order other than the left 1st is performed. It means that the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the crab are stopped in preference to the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning 01. In addition, "1/2" on the right side of "Other" in the "Non-internal middle" column is the winning rate (drawing probability) of the symbol combination related to any of the winning 13, 15 and 17 when properly pressed. There is).

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 311, there are eight types of symbol combinations related to winning 13 of No. 58 to No. 65, and each of the symbols on the left and inside is "Blank A" or It is "blank B". As shown in FIG. 308, these "blanks A" or "blanks B" have either of these "blanks A" or "blanks B" at equal intervals of 5 frames on each of the left and middle sides. By arranging one (in FIG. 308, both left and middle are arranged at Nos. 2, 7, 12, and 17, respectively), either "Blank A" or "Blank B" must be arranged. It will stop (the total winning rate of "Blank A" and "Blank B" is 100%). On the other hand, the "White Seven" and "Red Seven" on the right are located at Nos. 3 and 18, respectively, so considering the 4 frames of the maximum pull-in range, the 10 frames from No. 4 to No. 13 are If the stop button D40 is pressed at any of these timings, the "white seven" or "red seven" cannot be stopped. Therefore, out of the 20 frames of the entire reel, 10 frames from 4 to 13 are missed, and "White Seven" or "Red" is missed in a total of 10 frames from 1 to 3 and 14 to 0. Since "Seven" can be drawn in, the winning rate is 10/20, that is, 1/2 is the winning rate, and the left and middle winning rates are 1/1 respectively, so the overall winning rate is 1. It becomes / 2. In other words, the winning prizes 13, 15 and 17 are in the so-called incorrect batting order, and are the roles that are missed by 1/2.

Further, as described above, there are four types of type 1 BB of the present embodiment, type 1 BB-A to D. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 315, one type BB-A of the symbol combination of "white seven / red seven / white seven" and one type BB of the symbol combination of "red seven / white seven / white seven". -B, "White Seven / Green Seven / White Seven" pattern combination BB-C, and "Red Seven / Green Seven / White Seven" pattern combination BB-D. .. Further, the types 1 BB-A and B are terminated when X (for example, 64 pieces, etc.) or more than Y pieces (for example, 1 piece, etc.) are acquired for the type 1 BB-C and D. Further, these 1st class BB-A to D are specifications in which the RB operates continuously, and this RB is a Z-time (for example, 2 times) game or 2 winnings, or a 1st class BB operating. It ends with the end. In addition, while these types 1 BB-A to D are in operation (during the bonus), only three bets can be played.

Of these 1st class BBs, 1st class BB-A and B can be won only by betting 3 cards in non-RT and winning only by betting 3 cards, as shown in FIGS. 309 and 317. It's a bonus. Further, as shown in FIGS. 309 and 318, the first-class BB-C and D are bonuses that can be won only by betting two cards in non-RT and can be won only by betting two cards. Therefore, if one type BB-A or B (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "three-card bet BB") is won in the non-RT, it will be inside the three-card bet BB. If you play a game with a 2-card bet, you cannot win a 3-card bet BB. In addition, if one type BB-C or D (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "two-card bet BB") is won in non-RT, the two-card bet BB is inside, but in this inside, If you play a game with a 3-card bet, you cannot win a 2-card bet BB. Further, the lottery itself of the first type BB is not performed inside the two-card bet BB and the three-card bet BB (see FIGS. 317 and 318).

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) by the reel control means is "replaying combination-> small winning combination (bell, watermelon, etc.)-> bonus", for example. , PB = 1 replaying combination (or small winning combination) and bonus are established at the same time, the symbol combination that becomes the replaying combination (or small winning combination) is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. .. Therefore, when a game is played with a 3-card bet inside the 3-card bet BB, the 3-card bet BB can be won under a situation where the bonus winning is not hindered, for example, at the time of losing. Specifically, as shown in RT1 (inside Type 1 BB-A or B) of the "total value" in the lower part of FIG. Since there are no small roles or replays to play, it is possible to win a prize by pressing the symbol combination of the 3-card bet BB. On the other hand, even if a game is played with a two-card bet inside the two-card bet BB, if there is a loss, etc., it is possible to win a prize by pressing the symbol combination of the two-card bet BB. In the embodiment, as shown in RT2 (inside the type 1 BB-C or D) of the total value in the lower part of FIG. 318, there is no deviation (inside RT2 (type 1 BB-C or D) in the figure). (As you can see from the replay-B, the outliers are filled with replays), so even if you play a game with a two-card bet inside the two-card bet BB, you will not be able to win a two-card bet BB. ing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition of RT controlled by the main control board M is as shown in FIG. 316. As shown in FIG. 316, in the non-RT (normal gaming state), when the 3-card bet BB is won (when the type 1 BB-A or B condition device is activated), the RT state is inside the 3-card bet BB. When the system shifts to RT1 and the symbol combination corresponding to the 3-card bet BB is displayed (when the 3-card bet BB wins), the RT3 becomes the 3-card bet BB operating. Then, when the 3-card bet BB is completed, the process shifts to non-RT. On the other hand, in the non-RT, if the 2-card bet BB is won, the process shifts to RT2 inside the 2-card bet BB, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the 2-card bet BB is displayed at this RT2, the 2-card bet BB is activated. When the two-card bet BB ends, the game shifts to non-RT.

In the present embodiment, when the setting is changed in the state inside the 2-card bet BB, this state is not cleared and the inside of the 2-card bet BB is maintained, while the inside of the 3-card bet BB is 3 If the setting is changed while the card bet BB is operating and the two bet BB is operating, these states (information about the bonus) are cleared and the non-RT state is set. Further, in the present embodiment, in order to manage the RT on the main control board M, the management number corresponding to the RT is stored, and the RT2 is in the state inside the above-mentioned two-card bet BB, and the RT2 The corresponding management number is memorized, but this management number is maintained without being cleared even if the setting is changed, while the management number of another RT state (for example, the RT state during the 3-card bet BB). The management number corresponding to RT1) is cleared when the setting is changed, and becomes a management number corresponding to the non-RT state. Here, when the setting is changed normally, the inside of the two-card bet BB is maintained (in other words, the inside of the two-card bet BB) as described above, but for some reason. An abnormality (RWM abnormality) may occur when the setting is changed, and the inside of the two-card bet BB, which is not originally a clear target, may be cleared (initialized) and the non-RT state may be entered. The range cleared when the setting is changed is not limited to the above example, and for example, the state inside the 3-card bet BB is not cleared (at the same time, the RT management number corresponding to this is not cleared. ), Etc., needless to say, it can be set appropriately according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

Fig. 317 shows the number of each condition device (bonus condition device, winning / replay) when a 3-card bet is placed on these non-RT, RT1, and RT2, and when a 2-card bet is placed. And as shown in FIG. 318, and the entire number (random number denominator) is 65536. In FIGS. 317 and 318, the numbers such as "1" in the left column such as "non-RT (normal time)" indicating the RT state are merely identification numbers, and "1" is a number when betting three cards. Non-RT, "2" is non-RT when betting 2 cards, "3" is RT1 when betting 3 cards, "4" is RT1 when betting 2 cards, "5" is RT2 when betting 3 cards, "6" "" Corresponds to RT2 at the time of two-card bet, "7" corresponds to three-card bet BB operating, and "8" corresponds to two-card betting BB operating. In addition, "○" and "x" in the respective columns of "lottery" and "advantageous section transition" indicate whether or not they are subject to the processing. "○" in the "lottery" column indicates a bonus condition device or a condition device such as "replay-A" listed in "winning / replay" (sometimes simply referred to as "role"). It indicates that it is a lottery target, and "x" indicates that it is not a lottery target. Further, "R1" to "R6" indicate setting values, which indicate that they are settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the values described in these columns are fractions (random number denominator) corresponding to each combination. The above 65536 random number molecule).

Further, "○" in the "advantageous section" column indicates that the winning combination can be transferred to the advantageous section (in this embodiment, 100% is transferred), and "x" indicates that the combination is advantageous section. It shows that it does not trigger the transition to (the transition lottery to the advantageous section is not performed). As shown in FIGS. 317 and 318, the “advantageous section transition” is “x” in each of the “2”, “4”, and “6” states at the time of the two-card bet shown in FIG. 318. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed for the three-card bet, and the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed at the time of the two-card bet.

Regarding this advantageous section, for example, the transition of the advantageous section is determined in the game in which the winning-A1 is won, and the advantageous section indicator YH can be turned on in the next game. In this situation, when a game is played with a 3-card bet in the next game, the advantageous section indicator YH lights up (for example, it lights up at a predetermined timing after pressing the start lever D50 in a 3-card bet state). When the game is played with two or two bets, the advantageous section indicator YH is prevented from lighting. When the game is played with these two bets, the advantageous section indicator YH does not light up, but the above-mentioned advantageous section clear counter, AT winning game number counter, and MY counter can be updated (for example). For the update mode of the advantageous section counter and the AT winning game number counter, see FIG. 297 and the like described in the modified example of the 16th embodiment).

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section in the game of three-card betting, and the state of the advantageous section is not set in the game of two-card betting. In other words, in a three-card betting game, AT can be executed by performing AT processing, while in a two-card betting game, AT processing is not performed and AT cannot be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the specification is such that AT can be executed only in the game of three-card betting inside the two-card betting BB. The state in which the AT can be executed is not limited to the above-mentioned example. Needless to say, it can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the rotating machine, such as making it executable.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the AT cannot be executed in the two-card betting game, and when the specification centering on the AT game is adopted, for example, the two-card betting game is performed. When this is done, the effect display device S40 displays an effect indicating that "two-card betting game is in progress" (for example, "two-card bet game is in progress" as it is, instead of the effect that has been performed so far. At the same time, it is also possible to perform an effect of notifying that the two-card betting game is in progress by voice or the like, so that the player can confirm that the two-card betting game is being played. .. At this time, a lamp unit such as the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 (if a light source unit or the like that illuminates the lower panel D140 is provided, of course, this is also included, and a predetermined lighting pattern is used in the rotating cylinder type game. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a light emitting body that can be notified to the player by (light emitting pattern) or the like. It is also possible to make the lamp unit different from each other during the game, so that the player can confirm that the game is being played with two bets. Further, in the type 1 BB, a display such as "waiting for return" may be displayed to indicate that the AT is returning to the inside of the two-card bet BB that can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned production group numbers (numbers that can identify only the outline of the winning combination) described in FIG. 10 and the like are assigned to the “bonus condition device” and the “winning / replay”, and also. It also has the above-mentioned "instruction number". Since this production group number is described in detail with reference to FIG. 10 and the like, here, for example, the production group A number in which the “winning / replay” shown in FIG. It will be described as having a production group B number that is a collection of "bonus condition devices".

In this case, under the situation where AT is not executed inside the two-card bet BB (under the situation during non-AT), the effect group A number and the effect group B number are transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. It is possible. On the other hand, under the situation where AT is executed inside the two-card bet BB (under the situation during AT), the effect group A number, the effect group B number, and the instruction number are subordinately controlled from the main control board M. It can be transmitted to the substrate S.

Under the situation during this AT, the sub-control board S receives the effect group A number, the effect group B number, and the instruction number, but the sub-control board S becomes a "winning / replay" based on the instruction number. While the advantageous operation mode (push order navigation, etc.) relating to the effect group A number is notified, the advantageous operation mode (in this case, for example, 2) relating to the effect group B number related to the "bonus condition device" is notified. The fact that the one-card bet BB can be won, the display of the symbol combination related to the two-card bet BB (the display for performing the operation mode of pressing the button), and the like are not notified.

That is, since the sub-control board S receives the effect group B number regardless of whether it is in the non-AT state or the AT state, it is possible to notify an advantageous operation mode regarding the effect group B number in any state. be. Here, in the case of inside the two-card bet BB and non-AT, the expected value of the payout is smaller than that of the two-card bet BB, while in the case of inside the two-card bet BB and AT, the payout is made. If the expected value of is larger than the two-card bet BB, especially in the latter case, even if the effect group B number is received from the main control board M, this is notified to the player. This is not preferable because it informs the player of a disadvantageous situation. Therefore, under the situation during AT, the notification based on the effect group B number is not performed to prevent the player from falling into a disadvantageous state.

Here, based on the above-mentioned description, the game modes in the present embodiment can be briefly summarized as follows.
Game mode 1: A game with a 3-card bet in a non-internal medium state → Of the 1-type BB, only a 3-card bet BB can be won.
Game mode 2: A game with two bets in a non-internal medium state → Only two bets BB can be won out of one type BB.
Game mode 3: 3-card bet Game with 3-card bet in the internal state of BB → 3-card bet BB can be won. In addition, AT can be executed, but AT is not performed.
Game mode 4: Three-card bet Game with two-card bet in the internal state of BB → Three-card bet BB cannot win, and AT cannot be executed.
Game mode 5: 2-card bet BB Game with 3-card bet in the internal state → 2-card bet BB cannot be won, but AT can be executed.
Game mode 6: Two-card bet BB Game with two-card bet in the internal state → Two-card bet BB can be won, but AT cannot be executed.
Game mode 7: 2 bets Game during BB → Only 3 bets can be played.
Game mode 8: 3 bets Game during BB → Only 3 bets can be played.

In other words, it has the above-mentioned game modes 1 to 8 as a game mode that the player can take. For example, a player who wants to win two bets BB continuously plays a game in game modes 2 and 6, and a player who wants to win three bets BB continuously plays a game in game modes 1 and 3. A player who wants to concentrate on the AT can play the games in the game modes 2 and 5. In this way, since the game modes 1 to 8 can be selectively performed by the player's will, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having various game characteristics.

Next, the ball output rate of the above-mentioned game modes 1 to 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. 319 to 324. Here, FIG. 319 shows the ball output rates of the game modes 1 and 2, FIG. 320 shows the ball output rates of the game modes 3 and 4, and FIG. 321 shows the ball output rates of the game modes 5 and 6. Etc., and FIGS. 322 and 323 show the ball output rates of the game modes 7 and 8. Here, in FIGS. 319 to 323, "BB" is a general term for one type of BB, and "replay" is a general term for the replays A to F of FIGS. 317 and 318. be. In addition, the prize A of "Prize A to C" is also a general term for the prizes-A1 to 7 of FIG. 317, and the same applies to the prizes B to D.

Regarding "OUT1" and "OUT2" in FIGS. 319 to 323, for example, the winning-A1 of the winning A will be described as an example. In FIG. 314, the winning-A1 is composed of the winnings 01, 13, 15, and 17. Of these, the largest number of payouts is 15 of prize 01 (see FIG. 310), and this is set as OUT1 as a higher number. On the other hand, among the winning-A1s, the one with the lowest number of payouts is one of the winnings 13, 15 and 17 (see FIGS. 311 and 312), and this is set as OUT2 as a lower number. As for the winning E, F, and G, since only 15 sheets, 1 sheet, and 15 sheets are paid out, respectively (see FIGS. 310 to 313 and FIG. 314), these are set as OUT1 as a higher number and as a lower number. OUT2 is set to 0. In addition, since there is no payout for BB and outliers, both OUT1 and OUT2 are set to 0. Furthermore, the "expected value including rip (expected value including replay)" is to calculate the payout rate assuming that three cards have been inserted and paid out at the time of the game by automatically inserting the replay, and "expected without rip". The “value (expected value without replay)” is used to calculate the payout rate assuming that 0 cards have been inserted and paid out at the time of the game due to the automatic insertion of the replay.

“PB1” in FIGS. 319 to 323 is the pull-in probability of the symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned OUT1, and “PB2” is the pull-in probability of the symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned OUT2. Regarding this pull-in probability, for example, among the 1st class BB of the game mode 1, the 1st class BB-A related to "white seven, red seven, white seven" will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 308, left middle right In, there is only one each of "white seven", "red seven", and "white seven". Here, when the reels are stopped in the order of left, middle, and right, the pull-in probability of the left "white seven" that stops first is 1 frame + 4 frames of the maximum pull-in range, and if it is within the range of 5 frames, it will be in the middle stage. Since it can be retracted, it is 5/20. In addition, regarding the pull-in probability of the middle and right, the middle is based on the "white seven" that has already stopped on the left, and the right is based on the symbol combination tempered in the left middle, so pull only within the maximum pull-in range. Since it cannot be put in, it will be 5/20 each. The sum of these is 5/20 x 5/20 x 5/20, which is about 1.5% (hereinafter, rounded to 2% will be described). Since the same applies to the other type 1 BB, this 2% is the probability of pulling in PBB1 of the BB. For the other prizes A to D and F and PB2, the pull-in probability is calculated in the same manner, and the value is as shown in FIG. 319 and the like. Further, since the replay, the winning E, and the winning G each have PB = 1, 100% is the value of PB1.

Here, the above-mentioned "expected value including rip" can be calculated by the following equation (1).
Equation (1)
(OUT1 x PB1 + OUT2 x PB2) x (number ÷ random number denominator)
For example, when the winning prizes A to C in setting 1 are applied to the above formula (1), (15 (OUT1) × PB1 (0.08) + 1 (OUT2) × 0.46 (PB2)) × (24120 (number of fractions)). ÷ 65536 (random number denominator) gives 0.6287384 .... The cumulative total of each value after calculating other prizes in the same way (the vertical values in the column including replay in setting 1 are added up). The value) is "2.0222778 ...", and the value obtained by dividing the specified number of 3 is "0.67409 ...", which is about 67.41% of the ball output rate, in other words, Obtain the ball output rate (expected value) of how many balls can be expected for each game medal inserted (the ball output rate including replay in setting 1).

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "expected value without rip" can be calculated by the following equation (2).
Equation (2)
(OUT1 x PB1 + OUT2 x PB2) x (number ÷ (random number denominator-total number of replays))
For example, when the winning prizes A to C in the setting i are applied to the above equation (1), (15 (OUT1) × PB1 (0.08) +1 (OUT2) × 0.46 (PB2)) × (24120 (number of fractions)) ÷ (65536 (random number denominator) -8978 (total number of replays)) gives 0.72854 ... And the cumulative total with other prizes is "1.8670745 ...". Divide the specified number of 3 to obtain a ball output rate of about 62.24% (the ball output rate without replay in setting 1).

Further, with respect to the "expected value including rip" of setting 1 in the game mode 2, similarly, each winning prize, etc. is calculated by the above formula (1), and the cumulative total "1.347846 ..." is obtained. By dividing the specified number of 2 into, the payout rate of about 67.39% is calculated. Similarly, for the “expected value without rip” of setting 1 in the game mode 2, a ball output rate of about 62.22% is obtained. The other ball ejection rates of FIGS. 319 to 323 are obtained in the same manner as described above, and since these are as shown in FIGS. 319 to 323, the description thereof will be omitted.

The ball output rates obtained as described above are as shown in FIGS. 319 to 323, respectively, and FIG. 324 is a summary of these. In addition, in FIG. 324, "A:" to "P:" are added to the head of each numerical value, which corresponds to any of the numerical values of FIGS. 319 to 323. It is an identifier attached to make it easy to understand the correspondence relationship as to whether or not it is, for example, “A:” in FIG. 324 indicates that it corresponds to “A:” in FIG. 319.

Here, in a rotating machine, it is generally assumed that a player plays a game by a stop operation so as to obtain a maximum number of game medals, but a non-AT state or an AT state. In the above, it can be assumed that the stop operation is performed in an arbitrary order and at an arbitrary timing, and when the stop operation is performed in this arbitrary order and at an arbitrary timing, the payout rate (the above-mentioned equation (1) or If the ball ejection rate obtained in (2) does not reach a predetermined specified lower limit value (for example, the ball ejection rate is 60%), the design value may be contrary to the rules. Therefore, it is necessary to secure a ball output rate that exceeds the predetermined lower limit value. For this purpose, the equation (1) is adjusted by adjusting the number of payouts, the pull-in probability, the number of winning combinations (in other words, the winning probability), etc., which are the parameters used in the above equations (1) and (2). ) And (2) should be the intended payout rate. That is, the number of payouts is increased or decreased, the symbol arrangement of FIG. 308, the symbol combination of FIGS. 309 to 313, the components of the condition device of FIG. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the payout rate of each set value so as to be the intended payout rate.

In the present embodiment, the symbol arrangement, the symbol combination, the components of the condition device, the number of placements, etc. as shown in FIGS. 308 to 318 are used to obtain the ball output rate as shown in FIG. The ball output rate, which is the lower limit value when the stop operation is performed in any order and at any timing during AT, is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 324, non-RT 3-card and 2-card bets (game states 1 and 2), 3-card bet, 3-card bet and 2-card bet (game states 3 and 4) inside the BB. In any game state of 3 bets and 2 bets (game states 5 and 6) in the 2 bets BB, 3 bets and 2 bets in the BB (game states 7 and 8). , 60% of the above-mentioned specified lower limit value is exceeded with a margin, and no matter which gaming state the player selects, at least 60% or more of the payout rate can be obtained.

Next, a comparison of the ball output rates between the game modes in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, in the game mode 4 (three-card bet, two-card bet inside the BB), the game is performed by the "appropriate push" as described above (hereinafter, simply referred to as "appropriate push". The payout rate of (there is also) is A, the payout rate of the "appropriate push" in the game mode 5 (three bets inside the two bet BB) is B, and the payout rate of the game mode 6 (two bets inside the BB) is B. When the payout rate in the "appropriate push" in the two-card bet) is set to C, the comparison (1) of the payout rates is set as follows.
Comparison (1): A <B, A <C
Specifically, the replay-included ball output rate (whether the replay-included ball output rate or the replay-excluded ball output rate is the same, the result is the same. As shown in FIG. 324, the ball ejection rate A (corresponding to “F:” in FIG. 324) is 67.40%, and the ball ejection rate is 67.40%. The rate B (corresponding to "I:" in FIG. 324) is 67.41, and the ball ejection rate C (corresponding to "J:" in FIG. 324) is 92.83%, and the above comparison (1) is established. There is. That is, in the three game modes 4, 5, and 6, the ball output rate A of the game mode 4 is set to be the lowest.

As described above, the game mode 4 is a two-card betting game in which AT is not executed, and it is assumed that it is difficult for the game to be played by the player's intention. By lowering the ball output rate of the assumed game mode 4 compared to the game states 5 and 6 in which the AT can be executed, the base of the normal game (50 game medals can play 40 games). If there is, the base 40, if 50 games are possible, the base 50, which indicates the base of the number of games for a predetermined number of game medals) can be lowered. As a result, the probability of lottery that is advantageous to the player, such as the probability of winning the AT, can be improved by the amount that the base is lowered, and a so-called low base high TY (low base and high winning probability) rotary game is provided. can do. Further, even if the game mode 4 is set against the player's intention, the minimum payout rate (60% or more in this embodiment) is guaranteed, so that the game mode is compared with other game modes. , It is possible to prevent the player from making an extreme loss.

In addition, the ball output rate B in the "in the case of proper pushing" in the game mode 5, which is a 3-card bet inside the 2-card BB where the AT can be executed, and 2 inside the 2-card BB where the AT cannot be executed. As shown in the comparison (2) below, the ball payout rate C in the "appropriate push" in the game mode 6 which is a bet is set so that the ball payout rate C is larger than the ball payout rate B. There is. Specifically, as described above, the ball ejection rate B is 67.41% and the ball ejection rate C is 92.83%, and the following comparison (2) is established. Since this comparison (2) is a comparison under the situation during non-AT (predetermined state) as described above, when the ball output rate under the situation during AT (specific state) is compared, B Needless to say,> C.
Comparison (2): B <C (in other words, A <B, A <C and B <C)

In this way, the ball ejection rate C in which the AT cannot be executed should have a higher ball ejection rate than the ball ejection rate B in the game mode 5 in which the AT can be executed. For example, a player who wants to perform AT is playing in game mode 5 under normal conditions, but even if such a player mistakenly bets two cards and plays in game mode 6, the payout rate is By setting C to be larger than the ball output rate B of the game mode 5, such a player can be relieved. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the ball ejection rate C is 90% as compared with the ball ejection rate in the 60% range of the other game modes 1 to 5 other than the game modes 7 and 8 in which the BB is operating. The effectiveness is enhanced by making the ball output rate as high as a stand.

Here, since the game mode 5 is a game in which a two-card bet BB can be won only by a two-card bet and a three-card bet in which a two-card bet BB cannot be won cannot be won, a game in which AT is desired to be performed. As long as the player is playing the game in the game state 5, the player can play the game without worrying that the two-card bet BB will win a prize. Further, the game mode 3 is a game in which a 3-card bet BB can be won only by a 3-card bet and a 3-card bet BB can be won, and the game mode 3 is described above. Do not execute AT like. Further, the game mode 4 is a game in which the 3-card bet BB cannot win a prize in the 3-card bet BB, and the AT is not executed. Therefore, it is assumed that the player who wants to perform AT does not play the game in the game mode 4 and wants to move to the game state 5 by winning a 3-card bet BB in order to get out of the state of the game mode 3. Will be done. On the other hand, in contrast to these game modes 3, 4, and 5, in the game mode 6, the player can mistakenly win the game mode 6 because it is possible to win the two-card bet BB, which can be won only by betting two cards. It is preferable to avoid winning a double bet BB as much as possible when playing a game in.

In view of these matters, the three-card BB in the game mode 3 in which the three-card BB can win is higher than the ratio in which the symbol combination of the two-card BB in the game mode 6 in which the two-card BB can win can be displayed. It is preferable that the ratio in which the symbol combination of No. 1 can be displayed is higher, and that it is more difficult for the 2-card bet BB to win the prize than the 3-card bet BB when chewed.

In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, as described above, by filling the gap with a replay (see FIG. 318), even if the game is played with a two-card bet inside the two-card bet BB (game mode). 2 bets BB cannot win (in other words, 3 bets inside the 3 bets BB) are 3 bets BB symbols at a predetermined ratio (predetermined probability). Although the combination can be displayed, in the case of a two-card bet in the two-card bet BB, the ratio at which the symbol combination of the two-card bet BB can be displayed is set to 0% and cannot be displayed). By doing so, even if the player who wants to perform AT mistakenly plays the game in the game mode 6, the game of the game mode 6 is performed without worrying that the two-card bet BB wins a prize. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the game mode 6, the specification is such that the winning of the two-card bet BB is not possible. For example, in FIG. 318, the number of "missing" is set to "1" or "2". Therefore, even in the game mode 6, the specification may be set so that it is difficult to win the two-card bet BB as compared with the three-card BB while guaranteeing the opportunity to win the two-card bet BB. In short, as described above, the method is not particularly limited as long as the ratio of displaying the two-card bet BB is lower than the ratio of displaying the three-card bet BB. From this point of view, for example, by reducing the symbol combination of the 2-card bet BB to be smaller than the symbol combination of the 3-card bet BB, the draw-in probability of the 2-card bet BB is made lower than the pull-in probability of the 3-card bet BB. Etc. are also conceivable.

Here, as described above, it is assumed that the player who wants to perform AT wants to move to the game state 5 by winning a 3-card bet BB in order to get out of the state of the game modes 3 and 4. In this case, after winning the 3-card bet BB and waiting for the winning of the 2-card bet BB after passing through the non-RT state, the game is performed in the game mode 2 of the 2-card bet in the non-RT. It will be. The ball output rate in the game mode 2 is 67.39% as shown by “B:” in FIG. 324. On the other hand, in the game mode 4, which is a two-card bet inside the three-card bet BB, as shown by “F:” in FIG. 324, it is 67.40%, and the payout rate is 0 as compared with the game mode 2. It is 1% higher.

67.40% of the payout rate of this game mode 4 is the payout rate when staying only in this game mode 4, and in the game state 4, 3 bets BB cannot win 3 cards. Since it is a two-card bet inside the bet BB and there is no transition to another game mode even in the above-mentioned "appropriate push", a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of times since the game is started from this game mode 4 ( For example, when the payout rate when the game is played (17,500 times, etc.) is β, the payout rate β remains the above-mentioned “67.40%”.

On the other hand, 67.39% of the ball output rate in the game state 2 is also the ball output rate when staying only in the game mode 2, but this game state 2 is the above-mentioned "in the case of an appropriate push". In the game in which the 2-card BB wins and the 2-card BB wins, the 2-card BB may win and return to the game state 2 after passing through the game state 8. be. Then, when the ball output rate when the above-mentioned "appropriate push" is played a predetermined number of times after starting the game from the game mode 2 is set to α, the game returns to the game state 2 via the game state 8. In some cases, the ball output rate in the game state 8 is 92.94%, which is much higher than the ball output rate in the game state 2, as described above, and is higher than the ball output rate β described above. It is becoming more. That is, the payout rate α and 3 when the game is played with the above-mentioned "appropriate push" a predetermined number of times (for example, 17,500 times) after starting the game from the game mode 2 which is a non-RT two-card bet. The payout rate β in the above-mentioned “in the case of proper pushing” of the game mode 4, which is a two-card bet inside the BB, has a relationship that α> β is established. In other words, in the present embodiment, the ball output rate in the game state 8 is adjusted so that such a relationship is established.

In this way, the payout rate α when the game is started from the non-RT two-card bet game mode 2 and then the game is played a predetermined number of times, and the three-card bet BB are two-card bets. The payout rate β of 4 is such that α> β is established, so that the game state 3 of 3 bets is performed and the 3 bets BB are won rather than continuing the game in the game state 4. , The game mode 2 is a two-card betting game in which the game is shifted to non-RT, and the payout rate is higher. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player who wants to perform AT, the game mode 4 It is possible to reduce the significance of playing a game in. As a result, the game in the order of the game mode 2 via the game mode 3, that is, the AT is possible by shifting to the non-RT and waiting for the winning of the two-card bet BB without continuing the game mode 4. It is possible to encourage the player to play in the direction of the state.

Next, the dispersion of the ball output rate will be described with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328. This dispersion of the payout rate means that, for example, when the winning probability of the 1st class BB is set to 1/10, the 1st class BB is not always won every 10 games, for example, a comparison of 100 games. In a short period of time, the 1st class BB won at 1/5 of the winning probability (in terms of winning probability, the expected winning value of the 1st class BB in 100 games is 10 times, but 20 times this double. (Also won), or conversely, 1st class BB won at 1/20 of the winning probability (1/2 of the above expected winning value of 10 times), only 5 times. There is a bias in the probability, such as (no state), and the variation in the data obtained by simulating this bias is used as the variance of the payout rate. Specifically, in 100,000 pachinko and pachislot machines, 17600 is performed by the above-mentioned "appropriate push" (in other words, stop operation is performed in any order and at any timing) during non-AT. We played a number of games and tested the bias of the probability. Figures 325 to 328 are graphs of the results of sampling the ball output rate for each 400 games in each spinning machine and collecting statistics on the maximum and minimum values of the ball output rate. It is the dispersion of the payout rate shown.

Specifically, FIG. 325 shows the dispersion of the payout rate in the three-card betting game mode 3 inside the three-card BB, and FIG. 326 shows the payout rate in the two-card betting game mode 4 inside the three-card BB. FIG. 327 shows the dispersion of the ball payout rate in the three-card betting game mode 5 inside the two-card BB, and FIG. 328 shows the two-card betting game mode 6 inside the two-card BB. It is the dispersion of the payout rate in.

As shown in FIG. 325, in the game mode 3, in the minimum number of games area where the number of games is 0 to 399 (the area where the number of games is 0 in FIG. 325. The same shall apply hereinafter in FIGS. 326 to 328). The maximum value of the ball is 500%, and the minimum value is 0%. That is, since the maximum number of payouts is 15 in the bet of 3 out of 3 BBs, for example, when the winning 01 winning symbol of the winning-A1 condition device is displayed in the first game, 3 Since 15 cards were paid out by inserting the cards, the payout rate is 500%, and if there is a deviation in the 0th game, the payout rate is 0%, so the difference is 500%. When the maximum and minimum ball ejection rates are taken in this way, as shown in FIG. 325, the maximum number of games played area is 17201 to 17600 times (in FIG. 325, "number of games 17600"). Area. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 326 to 328), the maximum payout rate is 67%, the minimum is 58%, and the difference (maximum minimum difference) is the variance H1 of the payout rate. Is 9%.

As shown in FIG. 326, in the game mode 4, since the maximum number of payouts is 3 for a 2-card bet, the maximum value of the payout in the minimum number of games area is 350% and the minimum value is 0%. The difference is 350%. Further, in the maximum number of games played area, the maximum value is 66% and the minimum value is 60%, and the variance H2 of the ball output rate is 6%.

As shown in FIG. 327, in the game state 5, the maximum value of the number of balls to be played in the minimum number of games area is 500%, the minimum value is 0%, and the difference is 500%. Further, in the maximum number of games area, the maximum value is 68% and the minimum value is 58%, and the variance H3 of the ball output rate is 10%.

As shown in FIG. 328, in the game mode 6, the maximum value of the ball output in the minimum number of games area is 350%, the minimum value is 0%, and the difference is 350%. Further, in the maximum number of games area, the maximum value is 93% and the minimum value is 85%, and the variance H4 of the ball output rate is 8%.

Here, the magnitude of each dispersion value will be described. In the description thereof, the game mode 4 of the two-card bet inside the three-card BB shown in FIG. 326 and the three-card bet inside the two-card BB shown in FIG. 327 will be described. The dispersion value with the game mode 5 will be described as an example, and the other game modes 3 and 6 shown in FIGS. 325 and 327 are the same as those of the game modes 4 and 5, so the description thereof will be omitted. It shall be. Looking at the dispersion values of these game modes 4 and 5, the dispersion H2 in the maximum number of games area in the game mode 4 is 6%, the dispersion H3 of the game mode 5 is 10%, and the dispersion H3 of the game mode 4 is The dispersion H2 is smaller than the dispersion H3 of the game mode 5. The reason why such a dispersion of the ball output rate occurs is as follows.

In the three-card betting game state 5, the number of game medals to be paid out as described above is 15 (for example, winning 01 in which the winning order is correct with PB = 1 in winning-A1) and one (for example, winning 01). , Winning-A1 can win a prize when the push order is incorrect (PB ≠ 1) Winning 13), 0 sheets (for example, when winning-A1 has an incorrect push order and the winning 13 is missed), 2 In the game state 6 of betting, 3 cards (for example, winning 01 that wins with PB ≠ when the push order is correct in winning-D1), 1 card (for example, PB = 1 when the pushing order is incorrect in winning-D1) Winning prize 13 etc.). Therefore, when betting 3 cards, the payout rate of 15 cards with 3 cards is 500%, the payout rate of 1 card with 3 cards is 33%, and the payout rate of 0 cards with 3 cards is 0%. On the other hand, in the case of a two-card bet, the payout rate of three pieces of two pieces is 150%, and the payout rate of one piece of two pieces is 50%. A comparison (comparison 1) of these together is as follows.
(Comparison 1)
When betting 3 cards: 500%, 33%, 0%
When betting two cards: 150%, 50%

As is clear from this comparison 1, the difference between the minimum 0% and the maximum 500% is 500% when betting three cards, while the minimum 50% when betting two cards. The maximum difference of 150% is 100%, and the variance is smaller than that at the time of betting on three cards, so that the probability is less likely to be biased. Therefore, regarding the dispersion value between the two-card betting game mode 4 inside the three-card BB and the three-card betting game mode 5 inside the two-card BB, the two-card betting game mode 4 has three cards. The variance is smaller than that of the betting game mode 5.

In this way, by adjusting the number of payouts with respect to the number of inserts and whether or not to set a small winning combination of PB = 1, the magnitude of the dispersion of the payout rate can be adjusted. The dispersion of the payout rate is suppressed by making the difference between the number of input sheets and the number of payout sheets smaller than that of the game mode 5. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game mode 4 to fall below the specified lower limit value due to the bias of the probability at the time of the test firing test, as compared with the game mode 5.

In order to adjust the variance of the game state 4 described above, in addition to reducing the difference between the number of input sheets and the number of payout sheets as described above, for example, PB = 1 regardless of the pressing order. It is conceivable to set up an unquestioned push order with two payouts to win. In this case, in the case of the above-mentioned (comparison 1) two-card bet, the values are 150%, 100%, and 50%, and the variance is further reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, the dispersion rate of the game mode 4 is suppressed, but the dispersion rate is not limited to this, and for example, the dispersion rate of other game modes can be suppressed in the same manner, and the dispersion rate is not limited to this. Needless to say, it can be appropriately applied to a game mode in which it is desired to suppress.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those of the above-described embodiments. The 19th embodiment can be applied to other embodiments. For example, the reel arrangement and the winning combination type (combination configuration) according to the other embodiment, the reel arrangement and the conditions according to the present embodiment. Needless to say, the device and the like can be applied to other embodiments. FIG. 329 is a list of reel arrangements in the revolving pachinko machine according to the 18th embodiment, and FIGS. 330 to 340 are a list of symbol combinations in the revolving pachinko machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 342 is a list of conditional devices in the spinning machine according to the 19th embodiment, FIG. 343 is a list of bonus specifications in the spinning machine according to the 19th embodiment, and FIG. 344 is a list of bonus specifications. 19 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the spinning machine according to the nineteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 345 to 347 are internal lottery data in the spinning machine according to the nineteenth embodiment. 348 is a diagram for explaining the push-pushing slash combination 1 in the spinning machine according to the 19th embodiment, and FIG. 349 is a pushing order in the spinning machine according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 350 is an image diagram for explaining an instruction mode of the display device, and FIG. 350 is an image diagram for explaining an effect mode of the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment.

The reel arrangement of the rotating drum type gaming machine in this embodiment is as shown in FIG. 329, and has a specification composed of 20 frames from No. 0 to No. 19. In FIG. 329, similarly to FIGS. 303 and 308 described above, the first cylinder means the left reel M51, the second cylinder means the middle reel M52, and the third cylinder and the third cylinder. Means the right reel M53 (also in FIG. 329, the above-mentioned reference numerals M51 to 53 are omitted). Although not shown, in the 19th embodiment, the effective line is one line of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage" diagonally downward to the right.

Further, the symbol combinations for each of the specified number of the rotating drum type gaming machines in the present embodiment are as shown in FIGS. 330 to 340. Here, although only one type 1 BB of the present embodiment is provided, a plurality of types such as type 1 BB-A to D may be provided as in the eighteenth embodiment (see FIG. 314). ). The meanings of the "specified number" in FIGS. 330 to 340, the meanings of "3 sheets" and "2 sheets" in the "specified number and gaming state" column, etc., are the same as those of FIG. 309 and the like described in the 18th embodiment. Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device of the rotating drum type gaming machine in this embodiment is as shown in FIGS. 341 and 342. In FIGS. 341 and 342, the “component” is the same as the “component” of FIG. 314 described in the 18th embodiment. Further, "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" in FIGS. 341 and 342 is synonymous with "inside inside" in FIG. 314, and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating" is synonymous with "inside inside" in FIG. 314. .. Further, the descriptions in the columns of "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating" also show the pull-in priority and the pull-in rate according to the batting order, as in FIG. 314. This will be described below by taking the "winning A-1 condition device" of No. 7 of "winning / replay" in FIG. 324 as an example. First, "123" and the like of "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" are synonymous with "123" of the above-mentioned "pushing order bell 123" (that is, as described above, "1" is a left stop button. D41 and "2" indicate the middle stop button D42, "3" indicates the right stop button D43, and the sequence of these numbers means that the stop buttons indicated by the numbers are pressed in that order), left, and so on. It means that the reels are stopped in the order of pushing in the middle and right. Further, "2 **" has the same meaning as "2-−" in FIG. 314 described in the 18th embodiment, and indicates the 1st among the above. Similarly, "3 **" indicates the right 1st, and although it is described in another column, "1 **" indicates the left 1s. Further, “1/1”, “1/2”, “1/8” and the like are the same as “1/4” and the like in FIG. 314. Therefore, for example, in the case of "123: 1/1 winning 01", when the reels are stopped in the order of left, middle, and right, the symbol combination related to winning 01 wins 100% (drawing rate 100%). Meaning, "2 **: 1/8 prize 26 to 271, 66" means that when the reel is stopped in the middle 1st, the symbol combination related to any of the prizes 26 to 27, 66 is 1/8 prize. It means winning at a rate.

Among these winning rates, for example, when the reel is stopped in the middle 1st, the case where the symbol combination according to any of the winnings 26 to 27 and 66 wins at the winning rate of 1/8 will be explained as follows. be. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 335 and 337, the symbol combination related to the prize 26 is "Seven Bell B Seven", the symbol combination related to the prize 27 is "Seven Bell B Blank", and the symbol combination related to the prize 66. The combination is "Seven Bell B Cherry". "Bell B" which is a symbol of the middle reel M52 of each of these prizes 26 to 27 and 66 (hereinafter, this kind of symbol is sometimes simply referred to as "bell B" or "bell B" symbol. Since four of the middle reels M52 are arranged on the middle reel M52 at equal intervals of five frames, the winning rate is 1/1 as described in the above-described 18th embodiment. Become. Further, in the state where "Bell B" is stopped on the middle reel M52, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning 26 to 27, 66 on the right reel M53 are "Seven" and "Blank". , "Cherry", and any of these symbols can be drawn in a total of 10 frames from No. 10 to No. 19, so the winning rate is 1 as explained in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment. It becomes / 2. Further, since only one "Seven" symbol constituting the symbol combination corresponding to each of the winnings 26 to 27 and 66 on the left reel M51 is arranged on the left reel M52, it will be described in the above-described 18th embodiment. As you can see, the winning rate is 1/4. Therefore, in the symbol combination according to any of the winnings 26 to 27 and 66, the winning rate of the left reel M51 is 1/4, the winning rate of the middle reel M52 is 1/1, and the winning rate of the right reel M53 is 1/2. Therefore, the winning rate of the entire symbol combination related to any of the winnings 26 to 27 and 66 is 1/8 (“1/4” × “1/1” × “1/2” = “1/8”). It becomes.

Here, the "replay / bar alignment" of the number 2 of the "winning / replay" in FIG. 341 is the same as the "reverse push white 7 alignment replay" corresponding to the winning number 2 in FIG. In FIG. 10, it is "white 7", whereas in FIG. 341, it is "bar". That is, "Right 1st: Bar alignment" in the column of "Type 1 BB condition device not operating" in FIG. 341 means that the player hits the right 1st in the batting order, and the number 3 in FIG. By pressing "Bell A", the 9th "bar" in FIG. 329 in the middle of the middle reel 52, and the 7th "Bell A" in FIG. 329 in the upper part of the left reel M51, the player The "bars, bars, and bars" are aligned (displayed) in a straight line in the middle row when viewed from the viewpoint (actually, the number 52 of FIG. 332, which is a combination of symbols related to the replay 03, is on the effective line. "Bell A, Bar, Bell A" is displayed). In addition, "left 1st: replay" and "middle 1st: replay" in the same column mean that "replay, replay, and replay" are aligned on the effective line when the batting order of the left 1st or middle 1st is performed. is doing. Furthermore, regarding the "right 1st: bar fake" of the "replay / bar matching fake" of the number 2 of the "winning / replay" in FIG. 341, the "bar" symbol is tempted when the batting order of the right 1st is performed. It means that they are not aligned. That is, when the batting order of the right 1st is performed, any one of the symbol combinations related to the replay 01 (the symbol combination of Nos. 2 to 5 in FIG. 330) is stopped, and the above-mentioned player The 3rd "bell A" in FIG. 329 and the 9th "bar" in FIG. 329 in the middle of the middle reel M52 can be stopped in the lower part of the right reel M53, but stopped in the upper part of the left reel M51. The design is "replay", and since there is no "bar" under each "replay" of the left reel M51, the bar comes off on the left reel M51.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery mode regarding the AT may be different depending on the operation mode of the stop button (reel stop mode). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 342, in general, the slash combinations A to H (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pushing order and stop timing") in which the winning symbol combination is different depending on the pushing order and / or the stop timing (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pushing order and stop timing"). Hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "pressing slash combination 1"), but the pressing slash combination 1 (specific combination) and "1 type" in this pressing slash combination 1 are provided. The description of the columns of "when the BB condition device is not operating" and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating" will be described later. Since the other descriptions in the columns of FIGS. 341 and 342 are the same as those in FIG. 314 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the push-push slash combination 1 will be described as an example, but the push-push slash combinations 2, 3 and the push-push slash combination (weak check) of each modification described later will be summarized and simply. It may be called "pushing slash role", or it may be simply called "pushing slash role" by summarizing this "pushing slash role" and the "pushing order slash role" of the modified example described later. That is, the "slash combination" is a general term for a combination in which the lottery (privilege advantageous to the player) regarding AT differs depending on the operation mode of the stop button (reel stop mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 343, the type 1 BB of the present embodiment is only one type of the symbol combination of "bell B, watermelon A, cherry". This type 1 BB ends, for example, when more than 33 game medals are acquired. Further, this type 1 BB is a specification in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends, for example, with two games or two winnings, or the end of the operating type 1 BB. In addition, while these 1st class BBs are in operation (during the bonus), only 3 bets can be played.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition of RT controlled by the main control board M is as shown in FIG. 344. As shown in FIG. 344, during the normal time when the type 1 BB is not won (normal game state), the state inside the type 1 BB where the type 1 BB is won and carried over (the type 1 BB condition device is operating). In the state of), he is staying at non-RT. In other words, in non-RT, there are two types: non-RT (normal time), which is a normal gaming state in non-RT, and non-RT (type 1 BB condition device is operating), which is inside the type 1 BB in the non-RT. It can be said that it has a gaming state. Further, after the winning of the 1st class BB, when the above-mentioned symbol combination (1st class BB operating symbol) related to the 1st class BB is displayed and the 1st class BB is in operation, the process shifts to RT1. Then, when the operation of the first type BB is completed, the process shifts to non-RT. It should be noted that the type 1 BB of the present embodiment is not cleared when the setting is changed in the state inside the type 1 BB as in the case of the two-card betting BB of the above-mentioned 18th embodiment. While the inside of Type 1 BB is maintained, if the setting is changed while Type 1 BB is operating (during RT1), this state (state related to bonus, etc.) is cleared and non-RT. I am trying to be. Further, in the present embodiment, non-RT is set inside the type 1 BB, but instead, as an RT state different from the normal time in which the type 1 BB is not won, for example, in the inside of the type 1 BB, for example. It may be a specification to stay at RT2.

Regarding the number of each condition device (bonus condition device, winning / replay) in these non-RT (normal game state), non-RT (type 1 BB condition device is operating), RT1 (type 1 BB is operating), etc. , As shown in FIGS. 345 to 357, and the entire number (random number denominator) thereof is 65536. Since each of these items of FIGS. 345 to 347 is the same as those of FIGS. 317 and 318 described in the above-described 18th embodiment, these explanations will be omitted.

<Pushing slash role 1>
Next, the above-mentioned push slash combination 1 will be described. Regarding the slash combinations A to H, the components that can win a prize according to a predetermined push order and a predetermined stop timing (each winning that constitutes the condition device). Since the same is true except that the combination) is different, only the slash combination A will be described, and the description of the other slash combinations B to H will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 342, in the slash combination A, the stop control by the reel stop control means is different between "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating". In the slash combination A, in "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating", as described in this column, in the batting order of the left 1st, the above-mentioned number priority control is applied to all reels, and the prize 10 is won. A combination of symbols according to any of 1 to 11 wins a prize at a winning rate of 1/8, and receives one payout less than the specified number. This is the same in the batting order of the middle 1st and the batting order of the right 1st, as shown in FIG. 342.

Specifically, the symbol combination related to the winning 10 is "Replay Seven Blank" as shown by No. 105 in FIG. 334, and the symbol combination related to the winning 11 is "Replay Seven Blank" as shown by No. 105 in FIG. 334. "Replay Seven Seven". Of the symbol combinations of the winning 10 and the winning 11, the symbols corresponding to the left reel M51 are all "replays", and as shown in FIG. 329, the "replays" are evenly spaced every 5 frames. The winning rate (the probability that when the all stop button is pressed randomly (the above-mentioned "appropriate pressing"), the symbol combinations related to the winning combination will be aligned) is 100% (1/1). ). Of the respective symbol combinations of the winning 10 and the winning 11, the symbol corresponding to the left reel M51 is "Seven", and this "Seven" is arranged in only one of the 14th in the middle reel M51. , 1/4 is the winning rate, as in the case of White Seven of the 18th embodiment described above. Of the respective symbol combinations of the winning 10 and the winning 11, the symbol corresponding to the left reel M51 has the winning 10 being "seven" and the winning 11 being "blank".

Here, when "Replay" and "Seven" constituting the symbol combination related to the winning 10 or the winning 11 are stopped on the effective line on the left reel M51 and the middle reel M52, respectively, the right reel M53 can be stopped by "Seven". Or "blank". As shown in FIG. 329, "Seven" is arranged at No. 14, and "Blank" is arranged at No. 19 which is 5 frames above "Seven". Therefore, considering the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, No. 10 Since "Seven" or "Blank" can be drawn in a total of 10 frames from No. 19 to No. 19, the winning rate of "Seven" and "Blank" in this state is halved. That is, for the winning 10 and the winning 11, the winning rate of the left reel M51 is 1/1, the winning rate of the middle reel M52 is 1/4, and the winning rate of the right reel is 1/2. Is 1/8 (1/1 × 1/4 × 1/2). Therefore, in the batting order of the left 1st, winning 10 or 11 will be won at a winning rate of 1/8. In the same way, the batting order of the middle 1st is the same, and the winning 26 or 27 with one payout is won at the 1/8 winning rate, and the right 1st batting order is also the same, and one is paid out at the 1/8 winning rate. A prize 46 or 47 accompanied by a prize is won.

In this embodiment, if the timing at which the stop button D40 is pressed is the first "blank" shown in FIG. 329, the reference for the four frames of the maximum pull-in is the center of the effective line (specifically, the center of the effective line). With the position (center of one frame) as the reference position, after the timing of pressing, if the symbol that first passes through the reference position is the center of the first "blank"), the next blank is used as the reference. The maximum pull-in range is the range from No. 2 to No. 5 "Cherry" (No. 1 to No. 5), which is equivalent to 4 frames. , Instead of this, the following may be done. That is, when the timing at which the stop button D40 is pressed is the first "blank", the next frame is the second "bell A" reference (based on the frame actually pressed plus +1). The range from No. 3 to No. 6 "bar", which is equivalent to 4 frames, may be set as the maximum pull-in range. This also applies to the other embodiments described above.

In the slash combination A, in "when the type 1 BB condition device is activated", as shown in this column, the winnings 10, 11, 26, and 27 (respectively, one-card combination with one payout less than the specified number). (See Nos. 105 and 106 in Fig. 334, Nos. 121 and 122 in Fig. 335) Any of 09 (see No. 104 in FIG. 334) can win a prize by the number priority control or the number priority control depending on the push order and the stop timing. After that, the above-mentioned winning of the 1-card role and the omission of the 1-card role (the payout will be 0) will be "cheap prize (may be called a low prize)", and the prize of the 15-card role will be "higher prize". The symbol combination related to this low-priced prize (the combination of the one-card role and the missed symbol combination that is the missing one-card role) is the "cheap symbol combination", and the symbol combination related to the high-priced prize is "high". It is also called "design combination". In the present embodiment, the low prize is a 1-card role and the high prize is a 15-card role, but a low prize of 2 cards, a high prize of 7 cards, a 10-card role, etc. may be applied. It is sufficient that the number of game medals paid out for higher prizes is larger than the number of game medals paid out for lower prizes. In addition, it is preferable to set a small winning combination that involves paying out less than the specified number of game medals as a low prize, and a small winning combination that pays out more than the specified number of game medals as a high winning prize.

First, in the batting order of the 1st right, the number of sheets priority control is applied, the symbol combination is "Bell A, Bell A, Bell A" with PB = 1 (see No. 104 in Fig. 334), and the number of sheets to be paid out at the time of winning. However, the winning 09 (which is the role of 15), which is more than one of the other winnings 10, 11, 26, and 27, is won.

In the batting order of the left 1st, in FIG. 329, when the stop timing of the left reel M51 is in the range of 5 frames from the 13th to the 17th, the above-mentioned number priority control is applied and the above-mentioned 15 Winning 09, which is a reel, wins. On the other hand, in the batting order of the left 1st, when the stop timing of the left reel M51 is in the range of 15 frames from 0 to 12 and 18 to 19 other than the above 13 to 17, the slash combination In A, as in the case of the left 1st batting order of "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating", the above-mentioned number priority control is applied, and the symbol combination related to any of the winning points 10 to 11 is 1/8. Win a prize at the winning rate and receive one payout (in other words, drop out on 7/8 and get 0). Also, in the case of the batting order of the middle 1st, as with the batting order of the left 1st, if the stop timing of the middle reel M52 is in the range of 5 frames from 13th to 17th, the number of winnings is increased by priority control, and the other 15 If it is in the range of frames, the number priority control will give a low prize at 1/8, and at 7/8, the number of missed sheets will be 0.

Summarizing the stop control of the slash combination A, as shown in FIG. 348, in the batting order of the left 1st, if the stop timing of the left reel M51 is 15 frames other than the 13th to the 17th, all the low base frames. The number priority control is applied to the reels, and one piece wins at 1/8, 0 pieces are missed at 7/8 (cheap prize), and the stop timing of the left reel M51 is 5 from 13th to 17th. If it is a high base frame for a frame, the number priority control is applied to all reels and a 15-card combination wins (high prize). In the batting order of the middle 1st, if it is the above-mentioned low base piece, a low prize is given by the number priority control, and if it is the above-mentioned high base piece, it is a high prize. That is, the low base frame, which is the above-mentioned 15 frames, means that when the target is aimed at the 15 frames (the stop operation is accepted within the range where the 15 frames are located on the effective line), the number of payouts is smaller than that of the high base frame. Compared to the case where the winning combination wins and continues to aim for the high base frame, the above-mentioned base is lower (hence the name "low base frame"), and the above-mentioned 5 frames of high base frame are these 5 If you aim for the frame (accept the stop operation within the range where 5 frames are on the effective line), the 15-card combination with a large number of payouts will win against the low base frame, compared to the case where you continue to aim for the low base frame. Therefore, the above-mentioned base becomes higher (for this reason, it is referred to as "high base coma"). In addition, in the batting order of the 1st right, regardless of the stop timing, the winning combination is a high prize (this is indicated as "○" in FIG. 348). Further, the other slash combinations B to H are the same as those of the slash combination A as described above.

That is, in the present embodiment, the push-button slash combination 1 has a symbol corresponding to a cheap prize according to an operation mode such as a push order and a stop timing for the stop button D40 (press timing of the stop button D40 (reel stop position)). A combination (a symbol combination related to winning 10, 11, 26, 27 and a symbol combination (not shown) displayed when these are missed) and a symbol combination corresponding to a higher prize (a symbol combination related to winning 09) are awarded. It is possible. Specifically, when the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52 is first stopped at (at any of the positions 13 to 17 in FIG. 329 on the left reel M51 and the middle reel M52, respectively), a low prize is won (1). It is possible to play a reel or 0 of this missed reel).

In the present embodiment, the AT lottery is performed in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won in the advantageous section and in the non-AT situation (this will be described later), but the push slash role 1 is higher. The lottery table referred to in the AT lottery differs depending on whether the prize is won or not, and a low probability table with a relatively low AT winning probability is used when a high prize is won, and a low probability table is used when a low prize is won. A high-probability table having a higher AT winning probability than the probability table is used (see FIG. 348). That is, in the push slash role 1, if a high prize is won, many game medals are paid out, but the probability of winning the AT is low. Although the number is small, the probability of winning an AT is high. As a result, for the player, the payout of the game medal is more advantageous than the cheap prize (there are many payouts of the game medal), but the AT lottery is more disadvantageous than the cheap prize (AT lottery is not given preferential treatment). The AT lottery is more advantageous than the prize (AT lottery is given preferential treatment), instead of aiming for a higher prize (it is difficult for AT to win) or the payout of game medals is higher and more disadvantageous than the prize (less payout of game medals). (It is easy for AT to win) You will be able to choose whether to aim for a cheaper prize. For example, if a player has few game medals and wants a game medal first rather than preferential treatment of AT lottery, he / she chooses a higher prize, has enough game medals, and has more than many game medals. If you are a player who wants to receive preferential treatment in the AT lottery, you may choose a cheaper prize.

In other words, in the push slash combination 1, from the viewpoint of the number of payouts, the right 1st is the correct push order (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "correct push order regarding the number of payouts"), and the other than the right 1st is the wrong push order (the correct answer in the push order). Hereafter, it may be referred to as "correct answer in push order regarding the number of payouts"), and from the viewpoint of the degree of advantage of the AT lottery, the 1st left and 1st middle are the correct push order answers (hereinafter, "correct push order regarding AT lottery"). It can be said that the 1st right is the incorrect answer in the push order (hereinafter, it may be referred to as the "correct answer in the push order regarding the AT lottery"). That is, in any of the operation modes, there is an advantage that it is advantageous from the viewpoint of the number of payouts or the AT lottery. ) Can be selected.

Therefore, in a game in which the push slash combination 1 is won in an advantageous section and in a non-AT situation, the push order display device (instruction monitor) shown in FIG. 37 is operated with a stop button D40 capable of winning a higher prize. Both the mode and the operation mode of the stop button D40 capable of winning a prize are instructed (notified). Various display examples of the instruction mode by this push order display device will be described with reference to FIG. 349.

<Instruction mode of push slash combination 1 during non-AT: push order display device>
As shown in FIG. 349, in the push order display device which is a 2-digit 7-segment display method, when instructing the operation mode of the high prize (high navigation is performed), the upper digit (the two digits in FIG. 37) is used. Two lines indicating high prizes are displayed in the 7 segments on the left side of the 7 segments), and the number "3" indicating the 1st right in the lower digit (the right segment of the 7 segments of 2 digits in FIG. 37). (In this embodiment, the left 1st is "1" and the middle 1st is "2") is displayed (instruction mode 1). In this instruction mode 1, as shown by the * mark in FIG. 349, the two lines mean the slash role. For example, as a high navigation, 1 is left middle right, 2 is left and right middle, and 3 is middle left and right. 4 is set so that 6 push orders can be specified, 5 is middle right left, 5 is right middle left, and 6 is right middle left. As a cheap navigation, for example, 7 is left 1st, 8 is middle 1st, and 9 is right 1st. As such, the numbers after 7 may be set as a cheap navigation, and can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the push order bell and the like.

In addition, when instructing the operation mode of the cheap prize (performing the cheap navigation), the three lines indicating the cheap prize are displayed in the upper digit, and the number "1" indicating the left 1st is displayed in the lower digit (). Instruction mode 2). Here, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 348, in the instruction mode 2, the result is the same regardless of whether the left 1st or the middle 1st is used. "2" indicating the 1st may be displayed).

In the present embodiment, the push order display device has a specification in which only two-digit seven segments are provided, and the above-mentioned instruction modes 1 and 2 cannot be displayed at the same time. Therefore, the push order display device first displays the instruction mode 1, switches to the instruction mode 2 after 1 second, and then returns to the instruction mode 1 after 1 second, and so on. By alternately switching the modes 1 and 2, the instruction modes 1 and 2 can be displayed to the player at the same time. Instead of this, as a push order display device, two pairs of two-digit seven segments are provided so as to be arranged side by side, instruction mode 1 is provided for the left two-digit seven segment, and instruction mode 1 is provided for the left two-digit seven segment, and the right two-digit seven segment is provided. The instruction mode 2 may be performed (the display of the pressing order is displayed in 4 digits).

In addition, the upper digit is set to correspond to the higher prize, and the lower digit is set to correspond to the lower prize, and the lower digit is subjected to the higher navigation to display "3" indicating the right 1st that can be higher prize to the upper digit. It is also possible to perform a cheap navigation (instruction mode 3) by displaying "3" indicating the left 1st, which allows a cheap prize, and displaying "2" indicating the middle 1st (as described above, the "2" indicating the middle 1st may be displayed). In addition to this, by turning on the DP (decimal point) lamps located at the lower right of each of the 7 segments (instruction mode 4), it is easy to understand that the navigation of the low prize and the high prize is being performed. You may do so. Furthermore, by lighting only the DP lamp with the higher ball output rate (instruction mode 5), such as a cheap prize with a high ball output rate (this will be described later), the ball output rate is higher depending on which one is followed. It may be possible to grasp whether (whether it is advantageous for the player). In the example shown in FIG. 37, since the DP of the push order display device also serves as the advantageous section display YH, when the instruction modes 4 and 5 are applied, for example, a credit configured by a 7-segment display. The DP of the display device D200, the special game state display device D250, or the like may be used as the advantageous section display device YH, or the dedicated advantageous section display YH as shown in FIGS. 1 and 293 may be provided. In addition, two lines indicating that the upper digit is the slash combination 1 are displayed, and the type of the slash combination 1 is displayed in the lower digit (in FIG. 349, "A" indicating that the slash combination A is used). (Display mode 6).

In addition to the instructions given by the push order display device that indicate only the push order as in the above-mentioned instruction modes 1 to 6, the push order and the stop timing (the display mode is not particularly limited, but for example, the upper digit). Needless to say, a numerical value indicating the pressing order and a stop timing to be pressed (displaying a numerical value, a symbol, etc. corresponding to the stop position, etc.) may be instructed in the lower digit.

<Display mode of the push slash combination 1: effect display device S40>
Further, in the present embodiment, in a game in which the push slash combination 1 is won in an advantageous section and in a non-AT situation, in addition to the push order display device described above, the effect control device S40 also provides a higher prize and a lower prize. The operation mode may be notified, and the instruction mode by the effect display device S40 will be described below.

First, in the present embodiment, for the entire push slash combination 1, in other words, for the slash combinations A to H (numbers 31 to 38 of "winning / replay" in FIG. 342), one of the above effects As a group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination), for example, in a game in which the above-mentioned mask processing for assigning the effect group A is performed and the push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device (a game in which the instruction is not executed). , The effect group A is transmitted to the sub-control board S. In the sub-control board S that received the transmission of the production group A, although it is not known which of the slash combinations A to H was won, it can be grasped that the slash combination 1 was won, so that the slash combination 1 is selected. It is possible to perform a suggestion effect based on the winning. Specifically, for example, a display such as "slash !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 to indicate that the push slash role 1 has been won (in other words, a high prize and a low prize). The operation mode of the above is not notified, but simply an effect of notifying that the push slash combination 1 has been won) is performed. On the other hand, in the game (game in which the instruction is executed) in which the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device in the advantageous section, which of the slash roles A to H such as the number of "winning / replay" is won is secondary. Information that can be discriminated on the control board S side (for example, information indicating which slash combination A to H is won) is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

When one effect group A is assigned to the push slash combination 1 and the push order bell (general term for the prize-A1 condition device to the prize-A24 condition device shown in FIGS. 341 and 342), this effect group A In the sub-control board S that has received the transmission of, since it is unknown whether it is the push slash combination 1 or the push order bell, the above suggestion effect is not performed. In this case, as a feasible effect, an effect to the effect that some small combination including the slash combination has been established can be considered.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the slash roles A to H are both low prizes in the left 1st and middle 1st and high prizes in the right 1st, the above-mentioned production group A is transmitted. In the sub-control board S, it is possible to notify that the left 1st or the right 1st is a low prize and the right 1st is a high prize. In this case, specifically, as shown in FIG. 350, in the effect display device S40 that is performing an effect such as displaying an image in which characters are fighting each other, a display area that does not interfere with this effect. At the end (in FIG. 350, in the display area of the effect display device S40, the lower left display area), a notification (display) indicating that the AT lottery preferential treatment is given for the left 1st and many game medals can be obtained for the right 1st. By doing so, the player is urged to select which push order (whether to aim for a higher prize or a lower prize) together with the push order display device.

In this way, by providing the push slash role 1 having a high prize and a low prize, it is possible to create an option of aiming for a high prize or a low prize, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to. Further, since the effect display device S40, whose display area is relatively larger than that of the push order display device, also performs high navigation and low navigation, it is compared with high navigation and low navigation using only the push order display device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking, and the player can surely grasp the operation mode of the stop button D40. As a result, it is possible to surely select between the high prize aim and the low prize aim according to the player's intention, and even though the player is aiming for the low prize, there is an unintended disadvantage due to oversight such as performing the operation mode of the high prize. Can be prevented.

Here, when the above-mentioned suggestion effect is performed in the effect display device S40, the instruction according to the instruction modes 1 to 6 in the push order display device is not performed, and in this situation, even if it is an advantageous section. The specifications are such that the advantageous section display device YH is not turned on (the advantageous section display device YH remains off even if the user stays in the advantageous section). In this case, the advantageous section display device YH may be turned on at the timing of transition to AT or the timing of the first instruction execution. As a result, even when the push slash combination 1 is won and the suggestion effect is performed by the effect display device S40, the player can be notified of the content of the suggestion level instead of the instruction.

On the other hand, when the effect display device S40 is performing the effect of instructing the low prize and the high prize shown in FIG. 350, the instruction modes 1 to 6 in the push order display device are executed. Below, if the user is staying in the advantageous section, the advantageous section display device YH is turned on. In the present embodiment, the non-AT means that when the push order bell is won, the push order display device does not navigate the correct hitting order of the push order bell, but when the slash role is won, the effect display device S40 is used. In addition to notifying the operation mode of the high prize and the low prize, the operation mode related to the high prize and the low prize on the push order display device is instructed (both the effect display device S40 and the push order display device are used for the low prize). It means a state in which the operation mode is notified. This also applies to each modification described later. Further, AT means that when the push order bell is won, the push order display device navigates the correct batting order of the push order bell, and when the slash role is won, the effect display device S40 is used to perform a high prize operation mode. This is a state in which the operation mode related to the high prize in the batting order display device is instructed while performing the effect of notifying.

In the present embodiment, when the replay-C condition device (commonly known as a strong cherry and a higher probability of winning the AT than the weak cherry) in FIG. 341 is won among the rare roles, the start lever D50 When is pressed, the effect display device S40 may perform an effect of cutting in a character or the like indicating that the strong cherry has been won. In addition, when the push slash role 1 is won, the effect of cutting in the character or the like to the effect that the push slash role 1 is won is made in the effect display device S40 in the same manner as the above-mentioned strong cherry. If the same character as when winning is cut in (the same production mode may be used)), and then the combination of symbols related to the cheap prize, which is given preferential treatment in the AT lottery, is won. When the effect display device S40 is produced to indicate that the AT lottery is given preferential treatment, and the speaker D20 is produced to output a voice indicating that the AT lottery is given preferential treatment, while the symbol combination related to the higher prize is won. In the production display device S40, an effect indicating that 15 sheets have been obtained is performed (in other words, an effect indicating that the AT lottery has been given preferential treatment is not performed. In particular, the effect may not be performed. ), And there may be no audio output from the speaker D20.

If a rare role in which the AT is determined (for example, a middle cherry with PB ≠ 1 at which the cherry stops in the middle of the left reel M51) is provided, when the cherry stops in the middle of the left reel M51, an effect display is displayed. For example, the device S40 may produce an effect to the effect that the AT has been confirmed, and may output a voice to the effect that the AT has been confirmed (for example, a voice that is more luxurious than the above-mentioned cheap prize). In this case, since the AT is confirmed when the middle-stage cherry is won, even if the cherry does not stop in the middle stage of the left reel M51, the effect of the effect display device S40 and the output from the speaker D20 are output. The sound may be the same as when the cherry stops in the middle of the left reel M51. In addition, in the game in which the middle-tier cherry is won, an effect 1 such as outputting the above-mentioned sound is performed, and when the middle-stage cherry is stopped, an effect 2 such as a back lamp effect is performed (in addition to the effect 1). 2 is also performed), or when the middle-stage cherry is not stopped, the above-mentioned effect 1 is performed but the above-mentioned effect 2 is not performed (only effect 1 is performed), or the case is different from the case where the middle-stage cherry is stopped. A part of the effect may be different depending on whether or not the middle cherry is stopped, such as performing the effect 3 such as the back lamp effect (the effect 3 is performed in addition to the effect 1).

Further, in the normal section, when a rare role such as a strong cherry is won, the effect display device S40 or the speaker D20 simply gives a suggestion effect that the rare role has been won ( For example, "!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40), and if the push slash combination 1 is won in the normal section, it does not shift to AT and the operation mode cannot be instructed. The suggestion effect is the same as when the role is won.

Further, in the present embodiment, the privilege related to AT at the time of the cheap prize in the push slash role 1 is that the AT lottery is given preferential treatment, and in the case of the cheap prize during AT, the privilege related to AT is not particularly given. It is a specification. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the push slash combination 1 is won in the advantageous section and during the AT, the effect display device S40 specifically notifies the operation mode of the higher prize (this implementation). In the form, ** 1 is displayed to notify that the batting order is on the right 1st, etc.), and the push order display device also performs the above-mentioned higher navigation. By doing so, during AT, the push slash combination 1 can be handled in the same manner as the winning A1 to 24 conditional devices, which are push order bells in which push order navigation is performed during AT. The combination 1 can be used as a push order bell. Further, since the push slash combination 1 functions as a push order bell, the probability that the 15-card combination is stopped and displayed can be substantially improved as compared with the case of non-AT.

In this embodiment, since the player is allowed to select the low prize and the high prize, the player performs the operation mode related to the low prize in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won during non-AT. Even in this case, since it does not correspond to a so-called pressing error, it goes without saying that the effect display device S40, the speaker S20, the decorative lamp unit D150, or the like does not display an image such as a pressing error. On the other hand, in a game in which the push slash role 1 is won during AT, if the player performs an operation mode related to a cheap prize, he / she is already in AT and cannot benefit from the AT lottery, and simply a game medal. Since the payout is reduced and only a loss is made, an image indicating that the push is mistaken is displayed, and for example, the display of the effect display device S40 is dimmed, or the push slash role 1 is increased during AT. In the case of a specification that navigates the prize, the image that navigated this high prize is deleted, or the indication that the game medal such as "GET !!" has been paid out is not displayed. You can do it. Further, even in the case of the specification in which the game is played with a 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB as in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment (the above-mentioned game mode 6), the push slash combination 1 is cheaper in the winning game. While the above-mentioned image display is not performed even if the operation mode related to the winning is performed, when a two-card bet is placed, an image display indicating that the game is a two-card bet and a sound notification are performed. Is also good. In this way, by displaying an image indicating that the game is a two-card bet and notifying by sound, particularly when the game in the game mode 5 of the above-mentioned 18th embodiment is selected and performed. Even if you accidentally play a game with two bets (even if you accidentally play a game with game mode 6 while trying to play in game mode 5), you tell the player that you accidentally bet two cards. It can be noticed.

<AT lottery at the time of winning the push slash role 1>
Next, the details of the AT lottery in the low prize and the high prize at the time of winning the push slash role 1 will be described. As described above, the push slash combination 1 has a different symbol combination that can stop at the effective line depending on the push order and the stop timing. Therefore, when the push slash combination 1 is won by pressing the start lever D50, which one It is unclear whether the symbol combination will win, and it will be known which symbol combination has won only after all reels M50 have stopped. For this reason, the AT lottery at the time of winning the push slash combination 1 is performed at any timing from the winning determination after all reels M50 are stopped to before the payout process. That is, in the present embodiment, the AT lottery is performed by looking at the stopped symbol combination (the AT lottery may or may not be executed depending on the stopped symbol combination, or the winning probability of the AT lottery may be different (in any case). (You may adopt only one configuration)), and as mentioned above, the 1-card combination in the low-priced prize or the symbol combination related to 0-card is the 15-card combination in the high prize (high base frame). The AT lottery is given preferential treatment over the symbol combination related to (including the 15-card role of the time). In this embodiment, the AT lottery is given preferential treatment even for the symbol combination related to 0 cards in the cheap prize, but in the case of the symbol combination related to this 0 card, the AT lottery is performed rather than the symbol combination related to the 1-card combination. May be given preferential treatment, or the AT lottery may not be held.

For example, if FIG. 18 is taken as an example, the control flow is as follows. If the slash 1 flag described later is not set after Yes in the winning determination in step S1269 of FIG. 18 (if the slash 1 flag is OFF), the process proceeds to step S274 as it is, and if the slash 1 flag is set (if the slash 1 flag is set). (If the slash 1 flag is ON), it is determined whether it is a symbol combination related to a low prize or a symbol combination related to a high prize (execute the symbol judgment process), and a high prize is awarded. If it is such a symbol combination, the AT lottery is performed based on the low probability table at the timing before the execution of the payout process, and if the AT lottery is not won, the AT transition in the next game or later is not set. , If you have won the AT lottery, after setting the transition of AT in the next game or later, the production command corresponding to the AT lottery result (specifically, if you win the AT, you have won the AT Proceed to step S1274 by generating an effect command for notifying that the game will shift to AT, and a production command for notifying that the AT lottery has been lost or that the game will not be transferred to AT if the AT has not been won. .. As for the transmission timing of the effect command to the subcontrol control board S, an appropriate timing such as any timing before step S1293 can be applied. On the other hand, in the case of a combination of symbols related to a low prize, in the control flow in the case of the high prize described above, the step is changed after the same as the control flow in which the "low accuracy table" is read as the "high accuracy table". Proceed to S1274 (hereinafter, the control of this flow is referred to as "press slash 1 control").

In this embodiment, the AT lottery is performed according to the actually stopped symbol combination, but in the case of 0 (missing), it is not a symbol combination and the number of payouts is 0, which is a cheap prize. It may be handled in the same manner as when it is determined that the symbol combination is related to. In this case, as compared with the case where there are a plurality of types of symbol combinations related to 0 sheets (loss), only the information that the number of sheets to be paid out is 0 can be reduced, so that the capacity can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the push-push slash combinations 1, in the slash combination A, as described above, the symbol combination related to the winning 10 which is a single combination can be won, and in FIGS. 341 and 342, the winning-A1 to Of the push order combinations (push order bells) that collectively refer to the A24 condition device, for example, as shown in FIG. 341, even in the left middle bell A1 (winning-A1 condition device), 132 push orders (left and right middle). Since the symbol combination related to the winning 10 can be won, the same symbol combination can be won when the slash role A is won and when the left middle bell A1 is won (the same result is displayed). Can be). In this case, as described above, it is unclear whether the slash role A was won or the left middle bell A1 was won if only the winning judgment was made. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the push slash combination 1 is present before the winning determination, and if it is the push slash combination 1, in the above example of FIG. 18, the winning determination in step S1269 is performed. After Yes, the above-mentioned push slash 1 control is performed as it is, and if it is not the push slash combination 1, control is performed to proceed to step S1274 as it is after Yes in step S1269 of FIG. 18 described above (winning combination). Control is performed based on the combination of the stopped symbol and the symbol combination). For example, if FIG. 19 is taken as an example, it is determined in step S3614 in FIG. 19 whether or not the winning combination is the pressing slash combination 1 after Yes, and if it is the pressing slash combination 1, the pressing slash is determined. Set a slash 1 flag to the effect that it is a combination 1 (turn on the slash 1 flag), and if it is not a push slash combination 1, keep the state where the slash 1 flag is not set (maintain the state where the slash 1 flag is OFF). (Hereinafter, the control of this flow is referred to as "control 2").

By providing such a control 2, it is possible to reduce the types of symbol combinations by the amount that any of the push order slash combination 1 rolls and any of the push order combination rolls can be the same. It is possible to reduce the trouble of creating reel arrangements and symbol combinations. As a result, the amount of data for the combination of symbols can be reduced, which leads to a reduction in capacity.

In the present embodiment, since the same symbol combination occurs in the push slash combination 1 and the push order bell as described above, the slash 1 flag is set before the winning determination. Needless to say, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned control 2 in the case of a symbol combination that is displayed only by the cheap winning of the slash combination 1. In this case, the capacity can be reduced by the amount that the control 2 is eliminated.

In this embodiment, when the push slash combination 1 is won when the start lever D50 is pressed, the AT lottery is not performed, all reels are stopped, and the payout process is performed from the winning determination in which the symbol combination in the game is confirmed. The AT lottery has been held until then, but instead of this, when the start lever D50 is pressed and the push slash combination 1 is won, all the symbol combinations that can be displayed by this push slash combination 1 are selected. On the other hand, an AT lottery is performed, the results of each of these lottery are stored in a RAM or the like, and when the final symbol combination is determined in the winning judgment after all reels are stopped, the results are stored in the RAM or the like. Of the lottery results, the lottery result corresponding to the symbol combination may be used as the final AT lottery result. In addition, when the start lever D50 is pressed, the AT lottery is performed when the push slash combination 1 is won, and if it is won, a flag to that effect is set, while if it is not won, a flag is set. If this flag is set after the above winning judgment, an AT lottery will be performed according to the symbol combination obtained in the winning judgment (in other words, the AT lottery before the winning judgment is the first stage lottery, and the prize will be won. The lottery after the judgment is the second stage lottery, and if you win in these two stage lottery such as the first and second lottery, it is called AT winning), if this flag is not set after the winning judgment May not hold the AT lottery. In addition, an AT lottery is performed with a predetermined probability when the push slash combination 1 is won when the start lever D50 is pressed, and then an AT lottery according to the stopped symbol combination (the AT lottery is won by the stopped symbol combination). The probabilities may be different, or it may be configured to execute a symbol combination that does not execute the AT lottery (if any AT lottery is won, the AT is then assigned to the AT). Will be migrated).

In the present embodiment, when a rare combination or the like is won, after pressing the start lever D50, if the rare combination is won, the AT lottery is performed as it is, whichever timing before the winning determination (for example, FIG. 18). While the AT lottery is performed at the timing shown in (such as), in the case of the push slash role 1, the AT lottery is performed between the winning judgment and the payout process, but instead of this, the push slash role For rare roles other than 1, an AT lottery may be performed between the winning judgment and the payout process in accordance with the push slash role 1. In this case, since the processing related to the AT lottery can be unified, the capacity can be reduced. In addition, even in a normal game such as in an advantageous section and during non-AT, the AT lottery is given preferential treatment (because a profit related to AT is given) by aiming for a cheap prize with the push slash role 1. A person can increase the expectation about AT by aiming for a cheap prize.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, if the player wins the push slash role 1 and wins a low prize, the AT lottery is performed at the high probability table, and if the prize is high, the AT lottery is performed at the low probability table. However, when a rare role or the like is won in the next game, an AT lottery is performed at a lottery table (predetermined probability) according to the winning rare role or the like. In other words, there are cases where the player wins the rare role in the next game where he wins the push slash role 1 and wins a cheap prize, and when he wins the rare role etc. in the next game where he wins the push slash role 1 and wins a higher prize. Then, in the game in which the rare role or the like is won, the AT lottery is performed at the same lottery table (predetermined probability). That is, the AT lottery based on winning the push slash role 1 and winning a low prize and a high prize is valid only in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won, and has no influence on the next game and thereafter. I try not to give it. By doing so, when the player stops the game in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won, the AT lottery based on the winning of the push slash role 1 is performed for the next player. It is possible to prevent the influence of. If the low-accuracy table used based on the high prize of the push slash role 1 is designed to be used after the next game of the game in which the push slash role 1 is won, the push slash role 1 is used. If the player who wins the game stops playing the game, the next player will play the game in a disadvantageous state from the beginning regarding the AT lottery, etc., which is unreasonable. As in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such irrationality by not affecting the next game or later.

In addition, since it is sufficient if the above-mentioned absurdity can be prevented, by winning the push slash role 1, for example, the probability of winning the AT when winning a rare role or the like is high in a predetermined game. When the specification such as "becomes" is adopted, this high probability state may be maintained after the next game of the game in which the push slash combination 1 is won. The point is that in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won, situations that are considered to be disadvantageous to the player, such as the low probability table used at the time of high winning, should be completed in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won. For situations that are considered to be advantageous to the player, such as the above-mentioned high-probability state, the game may be taken over even after the game in which the push slash combination 1 is won.

<The ball output rate of the push slash role 1>
Next, the ball output rate and the like in the push slash combination 1 will be described. As mentioned above, the push slash role 1 can obtain 0 or 1 game medals (in other words, it can be said that the privilege of obtaining 15 game medals is not given). Left 1st or middle 1st push. It has a low prize in order and a high prize in the right 1st push order that can surely obtain 15 game medals. In the present embodiment, in the setting 1, in the case of non-AT, in the game in which the push slash combination 1 is won, the operation mode of pushing the low base frame in the left 1st or middle 1st push order is performed, and other modes are performed. In the game, for example, a stop operation (stop operation at a pressing position where the omission of a small role can be minimized) is performed on the left reel M51 by pressing the 6th bar of each game, and in the case of AT, the pressing operation is performed. A predetermined number of games (for example, 17500) in the first game method (a game method that keeps executing the cheap prize aim), which is a game method that follows the navigation of the push order navigation of the forward bell and the navigation of the push slash role 1 at the time of winning. Even if the game) is played, the ball output rate is set to be less than 100%, and in the case of non-AT in setting 1, in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won, the right 1st In other games, for example, a stop operation is performed to press the 6th bar of each game on the left reel M51, and in the case of AT, the push order navigation of the push order bell and the push order are performed. Even if a predetermined number of games (for example, 17,500 games) are played in the second game method (a game method in which the high prize aim is continuously executed), which is a game method that follows the navigation of the high prize aim at the time of winning the slash role 1. , The ball output rate is set to be less than 100%.

In the present embodiment, even when the second game method (the game method in which the aim of winning a higher prize is continuously executed) is performed, the first game method is performed on the player by setting the value to less than 100%. Let's make it meaningful (a game method that keeps executing the aim of winning a cheap prize) (If the ball output rate exceeds 100% in the second game method, the second game method is used all the time. If this happens, the number of game medals will increase, so there is no need to perform the first game method in the first place). Here, in the above description, setting 1 has been taken as an example, but the same applies to other setting values. Further, in the case of a so-called high setting of setting 4 or more (particularly, setting 6 which is the highest setting), the ball output rate may be set to 100% or more in each of the above game methods, but the aim is higher. And, in order to achieve the effect of aiming cheaply, the ball output rate of each of the above game methods is the same (or is substantially the same, and no significant loss occurs regardless of which game method is used). It is desirable to do. In the calculation of the payout rate, for example, it is obtained by the formulas (1) and (2) described in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, but in the present embodiment, the calculation formula of the payout rate and the like are used. Is omitted. This also applies to the various ball output rates described below in this embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball output rate when a predetermined number of games (for example, 17,500 games) is played by the first game method at a specific set value (for example, any of settings 1 to 6) is set to A. Then, in the above-mentioned specific set value, when the ball-out rate when the predetermined number of games is played by the second game method is B, the ball-out rate A is larger than the ball-out rate B (ball-out rate). It is set so that A> ball output rate B).

That is, the first operation mode is more than the case where the operation mode aiming at the higher prize by the second game method is performed only for the above-mentioned predetermined number of games (for example, 17,500 games) and the profit is obtained by continuing to take 15 cards by the higher prize. For example, if the operation mode aiming at a cheap prize by the game method is performed only for the above-mentioned predetermined number of games (for example, 17,500 games) and the profit from AT or the like is obtained, the ball output rate when the above-mentioned predetermined number of games are played is higher. The specifications are such that there are many. Here, if you are staying in an advantageous section, with regard to the aim of winning a cheap prize, the rate of getting out of the ball is higher for the aim of winning a cheap prize because it is easier to win the AT than the aim of winning a higher prize. It is supposed to be. In addition, when staying in a non-advantageous section where AT cannot be performed, the ball output rate is higher for those aiming for a higher prize because there is no AT, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 345, Since the advantageous section is won in all the roles, the number of games staying in the non-advantageous section is about one game, and most of the above-mentioned predetermined number of games is occupied by the advantageous section. The ball rate is low and more people are aiming for a prize.

By doing so, it is possible to create a playability that is more advantageous than aiming for a high prize because the profit given by the AT or the like is finally increased when the aim is for a low prize. In addition, aiming for a cheap prize in an advantageous section and aiming for a high prize in a non-advantageous section, depending on whether you are staying in an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section, aiming for a cheap prize. It is also possible to create technical intervention by switching between high prize aim and high prize.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball output rate C of setting 1 when the predetermined number of games is played by the first game method (aiming at a cheap prize) and the predetermined number of games by the first game supplement method are performed. The difference α from the ball output rate D of the setting 6 in the case of performing is the ball output rate E of the setting 1 when the predetermined number of games are performed by the second game method (aiming at a higher prize) and the second game. It is set to be larger than the difference β with the ball output rate F of setting 6 which can be obtained when the game is played a predetermined number of times by the game supplement method. To give a specific example, the ball output rate C of setting 1 aiming for a low prize is 97%, the ball output rate D of setting 6 is 115%, and the ball output rate E of setting 1 aiming for a high prize is 96%. , The ball output rate F of setting 6 is 99%, and the difference α between the ball output rate of setting 1 and setting 6 aiming for a cheap prize is 18% (115% (ball output rate D) -99% (ball output rate D). Rate C) = 18%), and the difference β between the setting 1 and the setting 6 aiming for a higher prize is 3% (99% (ball ejection rate F) -96% (ball ejection rate E)). Therefore, the difference α in the ball output rate is larger than the difference β in the ball output rate (difference α in the ball output rate> difference β in the ball output rate). By doing so, it is possible to create a playability in which the ball output rate is more dispersed (the ball output rate becomes rougher) when the player aims for a cheaper prize. In the above, the ball ejection rate F (the ball ejection rate aiming at a higher prize) of setting 6 is 99%, but this may be set to 100% or more. For example, the ball ejection rate F may be set. When it is set to 101%, even if the low aim by the first game method is performed a predetermined number of games (for example, 17500 games), the high aim by the second game method is set as a predetermined number of games (for example, 17500 games). Even in the case of (game), it can be expected that the number of game medals is increasing (the payout rate is 100% or more).

In addition, as described above, the push slash combination 1 can be won by 15 cards depending on the push order and the stop timing, and the push order combination or PB = 1 in which the 15 cards are won only by the correct answer in the push order. Since the winning rate is lower than that of the 15-card combination, the above-mentioned base can be lowered accordingly. As a result, by lowering the base, it is possible to improve the probability of winning the AT and the probability of a lottery that is advantageous to the player, such as the net increase in the number of cards per game (sometimes referred to as inclination) during the AT, so-called low base. It is possible to provide a revolving gaming machine having a high TY (a low base and a relatively high expected number of game medals for one AT).

<Modification example 1>
Next, a modification 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In this modification 1, the reel arrangement is different from that of the present embodiment described above, and as the push slash combination, instead of the above-mentioned push slash combination 1, a symbol combination or the like is used with the push slash combination 1. It is different that different push slash roles 2 are applied. Here, FIG. 351 is a diagram for explaining a list of reel arrangements and a push slash combination 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the modification 1 of the 19th embodiment, and FIG. 352 is a modification of the 19th embodiment. It is an image diagram for demonstrating the effect mode of the effect display device S40 in the reeling type gaming machine which concerns on 1.

The reel symbol arrangement according to the present modification 1 is as shown in FIG. 351. In the left reel M51, the “blue lamp” symbol (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “blue lamp”) is No. 12 and here. There are two "red lamp" symbols (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "red lamps"), which are number 17 and 5 frames away from the number 2, and number 2 and number 7 which is 5 frames away from here. If the stop operation timing is in the range of 10 frames from No. 8 to No. 17 on the left reel M51, it can be pulled in, so that each becomes a symbol with a winning rate of 1/2. There is. Further, in the middle reel M51 and the right reel 53, both the "blue lamp" and the "red lamp" have four PB = 1 symbols provided at equal intervals of five frames each other. Further, the symbol combination related to the replay of the present modification 1 is a symbol of PB = 1 provided on each reel at equal intervals of 5 frames. Further, the effective line of the present modification 1 is a straight line in the middle stage.

The push-push slash combination 2 according to the first modification has a plurality of slash-A condition devices and a plurality of slash-B condition devices. Here, these slash-A condition devices and slash-B condition devices are included. The B condition device will be described, and other condition devices will be omitted. In the slash-A condition device, as a single role in the "low base frame" referred to in FIG. And 2 types of "blue lamp / blue lamp / blue lamp" symbol combination cheaper 2 (high accuracy table in AT lottery) are provided, and 15 cards in the "high base frame" mentioned in Fig. 348 above. As a high-ranking role of "red lamp, blue lamp, blue lamp" (low accuracy table in AT lottery) is provided, and as a 15-card role that wins in the "right 1st" referred to in Fig. 348 above, "replay, replay, There is an irregular heightening role (low accuracy table in the AT lottery) of the symbol combination of PB = 1 of "blue lamp". Further, the high base frames of the left reel M51 in the slash-A condition device are 5 frames from No. 3 to No. 7, and the other frames are considered to be low base frames. "Is stopped preferentially.

Therefore, in the slash-A condition device, in the order of hitting the left 1st, the "blue lamp" is pressed on the left reel M51 in the range of the low base frame, and the "blue lamp" is stopped on the effective line (middle stage of the left reel). Then, since the "red lamp" of the middle reel M52 and the "blue lamp" of the right reel M53 each have PB = 1, the cheaper role 1 wins, and in the order of hitting the left 1st, the left reel M51 has a high base frame. When the "red lamp" is pressed in the range and the "red lamp" is stopped on the effective line, the "blue lamp" of the middle reel M52 and the "blue lamp" of the right reel M53 are PB = 1, respectively. The higher role wins. Further, in the slash-A condition device, when the middle stage of the middle reel is pressed in the striking order of the middle 1st, the "blue lamp" is stopped as described above, and as a result, the displayable symbol combination is the cheaper role 2 "blue lamp". -Because it will be either "blue lamp / blue lamp" or "red lamp / blue lamp / blue lamp" of the higher role, if you press the "blue lamp" on the left reel M51 and stop it, the cheaper role 2 will win. , When the left reel M51 is stopped by pressing the "red lamp", the higher role wins. The slash-B condition device differs only in that the "red lamp" and the "blue lamp" in the slash-A condition device are reversed (in the above description of the slash-A condition device, the "blue lamp" is used. Is uniformly read as "red lamp" and "red lamp" as "blue lamp"), so the explanation will be omitted.

That is, in the present modification 1, in the case of the left 1st and the middle 1st, a cheaper role (1 card role) in which the AT lottery is given preferential treatment or a higher role (15 card role) in which the AT lottery is not given preferential treatment can be won. In the case of the right 1st, only the 15-card combination, which is not given preferential treatment in the AT lottery, will win the prize. Even if you do, you may not have this combination of symbols. In other words, as in the above-mentioned 1st left and 1st middle, even if the symbol combination related to the cheaper role (1 piece role) is pushed in a winning order, the symbol combination related to the higher role (15 pieces) is aligned. It can be said that there are times.

In this way, even if the symbol combinations related to the higher combination (15-card combination) are pushed in a winning order, the symbol combinations may not be aligned. Therefore, for example, the number of AT ceiling games is increased. In the set specifications, when the number of ceiling games is close and it is more advantageous to take the role of 15 cards than to receive the AT lottery, the player who originally chose to receive the AT lottery with the aim of winning a cheap prize It is possible to reduce the effectiveness of the aggressiveness of the game method, which is not originally executed (original unintended), such as switching to a higher prize aim.

In this modification 1, one of the push-push slash combinations 2 is one effect group for the slash-A condition device (the effect group may also be referred to as an "effect group number". For example, the effect group A). Is assigned, and another effect group (for example, effect group B) is assigned by the slash-B condition device. And slash-B condition device is established (winning) can be grasped. When the push slash combination 2 is won in the non-AT state in the advantageous section, the above-mentioned information such as the effect group A or B is transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S is this. By generating an effect command corresponding to the effect group A or B, the effect display device S40 or the like is made to execute the effect according to the effect group A or B.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 352, when the slash-A condition device is established, the effect display device S40 displays the line of the character "Stop the pattern there !!" in blue characters. By performing an effect corresponding to the effect group A such that the background is also blue, it is suggested to the player that the slash-A condition device is established. Therefore, a player aiming for a cheaper role (aiming for a cheaper prize) can stop the "blue lamp" by pressing the "blue lamp" on the left reel M51 in the order of pressing the left 1st (as described above). By pressing the left stop button D41 at any timing of the range of 10 frames from No. 8 to No. 17, you can receive preferential treatment of AT lottery, aiming for a higher role (aiming for a higher prize). The player will be able to receive 15 payouts by pressing the "red lamp" on the left reel M51 in the order of pressing the left 1st. In other words, the effect mode (displayed color in the case of this modification 1) by the effect display device S40 of this modification 1 is aimed at a cheap prize by pressing which pattern (“blue lamp”). It can be said that it suggests a stop timing corresponding to the aim of a cheap prize, as if it is possible, and the player can grasp the symbol of the aim of the cheap by this suggestion, and aim for a higher prize from the symbol of the aim of the cheap prize. It can be said that it is possible to grasp the design (“red lamp”) of the player, and based on this grasp, it is possible to select either a low-targeted prize or a high-targeted prize at the player's will.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 352, when the slash-B condition device is established, the effect display device S40 displays the character line "Stop the pattern there !!" in red characters, and the background is also red. By performing an effect corresponding to the effect group B, such as setting, it is suggested to the player that the slash-B condition device is established. Therefore, a player aiming for a cheaper role (aiming for a cheaper prize) can receive preferential treatment in the AT lottery by pressing the "red lamp" on the left reel M51 in the order of pushing the left 1st, aiming for a higher role. The player (aiming for a higher prize) will be able to receive 15 payouts by pressing the "blue lamp" on the left reel M51 in the order of pressing the left 1st. In this way, in the production corresponding to the production groups A and B, only the color of the dialogue and the background color are different, and the others are exactly the same production, and it is established depending on the color of the dialogue and the background color. It is designed to suggest a conditional device.

In the present modification 1, the effect groups A and B are assigned to the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device, respectively. Instead, the slash-A condition device and the push order bell group A (for example, the push order bell group A) are assigned. The prize-A1 to A8 in FIG. 314 are grouped together as a push order bell group, etc.) as the production group A, and the slash-B condition device and the push order bell group B (for example, the prize-B1 to B1 in FIG. 314) are designated. B8 may be grouped together as a group of push order bells) as the production group B. Even in this case, in the sub-control board S, in the case of the effect groups A and B, it is uniformly suggested that the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device are established. The production can be executed. In this case, even if the symbol combination of the single combination of the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device is the same as the symbol combination of the single combination when the push order bell, which is the 15-sheet combination, is missed. good.

In this modification 1, although not shown, when the effect display device S40 is performing a suggestion effect that the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device are satisfied, the push order display device is used. In this case, the advantageous section indicator YH is not turned on even if the user is staying in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on when AT is started. It has become. In addition, when the same suggestion as the above-described embodiment (see each aspect of FIG. 349) is given by the push order display device in the advantageous section and during non-AT, the same as in the above-described present embodiment. The specifications are such that the advantageous section display device YH is turned on.

Further, in the present modification 1, in principle, the above-mentioned effect suggesting that the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device are established in the non-AT state in the advantageous section (hereinafter, simply "" (It may be called "suggestion effect"), but under certain circumstances such as during the above-mentioned precursory or continuous effect, even if the push slash role 2 is won, the above-mentioned suggestion effect should not be performed. You can do it. Under this specific situation, in addition to the above-mentioned precursors and continuous production, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is less than the predetermined number of games (for example, less than 100 games), and for example, AT ends as described above. A predetermined game situation, a predetermined period, and the like, such as a reduction section in which a designated number of games (for example, 40 games) are played later, can be mentioned. By doing so, the player can concentrate on the precursory effect and the continuous effect because he / she is not forced to push the eyes due to the suggestive effect when performing the precursory effect or the continuous effect. In particular, in a situation where the transition to AT has been confirmed and the aim of a cheap prize in the push slash role 2 is meaningless, it is possible to prevent unnecessary suggestion production. As a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate suggestion effect according to the game situation, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. In addition, under the above-mentioned specific circumstances such as during the precursory or continuous production, even if the push slash role 2 is won, the suggestion effect is not performed. Therefore, the push slash role 2 is performed during the precursory or continuous production. By suggesting that he has won, it is possible to prevent the aggressiveness of intentionally aiming for a higher prize.

In addition, under the above-mentioned specific circumstances, especially in the situation where the transition to AT is confirmed and the aim of the cheap prize in the push slash role 2 becomes meaningless, the effect display device. In addition to notifying the operation mode of the high prize in S40, the push order display device may also instruct the operation mode of the high prize. In this case, the number of balls can be increased by winning the push slash role 2 before the transition to AT. In addition, the specification that the above notification by the effect display device S40 and the instruction by the push order display device are given only in the situation where the transition to AT is confirmed and the aim of the cheap prize in the push slash role 2 is no longer meaningful. In the case of, the notification or instruction of the higher prize can be the notification that the transition to AT has been confirmed during the precursory or continuous production. Further, in a situation where the aim of a cheap prize in the push slash role 2 is no longer meaningful, if the above notification by the effect display device S40 and the instruction by the push order display device are frequently given, it is a precursor. By notifying or instructing the operation mode of the high prize during the continuous production, the player can have a sense of expectation for the transition of AT.

Further, under the above-mentioned specific situations such as during the precursory or continuous production, if the push slash combination 2 is won, the suggestion production may be performed by the production display device S40. In this case, as an aspect of the suggestion effect, for example, a small suggestion is made at the end (see FIG. 350 for an image) that does not interfere with the effect already performed as in the present embodiment described above. In addition, an aspect different from the usual suggestion effect shown in FIG. 352 is given as an example. As another aspect of this suggestion effect, for example, during continuous production, the push slash role 2 is won by an abstract display such as "!" Or an output of a sound effect such as "bashun" from the speaker. You may suggest that you are.

As described above, also in the present modification 1, it is suggested that the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device are established in the effect display device S40 whose display area is relatively larger than that of the push order display device. (In other words, it suggests a symbol that can win a low aim and a symbol that can win a high aim), so that the player can prevent oversight, and the player can operate the stop button D40. Can be surely grasped. As a result, it is possible to surely select between the high prize aim and the low prize aim according to the player's intention, and even though the player is aiming for the low prize, there is an unintended disadvantage due to oversight such as performing the operation mode of the high prize. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present modification 1, when the middle reel M52 is stopped first in the pushing order of the middle 1st as described above, and when the "blue lamp" is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel M52, the slash-A condition device is used. Is operating, and if you press the "blue lamp" to the left, you can win the cheaper role 2, and if the "red lamp" stops in the middle of the middle reel M52, the slash-B condition device is activated. By pressing the "red lamp" on the left, it is possible to determine that the cheaper role 2 can win the prize (based on the stop symbol of the middle reel M52, the left to win the cheaper role). The design (stop position) of the reel M51 can be specified). For this reason, even if the effect of the effect display device S40 or the like makes it impossible to perform the effect of suggesting the above (or it becomes difficult to see) due to an error or the like, a cheap prize is won by performing the pressing order of the middle 1st. It is possible to aim and aim for a high prize without delay. Further, as described above, in the case of performing a suggestion effect suggesting that the eye-catching slash role 2 is won by an abstract display such as "!" During the continuous production, the player described above. Since the stop position of the left reel M51, which wins the low prize 2 by the result of the middle reel, can be grasped, the low prize 2 can be won depending on the skill of the player (technical intervention of the player). ..

<Modification 2>
Next, a modification 2 according to the present embodiment will be described. In this modification 2, as the push slash combination, the push slash combination 3 shown in FIG. 353 is applied instead of the push slash combination 1 according to the present embodiment and the push slash combination 2 according to the modification 1. The points that were made are different. FIG. 353 is a diagram for explaining the push slash combination 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification of the 19th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 353, the push slash combination 3 is generally a subdivision of the push slash combination 1 shown in FIG. 348. Regarding the left 1st low base frame in the slash combination A1 to A4 of the slash combination 3 of the slash combination 3, the symbol combination related to the 1 sheet A which is 1/8 of the slash combination 1 is similar to the slash combination 1 shown in FIG. 348. A prize will be won, and the combination of symbols related to the loss (0 sheets) will be won on 7/8. On the other hand, the high base frame will be described below, for example, by taking the 13th to 17th positions of the left reel M51 of FIG. 329, which is the high base frame of the push slash combination 1, as an example. In FIG. 329, when the stop button is pressed at the timing of replay at the 13th position of the left reel M51, the 14th position is 1 frame slide, the 15th position is 2 frame slides, the 16th position is 3 frames slide, and the 14th position is 4 frames slide. For example, when the stop button is pressed in any of the three frames from 14 to 16 of 1 to 3 frames (when any of the above 3 frames is the stop timing). By applying the above-mentioned number priority control to all reels, the symbol combination related to 1 piece B, which is a 1 piece combination, is won (1 piece combination in 3/4), and the number 17 bell A When it is the stop timing, the above-mentioned number-of-sheet priority control is applied to all reels so that the symbol combination winning the 15-card combination (higher) is awarded (1/4 15-card combination). .. That is, depending on which symbol of the high base frame corresponds to the stop timing, either the number priority control or the number priority control described above is applied to all reels, and one piece B or 15 pieces, which is a combination of one piece, is used. The role is supposed to win a prize.

Further, in the case of the slash combination A1, in the case of the slash combination A1, the symbol combination related to the same 15-card combination as the above-mentioned higher in the high base frame wins a prize if the pressing order is middle right and left (in FIG. 353). Is also indicated by "○" as in FIG. 348. The same applies to subsequent modifications). In the slash combination A1, in the other middle right left, right left middle, right middle left push order, the symbol combination related to 1 card C, which is the 1 card role of PB = 1 (the 1 card role of the push order bell spill), wins a prize. (This is referred to as "spill" in FIG. 353). Further, regarding the slash combinations A2 to A4, the push order of "〇" is different from that of the above-mentioned slash combination A1, and the other push orders are "spills".

In the slash combination A1, in the high base frame (high position) on the left 1st, as described above, the symbol combination related to the 15-card combination or the symbol combination related to the 1-card combination B can be won. As for the AT lottery in the advantageous section and during non-AT, as described above, a low probability table in which it is relatively difficult to win the AT (AT lottery is not given preferential treatment) is used (AT lottery is weak). Further, in the slash combination A1, in the low base frame (low position) on the left 1st, the symbol combination related to the 1 sheet A which is the 1 sheet combination or the symbol combination related to the 0 sheet which is out of the way, but it is an advantageous section and is not. As for the AT lottery during AT, as described above, a high-accuracy table that makes it relatively easy to win the AT (AT lottery is given preferential treatment) is used (AT lottery is strong). In addition, in the slash combination A1, in the middle right and left push order (the push order is irregular when viewed from the push order regarding the AT lottery, and the push order is correct regarding the number of payouts), the symbol combination related to the 15-card combination wins, but in the advantageous section. Therefore, for the AT lottery during non-AT, the low probability table is used as described above. Furthermore, in the push order of "spills" (the push order is irregular when viewed from the push order related to the AT lottery, and the push order is incorrect regarding the number of payouts), the symbol combination related to 1 card C, which is a 1-card combination, wins a prize, which is advantageous. A low probability table is used for AT lottery during non-AT in the section. Since this is the same for the slash combinations A2 to 4, the description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the present modification 2, in the AT lottery performed between the winning determination and the payout process as described above, each of the 15-card combination, 1-card A, 1-card B, 1-card C, and 0-card (loss) The AT lottery is performed at the lottery table according to the symbol combination, and as shown in FIG. 353, in the case of the combination of 1 A and 0 symbols in the left 1st low base frame, the high accuracy table is used. The AT lottery is performed by using the other 15 sheets, 1 sheet B, and 1 sheet C, and the AT lottery is performed at the low accuracy table. In the case of 1-card B, which is a 1-card combination in a high base frame, the AT lottery itself may not be performed, or in the case of 0 cards missed instead of a 1-card combination in a high base frame. However, as described above, the AT lottery may be performed at the low-accuracy table (the AT lottery is not given preferential treatment), or the AT lottery itself may not be performed.

Therefore, even with the same 1-card combination, the AT lottery will be performed with 1-sheet A, which is a 1-sheet combination corresponding to the low base frame, and 1-sheet B and 1-sheet C, which are 1-sheet combinations corresponding to the high base frame and "spill", respectively. The advantages are different. In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to each of the 1-sheet A, 1-sheet B, and 1-sheet C are different from each other, and the player can use the highly accurate table depending on the symbol combination (roll) when the 1-card combination wins. It is possible to grasp whether the AT lottery was received by the low-accuracy table or the AT lottery by the low-accuracy table.

In other words, in this modification 2, the combination of 1 B symbols (which can be said to be a lost symbol combination that missed 15 roles) and 1 A aiming for a cheaper prize. Alternatively, there is a combination of 0 symbols (it can be said that a combination of missed symbols in which 1 A is missed), but in the AT lottery during non-AT, which is an advantageous section, 1 A is more than 1 B symbol combination. It can be said that the combination of symbols and the combination of 0 symbols are given preferential treatment for the AT lottery. Further, it can be said that 1 piece A, which is a 1 piece role corresponding to a low base frame, is given preferential treatment for the AT lottery, rather than 1 piece C, which is a 1 piece role of the above-mentioned spill of the push order bell. In addition, the AT lottery is not given preferential treatment for 1 piece B, which is the 1 piece role in the high base frame, and 1 piece C, which is the spill of the 15 piece role, and in this modification 2, the winning probability of these ATs is It is the same. In the AT lottery, the symbol combination of 0 sheets is given preferential treatment over the symbol combination of 1 sheet A, or the symbol combination of 1 sheet A is given preferential treatment over the symbol combination of 0 sheets. It is possible to appropriately set how much preferential treatment is given to the AT lottery for which symbol combination for the purpose of winning a cheap prize. Further, in the present modification 2, the winning probability of the AT of 1 sheet B and 1 sheet C is the same, but the winning probability of AT of 1 sheet C is higher than that of 1 sheet B. The winning probabilities may be different from each other.

As described above, in the present modification 2, the AT lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table corresponding to each of the 15-card combination, 1-card A, 1-card B, 1-card C, and 0-card (loss). In particular, with regard to the 1-card role, multiple types of 1-card A, 1-card B, and 1-card C are given, 1-card A and 0-card are AT lottery preferential treatment, and 15-card role is payout preferential treatment. , Because the profit related to AT and the profit related to payout are clearly separated, aiming for 15 cards, aiming for 1 card A with AT preferential treatment, aiming for 1 card B or 1 card C for other intentions, etc. , The range of games that can be selected is expanded, and it is possible to select the game characteristics that better suit the player's taste.

As for the setting of the above-mentioned effect group in the present modification 2, for example, the slash combination A1 to A4 may be one effect group A, or the slash combination A1 to A4 and the above-mentioned push order bell group A may be combined. One production group A may be used, or the slash combination A1 and the push order bell group A may be the production group A, and the slash combination A2 and the push order bell group B may be the production group B, respectively. It can be set as appropriate, such as pairing different push order bell groups and making each one into one production group.

<Modification example 3>
Next, a third modification of the 19th embodiment will be described. In this modification 3, as the push slash role, instead of the above-mentioned push slash roles 1 to 3, the push slash role (weak che) that functions as a rare role is used, and the slash role that functions as a rare role is used. As a result, in addition to the slash role by pushing, the push order slash role (weak chance) by the push order is used. FIG. 354 is a diagram for explaining a push-push slash role as a rare role in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification of the 19th embodiment.

<Rare role as a push slash>
In this modification 3, as a rare role of a push slash, a weak cherry "a push slash role (weak che)", a strong cherry "a push slash role (strong che)", and a middle cherry. It has a "meshing slash role (middle tier)", and each of these squeezing slashing roles at the time of a low prize is a weak cherry roll (for example, on the upper or lower row of the left reel M51). "Cherry" stops, middle reel M52, right reel M53 is a symbol combination that is an arbitrary symbol (ANY symbol)), strong cherry roll (for example, "cherry" stops on the upper or lower row of the left reel M51 At the same time, the cherry stops in the middle of the middle reel M52, the right reel M53 is a combination of symbols that are arbitrary symbols), and the outcome of the middle cherry (for example, the cherry stops in the middle of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right. Each reel M53 is a symbol combination) which is an arbitrary symbol. In addition, the slash roles A1 to A4 as the push slash role (weak check), the slash roles B1 and B2 as the push slash role (strong check), and the slash role C1 as the push slash role (middle check) are summarized. It is also called "cherry-type push slash role".

As shown in FIG. 354, for example, the push-push slash combination (weak check) is composed of slash combinations A1 to A4. In the slash combination A1, the left 1st is 1/4 at the high base frame (high position) (when a stop operation is accepted at 1/4 of the high base frame), as in the case of the left 1st in FIG. The role (higher role) wins, and the remaining 3/4 of the high base frame (when the stop operation is accepted at the 3/4 frame of the high base frame), the lost symbol combination (the disjointed symbol combination, etc.) "One spill", which is a one-card role, wins, and in the low base frame (cheap position), the push order in which the one-card role of the above weak cherry roll wins is 1/1 (this is "Sura 1" in Fig. 354). (Notation). In addition, it is not limited to this configuration, and in the case of the left 1st, the left symbol corresponding to the 15-card combination (higher combination) and the left symbol corresponding to the lost symbol combination are made the same and stopped at the high base frame of the left reel. When the operation is accepted, the same left symbol is stopped, and then the stop control of the middle reel and / or the right reel (a stop operation range for number priority control and a stop operation range for number priority control is provided. As a result, 15 cards (higher role) won a prize in 1/4, and "1 spill", which is one of the lost pattern combinations (disjoint pattern combinations, such as loose eyes), was awarded in 3/4. It may be configured to win a prize. In addition, the push order of the middle left and right is the same as the push order of the middle right and left of FIG. However, in FIG. 354, it is expressed as "high"). Further, the other pressing orders of middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left are the same as the above-mentioned "one spill" pressing order. It should be noted that the outcome of "one spill" is not a combination of lost symbols, but a combination of symbols such as a combination of different symbols lined up on the effective line and the above-mentioned variation on the ineffective line. On the eyes or the effective line, the above-mentioned disjointed eyes, but on the non-effective line, the combination of the bell symbols is displayed and the appearance of the bells seems to be aligned. The result may be shown, and the point is not particularly limited as long as it is not a combination of symbols related to a rare role such as cherry.

Further, the allocation of "sla 1", "high", and "one spill" in the slash combinations A2 to A4 is as shown in FIG. 354. That is, in the push slash combination (weak check), "sla 1" is for the left 1st (two push orders that are 1/3 of the total of 6 push orders) common to the slash roles A1 to A4. Allotted, "high" is assigned to different push orders (one push order that is 1/6 of the total of 6 push orders) in the slash combinations A1 to A4, and "one spill" is , Is assigned to push orders other than the above-mentioned "sla 1" and "high" (three push orders that are 1/2 of the total of the six push orders).

As shown in FIG. 354, for example, the push-push slash combination (strong check) is composed of slash combinations B1 and B2. In the slash roles B1 and B2, the left 1st of each is the same as the left 1st of FIG. 353 described above. ", And in the low base frame, PB = 1 and the winning order is that one of the above-mentioned strong cherry rolls wins (this is referred to as" Sura 2 "in FIG. 354). Regarding "high", the slash role B1 is in the middle 1st (similar to the above-mentioned left 1st, the two push orders are 1/3 of the total of 6 push orders), and the slash role B2 is in the right 1st (similar to the left 1st). Similar to the above left 1st, it is assigned to each of the 6 push orders (2 push orders that are 1/3 of the total push order), and for "1 spill", the right 1st (6 pushes) in the slash role B1. It is assigned to the middle st (two push orders that are 1/3 of the total of 6 push orders) in the slash combination B2.

As shown in FIG. 354, for example, the push-push slash combination (middle-stage check) is composed of the slash combination C1. In this slash combination C1, the left 1st (two pushing orders that are 1/3 of the total of 6 push orders) is 1 in the high base frame (high position) as in the left 1st in FIG. 348 described above. "High" wins at 1/1, and 1/1 at the low base frame, which is the push order in which one of the above middle-tier cherries wins (this is referred to as "Sura 2" in Fig. 354). .. In addition, for each of the middle 1st and right 1st other than the left 1st (4 push orders that are 2/3 of the total of 6 push orders), the result is different from the above middle cherry. Is assigned.

Further, in the above-mentioned cherry-type push-slash combination, as in the above-described present embodiment and each of the modified examples 1 and 2, if the cherry-type push-slash combination is won in an advantageous section and in a non-AT situation, Between the winning determination and the payout process, in other words, the AT lottery corresponding to the actually stopped roll is performed. In this AT lottery, the middle cherry roll has the highest AT lottery probability (for example, 100% wins the AT), the strong cherry roll (for example, the AT lottery using the high-accuracy table described above), and the weak. The AT lottery probability is higher in the order of the cherry rolls (for example, the AT lottery using the medium probability table, which has a higher AT winning probability than the above-mentioned low-probability table but has a lower AT winning probability than the above-mentioned high-probability table). It is set to be low. In addition, among the cherry-type push slash roles, the winning probability of the push slash role (weak che) (for example, 1/30), the winning probability of the push slash role (strong che) (for example, 1/200), and the eyes The winning probability (for example, 1/16384) of the push slash combination (middle stage check) is set so that the winning probability becomes lower in this order.

Therefore, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 354, in the cherry-type push slash role, the winning probability is "weak" in FIG. 354. In Fig. 354, the role of the push slash (strong check) is written as "Middle" and the role of the push slash (middle check). (Indicated as "Large", "Medium", "Small"), in the situation where the start lever D50 is pressed and the cherry-type eye-pushing slash role is won (indicated as "Lever ON" in Fig. 354), the AT lottery is still held. Since we have not done so, the winning probability of any of the "weak", "strong", and "middle" ATs will be "small" (in other words, the winning probability of ATs can be said to be 0), and all reels will stop. , Weak cherry roll, strong cherry roll, middle cherry roll are displayed and AT lottery is performed (indicated as "all stopped" in Fig. 354), "middle"> "strong"> " It becomes "weak" and the above-mentioned appropriate push (in the case of this modification 3, it may be an appropriate push for all reels, or an appropriate push for four push orders other than the slats 1 to 3, and the same result is obtained in each case). The expected value for winning the 15-card role in is "Middle"> "Strong"> "Weak". Although not shown in FIG. 354, the expected winning value of the AT on the left 1st and with an appropriate hit is also "middle"> "strong"> "weak". In the present modification 3, as described in the above-described modification of the present embodiment, the AT lottery before the winning determination (when the start lever D50 is pressed) is the first stage lottery, and the lottery after the winning determination is performed. It is a second stage lottery, and if you win in these two stage lottery such as the first and second stage lottery, it is a specification that you win the AT, but instead of this, you will win a prize as in this embodiment described above. The specifications may be such that an AT lottery is performed between the judgment and the payout process, and the lottery mode is not particularly limited.

As mentioned above, in the slash role A1 of the push slash role (weak che), in the left 1st "Sura 1", in the high base frame, "high" wins 1/4 and "spill 1" in 3/4. It is "sheet". Here, in the middle 1st and the right 1st (in other words, the pushing order other than "sla 1", which may be referred to as "irregular pushing order"), which is four of the six push orders. Since there is one "high" and three "one spill", one-fourth is "high" and 3/4 is "one spill". That is, when the slash combination A1 is won, the winning rate of the 15-card combination and the 1-card combination in the aim of increasing the prize of "Sura 1" and the winning rate of the 15-card combination and the 1-card combination in the irregular push order are the same. (The payout rate in the game, the expected value of the number of game medals to be paid out in the game, etc., or the payout rate including the possibility of transfer to AT after that) Are the same. The same applies to the slash combinations A2 to 4.

In the slash role B1 of the push order slash role (strong che), in the left 1st "Sura 2", in the high base frame, "high" wins at 1/2 and "one spill" wins at 1/2. So, in the irregular push order, of the four irregular push orders, two are "high" and two are "one spill", so in the irregular push order, "high" wins at 1/2, and 1 / In 2, "one spill" will win a prize. That is, regarding the push order slash role (strong che), the winning rate of the 15-card combination and the 1-card combination in the aim of increasing the prize of "Sura 2" and the winning rate of the 15-card combination and the 1-card combination in the irregular push order are It becomes the same, and each ball output rate at the time of winning the slash combination B1 is the same. The same applies to the slash combination B2.

In the push order slash role (middle stage check), in the left 1st "Sura 3", "High" wins 1/1 in the high base frame, while in the irregular push order, all four irregular push orders are " Since it is "high", "high" wins at 1/1 in the irregular push order, so for the push order slash role (middle stage che), the winning rate of the 15-card role in the aim of high prize of "Sura 3" and The winning rate of the 15-card combination in the irregular pushing order is the same, and the ball output rate at the time of winning the middle cherry is the same.

Here, for example, when the winning rate of the 15-card combination is higher in the higher winning aim than in the irregular pushing order, the aggressiveness of aiming for the higher winning without the irregular pushing order occurs. On the other hand, in this modification 3, for the cherry-type push slash role, the winning rate of the 15-card combination, etc. in the aim of higher prizes and the winning rate of the 15-card combination, etc. in the irregular pushing order are the same. Since the ball output rate at the time of winning the cherry-type push slash role is the same, the above-mentioned aggressiveness becomes meaningless, so this kind of capture can be prevented. Fair playability can be guaranteed.

In addition, in this modification 3, the cherry-type eye-pressing slash role is applied as the eye-pressing slash role as the rare role, but instead of or in addition to this, the watermelon-type eye-pressing of the watermelon is applied. Needless to say, it is possible to provide a slash role or a chance-type push slash role. Further, as the setting of the above-mentioned production group, for example, if it is a push slash combination (weak check), the slash combination A1 to A4 may be one production group A, or the slash combination A1 to A4 and the above-mentioned push combination may be set. The forward bell group A may be one production group A, or the slash combination A1 and the push order bell group A may be the production group A, and the slash combination A2 and the push order bell group B may be the production group B. Each of the slash combinations A to H can be appropriately set, for example, a pair of different push order bell groups is paired with each other to form one effect group.

<Pushing order slash role>
Further, in the present modification 3, in addition to the push-push slash role as the rare role, the push-order slash role according to the push order that functions as the rare role is also used. As an example thereof, as shown in FIG. 354, It has a push order slash role (weak chance eye) that functions as a rare role of a weak chance eye and a push order slash role (strong chance eye) that functions as a rare role of a strong chance eye.

Of the push order slash roles (weak chances), the slash role D1 is assigned the above "high" in the left middle right, and the above "spill 1" in the left and right middle and right 1st (right left middle and right middle left). ing. In addition, in the 1st of the slash role D1, the push order in which the single role of the weak chance (for example, the combination of symbols in which "replay, replay, medal" is stopped in a straight line, etc.) wins a prize (this). Is expressed as "Sura 4" in Fig. 354), and based on the fact that the result of this weak chance is displayed, as described above, the number of weak chances is obtained between the winning judgment and the payout process. The AT lottery is performed on the lottery table corresponding to the eyes (for example, the above-mentioned medium probability table). In addition, among the push order slash combinations (weak chances), each push order in the slash combinations D2 to D12 and the "high", "one spill", and "sla 4" assigned to them are shown in FIG. 354. It's a street.

Also, among the push order slash roles (chance eyes), the slash role E1 is "high" on the left 1st, "one spill" on the right 1st, and a strong chance on the middle 1st (for example, "medal / medal").・ The order in which one piece of the medal such as "Replay" is a combination of symbols that is a mistake in the tempai is won (this is referred to as "Sura 5" in Fig. 354), and this strong chance is the result. Based on what is displayed, the AT lottery is performed at the lottery table (for example, the high accuracy table as described above) corresponding to the strong chance result between the winning judgment and the payout process as described above. It has become like. In addition, among the push order slash combinations (strong chances), each push order in the slash combinations E2 to E6 and the "high", "one spill", and "sla 5" assigned to them are shown in FIG. 354. It's a street.

In this variant 3, the above-mentioned medium-probability table and high-probability table are used as the lottery table corresponding to the weak chance and the strong chance, but each rare role of this kind is used. It goes without saying that the winning probability of the AT corresponding to the outcome can be set as appropriate, and the point is that the AT lottery should be performed with a higher probability than in the case of "high" or "one spill" (AT). The lottery should be given preferential treatment). The same applies to the above-mentioned cherry-type push slash role. In addition, instead of the role of one piece of the weak chance roll, a lost symbol combination (0 pieces) of the weak chance roll may be used, and the game medal corresponding to the weak chance roll may be used. The number of payouts can be appropriately set as long as it is less than the specified number (including 0).

Here, in the slash role D1, if the push order is left middle right, the probability of acquiring the 15-card role is 100% with "high", and the push order of left middle right, right left middle, right middle left is "spill". Although the probability of acquiring one card is 100% for "one card", the above-mentioned low probability table is used for the AT lottery, and the expected value of AT winning is relatively low, while the middle 1st For "Sura 4", the above-mentioned medium probability table is used, and the expected value of AT winning is relatively high. On the other hand, in the slash role D5, if the push order is middle left and right, the probability of acquiring 15 roles is 100% with "high", and the push order of middle right left, right left middle, right middle left is "one spill". The probability of getting a single card is 100%, but the expected value of AT winning is relatively low, while the expected value of AT winning is relatively low for "Sura 4" on the left 1st. It's getting higher. In this way, the push order slash combination (weak chance) has different AT winning expectations and medal payout expectations depending on the operation mode for each slash combination. The same applies to the push order slash role (strong chance).

On the other hand, among the 12 slash roles of the slash roles D1 to D12 that compose the push order slash role (weak chance), there are two "high" in the left middle right push order (1/12), and "spill". There are 6 "1 sheet" (6/12) and 4 "Sura 4" (4/12). Further, among the 12 slash combinations of the slash combinations D1 to D12 constituting the push order slash combination (weak chance), in any of the push orders other than the left middle right, the same as the above-mentioned left middle right push order, There are two "high" (1/12), six "spills" (6/12), and four "sla 4" (4/12). That is, in the entire push order slash role (weak chance), the AT winning expectation and the medal payout expectation are the same regardless of the push order. The same applies to the push order slash role (strong chance).

In this way, the push order slash combination has different AT winning expectations and medal payout expectations depending on the operation mode of each slash combination constituting the push order slash combination, while the push order slash combination as a whole is AT winning. Since the degree of expectation and the degree of expectation of medal payout are the same, it is possible to provide a game that maintains uniformity without variation.

As the setting of the above-mentioned effect group in the present modification 3, for example, the slash combinations D1 to D12 may be set as one effect group A (the effect group setting mode 1 is used). Further, the slash combinations D1 and D2 have the same push order (left, middle, right) to which "high" is assigned, but the push order to which "sla 4" is assigned is different from each other. The same applies to the combinations D3 and D4, the slash combinations D5 and D6, the slash combinations D7 and D8, the slash combinations D9 and D10, and the slash combinations D11 and D12. Therefore, the pair of slash combination D1 and D2 (even number of slash combinations) is regarded as one effect group A, the pair of slash combination D3 and D4 is regarded as one effect group B, and the pair of slash combination D3 and D4 is one effect group B. The production group C, the pair of slash roles D5 and D6 is one production group D, the pair of slash roles D7 and D8 is one production group E, the slash roles D9 and D10 are one production group F, and the slash role. The pair of D11 and D12 may be one effect group G (the effect group setting mode 2 is used).

Here, in the effect group setting mode 2, for example, when the effect group A is transmitted to the sub-control board S, even if the effect display device S40 can notify "high" on the left 1st, " Regarding the “sla 4”, for example, as shown in FIG. 355, a square frame is provided in the entire display area which is the lower part in the display area of the effect display device S40 and extends to the left and right of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43. In the frame, only ambiguous notification can be made by displaying "1" indicating that the stop button to be stopped first is the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43 in the aim of a cheap prize ("Sura 4") ("Sura 4"). To put it the other way around, if you are aiming for a higher prize, you can say that you are informing that you are on the left 1st). When such a suggestive effect corresponding to the effect groups A to G is performed, the operation mode for aiming at a low prize and the operation mode for aiming at a high prize are different in each effect group A to G. It can be said that the AT winning expectation and the medal payout expectation are different depending on the response.

On the other hand, in the effect setting mode 1, in the effect display device S40 or the like, only a suggestion effect that the push slash combination has been won can be performed. In this case, as described above, in the entire push order slash role (weak chance), the AT winning expectation and the medal payout expectation are the same regardless of the push order. In this effect setting mode 1, it can be said that the AT winning expectation and the medal payout expectation are the same.

Here, in the present modification 3, when the cherry-type push slash combination or the push order slash combination is won in the advantageous section and during non-AT, the effect display device S40 provides a suggestion effect to that effect. I try to do it. On the other hand, during AT, when the cherry-type push slash role or the push order slash role is won, the effect display device S40, for example, in the case of the push slash role (weak che), a weak cherry is output. The appearance of the rare role corresponding to each slash role, such as notifying the operation mode in which the eyes are displayed (specifically, in the case of the slash role A1, the stop timing that is the left 1st and can win a cheap prize). Is designed to notify the operation mode in which is surely displayed. Here, when the outcome of the rare role is displayed, an additional lottery or the like is performed according to the outcome of each rare role.

It should be noted that in the advantageous section and during non-AT, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned precursor or continuous production, for example, when the push order slash combination (weak che) or the like with a relatively low AT winning probability is won. S40 notifies the combination of symbols related to "higher" on the effect display device S40, and when a push order slash combination (strong che) or the like with a relatively high AT winning probability is won, an operation related to a cheap prize. The mode may be suggested (specifically, when the slash combination B1 is won, it is suggested that the left 1st is "sla 2", etc.). By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate suggestion effect according to the game situation as in the above-described second modification, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

<Modification example 4>
In the present embodiment described above, in FIG. 346, as shown in the prizes-A25 to A32 corresponding to the respective slash combinations A to H constituting the eye-pressing slash combination 1, all the eye-pressing slash combination 1 have the same number. The winning probabilities of the push slash combination 1 in settings 1 to 6 are the same (there is no setting difference), but instead of this, in this modification 4, the push slash in settings 1 to 6 is used. The winning probabilities of the winning combination 1 are different from each other (there is a setting difference). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 356, the number of slash combination 1 (denoted as slash combination in FIG. 356) in setting 1 is 10,000, and the higher the setting value is, the more the setting value is set. The number has increased, and in setting 6, the number is 20000 (the winning probability of the push slash combination 1 is setting 1> setting 2> setting 3> setting 4> setting 5> setting 6). In this way, by making the winning probability of the push slash combination 1 of the setting 6 higher than that of the setting 1, it is possible to create a game playability in which the setting is determined. Further, since the setting 6 has a higher probability of winning the push slash role 1 in which the AT lottery can be given preferential treatment than the setting 1, it is possible to improve the game interest of the setting 6.

Further, in the present modification 4, a setting difference is also provided in the winning probability of the push order bell in the settings 1 to 6, and as shown in FIG. 356, the setting 1 is set contrary to the push slash combination 1. The number is 40,000, which is the highest among all the set values, and the higher the set value is, the smaller the number is, and in setting 1, the number is 30,000 (winning of the push order bell). The probabilities are set 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6). Further, in the present modification 4, the total of the number of push order bells and the number of push slash combinations 1 in each set value is 50,000, and the winning probability of the push order bell and the push slash combination are both. As for the winning probability, which is the sum of the winning probabilities of 1, all the set values are set to be the same.

In such a specification, the push order bell and the push slash combination 1 are regarded as one production group A, and this production information, in other words, either the push order bell or the push slash role 1 is won. When the information is transmitted to the sub-control board S, for the effect command transmitted from the sub-control board S to the effect display device S40, when the start lever D50 is pressed, the push order bell or the push slash combination 1 is won. It is an effect command that makes an ambiguous notification (which can be said to be a common effect of the push order bell and the push slash role 1). On the other hand, in a state where all the reels are stopped and which symbol combination is stopped by the winning determination, the sub-control board S has a symbol combination corresponding to one or 0 low base frames shown in FIG. 348. When all of them receive preferential treatment regarding the AT lottery, the effect display device S40 or the like is made to perform an effect of notifying the fact. Further, when the symbol combination relating to the 15 high base frames shown in FIG. 348 or the symbol combination relating to the 15 push order bells is displayed, the sub-control board S is displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like. In some cases, the same production is performed, or different productions are performed for each. Here, even when the push order bell and the push slash combination 1 are regarded as one production group A, as described in the present embodiment described above, in the advantageous section, the push order display device is used to win a prize. It is possible to instruct the operation mode of the high prize (for example, it can be executed during the AT described above), and the player can aim at the low prize or the high prize by his / her own choice by the instruction by the push order display device. In addition, in the advantageous section and during non-AT, the push order display device may execute the instruction of the operation mode of the low prize, and in the advantageous section and during AT, the push order display device may execute the operation mode of the high prize. It may be configured so that the instruction of the above may be executed, and the player can proceed with the game by the game method that is most advantageous by following the instruction. Further, as described above, in the case of the specification in which the effect display device S40 notifies the operation mode of the high prize and the push order display device only instructs the high prize aim, the game in the push order bell and the high prize. Since the number of medals paid out is the same (15), the net increase in the number of medals (inclination during AT) can be kept constant even if 15 medals are continuously taken according to these notifications and instructions during AT. ..

In this modification 4, the winning probability of the push slash combination 1 increases as the set value increases, and the winning probability of the push order bell decreases as the set value increases. Instead of this, the odd-numbered setting is lower than the even-numbered setting for the winning probability of the push slash role 1, and the odd-numbered setting is higher than the even-numbered setting for the winning probability of the push order bell. As described above, the winning probability (odd number) can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the present modification 4, for convenience of explanation, the case where the application is applied to the push slash combination 1 of the present embodiment has been described as an example, but the same application can be applied to each of the above-described modifications 1 to 3. It is possible.

<Summary of production group assignments>
Here, the modes of allocation of the above-mentioned effect groups described in the present embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples are summarized in the following (1) to (4). In addition, the following (1) to (4) are summarized by taking the slash combination A to H of the push slash combination 1 of the present embodiment as an example.
(1) A mode in which one production group A is assigned to the slash combinations A to H.
(2) A mode in which one production group is assigned to each of the slash combinations A to H, such that one production group A is assigned to the slash combination A and another production group B is assigned to the slash combination B. ..
(3) A mode in which one effect group is assigned to the slash combinations A to H and the above-mentioned push order bell group.
(4) One effect group A is assigned to the slash combination A and the above-mentioned push order bell group A, and another effect group B is assigned to the slash combination B and the above-mentioned push order bell group B. As described above, one production group is assigned to each of one slash combination and the corresponding push order bell group as a set.

<Other variants>
In the above-described embodiments 1 to 4, the preferential treatment of the AT lottery probability is taken as an example of the privilege when a cheap prize is won (when the symbol combination related to the cheap prize is displayed) in the slash role. As described above, instead of this, the slash combination (as described above, the slash combination 1 of the present embodiment, the slash combination 2 and 3 of each of the above-described modifications, the slash combination (weak check), etc. If you win a low prize, you can advance multiple games to the ceiling by 1 or more, and if you win a high prize, the ceiling A large number of games for advancing the number of ceiling games may be a privilege, such as the number of games being less than the number of low-priced prizes (for example, advancing one game).

In addition, as the above privilege, for example, in the specification that AT (AT is activated at the upper limit of points) when the number of points exceeds a predetermined number, when the slash role is won, if a low prize is won, a plurality of points will be given. However, in the case of a high prize, the points to be given may be given a smaller number of points (for example, 1 point) than the lower prize, or a large number of points may be given as a privilege. .. In addition to the AT activation condition, this point is used for appropriate purposes such as the above-mentioned CZ activation condition and the condition for shifting to a high probability state in which the AT winning probability is relatively high. It is possible.

In addition, as the above-mentioned privilege, for example, when the slash role is won during AT, the number of additional games may be larger in the case of a lower prize than in the case of a higher prize. In determining the initial number of AT games, the number of additional games may be increased when a low prize is won. In this case, an additional lottery is performed when the slash role is won during AT, and when the additional lottery is won, the effect display device S40 notifies the operation mode of the cheap prize (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "notification"). If you do not win the additional lottery, you will get a higher prize or the above-mentioned 15-card combination will win. It is also possible to notify or instruct the operation mode (pushing order) related to the possible “〇” or “high”.

In addition, as an aspect of this addition, when an AT is elected as a slash from an advantageous section and non-AT, in the initial number of games predetermined in the above-mentioned AT for managing the number of games and in the above-mentioned AT for managing the number of games. The initial number of games and the initial number may be added to the predetermined initial number (in other words, the addition to the initial number of games and the initial number may be a privilege). In particular, in the number management AT, if one low-priced game medal for the role of slash is paid out and 15 high-priced game medals are paid out, the AT will be paid out for one low-priced prize. If the player wins, it can be said that 14 game medals are lost compared to the 15 high-winning medals, but these 14 medals may be added to the initial number. In this case, even if the number of slashes is lost in the game in which the slash role is won, the amount will be compensated during AT, so there are cases where the prize is higher and cases where the prize is lower. The expected value considering the acquisition of medals by AT can be made the same (or the expected value is higher in the case of a lower prize than in the case of a higher prize).

In addition, as the above-mentioned privilege, for example, the number of times a low prize is won during non-AT in an advantageous section is counted (no count is given in the case of a high prize), and the AT activation condition is that this count exceeds a predetermined value. It is also possible to make it a privilege to be used as a condition for activating AT. In addition, if the number of times of winning a low prize is 10 times, the probability of winning an AT or CZ is 10%, and if the number of times of winning is 20 times, the probability of winning an AT or CZ is 20%. Etc. may be set as a privilege to be one of the parameters for increasing the winning probability of AT or CZ. Furthermore, the higher the number of low-priced prizes, the higher the probability of winning a higher-ranking CZ that is easier to win an AT than other CZs, or the higher-ranking AT that is more advantageous than other ATs (the number of continuous games is large). Etc.), such as increasing the probability of transition to a higher state, it may be a privilege to be one of the parameters for transitioning to a higher state.

In addition, as the above-mentioned privilege, it is easier to produce a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the case of a low prize than in the case of a high prize, or a more reliable setting among the setting suggestion effects. It is also possible to make it a privilege that the frequency and reliability of setting suggestions are increased, such as making it easier for a cheaper prize to appear in the suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be displayable in the winning game of the slash role, or may be configured to be displayable on the end screen of the AT or the end screen of the bonus.

As mentioned above, various benefits can be considered as the benefits of the cheap prize when the slash role is won, and the benefits are not limited to the points listed above, and each of the above benefits is as follows. It is also possible to combine with.

In the above-described embodiment and each modification, when the slash combination is won, the effect display device S40 gives an ambiguous notification about the cheap prize, but instead of this, preferential treatment such as AT lottery, etc. It is also possible to give a notification that clearly indicates the combination of symbols that can receive the privilege of. For example, when the slash combination A shown in FIG. 348 is won, the left 1st (middle 1st) is pushed in the left reel M51 (middle reel M52) instead of the effect as shown in FIGS. 349 and 350. Notification to the effect that the low base frames other than the 13th to 17th parts are to be pressed, in other words, the pressing order and the stop timing that can surely obtain the privilege for the player are determined by the effect display device S40 or the like. It may be notified. Similarly, in the push order display device, the push order and the stop timing may be instructed so that the player can surely obtain the privilege. Regarding the notification by the effect display device S40, for example, in FIG. 329, in order to notify the above-mentioned "to the effect that a place other than the low base frames 13 to 17 is pressed", for example, in FIG. 329, other than 13 to 17. A symbolic symbol such as No. 6 "bar", which is within the range of, and is far from this range, is displayed on the effect display device S40, and "Aim at the bar". It is conceivable that such a notation is used, and the mode thereof is not particularly limited.

Further, in the modified examples 1 and 3, during the precursory or continuous production, even if the slash role is won, the suggestion effect is not performed. It is also conceivable not to give instructions by the push order display device in order to manage the ratio. That is, the above-mentioned instruction-included accessory ratio is stored in a RAM or the like, and when the instruction-included accessory ratio is about to exceed a predetermined value (for example, 70%), even if the slash combination is won, it is pushed. The instruction display device S40 does not give the above-mentioned suggestion effect, or the push order display device does not give the instruction, while the effect display device S40 gives the suggestion effect. Or something like that. By doing so, it is also possible to manage the indicated accessory ratio so as to be a desired value.

In addition, when the symbols related to 1 or 0 of the cheap prizes of the slash role are set as the above-mentioned pieces, and the AT lottery by the cheap prizes is performed between the winning judgment and the payout process in the game in which the slash role is won. In the next game, the result of a rare role such as the above-mentioned strong cherry may be displayed by a so-called pseudo game. That is, if the AT lottery by the cheap prize is performed in the game in which the slash role is won, the flag of the pseudo game is set, and if the AT lottery by the cheap prize is not performed (in other words, it is high). (If an AT lottery is held by winning a prize), do not flag the pseudo game. Then, when the start lever D50 of the next game is pressed, if the pseudo-game flag is set, the main control board M sets a freeze for a predetermined time, and during this freeze, all reels are set. By performing a rotation effect (pseudo-rotation) to rotate the reel, it looks as if the reel is rotating by pressing the start lever D50 (in other words, two games are executed in one game). Make it look like). In this state, for example, when the left stop button D41 is pressed (when the main control board M receives a signal that the left stop button D41 is pressed), the main control board M has a rotation effect in which the left reel is stopped. By performing (pseudo-stop), it appears as if the left reel has stopped by pressing the left stop button D41. Further, when the left stop button D41 is pressed, according to the actual reel stop control, for example, when displaying the cherry in a pseudo game, the cherry is placed on the effective line as long as the cherry can be pulled in. Pseudo-stop, and if it is out of the pull-in range, the missing cherry eyes are displayed. After that, by pressing the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are pseudo-stopped according to the actual reel stop control, thereby displaying the number of cherries and the number of missing cherries. After that, when a certain time elapses or the upper limit of the predetermined time for maintaining the freeze is reached, the reels that have been pseudo-stopped are randomly started to indicate to the player that the game is a pseudo game, and then the above-mentioned description is performed. It becomes a constant speed rotation, and normal games can be executed. In addition, in order to show the player that it is a pseudo game, while the pseudo game is being performed, the effect display device S40 is displayed, for example, "FREE PLAY" to indicate that the game is a pseudo game. You may notify the person. Further, in the above-mentioned pseudo stop, the left stop button D41 is pressed at a timing separated by 6 frames or more at which the above-mentioned "cherry" of the left reel M51 cannot be pulled in without following the actual reel control. However, the cherry may be slipped for 6 or more frames to make a pseudo stop on the effective line.

Here, when the modification for performing the pseudo stop is applied to the cherry-type push slash combination and the push order slash combination of the modification example 3, for example, the following may be applied. That is, the weak cherry rolls of the cherry-type push slash role, the strong cherry rolls, the middle cherry rolls, the weak chance rolls of the push order slash role, and the strong chance rolls. Instead of the above-mentioned disparity, for example, in the case where the push slash role (strong chee) is won, even if a cheap prize of Sura 1 is made in this game, the result will be disparity. However, the above-mentioned pseudo-game flag is set. Then, when the start lever S50 of the next game is pressed, the above-mentioned pseudo game is started, and by pressing the reels so as to have a strong cherry roll, each reel is pseudo-stopped so as to have a strong cherry roll. do. In this way, in the cherry-type push slash role and the push order-type slash role, the outcomes corresponding to the respective cheap prizes may be displayed in a pseudo manner in the pseudo game of the next game.

In this way, in the next game in which the slash role is won, the result of the rare role is displayed in a pseudo manner in the pseudo game, and the player wins the rare role (actually, a cheap prize for the slash role). As a combination of symbols related to the cheap prize of the slash role, it is not necessary to make it a rare role (a result that can be clearly recognized as a rare role in appearance), and it is possible to make it an appropriate disparity. can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to create the reel arrangement and the symbol combination for each condition device.

In the above example, in the pseudo game, the pseudo game is performed when the slash role is won and the prize is cheap, but instead of this, the slash role is won and the prize is cheap, and then the AT lottery is performed. A pseudo game is generated only when the player wins, or a rare role with a high expectation of AT lottery has a higher probability of executing the pseudo game (for example, when the slash role is won and a cheap prize is won, the pseudo game is performed. The execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute, but it can be realized because the probability of winning the above execution lottery is higher than that of the push slash role (weak check) and the push slash role (strong check).) You may try to do it. In this case, the AT is won when the symbol combination related to the rare role is displayed in the pseudo game rather than when the symbol combination related to the rare role is displayed in the normal game which is a non-pseudo game. You can increase the expectation that you are doing it, and the fun of the game will improve.

In addition, the pseudo game was set as the next game in which the slash role was won, but it is not limited to this, and it may be two games or three games later. There is no particular limitation as long as it is the timing. In this case, in particular, in the next game of the slash role, when a winning combination with a freeze such as a middle-tier cherry is won, or when a freeze for a pseudo game and a freeze due to a middle-tier cherry or the like occur at the same time, AT Priority is given to the freeze of the one with higher advantage (for example, freeze of middle cherry etc.) such as high lottery probability, and the one with lower priority (for example, freeze due to slash role) is extinguished, or It is also possible to execute it after the next game in which the high priority freeze is executed.

In the above-described present embodiment and the respective modifications 1 to 4, for convenience of explanation, each mode of the slash combination is separately described as the push slash combination 1 of the present embodiment and the push slash combination 2 of the modification 1. As described above, with respect to these various slash combinations, for example, the present embodiment and each modification include combining the push slash combination 3 of the modification 2 with the cherry-type push slash combination and the push order slash combination of the modification 3. Items described in Examples 1 to 4 and other modified examples can be combined as appropriate.

<<<<<< 20th Embodiment >>>>
Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those of the above-described embodiments. FIG. 357 is a list of reel arrangements in the revolving pachinko machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIGS. 358 to 371 are a list of symbol combinations in the revolving pachinko machine according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 375 is a list of conditional devices in the spinning machine according to the twentieth embodiment, FIG. 376 is a list of bonus specifications in the spinning machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 377 is a list of bonus specifications. 20 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board in the spinning machine according to the 20th embodiment, and FIG. 378 is a transition diagram of the main gaming states in the spinning machine according to the 20th embodiment. 379 is a diagram for explaining the navigation mode of the push order display device and the effect display device in the pachinko / pachislot machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIGS. 380 and 381 are views of the pachinko / pachislot machine according to the twentieth embodiment. It is an image diagram for demonstrating the effect performed by the effect display device in a pachinko / pachislot machine.

<Reel arrangement, condition device, etc. of the 20th embodiment>
The reel arrangement of the rotating drum type gaming machine in this embodiment is as shown in FIG. 357, and has a specification composed of 20 frames from No. 0 to No. 19. In FIG. 357, similarly to FIGS. 303 and 308 described above, the first cylinder means the left reel M51, the second cylinder means the middle reel M52, and the third cylinder and the third cylinder. Means the right reel M53 (also in FIG. 357, the above-mentioned reference numerals M51 to 53 are omitted). Although not shown, in the twentieth embodiment, the effective line is one line of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage" diagonally downward to the right.

Further, the symbol combinations for each of the specified number of the rotating drum type gaming machines in the present embodiment are as shown in FIGS. 358 to 371. Here, although there are two types of type 1 BB of the present embodiment, type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-B (see FIG. 376), only one type BB may be provided. , Four types such as type 1 BB-A to D may be provided as in the eighteenth embodiment (see FIG. 315), and the type of type 1 BB is not particularly limited. The meanings of the "specified number" in FIGS. 358 to 371 and the meanings of "3 sheets" and "2 sheets" in the "specified number and gaming state" column are the same as those of FIG. 309 and the like described in the 18th embodiment. Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device of the rotating body type gaming machine in this embodiment is as shown in FIGS. 372 to 375. In these FIGS. 372 to 375, the "component" is the same as the "component" of FIG. 314 described in the 18th embodiment. Further, "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" in FIGS. 372 and 375 is synonymous with "inside inside" in FIG. 314, and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating" is synonymous with "inside inside" in FIG. 314. (In other words, it is synonymous with "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating" in FIG. 342 of the 19th embodiment.) Further, the descriptions in the columns of "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating" also show the pull-in priority and the pull-in rate according to the batting order, as in FIG. 314. This will be described by taking the “winning-A1 condition device” of No. 9 in FIG. 373 as an example.

First, "123" and the like of "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" are synonymous with "123" of the above-mentioned "pushing order bell 123" (that is, as described above, "1" is a left stop button. D41 and "2" indicate the middle stop button D42, "3" indicates the right stop button D43, and the sequence of these numbers means that the stop buttons indicated by the numbers are pressed in that order), left, and so on. It means that the reels are stopped in the order of pushing in the middle and right. Further, "2--" in "when the type 1 BB condition device is operated" is synonymous with "2--" in FIG. 314 described in the 18th embodiment, and indicates 1st among the above. Similarly, "3--" also indicates the 1st on the right, and the description in another column (for example, the column of "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating" of "winning-A3 condition device" in FIG. 373, FIG. 372). Although it is (see the remarks column etc. of "re-game-A condition device"), "1--" indicates the left 1s. Further, "1/1", "1/2" and the like in FIGS. 372 to 375 are the same as those in "1/4" and the like in FIG. 314. Therefore, for example, "123: 1/1 winning 01" in "Type 1 BB condition device not operating" of "Winning-A1 condition device" is won when the reels are stopped in the order of left, middle, and right. It means that the symbol combination related to 01 wins 100% (pull-in rate 100%), and "2--: 1/2 prize 26" is one of the prize 26 when the reel is stopped in the middle 1st. It means that the symbol combination is won at a winning rate of 1/2.

In addition, "312: 1/2 prize 34 (watermelon head only)" in "Type 1 BB condition device not operating" of "Prize-A1 condition device" stopped the reels in the order of left, middle, and right. In this case, it means that only the symbol combination (watermelon head) whose left reel symbol is "watermelon" among the symbol combinations related to the winning 34 wins at a winning rate of 1/2. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 187 to 194 of FIG. 367, the symbol combinations related to the winning 34 are two types of symbol combinations of "red seven / red seven / bar / blank" and "bar / red". With two types of symbol combinations of "Seven / Bar / Blank", two types of symbol combinations of "Watermelon / Red Seven / Bar / Blank", and two types of symbol combinations of "Blank / Red Seven / Bar / Blank". There are a total of 8 types, but of these 8 types of symbol combinations, only one of the two types, "Watermelon / Red Seven / Bar / Blank", whose left reel symbol is "Watermelon", is 1/2. It means to win a prize. That is, regarding the symbol combination of "watermelon / red seven / bar / blank", four "watermelons" on the left reel are arranged on the left reel at equal intervals of 5 frames each other (in the first cylinder of FIG. 357). (See Nos. 2, 7, 12, and 17), four "blanks" on the right reel are arranged on the right reel at equal intervals of 5 frames each other (in the third cylinder of FIG. 357, 2). No. 7, No. 7, No. 12, and No. 17), so that the winning rate becomes 1/1 as described in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment. In addition, in the design combination of "Watermelon / Red Seven / Bar / Blank", the total of 5 frames from No. 10 to No. 14 for "Seven" on the middle reel and 5 frames from No. 0 to No. 4 for "Bar". Since any of these symbols can be drawn in the range of 10 frames, the winning rate is halved as described in the 18th embodiment described above. Therefore, in the design combination of "Watermelon / Red Seven / Bar / Blank", the winning rate of the left reel and the right reel is 1/1, and the winning rate of the middle reel is 1/2, so the winning rate is 1. It becomes / 2 (1/1 × 1/2 × 1/1).

In addition, in FIG. 375, in the "technical intervention collateral", the prize-C condition device (commonly known as "strong watermelon") is "○" in the remarks column of this "strong watermelon". As shown in the above, regardless of the push order of left 1st, middle 1st, or right 1st, the prize is only halved, and any push order may be missed. ing. Therefore, when this "strong watermelon" is won, the player presses the "watermelon" on each reel (specifically, the "watermelon" on the left reel has the above-mentioned PB = 1 and is medium. Since the "watermelon" on the reel and the right reel has PB ≠ 1 as described above, it is necessary to push the reels on the middle reel and the right reel). It is a necessary role, and by providing this role (in short, a role that can be missed), it is called a "technical intervention guarantor" in the sense that the technical intervention by the player is guaranteed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 376, the type 1 BB of the present embodiment is a type 1 BB-A of the symbol combination of the "red seven bar / bar" and one of the symbol combinations of the "white seven bar / bar". There are two types, species BB-B. Type 1 BB-A ends with the acquisition of, for example, more than one game medal, and type 1 BB-B ends with the acquisition of, for example, more than 44 game medals. Further, the type 1 BB-A (type 1 BB-B) is a specification in which the RB RB-A (RB-B) operates continuously, and the RB-A (RB-B) is, for example, twice. It ends with the end of the game, two prizes, or the operating type 1 BB-A (type 1 BB-B). In addition, Type 1 BB-A is the above-mentioned "2-card bet BB" that can be won only by betting 2 cards and winning only by betting 2 cards in non-RT, and Type 1 BB-B is non- It is the above-mentioned "3-card bet BB" that can be won only by betting 3 cards and winning only by betting 3 cards at RT. While these Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-B are in operation (during the bonus), only three bets can be played.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition of RT controlled by the main control board M is as shown in FIG. 377. As shown in FIG. 377, in the non-RT (normal gaming state), when the two-card bet BB is won (when the type 1 BB-A or the condition device is activated), RT1 which is the RT state inside the two-card bet BB. When the symbol combination corresponding to the 2-card bet BB is displayed in this RT1 (when the 2-card bet BB wins), the 1st type BB operates (the 2-card bet BB is operating). Then, when the two-card bet BB is completed, the process shifts to non-RT. On the other hand, in the non-RT, when the 3-card bet BB is won, the process shifts to RT2 inside the 3-card bet BB, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the 3-card bet BB is displayed at this RT2, the 1st type BB operates. (Three-card bet BB is in operation), and when the three-card bet BB is completed, the process shifts to non-RT. Further, since the processing and the like when the setting is changed in the state inside the two-card betting BB is the same as the 18th embodiment described with reference to FIG. 316, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 378 is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment. Note that FIG. 378 shows a simple sub-transition state as well as a main game state. As shown in FIG. 378, the present embodiment generally has a normal section and an advantageous section, and in the normal section, in a preparatory state before shifting to the advantageous section before winning the advantageous section. It is the first normal state (the first normal state even in the sub state) in which a dedicated effect (not shown) indicating that there is a certain state is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, in the game that has shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section, by always winning the advantageous section, only one game stays in the normal section, and in the normal section of this one game, The above-mentioned special production is performed. In addition, as in the present embodiment, instead of the specification that always wins the advantageous section in the game that has shifted to the normal section, the shift to the advantageous section may be performed with a predetermined probability. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of games will continue in the normal section, and the above-mentioned dedicated effect may be performed between the plurality of games. Further, instead of providing a dedicated effect for the normal section as in the present embodiment, by performing the same effect as the second normal state described later, is the person staying in the normal section in terms of the effect? It is not necessary to know whether you are staying in an advantageous section, and the specifications can be changed as appropriate.

<Net increase in the number of ATs>
Next, before explaining the various gaming states of the advantageous section, the net increase in the number of sheets in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the target of the navigation in the AT state is the group A bell and the group B bell, which are the push order combinations shown in FIGS. 373 and 374. Here, in the group A bell, for example, like the winning-A1 condition device, the symbol combinations related to the winning 01 are arranged in the order of pushing the left, middle, and right (denoted as the winning 01 winning symbol in FIGS. 360 and 361). , A collection of eight bells with payouts of eight game medals (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "low bells"), which are relatively less payable than group B bells. Further, in the group B bell, for example, like the winning-B1 condition device, the symbol combinations related to the winning 07 are arranged in the order of pushing the left, middle, and right (in FIG. 362, it is expressed as the winning 07 winning symbol), and the group A has a combination of symbols. It is a collection of 14 bells (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "high bells") that pay out 14 game medals, which are relatively more paid out than the bells.

In the present embodiment, the first navigation state in which the push order navigation of both the A group bell and the B group bell is performed, the second navigation state in which the push order navigation of only the A group bell is performed, and a part of the A group bell are low. It has a third navigation state in which the push order navigation of only the bell is performed. In the first navigation state, by performing push-order navigation of both all high bells and all low bells, for example, a net increase of 4.8 sheets, a net increase of a high net increase (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a "high net increase"). There is a "high net increase" in the corresponding part in FIG. 378).

Further, in the second navigation state, while all the low bell push order navigation is performed, the high bell push order navigation is not performed, so that, for example, the net increase of 1.8 sheets is performed and the net increase of the number of sheets is simply increased. It may also be referred to as "low net increase". In FIG. 378, it is indicated as "low net increase" in the corresponding place).

Here, for example, in the case of a specification having only a high bell, in order to realize a high net increase and a low net increase, in the high net increase, push order navigation is performed at 100% at the time of winning the high bell, and in the low net increase, the high bell is used. This can be achieved by performing push order navigation at 30% of the time of winning, but in this case, the ratio of high bell push order navigation (push order navigation ratio) is lower in low net increase than in high net increase. You can experience what you are doing, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will decline. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the net increase is low, the push order navigation of the low bell is always performed, and the ratio of the push order navigation of the low bell itself is maintained at a constant level. It is possible to play a game with a low net increase without significantly reducing. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to experience the low net increase, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Furthermore, by providing a low bell and a high bell, it is possible to perform a push order navigation of both the low bell and the high bell, and not to execute one push order navigation of the low bell or the high bell. It is possible to easily realize the specifications of net increase and the specifications of low net increase.

Further, in the third navigation state, while the high bell push order navigation is not performed, only the low bells related to the prize-A1 condition device and the prize-A2 condition device are performed among the group A bells, and the other navigation is performed. By not performing the low bell push order navigation related to the winning-A3 to A6 condition devices, for example, the net increase of 0.3 net increase may be referred to as “ultra-low net increase” (hereinafter, simply referred to as “ultra-low net increase”). In the corresponding place, it is written as "ultra-low net increase"). As for the third navigation, as described above, only a part of the bell group (the low bell related to the winning-A1 condition device and the winning-A2 condition device) is performed in the push order navigation, but instead of this. For example, when a low bell is won, a lottery is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 30%) whether or not to perform low bell push order navigation, and only when this lottery is won, the push order is performed. The specifications may be such that navigation is executed. The point is that when you win the low bell, for example, 30% at the time of winning the low bell, you can perform push order navigation with a predetermined probability (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "navigation rate"). , The net increase should be lower than the low net increase. Here, in the case of the specification of performing push order navigation of only a part of the bell group as described above, the condition device that is the target of push order navigation and the condition device that is not the target of push order navigation in the bell group. It is necessary to prepare both of the above, but in the case of a specification that performs push order navigation with a predetermined probability when the low bell is won, the condition device that is the target of push order navigation and the target of push order navigation Since it is not necessary to prepare both condition devices, the number of condition devices can be reduced. As a result, the data related to the reduced condition device can be reduced, so that the capacity can be reduced.

That is, in the present embodiment, the net increase number of sheets is increased by the presence or absence of the high bell or low bell push order navigation and the push order navigation of the low bell at a predetermined navigation rate according to each AT or the state during AT. I am trying to change. The above-mentioned numerical values such as 4.8 sheets for the net increase number are merely examples, and for example, the number of payouts of at least one of the high bell and the low bell may be changed, or the navigation rate may be changed (for example, the above 30%). 20% or 60%, etc.), high bell only push order navigation (in this embodiment, low bell only push order navigation), or at least one of high bell and low bell has a predetermined navigation rate. Of the multiple types of small wins that are the target of push order navigation, such as performing push order navigation with, the small wins that perform push order navigation and the small wins that do not perform push order navigation can be changed or pushed as appropriate. The net increase number can be changed as appropriate by appropriately changing at least one of the payout number and the navigation rate of the small winning combination that is the target of the forward navigation. Further, as shown in FIG. 378, high net increase, low net increase, and ultra-low net increase are assigned according to each AT, but these are just examples, and which AT has high net increase, low net increase, and ultra-low. Whether to allocate the net increase can be set as appropriate according to the specifications and the like. Further, in the case of an ultra-low net increase, for example, the net increase may be -0.1, the ball output rate may be less than 100, and the ball output may decrease as the game is played a predetermined number of times (the above). It may be a decrease section), and the net increase may be plus or minus 0, so that the status quo may be maintained. In addition, in FIG. 378, the CZ without the notation of high net increase, low net increase, and ultra-low net increase, and the second normal section is the above-mentioned decrease section in which the number of balls is reduced.

<Various game states in advantageous sections>
As shown in FIG. 378, the advantageous section is roughly divided into two states, a non-AT in-state state in which AT is not executed and an AT-in-AT state in which AT is executed. , CZ (chance zone), which will be described later, which always enters when shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section, and a production of whether to shift to an AT other than the first AT or to shift to a normal section after the end of the first AT. It has a judge part, which is the above-mentioned reduction section to be performed. In addition, as the AT state of the advantageous section, it shifts by winning the AT in the second normal state, and it is actually an AT, but it looks like a bonus (type 1 BB etc.) in the production. The first AT (pseudo BB1, pseudo BB2 described later) and the third AT (pseudo RB described later), the second AT that migrates via the judge part, the fourth AT that can be migrated after the end of the second AT, and the fourth AT. It has a fifth AT that shifts after the end of the first AT of a predetermined number of times (for example, the third time) via the route, and a sixth AT that can shift from the CZ.

<1st AT pseudo bonus (pseudo BB1, pseudo BB2)>
Next, the non-AT state and the AT state in the advantageous section will be described. First, the AT state will be described first. As shown in FIG. 378, among the above-mentioned pseudo-bonuses, the first AT simulates the above-mentioned type 1 BB of the above-mentioned "JACIN lottery type" that repeatedly executes the non-RB and the RB (effect display device S40). It is a pseudo big bonus (makes it look like a type 1 BB by the effect of the above type 1 BB). It has a "general" that is in the second navigation state of net increase and a "JAC" that is in the first navigation state of high net increase while performing an effect that makes it look like the RB of the above type 1 BB. There is. As the pseudo big bonus, the number of "JAC" is the first specified number of pseudo big bonus 1 (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo BB1"), and the number of "JAC" is the second specified number (first specified). It has a pseudo big bonus 2 (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo BB2") of (number of times> second specified number of times). Hereinafter, the pseudo BB1 and the pseudo BB2 may be collectively referred to as a pseudo BB.

The pseudo BB1 and the pseudo BB2 stay in the above "general" until the replay is established, and in the effect display device S40 or the like, the effect of waiting for "JACIN" is performed, so that the pseudo bonus is in the "general". It is designed to inform the player of something. Further, in this "general", it is in the second navigation state of low net increase in which only the push order navigation of only the low bell is performed. If the replay is won in this "general", it shifts to "JAC", which is the first navigation state of high net increase in which both low bell and high bell push order navigation is performed, and in "general", the replay is performed. In the game in which the player has won, the effect display device S40 or the like notifies the player that the game will shift to "JAC" by performing an effect accompanied by characters such as "JACIN". The "JAC" of the pseudo BB1 and the pseudo BB2 stays until a predetermined number of games (for example, 15G) are exhausted. Then, after digesting the predetermined number of games of "JAC", the game shifts to "general" again in the next game, and this is repeated thereafter.

As described above, the pseudo BB1 and the pseudo BB2 are terminated on the condition that the first specified number of times (for example, three times) and the second specified number of times (for example, two times) of "JAC" have been digested, respectively. For example, it can be said that the end condition is that the predetermined number of games has been exhausted in the "JAC" in which each specified number of replays has been won and transferred. , Move to the judge part. The first and second specified times of the pseudo BB1 and the pseudo BB2 are not limited to the above-mentioned times, and if the first specified number of the first BB is larger than the second specified number, the number of times is appropriate. It can be set.

In this way, in the pseudo BB (1st AT), by providing a low net increase "general" with a small net increase and a high net increase "JAC" with a large net increase, it is as if one of the real "JACIN lottery type". It can look like a BB. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is playing the “JACIN lottery type” type 1 BB without any discomfort, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. On the other hand, in the case of the specification indicating that the effect display device S40 or the like is in "general" or "JAC" with the same net increase in the number of pseudo bonuses, "JAC" is also in "general". Since the number of sheets is the same in the inside, there is a risk that it will be obvious that it is a pseudo bonus rather than a real bonus.

Further, in the pseudo BB (during the 1st AT), a 1st point lottery is performed according to the winning combination. In this embodiment, 1 to 10 points are given in the case of a loss, and in the case of a rare combination. 10 to 30 points are given to the player, which is an opportunity for the losing and rare roles to give the first point. It should be noted that the triggering role may be, for example, a small role such as a bell or a replay, which role can be appropriately set as the triggering role, and the first point according to the established combination. The number of grants can be set as appropriate.

The value of the first point given in the pseudo BB is, for example, 100% win in the second AT if the value is 100 points, 50% win in the second AT if the value is 50 points, and so on. The specifications are such that the value of the points becomes the winning probability of the second AT as it is. Therefore, the pseudo BB1 having more "JAC" times than the pseudo BB2 becomes a more advantageous pseudo BB. Further, in the pseudo BB, for example, when 10 points are given at the time of 0 points, the effect display device S40 displays that the probability of transition to the second AT is 10%, and when another 15 points are given from there, the effect display device S40 displays. The cumulative value of the first points is cumulatively displayed on the effect display device S40 as the winning probability of the second AT so that the transition probability to the second AT is further increased by 15% and displayed as a total of 25%. As a result, the player performs the pseudo BB while grasping the probability of transition to the second AT during the pseudo BB, so that the player can provide a game in which the expectation for the second AT can be increased while having a feeling of tension. It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Then, at the timing when the start lever of the final game of the pseudo BB is pressed, a second AT transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the second AT is performed according to the value of the first point (cumulative value of the first point). It has come to be called. Further, in the final game of the pseudo BB, the effect display device S40 performs an end screen display effect to the effect that the pseudo BB ends, and notifies the player that the pseudo BB has ended. In the present embodiment, the number of pseudo BBs won in the 4th AT, which will be described later (in other words, the number of times the game has been transferred to the 1st AT via the 4th AT) is counted by a pseudo bonus counter (not shown). If the value of the pseudo-bonus counter is less than the predetermined value (for example, 3) (when the first AT is the first and second times), the process shifts to the judge part and the value of the pseudo-bonus counter is the predetermined value. If this is the case (when the first AT is the third time), the shift to the fifth AT with a high net increase is made. In the present embodiment, 3 is taken as an example as a predetermined value, but the value of this predetermined value can be appropriately set according to the specifications.

<Judge part reduction section>
From the next game in which the pseudo BB is completed, the player shifts to a judge part that judges whether or not to shift to the second AT. This judge part is considered to be a reduced section in which neither low bell nor high bell push order navigation is performed. In the first game that shifts to the judge part, the effect display device S40 is produced to display an introductory image or the like indicating that the player has entered the judge part, and the player is notified that the player has entered the judge part. As described above, this judge part informs the player of the result of the second AT transition lottery, and the result of the second AT transition lottery is reflected in the production of the judge part.

In this embodiment, if the 2nd AT transition lottery is won (the 2nd AT is won), for example, in the judge part, a battle production in which a ally character and an enemy character battle is performed over a plurality of games (continuous production). By performing a victory effect to the effect that the ally character has won the battle, the player is informed that the player will move to the 2nd AT, and if the ally character has not won the 2nd AT, the above battle effect will be used by the ally. By performing a defeat effect to the effect that the character has been defeated, the player is informed that the player will not move to the second AT. As the timing of the second AT transition lottery according to the value of the points, in addition to the timing of pressing the start lever of the final game of the pseudo BB described above, for example, the first game of the judge part that shifts after the end of the pseudo BB. If it is between the start lever press of the final game of the 2nd AT and the time before the game that informs the player of the result of the 2nd AT transition lottery in the judge part, the timing of pressing the lever of Is not particularly limited.

<2nd AT>
The second AT is in the first navigation state with a low net increase, and the end condition is that the predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) is reached. During the 2nd AT, a lottery for transition to the 4th AT is performed, and by winning the lottery for the transition to the 4th AT, after the transition to the 4th AT, it always returns to the 2nd AT. .. In other words, by winning the 4th AT during the 2nd AT, the 2nd AT is also won at the same time (the 2nd AT is set). In this 2nd AT, the 4th AT low probability mode in which the winning probability of the 4th AT is low, the 4AT high probability mode in which the winning probability of the 4th AT is higher than the 4AT low probability mode, and several games before the final game of the 2nd AT ( For example, it has three modes, the 4th AT ultra-high probability mode that always enters (3 games, etc.), and the lottery table corresponding to each mode is used to perform a lottery for transition to the 4th AT. ..

In the present embodiment, in the game that has entered the second AT, a mode determination lottery is performed to determine which mode to start from, the 4AT low accuracy mode or the 4AT high accuracy mode, and the mode won in this mode determination lottery is used. The game is started. In this mode determination lottery, the 4th AT low probability mode (for example, 70%) is set so as to be easier to win than the 4th AT high probability mode (for example, 30%). The winning probability in this mode transition lottery can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, in the situation of staying in the 4th AT low probability mode, for example, a mode transition lottery of the 4AT high probability mode is performed by winning a rare role, and by winning this mode transition lottery, the 4AT high probability mode is won. It is designed to shift to the confirmation mode. In this 4th AT high probability mode, after the number of guaranteed games (for example, 5 games) that do not fall into the 4AT low probability mode has passed, the 4th AT low probability (for example, 50%) is determined by winning a bell or replay. It is designed to shift to the mode. The fall from the 4th AT4 high-probability mode to the 4th AT low-probability mode is not limited to the above-mentioned example. It is possible to select an appropriate specification, such as performing a fall lottery to the 4th AT low probability mode with a predetermined probability for each game without providing a number.

In this way, in the second AT, the process proceeds while staying in either the fourth AT low probability mode or the fourth AT high probability mode. When staying in the 4th AT low-accuracy mode, the effect display device S40 performs an effect indicating that the player is staying in the low-accuracy stage indicating that the 4AT low-accuracy mode is set. Further, when staying in the 4th AT high accuracy mode, the effect display device S40 performs an effect indicating that the player is staying in the high accuracy stage indicating that the 4AT high accuracy mode is set. Then, when the number of games before the final game in the 2nd AT (for example, if the predetermined number of games is 30 games, 28 games before the 3 games), the 4th AT ultra-high accuracy mode is set and the effect display is displayed. In the device S40, for example, an effect indicating that the player is staying on the ultra-high accuracy stage is performed. In this way, by mutually shifting to the 4th AT low accuracy mode and the 4th AT high accuracy mode, it is possible to provide a game with a sense of tension. In addition, since the mode is always shifted to the ultra-high accuracy mode several games before the final game, it is possible to provide a game that does not make the player bored until the final game.

In the final game of the 2nd AT, the effect display device S40 performs a judge effect as to whether or not to shift to the 4th AT, and if the 4th AT is not won during the 2nd AT, the judge effect (for example, described above). In the battle production, etc.), the effect that the 4th AT was not won will be performed, and the next game will shift to the normal section. On the other hand, if the 4th AT is won during the 2nd AT, the judge effect of the effect display device S40 is used to produce an effect indicating that the 4th AT has been won, and the game shifts to the 4th AT from the next game.

<4th AT>
The 4th AT is in the 3rd navigation state with an ultra-low net increase, and the end condition is that the player wins the replay after the guaranteed number of games (for example, 5 games, etc.) has elapsed (digested). In this 4th AT, a 2nd point lottery is performed for each game according to the winning combination. In this embodiment, 30 to 50 points are given in the case of a rare role, and other than the rare role (loss, bell, replay, etc.). In the case of), 10 to 20 points are given, which is an opportunity for all the winning combination to give the second point. As for this trigger, as in the case of the first point, it is possible to appropriately set which combination is to be the trigger, and it is also possible to appropriately set the number of second points to be given according to the established combination. Is.

When the value of the second point given during the fourth AT reaches a predetermined point (for example, 100 points), any one of the pseudo bonuses (pseudo BB1, pseudo BB2, pseudo RB) is won (confirmed). Specifically, when a predetermined point is reached, a pseudo-bonus selection lottery for which pseudo-bonus is won is performed, and the pseudo-bonus selected in the pseudo-bonus selection lottery is won. In the present embodiment, in the pseudo-bonus selection lottery, the pseudo-BB1 wins at a rate of 60%, the pseudo-BB2 wins at a rate of 10%, and the pseudo-RB wins at a rate of 30%. The ratio of can be set as appropriate.

Further, during the 4th AT, in the effect display device S40, for example, a defeat effect in which a ally character defeats an enemy character is performed, and a predetermined area of the effect display device S40 (for example, a second predetermined area shown in FIG. 262). SR2, etc.) will be used to display the current points awarded. For example, when 10 points are given as the second point, 10 points are displayed in the predetermined area, and an image of defeating the enemy character is displayed while displaying "10 enemy characters are destroyed". The production is performed. Further, in the effect display device S40, for example, when the cumulative value of the second points reaches 100 points and the pseudo BB1 is won in the pseudo bonus selection lottery, "100 enemy characters are defeated and the pseudo BB1 is confirmed". Along with the display, a production to destroy the enemy character is performed. In this case, in a predetermined area of the effect display device S40, after a display such as 100 points is performed, this is reset to 0 points and displayed as "pseudo BB1 × 1" to give the player 100 points. Is designed to notify that has become a pseudo BB1. After that, when new points are given, the given points are displayed in a predetermined area of the effect display device S40, and every time the points are 100 points, it is notified that one of the pseudo bonuses has been given. It is designed to do. As a result, the player can grasp how many points are required until the predetermined points for which the pseudo-bonus is determined during the 4th AT, so that the player can feel a sense of tension but expect a pseudo-bonus. It is possible to provide a game that can be inflated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Then, in the final game of the 4th AT (the game that won the replay after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed), for example, a total of 270 points are given, and when 200 points of these are pseudo BB1 and pseudo RB, for example, , In the effect display device S40, as the game result display of the 4th AT, "pseudo BB1 x 1", "pseudo RB x 1", and "70 points" are displayed, and any of them is displayed during the 4th AT. If the pseudo-bonus of is won, the type of the pseudo-bonus and the number of winnings are displayed, and the final result display showing the number of points given so far is displayed.

In the present embodiment, if there is a second point (remaining second point) less than a predetermined point that is insufficient for winning the pseudo bonus among the second points given in the fourth AT, the remaining second point is used. It will be carried over to the next 4th AT as it is. For example, if the remaining second point is the above-mentioned 70 points, the 70 points are carried over to the next 4th AT as they are, and the 70 points are given to the next 4th AT (70 points). Is the initial value). That is, in the first 4th AT, it starts from 0 points, but in the second and subsequent 4th ATs, the remaining 2nd points of the previous 4th AT become the initial value as it is, so in this case, the first time. The probability that the pseudo bonus will be won is higher in the second 4th AT than in the 4th AT. In this way, even if there is a remaining 2nd point that is not enough to win the pseudo bonus, the remaining 2nd point will be the initial value of the next 4th AT, so there is not enough remaining to get the pseudo bonus. It is possible to prevent the second point from being wasted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of loss, and the player can play the game while raising expectations for winning the pseudo bonus at the next 4th AT.

As described above, in the 4th AT, if the replay is won after the number of guaranteed games has elapsed, the final game is reached, and in this final game, the final result is displayed as described above. Here, when the pseudo BB1 or the pseudo BB2 is won (when the predetermined point becomes the pseudo BB1 or the pseudo BB2), the game shifts to the first AT from the next game, and the pseudo RB is won. Will move to the 3rd AT from the next game. In addition, if none of the pseudo bonuses are won in the final game of the 4th AT, the game shifts to the 2nd AT from the next game, and the lottery for shifting to the 4th AT is performed again in the 2nd AT. .. Further, in the pseudo bonus (1st AT or 3rd AT) transferred through the 4th AT, the pseudo bonus (1st AT or 3rd AT) always shifts to the 2nd AT after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, the judge part also always shifts to the 2nd AT. A production to the effect that the battle has been won is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as long as the 4th AT is won in the 2nd AT, the mutual transition between the 2nd AT and the 4th AT is repeated. If the pseudo-bonus is won at the 4th AT, the process shifts to the 1st AT or the 3rd AT corresponding to the pseudo-bonus, then shifts to the 2nd AT, and the same transition is repeated thereafter. Here, when the first AT (pseudo BB) via the fourth AT is the third time, in other words, when the value of the pseudo bonus counter described above becomes 3, which is a predetermined value, as described above. , Shift to the 5th AT in the 1st navigation state with high net increase.

<5th AT>
This fifth AT is a specification in which one set is performed with a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games), and a loop lottery for whether or not to start the next set for each set is performed with a high probability (for example, 90%). Is. Further, in the 5th AT, if the loop lottery is not won, the 5th AT ends and the normal section is started. Since this 5th AT is a specification for performing a loop lottery with a high probability, it is easy to continue until the advantageous section ends (it is easy to complete the advantageous section), and it is higher than the 1st to 4th ATs (advantageous). It can be said that it is AT. In this way, when the value of the pseudo-bonus counter is 3, after the pseudo-bonus is completed, the pseudo-BB is aimed at three times in order to shift to the fifth AT, which is a higher AT and is easy to complete the advantageous section. The purpose of the game is generated, and the motivation to play can be promoted. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-bonus counter counts only on the pseudo-BB, but the pseudo-bonus counter may count on the pseudo-BB and the pseudo-RB, or only the pseudo-RB. The count target can be appropriately set according to the game specifications and the like.

<6th AT>
In the present embodiment, as the upper AT, in addition to the above-mentioned fifth AT, there is a sixth AT that can be transferred from the CZ. The end condition of this 6th AT is to digest a specified number of games (for example, 100 games), and during this predetermined game, there is a higher probability (for example, 1/25) than other ATs in the pseudo BB. Is drawn. In this embodiment, when "White Seven" is pressed on all reels in the middle 1st, "White Seven, White Seven, White Seven", which is a combination of symbols related to winning 08, is aligned diagonally to the right-G condition. The establishment of the device is a condition for winning the pseudo BB. In other words, in the present embodiment, the probability that the replay-G condition device is established is the winning probability of the pseudo BB as it is. Then, when this replay-G condition device is established, the effect display device S40 executes an effect such as aiming at "white seven" by pressing the reverse button, and even if the "white seven" are aligned, they are not aligned. Also, an effect of notifying that one pseudo BB has been stocked is performed. In addition, if the pseudo BB is not stocked even once during the 6th AT, one pseudo BB is forcibly stocked, and if the 6th AT is entered, at least one is stocked. Pseudo BB stock is guaranteed. The conditions for winning the pseudo BB of the 6th AT (stock winning) are not limited to the establishment of the above-mentioned replay-G condition device, and for example, the pseudo BB is drawn with a predetermined probability for each game. Alternatively, the pseudo BB may be drawn with a lottery probability according to the role such as a bell or a rare role, and the point is that the pseudo BB may be won with a higher probability than other ATs. .. Further, as the lottery target of the 6th AT, not only the pseudo BB but also the pseudo RB may be the lottery target.

<3rd AT Pseudo Bonus (Pseudo RB)>
Next, the third AT will be described. The third AT is a pseudo RB that simulates RB (regular bonus) among the above-mentioned pseudo bonuses (makes it look like RB by the effect of the effect display device S40 or the like), and this pseudo RB is the first of the high net increase. It is in a 1-navigation state. The end condition of the pseudo RB is that the predetermined number of games (for example, 20 G) is reached. Further, in the pseudo RB, during the last predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games), selection is performed to guess the correct batting order of the push order bell by the effect display device S40 for each game, and the number of correct answers of the selection is used. The second AT is won with a corresponding lottery probability. In the present embodiment, when the final predetermined number of games of the pseudo RB is 5 games, the 2nd AT is confirmed (100% winning) if the correct answer is 3 times or more, and the 2nd AT is in the order of 0 times, 1 time, and 2 times. The winning probability is high (less than 100%), and one pseudo BB is stocked for the correct answer four times, and two pseudo BBs are stocked for the correct answer five times. In addition, as a privilege at the time of these 4 times correct answer and 5 times correct answer, it is possible to shift to the 5th AT and the 6th AT which are higher ATs instead of the above-mentioned pseudo BB stock, and the privilege is particularly limited. do not.

Further, the pseudo RB is divided into a first half stage from the rush game to before the predetermined number of games of the final game and a second half stage of the predetermined number of games after the end of the first half. The level that makes it easy to select the second half stage with the lottery probability (for example, if it is a rare role, it will win a level-up lottery with a high probability, if it is not a rare role, it will win a level-up lottery with a lower probability than a rare role, etc.) An up lottery is held (the higher the level, the smaller the number of choices and the easier it is to choose). Specifically, in the first half stage, the push order of the push order bell starts from 6 choices of level 1 (without push order navigation), and from here, the push order of 4 choices of level 2 (no push order navigation). 1/4 push order bell wins on the premise that there is no push mistake), 3 choice level 3 with 3 push orders (1/3 push order bell wins on the premise that there is no push mistake), 2 push order Level 4 (1/2 push order bell wins on the premise that there is no push mistake), 1 choice of push order (all navigation, 1/1 push order bell wins on the premise that there is no push mistake) It is designed to level up.

That is, in the pseudo RB, in the first half stage, it is a game property that raises the level of selection. In the effect display device S40, for example, if the background color during the effect is level 1, it is white, and if it is level 2, it is blue. , At level 3, the background color is changed according to the level, such as green, and the current level is notified to the player. On the other hand, in the second half stage, in the first half stage. It is a game that selects according to the obtained level, and the effect display device S40 and the push order display device perform push order navigation according to each level (this will be described later). , The specifications are different between the first half stage and the second half stage. In this way, since the game characteristics are different between the first half stage and the second half stage, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. In addition, in the first half stage, since the level of selection that makes the selection of the second half stage advantageous is performed, it is possible to provide a game with a sense of tension.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo RB, for example, when "white seven" is pressed on all reels in the middle 1st, the symbol combination related to the winning 08 is "white seven / white seven / white seven" diagonally downward to the right. When you press "White Seven" on all reels in the re-game-G condition device, and in the middle 1st, you can see "White Seven, White Seven, Replay A", which is a combination of symbols related to winning 06, diagonally downward to the right. When the replay-H condition device that aligns the tempai loss of "White Seven" is established, the effect display device S40 executes an effect such as aiming for "White Seven" by pressing the middle button, and "White Seven" is aligned. Then, it will be promoted to pseudo BB1, and if it is not complete, it will not be promoted to pseudo BB1. In this game, if the re-game-G condition device is established, the player presses the "white seven" to align the "white seven", and the pseudo BB1 is started from the next game and replayed. If the game-H condition device is established, even if the player presses "White Seven", it will be a tempai loss of "White Seven" and the pseudo BB1 will not be started from the next game. It has become. In the above example, the condition device in which the "white seven" is aligned has been described as an example, but for example, the condition device in which the "red seven" is aligned, the condition device in which the "bar" is aligned, and the like may be used. The condition device that is a condition for promotion to pseudo BB1 can be set as appropriate.

Next, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 in the latter half stage of the pseudo RB will be described. As shown in FIG. 379 (d), the group A bell (low bell), which is a pushing order in which eight game medals are paid out when the batting order is correct, has six winning combinations of winning 01 to 06 when the batting order is correct. It is an option. In addition, the B group bell (high bell), which is a push order role in which 14 game medals are paid out when the batting order is correct, also has 6 choices, with 6 types of prizes 07 to 12 when the correct answer is given. Further, the “instruction number” in FIG. 379 (d) indicates a number displayed on the push order display device. In this case, "1" is displayed in the first digit of the push order display device (see FIG. 37), and the push order is displayed even when the correct batting order is "left middle right 2" in the winning 01 of the group B bells. Indicates that "1" is displayed in the lower digit of the device. In FIG. 379 (d), the correct batting order of the winning 01 among the group A bells is "left middle right", and the correct batting order of the winning 07 among the group B bells is the same as the winning 01 "left middle right". Therefore, in order to distinguish these, "1" is added to the end of the correct batting order of the group A bell, and it is written as "left middle right 1", and "2" is added to the end of the correct batting order of the group B bell. Is added and written as "left middle right 2". Further, the group A bell is assigned a production group number (effect GR number) of No. 9, and the group B bell is assigned a production group number of 10. The sub-control board is mainly used during non-AT. By receiving the effect group number such as 9 or 10 from the control board, it is possible to suggest that the bell with 8 or 14 payouts has been won.

As mentioned above, both the A group bell and the B group bell have 6 correct batting orders (in other words, there are 6 winning combinations in which 8 game medals are paid out). In the embodiment, the description will proceed on the premise of this. FIG. 379 (a) shows a display list of the effect display device S40 (denoted as “liquid crystal” which is an example of the effect display device S40 in FIG. 379 (a)) at the time of push order navigation. The “number of choices” in FIG. 379 (a) means the number of choices to be guessed by the player when performing push order navigation, and 1 choice (level MAX), 2 choices (level 4), It has 5 choices: 3 choices (level 3), 4 choices (level 2), and 6 choices (level 1). In addition, "correct answer order" indicates the correct answer batting order as an example in this table, and all are "middle right left". The "operation order" indicates the batting order of the above six choices. In addition, "lever" indicates the period from when the start lever is pressed to before the first stop button is pressed (a state in which no stop button is pressed), and "after one stop" is the first stop. The period from the time the button is pressed to the time before the second stop button is pressed, and "after 2 stops" is from the time the second stop button is pressed to the time before the last stop button is pressed. Shows the period of. In addition, "Summary" explains the outline of the content of the number of hits, "1st" indicates the situation where the first stop button is pressed, and "2nd" is after pressing the first stop button. The situation where the stop button is pressed for the second time is shown, and "2 choices" and "3 choices" indicate the navigation mode by the effect display device S40. In this "overview", for example, "1st 2 choices" indicates that the navigation of 2 choices is performed when the first stop button is pressed, and "2nd 2 choices" means that the second stop button is pressed. When doing so, it indicates that two-choice navigation is being performed. Further, "???" in the columns of "lever", "after 1 stop", "after 2 stops", etc. indicate the navigation mode to be executed by the effect display device S40, and among "???" , The left "?" Corresponds to the left stop button, the middle "?" Corresponds to the middle stop button, and the right "?" Corresponds to the right stop button, meaning it is unknown whether the answer is correct or not. It has become. In addition, "x ??" in the same column means that "x" corresponding to the left stop button is in the wrong batting order, in other words, the left stop button must not be pressed. Further, the "1" in the middle of the "? 1?" In the same column means that the stop button to be pressed first is the middle stop button.

FIG. 379 (b) shows an instruction mode by the push order display device (instruction monitor). "Left middle right 1" and "left middle right 2" in the "condition device" column are synonymous with the above-mentioned "left middle right 1" and "left middle right 2", respectively, of "left middle right 1". The winning 01 indicates that the winning 02 of "left middle right 2" is established (the same applies to other parts in the "condition device" column). In addition, "-" in the "6 choices" column in "Display of push order display device" indicates that no display is made on the push order display device in the case of 6 choices, and "4 choices", The numbers such as "8", "11", and "1" in the respective columns of "2 choices" and "1 choice" are the instruction numbers shown in FIG. 379 (c), and the numbers written in each are pressed. Indicates that the display is displayed on the sequential display device.

The "instruction number" in FIG. 379 (c) indicates an instruction mode by a number such as "1", "2", etc. by the push order display device, and the "instruction information" corresponds to each "instruction number". Indicates the pressing order of the stop switch. Further, in the "instruction information", "left first", "middle first", and "right first" indicate the above-mentioned "left 1st", "middle 1st", and "right 1st", respectively. In addition, "left 1st or middle 1st" of "instruction information" corresponding to "7" in the instruction number column indicates that either "left 1st" or "middle 1st" is in the correct batting order. , "Left 1st or Right 1st" of "Instruction information" corresponding to "8" in the instruction number column indicates that either "Left 1st" or "Right 1st" is the correct batting order. The "middle first or right first" of the "instruction information" corresponding to "9" in the instruction number column indicates that either "middle first" or "right first" is in the correct batting order.

<6 choices>
As shown in FIG. 379 (a), in the case of 6 choices of level 1, there is no push order navigation, and when the correct batting order is "middle left and right" and "lever", the effect display device S40 is displayed. Is displayed, "???" is displayed, and it is not clear which batting order is the correct batting order. Here, taking as an example the case where the player presses the stop button in the order of "left middle right", as the stop button that the player presses first, "after one stop" after pressing the left stop button. Then, the display of "???" becomes "???", and the left "?" Corresponding to the left stop button has been deleted, and the left stop button has been pressed. In addition to notifying, the situation is such that it is not possible to know which push order is used for the other remaining stop buttons. Next, as a stop button that the player presses for the second time, the display of "??" becomes "?" At "after 2 stops" after pressing the middle stop button, and so on. By deleting the "?" In the middle corresponding to, it is notified that the middle stop button has been pressed, but it is not clear whether the remaining right stop buttons are in the correct batting order. Therefore, after pressing the last stop button, the player is correct in the push order selected by himself / herself depending on whether or not the symbol combination related to the winning 04 corresponding to the "middle left and right" or the symbol combination related to the winning 10 is won. It is possible to know whether or not it is. Here, the case where the "operation order" is "left middle right" is taken as an example, but the same applies to other "operation order" such as "left middle right", so other "left middle right" Explanations such as "right" are omitted. Further, in the case of 6 choices of level 1, as described above, the instruction by the push order display device is not given. In the case of 6 choices of level 1, the push order display device may be notified, for example, that it is unknown which push order it is by displaying "-".

Regarding the navigation mode by the effect display device S40, for example, among the group A bells, "middle left and right 1" is the winning-A3 condition device in which the symbol combination related to the winning 03 is won in the correct batting order (hereinafter, simply "winning 03 condition"). In the case of "device" as well, among the B group bells, "middle left and right 2" wins the winning symbol combination related to winning 09 in the correct batting order-B3 condition device (hereinafter, simply "winning 09 condition") Since it is common to the case of "device"), in FIG. 379 (a), "middle left and right 1" and "middle left and right 2" are not distinguished, but simply "middle left and right" (this). The same applies to the 4 choices, 3 choices, 2 choices, and 1 choice described later). In other words, in FIG. 379 (a), the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right", which indicates the correct batting order of both the winning 03 condition device and the winning 09 condition device, and the effect display device S40. In, the navigation mode is common when these winning 03 condition devices and winning 09 condition devices are won. Therefore, at the time when the push order navigation is generated in the effect display device S40, it is not known which condition device is in the mode of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40, and the game paid out in connection with the winning. If there are eight medals, it means that the winning 03 condition device is used, and if there are 14 medals, it means that the winning 09 condition device.

<4 choices>
Next, the push order navigation mode by the effect display device S40 in the case of the four choices of level 2 will be described. As shown in the "overview" of FIG. 379 (a), in the case of the four choices of level 2, when the first stop button is pressed (when the "lever"), the effect display device S40 has two choices. Perform the two-choice navigation on the street (1st two-choice), and when you press the second stop button after pressing the first stop button (even when "after one stop"), you can use the two-choice navigation. Do (2nd 2 choices).

In this level 2 4 choices, the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right", the "operation order" by the player is the incorrect answer "left", and the stop button to be pressed first is the incorrect answer "left". In the case of a certain "left middle right", when it is a "lever", "x ??" is displayed and the left stop button is "x", so the left stop button is the first stop button to be pressed. Is the incorrect batting order, and either the middle stop button or the right stop button is the correct answer.Therefore, as the first stop button to be pressed, the correct batting order is either the middle stop button or the right stop button. I am navigating ("1st 2 choices"). In this state, if you press the left stop button of the incorrect answer (if you make a mistake), it will be impossible to press the correct batting order at this point, so all the "× ??" displays will be displayed immediately. After erasing (erasing the batting order navigation), the batting order navigation by the effect display device S40 is in a state of disappearing at each of "after 1 stop" and "after 2 stops". Note that the case where the "operation order" is "left-right middle", "right-left middle", and "right-middle-left" is the same as the above-mentioned "left-middle-right", so the explanation is omitted.

In the four choices of level 2, when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation order" by the player is "middle left and right" which is the same as the correct answer batting order, the effect display device S40 is a "lever". Then, as described above, "× ??" is displayed ("1st 2 choices"), and in this state, after the player presses the middle stop button, which is the correct batting order, as the first stop button, "after 1 stop". In "", the display of "x ??" becomes the display of "??", and the correct batting order is either the left stop button or the right stop button. Then, when the player presses the left stop button, which is the correct batting order, as the stop button to be pressed for the second time at "after 1 stop", "??" is displayed at "after 2 stops". Of these, the left "?" Corresponding to the left stop button is deleted and the notation becomes "?". At this point, the push order is already correct, but in the present embodiment, by intentionally displaying "?" For the stop button to be pressed last, whether or not the answer is correct until the last stop button is pressed. I don't understand.

In the 4 choices of level 2, when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation order" by the player is "middle right left", in other words, the correct answer is about the first stop button pressing order. It is the same as the batting order, but even if the second stop button pressing order is incorrect, the same display as the above-mentioned "middle left and right" is displayed. That is, when the "operation order" is "middle right left" and "x ??" is displayed when the "lever" is set, and "after one stop" after the player presses the middle stop button in this situation. , As the stop button to be pressed for the second time by the player, in "after 2 stops" after pressing the right stop button in the incorrect batting order, the right corresponding to the right stop button among the "??" The "?" Is deleted and the message "?" Is displayed. Even if the stop button is pressed in this incorrect batting order, the stop button to be pressed last is displayed as "?", So that it is not possible to know whether or not the batting order is correct until the last stop button is pressed. There is. As described above, in the effect display device S40, after the second stop button is pressed, the display form is the same regardless of whether the second stop button is pressed in the correct batting order or the incorrect batting order. Therefore, since it is not known whether the batting order is correct or incorrect until the end, it is possible to provide a tense game until the last stop button is pressed.

Next, the instruction mode of the push order display device in the case of the four choices of level 2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 379 (b), when the "condition device" is "middle left and right 1", in other words, as described above, the correct batting order is "middle left and right 1", and eight game medals are paid out. In the case of the winning 03 condition device, the push order display device displays a two-choice "9" of "middle first or right first" at the timing of the "lever" in FIG. 379 (a). In this situation, when the player presses the middle stop button of the correct answer, "7" of "left 1st or middle 1st" is displayed at the timing of "after 1 stop", so that 4-choice navigation When the left stop button of the incorrect answer is pressed, nothing is displayed at the timing of "after one stop".

On the other hand, when the "condition device" is "middle left and right 2", in other words, in the case of the winning 09 condition device in which the correct batting order is "middle left and right 2" and 14 game medals are paid out, as described above. On the push order display device, "7" of "left first or middle first" different from "9" of the above-mentioned winning 03 is displayed at the timing of "lever". In this situation, when the player presses the middle stop button of the correct answer, "8" of "left 1st or right 1st" is displayed at the timing of "after 1 stop", so that 4-choice navigation When the left stop button of the incorrect answer is pressed, nothing is displayed at the timing of "after one stop".

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the correct batting order is the same "middle left and right", the push order is displayed depending on whether the winning 03 condition device or the winning 09 condition device corresponds to this correct batting order. The display mode of the device is different. Temporarily, in the winning 03 condition device and the winning 09 condition device, the left stop button in which the player is in the wrong batting order under the situation where the above "7" common to the push order display device is displayed at the timing of the "lever". When is pressed, it may be known that the batting order is incorrect by the symbol stopped on the effective line of the left reel. For example, taking the winning 03 condition device and the winning 09 condition device as an example, among the symbol combinations of the winning 03 and the winning 09 corresponding to the correct batting order of these condition devices, the symbols on the left reel are both "watermelon". Yes (see Fig. 361), of the incorrect batting order of the winning 03 condition device and winning 09, in the case of the left 1st batting order, as shown in Fig. 373, the symbol combination related to winning 13 is stopped at 1/2. The design of the left reel of the winning 13 is "Bell A" (see FIG. 364).

Therefore, when "7" of "left first" or "middle first" is displayed on the batting order display device, the symbol of the left reel stopped by pressing the left stop button is "bell A". , It can be seen that the batting order of "left first" is the incorrect batting order, and that the correct batting order is "middle first". Then, in the case of the player who knows the components of the condition device shown in FIGS. 373 and 374, the established condition device is either the winning 03 condition device or the winning 09 condition device of the middle 1st. In addition, at the time of incorrect batting order of the left 1st of the winning 03 condition device and the winning 09 condition device, it can be seen that the symbol combination related to the winning 13 is stopped, so that the symbol combination related to the winning 13 is aimed at. Strategy will occur. As a result, there is a risk that the winning 13 that should originally win at 1/2 will win 100% as long as the push is successful.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, even if the correct batting order is the same "middle left and right", in the case of the winning 03 condition device corresponding to this correct batting order, "middle 1st or right 1st" " 9 ”is displayed, and in the case of the winning 09 condition device,“ 7 ”of“ left 1st or middle 1st ”is displayed, so that the player presses the left stop button, which is the incorrect batting order. In that case, even if it is found that "left first" is the incorrect batting order by the symbol stopped on the left reel, either "middle first" or "right first" still remains as a correct batting order candidate. Therefore, the correct batting order cannot be specified. As a result, even if the constituent elements of the condition devices shown in FIGS. 373 and 374 are known, it is possible to prevent the aggressiveness of aiming at the symbol combination related to the winning because the symbol combination to be aimed at cannot be specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the case where the "conditional device" in FIG. 379 (b) is "middle left / right 1" and "middle right / left 2" has been described as an example, but the "conditional device" in FIG. 379 (b) has been described. It goes without saying that when "" is "left middle right 1" and "left middle right 2", and when "right left middle 1" and "right left middle 2", the same action and effect as described above are exhibited.

As for the timing of the above-mentioned instruction display such as "7" and "9" by the push order display device, "x ??" etc. is displayed on the "lever", "after one stop", etc. of the effect display device S40. It may be at the same time as the timing of the display, or it may be before or after the display by the effect display device S40. Further, it is possible to give only the instruction of the push order display device without performing the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, and the point is that at least one of the effect display device S40 and the push order display device is selected. Navi (push order navigation) should be performed. The same applies to the other two options.

<3 choices>
Next, the push order navigation mode by the effect display device S40 in the case of three choices of level 3 will be described. In the three choices of level 3, when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation order" by the player is "middle left and right" which is the correct batting order, when the "lever" is set, the effect display device “???” is displayed in S40, and in this situation, if the correct middle stop button is pressed as the first stop button to be pressed, the three selections are successful at this point. Therefore, at the time of "after one stop", in the effect display device S40, "2 3" indicating that the stop button to be pressed second is the left stop button and the stop button to be pressed last is the right stop button. It is displayed, and push order navigation is performed to notify the player in what order the remaining two stop buttons should be pressed. In this situation, the player corresponds to "middle left and right" by pressing the left stop button for the second time and finally (third time) the right stop button according to the push order navigation of the effect display device S. Eight or fourteen game medals are paid out with the combination of symbols related to the winning prize 04 or the combination of symbols related to the winning ten.

In the 3 choices of level 3, in the situation where the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right", the "operation order" by the player is the incorrect answer "in the incorrect batting order, the stop button to be pressed first is the incorrect answer" left middle right In the case of "lever", "???" is displayed on the effect display device S40, and in this situation, when the player first presses the left stop button, the correct batting order is pressed at this point. Since it becomes impossible to perform the order, all the "???" displays are immediately deleted (the push order navigation is deleted), and at each time of "after 1 stop" and "after 2 stops", The batting order navigation by the effect display device S40 disappears. Note that the cases of "left-right center", "right-left center", and "right-center-left" are the same as the above-mentioned "left-center-right", so their description is omitted.

In the 3 choices of level 3, in the situation where the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right", the player's "operation order" is incorrect. In the case of "middle right left" where the batting order is incorrect, when it is "lever", "???" is displayed on the effect display device S40, and in this situation, the correct answer is left stop as the first stop button to be pressed. When the button is pressed, the three selections are successful at this point, so that the above-mentioned "2 3" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as described above. In this situation, if the player presses the right stop button of the incorrect answer as the stop button to stop for the second time (if he makes a mistake), it becomes impossible to press the correct batting order at this point. , Immediately erases all the displays of "2 3", and at the time of "after 2 stops", the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 disappears. Regarding the instruction mode of the push order display device in the case of 3 choices of level 3, since these 3 choices are specifications that allow one of left, middle, and right to be selected at the time of "lever". As in the case of the above-mentioned 6 choices of level 1, the instruction by the push order display device is not given.

<2 choices>
Next, the effect display device S40 push order navigation mode in the case of two choices of level 4 will be described. In this level 4 2 choice, after notifying the correct stop button as the "1st 2 choice" that navigates the 2 choices at the time of "lever" and the stop button that is pressed first at the time of "lever", It has two push-order navigation modes, "2nd 2-choice", in which two-choice navigation is performed at the time of "after one stop", and these push-order navigation modes will be described in sequence.

First, "1st 2 choices" will be described. In this "1st 2 choice", when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation order" by the player is "middle left and right" which is the correct batting order, when the "lever" is set, the effect display device S40 Is displayed as "× ??", and a two-choice navigation is performed to the effect that the left stop button is an incorrect answer and either the middle stop button or the right stop button is a correct answer. In this situation, if the player presses the correct middle stop button as the first stop button, the two choices are successful at this point. Therefore, at the time of "after one stop", the above-mentioned "2 3" is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the pressing order for notifying the player in which order the remaining two stop buttons should be pressed. Navigation is now performed. In this situation, the player corresponds to "middle right left" by pressing the left stop button for the second time and finally (third time) the right stop button according to the push order navigation of the effect display device S. Eight or fourteen game medals are paid out with the combination of symbols related to the winning prize 04 or the combination of symbols related to the winning ten.

In "1st2 selection", when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation order" by the player is "middle right left", the correct answer middle stop button is pressed as the first stop button to be pressed. Then, at "after 1 stop", the right stop button of the incorrect answer was pressed (pressed) for the second time even though the above-mentioned "23" push order navigation was performed on the effect display device S40. In this case, when the right stop button is pressed, all the displays of "2 3" are immediately erased, and when "after 2 stops", the pressing order by the effect display device S40. The navigation will disappear.

In "1st 2 choices", even when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation order" by the player is "left middle right" which is the incorrect batting order, when it is "lever", the effect display device In S40, "× ??" is displayed, and in this situation, if the player presses the left stop button, which is the incorrect batting order (if he makes a mistake), the correct answer is at this point. Since it becomes impossible to push the batting order, all the displays of "× ??" are immediately erased, and the effect display device S40 is used at each of "after 1 stop" and "after 2 stops". The batting order navigation disappears. Note that the cases of "left-right center", "right-left center", and "right-center-left" are the same as the above-mentioned "left-center-right", so their description is omitted.

Next, "2nd 2 choices" will be described. In this "2nd 2 choice", when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation order" by the player is "middle left and right" which is the correct batting order, when the "lever" is set, the effect display device S40 Is displayed as "? 1?", And the batting order navigation (one-choice navigation) is performed to the effect that the stop button to be pressed first is the middle stop button. In this situation, when the player presses the correct middle stop button as the first stop button, "??" is displayed on the effect display device S40 "after one stop", and the left stop button or the left stop button or Perform a two-choice navigation to the effect that one of the right stop buttons is the correct answer. In this state, when the player presses the right stop button, which is the correct answer, the right "?" Corresponding to the right stop button is deleted from the "??" display at "after one stop". It is written as "?". At this point, the correct answer is already in the push order, but in this embodiment, as in the case of the above-mentioned four choices, the stop button to be pressed last at "after two stops" is dared to be "?". By displaying, it is not possible to know whether the answer is correct or not until the last stop button is pressed.

In "2nd 2 choices", when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right", the "operation order" is the same as the correct answer hitting order for the first stop button, but the second stop button pressing order is incorrect. Even if the correct answer is "middle right left", the same display as "middle left and right" is displayed for "lever" and "after one stop". That is, the effect display device S40 displays "? 1?" When it is a "lever", and displays "??" at "after one stop" after the player presses the middle stop button in this situation. do. In this situation, when the player presses the left stop button, which is an incorrect answer, the right "?" Corresponding to the right stop button is deleted from the "??" display at "after 2 stops". Then, "?" Is displayed. Even if the stop button is pressed in this incorrect batting order, the stop button to be pressed last is displayed as "?", So that it is not possible to know whether or not the batting order is correct until the last stop button is pressed. There is.

In "2nd 2 choices", even when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation order" by the player is "left middle right" which is the incorrect batting order, when it is "lever", the effect display device In S40, "? 1?" Is displayed, and in this situation, if the player presses the left stop button, which is the incorrect batting order (if he makes a mistake), the correct answer is at this point. Since it becomes impossible to push the batting order, all the displays of "? 1?" Are immediately erased, and the effect display device S40 is used at each of "after 1 stop" and "after 2 stops". The batting order navigation disappears. Note that the cases of "left-right center", "right-left center", and "right-center-left" are the same as the above-mentioned "left-center-right", so their description is omitted.

Next, an instruction mode of the push order display device in the case of two choices of level 4 will be described. “2 choices” in FIG. 379 (b) is an example in the case of the above-mentioned “2nd 2 choices”. As shown in "2 choices" of FIG. 379 (b), for example, when the correct batting order is "middle left / right 1", "middle left / right 2", "middle right / left 1", "middle right / left 2" (condition device is In the case of "middle left and right 1", "middle left and right 2", "middle right left 1", "middle right left 2"), in other words, if the middle stop button is the correct answer as the first stop button to be pressed, In the push order display device, "10" indicating that "middle first" is the correct answer is displayed at the timing of "lever" in FIG. 379 (a), and at the timing of "after one stop" thereafter, By not displaying anything, it is set as "2nd 2 choices". This is the same for other correct batting orders, so the explanation is omitted.

In the case of the above-mentioned "1st 2 selection", for example, when the "condition device" is "middle left and right 1", at the timing of the "lever", the push order display device is displayed as "left 1st or middle 1st". When either "7" or "9" of "middle 1 or right 1" is displayed and the stop button pressed by the player is the correct answer on the push order display device at the timing of "after 1 stop". Is displayed as "3" indicating that "middle left and right" is the correct answer, and in the case of an incorrect answer, no display may be made.

<1 choice>
Next, the push order navigation mode by the effect display device S40 and the push order display device in the case of one selection of the level MAX will be described. In this level MAX 1 selection, when the "correct answer order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation order" by the player is "middle left and right" which is the correct batting order, when it is "lever", the effect display device In S40, "213" corresponding to the pressing order of "middle left and right" is displayed, and in the pressing order display device, "3" corresponding to the pressing order of "middle left and right" is displayed, so that the "lever" can be displayed. At that point, the push order navigation of all push orders is performed.

In addition, when the "correct batting order" is "middle left and right" and the "operation batting order" by the player is "left middle right" which is the incorrect batting order, all push orders are pushed at the time of "lever". In order navigation, if the left stop button of the incorrect answer is pressed as the stop button to be pressed first, it is impossible to press the correct batting order at this point. All the displays of "213" are erased, the display of "3" is also erased in the push order display device, and the effect display device S40 and the push order display are displayed at each of "after 1 stop" and "after 2 stops". The batting order navigation by the device has disappeared. The same applies to the cases of "middle left and right", "middle right and left", and "middle right and left". Furthermore, if the stop button pressed first is the correct answer and the stop button pressed the second time is the incorrect "right" "middle right left", the effect is produced when the right stop button is pressed the second time. In the display device S40, "2 3" displayed in "after 1 stop" is erased, in the push order display device, the display of "3" is erased, and in "after 2 stops", the effect display device S40 and The push order navigation by the push order display device disappears.

<Second normal state>
Next, the second normal state, which is the non-AT in-time state of the advantageous section, will be described. This second normal state is a state in which the transition is made after the CZ that always shifts after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is completed. In this second normal state, as shown in FIG. 380, a counter display CO indicating the progress of the game related to the second normal state is displayed in the specific area TR1 of the effect display device S40, and this counter display CO is displayed. Inside, a fraction counter display BK1 in which predetermined numerical values are shown for each of the denominator and the numerator, and a cycle display TR1 in which the current cycle is displayed are displayed. The counter CO display was displayed on a part of the display unit of the effect display device S40, but instead of this, an effect display device different from the effect display device S40, for example, the effect display device S40. It may be provided on the left side and displayed here.

The numerator of the fraction counter display BK1 indicates the cumulative value of points given to the player by the lottery of each game in the second normal state, and the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1 is the number of points of the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1. Shows the target value of. In the present embodiment, the initial value of the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1 is 0, and the initial value of the denominator is 1000. From the start of counting the numerator of the fraction counter BK1, the value of the numerator of the fraction counter BK1 is the denominator. One cycle is defined as the above. Then, upon reaching this one cycle, a lottery for winning or losing a pseudo bonus is performed with a predetermined probability. If you win in this pseudo bonus lottery, you will be transferred to either pseudo BB1, pseudo BB2 (1st AT) or pseudo RB (3rd AT), and if you do not win, one cycle will be completed. Then, the next cycle is started, and the number of cycles is displayed on the cycle display TR1. In this way, by displaying the given points on the numerator and displaying the target value on the denominator in a display form such as the fraction counter display BK1, the relationship between the current given points and the target value can be grasped at a glance. , You can always play the game while grasping the current situation. In addition, by clearly displaying the target value, the purpose of the game can be clarified, and the player can proceed with the game with a sense of purpose, and as a result, the motivation to continue the game can be promoted. can. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned fraction counter display BK1 is applied as the display of the point and the display of the target value by the effect display device S40, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the point is displayed on the left side and the target is displayed on the right side. The display of the point and the display of the target value may be displayed separately, such as displaying the value.

In this embodiment, points are drawn according to the winning combination of each game, such as 0 points to 5 points in the case of bells, replays, and losses, and 5 points to 10 points in the case of rare roles. The points given here are managed by a point counter (not shown) controlled by the main control board M, and a predetermined initial value (for example, 0) is set in this point counter. The value of the point counter is cumulatively added each time points are given, and this value is reflected in the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1. Further, the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1 is unchanged regardless of the winning combination of each game, but the specification is such that the value is subtracted by CZ described later. Fraction counter display The denominator of BK1 is managed by a target value counter (not shown) controlled by the main control board M. A predetermined initial value (for example, 1000) is set in this target value counter, and when the value of the target value counter is subtracted by CZ, the value of this target value counter is the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1. It is supposed to be reflected in.

In this way, in the second normal state, the numerator value (cumulative number of points) of the fraction counter display BK1 is increased so as to reach the value of the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1. In S40, an effect or the like is performed according to the points given to the player. In this second normal state, when a predetermined number of ceiling games (for example, 350 games, 700 games, etc.) is reached after the start of this second normal state, it becomes the first ceiling and shifts to the first AT. Pseudo BB1 is started. The number of ceiling games on the first ceiling is managed by a ceiling counter (not shown) controlled by the main control board M.

Further, in the second normal state, as described above, if the pseudo bonus lottery at the time of reaching one cycle is not won, the next cycle is started, but this cycle is determined by the main control board M. It is managed by a controlled periodic counter. A predetermined value (for example, 10) is set as an initial value of this cycle counter, and the value is decremented by 1 each time one cycle is completed, and the value of this cycle counter is reflected in the cycle display RT1. It has become so. Further, in the present embodiment, when the value of the cycle counter becomes 1, in other words, when the predetermined number of ceiling cycles is reached in the second normal state (for example, the initial value of the cycle counter is 10). In the case of (10th cycle), the second ceiling is set, and the pseudo bonus and the second AT are won. In this case, the second normal state is shifted to the second AT via the first AT.

<CZ>
Next, CZ will be described. This CZ adds the numerator value of the fraction counter display BK1 in the second normal state and subtracts the denominator value (in other words, changes the numerator value and the denominator value of the fraction counter display BK1). It can also be called a specialized zone). As described above, the CZ shifts between the case of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section and the case of winning the CZ transition lottery when the rare combination is won in the second normal state. The termination condition of this CZ is that the player wins the replay and the rare role after the guaranteed number of games of the predetermined number of games has passed.

In this CZ, points are added and the value of the target value counter is subtracted according to the winning combination. In the present embodiment, in the case of CZ, in the case of a bell, 20 points are added and the target value is subtracted by 50, and in the case of a loss, 10 points are added and the target value is subtracted by 5. The addition value of the point counter and the subtraction value of the target value counter are determined by a lottery according to the above. In the present embodiment, when the subtraction value of the target value becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1000) or more, the transition to the sixth AT, which is the above-mentioned higher AT, is confirmed, and the sixth AT is transferred from the next game of the confirmed game. It is supposed to be started. In this way, when the subtraction value exceeds the predetermined value, the privilege of shifting to the sixth AT, which is the higher AT, is given. Therefore, in the CZ, the player can be given the goal of exceeding the predetermined value. It is possible to promote the desire for gaming machines. In the present embodiment, when the subtraction value of the target value becomes the predetermined value or more, the process shifts to the 6th AT, but instead, when the point addition value becomes the predetermined value or more, the process shifts to the 6th AT. It is also possible to do so, and as a benefit when the value exceeds the predetermined value, instead of the transition to the 6th AT, the transition to the 5th AT is performed, or a pseudo bonus is stocked. Is also good.

Further, in CZ, when the replay is won, the cumulative value of the points added up to that point and the cumulative value of the subtracted target value are terminated as they are. On the other hand, in CZ, even if the rare role is won, the CZ ends, but when the CZ ends by this rare role, for example, in the case of the rare role 1 (for example, weak cherry), the CZ ends. The cumulative value of the points added in and the cumulative value of the target value counter subtracted by CZ are each doubled, and in the case of a rare combination 2 (for example, a strong cherry) higher than the rare combination 1, the above The privilege of triple the cumulative value of each is given. In this way, even if the CZ ends in the rare role, the privilege that each cumulative value fluctuates greatly according to the rare role is given, so that the feeling of loss of the rare role is reduced and the CZ ends. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play due to.

In this CZ, the effect display device S40 executes the effect shown in FIG. 381. As shown in FIG. 381, in the region on the left side of the effect display device S40, in the case of loss, CZ continues and the molecular value (point) of the fraction counter display BK1 shown in FIG. 380 is added by 10. , It is displayed that the value of the denominator (target value) is subtracted by 5 (indicated as "+10" and "-5" in the figure, respectively), and in the area on the right side of the effect display device S40, in the case of a bell, CZ Is continued, and it is displayed that the value of the molecule of the fraction counter display BK1 is added by 20 and the value of the denominator is subtracted by 50. Is being notified.

Further, in the central region of the effect display device S40, the numerator shows the cumulative value of the points added by CZ (in the example shown in the figure, it is displayed as "+250"), and the denominator is the target subtracted by CZ. The cumulative value of the value is shown (in the example shown in the figure, it is displayed as "-100"), the fraction counter display BK2 is displayed, and the cumulative value of the points added so far to the player and the subtracted target are displayed. Notifies the cumulative value of the value.

Further, in the case of replay, the effect display device S40 ends CZ, and the cumulative value of the points added up to that point and the cumulative value of the subtracted target value are reflected as they are "x1". Is displayed, and in the case of the rare role 1, the CZ ends, but as described above, "x2" to the effect that it is doubled, and in the case of the rare role 2, the CZ ends, but as described above. "× 3" is displayed to the effect that it will be tripled, and informs the player about the handling of the cumulative value of points and the cumulative value of the target value when the game ends with a replay and when the game ends with a rare role. There is. Further, the effect display device S40 is also displayed to indicate that when the target value exceeds 1000, the CZ ends and the sixth AT is started.

<Flow of games in non-AT state>
Next, on the premise of the above-mentioned second normal state and CZ, the flow of the game in the non-AT state will be described. CZ is started in the game in which the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section. In this CZ, points are added and target values are subtracted according to the winning combination, and when the CZ ends, the state shifts to the second normal state. For example, as shown in FIG. 381, when CZ is terminated in a state where 250 points are added and 100 is subtracted from the target value, 250 is added to the initial value (0) of the point counter and the target value counter. Since 100 is subtracted from the initial value (1000) of, in the first second normal state shifted after the end of this CZ, as shown in FIG. 380, the target value which is the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1 is 900, and the molecule A certain point will start from the state of 250.

In this way, whenever the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed, the CZ for adding points and subtracting the target value is started. It is possible to start from an advantageous state in which the points are added and the target value is subtracted, the motivation for playing can be promoted, and the game is stopped as soon as the AT ends and the normal section is started (so-called immediate disappointment). Can be prevented.

In the first second normal state of transition from CZ, points are awarded according to the winning combination, but if the rare combination is won, if the CZ transition lottery is won, the point will be transferred to CZ and points will be given in this CZ. By adding and subtracting the target value, the numerator value of the fraction counter display BK1 is further added, and the denominator value is further subtracted. For example, as shown in FIG. 380, in the first second normal state transitioned from CZ, the second normal state is changed from the time when the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1 is 250 and the denominator is 900 (the time remaining 650 until the target value). In this second normal state, when the numerator is added up to 300 (when the remaining 600 up to the target value), the numerator shifts to CZ, 300 is added in this CZ, and the denominator is subtracted by 200. When the state shifts to the normal state, the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1 becomes 600, the denominator becomes 700, and the remaining 100 reaches the target value. As described above, in the CZ of the present embodiment, not only the points are added but also the target value is subtracted. Therefore, the cumulative value of the points due to the addition of the points not only approaches the target value but also the target. Since the upper limit of the target value is lowered by subtracting the value, the game has the expectation that the cumulative value of points can be exceeded the target value faster than the specification in which the target value is fixed and only points are added. It can be given to a person, and the player's motivation to play can be improved.

In this second normal state, the numerator value and denominator value of the fraction counter display BK1 fluctuate due to the point addition by the second normal state, the point addition by CZ, and the subtraction of the target value, and the value of this numerator is the denominator. If it exceeds the value, one cycle is completed and a lottery for shifting to the pseudo bonus is performed, and if this is won, the pseudo bonus is started. On the other hand, if the lottery for this pseudo-bonus is missed, the process proceeds to the next cycle. Specifically, in the first second normal game shifted from CZ, it is the first cycle, and as shown in FIG. 380, the counter CO is also displayed as <first cycle>. When the first cycle is completed and the lottery for shifting to the pseudo bonus is not completed, the second cycle is set and the counter CO is displayed as <second cycle>. Further, in the second cycle, among the molecular values of the fraction counter display BK1 at the end of the first cycle, the portion exceeding the denominator value is taken over in the second cycle, and the value of the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1 is taken over. Is taken over as it is in the second cycle.

For example, as described above, in the first second normal state of transition through the CZ when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1 becomes 600 and the denominator becomes 700 by re-entering the CZ. After that, the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1 became 710 and exceeded the denominator, and the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus was performed. However, the second cycle when the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus was not performed is as follows. That is, at the end of the first cycle, the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1 is 710, which exceeds the target value by 10, so the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1 in the second cycle starts from the state of 10. Will be done. Further, the denominator 700 of the fraction counter display BK1 at the end of the first cycle is taken over as it is in the second cycle, and the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1 in the second cycle starts from the state of 700. ..

That is, in the present embodiment, when the value P of the point counter is larger than the value M of the target value counter at the end of the Nth cycle, the difference (value P-value M) in the N + 1th cycle. ) Is set in the point counter so that it becomes the initial value of the second cycle. Further, the value M of the target value counter at the end of the Nth cycle is taken over as it is in the 2nd cycle and becomes the initial value in the 2nd cycle. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned difference is used as the initial value of the point counter in the second cycle, but instead, the value P of the point counter at the end of the first cycle is reset to 0. May be set as the initial value of the point counter in the second cycle. In short, the value of the point counter in the N + 1 cycle may be smaller than the value of the target value in the N + 1 cycle.

In this way, the denominator value (target value) of the fraction counter display BK1 at the end of the Nth cycle is specified to be inherited as it is in the N + 1th cycle, so when the denominator value is subtracted by CZ Since this subtracted value becomes the value of the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1 in the N + 1 cycle as it is, the upper limit of the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1 is lower than the N cycle, and the N + 1 cycle You can play games. As a result, even if the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus is not won at the end of the Nth cycle (when the privilege is not given), the decrease in the motivation for playing can be prevented, and the N + 1 cycle is maintained as it is. It can be expected that the eye game will continue.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the numerator value and denominator value of the fraction counter display BK1 fluctuate due to the addition of points by the winning combination in the second normal state, the addition of points by CZ, and the subtraction of the target value. However, depending on the CZ, the value of the numerator may be several times the value of the denominator. For example, in the second normal state of the second cycle, when the numerator of the fraction counter display BK1 is 200 and the denominator is 400, the numerator enters the CZ, and in this CZ, 400 numerator is added and the denominator is subtracted 100. And so on. In this case, the numerator (point) is 600 and the denominator (target value) is 300 depending on the CZ, so that the points are the values for two times of the target value. In this case, it is treated as if the 3rd cycle and the 4th cycle have been completed, and a lottery for shifting to the pseudo-bonus at the end of the 3rd cycle and a lottery for shifting to the pseudo-bonus at the end of the 4th cycle are performed, respectively.

If the lottery for shifting to the pseudo-bonus in the third and fourth cycles is won, the game shifts to the first AT or the second AT according to the winning pseudo-bonus. Here, if the pseudo bonus is won in each of the third cycle and the fourth cycle, a plurality of pseudo bonuses are stocked. On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus is not won in any of the third and fourth cycles, the second normal state of the fifth cycle is started. Further, for example, when the predetermined ceiling cycle is the 10th week, the 2nd cycle or the 3rd cycle is completed by adding points by CZ and subtracting the target value in the second normal state of the 8th cycle. In the case of the above-mentioned second ceiling, since the tenth cycle, which is the ceiling cycle, has been reached, the pseudo bonus and the second AT will be won.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the value of the denominator of the fraction counter display BK1 at the end of the Nth cycle is subtracted by CZ, it is inherited as it is in the N + 1th cycle, so that the more the cycle progresses, the more the cycle progresses. Fraction counter display BK1 denominator value, in other words, the upper limit of the target value tends to decrease, so the target value becomes closer as the cycle progresses, and the lottery to shift to the pseudo bonus for multiple cycles Since it becomes easier to perform, the more the cycle progresses, the more motivated to play is promoted, and the motivation for playing can be improved.

<<<<<< 21st Embodiment >>>>>
Next, the 21st embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those of the above-described embodiments. FIG. 382 is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the revolving pachinko machine according to the 21st embodiment, and FIG. 383 is an image diagram showing a mode at the time of addition in the revolving gaming machine according to the 21st embodiment. .. Note that FIG. 382 shows a simple sub-transition state as well as a main game state.

<Various game states>
As shown in FIG. 382, the present embodiment generally has a normal section and an advantageous section as in the twentieth embodiment, and in the normal section, an advantageous section is obtained before the advantageous section is won. It is the first normal state (the first normal state even in the sub state) in which a dedicated effect (not shown) indicating that the state is in the preparation state before the transition to is performed. Also in the 21st embodiment, in the game that has shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section, the advantage section is always won and only one game stays in the normal section. The above-mentioned special production is performed.

Further, the advantageous section is roughly divided into two states, a non-AT in-state state in which AT is not executed and an AT-in-AT state in which AT is executed, and the non-AT in-progress state is advantageous from the normal section. It has a second normal state in which it stays when it shifts to a section. As the AT in the advantageous section, in the second normal state, the first AT that shifts by winning the transition lottery to the first AT by the rare role or reaching the number of ceiling games, and the first AT that shifts are executed during this first AT. By winning the transition lottery to the 2nd AT, or by winning the transition lottery to the 2nd AT in the 3rd AT, the transition is made, and the 2nd AT, which is the above-mentioned additional specialization state, and this 2nd AT The transition is made by winning the 3rd AT that shifts when And a fifth AT that can be transferred from the second AT to the fourth AT.

In the present embodiment, as in the twentieth embodiment, the net increase number is changed for each AT or according to the state during AT depending on the presence or absence of the push order navigation of the high bell and the low bell. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 382, in the first AT, a state of high net increase and a state of low net increase are mixed, the second AT and the fifth AT have a low net increase, and the third AT and the fifth AT are high. It is a net increase. In the present embodiment, as in the 20th embodiment, high net increase and low net increase are realized depending on the presence or absence of the push order navigation of the low bell and the high bell, but instead of this, for example, only the low bell High net increase and low net increase are realized by high and low of low bell navigation rate, such as high net increase for low bell navigation rate of 100% and low net increase for low bell navigation rate of 50%. You may try to do it. In addition, also in FIG. 382, as in the 20th embodiment described above, the second normal state without the notation of high net increase and low net increase is the above-mentioned decrease section.

<Second normal state>
In the second normal state, the transition lottery to the first AT is performed with the winning of the rare role, etc., and when this transition lottery is won, the first AT is elected through the precursor stage etc. by the production display device S40. Is notified, and then the process shifts to the first AT. Further, in the second normal state, in addition to the lottery for transition to the first AT triggered by the winning of a rare role or the like, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is set as one cycle, and the winning combination is established during this one cycle. The corresponding points are given, and when one cycle ends, a lottery for transition to the first AT is performed according to the cumulative value of the points given in that cycle, and this also causes the second normal. It will shift from the state to the first AT. Further, from this second normal state, even when the above-mentioned number of games ceiling is reached or when the cycle ceiling at which the cycle is the 10th cycle is reached, the process shifts to the first AT.

<1st AT>
As shown in FIG. 382, the first AT transitioned from the second normal state has a point accumulation part for accumulating points for continuing a predetermined number of games (for example, 15 games) and a predetermined number of games consumed by the point accumulation part. It has a point addition part that shifts after the point addition part and a judge part that shifts after the point addition part ends. The point accumulation part is in the first navigation state of high net increase explained in the 20th embodiment, and the point granting lottery according to the winning combination (the rare role has more points awarded than the bell, replay, etc.). It is carried out. Further, in this point accumulation part, the effect display device S40 displays the number of remaining games of the point accumulation part, and when points are given, for example, an effect of displaying the number of given points such as "+5". And so on.

From the next game in which the predetermined number of games have been consumed in this point accumulation part, the game shifts to the point accumulation part. This point accumulation part is in the second navigation state with a low net increase, and the end condition is that the replay is won after the above-mentioned guaranteed number of games has passed. In the present embodiment, for example, a first role in which the "bar" symbols are arranged independently, a second role in which the "bar" symbols are tempered, and a third role in which the three "bar" symbols are aligned are provided, and the first of these is provided. Points are given according to the role to the third role (the points given in the order of the first role, the second role, and the third work are larger). Further, in the effect display device S40, when any of the first to third roles is won, the effect display device S40 indicates that any of these has been won and that the effect display device S40 aims at the "bar" by pressing. By letting the player perform a notification effect, the player is made to aim at the "bar" symbol and stop it. If the replay is won in this point accumulation part, a lottery for transition to the second AT will be performed based on the points accumulated so far in the game. In the next game of the game that won this replay, it shifts to the judge part.

This judge part is the same as the judge part of the twentieth embodiment, and it produces an effect of whether to shift from the first AT to the second AT or to the normal section, and push order navigation of either low bell or high bell. It is said that this is a decrease section that is not carried out. In this judge part, as in the twentieth embodiment, the effect display device S40 continuously produces an effect reflecting the result of the transition lottery of the second AT in the first AT over a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). In the final game of the judge part, the player is notified that the ally character will win when the second AT is won, and that the player will be transferred to the second AT. In this case, the second AT is started from this next game. On the other hand, in the final game of the judge part, if the second AT is not won, the ally character is defeated to notify the player that the second AT will not be entered. In this case, the normal section shifts to the next game.

<3rd AT and 4th AT>
From the next game in which this judge part is completed, the game shifts to the second AT, which is the above-mentioned special addition state, and after the initial addition is performed here, the game shifts to the third AT. However, for convenience of explanation, this second AT will be described. First, the 3rd AT and the 4th AT will be described. The third AT, which shifts after the end of the second AT, is in the first navigation state with a high net increase, and the so-called difference number management in which the end condition 1 is that the number of game medals acquired during the third AT exceeds a predetermined number. It is AT. In the present embodiment, an initial number of sheets (for example, 150 sheets) is set as an initial value, and the total number of sheets obtained by the initial addition by the second AT is set at the start of the third AT. The maximum number of sheets is set, and if there is no addition or the like, the third AT ends when the maximum number of sheets is exceeded.

In this 3rd AT, when the rare role is won, etc., the above-mentioned upper limit number of additional lottery (additional number of sheets), 2nd AT transition lottery, 4th AT transition lottery is performed, and if the additional lottery is won, If you win the 2nd AT, you will move to the 2nd AT, and if you win the 4th AT, you will move to the 4th AT. As described above, the fourth AT is an additional specialized state different from the second AT, and in the present embodiment, it is a pseudo bonus that continues for 30 games. In the 4th AT, which is this pseudo-bonus, the number of winning combinations in each game is corresponding to the winning combination (for example, +5 in the case of a loss or bell, +20 in the case of a rare role, etc.). Is to be added. Then, after playing the 4th AT for 30 games, the 3rd AT is restarted from the next game. Further, in the third AT, when the end condition 1 is satisfied, the process shifts to the normal section.

<2nd AT>
Next, the second AT will be described. This second AT is in the second navigation state with a low net increase. The end condition of the second AT is that after the guaranteed number of games is exhausted, a specific winning combination corresponding to a specific symbol combination (for example, "bell bell lip") with PB = 1 is won. In this second AT, a lottery for adding the number of basic sheets and a lottery for multiplying are performed according to the winning combination. If it is doubled, 50 sheets are added, and the number of basic sheets selected by the basic number addition lottery multiplied by the magnification selected in the magnification lottery is given as the number of additional sheets. In the effect display device S40, for example, after displaying that the basic number of sheets is 10, a magnification such as "x5" is displayed, and then a selection is made by adding the basic number of sheets, such as "Get +50 sheets!". The effect corresponding to the basic number of sheets, the magnification selected by the magnification lottery, and the additional number of sheets obtained by multiplying the basic number by the magnification is performed.

In the present embodiment, the second AT, which is an additional specialized state, is in the second navigation state with a low net increase, and the third AT, which is a normal AT, is in the first navigation state with a high net increase, which is a normal AT. The expected increase value (net increase number) of game medals per unit game is smaller in the second AT, which is in the additional specialized state, than in the 3AT. Here, the expected increase value of the game medals per unit game in the low net increase is 1 (net increase in the second AT), and the expected increase value of the game medals per unit game in the high net increase is 5 (the second AT, the second AT). Assuming that the net increase of the 2nd AT is performed with the same high net increase as the 3AT), and assuming that the games of the 2nd AT are played for a predetermined number of games,
(1) Let A be the expected value of the game medals (total number of game medals obtained by the second AT) obtained when the second AT with a low net increase is played for a predetermined number of games.
(2) Let B be the expected value of the game medals (total number of extras added by the 2nd AT) obtained by adding the 2nd AT with a low net increase for a predetermined number of games.
(3) Expected value of game medals obtained when the second AT is performed for a predetermined number of games with a high net increase (total number of game medals obtained by the second AT when the second AT is performed with a high net increase) Let C be
(4) Expected value of game medals obtained by adding a predetermined number of games when the second AT is played with a high net increase (total number of games added by the second AT when the second AT is played with a high net increase) When is D, the following equation (1) is established in this embodiment.
Equation (1): A + B = C + D

In the present embodiment, the total number of game medals A obtained by the second AT in the second AT with a low net increase, which is a special addition state, and the total number of additional medals B by the second AT, perform the second AT with a high net increase. The total number of game medals C obtained by the second AT and the total number of additional medals D by the second AT are set to be the same. Specifically, assuming that the predetermined number of games is 100 games, A is 200 for "1 x 100 games" and C is 500 for "5 x 100 games". When this is applied to the above formula (1), A (100 sheets) + B = C (500 sheets) + D. Here, for example, assuming that B (total number of additional sheets in the second AT) is 500, in order for the above equation (1) to hold, D (total addition in the case where the second AT is performed with a high net increase) is assumed. The number of sheets) is 100 sheets.

As described above, regarding the total number of game medals finally obtained by the player in the second AT, even if the second AT has a low net increase (the total number of game medals is the above A + B) or the second AT has a high net increase (the total number of game medals is A + B). The total number of game medals is the same as the above C + D), but the total number of additions in the second AT, which is in the special addition state, is higher for the second AT with a low net increase (500 cards for the above B) and for the second AT with a high net increase (D above). More than 100 medals). In other words, by setting the 2nd AT to a low net increase with a smaller net increase than the 3rd AT, the apparent additional number that can be given to the player can be increased as compared with the case of the high net increase. In the specialized state, it is possible to perform additional notification with a larger number of additional sheets. Further, as described above, when the total number of additions in the low net increase is 500, which is more than 100, the total number of additions in the low net increase is 500, for example, while the total number of additions in the high net increase is 100. In the case of high net increase, 100 additional notifications can be performed only once, whereas in the case of low net increase, 100 additional notifications can be performed 5 times. It is also possible to increase the frequency of additions more than the net increase. As a result, even the second AT, which has a smaller net increase than the third AT, can be recognized as advantageous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, the following can be said about the above equation (1). That is, when a certain AT1 (third AT in the present embodiment) and AT2 (second AT in the present embodiment) which is a special addition state that is relatively easier to add than the AT1 are provided. It can be said that the expected value of the additional number of AT2 is improved by making the net increase number of AT2 lower than that of AT1. In the present embodiment, the example in which AT1 has a high net increase and AT2 has a low net increase has been described. For example, even when AT1 has a low net increase and AT2 has an ultra-low net increase, the expected number of additional AT2s is similarly expected. The value can be improved. Further, when AT1 is a high net increase and AT2 is an ultra-low net increase, the expected value of the number of additions can be further improved as compared with the case where AT1 is a high net increase and AT2 is a low net increase. In short, it is sufficient that the net increase of AT2 in the additional specialized state is lower than the net increase of AT1. By doing so, the expected value of the additional number of AT2 in the additional specialized state can be made high, and the larger the difference between the net increase number of AT1 and AT2, the higher the expected value of the additional number of AT2. Will be higher. As a result, even if AT2, which is in the additional specialized state, has a lower net increase than AT1, the expected value of the additional number of AT2 is high, so that the player is not aware that the net increase is low. , The game can be played, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when AT1 is set to the additional specialized state 1 and AT2 is set to the additional specialized state 2 different from AT1, in other words, when both AT1 and AT2 are in the additional specialized state, the net increase of AT2 By setting the number of sheets to be lower than that of AT1, AT2 can be an AT with a higher expected value of the number of additions than AT1, and a plurality of additions having different expected values can be added only by changing the net increase number. You can create a specialized state.

In the present embodiment, the case where the net increase in low net increase is 1 and the net increase in high net increase is 5 is taken as an example. However, the net increase in low net increase and the net increase in high net increase are the specifications of the model. It can be set as appropriate by such means. Here, the larger the difference between the net increase in low net increase and the net increase in high net increase, the larger the number of additions in low net increase will be in proportion to this. When is increased, the difference between the net increase in the low net increase and the net increase in the high net increase may be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the above equation (1), the total number of game medals A obtained by the second AT in the second AT with the low net increase, which is the addition specialized state, and the total number of additional medals B by the second AT. The total number of medals (hereinafter referred to as "total number 1") is the total number of game medals C obtained by the second AT and the total number of additional medals D by the second AT (hereinafter referred to as "total number 1"). Hereinafter, the total number of sheets 2) is set to be the same, but as shown in the following formula (2), the total number of sheets 1 and the total number of sheets 2 are set to be almost the same. Is also good. Specifically, there are cases where the total number of sheets 1 is slightly larger than the total number of sheets 2 and cases where the total number of sheets 2 is slightly larger than the total number of sheets 1.
Equation (2): A + B≈C + D

<Direction of the 2nd AT>
In the present embodiment, the upper limit of acquisition, which is the total of the total number of game medals acquired during the second AT and the number of additional medals obtained by the addition, is set to 1500 (predetermined number) as a threshold value. Different effects are performed depending on whether the number is less than 1500 or more than 1500. This will be described with reference to FIG. 383.

In FIG. 383, a case where the second AT is started when the number of games in the advantageous section is 500 games (indicated as “at the start of the game” in the figure) is illustrated, and when the number of games is 500 (the second AT). If the number of game medals acquired at the start of (at the start of) is 800, the upper limit of acquisition at the start of the second AT is 1400, and the number of additional medals in this game is 10, the planned acquisition at the time of addition is The number of sheets (upper limit number of acquisitions) is 1410, which is less than the above threshold of 1500. In this case, the effect display device S40 displays a fraction such as "800/1400" in which 800 medals, which is the number of medals to be acquired, is displayed in the numerator, and 1400, which is the maximum number of medals to be acquired, is displayed in the denominator, and "addition" is performed. Is displayed to indicate that there was an addition, and an effect of displaying "+10" indicating that the number of additions was 10 is executed.

Next, as for the number of cards acquired at the start of 501 games, the number of bets in 500 games is 3 and the number of payouts is 10. Since the number of game medals is increased by 7 in 500 games, 500 games are acquired. The number of sheets is 500, and 7 sheets are added to obtain 807 sheets. Further, as described above, the maximum number of acquisitions in 501 games is 1410, which is obtained by adding 10 to 1400 in 500 games because 10 was added in 500 games. In the case of this 501 game, if 20 cards are added, the planned acquisition number is 1430 cards, which is less than the above threshold value of 1500 cards. In this case, the effect display device S40 performs the effect of displaying the fraction as "807/1410" and displaying "addition" and "+20".

Next, as for the number of acquired cards at the start of the 502 game, the number of bets in the 501 game is 3 and the number of payouts is 0. Since the number of game medals is reduced by 3 in the 501 game, the 501 game is acquired. The number of sheets is 807, minus 3 to obtain 804. Further, the maximum number of acquisitions in the 502 game is 1430, which is obtained by adding 20 to the 1410 in the 501 game because 20 were added in the 501 game. In the case of this 502 game, if there is no addition, the planned number of acquisitions remains 1430, which is less than the above threshold of 1500. In this case, the effect display device S40 performs an effect of displaying a fraction as "804/1430" and displaying "none" indicating that there was no addition.

Next, as for the number of acquisitions at the start of 503 games, the number of bets in 502 games is 3, the number of payouts is 10, and the number of game medals is increased by 7 in 502 games, so that 502 games are acquired. The number of sheets is 804 and 7 is added to obtain 811 sheets. In addition, the maximum number of acquisitions remains the same as 1430 in the 502 game because there was no addition in the 502 game. In the case of this 503 game, if 100 cards are added, the planned acquisition number is 1530 cards, which is 1500 or more, which is the above threshold value. In this case, the effect display device S40 conceals the maximum number of acquisitions by displaying "???" in the denominator of the fraction display indicating the maximum number of acquisitions, such as "811 / ????". (Do not tell the player the upper limit of acquisition) Perform the production. Further, although the effect display device S40 performs an effect of notifying that the addition has been made by displaying "addition", instead of displaying the above-mentioned "+10" or the like to notify the number of additions, "??" By displaying "? Sheets", the additional number of sheets is concealed (the player is not informed of the additional number of sheets).

After this next game (after the next game where the threshold is 1500 or more), for example, as you can see from the 504 game, "818 / ???", "???" As described above, the effect of concealing the maximum number of acquisitions and the number of additional sheets is executed until the end of the second AT. Then, when the second AT is completed, the process proceeds to the fifth AT without shifting to the third AT.

<5th AT>
The fifth AT is in the second navigation state with a low net increase, and with the above threshold value of 1500 sheets as the initial value, a predetermined number of sheets (for example, 100 sheets) is one set (1600 sheets at this time), and It is a specification that a loop lottery for whether or not to start the next set for each set is performed with a high probability (for example, 90%). Further, in the 5th AT, the fact that the loop lottery was not won is set as the end condition 2. In this case, the 5th AT ends and the normal section is started. Since this 5th AT is a specification for performing a loop lottery with a high probability, it is easy to continue until the advantageous section ends (it is easy to complete the advantageous section), and it is higher than the 1st to 4th ATs (advantageous). It can be said that it is AT.

Not only in the 2nd AT but also in the 3rd AT and the 4th AT, the 5th AT shifts to the case where the acquisition upper limit reaches 1500 or more (in FIG. 382, "predetermined number". According to the above-mentioned ending state (the above-mentioned ending state is a state in which the completion of the advantageous section is confirmed, and in this 5th AT, the completion of the advantageous section is not confirmed, so it is "similar". It can be said that it is in a gaming state. For this reason, the effect display device S40 also performs an effect dedicated to the 5th AT according to the above-mentioned ending effect, while also performing an effect of notifying whether or not to start the next set.

Further, the fifth AT has the end condition 2 that the loop lottery has not been won as described above, but this loop lottery is performed after the maximum number of acquisitions in the second AT has been exhausted. For example, in the second AT, when 310 cards are added to the maximum number of 1400 cards in the 500 games shown in FIG. 383, the final maximum number of cards that can be obtained is 1710, which is from the initial value of the fifth AT. Then, there are 210 more sheets, and 2 sets (200 sheets) + 10 sheets. In this case, the odd 10 sheets are also regarded as one set, and the total of 3 sets is the guaranteed number of sets for which the 5th AT is always performed. That is, the number of sets converted into the number of sets required to digest all the maximum number of acquisitions in the second AT (even less than 100 is treated as one set) becomes the guaranteed number of sets in the fifth AT (as described above, as described above). Since 1500 or more sheets are kept secret, the effect display device S40 does not notify them), so that the loop lottery is performed from the next set that reaches this number of sets. Here, if 2400 or more, which is the upper limit of the number of advantageous sections, has been acquired in the 2nd AT, the completion of the 5th AT is naturally confirmed.

In this way, in the second AT, when the upper limit acquisition number exceeds the threshold value (1500 sheets), the effect display device S40 keeps the acquisition upper limit number and the additional number of sheets secret, so that the player can see them. It is possible to entertain the second AT, which is an additional specialized state, as it is, without being aware of the upper limit of the advantageous section. Further, since the fifth AT that can be transferred only when the upper limit acquisition number exceeds the threshold value is provided, the effect that the acquisition upper limit number and the number of additional sheets are concealed is performed as it is in the effect display device S40. It also serves as an effect of notifying the transition to the 5th AT, and can provide a game that allows the player to enjoy how long the subsequent 5th AT will be continued.

In the present embodiment, the 4th AT is the AT for managing the number of games, and the 1st to 3rd ATs and the 5th AT are the ATs for managing the number of games. It can be set as appropriate. The same applies to the other embodiments described above.

<<<<<< 22nd Embodiment >>>>>
Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those of the above-described embodiments. Further, the 22nd embodiment mainly relates to various production modes by the effect display device S40, and is formally summarized as the 22nd embodiment, but the effect display device S40 in any of the above-described embodiments ( It can be applied to the effect display device S40 of the rotating drum type game machine P and the effect display device S40) of the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 140 and the like. In the present embodiment, an effect mode by the effect display device S40 of the rotating body type gaming machine P will be described as an example. Here, FIGS. 384 and 385 are image diagrams of the effect produced by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 22nd embodiment.

FIG. 384 shows an effect mode of the effect display device S40 at the time of the chance zone (CZ) described in the other embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 384, the effect image EG in the chance zone is displayed in the substantially center of the display unit of the effect display device S40, and the second predetermined area SR2 in the lower right of the display unit of the effect display device S40. Displays the number of points accumulated in the non-AT state (indicated as "777/1000" in the figure), and the number of staying games in the normal state (in the figure, the number of staying games in the third predetermined area SR3 in the lower left) is displayed. "250G") is displayed. Further, in the effect display device S40, on the left side of the virtual line CS1 passing through the center in the left-right direction, a band-shaped left specific display TH1 extending vertically is displayed in the vicinity of the left side S40L of the display unit of the effect display device S40. On the right side of the virtual line CS1, a band-shaped right specific display TH2 extending vertically is also displayed in the vicinity of the right side S40R of the display unit of the effect display device S40. In other words, the display unit of the effect display device S40 has a division area divided into two left and right with the virtual line CS1 as the center, and of these division areas, the left side on the left side of the virtual line CS1. The left specific display TH1 is displayed in the divided area, and the right specific display TH2 is displayed in the right divided area on the right side.

On the left specific display TH1, the characters of "chance zone" indicating that it is a chance zone are displayed, and the characters of this "chance zone" move from the bottom to the top (scroll up). It has become. Further, the character of "chance zone" similar to that of the left specific display TH2 is also displayed on the right specific display TH2, and the character of this "chance zone" is different from the character of "chance zone" of the left specific display TH2. The display mode is such that the characters move from the upper side to the lower side in the opposite direction (scroll down). The characters "chance zone" of the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 are not in the scrolling display mode as described above, but in a fixed display mode in which the characters do not move in any of the left, right, up, and down directions. Is also good. The same applies to the modifications 1 to 5 described later.

The upper end of the left specific display TH1 is located at a distance from the upper side S40U of the display unit of the effect display device S40, and the left end of the left specific display TH1 is located at a distance from the left side S40L. Further, the lower end of the left specific display TH1 is located at intervals with respect to the third predetermined area SR3 so as not to overlap with the third predetermined area SR3 displaying the number of staying games. In this way, the left specific display TH1 is displayed at a position retracted from the third predetermined area SR3 displaying game information such as the number of staying games (a position that does not overlap with the third predetermined area SR3). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of game information such as the number of staying games in the third predetermined area SR3 from being hindered.

On the other hand, the upper end of the right specific display TH2 is located adjacent to the upper side S40U, and the right end of the right specific display TH2 is located at a distance from the right side S40R of the display unit of the effect display device S40. Further, the lower end of the right specific display TH2 is located at intervals with respect to the second predetermined area SR2 so as not to overlap the second predetermined area SR2 displaying the number of points. In this way, the right specific display TH2 is also displayed at a position retracted from the second predetermined area SR2 displaying game information such as the number of points (a position that does not overlap with the second predetermined area SR2). , It is possible to prevent the visibility of the game information such as the number of points of the second predetermined area SR2 from being hindered.

In this chance zone, for example, when a rare role or the like is won, in the effect display device S40, as shown in FIG. 385, a character display CT accompanied by a dialogue display (comment display) SF of "chance !!" Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the character display CT is displayed (on the left side) on the left side S40L side in the left division area, overlaps the left specific display TH1, and is displayed with priority over the left specific display TH1. .. That is, the character display CT is displayed so as to be in front of the screen of the left specific display TH1. For example, when displaying various images on the effect display device S40 by superimposing a plurality of graphic layers, the character display CT is displayed on the graphic layer on the front side, and the left specific display TH1 is the graphic of the character display CT. It can be configured to be displayed on the graphic layer on the back side of the layer.

On the other hand, the dialogue display SF overlaps the effect image EG in the chance zone at a position so as to straddle the virtual line CS1, and is displayed with priority over the effect image EG. Similar to the character display CT, the dialogue display SF is also displayed with priority by displaying it on the graphic layer on the front side of the effect image EG. By doing so, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF are displayed on the front side facing the player, and are displayed without being hindered by the screen of the left specific display TH1 and the character display CT. And the dialogue display SF can be visually recognized by the player.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 385, the character display CT is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the left specific display TH1 so as to give priority to the left specific display TH2, but does not overlap with the right specific display TH2. Therefore, although some of the characters in the "chance zone" of the left specific display TH1 are blocked by the character display CT and difficult to read, the right display TH2 is not shielded by the character display CT at all. Become. By doing so, the player can easily confirm the current game situation with the characters of "chance zone" of the right specific display TH2. Further, in the present embodiment, the left specific display TH1 and the right specific display TH2 are displayed, and information such as the game state such as the same "chance zone" is displayed on the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2. Even if one of the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 is shielded by the character display CT or the dialogue display SF, the visibility of the other is not impaired. Therefore, as the display area of the character display CT and the dialogue display SF, it is possible to use a display area other than one of the left and right specific display TH1 and TH2 among all the display areas in the display unit of the effect display device S40. Therefore, the sizes of the character display CT and the dialogue display SF can be freely set within this range. As a result, while it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the size of the character display CT and the dialogue SF, it is possible to prevent the character display CT and / or the dialogue SF from impairing the visibility of the game information such as the "chance zone". can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the rare role or the like is won, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF as shown in FIG. 385 are performed at the timing such as after the start lever is pressed. The display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of these displays in a situation where the first stop button is not pressed after the start lever is pressed, and the state shown in FIG. 384 is obtained. It has become like. In this way, the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is erased after a predetermined time, so that the left specific display TH1 and the effect image EG shielded by the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF are erased. Since the visibility is not hindered, it is possible to easily confirm both the information by the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF and the information of the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 in the game in which the rare role or the like is won. can. In addition, by erasing the character display CT and the dialogue display SF with the passage of time, even if these shield both the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2, it is only necessary to wait for the passage of a predetermined time. Information such as the "chance zone" of the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 can be easily confirmed.

The erasure timing of the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is not limited to the above, and for example, the timing at which any of the first to last stop buttons is pressed after the start lever is pressed, and the medal insertion. After that, it may be deleted after pressing the bet button, or it may be deleted after a predetermined time has passed since any of the last to last stop buttons was pressed. If the player can easily recognize both the character display CT and the dialogue display SF and the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 in the game in which the rare role or the like is won, the erasure timing thereof. Can be set as appropriate. Further, as the erasing timing of the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF, for example, the erasing is not performed in the game in which the display of the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is started, but at an arbitrary timing of the game executed thereafter. It is also possible to do. In other words, the character display and / or the dialogue display SF may be displayed over a plurality of games. Further, the display start timing of the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is not limited to the timing after pressing the above-mentioned start lever, and for example, the timing at which any of the first to last stop buttons is pressed and the medal is inserted. After that, after pressing the bet button, or at the timing when the above-mentioned freeze effect is started or ended, the point is that the game is either started or in progress when the rare role or the like is won. It is possible to adopt an appropriate timing such as the timing of, the timing of the start or progress of the next game of the game, the start or end of a specific effect such as a freeze effect. This also applies to the modified examples 1 to 5 described later.

<Modification example 1>
Next, a modification 1 of the 22nd embodiment will be described. Subsequent modifications will be described focusing on the differences from the present embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified for the same parts as the present embodiment. Further, for each of the subsequent modifications, only the effects different from those of the present embodiment will be described, and the description of the effects similar to those of the present embodiment will be omitted. FIG. 386 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first modification of the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 386, the upper end, the left end, and the lower end of the left specific display TH1A according to the modification 1 are adjacent to the upper side S40U, the left side S40L, and the lower side S40D in the display unit of the effect display device S40, respectively, and relate to the modification 1. The upper end, right end, and lower end of the right specific display TH2A are adjacent to the upper side S40U, the right side S40R, and the lower side S40D in the display unit of the effect display device S40, respectively. In other words, the upper end, left end, and lower end of the left specific display TH1A are visually aligned with the upper side S40U, left side S40L, and lower side S40D, respectively, and the upper end, right end, and lower end of the right specific display TH2A are respectively. The upper side S40U, the right side S40R, and the lower side S40D are apparently coincident with each other. Therefore, it can be said that the left specific display TH1A is displayed at a position where the upper end, the left end, and the lower end coincide with the upper side S40U, the left side S40L, and the lower side S40D, respectively, and the right specific display TH2A has its upper end, right end, and lower end. Can be said to be displayed at positions corresponding to the upper side S40U, the right side S40R, and the lower side S40D, respectively.

Further, the left specific display TH1A is displayed between the left side S40L and the third predetermined area SR3, and the lower right end of the left specific display TH1A is positioned at a distance from the third predetermined area SR3. As a result, the lower part of the left specific display TH1A does not overlap with the third predetermined area SR3. On the other hand, the lower end of the right specific display TH2B overlaps the second predetermined area SR2, but the point number display of the second predetermined area SR3 is preferentially displayed over the right specific display TH2B. (For example, the right specific display TH2 is displayed on the graphic layer on the back side of the graphic layer for displaying the number of points).

Further, in the modified profit 1, the character display CT is displayed (on the right side) on the right side S40R side, overlaps the right specific display TH2A, and is displayed with priority over the right specific display TH2A. There is. Even in such a modified example 1, the same action and effect as those of the above-described present embodiment can be obtained.

<Modification 2>
FIG. 387 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the second modification of the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 387, the modification 2 is different from the present embodiment in that the strip-shaped upper specific display TH1B and the lower specific display TH2B extending to the left and right are displayed. That is, in the second modification, in the display unit of the effect display device S40, the upper specific display TH1B is in the upper upper division area of the virtual line CS2 passing through the center in the vertical direction, and the lower specific display TH2B is in the lower lower division area. Is displayed. The upper end and the left and right ends of the upper specific display TH1B are adjacent to the upper side S40U and the left and right sides S40L and S40R, respectively. Further, the left and right ends of the lower specific display TH2B are located at intervals with respect to the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3, respectively, and the lower ends of the lower specific display TH2B are located at intervals with respect to the lower side S40U. As a result, the lower specific display TH2B does not overlap with the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3.

In the second modification, the characters of the "chance zone" of the upper specific display TH1B are displayed in a display mode in which the characters move from the left to the right (scroll to the right). In this case, as shown in FIG. 387, the display unit of the effect display device S40 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and therefore extends to the left and right of the strip-shaped specific display TH1 extending vertically in the above-described embodiment. The band-shaped upper specific display TH1B has a larger display area. Therefore, in this modification 2, the characters of the two "chance zones" are scrolled to the right. In this case, as shown in FIG. 387, on the left side of the upper specific display TH1B, although it depends on the scroll position. There will be a situation where the characters "chance zone" are displayed in the part and the part on the right side, respectively.

Further, the character display CT is displayed on the left side S40L side. This character display CT is displayed between the upper and lower specific displays TH1B and TH2B and at a position that does not overlap with the specific displays TH1B and TH2B. Further, although the serif display SF does not overlap with the effect image EG as in the present embodiment, it overlaps with the upper specific display TH1B, and the serif display SF is preferentially displayed. Further, although the serif display SF overlaps the upper specific display TH1B, it overlaps the left part of the upper specific display TH1B and shields this part, but overlaps the right part of the upper specific display TH1B. do not have. Therefore, even if the serif display SF overlaps the upper specific display TH1B, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the characters of the "chance zone" from being hindered on the right side of the upper specific display TH1B.

<Modification example 3>
FIG. 388 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the third modification of the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 388, in the modification 3, the strip-shaped upper specific display TH1C extending diagonally downward to the right in the upper upper division area of the virtual line CS2 is displayed in the lower specific display TH2C in the lower lower division area of the virtual line CS2. Is displayed. That is, in the modification 3, the left end of the upper specific display TH1C is adjacent to the upper left corner of the display unit of the effect display device S40, and the right end of the upper specific display TH1C is the upper side S40U and the virtual line CS2 on the right side S40R. Adjacent to each other.

Further, the left end of the lower specific display TH2C is located on the left side S40L so as to be in contact with the third predetermined area SR3 and the virtual line CS2 and not to overlap the third predetermined area SR3. The right end is in contact with the lower right corner of the effect display device S40. The right end portion of the lower specific display TH2C overlaps the second predetermined area SR2, and the point display of the second predetermined area SR2 is preferentially displayed.

<Modification example 4>
FIG. 389 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the modified example 4 of the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 389, in the modified example 4, in the display unit of the effect display device S40, the bow-shaped plate-shaped upper specific display TH1D swelling upward is displayed in the upper division area on the upper side of the virtual line CS2, and the virtual line CS2 is displayed. In the lower division area on the lower side, a bow-shaped plate-shaped lower specific display TH2D that swells downward is displayed.

The upper ends of the upper specific display TH1D are located at intervals with respect to the upper side S40U, and the left and right ends of the upper specific display TH1D are located apart from the left side S40L and the right side S40R, respectively. The character "chance zone" of the upper specific display TH1D is in a display mode in which the characters move clockwise (clockwise scroll). Further, the lower ends of the lower specific display TH2D are located at intervals with respect to the lower side 40UD, and the left and right ends of the lower specific display TH2D are located apart from the left side S40L and the right side S40R, respectively. The left portion of the lower specific display TH2D is also separated from the third predetermined area SR3 so that the lower specific display TH2D does not overlap with the third predetermined area SR3. Although a part of the right part of the lower specific display TH2D overlaps with the second predetermined area SR2, the second predetermined area SR2 is preferentially displayed to ensure the visibility of the second predetermined area SR2. There is. The characters "chance zone" in the lower specific display TH2D move counterclockwise (counterclockwise scrolling) in a display mode.

In the modification 4, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF are displayed on the left side S40L side. The character display CT does not overlap with the effect image ED and the lower specific display TH2D, but overlaps with the upper specific display TH1D and is displayed preferentially over the upper specific display TH1D. Similarly, the dialogue display SF does not overlap with the effect image ED and the lower specific display TH2D, but overlaps with the upper specific display TH1D and is displayed preferentially over the upper specific display TH1D.

<Modification 5>
FIG. 390 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fifth modification of the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 390, in the modification 5, in the display unit of the effect display device S40, a bow-shaped plate-shaped left specific display TH1E swelling to the left is displayed on the left side of the virtual line CS1 and on the right side of the virtual line CS1. , A bow-shaped plate-shaped right specific display TH2E that swells to the right is displayed.

The upper and lower ends of the left specific display TH1E are located apart from the upper side S40U and the lower side S40D, and the left end of the left specific display TH1E is also located away from the left side S40L. The character "chance zone" of the left specific display TH1E is in a display mode in which the characters move clockwise (clockwise scroll). Further, the upper end and the lower end of the right specific display TH2E are located apart from the upper side S40U and the lower side S40UD, respectively, and the right end of the right specific display TH2D is also located away from the right side S40R. The character "chance zone" of the right specific display TH2E is in a display mode in which it moves counterclockwise (counterclockwise scrolling).

In the modification 5, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF are displayed on the right side S40R side. The character display CT and the dialogue display SF overlap the right specific display TH2E and are displayed with priority over the right specific display TH2E.

<Other variants>
Next, other modified examples will be described. In the following modified examples, the present embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 5 may be collectively referred to as "this example", and the specific indications TH1, TH2, TH1A, TH2A, TH1B, TH2B, respectively of this example. TH1C, TH2C, TH1D, TH2D, TH1E, and TH2E may be collectively referred to as "specific display".

In this example, in the effect display device S40, two regions, a left division region and a right division region of the virtual line CS1, are provided, but the left and right division regions of this type are not limited to two, but three. It may be divided into four or the like. Specifically, for example, between the virtual line CS1 and the left side S40L, the left and right regions (areas having a shape extending in a vertical direction) of the virtual line (not shown) passing through the center in the left-right direction are respectively. The first left division area and the second left division area are set in order from the left side, and the left and right areas (not shown) of the virtual line (not shown) passing through the center in the left-right direction between the virtual line CS1 and the right side S40R (vertical band shape). The regions having a shape extending from the left side to each other) may be divided into four divided regions at equal intervals, each of which is a first right divided region and a second right divided region in order from the left side. In this case, one of the four divided areas, such as displaying a specific display in each of the leftmost first left divided area and the rightmost second right divided area, A specific display may be displayed in each of the other divided areas. Further, these four divided areas are not limited to being evenly spaced from each other, and the width of one divided area in the left-right direction is wider than the width of the other divided areas in the left-right direction. As such, it does not have to be evenly spaced. For example, the width of the leftmost first left division area and the rightmost second right division area in the left-right direction, and the width of the second left division area and the first right division area intervening between them in the left-right direction. In this case, the display range of the second left division area and the first right division area (in other words, the area of the central portion in the left-right direction of the display unit of the effect display device S40) is widened. Therefore, the range of the effect display by the effect display device S40 can be widened, and the degree of freedom of the effect expression can be improved.

Further, in the effect display device S40, similarly, the upper division area and the lower division area with the virtual line CS2 as Sakai are further divided into two at equal intervals, and the first upper division area is sequentially divided from the top. And the second upper division area, and the lower division area is further divided into two at equal intervals to form four division areas, the first lower division area and the second lower division area, in order from the top. Specific display may be performed on each of the 1-division area and the 2nd lower division area at the bottom. In this case as well, these plurality of divided areas may be evenly spaced or not evenly spaced, and the width of the top first divided area and the bottom second lower divided area in the vertical direction. May be narrower than the vertical width of the second upper division region and the first lower division region interposed between them. Also in this case, since the display range of the central region in the vertical direction of the display unit of the effect display device S40 can be widened, the range of the effect display by the effect display device S40 can be widened. , The degree of freedom of production display can be improved.

Further, the display unit of the effect display device S40 is divided into four divided areas by the virtual line CS1 and the virtual line CS2: the upper left divided area, the lower left divided area, the upper right divided area, and the lower right divided area. , Of these, the specific display may be displayed in one divided area and the other divided area, respectively. The point is that the display unit of the effect display device S40 is divided into a plurality of divided areas, and a specific display is displayed in each of one of these divided areas and the other divided areas. The width and size of each divided area are not particularly limited, and the divided area in which the specific display is displayed can be appropriately set as the divided area.

In the above embodiment, the characters of the chance zone of the left specific display TH1 and the characters of the "chance zone" of the right specific display TH1 are scrolled in opposite directions, but instead of this, the characters of the left specific display TH1 The characters in the chance zone and the characters in the "chance zone" in the right specific display TH1 scroll in the same direction (both the characters in the "chance zone" in the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 scroll up or down. ) May be used, and the scroll direction is not particularly limited. The same applies to the scroll direction of the characters of the "chance zone" in the modified examples 1 to 5.

In this example, the characters of "chance zone" in the specific display have been explained by taking a scrolling pattern as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the characters of "chance zone" may rotate on the spot. , It may swing in any direction of up, down, left and right, reciprocate in a specific display, etc., and the dynamic mode of the character of "chance zone" is not particularly limited.

In this example, a single gaming state is displayed as "chance zone" in the specific display, but instead of this, in addition to the "chance zone" in the specific display, for example, a plurality of "high accuracy medium" is displayed. It is also possible to display the game status of. In short, it suffices if one or a plurality of pieces of information can be displayed by characters, symbols, images, or the like shown on the specific display so that the player can recognize the information.

Further, in the specific display, for example, in the case of the "chance zone", as described in this example, at least one of the chance display CT, the dialogue display SF, and the effect image EG is covered by one specific display. However, while ensuring the visibility of the "chance zone" by preventing these from covering other specific displays, in the case of "high accuracy", one specific display is used. In addition to the other specific display, a state in which at least one of the chance display CT, the dialogue display SF, and the effect image EG is covered may be allowed. The point is that if the information displayed on the specific display is important information that the player wants to recognize, visibility is ensured as described above, and if the information is less important than this, the visibility is guaranteed. According to the importance of information such as "chance zone" and "high accuracy medium" displayed on the specific display, such as not guaranteeing visibility, information that is targeted for guaranteeing visibility, It may be divided into information that is not so, and in the former case, visibility may be guaranteed, and in the latter case, visibility may not be guaranteed. Of course, in either case, visibility may be ensured.

In this example, the display of the "chance zone" was continued unchanged in the specific display, but instead of this, the characters of the "chance zone" are changed to other characters or symbols according to changes in the gaming state, etc. Or images may be changed. Specifically, taking FIG. 384 as an example, the characters "chance zone" are displayed on the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2. In this situation, for example, the start lever is pressed to describe the above. In the situation where a predetermined role such as "Replay with 7 reverse push whites" is won, the display of "Chance zone" is replaced with the display of an image of a left-pointing arrow such as "←" that encourages the player to push backward. After that, when the last stop button is pressed and "white 7" is aligned, the image of the arrow pointing to the left is switched to the display that notifies the game result such as "AT confirmed" and "bonus confirmed", and then , If the CZ continues, the display of the information by the specific display is such that the display of the "chance zone" is returned again at the timing of pressing the bet button of the next game of the game in which this predetermined combination is won. , It is possible to change at any time according to the change of the game state, and the mode of the change is not particularly limited.

It goes without saying that the shape of the specific display is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and various shapes can be applied. For example, in the modified examples 4 and 5, the bow-shaped plate-shaped specific display is applied, but instead of this, a ring-shaped specific display that is displayed straddling the virtual lines CS1 and CS2 may be used. .. In this case, as the display mode of the characters of the "chance zone" of the specific display, the display mode 1 and the upper side of the virtual line CS2 are simultaneously displayed in both the left split area on the left side and the right split area on the right side of the virtual line CS1. The display mode 2 or the display unit of the effect display device S40, which is simultaneously displayed in both the upper divided area and the lower lower divided area, is displayed by the virtual lines CS1 and CS2 in the upper left divided area, the upper right divided area, and the lower right. When four divided areas, a divided area and a lower left divided area, are set, the third aspect is displayed simultaneously in each divided area, and the fourth aspect is displayed simultaneously in at least two divided areas of each of the divided areas 3 of this aspect 3. And so on.

In the second modification, the left and right ends of the lower specific display TH2B are located at intervals with respect to the second and third predetermined regions SR2 and SR3, respectively, and the lower end of the lower specific display TH2B is spaced from the lower side S40U. Although it was located vacantly, instead of this, a part of the lower specific display TH2B may overlap with the second and third predetermined regions SR2 and SR3. In this case, the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 are displayed with priority over the lower specific display TH2B, as in the positional relationship between the right specific display TH2A and the second predetermined area SR2 shown in FIG. 386. I just need to be there. Further, at least one end of the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 and the end of the lower specific display TH2B (in the example shown in FIG. 378, the right end of the second predetermined area SR2 and the left end of the lower specific display TH2B, the third 3 The left end of the predetermined area SR3 and the right end of the lower specific display TH2B) may be adjacent to each other. In short, the specific display may not overlap with the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 (at least one end of the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 and the end of the specific display. The specific display may be displayed so as to overlap at least one of the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3, and the specific display and at least the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 may be displayed. In the case of overlapping on one side, the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 may be displayed with priority over the specific display.

In this example, the effect image EG is illustrated as the effect performed by the effect display device S40, but the effect is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that the effect illustrated in each of the above-described embodiments may be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 262, there is an example in which the effect image of the push order navigation such as "2, 1, 3" is displayed, and the effect image of the push order navigation and the specific display are displayed at the same time. In this case, the effect image of the push order navigation and the specific display may not overlap, or the specific display may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the effect image of the push order navigation. When this specific display is displayed so as to overlap the effect image of the push order navigation, the effect image of the push order navigation overlaps with one specific display among the plurality of specific displays, and the push order is overlapped with the other specific display. While preventing the navigation effect images from overlapping, the push order navigation effect image may be displayed with priority over the specific display.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 262, in the effect image of the push order navigation of "2, 1, 3", the display area of "1" corresponding to the stop button to be pressed first is another "2" or It may be enlarged and displayed so that it is larger than "3". In this case, the enlarged display area of "1" may be a range that does not overlap with the specific display, or may be a range that overlaps. Here, in a situation where the effect image of the push order navigation does not overlap the specific display, when the above "1" is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 262, the enlarged displayed "1" is specified. It may overlap with the display (displaying with priority given to the enlarged "1" over the specific display), or it may not overlap (in other words, the enlarged range of "1" is specified. It may be set so that it does not overlap with). In this case, it goes without saying that the other "2" and "3" that are not enlarged are not overlapped with the specific display.

In this example, the effect image EG is displayed at a position that does not overlap the specific display, but the effect image EG may be displayed so as to overlap the specific display. In this case, the specific display may be displayed with priority over the effect image EG, or the effect image EG may be displayed with priority over the specific display. Further, when the effect image EG is displayed with priority over the specific display, for example, taking the present embodiment as an example, the effect image EG has priority over the left specific display TH1 of the present embodiment and is left. The effect image EG does not overlap the right specific display TH2 while overlapping the specific display TH1 so that the effect image EG overlaps one of the left and right specific display TH1 and TH2 and does not overlap the other. By doing so, the visibility of the other of the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 may not be hindered. This also applies to the other modifications 1 to 5.

In this example, only an image such as an effect image EG is displayed on the effect display device S40, but in addition to this, in the effect display device S40, a retracted position retracted from the front side of the display unit and this An effect display device S40 having a movable accessory capable of advancing and retreating from the retracted position to the advancing position so as to cover the front side of the display unit may be used. In this case, the movable range of the movable accessory may be a range that does not cover the specific display, or a range that covers one of the plurality of specific displays and does not cover the other specific displays. It has the same effect as the example. Further, in the movable accessory, the movable accessory swings up, down, left, right, etc. from the retracted position to the advanced position, or moves while vibrating so as to reciprocate between the retracted position and the advanced position. Display of the effect display device S40 when moving with a predetermined operation, or when performing an operation from the retracted position which is the home position (initial position) to the advanced position which is the maximum position in the movable accessory. In the section, an effect image that emphasizes or makes the movement of the movable accessory stand out may be displayed, such as displaying an image of a flame or a moving image around the movable accessory. In this case, the effect image may be displayed with priority over the specific display, or may be displayed in an area that does not overlap the specific display. Further, the movable accessory is stately located on the front side of the display unit of the effect display device S40, and may rotate at this position or reciprocate from this position in a predetermined direction such as up, down, left, or right. The same applies to the specifications as described above.

In this example, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF are displayed at the time of the rare role, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the character display CT may be displayed normally even from the normal time. It may be displayed normally in a specific gaming state. It should be noted that a plurality of types of the character display CT may be provided, and the player may select a favorite character display from among these by operating the sub input button SB or the like. Further, a plurality of types of character display CT and dialogue display SF are provided. For example, when a bell or replay is established, character display CT and / or dialogue display SF corresponding to the bell or replay is performed, and a rare combination is established. If so, the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF corresponding to the rare combination may be performed. Furthermore, if there is a weak rare role with a low probability of a transition lottery to an advantageous state such as AT due to the winning, and a strong rare role with a higher probability of the transition lottery than this weak rare role as a rare role. , Character display CT and / or dialogue display SF corresponding to each of these weak rare and strong rare roles may be performed. The point is that the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF corresponding to the winning combination may be performed, and the mode thereof is not particularly limited. Specifically, the content of the dialogue display SF is different, the color of the dialogue telop is different, or the display area of the dialogue display SF is configured depending on whether the bell is established or the rare role is established. The color of the frame and / or the color of the telop may be different. This also applies to the relationship between the weak rare role and the strong rare role. Further, the above-mentioned weak rare role and strong rare role are examples in the case of a rotating body type gaming machine, but if this is replaced with a pachinko gaming machine, for example, the jackpot expectation is relatively high for the weak rare role. A low effect, a variable display mode, etc. correspond, and for a strong rare role, an effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation, a variable display mode, etc. correspond.

Further, when the specific display and the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF (hereinafter referred to as the effect display, etc.) have a positional relationship, for example, the specific display and the effect display have the first positional relationship, the first Suggests (notifies) the internal state of the above, and suggests (notifies) the second internal situation when it is in the second positional relationship. You may try to do it. For example, taking modification 4 as an example, in FIG. 389, the positional relationship between the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D and the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is between the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D. , Character display CT and dialogue display SF intervene, and a part of character display CT and dialogue display SF is covered by the upper specific display TH1D. / Or a positional relationship 2 is provided in which the dialogue display SF does not cover the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D and is interposed between the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D. 2. In the case of a strong rare role, it is possible to suggest an internal state such as whether it is a weak rare role or a strong rare role by setting the positional relationship to 1.

In the above embodiment, the character display CT is superimposed on the left specific display TH1 at the time of the rare role, but instead of this, for example, the state 1 in which the transition of the advantageous state such as AT or bonus is decided. (Specifically, the game in which the AT or bonus is won, the state during the activation period after the AT is won until the AT is activated, the state during the latent period of the AT or bonus described above, and the bonus are carried over. When there is a state 2 in which the transition to an advantageous state such as AT or bonus is not decided, the character display CT is changed to the left specific display TH1 in the state 1 than in the state 2. The overlap frequency may be increased to suggest to the player the possibility of transition to the advantageous state depending on whether or not the character display CT overlaps with the left specific display TH1. In short, the internal state or the like may be suggested depending on whether or not the character display CT overlaps with the specific display TH1. The same applies to the dialogue display SF and the modified examples 1 to 5. In addition to the state in which the transition to the advantageous state is decided, the above-mentioned state 1 is, for example, the precursor state in which the transition to the AT is decided as a precursor state that fuels the transition to the AT before the transition to the AT or the like. The state may be set to a gaze precursor state in which the transition to AT is not made as the above state 2. The point is that the state 1 is advantageous to the player, and the state 2 is more disadvantageous to the player than this state 1. For example, the game in which the above-mentioned CZ is won. Alternatively, the state during the activation period from the winning of the CZ to the activation of the CZ may be set to the state 1, and the state of not winning the CZ may be set to the state 2.

In this example, the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is displayed with priority over the specific display, and the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 are displayed with priority over the specific display. However, for example, the second and third predetermined areas SR2, SR3> character display CT> specific display> dialogue display SF> effect image EG (for inequality, display priority is shown, and the priority is indicated by ">". ”), The specific display is displayed with priority over the dialogue display SF, or the second and third predetermined areas SR2, SR3> dialogue display SF> specific display> character display CT> effect image EG. As a result, the specific display is displayed with priority over the character display CT, or as the second and third predetermined areas SR2, SR3> character display CT> specific display> effect image> character display CT. The image may be prioritized over the character display CT. In short, the priority of these displays can be set as appropriate within the range in which the visibility of specific displays can be guaranteed. Further, it is of course possible to suggest or notify the internal situation by changing the priority of these displays according to the internal situation.

Further, as for the mode of each specific display, there are those of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 384 and the modified examples 1 to 5 shown in FIGS. 386 to 390. For example, the right specific display shown in FIG. 384. A combination of TH2 and the lower specific display TH2B shown in FIG. 387, or a combination of the left and right specific displays TH1A and TH2B shown in FIG. 386 and the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D of FIG. 389, etc. The combination of specific displays in the example can be set as appropriate. Further, any one of the present examples shown in FIGS. 384 to 390 may be executed depending on the game state. For example, in the game state A, the game state may be notified to the player in the mode of FIG. 386, and in the game state B, the game state may be notified to the player in the mode of FIG. 388. That is, among the specific displays shown in FIGS. 384 to 390, one specific display is associated with one gaming state, and the other specific display is associated with another gaming state. , The specific display may be displayed by associating any specific display with the player to notify the player of the game state. In this case, one game state may be associated with one game state in a one-to-one relationship such as one specific display, or one game state may be associated with a plurality of specific displays in a one-to-many relationship. You may be.

In this example, the character display and / or the dialogue display SF is deleted when the time elapses or the game ends (after the final stop (third) operation of the stop switch), but the pattern of the time elapse is For example, when the advantageous state such as AT or bonus is not confirmed 1, the character display and / or the dialogue display SF is erased with the passage of time, while when it is confirmed 2, the character display is displayed. And / or the dialogue display SF is prevented from being erased over time, or the time until the character display and / or the dialogue display SF is erased differs between the above case 1 and the case 2 (for example, case 2). In case 1, the time is longer than 1 etc.). Similarly, regarding the pattern at the end of the game, for example, in the above case 1, the character display and / or the dialogue display SF is deleted at the end of the game, while in the above case 2, the character display and / or the character display and / or The dialogue display SF may not be erased at the end of the game. The point is that the internal situation may be suggested by the time lapse of the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF, the presence or absence of erasure at the end of the game, the length of the display time, etc., and the character display according to the internal state. Whether or not the CT and / or the dialogue display SF is erased and the display time can be appropriately set. The timing of erasing the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is not limited to the display time or the end of the game, and is arbitrary, such as when a plurality of games are completed or when the game state changes. It can be set to the timing.

In this example, the character "chance zone" indicating that it is a chance zone is displayed on the specific display, but instead of this, for example, the above-mentioned indicating that the winning probability of AT or CZ is high. The characters "high accuracy" may be displayed, or symbols may be displayed instead of characters, or images such as characters may be displayed. The information used in the specific display includes characters and symbols. And the type of image are not particularly limited. In addition to the above, the characters and images displayed on the specific display include characters and images such as "during demonstration" indicating that the demonstration is in progress, and "additional high accuracy" indicating that the addition of AT is highly probable. Characters and images such as, characters and images such as "specialized zone" indicating that AT is in a specialized state, characters and images such as "in bonus" indicating that a bonus is in progress, for multiple productions in the normal state If there is a stage, characters and images such as "○○ stage" that informs the stay stage, characters and images such as "precursor" that informs that it is in a precursor state, etc. Characters and images corresponding to the display for notifying the internal state of the game machine are listed, and other characters and images corresponding to the display for notifying information about the game machine such as the model name and specifications of the game machine, today's bonus Characters and images corresponding to the display for notifying information about the game history such as the number of times the game was won or the number of times the AT was won, and "Thank you for visiting us today" during or after the game in an advantageous game state (AT, BB). Displaying a message for the player and displaying characters, images, and symbols corresponding to the immersive prevention display to prevent the above-mentioned immersiveness such as "Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately" can also be mentioned. ..

In this example, the number of games is displayed in the second predetermined area SR2 and the number of points is displayed in the third predetermined area SR3, but the ones displayed in the second predetermined area SR2 and the third predetermined area SR3 are displayed. , Not limited to these. Specific examples of what is displayed include the above-mentioned icons exemplified in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the number of game medals acquired in an advantageous state such as AT and bonus, the number of games staying in AT and bonus, and the number of additional ATs. It may be game-related information such as (the number of additional sets, the number of additional games, the number of additional villas), the number of consecutive villas in an advantageous state of AT and bonus, etc., the name of the production mode, the content information of the above-mentioned character customization, and the volume adjustment. Alternatively, it may be non-game-related information (production-related information) such as information on fragrance adjustment, or game operation information (game operation information) such as display of the number of credits, display of the number of bets, display of the number of payouts by small wins, etc. ), And information about the game and other information can be displayed. Further, these pieces of information were displayed in the second predetermined area and the third predetermined area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first area SR1 (see, for example, FIG. 293) and the like are the same as in the 16th embodiment. You may do it. In short, it is sufficient that the display is displayed in a part of the entire display area of the effect display device S40, and the arrangement location is not particularly limited.

In this example, the effect display device S40 of the rotating drum type game machine has been described as an example, but as described above, it is applied to the effect display device S40 of the pachinko game machine (see, for example, FIG. 140). Even in this case, the same effects as those of the present embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 5 described above can be obtained.

Specifically, when applied to the effect display device S40 of a pachinko gaming machine, the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 of the present embodiment indicate, for example, a "chance zone" that suggests that the time is shortened or the probability is changed. , "Chance time" and other characters and images, "Time saving" to indicate that the time is being shortened, "Probability changing" and "Highly probable" to indicate that the time is being changed, and "In reach" This state is suggested when the character or image of "reach" indicating that there is, the character or image of "big hit" indicating that the jackpot is in progress, or the look-ahead effect with high expectation of the jackpot is selected by the hold look-ahead. Notifies the internal state, etc., such as characters and images such as "○○ zone", characters such as "during demonstration" and "○○ stage" similar to the above-mentioned spinning machine, and images corresponding to them. In addition to this, the characters and images corresponding to the display of the error status, and the display of the distinction (for example, the situation where the right-handed stroke should be made and the situation where the left-handed stroke should be made are displayed. Characters and images corresponding to (displaying left-pointing arrows, right-pointing arrows, etc.), or games such as "sweet digital", "middle", and "1/99" Characters and images showing the specifications of the machine, characters and images corresponding to the model name of the pachinko machine, displaying a message for the player such as "Thank you for visiting us today", and "Playing with pachinko moderately enjoyable" There are also characters and images for preventing the above-mentioned denting, such as "is." The same applies to each specific display according to the modified examples 1 to 5.

Further, as the display contents related to the second predetermined area SR2 and the third predetermined area SR3 in the effect display device S40 of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated (the number of execution rounds in the big hit). Error status, number of balls on hold for normal symbol display (current number of balls on hold for auxiliary game displayed on auxiliary game symbol display device H20) and number of balls on hold for special symbol display (first main game symbol display device A20) Alternatively, characters and images corresponding to the current number of balls on hold for the main game displayed on the second main game symbol display device B20) can be mentioned, and other game histories such as today's jackpot and the number of times the probability change is continued are related. Characters and images corresponding to the information, characters and images such as "3 consecutive villas" displaying the number of jackpots, and characters and images corresponding to the number of balls acquired after the jackpot are completed can also be mentioned.

(summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation (superimposition) of these listed concepts, but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

(23rd Embodiment)
Next, the 23rd embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those of the above-described embodiments. The 23rd embodiment can be appropriately applied to other embodiments. In addition, although the example is given with a rotating drum type gaming machine, it should be added that it can be appropriately implemented with a pachinko gaming machine.

In the 23rd embodiment, a button operation promotion effect for encouraging the operation of the sub-input button (effect button) SB will be described.

FIG. 391 is an image diagram showing an example in a production in which a story progresses each time a reel is stopped in one game (one game story production).

First, one game story production is started by operating the start lever D50, and the characters "Win the rock-paper-scissors !!" are displayed in the center of the production display device S40.

Next, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 for stopping the left reel M51 is operated (the gaming machine accepts the pressing of the left stop button D41), so that one game story production progresses by one step. Then, the characters "Jan!" Are displayed in the center of the effect display device S40.

Next, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 for stopping the middle reel M52 is operated (the gaming machine accepts the pressing of the middle stop button D42), so that one game story production progresses by one step. Then, the characters "Ken!" Are displayed in the center of the effect display device S40.

Next, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 for stopping the right reel M53 is operated (the gaming machine accepts the pressing of the right stop button D43), so that one game story production progresses by one step. Then, the characters "Pon!" Are displayed in the center of the effect display device S40.

After the characters "Pon!" Are displayed on the effect display device S40, a button operation promotion effect for prompting the player to operate the sub-input button SB is performed in order to notify the result of the one-game story effect. Even if the bet processing (bet processing by the operation of the bet button D220, the bet processing by the operation of the bet button, and the bet processing by the automatic bet) is performed while the button operation promotion effect is displayed, the button operation is performed. I try to maintain the display of the promotion effect. Further, if the start lever D50 is operated while the button operation promotion effect is displayed and the next game is started, the display of the button operation promotion effect is stopped and a new operation based on the operation of the start lever D50 is performed. The production is feasible.

The button operation promotion effect is "sub-input button light emission" in which the LED provided on the sub-input button SB emits light, and "button image display (button image)" in which a button image imitating the sub-input button SB is displayed on the effect display device S40. The light emitting mode of the display may be a lighting mode / blinking mode. Further, an effect may be displayed around the button image display to be a lighting mode / blinking mode.) ”, The sub-input button SB is operated on the effect display device S40. It is provided with a "button operation character display" that directly suggests what should be done by characters or the like (in FIG. 391, it is expressed as "press a button!").

The light emitting mode of the button image display is a mode for making the button image imitating the sub input button SB appear to be shining, and the lighting mode is, for example, displaying the button image so as to shine (relatively displaying the button image). The blinking mode is, for example, displaying the button image so that it shines (displaying the button image relatively brightly, displaying white as the base color, etc.). That it is displayed as the keynote, etc.) and that the button image is displayed so that it is not shining (the button image is displayed relatively dark, gray is displayed as the keynote, etc.). Indicates that it repeats alternately.

Here, as the button operation promotion effect, all of the sub-input button light emission, the button image display, and the button operation character display are performed. The button image display is in a lighting mode.

As shown in FIG. 391, the size of the button image (display area) is configured to be larger than the size of the sub-input button SB (area of the player operating surface). Here, the player operation surface of the sub-input button SB is a surface that the player touches when operating (pressing) the sub-input button SB. The player operation surface may be the upper surface of the sub input button SB, or may be the surface having the largest area of the sub input button SB.

Next, when the player does not operate the sub-input button SB, the lighting mode of the button image display continues (does not change), but the sub-input button light emission is in the blinking mode. That is, the light emitting mode of the button image display (lighting mode, blinking mode, etc.) and the light emitting mode of the sub input button light emission (lighting mode, blinking mode, etc.) until the sub-input button SB is operated by the player are different. When the button operation promotion effect is displayed, the introduction sound is output before the sub-input button SB is enabled, and after the introduction sound ends (the sub-input button SB is disabled as the output time of the introduction sound). The player is made aware of the operation of the sub-input button SB by making the sound silent from (the time when the sub-input button SB is enabled at the end) to the operation of the sub-input button SB. It is configured as follows.

Next, when the sub-input button SB is operated by the player, the result of the one-game story production is displayed. Here, since the result of the lottery (role lottery, AT lottery, etc.) was a hit, the button image display displayed on the effect display device S40 is deleted without any effect immediately after the operation of the sub input button SB is accepted. Then, the characters "victory!" And the image of the peace sign are displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, in FIG. 391, the light emitting mode of the sub input button SB when the character "victory!" And the image of the peace sign are displayed on the effect display device S40 is turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the characters "victory!" And the image of the peace sign are displayed on the effect display device S40, it is conceivable that the sub-input button SB is lit in a rainbow mode. If the lottery result is incorrect, an effect for erasing the button image display displayed on the effect display device S40 is displayed immediately after the operation of the sub input button SB is accepted, and the effect display device S40 is displayed as " It is conceivable that the characters "defeated?" Are displayed and the sub-input button SB is turned off. With this configuration, it is possible to make the success effect stand out by immediately deleting the button image display at the time of success, and at the time of failure, the sub input button SB is deleted by deleting the button image display with the failure effect. It is possible to make the player understand that the result of the operation is different. Further, when the sub-input button SB is repeatedly hit, it is conceivable that the effect mode is the same as the state in which the sub-input button SB is automatically repeatedly hit while being continuously pressed (so-called auto-continuous hit). In this case, the sub-input button light emission may be turned off while the sub-input button SB is continuously pressed, or may be set to blink in accordance with the continuous striking effect.

Next, the effect generated by the above-described configuration will be described.
1. 1. The size of the button image (display area) is larger than the size of the sub-input button SB (area of the player's operation surface). With this configuration, the effect display device S40 operates the sub-input button SB for the player. It is possible to clearly inform what should be done. The size of the button image in the effect display device S40 may be the size of the entire image of the sub-input button SB including the effect image or the like, or the size of the display area of the button image related to the player operation surface. ..
2. The light emitting mode of the button image display and the light emitting mode of the sub input button light emission until the sub input button SB is operated by the player are different. With this configuration, the player is looking at either the effect display device S40 or the sub input button SB. Even in this case, it is possible to recognize that the sub input button SB should be operated. Further, by clarifying the button image display displayed on the effect display device S40 mainly visually recognized by the player, it is possible to prevent the display suggesting the operation from being overlooked and forgetting to operate the sub input button SB. Can be done. Further, in general, the sub-input button SB emits light by the LED inside the sub-input button SB, and the surroundings of the sub-input button SB do not emit light, while the button image display is an effect display that constantly emits light. It is displayed on a part of the display unit of the device S40, and the button image display itself is emitting light, and the screen around the button image display is also emitting light. Due to this difference in environment, the button image display is brighter than the sub-input button SB (the sub-input button SB is relatively darker than the button image display). Here, by blinking the relatively dark sub-input button SB, the sub-input button SB is made to stand out and catches the player's eyes, and the relatively bright button image display is kept lit for the button image display as well. By making the sub-input button SB and the button image display blink and light in a manner suitable for each of the above environments, such as to attract the attention of the person, an effect suitable for each environment can be obtained. It can be created, and the distinction between the sub-input button SB and the button image display can be clarified. Further, when the surroundings of the sub-input button SB are emitting light, the light emitting modes of the LEDs of the sub-input button SB and the LEDs around the sub-input button SB are different (for example, the emission colors are different). Therefore, the player can be differentiated so that he / she can visually recognize that the sub-input button SB should be operated, and it can be shown that the sub-input button SB is effective. As described above, even when the surroundings of the sub-input button SB are relatively bright, it can be shown that the sub-input button SB is effective by appropriately changing the light emitting mode of the LED of the sub-input button SB. ..

(Supplement / change example)
It is preferable that the display position of the button image display on the effect display device S40 has the same relationship as the installation position of the sub input button SB. For example, if the sub input button SB is provided in the substantially center (center in the left-right direction) of the gaming machine main body, the button image display is also displayed in the substantially center (center in the left-right direction) of the display area of the effect display device S40. If the sub-input button SB is provided to the right of the center of the gaming machine main body, the button image display is also displayed to the right of the center of the display area of the effect display device S40. With this configuration, it is possible to intuitively recognize the position where the sub-input button SB is provided, and even in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of operating members, the player does not make a mistake. The sub input button SB can be operated. In the above, the relationship between the position where the sub input button SB is provided and the display position of the button image display in the left-right direction has been described in detail, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly, the effect display device S40 is also used in the up-down direction. The display position of the button image display in the above and the installation position of the sub-input button SB may be configured to have the same relationship.

The difference between the lighting mode (blinking mode) of the button image display and the lighting mode (blinking mode) of the sub-input button light emission may be the difference in blinking speed (blinking cycle), lighting / blinking brightness, and the like. For example, the blinking speed of the button image display is faster or slower than the blinking speed of the LED of the sub-input button SB (the blinking cycle of the button image display is shorter or longer than the blinking cycle of the LED of the sub-input button SB). The button image display is relatively bright, but the LED of the sub-input button SB is relatively dark. With this configuration, it is possible to make the button image display displayed on the effect display device S40 stand out.

The first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation are not limited to the illustrated order, and even if the stop operations are performed in different orders, one game story production is performed each time the reel stop operation is performed. To proceed.

The sub-input button SB is independent of other buttons and does not need to be provided separately, and a button controlled by the main control board M is used as a sub-input button (a sub-input button is used as a button controlled by the main control board M). It is also possible to have a similar role). For example, the bet button D220 functions as a bet button at the time of betting operation before the start of the game, but functions as a sub input button at the time of button operation after the start of the game (when the button operation promotion effect is performed in the above example). do. In order for the player to easily recognize which function is currently used, the light emitting mode of the LED provided on the bet button D220 is displayed when the bet button is functioning and when the sub input button is functioning. It may be different or the emission color may be different. For example, it may be lit at all times when it functions as a bet button, blinking when it functions as a sub-input button, lit in red when it functions as a bet button, and lit in green when it functions as a sub-input button. .. The bet button and the sub input button are not limited to be used together, and the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) may also have the function of the sub input button.

The size of the button image may be, for example, the same as that of the sub-input button SB, or may be smaller than that of the sub-input button SB. Further, the button operation character display only needs to be able to recognize that the sub input button SB should be operated together with the button image display, and among the "press the button!" Shown in FIG. 391, the character "button". There may be only the characters and symbols of "press!". Further, an image imitating a finger may be displayed together with the display of the button image so that the player can recognize that the button is operated.

(End timing of button operation promotion effect)
In FIG. 391, as soon as the player operates the sub-input button SB, the button operation promotion effect (sub-input button light emission, button image display, button operation character display) is terminated, and the result display of one game story effect is performed. There is.

The button operation promotion effect (for example, a button image display imitating the sub input button SB) is a display that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB, and since the player is interested in the subsequent effect, the sub input button SB By ending the button operation promotion effect as soon as possible after operating, the subsequent effect can be made conspicuous.

When the player performs a button operation (stop button D40), such as when deleting the navigation image when the push order is correct (see FIG. 395), an effect or the like is generated and the navigation image is deleted immediately. It may not be done. Compared with such a case, it can be said that the erasing time of the button image display prompting the operation of the sub input button SB is shorter than the erasing time of the navigation image when the pressing order is correct.

Further, when the pressing order is incorrect, the navigation image may be deleted immediately without the effect occurring, or the navigation image may not be deleted immediately after the effect is generated as in the case of the correct pressing order. It may be configured. In other words, it is possible that the erase time of the button image display and the erase time of the navigation image when the pressing order is incorrect are the same (almost the same), or the erase time of the button image display is pressed in an irregular order. It is also possible to make the configuration shorter than the erasing time of the navigation image at the time of the correct answer.

Since the image displayed on the effect display device S40 is configured to be erased when the operation members such as the bet button D220 and the start lever D50 are operated to start the next game, these operation members are erased. It is erased as soon as it is operated. That is, it can be said that the erasing time when the sub-input button SB is operated to erase the button image display and the erasing time when the operating member is operated to erase the displayed image are the same (substantially the same). ..

Note that the erasing time when the sub-input button SB is operated to erase the button image display and the erasing time when the operating member is operated to erase the displayed image are substantially the same, for example, the main control. It includes a deviation of one or several cycles (for example, one cycle) of the timer interrupt processing of the board M. Specifically, when the sub-input button SB is operated, the sub-control board S determines that the sub-input button SB has been operated and erases the button image, so that the processing can be performed in a short time. On the other hand, when the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M determines that the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 has been operated, and issues a command to that effect to the sub control board S. Since the sub-control board S erases the button image after receiving the command, it takes some time to erase the button image. The erasing time when the sub-input button SB is operated to erase the button image display and the erasing time when the operating member is operated to erase the displayed image are substantially the same because of the difference in these processes. Includes differences.

Here, if the result of the lottery (role lottery, AT lottery, etc.) is a hit, the button effect image is immediately deleted when the sub input button SB is operated, while the lottery (role lottery, AT lottery, etc.) ) If the result is lost, for example, when the sub input button SB is operated, characters such as "defeat !?" are displayed on the effect display device S40, and the button image is erased with the effect. There are times. In the latter case, since the button image is erased together with the effect, the display time of the button image display may be longer than in the former case. In the latter case, the erasing time of the button image display should be shorter than the erasing time of the navigation image when the pressing order is correct, and should be the same (approximately the same) as the erasing time of the navigation image when the pressing order is incorrect. You can also. Further, in the latter case, the erasing time of the button image display can be configured to be longer than the erasing time of the navigation image when the pressing order is incorrect. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player understand that the display indicating the loss is displayed as a result of operating the sub input button SB.

(Aspect of button operation promotion effect to promote button operation)
Next, FIG. 392 is a diagram showing another aspect for promoting the operation of the sub-input button SB by the button operation promotion effect described with reference to FIG. 391.

This is the same as in FIG. 391 until the third stop operation is performed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

When the third stop operation (here, the operation of the right stop button D43) is performed, the button operation promotion effect is performed. Here, as the sub-input button light emission, the light emission mode of the LED provided on the sub-input button SB is the lighting mode, and as the button image display, an image imitating the sub-input button SB is raised upward ( The character "Press the button!" Is displayed as the button operation character display on which the non-pressed button image) is displayed.

Next, when the player does not operate the sub-input button SB, the button image display displays an image in which an image imitating the sub-input button SB is lowered downward (button image when pressed). In this way, the button image display is the display and sub-input of an image (button image when not pressed) in which an image imitating the sub-input button SB is raised upward until the player operates the sub-input button SB. The display of the image in which the image imitating the button SB is lowered downward (the button image when not pressed) is displayed alternately. That is, a display imitating the pressing operation (pressing mode) of the sub input button SB is repeatedly displayed.

Until the sub-input button SB is operated, the sub-input button light emission continues to be lit, and the button operation character display continues to display the characters "Press the button!".

In addition, in the sub-input button SB, the mode suggesting the up-and-down operation similar to the button image display is not executed. In other words, the sub-input button SB does not suggest an operation by repeatedly moving up and down. However, the vibration driven by the solenoid may be made feasible by the vibration effect of the sub input button SB. In this case, when the pressing operation by displaying the button image is repeatedly displayed and the sub input button SB has not been operated yet, the sub input button SB does not vibrate, but the pressing operation by displaying the button image. Is displayed repeatedly, and when the sub-input button SB is operated, the sub-input button SB operates so as to vibrate up and down for a certain period of time.

By repeatedly displaying the pressing operation by displaying the button image, it is possible to clearly prompt the player to operate the sub-input button SB without using a large display area of the effect display device S40. Further, since it is not necessary to use a large display area of the effect display device S40, the operation of pressing the sub input button SB is performed for another effect display other than the button image display such as the character display of "press the button!". It is possible to prevent the imitated display from being covered, and it is possible to prevent the display imitating the pressing operation of the sub-input button SB from interfering with other effect displays.

(Visibility of background image)
Next, FIG. 393 is another diagram showing the visibility of the image displayed on the effect display device S40 when the button operation promotion effect described with reference to FIG. 391 is performed.

In FIG. 391, when the button operation promotion effect is performed, the button image display and the button operation character display displayed on the effect display device S40 are displayed on the front side of the background image “Pon!”. The visibility of the button image display and the button operation character display is higher than the visibility of the background image "Pon!", But the brightness of the button image display and the button operation character display and the brightness of the background image are They are about the same, or each is simply displayed with a preset brightness.

In order to improve the visibility of the button image display and the button operation character display, when the button image display and the button operation character display are performed on the effect display device S40, the background image is darkened to reduce the visibility of the background image. The button image display and the button operation character display may be configured to have high visibility.

For example, as a method of darkening the background image, there is a method of displaying a semi-transparent texture on the front side of the "Pon!" Image of the background image and on the back side of the button image display and the button operation character display. The background image may be unrecognizable due to the opaque black texture (background blackout).

Further, by whitening the background (whiteout of the background), the background image may be regarded as unrecognizable so that the visibility of the button image display and the button operation character display may be improved.

With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the sub-input button SB should be operated in the effect display device S40.

The sub-input button light emission may be in a blinking mode or a lighting mode as in FIG. 391.

(Visibility of background image and game progress display)
FIG. 394 is a diagram showing a case where the game progress status is displayed.

The game progress display is also referred to as a UI (user interface) display, and is a display of the number of acquired cards that displays bonuses and the number of payouts in AT, the number of bonus games, the number of AT games, the number of points used for games, and the normal game state game. Numbers, mini character display, etc. are included.

As can be seen from the figures showing the first stop operation to the third stop operation, the game progress status display (here, the acquired number display and the number of AT games are displayed) is in front of the background image in the effect display device S40. Since it is displayed on the side layer, the game progress display is configured to be more visible than the background image. That is, when the game progress status display and the background image are displayed in duplicate, the game progress status display is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it.

Further, even after the third stop operation, the button operation promotion effect (button image display and button operation character display) is performed and the visibility of the background image is lowered (a semi-transparent texture is displayed). Even in this case, the visibility of the game progress display is displayed without deterioration. That is, the game progress display is displayed on the frontmost layer. It goes without saying that the game progress display may be displayed at least on the layer on the front side of the button image display and the button operation display, and the layer on which the game progress is displayed is not particularly limited.

In other words, the button image display and the button operation character display are more visible than a part of the image (for example, the background image) displayed on the effect display device S40, while being displayed on the effect display device S40. It is configured to be less visible than some other images (eg, game progress display).

In this way, the button image display and the button operation character display should be displayed so as to be as visible to the player as possible, and should be displayed with priority in order to encourage the player to operate the sub-input button SB. .. However, since the display showing the progress of the game (game progress display) is related to the interests of the player, it is displayed with higher priority than the button image display and the button operation character display.

(Erase timing of displayed image)
FIG. 395 is a diagram showing an erasing time of an image displayed on the effect display device S40. Since a part of FIG. 395 has already been described, the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 395 (A) is a diagram showing a case where the player operates the sub-input button SB after the button operation promotion effect is performed. When the player operates the sub-input button SB, the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the operation of the sub-input button SB is the button image display, the button operation character display, the acquired number of sheets display, the number of AT games, and the background. Images, opaque textures, etc. are erased immediately. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the UI (user interface) display may not be erased when the sub-input button SB is operated after the button operation promotion effect is executed.

When the image displayed on the effect display device S40 is deleted before the operation of the sub-input button SB, an image showing the lottery result (win / fail lottery result, AT lottery result, etc.) is immediately displayed.

FIG. 395 (B) is a diagram showing a case where the player operates the start lever D50 after the button operation promotion effect is performed. When the player operates the start lever D50 and the next game is started, the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the operation of the start lever D50 is the button image display, the button operation character display, the acquired number display, and the like. The number of AT games, background image, opaque texture, etc. are deleted immediately.

When the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the operation of the start lever D50 is erased, an image showing the lottery result (win / fail lottery result, AT lottery result, etc.) is immediately displayed.

FIG. 395 (C) is a diagram showing a case where the push order navigation is displayed and the corresponding stop button is operated. Here, first, the game is started by operating the start lever D50, and the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40.

The push-button navigation is displayed as "1", "2", and "3" on the effect display device S40 in order from the left, and the stop button 40 (left stop button D41) is displayed in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53. , Middle stop button D42, right stop button D42) should be operated. The display of "1", "2", and "3" may be referred to as a navigation image, and only the area in which the numbers "1", "2", and "3" are displayed is referred to as a navigation image. Alternatively, the number "1" and the surrounding icon image (circular image in the figure) may be collectively referred to as a navigation image. The navigation image of "1" corresponding to the left reel M51, which is the reel to be stopped next, has a larger display area than the navigation images of "2" and "3".

Next, when the player operates the left stop button D41, an effect at the time of correct push order is generated around "1" in the push order navigation.

Next, the effect of "1" in the push order navigation and the correct answer in the push order becomes smaller with the passage of time, and the color becomes lighter. After a while, the display of "1" and the effect is completely erased (faded out), and the display of "2" and "3" in the push order navigation remains.

When the display of "1" and the effect is completely erased, the display of "2" is displayed large to indicate that the middle stop button D42 should be operated next.

In this way, when the push order is correct, the navigation image is not immediately erased and fades out. When the push order is incorrect, the navigation image may be deleted immediately, or the navigation image may be faded out and erased in a shorter time than when the push order is correct. It should be noted that the time from the stop operation when the navigation image fades out to the time when all the navigation images are erased is more than the time from the stop operation when the navigation image is deleted immediately to the time when all the navigation images are erased. Is longer.

(Difference in displayed contents depending on the operation timing of the sub input button SB)
FIG. 396 is a diagram showing that the content displayed on the effect display device S40 differs depending on the operation timing of the sub-input button SB. Note that the operation timing of the sub-input button SB is different, for example, the game situation is different (when 1 game is not in 1 game), and the elapsed time from a predetermined trigger (from the operation of the 3rd stop button). Elapsed time) is different, etc.

FIG. 396 (A) shows the sub-input button at the operation timing of the sub-input button SB (a situation in which "press the button!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40) in one game after operating the start lever D50. It is a figure which shows the display content of the effect display device S40 when SB is operated. In FIG. 396 (A), the button image is displayed after all the stop buttons have been operated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before all the stop buttons are operated (after the start lever D50 is operated). , After the first stop operation, after the second stop operation, etc.), the button image may be displayed.

One game is started by operating the start lever D50, and the image of "Win the rock-paper-scissors !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed, and the button image display and the button operation character display are performed as the button operation promotion effect. Here, while the button operation promotion effect is being executed after the third stop operation is performed, it is described as being in one game (in one game).

Next, the sub-input button SB is operated to display the lottery result (for example, the winning / failing lottery result, the AT lottery result, etc.).

FIG. 396 (B) is a diagram showing the display contents of the effect display device S40 when the sub-input button SB is operated when the third stop operation is performed and the game 1 is completed. Here, the case where one game is completed is described as after all the stop buttons are operated and the game end processing such as the payout process is executed. At the end of the game 1, the effect (excluding the button operation promotion effect) executed in the game 1 may be displayed.

The game of 1 has been completed, and the background of the normal game state is displayed on the effect display device S40. At this time, the characters "The menu screen is displayed by button operation" are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40, but the button image is not displayed. Next, the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB.

A button image may be used to indicate that the menu screen is displayed by the button operation, but in this case, the operation of the sub input button SB is effective during the game of 1 as shown in FIG. 396 (A). It is preferable to display a button image that is as small as or smaller than the button image display indicating that there is. Further, as described above, it is preferable not to display the information in the center of the screen of the effect display device S40 (because it is not important information such as hit notification or information related to the progress of the game).

As described above, the sub-input button SB has a function of being able to display different contents (images having different meanings) according to the operation timing. That is, here, if the sub-input button SB is operated during the execution of one game, an image showing the lottery result (for example, the winning / failing lottery result, the AT lottery result, etc.) is displayed, and the one game is not executed. When the sub-input button SB is sometimes operated, a menu screen for customizing the effect of the game machine is displayed.

With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide different sub-input buttons for each operation timing and function, so that the cost can be reduced.

Next, FIG. 397 is a diagram showing a case where the bet button D220 is used instead of the sub input button SB.

In FIG. 397 (A), the bet button D220 is used instead of the sub-input button SB of FIG. 396 (A).

Specifically, as a button operation promotion effect, a button image display and a button operation character display are performed on the effect display device S40. At this time, a button image imitating the bet button D220 is displayed in the button image display. ing.

Next, by operating the bet button D220, a display indicating the lottery result (for example, the winning / failing lottery result, the AT lottery result, etc.) is displayed.

In FIG. 397 (B), the bet button D220 is used instead of the sub input button SB of FIG. 396 (B).

Here, one game is completed, and the background of the normal game state is displayed on the effect display device S40. At this time, the characters "The menu screen is displayed by button operation" are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40, but the button image is not displayed. Next, the menu screen is displayed by operating the bet button D220.

As described above, the bet button D220 may have a function capable of displaying different contents depending on the timing of operation.

The sub-input button SB and the bet button D220 may be used at timings other than those described in FIGS. 396 and 397. For example, as a so-called "hidden command", a lamp pattern suggesting a lottery result may be executed by operating the sub-input button SB or the bet button D220 when the button operation promotion effect is not performed. If the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB and the operation of the sub-input button SB is enabled as a hidden command, the menu screen can be displayed even if the sub-input button SB is operated. May be configured to enable the operation of the sub-input button SB as a hidden command during the period when is not displayed (the period during which the transition to the menu screen is invalid due to the operation of the sub-input button).

As described above, when one game is completed and the bet button D220 is operated while the background of the normal game state is displayed on the effect display device S40, the menu screen is displayed. , When the bet button D220 is operated, the menu screen is displayed when the number of credits is 0. The reason is that if the bet button D220 is operated when the number of credits is 1 or more and 1 is not in the game, it should function as a bet button, so it is not appropriate to display the menu screen. Because there is no. Further, when the bet button D220 is operated, the menu screen may be displayed when the number of credits is less than the specified number set for each gaming state. In this case, in the game state where the game can be played only with three bets, the menu screen is displayed when the bet button D220 is operated when the number of credits is less than 3, and in the game state where the game can be played only with two bets. When the bet button D220 is operated when the number of credits is less than 2, the menu screen will be displayed. Further, the menu screen may be displayed when the bet button D220 is operated in the state of automatic betting or in the state where a predetermined number of bets have already been placed. In this case, since the bet button D220 is in a bet state, the demo screen does not shift to the demo screen even if the time when the bet button D220 is not operated elapses, and the menu screen is displayed after the bet button D220 is operated for a predetermined time. It is conceivable that the demo screen will not be displayed even after the lapse of time.

When the sub input button SB or the bet button D220 is operated when displaying the menu screen, an operation sound indicating that the operation has been performed may be output, or an operation may be performed when displaying the menu screen. You may not output the sound.

(Difference in LED light emission mode of sub input button SB)
FIG. 398 is a diagram showing that the LED light emitting mode of the sub-input button SB differs depending on the timing at which the sub-input button SB can be operated (a situation in which the operation of the sub-input button SB is effective).

FIG. 398 (A) is a diagram showing a button operation promotion effect when the sub input button SB can be operated in one game after operating the start lever D50.

First, one game is started by operating the start lever D50, and the image of "Win the rock-paper-scissors !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed, and as a button operation promotion effect, a button image display, a button operation character display, and a sub input button light emission are performed.

The button operation promotion effect continues to be executed until the player operates the sub-input button SB. In detail, the button image display and the button operation character display continue to be displayed, and the sub-input button light emission continues with all lights lit.

In this way, when the sub-input button SB can be operated in one game, the LED of the sub-input button SB is fully lit as a button operation promotion effect.

FIG. 398 (B) is a diagram showing a button operation promotion effect when the sub-input button SB can be operated when the third stop operation is performed and one game is completed.

The game of 1 has been completed, and the background of the normal game state is displayed on the effect display device S40. When the sub-input button SB can be operated, as a button operation promotion effect, a light emitting mode (predetermined light-emitting pattern) different from the case where the sub-input button SB can be operated in the game in which the LED of the sub-input button SB is 1. It emits light at. Here, first, the left half of the LED of the sub input button SB is lit. As in FIG. 396 (B), the characters "The menu screen is displayed by button operation" are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40, but the button image is not displayed.

Next, since the sub-input button SB has not yet been operated by the player, the button operation promotion effect is continued, and the right half of the LED of the sub-input button SB is lit.

In this way, when the sub-input button SB can be operated after the end of one game, the LED of the sub-input button SB is blinking so that the left half and the right half are alternately lit as a button operation promotion effect. It emits light in a mode.

Other differences in light emission mode include different light emission colors, different blinking (blinking) speeds, and different brightness.

As described above, the LED of the sub-input button SB may emit light in a different light emission pattern depending on the operable situation. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what kind of function can be executed by operating the sub-input button SB. Further, since it is easier to recognize that the LED of the sub-input button SB is emitting light in the full lighting mode than in the blinking mode, the player can operate the sub-input button SB in the full lighting mode. It is possible to intuitively distinguish the situation where the sub-input button SB may be operated.

It should be noted that the functions indicated by the full lighting and blinking modes may be opposite to those described above. That is, all lighting may indicate a situation in which the sub-input button SB may be operated, and blinking mode may indicate a situation in which the sub-input button SB should be operated.

(Difference in button operation promotion effect when there are two sub-input buttons)
FIG. 399 is a diagram showing a difference in execution mode and execution timing of the button operation promotion effect when the sub-input button SB and the sub-input button SB3 are provided. In addition, in FIG. 399, for the sake of simplification of the figure, the sub input button SB3 is schematically shown to be attached to the same member as the start lever D50 and the stop button D42, but in reality, the sub input button is shown. The SB3 is preferably attached to the lower panel D140 or the like. Further, by configuring the lower panel unit including the structure such as the support for supporting the lower panel D140 and the lower panel D140 to be pressed, the lower panel unit may be used as the sub input button SB3.

FIG. 399 (A) is a diagram showing display contents displayed on the effect display device S40 when the sub input button SB becomes operable in one game after operating the start lever D50.

When the third stop operation (here, the right stop button D43) is performed by the player, as a button operation promotion effect, a button image display that displays a button image imitating the sub input button SB and "press the button!" Button operation to display characters Characters are displayed.

Next, when the sub-input button SB is operated by the player, the result display indicating the lottery result is performed.

FIG. 399 (B) is a diagram showing display contents displayed on the effect display device S40 when the sub input button SB3 becomes operable in one game after operating the start lever D50.

When the third stop operation (here, the right stop button D43) is performed by the player, a button image imitating the sub input button SB3 is performed as a button operation promotion effect. At this time, after the third stop operation is performed, the third stop operation shown in FIG. 399 (A) is performed at the timing at which the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3, which is the button operation promotion effect, is displayed. After that, the button image imitating the sub-input button SB is displayed at a later timing than the display timing. In addition, in FIG. 399, each figure of FIGS. 399 (A) and 399 (B) is described in chronological order from the left, and the interval in the left-right direction of each figure indicates a time interval. Therefore, in the third figure from the left in FIG. 399 (A) and the third figure from the left in FIG. 399 (B), the latter is described so as to be displaced to the right. It indicates that the timing is delayed. Further, the leftmost figure of FIG. 399 (A) and the leftmost figure of FIG. 399 (B) are located at the same position when viewed in the left-right direction, and the display timings are the same. Shown. The same applies to other figures. As other display timings, for example, in the third figure from the left in FIG. 399 (A) and the third figure from the left in FIG. 399 (B), the timing at which the button image is displayed on the effect display device S40 is different. There is. In the former, the button image (an image imitating the sub input button SB) and the button operation character display are displayed when the first time elapses from the operation of the third stop button, while the latter is the third stop button. A button image (an image imitating the sub-input button SB3) is displayed when the second time elapses from the operation. In other words, in the former, the valid period of the operation of the effect button (sub-input button SB) starts when the first time elapses from the operation of the third stop button, but in the latter, the operation of the third stop button is the third. When 2 hours have passed, the valid period of the operation of the effect button (sub input button SB3) starts. The first time is shorter than the second time.

When the operation of the sub-input button SB3 is valid, the time difference between the first time and the second time is used to enlarge the button arrangement location from the pull image (full display) of the housing. The sub-input button is used to guide the player's line of sight by sequentially illuminating the lamps arranged from the effect display device S40 to the position of the sub-input button SB3 by using the lamp of the housing. Since the operation of the SB3 is valid, the configuration may be such that it is easy to recognize that the sub-input button SB3 should be operated.

When the sub-input button SB3 can be operated, the button operation characters may not be displayed and the button image may be displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device S40. Here, the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 is displayed substantially in the center of the effect display device S40, which is larger than when the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 is displayed. Further, when the operation of the sub-input button SB3 is valid (when FIG. 399 (B)), when the operation of the sub-input button SB is valid (when FIG. 399 (A)), there is no sound generated. It may be configured to be output. For example, when the operation of the sub-input button SB becomes effective, the characters displayed on the effect display device S40 are output by voice (here, "press the button"), but the operation of the sub-input button SB3 becomes effective. Occasionally, a voice saying "press" may be output, which is different from when the operation of the sub input button SB is enabled.

Next, when the sub-input button SB3 is operated by the player, the result display indicating the lottery result is performed.

When the sub input button SB can be operated in one game as shown in FIG. 399 (A), the sub input button SB3 can be operated in one game as shown in FIG. 399 (B). The winning expectation (winning expectation, AT winning expectation) is relatively low (relatively low, the average winning expectation is low).

In this way, when the sub-input button SB3 with a relatively high expectation of winning can be operated, the timing at which the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 is displayed and the sub-input button SB with a relatively low expectation of winning are displayed. When the operation of is possible, the timing at which the button image imitating the sub input button SB is displayed is configured to be displayed at a different timing, in other words, the sub after the third stop operation is performed. Make the time A until the button image imitating the input button SB is displayed different from the time B until the button image imitating the sub input button SB3 is displayed after the third stop operation is performed (time). By configuring A <time B or time A> time B), the player has a sense of expectation for the display timing of the button image.

The time until the sub-input button SB is operated and the result is displayed and the time until the sub-input button SB3 is operated and the result is displayed may be the same or different.
(Display position of sub-input button SB and button image / Display position of sub-input button SB3 and button image)

As shown in FIG. 399 (B), when the sub-input button SB3 can be operated, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display a large button image imitating the sub-input button SB3. However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect.

FIG. 400 is a diagram showing another example of a display mode of a button image display displayed when each button is operable in a configuration including a sub-input button SB and a sub-input button SB3.

FIG. 400 (A) shows a case where the sub input button SB can be operated, which is the same as that of FIG. 399 (A), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 400 (B) shows a case where the sub-input button SB3 can be operated, but FIG. 399 (B) shows a display mode and a display position of a button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 which is a button image display. It's different.

Specifically, in FIG. 400 (B), the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 is smaller than the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 described in FIG. 399 (B). Further, in FIG. 399 (B), a button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 was displayed substantially in the center of the effect display device S40, but in FIG. 400 (B), the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 is displayed. It is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

In this way, when the sub-input button SB3 is provided to the right of the center of the gaming machine main body, the button image display (button image imitating the sub-input button SB3) displayed on the effect display device S40 is also larger than the center. It may be configured to be displayed on the right side.

It is also assumed that the sub input button SB is not provided in the center. When the sub-input button SB is provided on the right side of the center, the button image display (button image imitating the sub-input button SB) displayed on the effect display device S40 may also be displayed on the right side of the center. Often, when the sub-input button SB is provided on the left side of the center, the button image display (button image imitating the sub-input button SB) displayed on the effect display device S40 is also displayed on the left side of the center. May be.

By associating the display position of the button image with the position of the sub-input button to be operated in this way, the player should operate the sub-input button SB or the sub-input button SB3. You can intuitively grasp whether it is a situation.

(24th Embodiment)
Next, the 24th embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those of the above-described embodiments. The 24th embodiment can be appropriately applied to other embodiments.

In the 24th embodiment, in a continuous effect that is continued over a plurality of games, a display (hereinafter, referred to as a "continuation image") indicating that the continuous effect is continued in the next game or a possibility of continuing the continuous effect is displayed. Aspects will be described.

(Display method of continuous image)
FIG. 401 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous image method. First, when the player operates the start lever D50, a continuous effect for notifying the lottery result is started. Here, the characters "Repel the shark!" Are displayed on the effect display device S40, and the continuous effect is started.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. Here, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 is operated, and an effect display in which the shark is swimming from right to left is performed.

Next, when the second stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. Here, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is operated, and an effect display in which the shark is swimming from left to right is performed.

Next, when the third stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. Here, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 is operated, and an effect display in which the shark continues to swim is performed.

Here, since the continuous effect is continued in the next game, the characters "NEXT" indicating that the continuous effect is continued in the next game are displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40. Here, the characters "NEXT" displayed thinly from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40 are displayed so as to move, and are displayed in a state of being easily visible (also referred to as a materialized state) in the lower right. ing. When moving from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the characters in the continuous image because the characters are lighter, translucent, and effects are generated than when they are displayed in the lower right. It is sometimes called a temporary display image. The continuous image may be displayed on the upper part of the effect display device S40 instead of the lower part, and may be displayed on a part (a part of the area) of the image display device S40.

Next, when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game is started, and the second game of continuous production is started. Here, a production display is performed in which a human is riding a boat and chasing a shark.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the first stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 is operated, and since the human and the shark have encountered each other, an effect display indicating that the shark is surprised is performed.

Next, when the second stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the second stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is operated, and an effect display is performed in which a human throws a spear to defeat the shark.

Next, when the third stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 is operated, and an effect display is performed in which the thrown spear does not hit the shark. At this time, when continuing to the next game (third game), as in the first game, the characters "NEXT" (temporary display image) displayed faintly from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40. Is displayed to move, and is displayed in a materialized state at the lower right.

Next, when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game is started, and the third game of continuous production is started.

In the third game, when the start lever D50 is operated, the first stop operation is performed, and the second stop operation is performed, the effect display is performed in the same manner as in the second game, and the lottery result is displayed during the third stop operation (hereinafter, (Also called continuous production result display) is performed.

Here, at the time of the third stop operation, the characters "Repel!" Indicates that the shark has been repelled, indicating that the shark has been elected. On the other hand, if it is not won, the characters such as "Failure !?" are displayed to indicate that it was not won. It is preferable that the characters "Repel!" Are displayed at different positions from the display positions such as "Failure !?". As a result, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the display indicating that the player has won (“Repel!”) And the display indicating that the player has not won (“Failure !?”).

Although an example of continuing until the third game has been described here, it is not always necessary to continue until the third game, and the lottery result by repelling the shark in the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game. (Winning / non-winning) may be displayed, or in the production display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game, the production display in which the thrown spear does not hit the shark is performed, and the next game is started. It may be shown that the lottery result was not won by returning to the background screen of the normal game state by operating the lever D50.

In addition, a plurality of patterns of continuous images may be provided in order to show the possibility that the continuous production will continue to the next game. For example, in order to incite whether or not to continue until the third game in the second game, in the production display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game, the continuous image is not "NEXT" but "NEXT?" "NEXT! It may be displayed as "?". In such a configuration, the degree of expectation to continue to the third game is NEXT? <NEXT! ?? <NEXT, may be used.

Although the case where the third game is the effect display by the same progress as the second game is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second game and the third game may be different effect displays. For example, if the expectation of repelling a shark in the third game is higher than that of repelling a shark in the second game, the effect display of the third game can be set to the effect display with a high expectation, and the start lever D50. The distance to the shark during the operation may be short, the shark displayed during the first stop operation may be small, the spear displayed during the second stop operation may be large, and the like.

In this way, when the continuous image is displayed on the effect display device S40, the direction of the operation (start lever D50 → left stop button D41 → middle stop button D42 → right stop button D43) in which the player mainly advances the game. By displaying in the same direction as (left → right), the player can recognize the continuous image without discomfort.

(supplement)
After the third stop operation is performed in the first game and the second game, the effect display displayed by the third stop operation is continuously displayed until the start lever D50 for starting the next game is operated. NS. That is, even if the bet button D220 is operated, the effect display displayed by the third stop operation is not erased, and when an appropriate start lever D50 operation (bet operation → start lever operation) is performed, the third stop lever operation is performed. The effect display displayed by the stop operation is deleted. Therefore, the continuous image is also erased when the appropriate start lever D50 is operated.

On the other hand, the display such as "Repel!" Showing the lottery result may be deleted when the bet button D220 is operated after the third stop operation is performed, or is appropriate as in the continuous image. It may be configured to erase when the start lever D50 is operated.

Further, as the display timing of the continuous image, the characters "NEXT" are difficult to see from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the stop button, which is the third stop, is turned from on to off. The display may be configured to start moving, or it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display device S40 from the lower left to the lower right after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the stop button for the third stop is turned from off to on. May be configured to start the display in which the characters "NEXT" move. Further, the display timing (display trigger) of the continuous image may be different depending on the type of continuous effect.

(Change example)
An example of displaying a continuous image (“NEXT”) so as to move from the lower left to the lower right has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is faded so as to be displayed from the outside of the screen on the right side of the effect display device S40 to the lower right. It may be displayed to be in. That is, it may be displayed so as to move to the left. Further, it may be displayed so as to move to another place after fading in so that it is displayed from the lower part of the effect display device S40 from the outside of the screen to the center of the lower part. In this case, since the continuous image is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the player mainly advances the game, the movement of the continuous image makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the continuous image.

(First end timing of BGM during continuous production)
Next, FIG. 402 is a diagram showing the end timing of the continuous effect BGM when the demo screen (demo effect, demo display) / menu screen is displayed during the continuous effect.

Since the progress of the effect display in the first game is the same as in FIG. 401, it is omitted. First, when the player operates the start lever D50, the continuous effect is started, and when the continuous effect is started, the continuous effect BGM Output starts.

After that, the first stop operation (here, left stop button D41), the second stop operation (here, left stop button D42), and the third stop operation (here, left stop button D43) are performed, but continuous production is performed. BGM is continuously output.

If the start lever D50, which triggers the start of the next game, is not operated after the third stop operation is performed, the display of the effect display displayed by the third stop operation is continued, and the output of the continuous effect BGM is also continued. NS.

When a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop operation was performed, the demo screen is displayed. When the demo screen is displayed, the output of the continuous effect BGM is stopped, the output of the BGM is started during the demonstration, or the BGM is not output and there is no sound.

On the other hand, if the sub input button SB or the like is operated before the predetermined time elapses after the third stop operation is performed, the menu screen is displayed. When the menu screen is displayed, as in the case where the demo screen is displayed, the output of the continuous effect BGM is stopped, the output of the BGM in the menu is started, or the BGM is not output and there is no sound.

The demo screen or menu screen is displayed on the layer on the front side of the continuous effect display. That is, only the demo screen or the menu screen can be visually recognized by the player, and the effect screen of the continuous effect cannot be visually recognized, but the effect display of the continuous effect is actually performed.

When the demo screen or the menu screen is displayed, the effect display of the continuous effect may be deleted.

When the display of the demo screen or the menu screen is finished, the effect display of the continuous effect that was displayed before the display of the demo screen or the menu screen is performed. However, the output of the continuous effect BGM is not restarted at this timing, and is restarted when the start lever D50, which is the start of the next game, is operated.

In this way, by continuously outputting the BGM until the screen is switched to another display screen without stopping the BGM immediately during the continuous production, the player may be in an advantageous state of the continuous production. It can be suggested that it is better to continue the game without leaving the seat on the way.

(Second end timing of BGM during continuous production)
Next, FIG. 403 is a diagram showing the end timing of the continuous effect BGM when the result of the continuous effect is displayed.

Since the progress of the effect display is the same as that in FIG. 401, it will be omitted. As described with reference to FIG. 402, when the player operates the start lever D50, the continuous effect is started, and when the continuous effect is started, the output of the continuous effect BGM is started.

After that, since the continuous production is continued, the output of the continuous production BGM is also continued. When the third stop operation (here, the operation of the right stop button D43) of the third game is performed, the continuous production result display (here, the character display of "Repel!", The victory pose of the character) is performed.

When the third stop operation is performed, the continuous effect result display is performed and the output of the continuous effect BGM is stopped. That is, when the continuous effect result display is performed, the BGM is not output, and only the SE (sound effect) is output.

As a supplement, BGM (background music) is music that plays as the background of the subject. For example, a normal game BGM played from the start of one game, a big bonus BGM played during a big bonus, an AT BGM played during AT, and the like are included. These BGMs are often played in a loop, and after playing to the end of the music, some are played again from the beginning. SE is also called a sound effect, and is a sound used to explain a sound or a state added as a part of a production. SE includes not only short sounds but also long sounds to some extent. For example, even if the SE indicating the end of the jackpot, the SE indicating the end of the consecutive villa, the SE indicating the end of the AT, and the like are composed of sounds that are somewhat long, they may be included. Further, although the SE may include a melody, loop playback is not performed.

In addition, the continuous production result is displayed and the SE indicating the lottery result is output, but when the lottery result is won, the SE indicating that the lottery result is won (for example, the SE with the impression of being lively, bright, or flashy) is displayed. When the lottery result is non-winning, an SE indicating that the lottery is not won (for example, an SE with an impression of loneliness, darkness, or soberness) is output. SEs with a lively, bright, and flashy impression are generally characterized by a major melody, clear sounds, many high notes, many sounds used, and a fast tempo. On the other hand, SEs with the impression of loneliness, darkness, and soberness are generally characterized by a minor melody, unclear sounds, many bass sounds, a small number of sounds used, and a slow tempo.

In this way, by stopping the output of the continuous effect BGM when the continuous effect result display is performed (during the third stop operation of the third game), the effect display up to this point (in the middle of the continuous effect) is different. , It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the continuous effect result display is displayed.

When the continuous effect result display is performed, the lottery result can be further recognized by the lamp (for example, LED) of the gaming machine. For example, when the lottery result is won, the lamp of the gaming machine emits rainbow colors, and when the lottery result is not won, the lamp of the gaming machine is turned off as a whole. That is, when the lottery result is won and the lottery result is not won, it is composed relatively bright when the lottery result is won, and relatively dark when the lottery result is not won.

(Display position of continuous image and display position of continuous effect result display)
Similarly, with reference to FIG. 403, the display position of the continuous image and the display position of the continuous effect result display will be described. As described above, the progress of the effect display is the same as that in FIG. 401, and will be omitted.

At the time of the third stop operation of the first game and the third stop operation of the second game, the continuous image "NEXT" is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

On the other hand, at the time of the third stop operation of the third game, the characters "Repel!", Which is the continuous effect result display, are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40.

In this way, the display position of the continuous image and the display position of the continuous effect result display may be configured to be different. It is easier for the player to recognize the display that shows the same meaning to the player even if they are different games, such as "NEXT" in the first game and the second game, in the same position. Since it is the final game, by displaying "Repel!" At a display position different from "NEXT", the player can easily recognize that the meanings of "NEXT" and "Repel!" Are different.

(Display mode of continuous image and continuous production result display)
Next, the display mode of the continuous image and the continuous effect result display in each continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 403 and 404.

FIG. 404 is a diagram showing a continuous effect (second continuous effect: flower continuous effect) different from the continuous effect (first continuous effect: shark continuous effect) described with reference to FIGS. 401 to 403. First, when the player operates the start lever D50, a continuous effect for notifying the lottery result is started. Here, the characters "Bloom flowers!" Are displayed on the effect display device S40, and continuous effect is started.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. Here, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 is operated, and an effect display with seeds under the ground is performed.

Next, when the second stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. Here, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is operated to display the germination effect.

Next, when the third stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. Here, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 is operated, and an effect display is performed in which the flowers do not bloom and the buds remain.

Here, since the continuous effect is continued in the next game, the characters "NEXT" indicating that the continuous effect is continued in the next game are displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game is started, and the second game of continuous production is started. Here, an effect display in which rain clouds are generated is performed.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the first stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 is operated, and an effect display in which it rains is performed.

Next, when the second stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the second stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is operated, and an effect display in which it is raining and thunder is being performed is performed.

Next, when the third stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 is operated, and as the continuous effect result display, the effect display in which flowers have bloomed and the display of "flowering!" Are performed.

Although not shown, when an appropriate start lever D50 is operated next and the game progresses to the next game, the player wins if it is notified in the continuous production result display of the previous game that the player has won. An effect display (for example, "BONUS confirmed" or "Congratulations" is displayed, the lamp of the gaming machine is in a rainbow-colored light emitting mode, etc.) is displayed to clearly indicate that the game is not won in the continuous effect result display of the previous game. After being notified that the game is in the normal game state, a transition display (for example, a blackout display, a motif character display, and a gaming machine lamp is turned off) indicating that the continuous production has ended is performed. The background image is displayed.

Comparing the display modes of the continuous images of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect, the continuous image displayed in the first continuous effect (“NEXT”) and the continuous image displayed in the second continuous effect (“NEXT”) are compared. It has the same display as "NEXT").

On the other hand, when comparing the display modes of the continuous production result display of the first continuous production and the second continuous production, the continuous production result display (“repulsion!”) Displayed in the first continuous production and the second continuous production The display is different from the continuous production result display (“flowering!”) Displayed.

In this way, since the continuous production has a relatively high expectation of winning compared to other productions, the player can grasp the rules of the gaming machine by using a common mode even for different continuous productions. It becomes easier to pay attention to the displayed effect. Since the effect result display is the final result display in the continuous effect, it becomes easier for the player to grasp whether the player has won or not by performing the display according to the continuous effect.

(Number of continuous productions and expectation of winning)
In the first continuous effect (shark continuous effect) described with reference to FIG. 403 and the like, a maximum of two continuous images can be displayed. On the other hand, in the second continuous effect (flower continuous effect) described with reference to FIG. 404, a continuous image of up to one time can be displayed.

The winning expectation is configured so that the first continuous production is higher than the second continuous production.

Further, in the first continuous effect, the winning expectation when the continuous image is displayed twice is configured to be higher than the winning expectation when the continuous image is displayed once.

In this way, the higher the number of continuous images, the higher the expectation of winning.

By providing a continuous effect in which the maximum number of continuous images is different, the player will expect not only which continuous effect is displayed but also how many times the continuous image is displayed.

(Display priority of continuous image and game progress display)
Next, the display priority of the continuous image and the game progress display will be described with reference to FIG. 405. Since the progress of the effect display is the same as that in FIG. 401, it will be omitted.

In FIG. 405, the game progress status display, which was not displayed in FIG. 401, is performed. Here, the acquired number of sheets is displayed in the lower left of the effect display device S40, and the number of AT games is displayed in the lower right of the effect display device S40. ing.

The game progress display is set to have a higher display priority than other displays (for example, effect display, continuous image, continuous effect result display, etc.). Specifically, although the display position of the continuous image "NEXT" and the display position of the number of AT games in the game progress display overlap, the game progress display is displayed with priority over the continuous image. (Displayed on the layer on the front side), the display of the number of AT games is visible to all players, but a part of "NEXT" is invisible to the player.

In this way, when displaying the profit (for example, the number of acquired sheets) and the information related to the profit (for example, the number of AT games) acquired by the player, by displaying the information with priority over other displays, other display is performed. It is possible to prevent the situation where the profit cannot be recognized because it is hidden behind the display.

When the game progress display and the continuous image are displayed in duplicate, the display priority of the continuous image may be set high and the continuous image may be displayed with priority. As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize the continuous image indicating that the next game is continued.

Here, the configuration in which the game progress status display and the continuous image overlap has been described, but the game progress status display and the continuous image may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap so as not to reduce the visibility of any of the displays. For example, a continuous image may be displayed above the game progress display. In this case, the continuous image can be displayed at an arbitrary position away from the game progress display regardless of the distance from the game progress display.

(Display area for telop display and continuous image)
Next, the display area of the telop display and the continuous image will be described with reference to FIG. 406. Since the progress of the effect display is the same as that in FIG. 401, it will be omitted.

In FIG. 406, a telop display related to the continuous effect, which was not displayed in FIG. 401 and the like, is performed. The telop display is displayed according to which stop operation (first stop operation to third stop operation) of which game of the continuous effect is performed.

The telop display is displayed at the lower part of the effect display device S40, and the size of the display area varies depending on the number of characters to be displayed.

It is preferable that the telop display and the continuous image are configured so as not to overlap. Specifically, since the continuous image is not displayed during the first stop operation and the second stop operation, it is possible to display a longer number of characters than during the third stop operation. On the other hand, since the continuous image is displayed during the third stop operation, it is displayed with a relatively shorter number of characters than during the first stop operation and the second stop operation, and is configured so as not to overlap with the continuous image.

In a gaming machine having a large number of characters in the telop display displayed during the third stop operation, it is preferable that the telop display is first performed after the third stop operation, the telop display is erased, and then the continuous image is displayed. That is, the period from the start to the end of the telop display and the period from the start to the end of the display of the continuous image are made different from each other (the timing of the telop display and the timing of the display of the continuous image are different from each other). Is preferable. With this configuration, the player can clearly see each display without deteriorating the visibility of both the telop display and the continuous image.

In addition, the telop display and the continuous image may be overlapped, and the continuous image may be preferentially displayed. As described above, in general, the higher the continuous production is, the higher the expectation of winning is. Therefore, the continuous image showing that the next game is continued is of high importance as the production display. Therefore, it is preferable to set the display priority so that the player can clearly recognize it.

(Display mode of continuous image)
Next, the display mode of the continuous image after the third stop operation will be described with reference to FIG. 407. Since the progress of the effect display is the same as in FIG. 406, it will be omitted.

In FIG. 407, after the third stop operation of the first game (here, the right stop button D43) is performed (see the rightmost figure in the upper row in FIG. 407), the start for starting the second game. The lever D50 has not been operated (see each figure in the middle row in FIG. 407).

In the effect display device S40, when the right stop button D43, which is the third stop operation of the first game, is performed, the telop display and the continuous image corresponding to the third stop operation are displayed. In the background, there is an effect display in which sharks are swimming.

After that, since the start lever D50 for starting the second game has not been operated, the display of the shark swimming left and right and the effect display emphasizing the continuous image "NEXT" change with the passage of time. ing.

The effect display that emphasizes "NEXT" is a display in which the light rotates clockwise around the characters "NEXT".

Since the telop display does not change with the passage of time from the third stop operation, the "Can you do it !?" displayed during the third stop operation continues to be displayed.

For the production display (display that the shark is swimming left and right, continuous image ("NEXT"), effect display that emphasizes the continuous image, telop display, etc.), the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game. It is displayed continuously until the demo screen is displayed or the menu screen is displayed. In addition, when the demo screen is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined time after the third stop (when the stop button that becomes the third stop is turned on → off, after the payout of the game medal is completed, and after the automatic bet related to the replay is completed). However, depending on the game state, the demo screen may be displayed or not displayed depending on the lapse of time after the third stop.

In this way, when the start operation to the next game is not performed, the player is expected to win by emphasizing the continuation image indicating that the next game is continued or may be continued by an effect or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from being quit during a high continuous production.

The display that emphasizes the continuous image is not limited to this, and the continuous image lights up / blinks due to the effect, the surroundings of the continuous image light / blink due to the effect, the continuous image moves (for example, moves left and right), and the continuous image moves left and right. May change (for example, change in magnitude).

(Display timing of telop display and continuous image during continuous production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 408, the display timing of the telop display and the continuous image displayed during the third stop operation will be specifically described. Since the process from the start of the continuous production to the second stop operation of the first game is the same as in FIG. 406, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the third stop operation of the first game is performed, the telop is first displayed. Here, when the right stop button D43, which is the third stop operation, is performed, the telop display of "Can you do it !?" is performed prior to the display of the continuous image, and the "NEXT" shown in FIG. 406 and the like is displayed. Has not been displayed yet.

Next, a continuous image is displayed with the passage of time. Here, after the telop display is performed, "NEXT" indicating that the next game is continued with the passage of time is displayed. At this time, the telop display is continuously displayed.

Similarly, in the second game, when the third stop operation is performed, the telop display is first performed. Here, when the right stop button D43, which is the third stop operation, is performed, the telop display of "No ..." is performed prior to the continuous image, and "NEXT" is not yet displayed.

Next, a continuous image is displayed with the passage of time. Here, after the telop display is performed, "NEXT" indicating that the next game is continued with the passage of time is displayed. At this time, the telop display is continuously displayed.

In this way, at the time of the third stop operation, by first displaying the telop and then performing the continuous image, the player pays attention to the continuous image showing the possibility of continuing to the next game. ..

The effect display (background image, telop display, continuous image) displayed on the effect display device S40 is until the start lever D50 for starting the next game is operated, until the demo screen is displayed, or the menu screen. It is displayed continuously until becomes. For example, even if a specific period (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed after the third stop operation, the demo screen will not be displayed if the predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has not passed, so that the effect display is displayed. Is continuously displayed, and the effect display is not invisible.

(Display mode until the continuous image is displayed)
FIG. 409 (A) produces a moving image in which only the movement of something can be visually recognized without visually displaying characters or the like so as to move from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40. It is a figure which displays so that it moves from the lower left to the lower right of the display device S40, and shows how a continuous image is displayed when it reaches the lower right.

When the time t1 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the moving image (here, it cannot be recognized as the character "NEXT" in the lower left of the effect display device S40, what is it? An image in which the player can recognize only the movement of the lever) is displayed.

Next, when the time t2 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the moving image is displayed near the center of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t3 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the moving image is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t4 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the moving image is erased and the continuous image is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

Next, FIG. 409 (B) moves an image different from the continuous image (a “pre-change image” in which the player can recognize what is moving) from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40. It is a figure which shows how the continuation image is displayed when it reaches the lower right.

When the time t1 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the pre-change image (here, the baseball ball image) is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t2 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the pre-change image is displayed near the center of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t3 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the pre-change image is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t4 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the pre-change image is erased and the continuous image is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

With this configuration, the player's attention is directed to the moving moving image and the pre-change image, so that the player can easily recognize the continuous image displayed thereafter.

The display start position of the moving image or the pre-change image described with reference to FIGS. 409 (A) and 409 (B) is not limited to the above-mentioned position, and fades in from outside the display area of the effect display device S40 to the lower left. The display of the image at the time of moving or the image before the change may be started. Further, the display of the moving image or the pre-change image may be started so as to fade in from the lower center of the effect display device S40 toward the lower right. That is, the start position of the moving image or the pre-change image may be any location within or outside the region of the effect display device S40.

The display mode of the moving image or the pre-change image described with reference to FIGS. 409 (A) and 409 (B) can be appropriately used in the present specification as long as there is no contradiction. For example, when "NEXT" is displayed in FIGS. 401 to 408, a moving image or a pre-change image can be used.

Next, the display position of the pre-change image (or the moving image) and the push order navigation will be described with reference to FIG. 409 (C).

First, the display area of the pre-change image at the display start position of the pre-change image overlaps at least a part of the display area of the left stop navigation, which is the push-order navigation corresponding to the left stop button D41.

Next, when the first predetermined time (for example, time t2) elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the display area of the pre-change image is the pressing order corresponding to the middle stop button D42. At least a part of the display area of the middle stop navigation, which is the navigation, overlaps.

Next, when the second predetermined time (for example, time t3) elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the display area of the pre-change image is the pressing order corresponding to the right stop button D43. At least a part of the display area of the right stop navigation, which is the navigation, overlaps.

The display area of the continuous display and the display area of the right stop navigation, which is the push-order navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, may be configured so that at least a part thereof overlaps.

However, since the display of the moving image or the pre-change image is started after the push order navigation is deleted after the third stop operation, between after the third stop operation and before the operation of the game start lever D50, The push order navigation (left stop navigation, middle stop navigation, right stop navigation) and the moving image, the image before change, or the continuous display are not displayed in duplicate.

In this way, the display area of the moving image or the pre-change image and the display area of the push order navigation may overlap, but by starting the display of the moving image or the pre-change image after the third stop operation, the push order navigation It is possible to configure the structure so that neither the visibility of the moving image nor the visibility of the moving image or the image before the change is deteriorated.

When the telop display described with reference to FIG. 406 is performed, the telop display continues to be displayed even after the third stop operation, so that the telop display may be displayed overlapping with the moving image or the pre-change image. When the telop display and the moving image or the pre-change image are displayed in an overlapping manner, the telop display may be displayed with priority, or the moving image or the pre-change image may be displayed with priority.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
It has a strip-shaped reel tape (eg, reel strip MO) wound around the outer circumference of a reel base (eg, reel frame MW).
A plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the reel tape along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape.
As the type of the symbol, at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol) are included.
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol.
The second symbol is arranged at at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged at each of both ends of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction. ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is longer than the outer circumference of the surface on which the reel tape is wound at the reel base.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
The main body of the game machine and
A front door (for example, a front door DU) that is openable and closable to the gaming machine body,
In a revolving gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU) and
A main tank member (for example, a hopper H40) installed below the pedestal and storing a game medium, and
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member and for retracting a surplus game medium stored in the main tank member is provided.
A part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member.
The reel unit and the pedestal portion are detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the slope portion is located vertically below the locking component located at a position closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
The main body of the game machine and
A front door (for example, a front door DU) that is openable and closable to the gaming machine body,
In a revolving gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU) and
A main tank member (for example, a hopper H40) installed below the pedestal and storing a game medium, and
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member and for retracting a surplus game medium stored in the main tank member is provided.
The reel unit and the pedestal portion are detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the locking component located at a position closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect.
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is stopped at the end of the plurality of reels. One game can be completed by performing the final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, for example) is displayed on the effect display unit. , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, sub-input button SB) is operated after one game is completed, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect.
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is stopped at the end of the plurality of reels. One game can be completed by performing the final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, for example) is displayed on the effect display unit. , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, sub-input button SB) is operated after one game is completed, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image.
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time.
When the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. When a specific operating member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the lapse of time, the predetermined image is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the operation of the predetermined operating member. 2 While the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even after a predetermined time has elapsed,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly operated before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Even if the operation of the above is performed, if the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit. Is composed of
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if the bet is made before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. The game is characterized in that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even if the first predetermined time elapses from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
A setting switch (for example, a setting) that is electrically connected to the main game unit and is operated to shift to a setting change mode (for example, a setting change mode) in which a setting value related to an advantage for a player can be changed. With a key switch)
The main game unit is configured to be able to execute interrupt processing, which is processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals.
When the power is cut off in a predetermined game state other than the setting change mode and power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the setting switch is turned on, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and the mode shifts to the setting changing mode. If the power is cut off after the power is turned off and the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off, the mode is configured to shift to the setting change mode.
When the power is cut off in a predetermined game state other than the setting change mode and power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the setting switch is turned on, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and the power is supplied from the start. If the power is cut off before the predetermined time elapses and the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off, the setting change mode is not set. It is a characteristic gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A stop switch (for example, left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) provided corresponding to each of the reels and operated by the player when stopping the rotation of the reels.
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game medium within a predetermined number range, and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A speaker that outputs a directing sound (for example, speaker S20) and
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the output of the production.
The main game club
The role lottery means to execute the role lottery, and
A reel control means for stopping and controlling the reel so as to correspond to a winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means when the stop switch is operated is provided.
A storage number increase process that increases the number of game media stored in the storage means, and
It is possible to execute the payout process that executes the payout of the game medium,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the player can be given a game medium.
When the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and a specific number of game media is given, the storage number increase process is executed. It is configured to perform the payout process without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In some cases, it is configured to execute the storage number increase processing and not to execute the withdrawal processing.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number is displayed. When the game medium of is given, it is configured to execute the payout process after executing the storage number increase process.
The main game club
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium grant information can be transmitted to the sub-game unit.
The sub-game club
Based on the reception of the game medium addition information, the game medium addition sound, which is an effect sound related to the addition of the game medium, can be output from the speaker.
When the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given, the game medium grant information. (For example, the game medium granting sound output when the credit is increased by 1 and the game medium granting sound output when one game medal is paid out) based on the receipt of Can be output and
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the predetermined game medium addition sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium addition information.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number is displayed. When the game medium is given, the predetermined game medium giving sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium giving information.
The time value from when the number of gaming media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) to A + 1 during the execution of the storage number increase process, and N (N is a natural number and 2 ≦ N). ) M (M is a natural number, 1 ≦ M ≦ (N-1)) M + 1 from the start of execution of the payout process for the third game medium during the execution of the payout process for paying out the game media. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the time value until the start of execution of the payout process related to the gaming medium of the eye is different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production,
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be turned on when the production is executed,
It is equipped with a setting value display unit (for example, setting display LED) that can display the setting value.
The game lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77).
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77).
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (for example, element 4 in FIG. 77).
The lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and an extinguishing time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77).
It has a plurality of lighting colors, has a plurality of lighting times, and has a plurality of extinguishing times.
As the lighting pattern, a first lighting pattern that can be carried out at the time of a predetermined abnormality, a second lighting pattern that can be carried out when the set value is displayed on the set value display unit, and a set value display that is not at the time of the predetermined abnormality. It has at least a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is not displayed in the unit.
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode.
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the predetermined lighting mode.
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured so as not to include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
A storage means capable of electrically storing the game medium within a predetermined number of ranges (for example, in this example, the game medal can be electrically stored as a credit in the game machine).
A switch that is operated when betting a game medium stored in a storage means, and is a bet switch (for example, a max bet button) capable of betting a plurality of game media.
A predetermined lamp (for example, 3-bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a specified number, which is the maximum number of bets per game in a predetermined gaming state, has been bet, and
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Equipped with a role determination means that can determine the winning combination,
As a winning combination that is determined by the combination determination means, it is configured so that the re-game combination can be determined.
The sum of the game medium stored in the storage means and the number of bets is equal to or greater than the specified number, in the predetermined game state, the re-game combination has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and the game medium is stored in the storage means. Moreover, when the number of bets is less than the specified number, the specific lamp is configured to light up.
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the number of bets reaches the specified number in a situation where the specific lamp is lit, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production.
It seems that the time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main game unit is longer than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the end of the power supply to the gaming machine. It is composed and
The time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program of the main game unit is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program of the sub-game unit. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured in such a manner.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. , The predetermined symbol combination is displayed even when the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. , The predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that and the power off processing based on the detection of the power off is executed, so that the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, the freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed. There is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value. It is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of the input of.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is configured so that it is possible to shift to the second lottery state after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that.
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the game has been stopped and the player has stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it can shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result are provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is a gaming machine characterized in that the lamp of the reel is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result are provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined lamp is turned on after the return.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) is
N reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (N is a natural number of 3 or more) and
A speaker that outputs a directing sound (for example, speaker S20) and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player, and each of the stopped reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined production sound (for example, tempai sound) from the speaker.
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, a predetermined rotation with respect to the N-1st reel is performed even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the stop operation with respect to the N-1st reel of the player. It is a gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined effect sound can be output from a speaker even after a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each of the stopped reels due to a defect. ..

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number range, and
A switch that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means, and is a bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that can bet a plurality of game values.
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. After each of the corresponding symbols is stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. It is composed and
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. Although each of the corresponding symbols is stopped and the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the identification is made due to a predetermined rotation defect to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that even after a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed, the specific lamp is configured so as not to be notified that it is valid.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number range, and
A switch that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means, and is a bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that can bet a plurality of game values.
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. After each of the corresponding symbols is stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. It is composed and
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols have been stopped, and even though the stop operation was performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the power off processing based on the detection of the power off was executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number range, and
A switch that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means, and is a bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that can bet a plurality of game values.
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol combination. Each of the corresponding symbols is stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is given. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are stored. Although each of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the predetermined reel corresponding to the final stop operation is specified. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the specific lamp is valid even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to poor rotation.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number range, and
A switch that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means, and is a bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that can bet a plurality of game values.
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol combination. Each of the corresponding symbols is stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is given. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are stored. Each of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, and even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the power off processing based on the detection of the power off is executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is effective is given after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the final stop operation of the player is to stop the predetermined combination at a predetermined timing. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, it is characterized in that the predetermined freeze can be executed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a game machine to play.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the final stop operation of the player is to stop the predetermined combination at a predetermined timing. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Is configured to
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Is configured to
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, and the power off time processing based on the detection of the power off is executed, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and then the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. After each symbol is stopped and the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. It is configured to be runable and
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. After that, the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is input. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the next game cannot be executed regardless of being played.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. After each symbol is stopped and the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. It is configured to be runable and
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of the fact that the reel is thrown in.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
As a game state, it has at least a special game transitionable state that is advantageous for the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a subsequent game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
From the time when the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means until the specific symbol combination is stopped, the special game transition state can be achieved.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After that, as the final stop operation of the player, after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing and the special symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, the freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a game in which the special game transition is not possible and the lottery result of the winning combination by the winning combination lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After each is stopped, the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, and the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a subsequent game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed. It is a gaming machine characterized by being on reel.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
Each of the games executed in the first lottery state and stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. Each symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on the reel, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the second It is configured to be able to shift to the lottery state,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. Each of the symbols corresponding to the above is stopped, and the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, and the symbols other than the specific symbol combination are caused by the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. After the combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured so as not to shift to the second winning combination lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured in.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input after the return.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is configured so that it is possible to shift to the second lottery state after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that.
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the machine has been stopped and the player has stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the power off processing based on the detection of the power off is executed, so that the symbols other than the specific symbol combination are executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it can shift to the second lottery state after the power is restored even when the combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) is
N reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (N is a natural number of 3 or more) and
A speaker that outputs a directing sound (for example, speaker S20) and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player, and each of the stopped reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined production sound (for example, tempai sound) from the speaker.
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player, the power off processing based on the detection of the power off. Is executed, and even if a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each of the stopped reels, the predetermined effect sound can be output from the speaker after the power is restored. It is a game machine characterized by.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
Each of the games executed in the first lottery state and stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. Each symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on the reel, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the second It is configured to be able to shift to the lottery state,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the game has been stopped and the player has stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it can shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when certain conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stop process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled.
The gaming machine is characterized in that at least one specific condition candidate can be set as the specific condition from a plurality of types of specific condition candidates.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when certain conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stop process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled.
It is configured so that at least one specific condition candidate can be set as the specific condition from a plurality of types of specific condition candidates.
As the specific condition candidate, the gaming machine is characterized in that the number of gaming media acquired in a predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when certain conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stop process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled.
It is configured so that at least one specific condition candidate can be set as the specific condition from a plurality of types of specific condition candidates.
As the specific condition candidate, the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period is equal to or more than a predetermined number.
In a situation where the number of gaming media acquired in a predetermined period is set to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number as the specific condition, after a certain game is executed, the specific condition is set to a predetermined gaming state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute a stop processing when it is satisfied.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when certain conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stop process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the determination process related to a predetermined error can be executed even when the stop processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when the predetermined condition A is satisfied.
The automatic settlement function is enabled when the predetermined condition B is satisfied.
It is configured to be able to execute a stop process that stops the progress of the game if the specific condition A is satisfied when the stop function is enabled.
When the automatic settlement function is enabled and the specific condition B is satisfied, the automatic settlement process can be executed.
It is configured so that at least one specific condition A candidate can be set as the specific condition A from a plurality of types of specific condition A candidates.
It is configured so that at least one specific condition B candidate can be set as the specific condition B from a plurality of types of specific condition B candidates.
At least one of the specific condition A candidate and the specific condition B candidate is the same.
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that different conditions can be set between the specific condition A and the specific condition B.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D1) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
With
A gaming machine characterized in that a first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and a moving member can be operated through the first opening.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D2) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
With
A first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be operated through the first opening.
The lock is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located below the center of the front door in the vertical direction.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D3) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
With
A first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be operated through the first opening.
A gaming machine characterized in that a second opening is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate through the second opening.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D4) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
A game medium dispensing device mounted on the bottom surface of the substrate,
With
A first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be operated through the first opening.
The height of the game medium dispensing device is lower than the height from the bottom surface to the lower end of the first opening.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that a gap is formed between the gaming medium payout device and the moving member in a situation where the front door is closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D5) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
With
A first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be operated through the first opening.
The lock is a gaming machine characterized in that it is fixed from the back side of the front door.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D6) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device, and
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. death,
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined open position, the gaming medium paid out from the gaming medium dispensing device is configured to be guided to a receiving portion via a predetermined connecting passage.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D7) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. death,
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, at a predetermined open position, the gaming medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the gaming medium dispensing device via a specific communication passage.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D8) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device, and
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. death,
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
The game medium paid out from the game medium payout device at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to a receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, at a predetermined open position, the gaming medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the gaming medium dispensing device via a specific communication passage.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D9) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
With
While the reel is rotating, it is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by the stop switch when the opening of the front door is detected, and then the stop switch is detected at the moment when the closing of the front door is detected. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by the door.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D10) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device, and
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. death,
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
The game medium paid out from the game medium payout device at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to a receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
While the reel is rotating, it is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by the stop switch when the front door is detected to be open, and then the stop switch is set when the front door is detected to be closed. It is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to notify that the front door is in the open state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D11) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. death,
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The game medium thrown in from the slot at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via a specific communication passage.
While the reel is rotating, it is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by the stop switch when the front door is detected to be open, and then the stop switch is set when the front door is detected to be closed. It is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to notify that the front door is in the open state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D12) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device, and
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. death,
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
The game medium paid out from the game medium payout device at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to a receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
Under the condition that the front door is closed, the bottom of the substrate on the front door side (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "bottom of the substrate") is the bottom of the front door on the substrate side (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "bottom of the front door"). Provide the first piece overhanging toward
When the front door is closed, the bottom of the front door is provided with a second piece that projects toward the bottom of the substrate.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the gap between the first piece and the second piece is configured to be larger than the thickness of the gaming medium when the front door is closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D13) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device, and
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. death,
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
The game medium paid out from the game medium payout device at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to a receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
Under the condition that the front door is closed, the bottom of the substrate on the front door side (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "bottom of the substrate") is the bottom of the front door on the substrate side (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "bottom of the front door"). Provide the first piece overhanging toward
When the front door is closed, the bottom of the front door is provided with a second piece that projects toward the bottom of the substrate.
When the front door is closed, the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship where they overlap each other.
Even when the front door is in a predetermined open state, the first piece and the second piece are configured to overlap each other.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the gap between the first piece and the second piece is configured to be larger than the thickness of the gaming medium when the front door is closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D14) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. death,
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The game medium thrown in from the slot at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via a specific communication passage.
Under the condition that the front door is closed, the bottom of the substrate on the front door side (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "bottom of the substrate") is the bottom of the front door on the substrate side (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "bottom of the front door"). Provide the first piece overhanging toward
When the front door is closed, the bottom of the front door is provided with a second piece that projects toward the bottom of the substrate.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the gap between the first piece and the second piece is configured to be larger than the thickness of the gaming medium when the front door is closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D15) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. death,
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The game medium thrown in from the slot at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via a specific communication passage.
Under the condition that the front door is closed, the bottom of the substrate on the front door side (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "bottom of the substrate") is the bottom of the front door on the substrate side (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "bottom of the front door"). Provide the first piece overhanging toward
When the front door is closed, the bottom of the front door is provided with a second piece that projects toward the bottom of the substrate.
When the front door is closed, the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship where they overlap each other.
Even when the front door is in a predetermined open state, the first piece and the second piece are configured to overlap each other.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the gap between the first piece and the second piece is configured to be larger than the thickness of the gaming medium when the front door is closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E1) is
There are advantageous sections and normal sections,
In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section by satisfying a predetermined condition.
In the normal section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by satisfying a specific condition.
As the gaming state in the advantageous section, there are an advantageous state in which an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and a normal state in which a lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state can be executed.
It has a predetermined counter and
From the transition to the normal state in the Xth advantageous section in the advantageous state to the predetermined timing in the X + 1th advantageous section shifted through the normal section, the counter is reached. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be updated without clearing the stored counter value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E2) is
There are advantageous sections and normal sections,
In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section by satisfying a predetermined condition.
In the normal section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by satisfying a specific condition.
As the gaming state in the advantageous section, there are an advantageous state in which an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and a normal state in which a lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state can be executed.
It has a predetermined counter and
The predetermined period from the transition to the normal state in the Xth advantageous section in the advantageous state to the predetermined timing in the X + 1th advantageous section shifted through the normal section. It is configured so that it can be updated without clearing the counter value stored in the counter of.
In the predetermined period, from the transition to the X + 1th advantageous section to the predetermined timing, rather than the period from the transition to the normal state in the Xth advantageous section to the end of the normal section. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the degree of change in the counter value stored in the predetermined counter in one game is larger in the period.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E3) is
There are advantageous sections and normal sections,
In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section by satisfying a predetermined condition.
In the normal section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by satisfying a specific condition.
As the gaming state in the advantageous section, there are an advantageous state in which an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and a normal state in which a lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state can be executed.
It has a predetermined counter and
The predetermined period from the transition to the normal state in the Xth advantageous section in the advantageous state to the predetermined timing in the X + 1th advantageous section shifted through the normal section. It is configured so that it can be updated without clearing the counter value stored in the counter of.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined effect can be executed in the Xth advantageous section, the normal section, and the X + 1th advantageous section in the predetermined period.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E4) is
The main control means that controls the game,
Equipped with a sub-control means to control the production
There are advantageous sections and normal sections,
In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section by satisfying a predetermined condition.
In the normal section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by satisfying a specific condition.
As the gaming state in the advantageous section, there are an advantageous state in which an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and a normal state in which a lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state can be executed.
It has a predetermined counter and
The predetermined period from the transition to the normal state in the Xth advantageous section in the advantageous state to the predetermined timing in the X + 1th advantageous section shifted through the normal section. It is configured so that it can be updated without clearing the counter value stored in the counter of.
The main control means can transmit predetermined information to the sub control means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the sub-control means has the predetermined information, the counter value of the predetermined counter can be updated based on the predetermined information.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E5) is
Equipped with control means to control the game
The control means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute control related to management of advantageous games based on calculation results related to the number of inputs and the number of payouts in a predetermined number of games.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E6) is
Equipped with control means to control the game
The control means is
It is possible to execute control related to management of advantageous games based on a predetermined calculation result regarding the number of inputs and the number of payouts in a predetermined number of games.
The predetermined calculation result can be derived by the predetermined value multiplication process of multiplying the input number in the predetermined number of games by the predetermined value and the division process of dividing the number of payouts in the predetermined number of games from the calculation result of the predetermined value multiplication process. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured in.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E7) is
The demo display displayed while waiting for the game can be displayed on the image display means,
The predetermined area of the image display means is configured so that the first information can be displayed.
The first information can be displayed in the predetermined area regardless of whether the demo display is displayed or not.
In a situation where the demo display is displayed and the first information is displayed in the predetermined area, the second information can be displayed in the specific area of the image display means.
The specific area is configured so that the second information can be displayed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the visibility of predetermined symbol information included in the first information and the visibility of specific symbol information included in the second information are configured differently.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F1) is
It has a normal section and an advantageous section,
The advantageous section has a first state and a second state in which the ball output rate is lower than that of the first state.
In the second state, it is possible to give a predetermined point,
In the second state, when the given predetermined points are equal to or more than the predetermined value, it is configured to be able to shift to the first state.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the second state can be continued even if the given predetermined points reach a predetermined value in the second state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F2) is
Equipped with a notification means for executing notification regarding the game
It is possible to execute a point award lottery to award points,
The notification means is configured to be able to notify the point-giving information regarding the point-giving in a predetermined game.
The point award information is configured to be determinable at a predetermined timing in a game prior to the predetermined game.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that the point giving information determined at a predetermined timing can be notified at a specific timing prior to the predetermined game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F3) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The reel control means can shift to a special game state based on the acceptance of a stop operation by the player's first operation mode for a plurality of stop switches in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. It is configured so that special symbol combinations can be stopped.
The reel control means stops the special symbol combination based on the acceptance of the stop operation by the player's second operation mode for the plurality of stop switches in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. It is configured so that it is possible to stop a predetermined combination of symbols that involves paying out less than the specified number.
The notification means is configured to be able to notify the second operation mode in a game in which a specific result is determined.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to give a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player based on the player performing the second operation mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F4) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
As a gaming state, it has an advantageous state in which it is possible to execute an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player.
In a specific game in which a specific result is determined by an internal lottery, the reel control means first receives an operation on the stop switch in the first operation mode among a plurality of operation modes on the plurality of stop switches. The symbol combination is configured to stop, and the first symbol combination does not stop when the operation for the stop switch is accepted in the second operation mode among the plurality of operation modes for the plurality of stop switches.
The notification means is configured to be able to notify the first operation mode in a specific game.
It is configured so that it is possible to determine a candidate for the content related to the transition to an advantageous state corresponding to each of a plurality of operation modes at a predetermined timing prior to a specific game.
Candidates for the transition to an advantageous state corresponding to a plurality of operation modes at any specific timing from after a predetermined timing to before the first operation to the stop switch in a specific game is accepted. It is configured to be able to notify
In a specific game, among the candidates for the content related to the transition to the advantageous state corresponding to each of the plurality of operation modes, when the operation for the stop switch is accepted in the first operation mode notified by the notification means, the first operation mode It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to determine a candidate for a content relating to a transition to an advantageous state according to the content as a content relating to a transition to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F5) is
It has a normal section and an advantageous section,
In the game of the normal section, it is impossible to execute the instructional game in which the operation mode can be instructed.
In the game of the advantageous section, it is possible to execute an instruction game in which the operation mode can be instructed.
It is configured to be able to store predetermined information about the game at a specific timing after the transition to the advantageous section is decided.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the content relating to an advantageous state including an instruction game can be determined based on the stored predetermined information regarding the game at a predetermined timing after storing the predetermined information. Is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F6) is
A plurality of gaming states including at least a first special gaming state, a special gaming state having a second special gaming state, and a normal gaming state, and
It is provided with a lottery means for performing a role lottery including a first special role capable of shifting to the first special gaming state and a second special role capable of shifting to the second special gaming state.
In the normal gaming state, an X-card bet game and a Y-card bet game are possible, where X and Y are integers and X is greater than Y.
The first special role is configured so that it can be won when betting X cards in the normal gaming state.
The second special role is configured so that it can be won when betting Y cards in the normal gaming state.
Let A be the payout rate when playing a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with a Y-card bet under the situation where the first special role is won.
Let B be the payout rate when playing a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with X bets under the situation where the second special role is won.
When the payout rate is C when a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with a Y-card bet under the situation where the second special role is won is set.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that A <B and A <C are established.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F7) is
A plurality of gaming states including at least a first special gaming state, a special gaming state having a second special gaming state, and a normal gaming state, and
It is provided with a lottery means for performing a role lottery including a first special role capable of shifting to the first special gaming state and a second special role capable of shifting to the second special gaming state.
In the normal gaming state, an X-card bet game and a Y-card bet game are possible, where X and Y are integers and X is greater than Y.
The first special role is configured so that it can be won when betting X cards in the normal gaming state.
The second special role is configured so that it can be won when betting Y cards in the normal gaming state.
Let A be the payout rate when playing a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with a Y-card bet under the situation where the first special role is won.
Let B be the payout rate when playing a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with X bets under the situation where the second special role is won.
When the payout rate is C when a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with a Y-card bet under the situation where the second special role is won is set.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that A <B, A <C, and B <C are established.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F8) is
A plurality of gaming states including at least a first special gaming state, a special gaming state having a second special gaming state, and a normal gaming state, and
It is provided with a lottery means for performing a role lottery including a first special role capable of shifting to the first special gaming state and a second special role capable of shifting to the second special gaming state.
In the normal gaming state, an X-card bet game and a Y-card bet game are possible, where X and Y are integers and X is greater than Y.
The first special role is configured so that it can be won when betting X cards in the normal gaming state.
The second special role is configured so that it can be won when betting Y cards in the normal gaming state.
Let A be the payout rate when playing a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with a Y-card bet under the situation where the first special role is won.
Let B be the payout rate when playing a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with X bets under the situation where the second special role is won.
When the payout rate is C when a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with a Y-card bet under the situation where the second special role is won is set.
It is configured so that A <B, A <C, B <C are established.
From the ratio that can display the second symbol combination corresponding to the second special role when playing a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with a Y-card bet under the situation where the second special role is won. Also, it is possible to display the first symbol combination corresponding to the first special role when the game of operating the stop switch by an arbitrary operation procedure is performed by betting X cards under the situation where the first special role is won. It is a gaming machine characterized by a higher ratio.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F9) is
A plurality of gaming states including at least a first special gaming state, a special gaming state having a second special gaming state, and a normal gaming state, and
It is provided with a lottery means for performing a role lottery including a first special role capable of shifting to the first special gaming state and a second special role capable of shifting to the second special gaming state.
In the normal gaming state, an X-card bet game and a Y-card bet game are possible, where X and Y are integers and X is greater than Y.
The first special role is configured so that it can be won when betting X cards in the normal gaming state.
The second special role is configured so that it can be won when betting Y cards in the normal gaming state.
Let α be the payout rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times after starting the game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure by betting Y cards from the normal game state.
When the payout rate is β when the game is played a predetermined number of times after starting the game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with a Y-card bet under the situation where the first special role is won.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that α> β is established.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F10) is
A plurality of gaming states including at least a first special gaming state, a special gaming state having a second special gaming state, and a normal gaming state, and
It is provided with a lottery means for performing a role lottery including a first special role capable of shifting to the first special gaming state and a second special role capable of shifting to the second special gaming state.
In the normal gaming state, an X-card bet game and a Y-card bet game are possible, where X and Y are integers and X is greater than Y.
The first special role is configured so that it can be won when betting X cards in the normal gaming state.
The second special role is configured so that it can be won when betting Y cards in the normal gaming state.
When a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with a Y-card bet under the situation where the first special role is won, the distribution of the payout rate when this game is performed a predetermined number of times Is a payout rate when a game in which the stop switch is operated by an arbitrary operation procedure with an X-card bet under the situation where the second special role is won, and this game is performed a predetermined number of times. It is a gaming machine characterized by being smaller than the dispersion of.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G1) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
A notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch,
With
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The notification means is configured to be able to notify an operation mode in which the first symbol combination can be stopped and an operation mode in which the second symbol combination can be stopped in the game in which the specific combination is determined. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G2) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the second symbol combination can be stopped.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the second symbol combination may not be stopped even when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the predetermined operation mode. Is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G3) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the second symbol combination can be stopped.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the second symbol combination may not be stopped even when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the predetermined operation mode. Is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G4) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
A notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch,
With an advantageous section,
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that, under a predetermined situation in an advantageous section, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch is not executed even for a game in which a specific combination is determined.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G5) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
Equipped with a production display device
The game section has an advantageous section for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch and a normal section for not notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the advantageous section, it has a notification state capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The reel control means is configured so that the second symbol combination can be stopped when a plurality of reels are stopped in a predetermined operation mode.
It is possible to display the operation mode of the stop switch on the effect display device.
In a situation where the section is advantageous and not in the notification state, the privilege related to the notification state can be given when the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G6) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
Benefit granting means to grant benefits and
A notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch,
With
The game section has an advantageous section that may notify the operation mode of the stop switch and a normal section that does not notify the notification mode of the stop switch.
In the advantageous section, it has a notification state capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a situation where the section is advantageous and not in the notification state, the first value is given when the first symbol combination is stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in an advantageous section and not in a notification state, a second value larger than the first value is given when the second group symbol matching is stopped. Has been
The privilege giving means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to give a privilege related to a notification state on condition that the given value reaches a predetermined value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G7) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The reel control means can stop the first symbol combination based on the acceptance of the stop operation by the player's first operation mode for the plurality of stop switches in the game in which the specific combination is determined. It is composed and
The reel control means can stop the second symbol combination based on the acceptance of the stop operation by the player's second operation mode for the plurality of stop switches in the game in which the specific combination is determined. It is composed and
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a situation where it is a predetermined set value and is not in a notification state, the game is played by a game method in which a stop operation is performed according to the first operation mode, and in other games, a game is played by a predetermined game method. The payout rate when a predetermined number of games are played by the game method 1 is the predetermined set value, and in a game in which a specific combination is determined in a situation where the notification state is not present, the stop operation according to the second operation mode is used. A gaming machine characterized in that the payout rate is smaller than the ball output rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times in the second gaming method in which the game is played by the gaming method and the other games are played by the predetermined gaming method. Is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G8) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has multiple set values that affect the rate of return given to the player.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The reel control means can stop the first symbol combination based on the acceptance of the stop operation by the player's first operation mode for the plurality of stop switches in the game in which the specific combination is determined. It is composed and
The reel control means can stop the second symbol combination based on the acceptance of the stop operation by the player's second operation mode for the plurality of stop switches in the game in which the specific combination is determined. It is composed and
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a situation where it is the first set value among a plurality of set values and is not in the notification state, the game is performed by a game method in which a stop operation is performed according to the first operation mode, and in other games, a predetermined value is specified. The first game is performed under the situation where the ball output rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times in the first game method and the second set value among the plurality of set values and is not in the notification state. The difference from the ball output rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times by the game method is
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a situation where it is the first set value among a plurality of set values and is not in the notification state, the game is played by a game method in which a stop operation is performed according to the second operation mode, and in other games, the predetermined combination is performed. Playing a game by the game method The second set value when the game is played a predetermined number of times by the second game method, and the second set value among a plurality of set values and not in the notification state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is smaller than the difference from the payout rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times by the gaming method.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G9) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, it is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a lottery related to a notification state and a production command related to the lottery result after the symbol determination process and before the payout process. ..

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G10) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The game section has an advantageous section that may notify the operation mode of the stop switch and a normal section that does not notify the notification mode of the stop switch.
In the advantageous section, it has a notification state capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has multiple set values that affect the rate of return given to the player.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in an advantageous section and not in a notification state, the notification mode is more related to the case where the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped. It is structured so that benefits can be granted,
The winning probability of a specific combination is a gaming machine characterized in that the second set value is higher than the first set value among a plurality of set values.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G11) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
With
The internal lottery means can specify that either the first symbol combination, the second symbol combination with payout of more game media than the first symbol combination, or the third symbol combination without payout of the game medium can be stopped. It is structured so that the role can be decided,
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to give an advantageous privilege to the player based on the fact that the third symbol combination is stopped.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G12) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
With
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a first specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a second specific combination in which either the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the third symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which the first specific combination is determined, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given when the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped. Is composed of
In the game in which the second specific combination is determined, the second privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given when the third symbol combination is stopped than when the fourth symbol combination is stopped. Is composed of
It is configured so that the determination probability of the second specific combination is higher than the determination probability of the first specific combination.
The second benefit is more advantageous than the first benefit,
It is configured so that the expected value of acquisition of the game medium in the game in which the second specific role is determined is larger than the expected value of acquisition of the game medium in the game in which the first specific role is determined. It is a characteristic gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G13) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
With
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a first specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a second specific combination in which either the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the third symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which the first specific combination is determined, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given when the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped. Is composed of
In the game in which the second specific combination is determined, the second privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given when the third symbol combination is stopped than when the fourth symbol combination is stopped. Is composed of
It is configured so that the determination probability of the second specific combination is higher than the determination probability of the first specific combination.
The second benefit is more advantageous than the first benefit,
The expected value of the game medium in the game in which the first specific role is determined is larger than the expected value of the game medium in the game in which the second specific role is determined.
In a game in which the first specific combination is determined under a specific situation, the second symbol combination is configured to be able to notify the operation mode of the stop switch capable of stopping.
In a game in which a second specific combination is determined under a specific situation, the gaming machine is characterized in that the third symbol combination is configured to be able to notify the operation mode of a stop switch capable of stopping. ..

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G14) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
The main control board that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub-control board that controls the production
The internal lottery means is configured so that the first specific combination and the second specific combination can be determined.
The first specific combination has a plurality of symbol combinations in which the expectation of paying out the game medium and the expectation of granting the privilege are different from each other according to the operation mode of the stop switch.
The second specific combination has a plurality of symbol combinations in which the expectation of paying out the game medium and the expectation of granting the privilege are different from each other according to the operation mode of the stop switch.
The main control board is configured so that the effect group information can be transmitted to the sub control board.
The production group information corresponding to the first specific combination has a predetermined value, and the production group information corresponding to the second specific combination has the predetermined value.
In the game in which the result corresponding to the predetermined value is determined as the effect group information by the internal lottery means, there are a case where the game is played in a predetermined operation mode for the stop switch and a case where the game is played in a specific operation mode for the stop switch. , A gaming machine characterized in that the advantages of the players are the same.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G15) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The game section has an advantageous section for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch and a normal section for not notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the advantageous section, it has a notification state capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In the game in which the specific combination is determined in the advantageous section and not in the notification state, the operation mode of the stop switch capable of stopping the first symbol combination and the operation mode of the stop switch capable of stopping the second symbol combination. Is configured to be able to notify
In the game in which the specific combination is determined in the advantageous section and the notification state, the game is characterized in that the operation mode of the stop switch capable of stopping the second symbol combination can be notified. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H1) is
The first value that can be added and the second value that can be subtracted,
The first value is provided with a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on reaching the second value.
It is configured to add the first value and subtract the second value by satisfying a predetermined condition.
If the privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means even if the first value reaches the second value, the first value is set to a value less than the second value.
Even if the first value reaches the second value, if the privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means, the second value is carried over as it is.
A game characterized in that the addition of the first value is executed after the first value is set to a value less than the second value and in a situation where the second value is carried over. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H2) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The game state has a first game state and a second game state.
The internal lottery means is configured so that a predetermined combination and a specific combination can be determined.
The predetermined combination has a predetermined symbol combination accompanied by paying out a predetermined number of game media according to a predetermined operation mode for the stop switch.
The specific combination has a specific symbol combination that involves paying out less than a predetermined number of game media according to a specific operation mode for the stop switch.
In the first state, the notification means is configured to be able to notify a predetermined operation mode and a specific operation mode.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the second state, one of a predetermined operation mode and a specific operation mode can be notified, but the other is not notified.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H3) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Internal lottery means and
It is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured so that a predetermined combination and a specific combination can be determined.
The predetermined combination has a predetermined symbol combination that can win a prize according to a predetermined operation mode for the stop switch.
The specific combination has a specific symbol combination that can win a prize according to the predetermined operation mode for the stop switch.
A gaming machine characterized in that the notification mode of the predetermined operation mode by the notification means is configured to be different from each other under the situation where the predetermined combination is won and the situation where the specific combination is won. Is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H4) is
Production control means and
Equipped with directing display means
The gaming state has a predetermined advantageous state, a specific advantageous state, and an additional state in which a predetermined additional value is added to a predetermined continuation value relating to the continuation of the predetermined advantageous state.
The effect control means can display the additional value on the effect display means in the additional state.
The effect control means is configured not to display the additional value when the total value of the predetermined continuation value and the total number of the predetermined additional values is equal to or more than the predetermined value in the additional state.
It is configured to shift to a predetermined advantageous state after the additional state is completed in a situation where the additional value can be displayed.
It is configured to shift to a specific advantageous state after the additional state ends in a situation where the additional value is not displayed.

It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H5) is
As a gaming state, there are an advantageous state and an additional state in which a continuation value relating to the continuation of the advantageous state is added.
The expected increase value of the game medium per unit game in the additional state is configured to be smaller than the expected increase value of the game medium per unit game in the advantageous state.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the additional value in the additional state is configured to be larger than the additional value in the case where the additional state is performed with the expected increase value in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H6) is
Production control means and
Equipped with a production display device
The effect control means can display at least the effect display on the effect display device.
It has at least a predetermined area as a display area in the effect display device.
In the situation where the predetermined information is displayed in the predetermined area, the specific information can be displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
When the specific information is displayed in the situation where the predetermined information is displayed in the predetermined area, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined information in the predetermined area is not blocked by the display of the specific information.

P-turning machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input reception sensor D20s 1st input sensor, D30s 2nd input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Medium stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch (Open / close detection device)
D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit number display device, D210 input number indicator D220 Bet button, D230 medal tray D240 outlet, D250 special game status display device D260 keyhole, D270 payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member (predetermined communication passage)
D341 Medal reception D342 Medal drop surface D343 Medal non-drop surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting / reset button C Main control chip, M50 reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Game Interval minimum counter S sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 rotation body backlight S40 effect display device, SC sub-control chip E power board, E10 power switch H medal payout device (game medium payout device), H10s first payout Sensor H20s 2nd payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disc, H50a disc rotation shaft H60 game medal outlet, H70 discharge urging means H80 hopper motor S50 bet button lamp, S60 stop button lamp K cylinder board, K10 rotation cylinder motor K20 rotation cylinder sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button KHc high securing obstacle counter, YKc-1 Advantageous section remaining number of games counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU reel unit, BU pedestal part, H62 discharge guide part, H64 inclined surface HS medal auxiliary tank, BS sensor , DE full detection electrode M55 1st end, M57 2nd end, M58 overlapping part, M59 cut MW reel frame, MO reel band M main control board MN11ta-A 1st main game win / loss lottery table, MN11ta- B 2nd main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-H Auxiliary game winning / failing lottery table, MN41ta-A 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol Determining lottery table MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP11t-C 1st and 1st 2 Main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP22t-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening timer MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34t Special game timer MP52c Time reduction counter, MT10 command Transmission buffer A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st Main game symbol hold display Part B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd Main game symbol display unit B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display unit C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripherals, C10 1st big prize opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening electric combination Object C20 2nd prize opening, C21s 2nd prize opening prize detection device C21d 2nd prize opening Electric accessory, D30 Game area D44 Launch handle D32 Outer rail, D34 Inner rail H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start Mouth H11s Auxiliary game start mouth Ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SG effect display device SG10 display area, SG11 decorative symbol display area SG12 1st hold display section, SG13 2nd hold display section KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device, KE10 payout unit D16 transparent plate, KR prize ball rail KT Prize ball tank, KH prize ball payout control board Ea power switch, D42 launcher E power supply unit, D40 launch control board DL10 left-handed area, DR10 right-handed area ML10 left-handed route (first flow route), MR10 right-handed route (2nd flow route)
D50 Right-handed route outlet NKc Number of balls entered counter P10 Left general winning opening, P20 Right general winning opening HSc Left-handed instruction counter, MSc Right-handed instruction counter MP51c Probability variation counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small hit game timer, MP41t -2 Discharge standby counter C22 Specific area (V winning port), C20-1 Box-shaped member C23 2nd large winning port Discharge port, C23s 2nd large winning port Discharge detection device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C22s V winning Mouth ball detection device SM26c Look-ahead effect execution counter SM24t Power-on timer SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Number of consecutive villas counter SB sub-input button, SBs sub-input button input detection device KH prize ball payout control board, KE prize ball payout device 3100 Transmission / reception control means 3110 Reception control means 3111 Main side reception information temporary storage means 3112 ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means, 3210 Transmission control means 3300 Payout control means, 3310 Payout processing related information Temporary storage means 3311a First main game start port Winning counter, 3311b 2nd main game start opening winning counter 3311c 1st big winning opening winning counter, 3311d 2nd big winning opening winning counter 3311e General winning opening winning counter, 3312 Number of balls held counter 3313 Enclosed game ball number counter, 3400 firing Control means 3410 Launch control related information Temporary storage means, 3500 Initial processing control means at the time of power failure / recovery from power failure 3510 Information temporary storage means at power failure 40 Launch control device, 42 Launch device KS prize ball permission sensors, EU ECO unit 50 Operation unit device, 2121 Normal winning detection device 2122 Normal electric accessory, 2221 Distribution winning detection device 2222 Distribution electric accessory, 2224a Shielding member 2224-1 Specific area entry detection device, 2224-2 Discharge ball detection device M40 Main board case, M80 gate CPUMC microprocessor, SH performance display device SH10 identification segment, SH20 ratio segment M90 setting display LED
KY housing, UB back box (base), UB17 first opening, UB18 second opening DJ10 lock, DJ14 first moving member (moving member)
DJ30 lock, DS92 medal shooter (specific communication passage)
DU10a left horizontal plate member (second piece), DU10b right horizontal plate member (second piece)
DU10c upper vertical plate member (second piece), DU10d lower vertical plate member (second piece)
DU11a left horizontal plate member (second piece), DU11b right horizontal plate member (second piece)
DU11c upper vertical plate member (second piece), DU11d lower vertical plate member (second piece)
UB15a left vertical plate member (first piece), UB15b right vertical plate member (first piece)
UB15c upper horizontal plate member (first piece), UB15d lower horizontal plate member (first piece)
SR1 1st predetermined area, SR2 2nd predetermined area, SR3 3rd predetermined area CT character display (effect display), SF dialogue display (effect display)

Claims (1)

With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
With the start switch
A production display unit that can display the production,
With
In the production display section
Game progress display that displays the progress of the game, and
Continuous production, which is a production that is executed over multiple games,
It is possible to display an image that is displayed during the execution of the continuous effect and a continuous image that suggests that the continuous effect can be executed in the next game.
When the game progress display and the continuation image are displayed at the same timing on the effect display unit, the game progress display is displayed with priority over the continuation image.

Images